The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink About20240806IPC to Staff 31b - Exhibit_B-Oxbow_Fish_Hatchery_Renovation-Technical_Specifications-Dec_23_2020.pdf TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF THE IDPM WROPOMR0 An IDACORP Company OXBOW FISH HATCHERY RENOVATION BID DOCUMENTS NOT FOR CONSTRUCTION DECEMBER 23, 2020 Schnabet E N G I N E E R I N G PROFESS G I NEF� 95 5P Schnabel Engineering OREGON 250 S 5t1i Street, Suite 510 Z?o Boise, ID 83702 ��ygIV J GP��o Phone: (208) 3319736 EXPIRES: 12/31/2021 OXBOW FISH HATCHERY RENOVATION TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 01 — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01010 Summary of Work 01301 Schedule of Values 01324 Construction Schedule 01340 Submittal Procedures 01345 Mock-Ups and Shop Inspections 01355 Stormwater Management and Pollution Prevention 01400 Quality Control 01500 Temporary Facilities 01660 Equipment Testing and Facility Startup DIVISION 02 — SITE WORK 02050 Demolition 02200 Earthwork 02221 Trenching, Backfilling, and Compaction 02444 Chain Link Fence and Gates 02455 Driven Piles 02512 Foundation Underdrain System 02513 Asphaltic Concrete Paving 02800 Landscaping 02810 Irrigation System 02920 Topsoil and Finish Grading 02932 Native Grass Seeding DIVISION 03 — CONCRETE 03310 Cast-In-Place Concrete DIVISION 04 — MASONRY 04050 Cold and Hot Weather Masonry Construction 04220 Concrete Masonry Unit 04232 Reinforced Concrete Block Masonry Technical Specifications Page 1 of 5 Table of Contents 04730 Manufactured Stone Masonry DIVISION 05 — METALS 05120 Structural Steel 05300 Metal Decking 05500 Miscellaneous Metalwork 05525 Steel Railings DIVISION 06 —WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100 Rough Carpentry 06172 Wood Trusses 06413 Wood-Veneer-Faced Architectural Cabinets DIVISION 07 —THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07190 Under Slab Vapor Retarder 07210 Thermal Insulation 07411 Metal Roof Panels 07412 Metal Wall Panels 07601 Gutters, Scuppers and Downspouts 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07900 Sealants and Caulking 07920 Joint Sealants DIVISION 08 — DOORS AND WINDOWS 08100 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08211 Flush Wood Doors 08362 Coiling Doors (CD) 08411 Aluminum-Framed Entrances 08523 Aluminum Windows 08710 Finish Hardware 08800 Glazing DIVISION 09 — FINISHES 09250 Gypsum Wallboard 09800 Painting 09910 Protective Coatings DIVISION 10 — SPECIALTIES Technical Specifications Page 2 of 5 Table of Contents 10200 Architectural Louvers 10260 Wall Protection Specialties 10400 Identification, Stenciling and Tagging Systems 10444 Signs 10802 Toilet and Bath Accessories DIVISION 11 — EQUIPMENT 11060 Pumping Equipment General 11072 Pumping Equipment: Vertical Turbine (Line Shaft and Submersible) 11076 Sanitary Sewer Lift Station 11230 Bulk Aerators 11425 Mechanical Fish Handling Equipment 11701 Ceiling-Mounted Fans 11800 Monorail System DIVISION 12 — FURNISHINGS 12340 Residential Casework 12512 Horizontal Louver Blinds DIVISION 13 — SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13065 Prefabricated Walk-In Freezer 13121 Metal Building Systems 13400 Control Narrative 13440 Process Control System — General 13441 Flow Measurement 13442 Level Measurement 13443 Pressure, Strain and Force Measurements 13444 Temperature Measurement 13447 Panel Mounted Instruments 13448 Process Control Panels and Hardware 13450 Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) Control System 13451 Process Control System —Testing 13452 Configuration Requirements: Human Machine Interface (HMI) and Reports DIVISION 14 — CONVEYING SYSTEMS (NOT USED) DIVISION 15 — GENERAL MECHANICAL 15010 Basic Mechanical Requirements 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods 15055 Common Motor Requirements for Equipment Technical Specifications Page 3 of 5 Table of Contents 15059 General Piping Provisions 15060 Hangers and Supports 15063 Pipe and Fitting Materials 15074 Vibration and Seismic Controls for Piping and Equipment 15075 Mechanical Identification 15080 Mechanical Insulation 15082 HVAC Equipment Insulation 15083 Duct Insulation 15091 Pipe Supports - General 15110 Valves for Plumbing Piping 15114 Valves and Appurtenances 15115 Valves for HVAC Piping 15122 Meters and Gages 15140 Domestic Water Piping 15145 Domestic Water Piping Specialties 15150 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping 15155 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties 15181 Hydronic Piping 15182 Hydronic Piping Specialties 15183 Refrigerant Piping 15185 Inline, Domestic-Water Pumps 15186 Hydronic Pumps 15189 Water Treatment For Closed-Loop Hydronic Systems 15252 Fabricated Slide Gates 15410 Plumbing Fixtures 15487 Heat Exchangers for HVAC 15626 Water-Cooler, Rotary-Screw Water Chiller 15672 Air-Cooled Refrigerant Condensers 15736 Packaged Air-Conditioning Units (Heat Pump, Ground Mounted) 15738 Split-System Air-Conditioners 15767 Propeller Unit Heaters 15815 Metal Ducts 15820 Air Duct Accessories 15838 HVAC Power Ventilators 15855 Diffusers, Registers & Grilles 15861 Particulate Air Filtration 15950 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC DIVISION 16— ELECTRICAL 16010 Electrical Basic Requirements 16050 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 16110 Raceways and Boxes 16120 Conductors and Communications Cabling Technical Specifications Page 4 of 5 Table of Contents 16140 Wiring Devices 16231 Diesel-Engine-Driven Generator Sets 16265 Low-Voltage Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) 16291 Surge Protective Devices (SPD) 16352 Active Harmonic Filters 16405 Electric Motors 16411 Transfer Switches 16441 Low-Voltage Panelboards 16450 Grounding 16460 Low-Voltage Transformers 16500 Interior and Exterior Lighting 16940 Electrical Systems Analysis 16950 Electrical Testing Technical Specifications Page 5 of 5 Table of Contents SECTION 01110 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The Work to be performed under this Contract shall consist of furnishing all tools, equipment, materials, supplies, and manufactured articles and furnishing all labor, transportation, and services, including fuel, power, water, and essential communications, and performing all work, or other operations required for the fulfillment of the Contract in strict accordance with the Contract Documents. The Work shall be complete, and all work, materials, and services not expressly indicated or called for in the Contract Documents which may be necessary for the complete and proper construction of the Work in good faith shall be provided by the Contractor as though originally so indicated, at no increase in cost to the Owner. 1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Work of this Contract comprises renovation of the Oxbow Fish Hatchery. B. The Work of this contract includes, but is not limited to, construction of the following items: 1. Site Improvements (Area 10) 2. River Intake (Area 20) 3. Aeration Tower (Area 30) 4. Adult Holding Facility (Area 40) 5. Sorting and Spawning Facility (Area 50) 6. Hatchery Building (Area 60) 7. Shop and Storage Building (Area 70) C. The Contractor shall provide all civil, landscaping, architectural, structural, mechanical, electrical, and instrumentation and control Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. D. Contractor shall be responsible for negotiations of any waivers or alternate arrangements required for transportation of materials to the site. E. Maintain conditions of access road to site such that access is not hindered as the result of construction related deterioration. F. Secure and pay for all permits necessary for construction, government fees, clearances and licenses, including but not limited to: 1. Baker County Building Permit 2. Department of Environmental Quality Permits: a. Construction Dewatering Permit b. Construction Stormwater General Permit and Stormwater Management Plan Technical Specifications 01010-1 Summary of Work c. Construction Air Activity Permit and Air Emission Notice d. Submit drawings for modifying public drinking water systems, if necessary 1.3 PROJECT LOCATION A. The Work is located in Baker County, Oregon. B. The site elevation is nominally 1,710.0 (NAVD 1988). C. Design heating and cooling dry bulb temperatures are 9 and 98 degrees Fahrenheit, respectively. The dehumidification humidity ratio is 70 grains moisture per lb of dry air. D. Extreme design temperatures are -30 to +115 degrees Fahrenheit. 1.4 CONTRACT METHOD A. The Work, hereunder will be constructed under a single lump sum contract. 1.5 WORK BY OTHERS A. Interference with Work on Utilities: 1. The Contractor shall cooperate fully with all utility forces of the Owner or forces of other public or private agencies engaged in the relocation, altering, or otherwise rearranging of any facilities which interfere with the progress of the Work, and shall schedule the Work so as to minimize interference with said relocation, altering, or other rearranging of facilities. 1.6 CONTRACTOR USE OF PROJECT SITE A. The Contractor's use of the project site shall be limited to its construction operations, including on-site storage of materials, on-site fabrication facilities, and field offices. The Contractor is instructed to remain within the limits of construction indicated on the drawings. 1.7 PROJECT MEETINGS A. Preconstruction Conference: 1. Prior to the commencement of Work at the site, a preconstruction conference will be held at a mutually agreed time and place which shall be attended by the Contractor's Project Manager, its superintendent, and its Subcontractors as the Contractor deems appropriate. Other attendees will be: a. Engineer and the Resident Project Representative. b. Representatives of the Owner. c. Others as requested by Contractor, Owner, or Engineer. 2. The purpose of the conference is to designate responsible personnel and establish a working relationship. Matters requiring coordination will be discussed and procedures for handling such matters established. The complete agenda will be furnished to the Contractor prior to the meeting date. However, the Contractor should be prepared to discuss all of the items listed below. a. Status of Contractor's insurance and bonds. b. Contractor's tentative schedules. c. Transmittal, review, and distribution of Contractor's submittals. Technical Specifications 01010-2 Summary of Work d. Processing applications for payment. e. Maintaining record documents. f. Critical work sequencing. g. Field decisions and Change Orders. h. Use of project site, office and storage areas, security, housekeeping, and Owner's needs. i. Major equipment deliveries and priorities. j. Contractor's assignments for safety and first aid. 3. The Owner will preside at the preconstruction conference and will arrange for keeping and distributing the minutes to all persons in attendance. 4. The Contractor and its Subcontractors should plan on the conference taking no less than 1 full working day. B. Progress Meetings: 1. The Contractor shall schedule and hold regular on-site progress meetings at least weekly and at other times as requested by the Owner or as required by progress of the Work. The Owner, Contractor, Engineer, and all Subcontractors active on the site must attend each meeting either in person or by teleconference. Contractor may at its discretion request attendance by representatives of its suppliers, manufacturers, and other subcontractors. 2. The Contractor shall preside at the meetings and will arrange for keeping and distributing the minutes. The purpose of the meetings will be to review the progress of the Work, maintain coordination of efforts, discuss changes in scheduling, and resolve other problems which may develop. During each meeting, the Contractor is required to present any issues which may impact his work, with a view to resolve these issues expeditiously. Agenda items shall include but not be limited to the following items: a. Schedule: 1) Work completed last period. 2) Plan for next two weeks. 3) Comparison of progress to "Contract Schedule". 4) Critical Items. 5) Major equipment deliveries. b. In the event any work is behind schedule, plan for regaining schedule. c. Change orders. d. Progress of outstanding or upcoming submittals. e. Safety. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Applicable Technical Specifications 01010-3 Summary of Work PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Applicable END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 01010-4 Summary of Work SECTION 01301 SCHEDULE OF VALUES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. This section defines the process whereby the Schedule of Values (lump sum price breakdown) shall be developed and incorporated into the cost loading function of Section 01324 — Construction Schedule. Monthly progress payment amounts shall be determined from the monthly progress updates of the Schedule activities. B. The Schedule of Values shall be developed independent but simultaneous with the development of the Schedule activities and logic. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall prepare and submit a Schedule of Values to the Owner at the Preconstruction Conference. The Schedule of Values shall be based on the approved Bid Schedule Breakdown submitted within 48 hours of the Contractor's accepted bid. Develop a detailed Schedule of Values to determine appropriate monthly progress payment amounts and cost loading of the Schedule activities. Sufficient detailed breakdown shall be provided to meet this requirement. The Owner shall be the sole judge of acceptable numbers, details and description of values established. If, in the opinion of the Owner, a greater number of Schedule of Values items than proposed by the Contractor is necessary, the Contractor shall add the additional items so identified by the Owner. 1. The minimum detail for breakdown of the major Work components is indicated below. Greater detail shall be provided as directed by the Owner. a. Mobilization: Total value of Mobilization. b. Site Work shall be broken down into the following categories, at a minimum: demolition, clearing, grading, each building/structure, paving, base course, sidewalks, curb and gutter, drainage, fencing and gates, individual pipelines and valves, landscaping, irrigation system, intake construction, and all other items not listed here. c. Buildings shall be broken down into the following categories, at a minimum: excavation, subgrade preparation, fill, foundation, exterior walls, slabs and trenches, underdrains, masonry, roofs, internal walls of each type, moisture protection, painting and protective coatings, doors/windows/louvers, cabinetry, metals, HVAC, individual pipelines and valves, plumbing and fixtures, pumps and equipment, electrical, backup generator, lighting, instruments and controls, communications, and all other items not listed here. d. Hydrostatic testing and disinfection shall be broken down by hydraulic structure and pipeline. e. Equipment tests and hatchery startup shall be broken down for completion of each milestone, and for each system. Technical Specifications 01301-1 Schedule of Values f. All other Work not specifically included in the above items shall be broken down as necessary for establishment of pay and Schedule activity items. 2. The Contractor and Owner shall meet and jointly review the detailed Schedule of Values within 14 days from the date the Owner receives the detailed Schedule of Values. The value allocations and extent of detail shall be reviewed to determine any necessary adjustments to the values and to determine if sufficient detail has been proposed to allow acceptable cost loading of the Schedule activities. Any adjustments deemed necessary to the value allocation or level of detail shall be made by the Contractor and a revised detailed Schedule of Values shall be submitted within 7 days from the date of above stated meeting. 1.3 CHANGES TO SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Changes to the Schedule of Values shall be made to reflect change orders. B. In the event that the Contractor and Owner agree to make adjustments to the original Schedule of Values because of inequities discovered in the original accepted detailed Schedule of Values, increases and equal decreases to values for activities may be made. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Applicable PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Applicable END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 01301-2 Schedule of Values SECTION 01324 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Preparation, submittal, and maintenance of computerized progress schedule and reports, contract time adjustments, and payment requests, including the following: 1. Preliminary Schedule. 2. Baseline Schedule. 3. Weekly Schedule. 4. Schedule Updates. 5. Schedule Revisions. 6. Startup & Commissioning Schedule 7. Final Schedule Submittal. B. Related sections: 1. The following Sections are related to the Work described in this Section. This list of Related Sections is provided for convenience only and is not intended to excuse or otherwise diminish the duty of the Contractor to see that the completed Work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. a. Section 01301 - Schedule of Values. 1.2 RESPONSIBLE PERSON A. Designate, in writing and within 5 calendar days after Notice of Award, a person responsible for preparation, maintenance, updating and revision of all schedules. B. Qualifications of responsible person: 1. Authority to act on behalf of Contractor. 2. 5 years verifiable experience in preparation of complex construction schedules for projects of similar value, size, and complexity. 3. Knowledge of critical path method (CPM) scheduling utilizing Primavera or Microsoft Project software. 1.3 SCHEDULING FORMAT AND SOFTWARE A. Schedule format: CPM. B. Software: Microsoft Project or Primavera. 1.4 PREPARATION A. Preparation and submittal of Progress Schedule represents Contractor's intention to execute the Work within specified time and constraints. B. Contractor's bid covers all costs associated with the execution of the Work in accordance with the Progress Schedule. Technical Specifications 01324-1 Construction Schedule C. During preparation of the preliminary Progress Schedule, Owner will facilitate Contractor's efforts by being available to answer questions regarding sequencing issues, scheduling constraints, interface points, and dependency relationships. D. Prepare schedule using the critical path method (CPM). E. Prepare schedule using activity durations in terms of working days. Do not exceed 15 working day duration on activities except concrete curing, submittal review, and equipment fabrication and deliveries. Where duration of continuous work exceeds 15 working days, subdivide activities by location, stationing, or other sub-element of the Work. Coordinate holidays to be observed with the Owner and incorporate them into the schedule as non-working days. F. Failure to include an activity required for execution of the Work does not excuse Contractor from completing the Work and portions thereof within specified times and at price specified in Agreement. Contract requirements are not waived by failure of Contractor to include required schedule constraints, sequences, or milestones in schedule. Contract requirements are not waived by Owner's acceptance of the schedule. In the event of conflict between accepted schedule and Contract requirements, terms of Contract govern at all times, unless requirements are waived in writing by the Owner. G. Reference schedule to working days with beginning of Contract Time as Day "1." H. Contract float is for the mutual benefit of both Owner and Contractor. Changes to the project that can be accomplished within this available period of float may be made by Owner without extending the Contract time, by utilizing float. Time extensions will not be granted nor delay damages owed until Work extends beyond currently accepted Contract completion date. Likewise, Contractor may utilize float to offset delays other than delays caused by Owner. Mutual use of float can continue until all available float shown by schedule has been utilized by either Owner or Contractor, or both. At that time, extensions of the Contract time will be granted by Owner for valid Owner-caused or third party-caused delays which affect the planned completion date and which have been properly documented and demonstrated by Contractor. 1.5 SUBMITTAL OF PROGRESS SCHEDULES A. Submit preliminary and baseline schedule. B. Submit, on a monthly basis, updated schedules as specified. Submit final schedule update as specified. C. Submit revised schedules and time impact analyses as specified. D. Submit schedules in electronic format and hard copy at construction progress meetings. 1.6 PRELIMINARY SCHEDULE A. Submit Preliminary Schedule within 10 calendar days after Notice to Proceed. Include a detailed plan of operations for first 60 calendar days of Work after receipt of Notice to Proceed. B. Meet with Owner within 7 calendar days after receipt of Preliminary Schedule to review and make necessary adjustments. Submit revised preliminary schedule within 5 calendar days after meeting. C. Submit schedule of costs for all activities on revised Preliminary Schedule. Technical Specifications 01324-2 Construction Schedule D. Schedule of costs: 1. Schedule of Values required under Section 01301 for first 60 calendar days of Work. 2. Submittal and acceptance of Preliminary Schedule is condition precedent to making of progress payments under Section 01301 and payments for mobilization costs otherwise provided for in the Contract. 3. No pay item Work shall commence until Preliminary Schedule and schedule of costs have been accepted by Owner. E. Incorporated unchanged, the accepted Preliminary Schedule as first 60 calendar days of activity in Contractor's Baseline Schedule. F. Updated monthly during first 60 calendar days after Notice to Proceed. Updated Preliminary Schedule shall be the payment application required under Section 01301. 1.7 BASELINE SCHEDULE A. No more than 15 calendar days after Notice of Award, submit the Baseline Schedule for all Work of the project. Show sequence and interdependence of all activities required for complete performance of all Work, beginning with date of Notice to Proceed and concluding with date of final completion of Contract. 1.8 WEATHER DAYS ALLOWANCE A. Include as a separate identifiable activity on the critical path, an activity labeled "Weather Days Allowance." Insert this activity at the end of the schedule. B. Weather Days are defined as a day when the Contractor is prevented by inclement weather, or conditions resulting there from, from proceeding with at least 75 percent of the normal labor and equipment force for at least 5 hours toward completion of the current critical path item, or items. C. Duration of Weather Days Allowance is 5 days. D. Insert an activity in critical path to reflect weather day occurrences when weather days are experienced and accepted by Owner. Identify this activity as a weather delay. E. Reduce duration of Weather Days Allowance activity as weather delays are experienced and inserted into the schedule. Remaining weather days in Weather Day Allowance at completion of project is considered float. F. When a weather day occurs during the course of the Project, Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing within 2 working days of the onset of such weather. In the notification, Contractor shall describe in reasonable detail the type of weather encountered and the work interfered or interrupted. 1. Only the number of days lost due to abnormal weather as requested by the Contractor and approved by the Owner that exceeds the Weather Days Allowance shall be considered for granting a contract time extension. G. All costs resulting from the time extension including, but not limited to, the protection and maintenance of the job site, maintaining specified insurance and bonding certificates, and traffic control for the period of time extension, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and at no additional cost to Owner, Unit price adjustments or special allowances shall not be paid by Owner for escalated material, labor, equipment, or any other costs associated with the time extension. Technical Specifications 01324-3 Construction Schedule 1.9 UPDATING THE SCHEDULE A. Update the schedule on a monthly basis. B. Monthly Progress Schedules are required for progress payment. The monthly Progress Schedule is a condition precedent to the making of any progress payments. C. Should the monthly Progress Schedule show project completion later than current Contract completion date, prepare and submit a Schedule Revision in accordance with the Section 1.10. 1.10 REVISIONS TO SCHEDULE A. Submit Revised Schedule within 5 calendar days: 1. When delay in completion of any activity or group of activities indicates an overrun of the Contract time or milestone dates by 20 working days or 5 percent of the remaining duration, whichever is less. 2. When delays in submittals, deliveries, or work stoppages are encountered making necessary the re-planning or rescheduling of activities. 3. When the schedule does not represent the actual progress of activities. 4. When any change to the sequence of activities, the completion date for major portions of the work, or when changes occur which affect the critical path. 5. When Contract modification necessitates schedule revision, submit schedule analysis of change order work with cost proposal. 1.11 WEEKLY SCHEDULE A. Submit to Owner, at each weekly progress meeting, a progress schedule showing the activities completed during the previous week and the schedule of activities for the following 2 weeks. B. Use the logic and conform to the status of the current progress schedule when producing a Weekly Schedule in CPM schedule or a bar chart format. In the event that the Weekly Schedule no longer conforms to the current schedule, Contractor may be required to revise the schedule. C. The activity designations used in the Weekly Schedule must be consistent with those used in the Baseline Schedule and the monthly Schedule Updates. D. Contractor and Owner must agree on the format of the Weekly Schedule. 1.12 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Requirements for Schedule of Values are specified in Section 01301. B. Submit, in conjunction with the Progress Schedule, a Schedule of Values identifying costs of all on-site construction activities as generated by the cost loaded schedule. Equate the aggregate of these costs to the Lump Sum Contract Price. 1.13 STARTUP & COMMISSIONING SCHEDULE A. At the Project's 50% completion milestone, update the baseline schedule to demonstrate the final level of detail for each activity and show sequence and interdependence of all activities required for complete performance of all startup and commissioning related Work. This revised baseline startup and commissioning schedule shall be composed of the following: Technical Specifications 01324-4 Construction Schedule B. The startup and commissioning schedule shall define and sequence all installation and functional testing required for each device, component, and piece of equipment included in the subsystem or system. 1. Provide detailed sub-network of startup and commissioning activities, durations, and sequencing requirements with the following activities identified: a. Manufacturer's services. b. Certificates of Proper Installation. c. Operator training. d. Submission of Operation and Maintenance Manual. e. Installation testing. f. Functional testing. g. Pre-Start-Up activities. h. Start-Up testing. i. Performance testing. C. The startup and commissioning schedule shall include shutdown requirements for existing systems which are necessary to complete startup of new equipment and systems. D. Revise and update startup and commissioning schedule based upon review comments, actual progress, or to accommodate changes in the sequence of activities. 1.14 FINAL SCHEDULE A. The final Schedule Update becomes the As-Built Schedule: 1. The As-Built Schedule reflects the exact manner in which the project was constructed by reflecting actual start and completion dates for all activities accomplished on the project. 2. Contractor's Project Manager and scheduler sign and certify the As-Built Schedule as being an accurate record of the way the project was actually constructed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Applicable PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Applicable END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 01324-5 Construction Schedule SECTION 01340 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Requirements and procedures for submittals. 1.2 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS A. Provide submittals that are specified or reasonably required for construction, operation, and maintenance of the Work. B. Provide submittal information from only one manufacturer for a specified product. Submittals with multiple manufacturers for one product will be rejected without review. C. Edit all submittals so that the submittal specifically applies to only the item furnished. Neatly cross out all extraneous text, options, models, etc. that do not apply to the equipment being furnished, so that the only information remaining is applicable to the equipment being furnished. Highlight technical data that is applicable to the item being furnished. D. All submittals shall be electronic and shall use a Contractor furnished, web-based document management system. The online system shall be used for transmitting all project documentation and shall allow for the Owner and Engineer to login, download documentation, and upload reviews. The web-based document management system must include the ability to download all project documents (such as submittals and RFls) at the conclusion of the project, and the Contractor shall furnish an external hard drive will all of the project documents before receiving final payment. 1.3 SUBMITTAL CONTENTS A. Owner will provide the Contractor with an electronic copy of the required submittal and transmittal forms. 1. Required submittal numbering format shall adhere to the following: a. Section number-sequential number-resubmittal letter b. Example: 03200-002-1: 1) "03200" indicates the affected specification is Section 03200. 2) "002" indicates the second submittal under this section 3) "1" indicates the first submittal of the Submittal 03200-002. 1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE A. Contractor: Prepare submittal information in sufficient detail to show compliance with specified requirements. 1. Determine, verify and list quantities, field dimensions, product dimensions, specified design and performance criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data. 2. Coordinate submittal with other submittals and with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Technical Specifications 01340-1 Submittal Procedures 3. Check, verify, and revise submittals as necessary to bring them into conformance with Contract Documents and actual field conditions. B. Engineer: Review submittal and provide response. 1. Review description: a. Engineer will be entitled to rely upon the accuracy or completeness of designs, calculations, or certifications made by licensed professionals accompanying a particular submittal whether or not a stamp or seal is required by Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations. b. Engineer's review of submittals shall not release Contractor from Contractor's responsibility for performance of requirements of Contract Documents. Neither shall Engineer's review release Contractor from fulfilling purpose of installation nor from Contractor's liability to replace defective work. c. Engineer's review of shop drawings, samples, or test procedures will be only for conformance with design concepts and for compliance with information given in Contract Documents. d. Deficient submittals will be returned along with the transmittal form which will be marked to indicate deficient areas. e. Engineer's review does not extend to: 1) Accuracy of dimensions, quantities, or performance of equipment and systems designed by Contractor. 2) Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures except when specified, indicated on the Drawings, or required by Contract Documents. 3) Safety precautions or programs related to safety which shall remain the sole responsibility of the Contractor. 4) Engineer can accept or reject any exception at their sole discretion. 2. Review timeframe: a. Except as may be provided in technical specifications, a submittal will be returned within 14 calendar days. b. When a submittal cannot be returned within the specified period, Engineer will, within a reasonable time after receipt of the submittal, give notice of the date by which that submittal will be returned. 1.5 OTHER SUBMITTALS A. In addition to required submittals called for in other Sections, Contractor shall prepare and submit the following: 1. Owner's Manuals and Installation Instruction Manuals for all manufactured equipment or manufactured items. Include the following information: a. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performance curves, engineering data and test and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replacement parts. Technical Specifications 01340-2 Submittal Procedures b. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in and routine and normal operating instructions, regulation, control, stopping, shutdown and emergency instructions and summer and winter operating instructions. c. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting, disassembly, repair and reassembly, aligning and adjusting instructions. d. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules. e. Manufacturer's contact information 2. Job Hazard Analysis and Site-Specific Safety Plan 1.6 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. Base all bids on materials, equipment and procedures specified. B. Certain types of equipment and kinds of material are described in specifications by means of references to names of manufacturers and vendors, trade names, or catalog numbers. When this method of specifying is used, it is not intended to exclude from consideration other products bearing other manufacturer's or vendor's names, trade names, or catalog numbers, provided said products are of equal quality and proven capable of accomplishing the same tasks as the products specifically indicated. C. Other types of equipment and types of material may be acceptable at the sole discretion of the Engineer. D. In making request for substitution or in using an approved product, Contractor shall do the following: 1. Investigate the proposed product and determine that it is equal to or superior in all respects to that specified, and that it will perform the function for which it is intended. 2. Contractor will provide same guarantee for substitute item as for product specified. 3. Contractor will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into work, to include building modifications if necessary, making such changes as may be required for work to be complete in all respects. 4. Contractor waives all claims for additional costs related to substitution which subsequently arise. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Applicable PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Applicable END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 01340-3 Submittal Procedures SECTION 01345 MOCK-UPS AND SHOP INSPECTIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This section describes the requirements for construction, testing and modification of mock-ups (or prototypes), and the requirements for shop inspections. B. Build the indicated mock-ups for review and approval before proceeding with any work that may be affected by the construction represented by the mock-up. C. Inspection Requirements: The Contractor shall notify the Engineer a minimum of two weeks in advance of all mock-up and shop inspections. Equipment that requires inspection and testing shall be completely finished and assembled prior to the date of the inspection. If the Engineer arrives at an inspection and the equipment is not completely finished, assembled, and ready for inspection, with all components installed and assembled as they will be in their final operating condition, the Engineer can require a rescheduling of the inspection. If an inspection is rescheduled due to equipment not being completely finished, the Owner may, at their sole discretion, deduct all expenses incurred for the rescheduled inspection from the Contractor's next invoice. 1.2 MOCK-UP REQUIREMENTS A. Mock-ups shall not be provided until corresponding product data, shop drawings, samples and other preparatory submittals are approved. B. Mock-ups shall be delivered to the project site unless specifically stated otherwise. C. When a mock-up is required for a piece of equipment that will have multiple identical copies in the finished construction, a prototype shall be fabricated, delivered to the site, tested, and approved by the Engineer before any work on the remaining units begins. Once onsite testing and inspection are complete, the Contractor shall return the prototype to the place of manufacture for modification, after which it will serve as the standard for constructing the remaining identical units. D. Mock-ups shall be rebuilt as necessary until approved by Owner. E. After approval, mock-ups shall remain intact and serve as the standard for judging the acceptance or rejection of workmanship in corresponding construction. F. After completion and acceptance of the corresponding construction, mock-ups shall be removed when directed by the Owner unless approved mock-ups have been located as part of the permanent construction. G. Any site disturbance resulting from the mock-up construction shall be restored to the condition indicated by the Drawings. H. Mock-up Construction, Testing, and Acceptance Procedures: 1. Fabricate one complete mock-up as required in the contract documents. After fabrication, each mock-up shall be shipped to the site and fully assembled by the Contractor to undergo functional testing. Technical Specifications 01345-1 Mock-Ups and Shop Inspections 2. The mock-up shall be installed with all systems necessary for functional testing, including structural, mechanical, plumbing, electrical, and controls equipment to create a fully functioning system that is representative of the final installation. If necessary, the Contractor shall provide temporary utilities (water, power, or other) so that the functional testing represents the true final operating condition for the mock-up. 1.3 SHOP INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Shop inspections shall be scheduled for each major piece of equipment and as indicated in the contract documents. B. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer a minimum of 2 weeks in advance of each shop inspection. C. Shop inspections for mechanical equipment shall include all temporary utilities necessary for testing and inspecting the item to confirm that it meets the requirements and will perform adequately when in service. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Materials used in the initial mock-up construction shall meet the specifications for the work and be as approved by submittal reviews. B. Materials may be modified only to the extent required for mock-up approval by the Owner. C. Materials used in the construction of approved mock-up construction shall not be used in the corresponding permanent construction. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION A. Provide initial mock-up construction by methods proposed for the corresponding permanent construction. 1. Comply with installation and application requirements for each component as specified in the section applicable for the work. B. Methods of construction may be modified only to the extent required for mock-up approval by the Owner. 1. Modified methods of construction shall comply with the specified requirements as well as approved details of workmanship. C. Methods of construction used for the approved mock-up construction shall be used in the corresponding permanent construction. 3.2 REQUIRED MOCK-UP ASSEMBLIES A. The Contractor shall furnish mock-ups of the following and any other items called for in the contract documents: 1. Provide mock-ups for each internal and external wall type for all buildings. Technical Specifications 01345-2 Mock-Ups and Shop Inspections 2. Raceway Crowder. a. Design and fabricate one complete prototype raceway crowder. After fabrication, the crowder shall be shipped to the site and fully assembled in the raceway by the Contractor for complete functional testing. 3. Cross Channel Crowder. a. Design and fabricate one complete prototype cross channel crowder. After fabrication, the crowder shall be shipped to the site and fully assembled in the cross channel by the Contractor for complete functional testing. 4. Slide Gate. a. Fabricate and deliver one complete prototype to the site for functional testing. 5. Rotating Standpipe. 6. Spray Nozzle. 7. Sample of punch plate for the tail screens, 12-in square. 8. Spawning Tank False Floor. 9. Incubation Stack. a. Complete with all supply and drain piping including the formalin system. 3.3 REQUIRED SHOP INSPECTIONS A. The Contractor shall coordinate shop inspection for the following and any other items called for in the contract documents: 1. Raceway Crowder. 2. Cross Channel Crowder. 3. Slide gate fabrication. 4. Tail screen fabrication. 5. Diffuser fabrication. 6. Fish lift system including brail, false weir, and EA basket fabrications. 7. Aeration tower distribution box and the first weir plate. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 01345-3 Mock-Ups and Shop Inspections SECTION 01355 STORMWATER MANAGEMENT AND POLLUTION PREVENTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Requirements for the preparation and implementation of the Stormwater Management Plan (SWMP). 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Stormwater Construction Permit: 1. The Contractor shall prepare, submit and carryout all requirements to obtain the necessary SWMP permit. B. The SWMP shall meet all requirements of the governing agency and include the following sections: 1. General Project Information 2. Site Description 3. Erosion and Sediment Controls 4. Structural Practices 5. Stormwater Management 6. Waste Disposal 7. Record Keeping 8. Other Controls 9. Inventory of Materials 10. Non-Stormwater Discharges 11. Endangered species C. Prior to commencement of any excavation, the Contractor shall be in possession of a SWMP, and also ensure that an application for a Stormwater Construction Permit has been submitted to the appropriate agency at least 10 days prior to the start of construction activities. D. The SWMP contains Best Management Practices (BMPs) that shall be implemented to comply with the Stormwater Construction Permit. The SWMP will be subject to review by the Owner and the Engineer. The Contractor shall ensure all parties are in agreement with the stormwater management practices. The following shall be specifically addressed in the SWMP: 1. Define type, location and scheduled placement of stabilization practices that will be implemented to prevent soil erosion. 2. Describe stormwater management techniques and schedule of implementation. 3. Define practices to be employed to prevent off-site movement of sediment. Technical Specifications 01355-1 Stormwater Management and Pollution Prevention 4. Characterize construction, sanitary and any hazardous waste disposal practices. 5. Define record keeping practices. E. Upon completion of all excavation, structural, grading and landscaping work, the Contractor shall submit a completed Inactivation Notice to the regulating agency. F. The entire plan shall be kept and maintained by the Contractor on the construction site during the duration of the project. G. The Contractor shall be responsible for taking the proper actions to prevent contaminants and sediments from entering streams, rivers, or other surface water surrounding the project area should any unforeseen circumstance occur. The Contractor shall take immediate action if directed by the Engineer, or if the Contractor observes contaminants and/or sediments leaving the work area. 1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. The SWMP shall be developed in accordance with the EPA guidebook, "Storm Water Management for Construction Activities, Developing Pollution Prevention Plans and Best Management Practices" (EPA publication Number 823-R-92-005, September 1992). B. Fuel and Chemical Handling: 1. Store and dispose of chemical wastes in a manner approved by regulatory agencies. 2. Take special measures to prevent chemicals, fuels, oils, greases, herbicides, and insecticides from entering drainage ways. 3. Do not allow water used in onsite material processing, concrete curing, cleanup, and other waste waters to enter a drainage way(s) or stream. 4. The Contractor shall provide containment around fueling and chemical storage areas to ensure that spills in these areas do not reach waters of the state. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Applicable PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROLS A. BMPs shall be installed prior to general stripping of topsoil and excavating. B. Sediment caused by accelerated soil erosion shall be removed from runoff water before it leaves the construction site. C. All construction shall be stabilized at the end of each working day. D. Stabilization Practices: Temporary stabilization shall be initiated by the Contractor immediately upon commencement of any construction activities that would cause soil erosion. To prevent soil erosion, the Contractor shall employ Best Management Practices (BMPs) in possible combination with one or more of the following stabilization practices: Technical Specifications 01355-2 Stormwater Management and Pollution Prevention 1. Surface Roughening: Slopes shall be left in roughened condition during the grading phase to reduce runoff velocities and erosion. The Contractor shall use heavy equipment to place tread or track grooves perpendicular to slope on all disturbed slopes. 2. Rice/Straw Wattles: Wattles shall be placed in swales, channels and other locations as necessary to create a check dam, slow water velocities and settle out small solid particles. 3. If properly installed and routine maintenance is performed, hay bales will be allowed. 4. The Contractor shall be required to provide erosion control products. 5. All sediment collected by BMPs shall be removed and/or disposed offsite. 3.2 STRUCTURAL PRACTICES A. Structural Practices: Structural practices may include but are not limited to: silt fences and storm drain inlet protection. 1. Structural practices shall be employed at all down slope boundaries of the construction area and for those side slope boundaries above excavation with exposed groundwater. 3.3 RECORD KEEPING A. The Contractor shall maintain the following records on-site at all times throughout construction: 1. Records of Construction Activities: Dates shall be recorded when major grading activities occur, construction activities temporarily cease on a portion of the site, construction activities permanently cease on a portion of the site, and when stabilization measures are initiated and completed on the site. 2. Maintenance and Inspection Reports: The Contractor shall record maintenance performed to repair or correct any implemented stormwater or erosion control BMPs. The Contractor shall have someone on staff who is knowledgeable of the proper construction of the controls, be aware of the requirements of the SWMP, be aware of spill control practices and notification requirements, and maintain clear and accurate inspection reports. The inspection reports will be maintained with the latest version of the SWMP in the Contractor's construction trailer. Also, when an on-site inspection occurs by a regulatory agency, the Contractor shall record the following: Name of inspector, qualifications of inspector, measures/areas inspected, observed conditions, changes necessary to the SWMP. 3. Reportable Quantities of Oil or Hazardous Materials (if they occur): For all instances of non-compliance based on environmental hazards and chemical spills and releases, all needed information must be provided orally to the local regulating agency within twenty-four (24) hours from the time the contractor first becomes aware of the spill or release. The Contractor shall notify the National Response Center (1-800-424-8802) as required, and modify the pollution prevention plan to include: the dates of release, circumstances leading to the release, and steps taken to prevent reoccurrence of the release. Technical Specifications 01355-3 Stormwater Management and Pollution Prevention 4. Modifications to the SWMP: When notified by the regulating agency, the Contractor shall record any modifications made to the SWMP throughout construction to comply with minimum permit requirements. In addition, the Contractor shall also record any change in design, construction operation or maintenance that has an effect on the potential for discharge of pollutants. 3.4 OTHER CONTROLS A. Dust Abatement 1. Dust on the site shall be controlled. The use of motor oils and other petroleum based or toxic liquids for dust suppression operation is prohibited. 2. The Contractor shall prevent its operation from producing dust in amounts damaging to property, cultivated vegetation, or domestic animals, or causing a nuisance to persons living in or occupying buildings in the vicinity. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage resulting from dust originating from its operations. The dust abatement measures shall be continued until the Contractor is relieved of further responsibility by the Engineer. B. Stockpile and Borrow Areas 1. Onsite and offsite solid stockpile and borrow areas shall be protected from erosion and sedimentation through implementation of BMPs. Stockpile and borrow area locations shall be coordinated with the Owner and permitted in accordance with general permit requirements. 2. Manage and control all borrow areas, work or storage areas, access routes and embankments to prevent sediment from entering nearby water or land adjacent to the work site. C. Rubbish Control 1. Rubbish, trash, garbage, litter, or other such materials shall be deposited into sealed containers. Materials shall be prevented from leaving the premises through the action of wind or storm water discharge into drainage ditches or waters. 2. During the progress of the Work, the Contractor shall keep the Site and other areas used by it in a neat and clean condition, and free from any accumulation of rubbish. The Contractor shall dispose of all rubbish and waste materials of any nature occurring at the Site and shall establish regular intervals of collection and disposal of such materials and waste. Disposal of all rubbish and surplus materials shall be off the Site in accordance with local codes and ordinances governing locations and methods of disposal, and in conformance with all applicable safety laws, and to the particular requirements of Part 1926 of the OSHA Safety and Health Standards for Construction. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 01355-4 Stormwater Management and Pollution Prevention SECTION 01400 QUALITY CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Quality control and control of installation. 2. References. 3. Authority and duties of Owner's representative or inspector. 4. Sampling and testing. 5. Testing and inspection services. 6. As-built Drawings. 7. Contractor's responsibilities. 1.2 QUALITY CONTROL AND CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including performing each step in sequence. C. When manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Engineer before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Perform Work by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality. F. Verify field measurements are as indicated on Shop Drawings or as instructed by manufacturer. G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, or disfigurement. H. When specified, products will be tested and inspected either at point of origin or at Work site: 1. Notify Engineer in writing a minimum of 2 weeks in advance of when products will be ready for testing and inspection at point of origin. 2. Satisfactory tests and inspections at point of origin do not serve as final acceptance of products, nor do they preclude retesting or re-inspection of products at Work site. I. Do not ship products which require testing and inspection at point of origin prior to testing and inspection. J. All costs of retesting or reworking required because of non-conformance to the Contract Documents shall be borne by the Contractor. K. Protection, storage and handling of delivered product: Technical Specifications 01400-1 Quality Control 1. Inspect all products or equipment delivered to the site prior to unloading. Reject all products or equipment that are damaged, used, or in any other way unsatisfactory for use on the Project. 2. Handle and protect all products or equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written directions. 3. Store products or equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written directions. 4. Protect equipment from exposure to elements and keep thoroughly dry. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): E 329 - Standard for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction. B. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or other consensus standards, comply with requirements of standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. C. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except where specific date is established by code. D. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections. E. When specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Engineer before proceeding. 1.4 AUTHORITY AND DUTIES OF OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE OR INSPECTOR A. The Engineer or Owner's Project Representative employed or retained by Owner is authorized to inspect the Work. B. Inspections may extend to entire or part of the Work and to preparation, fabrication, and manufacture of products for the Work. C. Deficiencies or defects in the Work which have been observed will be called to Contractor's attention. D. Inspector will not: 1. Alter or waive provisions of Contract Documents. 2. Inspect Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures for construction. 3. Accept portions of the Work, issue instructions contrary to intent of Contract Documents, or act as foreman for Contractor. 4. Supervise, control, or direct Contractor's safety precautions or programs; or inspect for safety conditions on Work site, or of persons thereon, whether Contractor's employees or others. E. Inspector will: 1. Conduct on-site observations of the Work in progress to assist Engineer in determining when the Work is, in general, proceeding in accordance with Contract Documents. Technical Specifications 01400-2 Quality Control 2. Report to Engineer whenever Inspector believes that Work is faulty, defective, does not conform to Contract Documents, or has been damaged; or whenever there is defective material or equipment; or whenever Inspector believes the Work should be uncovered for observation or requires special procedures. 1.5 SAMPLING AND TESTING A. General: 1. Prior to delivery and incorporation in the Work, submit listing of sources of materials, when specified in sections where materials are specified. 2. When specified in sections where products are specified: a. Submit sufficient quantities of representative samples of character and quality required of materials to be used in the Work for testing or examination. b. Test materials in accordance with standards of national technical organizations. B. Sampling: 1. Furnish specimens of materials when requested. 2. Do not use materials which are required to be tested until testing indicates satisfactory compliance with specified requirements. 3. Specimens of materials will be taken for testing whenever necessary to determine quality of material. C. Test standards: 1. Perform sampling, specimen preparation, and testing of materials in accordance with specified standards, and when no standard is specified, in accordance with standard of nationally recognized technical organization. 2. Physical characteristics of materials not particularly specified shall conform to standards published by ASTM, where applicable. 1.6 TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES A. Inspection Schedule 1. Contractor shall provide a running 14 day schedule of activities requiring inspections. 2. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer 48 hours prior to called inspections. 1.7 SURVEYING A. Contractor shall provide the services of a registered licensed surveyor for the establishment line and grade control for all facilities constructed as part of the work. The surveyor shall be responsible for using the horizontal and vertical control established in the design drawings and ensuring that it is carried out during construction. At a minimum, this work shall include: 1. Establishing finished floor elevation and corners of all structures. 2. Establishing inverts and center lines of all pipe penetrations and buried piping. 3. Establish line and grade of the AC Paving and concrete surfaces. Technical Specifications 01400-3 Quality Control B. Prior to burying any below grade structures, such as piping, valves and gates, the surveyor shall establish and record as-built elevations which shall be transferred to the As-built Drawings for the work. C. In preparation of the Contractor's As-built drawings, all structure corners and slab elevations shall be surveyed and transferred to the As-built drawings. D. All as-built surveys shall be signed and sealed by the surveyor and transferred to the Owner and Engineer electronically and in hard copy. 1.8 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS A. Contractor shall maintain a complete and accurate set of full-sized As-built Drawings throughout the project on the job site. B. As-built Drawings shall show the installed locations and conditions for all constructed work that vary in location, material or equipment from the Contract Documents. Any variations from the design shall be approved by the Engineer in advance of performing the work. C. Contractor's As-built Drawings shall be available to the Engineer for inspection at the job site. D. As-built Drawings shall be uploaded to the electronic document management system prior to Substantial Completion of the work. 1.9 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Contractor shall submit weekly reports electronically to the Owner and Engineer that include photographs of work progress and a summary of the work performed. The reports shall be submitted no later than 5pm each Friday, and describe the work completed during that week, for the duration of the project. B. Furnish test reports electronically. C. Furnish incidental labor and facilities: 1. To provide access to construction to be tested. 2. To obtain and handle samples at Work site or at source of product to be tested. 3. To facilitate inspections and tests. 4. For storage. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Applicable. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Applicable. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 01400-4 Quality Control SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Furnishing, maintaining, and removing construction facilities and temporary controls, including temporary utilities, construction aids, barriers and enclosures, security, access roads, temporary controls, project sign, field offices and sheds, and removal after construction. 1.2 REFERENCE A. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). 1.3 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Temporary electrical power: 1. Arrange with the Owner to provide adequate temporary electrical service or provide on-site power generation suitable for the Work. 1. Provide and maintain adequate jobsite power distribution facilities conforming to applicable Laws and Regulations. B. Temporary electrical lighting: 1. In work areas, provide temporary lighting sufficient to maintain lighting levels during working hours not less than lighting levels required by OSHA and state agency which administers OSHA regulations where Project is located. C. Temporary water: 1. Coordinate with the Owner to furnish potable water for human consumption and non-potable water for use during construction. D. Temporary sanitary facilities: 1. Provide suitable and adequate sanitary facilities that are in compliance with applicable Laws and Regulations. 1. At completion of the Work, remove sanitary facilities and leave site in neat and sanitary condition. E. Temporary fire protection: Provide sufficient number of fire extinguishers of type and capacity required to protect the Work and ancillary facilities. F. First aid: Post first aid facilities and information posters conforming to requirements of OSHA and other applicable Laws and Regulations in readily accessible locations. 1.4 CONSTRUCTION AIDS A. Provide railings, kick plates, enclosures, safety devices, and controls required by Laws and Regulations and as required for adequate protection of life and property. B. Use construction hoists, elevators, scaffolds, stages, shoring, and similar temporary facilities of ample size and capacity to adequately support and move loads. Technical Specifications 01500-1 Temporary Facilities C. Design temporary supports with adequate safety factor to assure adequate load bearing capability: 1. When requested, submit design calculations by registered professional engineer prior to application of loads. 1. Submitted design calculations are for information and record purposes only. D. Accident prevention: 1. Exercise precautions throughout construction for protection of persons and property. 1. Observe safety provisions of applicable Laws and Regulations. 2. Guard machinery and equipment and eliminate other hazards. 3. Make reports required by authorities having jurisdiction, and permit safety inspections of the Work. 4. Before commencing construction work, take necessary action to comply with provisions for safety and accident prevention. E. Barricades: 1. Place barriers at ends of excavations and along excavations to warn pedestrian and vehicular traffic of excavations. 1. Provide barriers with flashing lights after dark. 2. Keep barriers in place until excavations are entirely backfilled and compacted. 3. Barricade excavations to prevent persons from entering excavated areas in roadways, parking lots, or other public or private areas. F. Warning devices and barricades: Adequately identify and guard hazardous areas and conditions by visual warning devices and, where necessary, physical barriers: 1. Devices shall conform to minimum requirements of OSHA and State agency which administers OSHA regulations where Project is located. G. Hazards in protected areas: Mark or guard excavations in areas from which public is excluded, in manner appropriate for hazard. H. Protect existing structures, trees, shrubs, and other items to be preserved on Project site from injury, damage, or destruction by vehicles, equipment, worker or other agents with substantial barricades or other devices commensurate with hazards. I. After completion of the work, Contractor shall remove and properly dispose of all temporary construction facilities. 1.5 SECURITY A. Make adequate provision for protection of the work area against fire, theft, and vandalism, and for protection of public against exposure to injury. 1.6 TEMPORARY CONTROLS A. Dust control: 1. Prevent dust nuisance caused by operations, unpaved roads, excavation, backfilling, demolition, or other activities. Technical Specifications 01500-2 Temporary Facilities 2. Control dust by sprinkling with water, use of dust palliatives, modification of operations, or other means acceptable to agencies having jurisdiction. B. Noise control: 1. Perform operations in manner to minimize noise. 2. Take special measures to suppress noise during night hours. 3. Work will not be permitted onsite between the hours of 8pm and 7am without prior written notice by the Owner. 1.7 PROJECT SIGN A. Provide and maintain Project identification sign consisting of painted 8-foot wide by 4- foot high exterior grade plywood and minimum 10-foot long, 4 by 4 lumber posts, set in ground at least 3 feet, with exhibit lettering by professional sign painter using no more than 5 sign colors: 1. List at least the title of the Project, the Owner, Engineer, and Contractor. 2. Contractor's and Engineer's names shall be identified in upper right-hand corner underneath the bid number. 1.8 FIELD OFFICES A. Contractor's field office: 1. Maintain on Project Site weathertight space in which to keep copies of Contract Documents, progress schedule, shop drawings, and other relevant documents. 2. Facility should include a. Telephone. b. Computers with Wifi internet access. c. Sanitary facilities. d. Project site-wide cell phone booster than enables clear and reliable cell phone service at any location on the project site. B. Owner's field office (Contractor Furnished): 1. Maintain on the Project Site a weathertight, secure office space for the Owner. 2. Facility should include a. Telephone. b. Wifi internet access. c. Sanitary facilities. 3. The Owner's temporary field office shall also serve to house all temporary hatchery operations computers, controls and alarms for operating the existing hatchery during construction. The Contractor shall be responsible for relocating and connecting existing hatchery controls at the temporary field office. 1.9 REMOVAL A. Remove temporary buildings and furnishings before the Final Completion inspection. B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary facilities. Technical Specifications 01500-3 Temporary Facilities C. Remove underground installations to minimum depth of 24 inches and grade to match surrounding conditions. D. Restore existing facilities used during construction to specified or original condition. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Applicable PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Applicable END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 01500-4 Temporary Facilities SECTION 01660 EQUIPMENT TESTING AND FACILITY STARTUP PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. Equipment testing and facility startup are prerequisites to satisfactory completion of the contract requirements and shall be completed within the Contract Times. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for scheduling and performing all operational testing. C. Startup of a fish hatchery is a complex operation requiring the combined expertise of the Contractor, manufacturers' representatives, subcontractors, the Engineer, and the Owner. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating all parties for a successful startup. The Engineer and Owner will be available for technical and operational advice prior to and during startup. D. Contractor shall perform a 14-day facility acceptance test as specified in Part 3 of this Section. The test shall start prior to midday on a Monday, Tuesday, or Wednesday. Testing periods shall not include holidays, based on the Owner's calendar. E. During system testing and startup, water used for disinfecting must be neutralized before discharge. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Schedule: 1. The schedule for testing and startup shall be submitted under Section 01324. B. Testing and Startup Plan: 1. Not less than 60 Days prior to startup, submit for review a detailed Testing and Startup Plan. The Plan shall include schedules for manufacturers' equipment certifications, schedules for submitting final Owner's Manuals, schedule for training the Owner's personnel, list of Owner and Contractor-furnished supplies, electrical testing, instrumentation and controls testing, and detailed schedule of operations to achieve successful system testing, startup, and performance and acceptance testing. The Plan shall include test checklists and data forms for each item of equipment and shall address coordination with the Owner's staff. The Contractor shall revise the Plan as necessary based on review comments. C. Records and Documentation: 1. Equipment Installation Certification: Where required by the specifications, submit documentation from manufacturer's representative that the equipment has been properly installed and lubricated, is in accurate alignment, is free from undue stresses from connecting piping and anchoring, and has operated satisfactorily under full load conditions. 2. Records of testing and startup as indicated below. Technical Specifications 01660-1 Equipment Testing and Facility Startup PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Applicable PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXECUTION A. Prerequisites: 1. The following shall be completed before testing and startup begins: a. Furnish all Technical Manual information required by the Contract Documents. b. Provide all safety equipment, emergency shower and eyewash units, fire extinguishers, gas detectors, protective guards and shields, emergency repair kits, safety chains, handrails, gratings, safety signs, and valve and piping identification required by the Contract Documents. Devices and equipment shall be fully functional, adjusted, and tested. c. Manufacturer's certifications of proper installation have been accepted. d. Leakage tests, electrical tests, and adjustments have been completed. e. The Owner has approved the Contractor's Testing and Startup Plan. f. Functional verification of the individual instrumentation loops (analog, status, alarm, and control) from the field devices to the HMI. g. Adjustment of the pressure switches, flow switches, timing relays, level switches, vibration switches, temperature switches, RTD monitors, pressure regulating valves, and other control devices to the settings determined by the Engineer or the equipment manufacturer. h. Functional verification of the individual interlocks between the field-mounted control devices and the motor control circuits, control circuits of variable-speed controllers, and packaged system controls. B. Supplies: 1. The Contractor shall furnish: a. All necessary materials not listed for the Owner to furnish. 2. The Owner will furnish: a. Water. b. Power. C. Records of Testing and Startup: 1. The Contractor shall maintain the following during testing and startup and submit originals to Owner prior to acceptance: a. Lubrication and service records for each mechanical and electrical equipment item. b. Hours of daily operation for each mechanical and electrical equipment item. c. Equipment alignment and vibration measurement records. Technical Specifications 01660-2 Equipment Testing and Facility Startup d. Logs of electrical measurements and tests. e. Instrumentation calibration and testing logs. f. Testing and validation of SCADA inputs, outputs, logic functions, status indications and alarms. g. Factory and field equipment settings. h. Log of problems encountered and adjustments made. i. Other records, logs, and checklists as required by the Contract Documents. 3.2 SYSTEM TESTING A. After individual equipment items have been tested and certified as required by the Technical Specifications, tests of systems comprised of single or multiple equipment items with appurtenant equipment and instruments and controls shall be conducted. Items of equipment shall be tested as part of a system to the maximum extent possible. B. The Contractor shall demonstrate the manual and automatic modes of operation to verify proper control sequences, software interlocks, proper operation of software logic and controllers, etc. System testing shall include the use of water or other process media, as applicable, to simulate the actual conditions of operation. C. Systems testing activities shall follow the detailed test procedures and checklists in Contractor-furnished Testing and Startup Plan. Completion of systems testing shall be documented by a report. D. The Contractor shall system test the utility, chemical feed, safety equipment, and other support systems before testing the process system. E. Furnish the Owner at least 10 Days written notice confirming the start of system testing. The Owner's and Engineer's staff will observe systems testing. F. The Contractor shall arrange for manufacturer's representative to revisit the Site as often as necessary to correct malfunctions to the Owner's satisfaction. 3.3 STARTUP AND ACCEPTANCE TESTING A. The Contractor shall start up the water supply systems, head tower, piping systems, all process and building systems, and operate them at rates directed by the Engineer without malfunction for a continuous 14 Day, 24 hour/day acceptance test period. If any equipment item, subsystem, or system malfunctions during the test period, the item shall be repaired and the test restarted at time zero with no credit given for the elapsed time before the malfunction. B. Defects in material or workmanship that appear shall be promptly corrected. Time lost for wiring corrections, control point settings, or other reasons that interrupt the test may, at the judgment of the Owner, be cause for extending the test period an equal amount of time. C. Acceptance testing shall not begin until leakage tests, instrumentation tests and adjustments, electrical tests and adjustments, equipment field tests, disinfection, and system tests have been completed to the satisfaction of the Owner and Engineer. D. The Contractor shall furnish the services of manufacturer's representatives, if necessary, to correct equipment malfunctions. Technical Specifications 01660-3 Equipment Testing and Facility Startup E. The Owner will furnish hatchery operators during the test period. Hatchery operators will be under the direct supervision of and be responsible to the Contractor. The Contractor shall furnish continuous, 24-hour staffing at the facility. F. During acceptance testing, the Contractor shall: 1. Maintain and operate equipment and systems in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations and normal facility operation as determined by the Owner. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 01660-4 Equipment Testing and Facility Startup SECTION 02050 DEMOLITION PART GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall demolish and reconstruct all existing construction, as shown, and install all new structures, concrete, pipe, utilities, backfill, and pavement, as indicated, in accordance with the Contract Document. 1.2 COORDINATION A. The Contractor shall carefully coordinate the Work in areas where existing facilities shall remain operational. The Work indicated in the Contract Documents is not all- inclusive and the Contractor shall be responsible to perform the reconstruction indicated plus that which can be reasonably inferred from the Contract Documents as necessary to complete the Project. The Specifications and Drawings identify the major facilities that shall be demolished and reconstructed, but auxiliary utilities such as water, drainage, fencing, electrical wiring, controls, and instrumentation are not necessarily shown. B. The Contractor shall note that the Drawings used to indicate demolition and reconstruction are based on record drawings of the existing facilities which have been reproduced to show existing conditions and to clarify the Scope of Work as much as possible. Prior to bidding the Contractor shall conduct a comprehensive survey at the Site to verify the correctness and exactness of the Drawings, the Scope of Work, and the extent of auxiliary utilities. C. While demolition and reconstruction are being performed, the Contractor shall provide adequate access for the continued operation and maintenance of the facilities. The Contractor shall erect and maintain fences, warning signs, barricades, and other devices around the reconstruction as required for the protection of the Contractor's employees and the Owner's personnel at the sites. The Contractor shall remove all such protection when reconstruction activities are complete, or as Work progresses, or when directed by the Owner. 1.3 DEMOLITION A. Items to be removed at the site are summarized in Section 01010 Summary of Work and on the drawings. B. Existing structures and related appurtenances shown or required to be demolished as part of the Work shall be removed and disposed of unless otherwise indicated. Removed items shall be disposed of offsite by the Contractor. Technical Specifications 02050-1 Demolition 1.4 REHABILITATION A. Existing civil, landscaping, structural, and electrical Work disturbed or damaged by reconstruction activities shall be repaired and rehabilitated as indicated. B. Damaged items shall be repaired or replaced with new items to restore damaged items or surfaces to a condition equal to and matching that existing prior to damage. 1.5 DISPOSAL A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the offsite disposal of debris resulting from reconstruction in compliance with local, state, and federal codes and requirements. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Except as otherwise indicated, the Contractor shall provide materials which will result in equal-or-better Work than the Work being reconstructed, in terms of performance characteristics and including visual effects where applicable. The Contractor shall use material identical with the original materials where feasible. B. Materials shall comply with the requirements of the technical specifications wherever applicable. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall coordinate demolition and reconstruction Work with the Owner and Engineer. Unless otherwise indicated, the Contractor shall be responsible for the sequence of activities. Work shall be performed in accordance with applicable safety rules and regulations. B. The Contractor shall ensure that any utilities connected to structures, equipment, and facilities to be removed, relocated, salvaged, replaced, or abandoned are rendered inoperable, replaced with new utilities, or adequately bypassed with temporary utilities before proceeding with demolition and reconstruction. C. The Contractor shall take precautions to avoid damage to adjacent facilities and to limit the Work activities to the extent indicated. If reconstruction beyond the Scope indicated is required, the Contractor shall obtain approval from the Owner prior to commencing Work. 3.2 PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES A. Before beginning any reconstruction Work, the Contractor shall carefully survey the existing facilities and examine the Specifications and Drawings to determine the Technical Specifications 02050-2 Demolition extent of reconstruction and coordination with the Work. Existing facilities not subject to reconstruction shall be protected and maintained. Damaged existing facilities shall be repaired to the previous condition or replaced. B. The Contract Documents indicate existing items to be demolished, and/or relocated. Auxiliary utilities including such services as water, air, drainage, and electrical wiring are not necessarily indicated. The Contractor shall verify the Scope of the Work to remove the items indicated. The removal of existing items for demolition, and relocation shall be completed at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.3 REHABILITATION A. Certain areas of existing structures, piping, conduits, and the like will be affected by Work necessary to complete modifications under this Contract. The Contractor shall be responsible to rehabilitate those areas affected by its construction activities. 3.4 DISPOSAL A. Demolition and removal of debris shall minimize interference with roads, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities which shall not be closed or obstructed without permission from the Owner. Alternate routes shall be provided around closed or obstructed traffic ways. 3.5 CLEANING A. During and upon completion of Work, the Contractor shall promptly remove tools and equipment, surplus materials, rubbish, debris, and dust and shall leave areas affected by Work in a clean, approved condition. B. Adjacent structures shall be cleaned of dust, dirt, and debris caused by reconstruction, as directed by the Engineer or governing authorities, and adjacent areas shall be returned to condition existing prior to start of Work. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 02050-3 Demolition SECTION 02200 EARTHWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Loosening, excavating, filling, grading, borrow, hauling, preparing subgrade, compaction in final location, wetting and drying, and operations pertaining to site grading for cast-in-place concrete structures, piping and other structures. 2. Backfilling and compacting under and around structures. 3. Structural fill material 4. Trench zone material 5. Pipe zone material 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. D 1556 — Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand Cone Method. 2. D1557— Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lb/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3)). 3. D 6938 — Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Initial compaction demonstration: 1. Adequacy of compaction equipment and procedures: Demonstrate adequacy of compaction equipment and procedures before exceeding any of the following amounts of earthwork quantities: a. 50 cubic yards of backfill adjacent to structures. b. 100 cubic yards of native material fill. 2. Compaction sequence requirements: until specified degree of compaction on previously specified amounts of earthwork is achieved, do not perform additional earthwork of the same kind. 3. After satisfactory conclusion of initial compaction demonstration and at any time during construction, provide confirmation tests as specified under Section 3.4 "FIELD QUALITY CONTROL." B. Contractor shall perform all work related to this section in accordance with the approved Stormwater Management Plan (SWMP) and as specified in Section 01355. Technical Specifications 02200-1 Earthwork 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Testing Lab: Submit Contractor's proposed testing laboratory capabilities and equipment. B. Test Reports: 1. Submit certified test reports of all tests specified to be performed by the Contractor. 2. Sign and seal test reports by a professional Civil Engineer in Oregon. C. Product Data for each of the materials below with the following information: 1. Material source. 2. Gradation. 3. Testing data. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Storage and protection: Protect from segregation and excess moisture during delivery, storage and handling. 1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Schedule earthwork operations to meet requirements specified in this Section for excavation and uses of excavated material. B. If necessary, stockpile excavated material in order to use it at specified locations. C. Excavation, backfilling and filling: Perform excavation, backfilling and filling during construction in a manner and sequence that provides drainage at all times. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 REUSE OF ON-SITE MATERIALS A. Owner has a substantial quantity of materials near Brownlee Reservoir that may be used in the construction of permanent features. If these materials are to be used, they shall meet the material requirements specified in this Section and be approved for use by the Engineer. Coordinate with the Owner for available gradation, proctor and moisture content test reports. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Water for compacting: Use water from source acceptable to the Owner. Water from the Snake River or its tributaries cannot be used without securing a water right. B. Obtain fill and backfill material necessary to produce grades required. 1. Materials and source are to be approved by Engineer. 2. Excavated material approved by Engineer may also be used for fill material. C. Structural Fill: 1. Native material may be used for all structural fill subject to the approval of the Engineer. If sufficient native material is not available, material shall be imported that meets the following requirements: Technical Specifications 02200-2 Earthwork Sieve Percentage Size Passing 3/8-inch 100 No. 4 45 - 90 No. 8 40 - 65 No. 16 30 - 50 No. 30 20 -40 No. 50 15 - 20 No. 100 5 - 15 No. 200 0 - 10 D. Trench Zone Material 1. Structural fill free of rock, cobbles, roots or other organic matter and frozen material. E. Pipe Zone Material 1. Consist of imported hard, durable well-graded sand of the specified sizes and gradations below. 2. Free of organic matter, lumps or balls of clay and other deleterious matter. 3. Well-Graded Sand: Sieve Percentage Size Passing 3/8-inch 100 No. 4 70 — 100 No. 8 35 —90 No. 16 20 —60 No. 30 8 — 65 No. 50 2 - 30 No. 100 0 - 5 No. 200 0 -2 F. Subgrade Stabilization Materials: Provide subgrade stabilization material consisting of structural fill. G. General Fill / Pavement Subbase: Crushed rock aggregate base material of such nature that it can be compacted readily by watering and rolling to form a firm, stable base for pavements. At the option of the Contractor, the grading for either the 1-1/2- inch maximum size or%-inch maximum size gradation shall be used. The sand equivalent value shall not be less than 22, and the material shall meet the following gradation requirements: Technical Specifications 02200-3 Earthwork Percentage Passing Sieve Size 1-1/2-inch Max. Gradation 3/4-inch Max. Gradation 2-inch 100 - 1-1/2-inch 90 - 100 - 1-inch - 100 3/4-inch 50 - 85 90 - 100 No. 4 25 -45 35 - 55 No. 30 10 - 25 10 - 30 No. 200 2 - 9 2 - 9 H. Granular Fill Under Building Floor Slabs 1. Clean, granular material free from organics and vegetation and classified as GW, GP, SW, SM or SP as designated by the Unified Soil Classification System. No particles or rocks larger than 3 IN in diameter are allowed. Or uncrushed gravel complying with ASTM C33 gradation size No. 67, 3/4 IN to No. 4. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PROTECTION A. Protect existing surface and subsurface features on-site and adjacent to site as follows: 1. Protect and maintain bench marks, monuments or other established reference points and property corners. a. If disturbed or destroyed, replace at Contractor's expense to full satisfaction of Owner and controlling agency. 2. Avoid surcharge or excavation procedures which can result in heaving, caving, or slides. B. Dispose of waste materials, legally, off site. 1. Burning, as a means of waste disposal, is not permitted. 3.2 PREPARATION A. All construction areas shall be cleared of grass and weeds to at least a depth of six inches and any other objectionable material of any kind which would interfere with the performance or completion of the Work, create a hazard to safety, or impair the Work's subsequent usefulness or obstruct its operation. Trees and other natural vegetation outside the actual lines of construction shall be protected from damage during construction, as directed by the Engineer. B. Unless otherwise shown or specified, native trees larger than three inches in diameter at the base shall not be removed without the Owner's approval. The removal of any trees, shrubs, fences, or other improvements outside of rights-of-way as deemed necessary by the Contractor, shall be arranged with the Owner, removed and replaced, by the Contractor, at its expense. Technical Specifications 02200-4 Earthwork C. Make excavations large enough for working space, forms, damp proofing, waterproofing, and inspection. D. Trench excavation dimensions shall follow dimensions given on the Drawings. E. Subgrade stabilization for all buildings, paving, vaults, piping and utilities: 1. Perform excavations to the line and grade shown. 2. Over excavate any soft native material found that lies beneath subgrade elevation. Fill and compact with structural backfill material. 3. Proof roll or plate compact to 92 percent of Modified Proctor. Any boils or rutting shall be over-excavated and filled with structural material and compacted. F. Backfills: 1. After clearing and excavation are completed, scarify entire areas which underlie backfills or structures to a depth of 6 inches and until surface is free of ruts, hummocks, and other features which would prevent uniform compaction by equipment to be used. 2. Recompact scarified areas to density specified before placing backfill material or concrete. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Dispose of excavated materials which are unsuitable for use onsite in a lawful manner. 2. Dispose of all demolished materials offsite in a lawful manner B. Excavation: 1. Contractor shall allow the Owner and Engineer to inspect all subgrade excavations both before and after proof compaction. All native excavations shall be proof compacted per this specification. Notify the Owner as soon as excavation is completed in order that subgrades may be inspected. a. Do not commence further construction until the subgrade has been inspected and approved by the Owner or Engineer as being free of undesirable material, being of compaction density required by this specification, and being capable of supporting the loads to be placed thereon. b. Owner shall be given the opportunity to inspect subgrade below fill material both prior to and after subgrade compaction. c. Before concrete or fill material is placed, protect approved subgrade from becoming loose, wet, frozen, or soft due to weather, construction operations, or other reasons. 2. Shoring: a. Shore, sheet pile, slope, or brace excavations as required by applicable codes or conditions to prevent them from collapsing. b. Remove shoring as backfilling progresses but only when banks are stable and safe from caving or collapse. 3. Drainage: Technical Specifications 02200-5 Earthwork a. Control grading around structures so that ground is pitched to prevent water from running into excavated areas or damaging structures. b. Maintain excavations free of water where foundations, floor slabs, equipment support pads or fill material are to be placed. c. Provide pumping and all dewatering equipment required to keep excavated spaces clear of water during construction. The groundwater elevation shall be held a minimum of 18 in. below the bottom of excavations until backfilling is complete. d. Should any water be encountered in the excavation, notify Engineer and Owner. e. Provide free discharge of water by trenches, pumps, wells, well points, or other means as necessary and drain to point of disposal that will not damage existing or new construction or interfere with construction operations. C. Compaction: 1. Provide specified compaction for backfills, cuts, embankments, fills, roadway fills, and other earthwork. 2. Perform confirmation tests to verify and confirm that work has complied, and is complying at all times, with compaction requirements specified in this Section for initial compaction demonstration and field quality control testing. 3. In-place density of compacted backfills, cuts, embankments, fills, and roadway fills determined in accordance with ASTM D 1556, or with ASTM D 6938. 4. Maximum density obtained in laboratory when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1557, Modified Proctor Test. 5. Compact to percentage of maximum density as follows: a. Backfill adjacent to structures: 95 percent of ASTM D 1557, Modified Proctor Test. b. AC Pavement subgrade: 95 percent of ASTM D 1557, Modified Proctor Test. c. Upper 6 inches of cuts: 95 percent of ASTM D 1557, Modified Proctor Test. d. Fills: 95 percent of ASTM D 1557, Modified Proctor Test. e. Proof Compaction for Native Excavations: 95 percent of ASTM D 1557, Modified Proctor Test. D. Placement: 1. General: a. Construct structures and fills at locations to lines and grades indicated on the Drawings. 2. Fills: a. Place loose material in successive layers that do not exceed 12 inches in depth after compaction. b. Bring each layer to a moisture content between optimum moisture content and 3 percent above optimum moisture content before compacting. Technical Specifications 02200-6 Earthwork c. Defective compacted fills: Remove and recompact. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Confirmation tests: 1. Contractor's responsibilities: a. Accomplish specified compaction for backfills, fills, and other earthwork. b. Where soil is required to be compacted to a percentage of maximum density, the maximum density at optimum moisture content will be determined by modified proctor in accordance with ASTM D1557. c. Field density in-place tests will be performed in accordance with ASTM D 1556, ASTM D6938, or by such other means acceptable to the Engineer. d. Control operations by confirmation tests to verify that compaction work complies, and is complying at all times, with requirements specified in this Section concerning compaction, control, and testing. e. Cost of confirmation tests shall be paid for by the Contractor. f. Qualifications of Contractor's testing laboratory: Perform confirmation testing by soils testing laboratory acceptable to the Engineer. g. Copies of confirmation test reports: Submit promptly to the Engineer. 2. Frequency of confirmation testing: a. Perform testing not less than the following: 1) In-place density (ASTM D6938) every 20 cy of placement b. Tests shall be completed at each structural fill or pipe bedding location, at any change in backfill material and as directed by the Engineer. B. Compliance tests: 1. Periodic compliance tests will be required by the Engineer to verify that compaction is meeting requirements previously specified. 2. Remove overburden above level at which the Engineer required to be tested. Backfill and recompact excavation after testing is completed. 3. If compaction fails to meet specified requirements, perform remedial work by one of the following methods: a. Remove and replace materials at proper density. b. Bring density up to specified level by other means acceptable to the Engineer. 4. Retesting: a. Contractor bears the costs of retesting required to confirm and verify that remedial work has brought compaction within specified requirements. b. Contractor's confirmation tests during performance of remedial work: Double the normal rate specified. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION A. Finished grades: Technical Specifications 02200-7 Earthwork 1. Repair and reestablish grades to required elevations and slopes due to any settlement or erosion that may occur from action of the elements or any other cause prior to final acceptance. 2. Protect newly graded areas from erosion and deterioration by action of the elements. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 02200-8 Earthwork SECTION 02221 TRENCHING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING PART GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Excavation, trenching, backfilling and compacting for all underground pipes and utilities. B. Work of this section shall also comply with the requirements of 02200 Earthwork. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Association of State Highway & Transportation Officials (AASHTO): a. T99, The Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 5.5 LB Rammer and a 12 IN Drop. b. T180, Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 10 LB Rammer and an 18 IN Drop. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. C33, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. b. D698, Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-Ibf/ft3). c. D1557, Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-Ibf/ft3(2,700 kN-m/m)). d. D2487, Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System). e. D4253, Standard Test Methods for Maximum Index Density of Soils Using a Vibratory Table. f. D4254, Minimum Index Density of Soils and Calculation of Relative Density. 1.3 DEFINITIONS Technical Specifications 02221 - 1 Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting A. Excavation: All excavation will be defined as unclassified. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Section 01330. 2. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. Trench Safety Plan and/or trench shoring drawings including current certification of trench shields (trench boxes) if employed. 4. Submit respective pipe or conduit manufacturer's data regarding bedding methods of installation and general recommendations. 5. Submit sieve analysis reports on all granular materials. B. Miscellaneous Submittals: Submit test reports and fully document each with specific location or stationing information, date, and other pertinent information. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Trench Backfill Material: 1. As approved by Engineer. a. Structural fill free of rock cobbles, roots, sod or other organic matter, and frozen material. b. Moisture content at time of placement: 3 percent plus/minus of optimum moisture content as specified in accordance with ASTM D1557. B. Pipe Embedment Material 1. Granular Material defined below: Sieve Size 3/4 IN 3/8 IN No. 4 No. 20 No. 200 Percent Passing by 100 90-100 40-65 30-50 3-9 Weight Technical Specifications 02221 - 2 Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting C. Subgrade Stabilization Materials: Provide subgrade stabilization material consisting of structural fill. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Remove and dispose of unsuitable materials as directed by Owner to site provided by Contractor. 3.2 EXCAVATION A. Unclassified Excavation: Remove rock excavation, clay, silt, gravel, hard pan, loose shale, and loose stone as directed by Owner. B. Excavation for Appurtenances: 1. 12 IN (minimum) clear distance between outer surface and embankment. C. Trench Excavation: 1. Excavate trenches by open cut method to depth shown on Drawings and necessary to accommodate work. a. Support existing utility lines and yard piping where proposed work crosses at a lower elevation. 2. Observe following trenching criteria: a. Trench size: 1) Excavate width to accommodate free working space. 2) Maximum trench width at top of pipe or conduit may not exceed outside diameter of utility service by more than the following dimensions: OVERALL EXCESS DIAMETER OF DIMENSION UTILITY SERVICE 33 IN and less 18 IN more than 33 IN 24 IN 3) Cut trench walls vertically from bottom of trench to 1 FT above top of pipe, conduit, or utility service. 4) Keep trenches free of water. 3.3 3.3 PREPARATION OF FOUNDATION FOR PIPE LAYING Technical Specifications 02221 - 3 Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting A. Over-Excavation: 1. Backfill and compact to 92 percent of maximum dry density per ASTM 1557. 2. Backfill with granular bedding material. B. Subgrade Stabilization: 1. Stabilize the subgrade when directed by the Engineer. 2. Observe the following requirements when unstable trench bottom materials are encountered. a. Notify Owner when unstable materials are encountered. 1) Define by drawing station locations and limits. b. Remove unstable trench bottom caused by Contractor failure to dewater, rainfall, or Contractor operations. 3. All native excavations shall be proof compacted prior to placing bedding or fill. 3.4 BACKFILLING METHODS A. Do not backfill until tests to be performed on system show system is in full compliance to specified requirements. B. Carefully Compacted Backfill: 1. Furnish where indicated on Drawings, specified for trench embedment conditions and for compacted backfill conditions up to 12 IN above top of pipe or conduit. 2. Comply with the following: a. Place backfill in lifts not exceeding 8 IN (loose thickness). b. Hand place, shovel slice, and pneumatically tamp all carefully compacted backfill. c. Observe specific manufacturer's recommendations regarding backfilling and compaction. d. Compact each lift to specified requirements. C. Common Trench Backfill: 1. Perform in accordance with the following: Technical Specifications 02221 -4 Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting a. Place backfill in lift thicknesses capable of being compacted to densities specified. b. Observe specific manufacturer's recommendations regarding backfilling and compaction. c. Avoid displacing joints and appurtenances or causing any horizontal or vertical misalignment, separation, or distortion. D. Water flushing for consolidation is not permitted. 3.5 COMPACTION A. Compaction Requirements: 1. Unless noted otherwise on Drawings or more stringently by other sections of these Specifications, comply with following trench compaction criteria: MINIMUM COMPACTIONS LOCATION SOIL TYPE DENSITY 2. Bedding material: All locations Cohesionless soils 92 percent of maximum dry density by ASTM D1557 3. Common trench backfill: Under pavements, Cohesionless soils 92 percent of maximum dry roadways, surfaces. density by ASTM D1557 4. Common trench backfill: Cohesionless soils 92 percent of maximum dry density by ASTM D1557 END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 02221 - 5 Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting SECTION 02444 CHAIN LINK FENCE AND GATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Chain link fencing and gates. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A153, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. b. A392, Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric. c. A428, Test Method for Weight of Coating on Aluminum Coated Iron or Steel Articles. d. A824, Standard Specification for Metallic-Coated Steel Marcelled Tension Wire for use with Chain-Link Fence. e. F552, Terminology Relating to Chain-Link Fencing. f. F567, Standard Practice for Installation of Chain Link Fence. g. F626, Standard Specification for Fence Fittings. h. F900, Standard Specification for Industrial and Commercial Swing Gates. i. F1043, Standard Specification for Strength and Protective Coatings on Metal Industrial Chain Line Fence Framework. j. F1083, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded, for Fence Structures. 2. American Welding Society (AWS). 3. Chain Link Manufacturer's Institute for "Galvanized Steel Chain Link Fence Fabric and Accessories." 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). B. Qualifications: 1. Installer bonded and licensed in Oregon. 2. Installer shall have a minimum 2 years experience installing similar fencing. 3. Utilize only AWS certified welders. 4. Grounding by an electrician licensed in Oregon. 1.3 DEFINITIONS Technical Specifications 02444-1 Chain Link Fence and Gates A. See ASTM F552. B. NPS: Nominal pipe size, in inches. C. Installer or Applicator: Installer or applicator is the person actually installing or applying the product in the field at the Project site. 1. Installer and applicator are synonymous. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Section 01340. 2. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. Scaled plan layout showing spacing of components, accessories, fittings, and post anchorage. 4. Mill certificates. 5. Source quality control test results. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COMPONENTS A. Chain Link Material: 1. Material type: a. ASTM A392 zinc-coated steel: 1) Coated before weaving, 2.0 OZ/SF. 2. Wire gage: 9. 3. Mesh size: 2 IN. 4. Selvage treatment: a. Top: Crimped. b. Bottom: Twisted and barbed. B. Line Post: 1. ASTM F1083 pipe: a. Galvanized Schedule 40 NPS 2. C. Corner or Terminal Posts: 1. ASTM F1083 pipe: a. Galvanized Schedule 40 NPS 2-1/2. D. Brace and Rails: Technical Specifications 02444-2 Chain Link Fence and Gates 1. ASTM F1083 pipe: a. Galvanized Schedule 40 NPS 1-1/4. E. Gate Posts: 1. ASTM F1083 pipe: a. Galvanized Schedule 40 NPS 3-1/2 min. F. Tension Wire: 1. Top and bottom of fabric: a. ASTM A824, galvanized steel, Class 3. G. Fence Fittings (Post and Line Caps, Rail and Brace Ends, Sleeves-Top Rail, Tie Wires and Clips, Tension and Brace Bands, Tension Bars, Truss Rods): 1. ASTM F626. H. Swing Gate: 1. ASTM F900. 2. Materials as specified for fence framework and fabric. 3. Hardware: a. Galvanized per ASTM A153. b. Hinges to permit 180-degree outward gate opening. I. Roll Gate 1. Materials as specified for fence framework and fabric. 2. Hardware: a. Galvanized per ASTM A153. b. Double wheel carrier, rear wheels, and pipe track brackets to permit complete gate opening. J. Hardware, Nuts, Bolts: 1. Hot dipped galvanized after fabrication. 2. Min size 3/8-inch diameter. 2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Test related fence construction materials to meet the following standards: 1. Posts and rails: a. ASTM F1043, Heavy Industrial. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with: 1. Manufacturer's instructions. Technical Specifications 02444-3 Chain Link Fence and Gates 2. Lines and grades shown on Drawings. 3. ASTM F567. B. Do not start fence installation before final grading is complete and finish elevations are established. C. Drill holes in firm, undisturbed or compacted soil. D. Place fence with bottom edge of fabric at maximum clearance above grade, as shown on Drawings. Correct minor irregularities in earth to maintain maximum clearance. E. Space line posts at equal intervals not exceeding 10 FT O.C. unless otherwise noted on the drawings. F. Provide post braces for each gate, corner, pull and terminal post and first adjacent line post. G. Install tension bars full height of fabric. H. Rails: Fit rails with expansion couplings of outside sleeve type. 1. Rails continuous for outside sleeve type for full length of fence. I. Provide expansion couplings in top rails at not more than 20 FT intervals. J. Anchor top rails to main posts with appropriate wrought or malleable fittings. K. Install bracing assemblies at all end and gate posts, as well as side, corner, and pull posts. 1. Locate compression members at mid-height of fabric. 2. Extend diagonal tension members from compression members to bases of posts. 3. Install so that posts are plumb when under correct tension. L. Pull fabric taut and secure to posts and rails. 1. Secure so that fabric remains in tension after pulling force is released. 2. Secure to posts at not over 15 IN OC, and to rails at not over 24 IN OC, and to tension wire at not over 24 IN OC. 3. Use U-shaped wire conforming to diameter of pipe to which attached, clasping pipe and fabric firmly with ends twisted at least two full turns. 4. Bend ends of wire to minimize hazards to persons or clothing. M. Install post top at each post. N. Gates: 1. Construct with fittings or by welding. 2. Provide rigid, weatherproof joints. 3. Assure right, non-sagging, non-twisting gate. 4. Coat welds with rust preventive paint, color to match pipe. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 02444-4 Chain Link Fence and Gates SECTION 02455 DRIVEN PILES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Driven pipe piles for the intake structure and related items including testing of driven pipe piles. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance requirements: 1. Pile driving refusal: a. Where refusal is met within 5 feet of specified depth indicated on the Drawings, pile will be satisfactory. b. Where refusal is met more than 5 feet above specified depth, notify the Engineer: 1) After notification, the Engineer will determine whether additional piles will be required. c. Where hammer delivers higher driving energy, the Engineer will provide equivalent values for determining refusal for respective types of pile. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product data: Description of equipment proposed for driving piles, including information concerning type and rating of pile drivers. 1. Include the manufacturer's specifications and catalog for all hammers proposed for use. 2. Include detailed drawings of the cushion block including records of successful use if the block is different from that specified in this Section. B. Pile location plan: 1. Plan showing layout as indicated on the Drawings, indicating location of each pile, including: a. Assigned number for each pile as identification for use in pile installation record. b. Pile elevations. c. Pile location survey information. C. Pile Driving Analyzer: Submit PDA equipment and plan for pile driving. D. Concrete Placement Plan for piles that are dry and water filled. E. Do not fabricate or drive piles until submittals have been accepted by the Engineer. Technical Specifications 02455-1 Driven Piles 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect piles from damage during transportation, storage, and handling. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Project environmental requirements: 1. Sound control: a. Muffle pile hammers as necessary to comply with federal, state, and local community noise regulations. 1) As a minimum, and regardless whether required by preceding or not, deflect exhaust from pile driving operations to minimize horizontal transmission of noise from that source. b. Monitor and record noise levels from pile driving operations, as required for compliance with worker safety regulations. c. Monitoring costs and any costs associated with related construction and project shutdown delays necessitated while bringing noise levels in compliance with the preceding provisions shall be the responsibility of and be borne by the Contractor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Steel pipe piles: 1. Open-end steel pipe piles shall be in accordance with ASTM A252, Grade 2 or 3 with a minimum wall thickness of 0.50-in. as shown on the Drawings. 2. Length: May be built up in sections either before or during driving operation: a. Provide sections having identical cross-section. b. Splices and Welds: Full penetration groove welds as specified in Section 05120 — Structural Steel. B. Cast-In-Place Concrete: 1. Reinforcement: Bar reinforcement shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A615 for Grade 60 Billet Steel Reinforcement 2. Concrete: Materials shall conform to ACI 301 and Section 03310. 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. Pile driving equipment: 1. Use fixed leads on pile driver which are capable of guiding the hammer from the highest to lowest point of travel while holding the pile firmly in axial alignment with the hammer: Technical Specifications 02455-2 Driven Piles a. Secure leads to the body of the crane or supporting tower by rigid members in a manner that will prevent movement and maintain alignment of the leads at all times during the driving operations. b. Do not use swinging leads without prior acceptance by Engineer. 2. Maintain and operate driving equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions at all times. B. Pile hammer: 1. Drive piles with a hammer maintained in good operating condition, operated according to the manufacturer's recommendations, and capable of consistently developing the manufacturer's rated energy. a. Single-acting, double-acting or vibratory hammer, at the option of the Contractor. b. Drop hammers shall not be used. C. Pile driving cap: 1. Use a steel driving helmet or cap, including a cushion block or cap block, between the top of the pile and the ram to prevent impact damage to the pile. 2. Use driving cap and cushion block combination capable of protecting the butt of the pile, minimize energy absorption and dissipation, and transmit hammer energy uniformly and consistently during the entire driving period. 3. Use driving helmet or cap, which fits loosely around the top of the pile so that the pile may rotate slightly without binding within the driving helmet. 4. The cushion block may be a solid or laminated softwood block with the grain parallel to the end of the pile. Enclosed cushion block in a close-fitting steel housing: a. Use block at least 4 inches thick and suitable for the length of pile to be driven and the character of subsurface material to be encountered. b. Generally, thicker blocks will be required for longer piles and softer subsurface material. 5. Replace cushion block if it has been damaged, split, highly compressed, charred, or burned, or has become spongy or deteriorated in any manner. 6. Do not use small wood blocks, wood chips, rope, or other material permitting excessive loss of hammer energy. 7. Where the block is different from that specified in this Section, submit, at least 2 weeks before the start of driving operations, detailed drawings of the cushion block including records of successful use. D. Pile driving follower: 1. Follower shall adequately and properly transmit the energy of the hammer blow to the head of the pile. 2. Make drive head and cap so that it fits snugly over the head of the pile. E. Pile driving monitoring system: Technical Specifications 02455-3 Driven Piles 1. The dynamic monitoring shall be performed using a Pile Driving Analyzer (PDA) system Model 8G. All equipment necessary for the dynamic monitoring such as sensors, cables or wireless transmitters, etc. shall be furnished by the Contractor. 2. The equipment shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D-4945. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Predrilling: 1. Predrilling to butt elevation of pile for difficult driving conditions will be allowed at Contractor's option: a. Predrill hole immediately before pile is driven. b. Do not have open predrilled holes adjacent to pile being driven. c. Predrill holes through compacted fills or dense soils using a continuous flight auger. d. Predrill holes to a depth no deeper than bottom of excavation. B. Pile protection: 1. Laterally support piles during driving, but do not unduly restrain piles from rotation in the leads: 2. Ensure that top of piles are perpendicular to longitudinal axis of piles. 3. When driving through soft soil of little or no resistance to penetration, reduce length of stroke of hammer to prevent longitudinal tensile stresses in pile shaft. a. When point of pile is being driven into firm ground, use full stroke of hammer. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Pile driving: 1. General: a. Protect piles from damage during driving. b. Marking piles: 1) Mark each pile prominently with paint of color that contrasts with color of piles at 1-foot intervals over entire length of pile, starting at the tip. 2) Number each 5-foot interval in consecutive order. c. Pile driving record: Prepare and maintain the following pile driving record for each pile. The record will include the following as a minimum: 1) Type and size of the hammer used. 2) Rate of operation. Technical Specifications 02455-4 Driven Piles 3) Number of blows per foot for the last 10 feet of penetration and blows per inch for the last foot of driving. 4) Type and dimensions of driving helmet and cushion block. 5) Predrilled hole diameter and depth if used. 6) Time of start and finish of each pile driving and any interruption. 7) Cutoff elevation and tip elevation of pile driven. 8) Unusual occurrences during driving of the pile. 2. Pile driving operations: a. Pile driving for new structures shall start at the side nearest to existing structures and progress in a direction away from existing structures. b. Do not perform driving when following conditions exist: 1) Within 10 feet of concrete that is less than 3 days old. 2) Within 200 feet of concrete that is less than 1 day old. 3) Adjacent to predrilled hole. c. Piles may be driven from natural grade prior to excavation or they may be driven from the bottom of excavation after excavation is completed: 1) Provide necessary means to carry out the pile driving operations. 2) Additional thickness of Aggregate Base Course Material, filter fabric, or other methods may be required to support pile driving equipment at the bottom of the excavation. d. Perform pile driving only in the presence of the Engineer. e. Drive piles continuously, without interruption to the depth indicated on the Drawings or refusal. f. Do not pull or push piles into place. g. Jetting of piles will not be allowed. B. Dynamic monitoring: 1. Dynamic pile testing shall be performed on all steel pipe piles. The testing shall be performed during initial driving and restrike to monitor hammer and drive system performance, assess pile installation stress and integrity, as well as to evaluate pile capacity. 2. An engineer with a minimum of 5 years of experience and who has achieved Advanced Level or better on the PDI / PDCA Dynamic Measurement and Analysis Proficiency Table shall be in charge of PDA operation and of result interpretation. Operator shall be onsite for the duration of pile driving and testing operations. 3. Piles shall be driven to a minimum capacity of 100 kips based upon the preliminary driving resistance indicated by the wave equation results. Adjustments to driving criteria may be made by the Engineer based upon the dynamic testing results. Technical Specifications 02455-5 Driven Piles 4. Results of the dynamic pile testing shall be prepared in a report and submitted to the Engineer for review. C. Reinforced Concrete Placement 1. At the conclusion of pile driving, clean the soils contained within the pile and flush the upper portion of the shaft to ensure it is clean to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 2. Any piles found to contain debris, soil or other material through the video survey shall have the that material removed and the video survey shall be repeated. This activity shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 3. Reinforcing steel shall be placed in accordance with the Drawings. 4. Reinforcing steel shall be placed with concrete, or other approved centralizers. 5. Contractor shall provide a placement plan for the work which includes placement in both dry and water filled piles. 3.2 CONSTRUCTION A. Site tolerances: 1. Pile driving tolerances: a. Deviation of pile butt centers: Do not deviate from locations indicated on the Drawings more than 3 inches in any direction. b. Elevation of piles: Not more than 1 inch higher nor more than 3 inches lower than elevation indicated on the Drawings. c. Deviation of vertical piles from vertical: Not more than 1/4 inch per foot of length. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field measurements: 1. Pile location survey: a. After piles are driven and prior to placing reinforcing steel, formwork, or concrete for structure, prepare pile location survey showing coordinates of final location of butt of piles and elevations of butt of piles to accuracy of plus or minus 0.01 feet. b. Pile location survey shall be performed by Surveyor registered in the state where the Project is located. c. Provide survey that includes the minimum following information: 1) Location of piles: a) Location of pile butts as indicated on the Drawings. b) Location of pile butts as driven. c) Calculated distances between location coordinates of the pile butts as indicated on the Drawings and actual location coordinates of the pile butts as driven. Technical Specifications 02455-6 Driven Piles 2) Elevation of pile butts: a) Elevation of pile butts as indicated on the Drawings. b) Elevation of pile butts as driven or cut off. c) Calculate difference between elevations of pile butts as indicated on the Drawings and actual elevation of pile butts as driven. 3) Highlight piles that are not within specified tolerances for location in plan and butt elevation. 4) Provide preceding information in tabular form and keyed to a pile location drawing by pile number: a) Provide pile location drawing that shows each pile for each structure. d. Engineer will use pile location survey information to evaluate acceptability of pile locations. 2. Video Survey a. Conduct a downhole video survey of each pile immediately after driving. b. The video survey shall extend to the soil filled portion of the pile. c. After removal of soils within the upper 20 ft of the pile, conduct a second video survey to ensure the pile is cleaned. Repeat the video survey if further cleaning is required. d. Conduct the video survey only in the presence of the Engineer. e. Provide the Engineer with and electronic copy of all video surveys. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Correction of defective pile work: 1. Pile work not in accordance with the requirements indicated on the Drawings and specified is considered defective. 2. Take corrective measures acceptable to the Engineer if piles are damaged, out of tolerance, mislocated, heaved by subsequent driving of adjacent piles, or otherwise defective: a. Cost of redesign of foundation elements by the Engineer required by reason of defective pile work shall be borne by Contractor. b. Allow 15 working days from submittal of pile location survey, for design of corrections for defective pile work. 3. Measures to be used to correct defective pile work will be selected by the Engineer. Corrective measures that may be acceptable to the Engineer include: a. Redrive piles heaved by subsequent driving of adjacent piles. b. Drive additional piles at locations selected by the Engineer. Technical Specifications 02455-7 Driven Piles c. Pile caps will be redesigned by the Engineer and required details of modifications to pile caps will be given to the Contractor to accommodate piles that were driven out of tolerance. 4. Leave piles which are not accepted in the ground: a. Cut off such piles at least 1 foot below bottom of pile cap and fill holes with aggregate base course material. b. Fill shells with concrete. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 02455-8 Driven Piles SECTION 02512 FOUNDATION UNDERDRAIN SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Foundation drain systems. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Foundation Drainage System: 1. System which drains by gravity, connects to site drainage as shown on Drawings. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings per Section 01340: 1. Type, size and manufacturer of drain pipe. a. Manufacturer's installation instructions 2. Drain rock product data. 3. Filter fabric product data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GEOTEXTILE (FILTER FABRIC) A. Nonwoven type. B. Apparent opening size: 70-120 (ASTM D4751). C. Flow Rate: 4 gal/min/ft2 minimum (ASTM D4491). D. Grab strength: 120 LBS minimum in either direction in accordance with ASTM D4632 requirements. E. Mullen burst strength: 250 psi minimum in accordance with ASTM D3786 requirements. F. Approved Products, or approved equal: 1. Mirafi 140N 2. Typar 3501 3. Skaps GT-160 2.2 DRAINPIPE A. Structure Underdrain Pipe shall be perforated around the perimeter of the foundation and non-perforated in all sections away from the foundation. Technical Specifications 02512-1 Foundation Underdrain System B. Perforated Structure Underdrain Pipe shall be placed around the foundation of structures with the centerline of the high point at the same elevation as the footing base elevation. Slope underdrain pipe to gravity drain into the stormwater drain piping system. C. Perforations: Perforations shall be 0.5-in. diameter on 5-in. centers in two parallel rows. The perforations rows shall be placed 60 degrees on either side of the invert of the pipe. D. Non-Perforated Pipe: Place non-perforated between rectangular drain pipe sections and daylight location of drain sloping at 0.25-in. per ft. Coat exposed portion of pipe with 8 mils Prolux 9035 Acrylic Aliphatic polyurethane. 2.3 DRAIN ROCK A. Drain rock shall be 1 to 2-in. washed drain rock. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Hand place geotextile with 18 inches minimum laps at splices. Spread filter material in same direction as fabric overlap. 1. Patch tears and holes in fabric with piece of same fabric material large enough to cover the tear or hole plus an 18 inch overlap in all directions. B. Lay drain pipe lines firmly bedded in filter material to true grades and alignment with invert elevation specified. Unless indicated otherwise on Drawings, install pipes level to point of discharge with perforations down and joints closed. Make joints with bell and spigot, sleeve type couplings or tapered couplings. Provide couplings suitable for holding pipe firmly in alignment. Face bells upgrade away from point of discharge. C. Test drain lines with water to assure free flow before covering. Remove obstructions and retest to satisfactory of Owner. D. Provide filter material around drain pipes of depths and thicknesses shown on Drawings. Compact filter material with vibrator tamper to density required to preclude settlement and to avoid damage to drain pipe and to filter fabric. Do not damage foundation. If damage occurs to foundation or underdrain, remove backfill and repair to the satisfaction of the Owner. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 02512-2 Foundation Underdrain System SECTION 02513 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING PART GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall perform all work associated with AC Pavement and Base as shown and as specified herein including all labor, materials, equipment supplies, and facilities associated with providing a finished product satisfying all the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Codes: All codes, as referenced herein, are specified on the drawings. B. Standards: AASHTO M 82 Cut-Back Asphalt (Medium Curing Type). AASHTO M 140 Emulsified Asphalt. AASHTO M 208 Cationic Emulsified Asphalt. AASHTO M 226 Viscosity Graded Asphalt Cement. ASTM D 242 Mineral Filler for Bituminous Paving Mixtures. ASTM D 692 Coarse Aggregate for Bituminous Paving Mixtures. ASTM D 977 Emulsified Asphalt. ASTM D 1073 Fine Aggregate for Bituminous Paving Mixtures. ASTM D 1188 Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures Using Paraffin-Coated Specimens. ASTM D 1557 Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil Aggregate Mixtures Using 10-lb (4.54-kg) Rammer and 18-in (457- mm) Drop. ASTM D 2027 Cutback Asphalt (Medium Curing Type). ASTM D 2397 Cationic Emulsified Asphalt. ASTM D 2726 Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures using Saturated Surface-Dry Specimens. ASTM D 3381 Viscosity-Graded Asphalt Cement for Use in Pavement Construction. Technical Specifications 02513-1 Asphaltic Concrete Paving 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit, in writing, materials testing reports, job-mix formulas, and other pertinent information satisfactory to the Engineer demonstrating that materials and methods Contractor proposes to utilize will comply with the provisions of this Section. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01340 - Submittal Procedures. B. Suitability Tests of Proposed Materials: Tests for conformance with the Specifications shall be performed prior to start of the Work. The samples shall be identified to show the name of the material, aggregate source, name of the supplier, contract number, and the segment of the Work where the material represented by the sample is to be used. Results of all tests shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. Materials to be tested shall include aggregate base, coarse and fine aggregate for paving mixtures, mineral filler, and asphalt cement. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 AGGREGATE BASE 1. Materials for aggregate base shall be as follows: Crushed rock aggregate base material of such nature that it can be compacted readily by watering and rolling to form a firm, stable base for pavements. The sand equivalent value shall not be less than 22, and the material shall meet the following gradation requirements: Sieve Size Percent Passing 2-inch 1-1/2-inch - 1-inch 100 3/4-inch 90 - 100 No. 4 35 - 55 No. 30 10 - 30 No. 200 2 - 9 2.2 PRIME COAT A. Prime coat shall be Grade SC-250 liquid asphalt complying with the requirements of AASHTO M 82 (ASTM D 2027). Grade SC-70 liquid asphalt may be used when acceptable to the Engineer. 2.3 TACK COAT A. Tack coat shall be emulsified asphalt Grade SS-1 or SS-1 h, CSS-1 or CSS-1 h diluted with one part water to one part emulsified asphalt, undiluted asphalt Grade RS-1 or CRS-1, or paving asphalt Grade AR-1000. Emulsified asphalt shall comply with the requirements of AASHTO M 140 (ASTM D 977) or M 208 (ASTM D 2397); Technical Specifications 02513-2 Asphaltic Concrete Paving paving asphalt shall comply with the requirements of AASHTO M 226 (ASTM D 3381). 2.4 ASPHALT CEMENT A. Asphalt Cement shall be Grade AR-4000 complying with the requirements of AASHTO M226 (ASTM D 3381). 2.5 MINERAL AGGREGATE A. Mineral aggregate shall be crushed stone, crushed slag, crushed gravel, stone or slag screening, sand, mineral filler, or a combination of two or more of these materials. Coarse and fine aggregates shall comply with all the quality requirements, except soundness, of ASTM D 692 and D 1073, respectively. Coarse aggregate failing to comply with abrasion requirements may be used if experience has demonstrated it to be satisfactory. B. Mineral filler shall comply with ASTM D 242. C. Combinations of aggregates having a history of polishing shall not be used in surface courses. Aggregate shall be either 3/4-inch or 1/2-inch maximum size as shown. The Contractor may select which aggregate mix to use at its option. COMPOSITION OF MIXES Mix Designation and Nominal Maximum Size of Aggregate Sieve Size 3/4" 1/2" Total Percent Passing (by Weight) 2-in - - 1-1/2-in - - 1-in 100 - 3/4- in 90-100 100 1/2-in - 90-100 3/8-in 56-80 - No.4 35-65 44-74 No.8 23-49 28-58 No. 50 5-19 5-21 No. 200 2-8 2-10 Asphalt Cement (wt. 4-10 4-11 percent of total mixture) TEST LIMIT CRITERIA: Hveem Method Mix Criteria Technical Specifications 02513-3 Asphaltic Concrete Paving Stability Value 37 min Swell, mm (0.030) max 0.762 max Percent Air Voids 4 min 2.6 ASPHALT-AGGREGATE MIXTURE A. Asphalt-Aggregate Mixture Tolerances: The following tolerances for the job-mix formula will be allowed per single test: Passing Sieve Percent 1/2-inch and larger ±8 3/8-inch and NO.4 ±7 No..8 ±6 No. 50 ±5 No. 200 ±3 Asphalt Content. Wt. percent by weight +0.5 of total mixture Results of single extraction and sieve tests shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection of the mixture. Any variation from the job-mix formula greater than the tolerances shown above shall be investigated and the conditions causing the variations corrected. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SUBGRADE PREPARATION A. The subgrade shall be prepared as specified in the Section 02200 — Earthwork. The surface of the subgrade after compaction shall be hard, uniform, smooth and true to grade and cross-section. Subgrade for base material shall not vary more than 0.04-foot from the specified grade and cross section. 3.2 AGGREGATE BASE A. Aggregate base shall be provided where required and to the thickness shown. Imported aggregate bases shall be delivered to the job site as uniform mixtures and each layer shall be spread in one operation. Segregation shall be avoided and the base shall be free of pockets of coarse or fine material. Where the required thickness is 6 inches or less, the base materials may be spread and compacted in one layer. Where the required thickness is more than 6 inches the base material shall be spread and compacted in two or more layers of approximately equal thickness and the maximum compacted thickness of anyone layer shall not exceed 6 inches. The relative compaction of each layer of aggregate base shall be not less than 95 percent of maximum density when measured in accordance with ASTM D 1557 and as determined by ASTM D 2922. The compacted surface of the finished Technical Specifications 02513-4 Asphaltic Concrete Paving aggregate shall be hard, uniform, smooth and at any point shall not vary more than 0.02 foot from the specified grade or cross-section. 3.3 PRIME COAT A. Prior to placing of pavement a prime coat of cutback asphalt shall be applied to the compacted base or subgrade at a rate of 0.25 gal/sq yd. Prime coat shall be applied only during daylight hours, to a dry surface and when atmospheric temperature is not less than 50 degrees F. The distributor shall be capable of supplying bituminous material with a maximum allowable variation from specified rate of 0.02 gallons per square yard. Asphalt concrete pavement shall not be placed on prime or tack coat unless it has cured for 24 hours. 3.4 ASPHALT CONCRETE A. At the time of delivery to the Work site, the temperature of mixture shall not be lower than 260 degrees F or higher than 320 degrees F, the lower limit to be approached in warm weather and the higher in cold weather. B. Asphalt concrete shall not be placed unless the atmospheric temperature is at 40 degrees F and rising and all other weather conditions are suitable. C. The asphalt concrete shall be evenly spread upon the subgrade or base to such a depth that, after rolling, it will be of the specified cross section and grade of the course being constructed. D. The depositing, distributing, and spreading of the asphalt concrete shall be accomplished in a single, continuous operation by means of a self-propelled mechanical spreading and finishing machine designed specially for that purpose. The machine shall be equipped with a screed or strike-off assembly capable of being accurately regulated and adjusted to distribute a layer of the material to a definite predetermined thickness. When paving is of a size or in a location that use of a self-propelled machine is impractical the Engineer may waive the self-propelled requirement. E. Spreading, once commenced, must be continued without interruption. F. The mix shall be compacted immediately after placing. Initial rolling with a steel wheeled tandem roller, steel three-wheeled roller, vibratory roller, or a pneumatic- tired roller shall follow the paver as closely as possible. If needed, intermediate rolling with a pneumatic-tired roller shall be done immediately behind the initial rolling. Final rolling shall eliminate marks from previous rolling. In areas too small for the roller a vibrating plate compactor or a hand tamper shall be used to achieve thorough compaction. G. Upon completion the pavement shall be true to grade and cross-section. When a 10-ft straightedge is laid on the finished surface parallel to the center of the roadway, the surface shall not vary from the edge of the straightedge more than 1/8- in except at intersections or changes of grade. In the transverse direction, the surface shall not vary from the edge of the straightedge more than 1/4-in. Technical Specifications 02513-5 Asphaltic Concrete Paving H. The relative density after compaction shall be 97 percent of the density obtained by using ASTM D 1188 or D 2726. A properly calibrated nuclear asphalt testing device shall be used for determining the field density of compacted asphalt concrete. Determination of final pavement density shall be made from cores taken on site in accordance with AASHTO T 230 "Core Drill Method". A minimum of 4 cores shall be taken and tested. Representative samples will be taken at the paver to verify compliance of the mix with that of the job mix formula at least once each day. I. Construct joints to ensure continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct joints free of depressions with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot-mix asphalt course. J. Offset longitudinal joints in successive courses a minimum of 6 in. Offset transverse joints in successive courses a minimum of 24 in. K. Compact joints as soon as hot-mix asphalt will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Contractor shall verify the work performed with mentioned specifications and relevant standards. A. Thickness: In-place compacted thickness of hot-mix asphalt courses will be determined according to ASTM D 3549. B. Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of each hot-mix asphalt course will be tested for compliance with smoothness tolerances. C. In-Place Density: Samples of uncompacted paving mixtures and compacted pavement will be secured by testing agency according to ASTM D 979 and shall be tested per relevant ASTM Standards. D. One core sample will be taken for every 1,000 sq. yd. (836 sq. m) or less of installed pavement, but in no case will fewer than 3 cores be taken. E. Field density of in-place compacted pavement may also be determined by nuclear method according to ASTM D 2950 and correlated with ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726. F. Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or measurements indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 02513-6 Asphaltic Concrete Paving SECTION 02800 LANDSCAPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall perform all the landscaping and all appurtenant Work, complete, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Codes: 1. Federal Specifications, FS 0-F-241 D - Fertilizer, Mixed, Commercial 2. Commercial Standards, ANSI/ASTM D 422 — Method for Particle Size Analysis of Soils 3. ANSI Z60.1 — Nursery Stock 4. American Association of Nurserymen, Inc. — Rules and Grading Provisions 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. General: The Contractor shall furnish a certificate of inspection, as may be required by Federal, State, County or other authorities having jurisdiction to the engineer with each delivery stating source, quantity, and type of material. All materials shall conform to specification requirements. All submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01340. B. Certified Report on Topsoil Analysis: The Contractor shall submit for approval by the Engineer a certified report by an approved analytical laboratory showing analyses of representative samples of topsoil proposed for use. The topsoil shall not be delivered to the site until approval is received from the Engineer. Approval of the laboratory report does not constitute final acceptance. Topsoil shall be subject to rejection by the Engineer on or after delivery if it is found not to meet the requirements of the Specifications or does not conform to the laboratory test results. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: All plants furnished by the Contractor shall be true to type or name as shown in the Contract Documents and shall be tagged in accordance with the standard practice recommended by the Code of Practice for Agricultural at the project location. B. All inspections herein specified will be made by the Engineer or its representative. C. The Contractor shall request inspection at least three days in advance of the time inspection is required. Inspection will be required on the following stages of the Work: 1. During preliminary grading, soil preparation, and initial weeding. Technical Specifications 02800-1 Landscaping 2. When trees are spotted for planting, but before planting holes have been excavated. 3. When finish grading has been completed, including placement of all berms. 4. When all specified work, except the maintenance period has been completed. 5. Final inspection at the completion of the maintenance period. D. Plants shall be subject to inspection and approval or rejection by the Owner at place of growth and upon delivery to the site at any time before or during progress of the Work based on: 1. Quantity, quality, size, and variety; 2. Root condition; and 3. Latent defects and injuries resulting from handling, disease, and insects. E. Plants approved at pre-planting inspection shall still be subject to rejection during planting if found to be below Specifications and removed from the site and replaced with acceptable equals. 1.5 CLEANUP A. Upon completion of all planting operations, the portion of the project site used for a Work or storage area by the Contractor shall be cleaned of all debris, superfluous materials, and equipment. 1.6 MAINTENANCE OF LANDSCAPING PLANTING PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE OF PROJECT A. General: The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting, watering, and maintaining all planting and irrigation systems until final acceptance of all Work under the contract, for one full growing season to end upon winterization of the irrigation system. B. Watering: Trees, shrubs, and seeded or sodded lawns shall be thoroughly soaked after planting and provided with additional water at intervals as necessary to provide for good health and growth of the planting. Care shall be taken to avoid excessive washing or puddling on the surface and any such damage caused thereby shall be repaired by the Contractor at its own expense. C. The Contractor shall replace any materials or equipment it has damaged or which have been damaged by its employees or subcontractors. D. Plants shall be maintained in a vigorous, thriving condition by watering, cultivating, weeding, pruning, spraying, and other operations necessary. No trees or shrubs will be accepted unless they are healthy and show satisfactory foliage conditions. E. Any and all sprinkler lines broken or disrupted during this construction shall be replaced to proper working order prior to contract completion and be acceptable to the Owner. Technical Specifications 02800-2 Landscaping 1.7 FINAL INSPECTION AND GUARANTEE A. Written notice requesting inspection shall be submitted to the Engineer at least 10 days prior to the anticipated inspection date. B. Final acceptance of the Work prior to guarantee period of the contract will be accepted upon written approval by the Engineer, on the satisfactory completion of all Work, including maintenance, but exclusive of the replacement of plant material. C. Any delay in the completion of any item of Work in the planting operation which extends the planting into more than one season shall extend the correction period in accordance with the date of completion given. D. The Contractor shall replace, as soon as weather conditions permit, all dead plants and all plants not in a vigorous, thriving condition which are noted at the end of the one-year correction period. E. Plants used for replacement shall be of the same size and variety specified in the plant list. Plants shall be furnished, planted, staked, and mulched as specified. F. All Work done under this contract shall be left in good order to the satisfaction of the Owner and the Contractor shall, without additional expense to the Owner, replace any trees, shrubs, etc., which develop defects or die during the one-year correction period. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All landscaping materials for soil conditioning, weed abatement, fertilizing or planting shall be first-grade, commercial quality and shall have certificates indicating the source of material, analysis, quantity, or weight attached to each sack or container or provided with each delivery. 2.2 TOPSOIL A. Topsoil shall be obtained from naturally drained areas and shall be fertile, friable loam suitable for plant growth. Topsoil shall be subject to inspection and approval at the source of supply and upon delivery. B. The topsoil shall be of uniform quality, free from subsoil stiff or lumpy clay, hard clods, hardpan, rocks, disintegrated debris, plants, roots, seeds, and any other materials that would be toxic or harmful to plant growth. Topsoil shall contain no noxious weeds or noxious weed seeds. C. The topsoil shall contain at least 6 percent organic matter as determined by loss of weight after ignition of dried (moisture-free) samples in accordance with current methods of the Association of Official Agricultural Chemists. D. The acidity range of the topsoil shall be (pH 5.5 to pH 7.5). The salinity level shall be measured by conductivity at less than 3 millimhos. E. Soil mix for interior plants shall be an approved soil mix furnished in bags or other standard containers with name, weight, and guaranteed analysis of contents clearly Technical Specifications 02800-3 Landscaping marked thereon. The soil mix shall be a mix designed specifically for interior container or potted planting. 2.3 FERTILIZER AND ADDITIVES A. Fertilizer shall be furnished in bags or other standard containers with name, weight, and guaranteed analysis of contents clearly marked thereon. B. Chemical fertilizers shall be a mixed commercial fertilizer conforming to FS 0-F-241 D. 2.4 PLANT MATERIALS A. All plants shall be symmetrical and shall conform to the size, age, and condition as specified on the plant list shown in the Contract Documents. Exceptions are as follows: 1. Plants larger than specified in the plant list may be used if approved by the Owner, but use of such plants shall not increase the contract price. If the use of larger plants is approved, the spread of roots or ball earth shall be increased in proportion to the size of the plant. Bare root plants furnished in size greater than specified shall be balled and burlapped when required by the Engineer. B. Plants (indicated to be in marked cans, pots, or other containers on the plant list) shall have been grown in the containers for a minimum of 6 months and a maximum of 1 1/2 years. Roots shall fill the containers but show no evidence of being or having been root bound. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. The landscape Work shall not be performed at any time when it may be subject to damage by climatic conditions. B. The Contractor shall verify all dimensions in the Contract Documents. Dimensions and plant locations shown shall be coordinated with Engineer and final location shall be site-oriented by the planter and Engineer. Any discrepancies or inconsistencies discovered shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer. C. In case of conflict between the plant list totals and total plant count of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide the higher number of plants. D. Delivery of materials may begin only after samples and tests have been approved by the Engineer. All materials furnished for the Work shall be equivalent to the approved samples. E. Burning of combustible materials on the site shall not be permitted. F. The Contractor shall provide protection to structures, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities in areas of Work which are subject to damage during landscape Work. Open excavations shall be provided with barricades and warning lights which conform to the requirements of governing authorities and the State's OSHA safety requirements from dusk to dawn each day and when needed for safety. Technical Specifications 02800-4 Landscaping G. Planting areas include all areas to be landscaped unless, specified or shown, otherwise. 3.2 SOIL PREPARATION A. The landscape Work shall not begin until all other trades have repaired all areas of settlement, erosion, rutting, etc., and the soils have been re-established, recompacted, and refinished to finish grades. The Engineer shall be notified of all areas which prevent the landscape Work from being executed. B. Areas requiring grading by the landscaper including adjacent transition areas shall be uniformly level or sloping between finish elevations to within 0.1-ft above or below required finish elevations. C. The landscape Work shall not proceed until after walks, curbs, pavings, edging, and irrigation systems are in place. The contract operations shall be completed to a point where the landscape areas will not be disturbed. The subgrade shall be cleaned free of waste materials of all kinds. D. During grading waste materials in the planting areas such as weeds, rocks (2 inches and larger) building materials, rubble, wires, cans, glass, lumber, sticks, etc., shall be removed from the site. Weeds shall be dug out by the roots. E. Fertilizers, additives, seed, etc. subject to moisture damage shall be kept in a weatherproof storage place in such a manner that they will be kept dry. F. After removal of waste materials the planting areas subgrade shall be scarified and pulverized to a depth of not less than 6 inches and all surface irregularities below the cover of topsoil removed. G. Finish grading shall consist of: 1. Final contouring of the planting areas. 2. Placing 4 inches of topsoil over all areas to be planted unless shown or specified otherwise. 3. Placing all soil additives and fertilizers. 4. Tilling of planting areas. 5. After tilling, bring areas to uniform grades by floating and/or hand raking. 6. Making minor adjustment of finish grades as directed by the Engineer. 7. Removing waste materials such as stones, roots, or other undesirable foreign material and raking, disking, dragging, and smoothing soil ready for planting. H. Any unusual subsoil condition that will require special treatment shall be reported to the Engineer. I. Topsoil shall be uniformly distributed over all areas where required. Subgrade and topsoil shall be damp and free from frost. Technical Specifications 02800-5 Landscaping J. Surface drainage shall be provided as shown by molding the surfaces to facilitate the natural run-off of water. Low spots and pockets shall be filled with topsoil and graded to drain properly. K. In all shrub planting areas, 3 inches of soil-aid, compost, or manure shall be mixed into the top 9 inches of soil. 3.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING OF PLANT MATERIALS A. No plants other than the required samples shall be dug or delivered to the site until the required inspections have been made and the plant samples are approved. B. Plants shall not be pruned prior to delivery except upon approval by the Engineer. C. Plant material shall be planted on the day of delivery. If not possible, plants shall be planted within two (2) days after delivery. D. During planting operations, bare roots shall be covered with canvas, wet straw, or other suitable materials. No plants shall be bound with wire or rope at any time so as to damage the bark or break branches. E. Plants shall not be picked up or moved by stem or branches, but shall be lifted and handled from the sides of the containers. F. Plants shall be lifted and handled from the bottom of the ball or container. Plants with balls cracked or broken before or during planting operations will not be accepted and shall be immediately removed from the site. 3.4 TREE AND PLANT LOCATIONS A. The Contractor shall locate and stake all tree and shrub locations and have the locations approved by the Engineer before starting excavation for same. The plant locations shall be observed, and their locations shall be adjusted as directed by Engineer before final approval. B. No trees shall be located closer than 72 inches to structures unless otherwise shown. C. Ground covers and shrubs may be planted up to structures or curbs. 3.5 PLANT PITS A. Plant pits, centered on location stakes, shall be excavated circular pits with vertical sides and flat or saucer shaped bottom in accordance with the following sizes unless shown otherwise: 1. Tree pits shall be at least 2 feet greater in diameter than the specific diameter of ball or spread of roots, and at least 6 inches below depth of ball or roots. Technical Specifications 02800-6 Landscaping 2. Shrubs shall be planted in pits or holes of soil 24 inches deep below finished grade, or as much deeper as necessary to properly set the plant at finished grade with a minimum of 6 inches of planting soil under balls of all plants. Shrubs with balls shall be planted in pits that are at least 24 inches greater in diameter than the bottom of ball. Bare root shrubs shall be planted in pits at least 12 inches below the roots of the plant. 3.6 PREPARED BACKFILL A. Tree and shrub pit backfilling soil shall consist of 3 parts topsoil, and 1 part compost or soil-aid by volume. Slow release fertilizer tablets comprised of 20-10-5 shall be used with all plantings at rate recommended by manufacturer. B. Planting pit, bin, and trench filling and bedding soil shall consist of 4 parts by volume topsoil mixed with 1 part manure. C. Materials shall be thoroughly rotary-mixed on the site before placement. Mixing of materials in pits, bins, trenches or beds will not be permitted. D. Tree and shrub pits shall be provided with slow release fertilizer tablets comprised of 20-10-5 as follows: 1. 1 per one-gallon can plant 2. 3 per 5-gallon can plant 3. 5 per 15-gallon can plant 3.7 ROCKS OR UNDERGROUND OBSTRUCTIONS A. In the event that rock or underground obstructions are encountered in the excavation of plant pits, alternative locations shall be selected by the Engineer. Moving of trees to alternative locations shall not entail additional costs to the Owner. 3.8 SETTING PLANT MATERIALS A. The soil shall not be worked when the moisture content is so great that excessive compaction will occur, nor when it is so dry that a dust will form in the air or that clods will not break readily. Water shall be applied if necessary to provide ideal moisture for filling and for planting as herein specified. B. Plants shall be set in center of pits as shown in the Contract Documents. They shall be set plumb and straight, and at such a level that after settlement that the crown of the plant will be 2 inches above the finished grade. C. All ground cover plants shall be evenly spaced, staggered in rows, and set at intervals specified, so as to produce a uniform effect. Plants shall be watered immediately after planting operations have been completed. D. All shrubs and vines shall be pruned to remove damaged branches. All bare root shrubs shall be pruned and shaped to compensate for transplant root loss. E. Planting soil around roots or balls shall be thoroughly compacted and watered. After planting, the soil in the shrub beds shall be cultivated between shrubs, raked smooth, Technical Specifications 02800-7 Landscaping and neatly outlined. Muddy soil shall not be used for backfilling. All broken or frayed roots shall be properly cut off. F. Trees and shrubs on slopes steeper than 6 to 1 shall be provided with watering dams or berms at least 6 inches high and 8 inches wider than planting pit (hole) unless specified or shown otherwise. G. All trees shall be thoroughly watered immediately after planting. H. Remove all tags and labels when directed by Engineer. 3.9 PRUNING AND MULCHING A. Each tree and shrub shall be pruned in accordance with standard horticultural practice to preserve the natural character of the plant in the manner fitting its use in the landscape design, as approved by the Engineer. B. All dead wood or suckers and all broken or badly bruised branches shall be removed by thinning out and shortening branches. Deciduous bare-rooted plants shall have not less than 1/3 of their respective leaf surfaces removed. All cuts shall be made just above a healthy bud. Pruning shall be done with clean, sharp tools. Cuts over 3/4-inch diameter shall be painted with an approved tree paint. Paint shall cover all exposed cambium as well as other living tissue. Paint shall be waterproof, adhesive, and elastic antiseptic; shall be free from kerosenes, coal tar, creosote, or other materials injurious to the life of the tree; and shall be approved before it is used. C. Plants shall be mulched after planting and cultivating have been completed. A layer of mulch materials, as hereinbefore specified, shall be spread on finished landscaping grade within all planting areas to a depth of 2 inches. The mulch around isolated plants shall be 6 inches greater in diameter than the planting hole. All shrub and ground cover beds shall be completely covered with the mulch. D. All deciduous tree trunks shall be thoroughly sprayed with a methoxychlor or similar insecticide, and wrapped immediately after planting, with wrapping material overlapping (1-1/2 inches, wound from ground line to the second branch, and securely taped in at least 5 places, including the top, middle, and bottom). END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 02800-8 Landscaping SECTION 02810 IRRIGATION SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. A conceptual irrigation layout is shown on the drawings. Contractor shall design an irrigation system in accordance with the Contract Document for all landscaping. Irrigation system design: 1. Submit irrigation design to Owner and Engineer for review and approval. Design shall be specific to the type of plants, shrubs, and trees watered. 2. Install system per approved shop drawings. 3. Contractor responsible for proper operation of system and, therefore, adjustments that can be made to insure a more suitable system. 4. Comply with all local codes and regulations. B. Provide all design, materials, labor, installation, testing and adjustment for a complete and operable irrigation system. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design criteria: 1. Design sprinklers to provide head to head coverage, or 200% coverage, of all irrigated areas. 2. Provide minimum of 1.5 inches of precipitation per week to lawn and shrubbed areas. 3. Provide minimum of 40 PSI at base of moving spray sprinklers and 30 PSI for fixed spray sprinkler heads. 4. Design for prevailing wind of 5 MPH and local soil types. 5. Adjust sprinkling time to soil type to reduce water runoff. 6. Locate sprinklers as required. 7. Avoid overspray onto adjacent walks, drives, parking areas, kiosk, and buildings. B. Installer qualifications: Personnel experienced in commercial irrigation and engaged in this type of work for at least 2 years. C. Coordinate system with existing plants and new plants indicated on drawings. D. Provide double check valve at mainline connection to water supply. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings: 1. Indicate complete layout of piping, type, size, station flow rates, operating pressure, quantity of water system is designed to apply per week, and length of time each station is designed to apply required water. Technical Specifications 02810-1 Irrigation System a. Differentiate between type of ground coverage (groundcovers, lawns, shrubs, trees, etc.). b. Location of components. c. Identify irrigation components used including but not limited to piping, tubing, quick couplers, rotors, spray heads, bubblers, emitters, main valves, control valves, shut-off valves, controller, sensors, drains. B. Product data: 1. Manufacturer's specifications for all materials. C. Project information: 1. Hydrostatic trunk line test report. D. Contract closeout information: 1. Operating, programming, and maintenance data. 2. As-built drawings of installed irrigation system with time and flow rates of each station. 3. Warranty of all materials. 1.4 JOB CONDITIONS A. Contractor shall install irrigation system and make provisions to connect irrigation water supply piping to future water supply infrastructure as shown on the drawings. B. Provide irrigation tap and all connections. C. Verify location of existing and new underground utilities and structures. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Written warranty for one year on installation and materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Acceptable manufacturers (or approved equal): 1. Sprinkler heads and nozzles, controllers, and valves: 1) Hunter. 2. Valve boxes (or approved equal): 1) Carson Inds. 3. Major components to be manufactured or assembled by one manufacturer. 2.2 PIPING AND WIRING A. Polyethylene pipe (for lateral lines): 1. Polyethylene pipe: a. Pressure rating 100 PSI. Technical Specifications 02810-2 Irrigation System b. Mark pipe continuously and permanently with manufacturers name or trademark, size, schedule type of pipe, and working pressure. 2. Pipe connections: a. PVC plastic insert type with stainless steel pinch ear or screw type clamp. 3. Sprinkler head fittings: a. Polyethylene flexible swing joint assembly with barbed elbows. b. PVC plastic elbows, tees, and couplers with stainless steel pinch ear or screw type clamp. c. Polyethylene adjustable length, cut-off risers and fittings. B. Riser assembly: 1. Rotating pop up sprinkler or quick coupling valves to have an adjustable riser assembly (triple swing joint riser) assembled by use of 3 standard 90 degree ells as recommended by sprinkler manufacturer. 2. Swing joint riser to be same size as inlet to sprinkler head. 3. Stationary spray pop up sprinkler heads to have flexible PVC pipe or polyethylene adjustable length cut off risers. 4. Sprinkler riser to be same size as inlet to sprinkler head. C. Sleeves for control wiring and piping: 1. ASTM-D1785, Schedule-40 PVC. 2. Install under walks and paving as indicated prior to installation of walks and paving. D. Valve boxes, or approved equal: 1. Molded polyfiber, with green colored, non-hinged, bolted cover. 2. Carson Industries models 910 or 1419. E. Jointing materials: 1. Solvent cement: ASTM-D2564. 2. Rubber gaskets: AWWA-Cl11. F. Electrical wiring: 1. Type "UF", 600 volt, stranded or solid copper, single conductor wire with PVC insulation, UL labeled for direct underground burial. 2. Conductors not smaller than No.14 AWG. 3. Insulation: 1/16 IN thick minimum covering of ICC-100 compound for positive waterproofing protection. 4. Sizes 14, 12, 10 and 8: Single conductor solid copper wire; sizes 6 and 4: Stranded copper wire. 5. Control or"hot" wires orange, red or black; common or ground wires white. 6. Wire types and installation conform to local codes. 7. Provide expansion coils as required. Technical Specifications 02810-3 Irrigation System 8. Size conductors to provide sufficient voltage at valve solenoids for proper operation. 9. Provide wiring from control valves to controllers. 2.3 VALVES A. Manual circuit valves: 1. 2 IN and smaller: Ball valve, Cast Iron or Brass. a. Pressure rated at 200 PSI at 73 degF. b. Teflon ball seals. c. Forged body. 2. 2-1/2 IN and larger: Brass ball valve: a. Pressure rated at 200 PSI. b. Teflon ball seals. c. Forged body. 3. Locate in valve boxes. B. Manual drain valves: 1. Ball valve, Brass. a. Pressure rated at 200 PSI at 73 degF. b. Teflon ball seals. c. Forged body. 2. Locate in valve boxes. 3. Provide 1 CF gravel sump in bottom of valve box. C. Quick coupling valves: 1. Bronze or brass, 2 piece, cast body. 2. Valve seat and throat with replaceable seals. 3. Bronze cover. 4. Size: 3/4 IN single or double lug, with 3/4 IN valve key and hose swivel for 3/4 IN hoses. D. Automatic drain valves: 1. Brass. 2. Positive sealing at 3 to 5 PSI and opening to drain below this pressure. 3. 1/2 IN male pipe thread connection. 4. Install 30 - 45 degrees below horizontal position with 6 IN length of PVC pipe placed over outlet to prevent dirt particles from being washed back into valve. 5. Provide 1 CF gravel sump at outlet pipe. E. Remote control valves: Technical Specifications 02810-4 Irrigation System 1. Body, bonnet, etc., molded from high strength engineering plastic. 2. Normally closed, electrically operated. 3. 24 VAC solenoid. 4. Flow control. 5. Manual bleed. 2.4 SPRINKLER CONTROLLER A. Sprinkler controller: 1. Three valve programming per station. 2. 24 HR watering cycle programmable for variable day cycle with capability to skip a day in watering period. 3. 0 to 90 minutes and 0 to 9.9 hour timing per station. 4. Rainy weather ON/OFF switch. Provide with rain sensor. 5. Master valve/pump start circuit. 6. Locking metal cabinet with keys. 7. Manual or automatic operation without disturbing preset automatic operation. 8. 115-120 VAC, with internal hard wired transformer. 9. Battery back-up to maintain programs for two weeks. 10. Maximum 12 hour drip irrigation station timing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Stake out location of each run of pipe and sprinkler heads and valve locations prior to ditching. 1. Design location of heads is approximate. Modify location in field to obtain best coverage possible. B. Excavate trenches to required depth and width to permit proper handling and installation of pipe and fittings. 1. Compact backfill thoroughly, in 6 IN lifts, evened off with adjacent soil level. 2. Hand rake smooth. C. If possible, pipe may be installed with a vibratory plow to minimize surface disturbance. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Lay piping at sloped grade so that entire system of piping will completely drain to low point. 1. Install manual drain valves at low points along main trunk line. 2. Install automatic drain valves at low points along lateral lines. 3. Install manual circuit valves as indicated. Technical Specifications 02810-5 Irrigation System B. Carefully place pipe, fittings and valves. 1. Keep interior of pipes free of dirt and debris. 2. Close or cap open ends of pipe when laying is not in progress. C. Install sprinkler heads and valves to finish grade indicated. Readjust setting not at proper level. D. Main trunk and lateral lines burial depth: 18 IN minimum of cover over top of pipe. E. Install new sleeves for pipe and wires prior to paving. 1. Depth: 18 IN minimum of cover overtop of sleeve. F. Set heads perpendicular to finished grades. G. Snake plastic pipe in trench to provide for expansion and contraction as recommended by manufacturer. H. Install electric wiring in pipe trenches. 1. Install wiring along side of pipe. 2. Snake wire in trench as much as possible to allow for expansion and contraction. 3. Provide sufficient wire at remote control valves so that, in case of repair, valve bonnet or splice may be brought to surface without disconnecting wire. I. Install controllers as indicated. 1. Connect common wires of remote control valves of 1 controller to that controller's common ground wire system. J. Install soaker hose system per manufacturer's guidelines. K. Restore existing improvements and sod damaged as a result of this work. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Upon completion of main trunk line, hydrostatically test to pressure not less than 50 percent more than maximum operating pressure, but in no case less than 100 PSI. 1. Maintain this pressure for 30 minutes. 2. Repair or replace leaks or defective pipe and repeat tests until test requirements are met. B. After sprinkler piping, risers and heads are in place and connected, open control valves and flush out system with full head of water. 1. Remove and clean internal parts of vertical valves. 2. Repeat as many times as necessary to insure a completely flushed system. 3.4 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Adjust pins of adjustable sprinklers into stream for proper and adequate distribution of water over coverage pattern. B. Tighten nozzles on stationary sprinklers. C. Adjust sprinklers having an adjusting screw, adjusting stem or adjusting friction collar for proper arc of coverage, radius, diameter and/or gallonage discharge. Technical Specifications 02810-6 Irrigation System D. Adjust automatic control valves to correct operating pressure for specific sprinkler heads downstream of valve. E. Thoroughly clean parts, equipment, fixtures, pipe, valves and fittings of grease, plastic cuttings and sludge. F. Prior to final acceptance, inspect and test operation of each piece of equipment and system to satisfaction of Owner. G. Adjust system to provide uniform coverage, insofar as practical. H. Remove debris produced as a result of work. I. Adjust height of heads and valve boxes as required. J. Provide Owner operating and winterizing instructions. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 02810-7 Irrigation System SECTION 02920 TOPSOIL AND FINISH GRADING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Location of work: 1. Areas within limits of grading and areas outside limits of grading which are disturbed in course of work. 2. Six-inches of approved topsoil shall be placed in all planting areas. 3. Four-inches of approved topsoil shall be placed in all areas to be seeded. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Finish grading tolerance: 1. 0.2 ft plus/minus from required elevations. 1.3 JOB CONDITIONS A. Verify amount of topsoil stockpiled and determine amount of additional topsoil, if necessary to complete work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Topsoil: 1. Imported topsoil shall be obtained from naturally drained areas and shall be fertile, friable loam suitable for plant growth. Topsoil shall be subject to inspection and approval by the Owner at the source of supply and upon delivery to the site. All laboratory soil testing shall be ordered and paid by the Contractor. 2. Onsite or imported topsoil shall be of uniform quality, free from toxic substances, subsoil, stiff or lumpy clay, hard clods, hardpan, rocks, disintegrated debris, plants, roots, seeds, and any other materials that would be toxic or harmful to plant growth. Topsoil shall contain no noxious weeds or noxious weed seeds. B. Topsoil used for this work shall meet the following requirements. 1. Soluble salts (EJe) Less than 4 dS/m or mmho/cm 2. ph Between 5.0 and 8.2 3. Sand, silt, clay content Less than 30% clay Less than 70% sand and Less than 70% silt. 4. Soil texture Sand clay loam (SLC) Sandy loam (SL) Clay loam (CL) Technical Specifications 02920-1 Topsoil and Finish Grading 5. Organic matter content (by weight) Minimum 0.5 Percent 6. SAR (sodium absorption ratio) Less than 7 7. Percent coarse fragments (rocks>2mm) Less than 5 percent 8. Nitrate Nitrogen (ppm) Greater than 20 9. Phosphorus (ppm) Greater than 15 10. Potassium (ppm) Greater than 150 11. Iron (ppm) Greater than 10 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Correct, adjust and repair rough graded areas. 1. Cut off mounds and ridges. 2. Fill gullies and depressions. 3. Perform other necessary repairs. 4. Bring sub-grades to specified contours, even and properly compacted. B. Loosen surface to depth of minimum 2 IN. C. Remove stones and debris over 1 IN in any dimension. 3.2 PLACING TOPSOIL A. Do not place topsoil when subgrade is wet or frozen enough to cause clodding. B. Spread topsoil to minimum compacted depth of 4 IN for disturbed earth areas and 6 IN for all planting beds. C. Make finished surface free of stones, sticks, or other material 1 IN or more in any dimension. D. Make finished surface smooth and true to required grades. E. Restore areas occupied by stockpiles to condition of rest of finished work. 3.3 ACCEPTANCE A. Upon completion of topsoiling, obtain Engineer's acceptance of grade and surface. B. Make test holes as directed, to verify proper placement and thickness of topsoil. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 02920-2 Topsoil and Finish Grading SECTION 02932 NATIVE GRASS SEEDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Location of work: Establish native grasses on all areas of disturbed ground outside of paved areas which are not occupied by other planting or construction. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Seed mix data sheet. B. Material data sheets. C. Maintenance data. 1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver seed in standard sealed containers labeled with producer's name and seed analysis, and in accordance with US Department of Agriculture Rules and Regulations under Federal Seed Act. B. Deliver fertilizer in original containers, labeled with content analysis. 1.4 JOB CONDITIONS A. Perform seeding between November 1 and June 30. B. May 1 to June 30 is preferred. C. Preferred planting time for cover crop: June 1 through July 15. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Warrant seeded areas for 1 year from Substantial Completion. B. Reseed as required to establish full cover. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Grass shall be Xerilawn by The Turf Company in Meridian, ID, or Owner approved equal. B. Mulch: 1. Weed free hay (not brome or bluegrass hay); prairie grass, Bermuda grass or other hay. 2. Straw mulch of oat, wheat, or rice straw. 3. Mulch to be free of noxious weeds and foreign materials, and kept in a dry condition, not molding or rotten. Technical Specifications 02932-1 Native Grass Seeding C. Fertilizer: Commercial fertilizer of 16-20-0 analysis, meeting applicable requirements of State law. D. Herbicide: 2, 4-D (ester form). E. Cover crop: Sorghum, soybeans, milo, millet or sudangrass, etc. F. Tacking agent: As per State specifications. G. Water: Provide clean, fresh water free from impurities injurious to vegetation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SOIL PREPARATION A. Seeding without cover crop: 1. Plow areas to be seeded to shallow depth as soon as ground can be worked without clodding. 2. Leave ground fallow until weeds geminate, approximately 3 to 4 weeks. 3. Disc entire area again to turn over weeds. 4. Apply fertilizer at a rate of 350 LBS/ACRE. 5. Disc at least twice prior to planting, with seeding done immediately following final discing. B. Leave seedbed weed-free and firm. 3.2 SEEDING A. Seed with grass drill. 1. Drill following contour lines as closely as practical. 2. Nisbet grass drill has been proven to be successful in this operation. 3. Areas of one acre or less may be sown by hand broadcasting; mix seed with generous amount of damp sand to insure even distribution. B. Harrow or rake seed into ground following seeding. 1. Seed depth: Between 1/4 and 1/2 IN. C. Immediately after seeding, protect all seeded areas from erosion by mulching. 1. Spread mulch in continuous blanket using 2 TONs/ACRE. 2. Anchor mulch to ground with disc mulch tiller. 3.3 MAINTENANCE A. Maintain seeded areas for one full growing season. B. Do not mow native grass. C. No more than 5% weeds may be allowed in cover. D. When weeds are shading out native grass seedlings, shred weeds back to height of seedlings with rotary shredder. 1. Before August of growing season, shred weeds at least 2 times. Technical Specifications 02932-2 Native Grass Seeding E. Herbicide may be used to control weed growth in first year. 1. Do not apply until weeds are 40 percent broadleaf and seedlings are at least 1 IN high and at 2-4 leaf stage. 2. If herbicide is used, apply twice. 3. Use 1/2 to 1 LB active ingredient/Acre. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 02932-3 Native Grass Seeding SECTION 03310 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall provide cast-in-place concrete, joints in concrete, reinforcement and appurtenant Work, formwork, bracing, shoring, supports, and shall design and construct falsework, complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. All codes, as referenced herein are specified on the drawings. B. Federal Specifications: TT-S-227E Joint Sealer TT-S-230C Joint Sealer C. Commercial Standards: ACI 117 Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction Materials ACI 214 Recommended Practice for Evaluation of Strength Test Results of Concrete ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete ACI 304 Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete ACI 305 Hot Weather Concrete ACI 306 Cold Weather Concrete ACI 315 Details of Concrete Reinforcement ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete ACI 347 Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork ASTM A185 Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete ASTM A615 Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement ASTM C31 Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete ASTM C33 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates ASTM C39 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Technical Specifications 03310-1 Cast-In-Place Concrete Cylindrical Concrete Specimens ASTM C94 Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete ASTM C143 Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete ASTM C150 Standard Specification for portland Cement ASTM C156 Standard Test Method for Water Retention by Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compounds for Concrete ASTM C157 Standard Test Method for Length Change of Hardened Hydraulic-Cement Mortar and Concrete ASTM C192 Method For Making and Curing Test Specimens ASTM C260 Standard Specification of Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete ASTM C309 Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete ASTM C494 Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete ASTM C920 Standard Specification for Electromeric Joint Sealants Standard Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete ASTM C1077 and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber ASTM D1752 Cork and Recycled PVC Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction AASHTO T 260 Standard Method of Test for Sampling and Testing for Chloride Ion in Concrete and Concrete raw Materials Standard Method of Test for Accelerated Detection of AASHTO T 303 Potentially Deleterious Expansion of Mortar Bars Due to Alkali-Silica Reaction IBC 1704 Special Inspections 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01340 — Submittal Procedures. B. Mix Design & Shop Drawings: Technical Specifications 03310-2 Cast-In-Place Concrete 1. Mix Designs: Prior to beginning the Work, submit preliminary concrete mix designs which shall show the proportions and gradations of materials proposed for each class and type of concrete. The mix designs shall be checked by an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the Engineer. Costs related to such checking shall be the Contractor's responsibility. When a water reducing admixture is to be used, the Contractor shall furnish mix designs for concrete both with and without the admixture. 2. Provide the following Submittals in Accordance with ACI 301: a. Mill tests for cement b. Admixture Certification (Chloride ion content shall be included.) c. Aggregate gradation and certification d. Materials and methods for curing 3. Reinforcement fabrication, erection and placement drawings: a. Shop bending diagrams, placing lists, and drawings of reinforcing steel prior to fabrication. Details of the concrete reinforcing steel and concrete inserts shall be submitted at the earliest possible date after receipt by the Contractor of the Notice to Proceed. Include bar placement diagrams. b. Shop drawings shall conform to ACI 315. c. Placement drawings shall include location of reinforcement, water stops, anchor bolts and other items embedded in concrete that influences placement of reinforcement. 4. Manufacturer's information demonstrating compliance with requirements of the following: a. Preformed joint filler b. Backing rod c. Bond breaker d. Form ties and related accessories e. Form gaskets f. Form release agent g. List of form materials and locations of use h. Material for water stop i. Floor covering and joint filler materials 5. Placement drawings showing the location and type of joints for each structure. 6. Samples of working floor surface coatings. Technical Specifications 03310-3 Cast-In-Place Concrete C. Delivery Tickets: Where ready-mix concrete is used, the Contractor shall furnish certified delivery tickets at the time of delivery of each load of concrete. Each ticket shall show the state certified equipment used for measuring, and the total quantities, by weight, of cement, sand, each class of aggregate, admixtures, the amounts of water in the aggregate, added at the batching plant, and the amount allowed to be added at the Site for the specific design mix. In addition, each certificate shall state the mix number, total yield in cubic yards, and the time of day to the nearest minute, corresponding to the time when the batch was dispatched, when it left the plant, when it arrived at the Site, when unloading began, and when unloading was finished. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing of Materials: 1. Tests on component materials and for compressive strength and shrinkage of concrete will be performed as indicated herein. Tests for determining slump will be in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C143. 2. Testing for aggregate shall include sand equivalence, reactivity, organic impurities, abrasion resistance, and soundness in accordance with ASTM C33 and AASHTO T260. 3. The cost of laboratory tests on cement, aggregates, and concrete, will be borne by the Contractor and the Contractor shall pay the cost of any additional tests and investigations on Work that does not meet the Specifications. The laboratory will meet or exceed the requirements of ASTM C1077. 4. Concrete for testing shall be furnished by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner, and the Contractor shall assist the Engineer in obtaining samples and disposal and cleanup of excess material. B. Inspections: Special inspection shall be provided in conformance with the International Building Code (IBC). C. Field Compression Tests: 1. Compression test specimens shall be taken during construction from the first placement of each class of concrete and at intervals selected by the Engineer to ensure continued compliance with these Specifications. Each set of test specimens will be a minimum of 6 cylinders. 2. Compression test specimens for concrete will be made in accordance with Section 9.2 of ASTM C31. Specimens will be 6-inches diameter by 12-inches high cylinders. 3. Compression tests will be performed in accordance with ASTM C39. Two (2) test cylinder will be tested at seven (7) Days and two (2) at 28 Days. The remaining cylinders will be held to verify test results, if needed. D. Evaluation and Acceptance of Concrete: 1. Evaluation and acceptance of the compressive strength of concrete will be according to the requirements of ACI 318. 2. If any concrete fails to meet these requirements, immediate corrective action shall be taken to increase the compressive strength for subsequent batches of the type of concrete affected. Technical Specifications 03310-4 Cast-In-Place Concrete 3. Concrete that fails to meet the ACI requirements and these Specifications is subject to removal and replacement as part of the Work. E. Construction Tolerances: The Contractor shall set and maintain concrete forms and perform finishing operations so that the concrete is within the tolerances herein. Surface defects and irregularities are defined as finishes and are to be distinguished from tolerances. Tolerance is the permissible variation from lines, grades, or dimensions indicated. Where tolerances are not indicated, permissible deviations will be in accordance with ACI 117. 1. The variation from required lines or grades shall not exceed 1/4-inch in 10-feet and there shall be no offsets or visible waviness in the finished surface. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM AND FALSEWORK MATERIALS A. Except as otherwise expressly accepted by the Engineer, lumber brought on the Site for use as forms, shoring, or bracing shall be new material. B. Materials for concrete forms, formwork, and falsework shall conform to the following requirements: 1. Lumber shall be Douglas Fir or Southern Yellow Pine, construction grade or better, in conformance with U.S. Product Standard PS 20. 2. Form materials shall be metal, wood, plywood, or other material that will not adversely affect the concrete and will facilitate placement of concrete to the shape, form, line, and grade required. Metal forms shall be an approved type that will accomplish such results. Wood forms for surfaces to be painted shall be Medium Density Overlaid plywood, MDO Ext. Grade. C. Unless otherwise indicated, exterior corners in concrete members shall be provided with 3/4-inch chamfers. Re-entrant corners in concrete members shall not have fillets unless otherwise indicated. D. Forms and falsework to support roof and floor slabs shall be designed for a minimum form dead load of 10 psf plus a 50 psf minimum live load. Live load shall be increased when motorized carts are used to a minimum of 75 psf. These loads shall be in addition to concrete dead load. 2.2 FORM TIES A. Form ties shall be provided with a plastic cone or other suitable means for forming a conical hole to insure that the form tie may be broken off back of the face of the concrete. The maximum diameter of removable cones for rod ties or other removable form-tie fasteners having a circular cross-section shall not exceed 1-1/2 inches; and such fasteners shall be such as to leave holes of regular shape for reaming. Form ties shall be Hex Head Snap Tie by MeadowBurke, Snap Ties by Dayton Superior, or equal. Technical Specifications 03310-5 Cast-In-Place Concrete 2.3 REINFORCING STEEL A. General: Reinforcing steel for cast-in-place reinforced concrete construction shall conform to the following requirements: 1. Bar reinforcement shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A615 for Grade 60 Billet Steel Reinforcement, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Welded wire fabric (WWF) shall conform to ASTM A185 and the details indicated. WWF with longitudinal wire of W4 size wire and smaller shall be in flat sheets or in rolls with a core diameter of not less than 10 inches. WWF with longitudinal wires larger than W4 size shall be in flat sheets only. B. Accessories: 1. Include all necessary chairs, slab bolsters, concrete blocks, tie wires, dips, supports, spacers, and other devices to position and secure reinforcement during concrete placement. Bar supports shall conform to CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. Wire bar supports shall be CRSI Class 1 for maximum protection with a 1/8-inch minimum thickness of plastic coating which extends at least 1/2-inch from the concrete surface. Plastic shall be gray in color. 2. Concrete blocks (dobies) used to support and position reinforcing steel shall have the same or higher compressive strength as required for the concrete in which they are located. Wire ties shall be embedded in concrete block bar supports. 2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Materials shall be delivered, stored, and handled so as to prevent damage by water or breakage. Only one brand of cement shall be used. Cement reclaimed from cleaning bags or leaking containers shall not be used. Cement shall be used in the order that it is received. B. Materials for the Work shall conform to ACI 301. C. Storage of materials shall conform to ACI 301. D. Materials for concrete shall conform to the following requirements: 1. Cement shall be standard brand portland cement conforming to ASTM C150 - portland cement for Type I I or Type V. 2. Fly Ash shall be non-staining conforming to ASTM C618, Class F, suitable to provide hardened concrete of uniform light gray color. 3. Water shall be potable, clean, and free from objectionable quantities of silty organic matter, alkali, salts, and other impurities. The water shall be considered potable, for the purposes of this Section only, if it meets the requirements of the local governmental agencies. Agricultural water with high total dissolved solids (over 1000 mg/1 TDS) shall not be used. 4. Aggregates shall be obtained from pits acceptable to the Engineer, shall be non- reactive, and shall conform to ASTM C33. Maximum size of coarse aggregate shall be as indicated. Lightweight sand for fine aggregate will not be permitted. 5. Ready-mix concrete shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C94. Technical Specifications 03310-6 Cast-In-Place Concrete 6. Admixtures: All admixtures shall be compatible and by a single manufacturer capable of providing qualified field service representation. Admixtures shall be used in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. If the use of an admixture is producing an inferior end result, the Contractor shall discontinue use of the admixture. Admixtures shall not contain thiocyanates nor more than 0.05 percent chloride ion, and shall be non-toxic after 30 days. a. Air-entraining agent meeting the requirements of ASTM C260, shall be used. Sufficient air-entraining agent shall be used to provide a total air content of 5 to 7 percent. The Owner reserves the right, at any time, to sample and test the air- entraining agent received on the job by the Contractor. The air-entraining agent shall be added to the batch in a portion of the mixing water. The solution shall be batched by means of a mechanical batcher capable of accurate measurement. Air content shall be tested at the point of placement. Air entraining agent shall be Master-Air AE 200 by Master Builders, Daravair by W.R. Grace, Sika AEA-14 by Sika Corporation, or equal. b. Set controlling and water reducing admixtures: Admixtures may be added at the Contractor's option to control the set, effect water reduction, and increase workability. The addition of an admixture shall be at the Contractor's expense. The use of an admixture shall be subject to acceptance by the Engineer. Concrete containing an admixture shall be first placed at a location determined by the Engineer. Admixtures specified herein shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C494. The required quantity of cement shall be used in the mix regardless of whether or not an admixture is used. 1) Concrete shall not contain more than one water reducing admixture. Concrete containing an admixture shall be first placed at a location determined by the Engineer. 2) Set controlling admixture shall be either with or without water-reducing properties. Where the air temperature at the time of placement is expected to be consistently over 80 degrees F, a set retarding admixture such as Plastocrete 161 by Sika Corporation; Daratard 17 by Grace Construction Products; or equal shall be used. Where the air temperature at the time of placement is expected to be consistently under 40 degrees F, a non-corrosive set accelerating admixture such as Plastocrete 161 FL by Sika Corporation, Master Builder MasterSet FP 20, Polarset by Grace Construction Products, or equal may be used. 3) Normal range water reducer shall conform to ASTM C494, Type A. WRDA 82 by Grace Construction Products; Plastocrete 161 by Sika Corporation; or equal. The quantity of admixture used and the method of mixing shall be in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. 4) High range water reducer shall conform to ASTM C494, Type F or G. Plastol 5000 by Euclid Chemical Company; or equal. High range water reducer shall be added to the concrete after all other ingredients have been mixed and initial slump has been verified. No more than 14 ounces of water reducer per sack of cement shall be used. Water reducer shall be considered as part of the mixing water when calculating water cement ratio. Technical Specifications 03310-7 Cast-In-Place Concrete 5) If the high range water reducer is added to the concrete at the job site, it may be used in conjunction with the same water reducer added at the batch plant. Concrete shall have a slump of 3-inches ± 1/2-inch prior to adding the high range water reducing admixture at the job site. The high range water reducing admixture shall be accurately measured and pressure injected into the mixer as a single dose by an experienced technician. A standby system shall be provided and tested prior to each day's operation of the job site system. 6) Concrete shall be mixed at mixing speed for a minimum of 30 mixer revolutions after the addition of the high range water reducer. 7. Calcium Chloride: Calcium chloride will not be permitted in concrete. 2.5 GROUT A. Cement Grout 1. Cement Grout: Cement grout shall be composed of one-part cement, three parts sand, and the minimum amount of water necessary to obtain the desired consistency. Where needed to match the color of adjacent concrete, white Portland cement shall be blended with regular cement as needed. The minimum compressive strength at 28 days shall be 4000 psi. 2. Cement grout materials shall be as specified in this Section. B. Prepackaged Grouts 1. Non-Shrink Grout: a. Non-shrink grout shall be a prepackaged, inorganic, non-gas-liberating, non- metallic, cement-based grout requiring only the addition of water. Manufacturer's instructions shall be printed on each bag or other container in which the materials are packaged. The specific formulation for each class of non-shrink grout specified herein shall be that recommended by the Manufacturer for the particular application. b. Non-shrink grouts shall have a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 5000 psi; shall have no shrinkage (0.0 percent) and a maximum 4.0 percent expansion in the plastic state when tested in accordance with ASTM C827; and shall have no shrinkage (0.0 percent) and a maximum of 0.2 percent expansion in the hardened state when tested in accordance with CRD C621. C. Consistency 1. The consistency of grouts shall be that necessary to completely fill the space to be grouted for the particular application. Dry pack consistency is such that the grout is plastic and moldable but will not flow. Where "dry pack" is called for in the Contract Documents, it shall mean a grout of that consistency; the type of grout to be used shall be as specified herein for the particular application. 2. The slump for topping grout and concrete fill shall be adjusted to match placement and finishing conditions but shall not exceed 4-inches. Technical Specifications 03310-8 Cast-In-Place Concrete D. Measurement of Ingredients 1. Measurements for cement grout shall be made accurately by volume using containers. 2. Shovel measurement shall not be allowed. 3. Prepackaged grouts shall have ingredients measured by means recommended by the Manufacturer. 2.6 CURING MATERIALS A. Materials for curing concrete shall conform to the following requirements and ASTM C309: 1. Curing compounds shall be white-pigmented and resin-based. Sodium silicate compounds shall not be allowed. Concrete curing compound shall be Kurez VOX White Pigmented by Euclid Chemical Company, Cure R-2 by L&M Construction Chemicals, 1200-White by W.R. Meadows, or equal. When curing compound must be removed for finishes or grouting, curing compounds shall be Kurez DR VOX by Euclid Chemical Company, L&M Cure R by L&M Construction Chemicals, 1100-Clear by WR Meadows, or equal. Curing compounds shall meet local VOC requirements. 2. Polyethylene sheet for use as concrete curing blanket shall be white and shall have a nominal thickness of 6-mils. The loss of moisture when determined in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C156, shall not exceed 0.055 grams per square centimeter of surface. 3. Evaporation retardant shall be a material such as MasteKure ER 50 by BASF, Eucobar by Euclid Chemical Company, E-CON by L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc., or equal. 2.7 JOINT MATERIALS A. Materials for joints in concrete shall conform to the following requirements: 1. Sponge rubber joint filler material shall be of the preformed non-extruding type joint filler constructed of cellular neoprene sponge rubber or polyurethane of firm texture. Bituminous fiber type will not be permitted. Non-extruding and resilient-type preformed expansion joint fillers shall conform to the requirements and tests set forth in ASTM D1752; for Type I, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Elastomeric joint sealers: a. Two component, self leveling, polyurethane or polysulfide sealant conforming to Federal Specification TT-S-227E, Class A, Type 1 and ASTM C920, Type M, Class 25, Grade P. 1) SikaFlex 2cNs by Sika Corporation 2) Chem-Calk 500 by Bostic, or equal. b. One component, self-leveling, polyurethane or polysulfide sealant conforming to Federal Specification TT-S-230C, Class A, Type 1, and ASTM C920, Type S, Class 25, Grade P. Technical Specifications 03310-9 Cast-In-Place Concrete 1) SikaFlex-15LM by Sika Corporation 2) Vulkem 45 by Tremco, or equal. c. One component, gun grade polyurethane based, non sag, vertical and horizontal sealant. 1) Vulkem 116 by Tremco 2) Vulkem 921 by Tremco 3) SikaFlex-15LM by Sika Corporation 4) SikaFlex 1A by Sika Corporation, or equal. 3. Mastic joint sealer shall be a material that does not contain evaporating solvents; that will tenaciously adhere to concrete surfaces; that will remain permanently resilient and pliable; that will not be affected by continuous presence of water and will not in any way contaminate potable water; and that will effectively seal the joints against moisture infiltration even when the joints are subject to movement due to expansion and contraction. The sealer shall be composed of special asphalts or similar materials blended with lubricating and plasticizing agents to form a tough, durable mastic substance containing no volatile oils or lubricants and shall be capable of meeting the test requirements set forth hereinafter, if testing is required by the Engineer. 4. Preformed joint filler (PJF) shall be a non-extruding resilient, bituminous type conforming to the requirements of ASTM D1751. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Floor sealer/hardener shall be a colorless, aqueous solution of zinc and/or magnesium fluosilicate or of sodium silicate, and shall be as manufactured by Grace Construction Products, Sika Corporation; or equal. The solution shall be delivered ready for use in the manufacturer's original sealed containers. Each gallon of the fluosilicate solution shall contain not less than 2 pounds of crystals. B. Dampproofing agent shall be an asphalt emulsion such as MasteerSeak 610 by BASF, Dehydratine 75 by Euclid Chemical Company, Sealmastic by W. R. Meadows Inc., or equal. C. Epoxy adhesive for reinforcing bars and anchors shall be specifically formulated for such application, for the moisture condition, application temperature, and orientation of the hole to be filled. Adhesive shall have an ICC/ES Evaluation Report that shows acceptability of the product for use in the conditions used. 2.9 CONCRETE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. General: 1. Concrete shall be composed of cement, admixtures, aggregates, and water of the qualities indicated. In general, the mix shall be designed to produce a concrete capable of being deposited so as to obtain maximum density and minimum shrinkage, and where deposited in forms, to have good consolidation properties and maximum smoothness of surface. The proportions shall be changed whenever necessary or desirable to meet the required results at no additional cost to the Owner. Mix changes shall be subject to review by the Engineer. Technical Specifications 03310-10 Cast-In-Place Concrete 2. The Contractor is cautioned that the limiting parameters below are NOT a mix design. Admixtures may be required to achieve workability required by the Contractor's construction methods and aggregates. The Contractor is responsible for providing concrete with the required workability. B. Proportioning and Compressive Strength: 1. General: a. Proportion ingredients to produce a mixture which will work readily into corners and angles of forms and around reinforcement by methods of placement and consolidation employed without permitting materials to segregate or excessive free water to collect on surface. b. Proportion ingredients to produce proper placability, durability, strength and other required properties. 2. The minimum compressive strength and cement content of concrete shall be not less than the following tabulation. Type of Work Class of Max Size Cement Max W/C Ratio Concrete Min Aggregate, in Content Per (by weight) 28-Day cu yd, Ibs Compressive Strength, psi Structural 4,000 1 564 to 600 0.45 concrete Sitework 3,000 1 470 (min) 0.50 concrete 3. Fly ash: a. 25 percent by weight of Portland cement content per cubic yard shall be replaced with fly ash at a rate of 1 LB fly ash for 1 LB cement. b. The water to fly ash plus cement ratio not to exceed the maximum water cement ratio specified in this Section. 2.10 CONSISTENCY A. Consistency of the concrete in successive batches shall be determined by slump tests in accordance with ASTM C143. The slumps shall be 3-inches plus or minus 1-inch. 2.11 MEASUREMENT OF CEMENT AND AGGREGATE A. The amount of cement and of each separate size of aggregate entering into each batch of concrete shall be determined by direct weighing equipment furnished by the Contractor and acceptable to the Engineer; provided that, where batches are so proportioned as to contain an integral number of conventional sacks of cement and the cement is delivered at the mixer in the original unbroken sacks, the weight of the cement contained in each sack may be taken without weighing as 94 pounds. Technical Specifications 03310-11 Cast-In-Place Concrete 2.12 MEASUREMENT OF WATER A. The quantity of water entering the mixer shall be measured by a suitable water meter or other measuring device that is acceptable to the Engineer and capable of measuring the water in variable amounts within a tolerance of one percent. 2.13 READY-MIXED CONCRETE A. At the Contractor's option, ready-mixed concrete shall be used. Materials, batching, mixing, transporting, placing, shall conform to ASTM C94 and this specification. B. Ready-mixed concrete shall be delivered to the Work, and discharge shall be completed within one hour after the addition of the cement to the aggregates or before the drum has been revolved 250 revolutions, whichever comes first. In hot weather, under conditions contributing to quick stiffening of the concrete, or when the temperature of the concrete is 85 degrees F or above, the time between the introduction of the cement to the aggregates and discharge shall not exceed 45 minutes. C. Truck mixers shall be equipped with electrically-actuated counters by which the number of revolutions of the drum or blades may be readily verified. The counter shall be of the resettable, recording type, and shall be mounted in the driver's cab. The counter shall be actuated at the time of starting the mixer at mixing speed. D. Each batch of concrete shall be mixed in a truck mixer for not less than 70 revolutions of the drum or blades at the rate of rotation designated by the manufacturer of equipment. Additional mixing, if any, shall be at the speed designated by the manufacturer of the equipment as agitating speed. Materials including mixing water shall be in the mixer drum before actuating the revolution counter for determining the number of revolutions of mixing. E. Each batch of ready-mixed concrete delivered to the Work shall be accompanied by a delivery ticket furnished to the Engineer in accordance with the requirements above. F. The use of non-agitating equipment for transporting ready-mixed concrete will not be permitted. Combination truck and trailer equipment for transporting ready-mixed concrete will not be permitted. The quality and quantity of materials used in ready- mixed concrete and in batch aggregates shall be subject to continuous inspection at the batching plant by the Engineer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EVALUATION OF CONCRETE, GROUT OR MORTAR TEST RESULTS A. Tests. 1. Test results for standard molded and cured test cylinders to be evaluated separately for each mix design. Such evaluation shall be valid only if tests have been conducted in accordance with specified quality standards. For evaluation of potential strength and uniformity, each mix design shall be represented by at least three strength tests. A strength test shall be the average of two cylinders from the same sample tested at 28 days. Technical Specifications 03310-12 Cast-In-Place Concrete 2. Drying shrinkage tests shall be made in advance of submission at the time of the first placement of each class of concrete, and during construction to ensure continued compliance with these Specifications. B. Acceptance: 1. Strength level of each specified compressive strength shall be considered satisfactory if both of the following requirements are met: a. Average of all sets of three consecutive strength tests equal or exceed the required specified 28-day compressive strength. b. No individual strength test falls below the required specified 28-day compressive strength by more than 500 psi. 2. Shrinkage Limitation a. The maximum concrete shrinkage, as measured at 21-day drying age or at 28 day drying age, shall be 0.036 percent or 0.042 percent, respectively. The Contractor shall only use a mix design for construction that has first met the trial batch shrinkage requirements. b. The maximum concrete shrinkage for specimens cast in the field shall not exceed average maximum shrinkage requirement by more than 25 percent. c. If the required shrinkage limitation is not met during construction, the Contractor shall take any or all of the following actions, at no additional cost to the Owner, for securing the specified shrinkage requirements. These actions may include changing the source or aggregates, cement, and/or admixtures; reducing water content; washing of aggregate to reduce fines; modifying the curing requirements; or other actions designed to minimize shrinkage or the effects of shrinkage. 3. Alkili-Silica Reactivity limitations: a. The maximum percentage in specimen length at 14 days shall not exceed 0.1 percent per AASHTO T-303. b. Mix design shall be modified to show proportions of ASR inhibitor. c. If the ASR limitation is not met during construction, the Contractor shall take any or all of the following actions, at no additional cost to the Owner, for securing the specified shrinkage requirements. These actions may include changing the source or aggregates, cement, and/or admixtures; or other actions designed to minimize reactivity without deleterious effect on concrete properties. 3.2 GENERAL FORMWORK REQUIREMENTS A. Forms to confine and shape the concrete to the required lines shall be used wherever necessary. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the adequate design of forms, and any forms that are unsafe or inadequate in any respect shall promptly be removed from the Work and replaced. A sufficient number of forms of each kind shall be available to permit the required rate of progress to be maintained. The design and inspection of concrete forms, falsework, and shoring shall comply with applicable local, state and federal regulations. Design, construction, maintenance, preparation, and removal of forms shall be in accordance with ACI 347. Technical Specifications 03310-13 Cast-In-Place Concrete B. Forms shall be true in every respect to the required shape and size, shall conform to the established alignment and grade, and shall be of sufficient strength and rigidity to maintain their position and shape under the loads and operations incident to placing and vibrating the concrete. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION A. Vertical Surfaces: Vertical surfaces of concrete members shall be formed, except where placement of the concrete against the ground is indicated. Not less than 1-inch of concrete shall be added to the indicated thickness of a concrete member where concrete is permitted to be placed against trimmed ground in lieu of forms. Permission to do this on other concrete members will be granted only for members of comparatively limited height and where the character of the ground is such that it can be trimmed to the required lines and will stand securely without caving or sloughing until the concrete has been placed. B. Construction Joints: Concrete construction joints will not be permitted at locations other than those indicated, except as may be acceptable to the Engineer. When a second lift is placed on hardened concrete, special precautions shall be taken in the way of the number, location, and tightening of ties at the top of the old lift and bottom of the new to prevent any unsatisfactory effect whatsoever on the concrete. Pipe stubs and anchor bolts shall be set in the forms where required. C. Form Ties: 1. Embedded Ties: Wire ties for holding forms will not be permitted. No form-tying device or part thereof, other than metal, shall be left embedded in the concrete. Ties shall not be removed in such manner as to leave a hole extending through the interior of the concrete members. The use of snap-ties which cause spalling of the concrete upon form stripping or tie removal will not be permitted. If steel panel forms are used, rubber grommets shall be provided where the ties pass through the form in order to prevent loss of cement paste. Where metal rods extending through the concrete are used to support or to strengthen forms, the rods shall remain embedded and shall terminate not less than 1-inch back from the formed face or faces of the concrete. 2. Removable Ties: Where taper ties are approved for use, after the taper tie is removed, the hole shall be thoroughly cleaned and roughened for bond. A precast neoprene or polyurethane tapered plug shall be located at the wall centerline. The hole shall be completely filled with non-shrink or regular cement grout. Exposed faces of walls shall have at least the outer 2-inches of the exposed face filled with a cement grout which shall match the color and texture of the surrounding wall surface. 3.4 REUSE OF FORMS A. Forms may be reused only if in good condition and only if acceptable to the Engineer. Light sanding between uses will be required wherever necessary to obtain uniform surface texture on exposed concrete surfaces. Exposed concrete surfaces are defined as surfaces which are permanently exposed to view. Technical Specifications 03310-14 Cast-In-Place Concrete 3.5 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. Careful procedures for the removal of forms shall be strictly followed, and this Work shall be done with care so as to avoid damage to the concrete. No heavy loading on green concrete will be permitted. Members which must support their own weight shall not have their forms removed until they have attained at least 75 percent of the 28-Day strength of the concrete. Forms for vertical walls and columns shall remain in place at least 48 hours after the concrete has been placed. Forms for parts of the Work not specifically mentioned herein shall remain in place for periods of time as recommended in ACI 347. 3.6 GENERAL REINFORCEMENT REQUIREMENTS A. Reinforcement steel, welded wire fabric, couplers, and other appurtenances shall be fabricated, and placed in accordance with the requirements of the Building Code and the supplementary requirements indicated herein. 3.7 FABRICATION A. General: 1. Reinforcement steel shall be accurately formed to the dimensions and shapes indicated, and the fabricating details shall be prepared in accordance with ACI 315 and ACI 318, except as modified by the Drawings. 2. The Contractor shall fabricate reinforcement bars for structures in accordance with bending diagrams, placing lists, and placing drawings. Said drawings, diagrams, and lists shall be prepared by the Contractor. 3. Unless otherwise indicated, dowels shall match the size and spacing of the spliced bar. B. Bending or Straightening: Reinforcement shall not be straightened or rebent in a manner that will injure the material. Bars shall be bent or straight as indicated. Do not use bends different from the bends indicated. Bars shall be bent cold unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer. No bars partially embedded in concrete shall be field-bent except as indicated or specifically permitted by the Engineer. 3.8 PLACING A. Reinforcement shall be accurately positioned as indicated and shall be supported and wired together to prevent displacement, using annealed iron wire ties or suitable clips at intersections. Reinforcement steel shall be supported by concrete, plastic or metal supports, spacers or metal hangers that are strong and rigid enough to prevent any displacement of the reinforcement steel. Where concrete is to be placed on the ground, supporting concrete blocks (or dobies) shall be used in sufficient numbers to support the bars without settlement, but in no case shall such support be continuous. Concrete blocks used to support reinforcement steel shall be tied to the steel with wire ties which are embedded in the blocks. For concrete over formwork, the Contractor shall provide concrete, metal, plastic, or other acceptable bar chairs and spacers. Technical Specifications 03310-15 Cast-In-Place Concrete B. The portions of accessories in contact with the formwork shall be made of concrete, plastic, or steel coated with a 1/8-inch minimum thickness of plastic which extends at least 1/2-inch from the concrete surface. Plastic shall be gray in color. C. Tie wires shall be bent away from the forms in order to provide the required concrete coverage. D. Bars additional to those indicated which may be found necessary or desirable by the Contractor for the purpose of securing reinforcement in position shall be provided by the Contractor as part of the Work. E. Unless otherwise indicated, reinforcement placing tolerances shall be within the limits specified in ACI 318 except where in conflict with the requirements of the Building Code. F. The minimum spacing requirements of ACI 318 shall be followed for reinforcing steel. 3.9 SPLICING A. General: Reinforcement splices shall only be used at locations indicated. When it is necessary to splice reinforcement at points other than where indicated, the character of the splice shall be reviewed and accepted by the Engineer. B. Splices of Reinforcement 1. The length of lap for reinforcement bars, unless otherwise indicated, shall be in accordance with ACI 318, for a Class B splice. 2. Welded splices shall be performed in accordance with AWS D1.4. 3. Laps of WWF shall be in accordance with ACI 318. Adjoining sheets shall be securely tied together with No. 14 tie wire, one tie for each 2 running feet. Wires shall be staggered and tied in such a manner that they cannot slip. 3.10 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Reinforcement steel shall always be protected from conditions conductive to corrosion until concrete is placed around it. B. The surfaces of reinforcement steel and other metalwork to be in contact with concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned of dirt, grease, loose scale and rust, grout, mortar, and other foreign substances immediately before the concrete is placed. Where there is delay in depositing concrete, reinforcing shall be reinspected and, if necessary recleaned. 3.11 PROPORTIONING AND MIXING A. Proportioning: Proportioning of the concrete mix shall conform to the requirements of ACI 301. B. Mixing: Mixing of concrete shall conform to the requirements of ACI 301. C. Slump: Slumps shall be as indicated herein. D. Retempering: Retempering of concrete or mortar which has partially hardened shall not be permitted. Technical Specifications 03310-16 Cast-In-Place Concrete 3.12 PREPARATION OF SURFACES FOR CONCRETING A. General: Earth surfaces shall be thoroughly wetted by sprinkling prior to the placing of any concrete, and these surfaces shall be kept moist by frequent sprinkling up to the time of placing concrete thereon. The surface shall be free from standing water, mud, and debris at the time of placing concrete. B. Placing Interruptions: When placing of concrete is to be interrupted long enough for the concrete to take a set, the working face shall be given a shape by the use of forms or other means, that will secure proper union with subsequent Work; provided that construction joints shall be made only where acceptable to the Engineer. C. Embedded Items 1. No concrete shall be placed until formwork, installation of parts to be embedded, reinforcement steel, and preparation of surfaces involved in the placing have been completed and accepted by the Engineer at least 4 hours before placement of concrete. Surfaces of forms and embedded items that have become encrusted with dried grout from previous usage shall be cleaned before the surrounding or adjacent concrete is placed. 2. Reinforcement, anchor bolts, sleeves, inserts, and similar items shall be set and secured in the forms at locations indicated or by Shop Drawings and shall be acceptable to the Engineer before any concrete is placed. Accuracy of placement is the responsibility of the Contractor. D. No concrete shall be placed in any structure until water entering the space to be filled with concrete has been properly cut off or has been diverted by pipes, or other means, and carried out of the forms, clear of the Work. No concrete shall be deposited underwater nor shall the Contractor allow still water to rise on any concrete until the concrete has attained its initial set. Water shall not be permitted to flow over the surface of any concrete in such manner and at such velocity as will injure the surface finish of the concrete. Pumping or other necessary dewatering operations for removing ground water, if required, shall be subject to the review of the Engineer. E. Corrosion Protection: Pipe, conduit, dowels, and other ferrous items required to be embedded in concrete construction shall be so positioned and supported prior to placement of concrete that there will be a minimum of 2-inches clearance between said items and any part of the concrete reinforcement. Securing such items in position by wiring or welding them to the reinforcement will not be permitted. F. Openings for pipes, inserts for pipe hangers and brackets, and anchors shall, where practicable, be provided for during the placing of concrete. G. Anchor bolts shall be accurately set and shall be maintained in position by templates while being embedded in concrete. 3.13 HANDLING, TRANSPORTING, AND PLACING A. General: Placing of concrete shall conform to the applicable requirements of ACI 301 and the requirements of this Section. No aluminum materials shall be used in conveying any concrete. Technical Specifications 03310-17 Cast-In-Place Concrete B. Non-Conforming Work or Materials: Concrete which during or before placing is found not to conform to the requirements indicated herein shall be rejected and immediately removed from the Work. Concrete which is not placed in accordance with these Specifications or which is of inferior quality shall be removed and replaced at the expense of the Contractor. C. Unauthorized Placement: No concrete shall be placed except in the presence of a duly authorized representative of the Engineer. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing at least 24 hours in advance of placement of any concrete. D. Placement in Wall and Column Forms: 1. Concrete shall not be dropped through reinforcement steel or into any deep form nor shall concrete be placed in any form in such a manner as to leave accumulation of mortar on the form surfaces above the placed concrete. In such cases, some means such as the use of hoppers and, if necessary, vertical ducts of canvas, rubber, or metal shall be used for placing concrete in the forms in a manner that it may reach the place of final deposit without separation. In no case shall the free fall of concrete exceed 4-feet in walls and 8-feet in columns below the ends of ducts, chutes, or buggies. Concrete shall be uniformly distributed during the process of depositing and in no case after depositing shall any portion be displaced in the forms more than 6-feet in horizontal direction. Concrete in wall forms shall be deposited in uniform horizontal layers not deeper than 2-feet; and care shall be taken to avoid inclined layers or inclined construction joints except where such are required for sloping members. Each layer shall be placed while the previous layer is still soft. The rate of placing concrete in wall forms shall not exceed 5-feet of vertical rise per hour. Sufficient illumination shall be provided in the interior of forms so that the concrete at the places of deposit is visible from the deck or runway. 2. The surface of the concrete shall be level whenever a run of concrete is stopped. To ensure a level, straight joint on the exposed surface of walls, a wood strip at least 3/4-inch thick shall be tacked to the forms on these surfaces. The concrete shall be carried about 1/2-inch above the underside of the strip. About one hour after the concrete is placed, the strip shall be removed and any irregularities in the edge formed by the strip shall be leveled with a trowel, and laitance shall be removed. E. Temperature of Concrete: The temperature of concrete when it is being placed shall be not more than 90 degrees F nor less than 40 degrees F in moderate weather, and not less than 50 degrees F in weather during which the mean daily temperature drops below 40 degrees F. Concrete ingredients shall not be heated to a temperature higher than that necessary to keep the temperature of the mixed concrete, as placed, from falling below the required minimum temperature. If concrete is placed when the weather is such that the temperature of the concrete would exceed 90 degrees F, the Contractor shall employ effective means, such as precooling of aggregates and mixing water, using ice, or placing at night, as necessary to maintain the temperature of the concrete, as it is placed, below 90 degrees F. The Contractor shall be entitled to no additional compensation on account of the foregoing requirements. F. Cold Weather Placement: 1. Placement of concrete shall conform to ACI - 306, and the following: a. Earth foundations shall be free from frost or ice when concrete is placed upon or against them. Technical Specifications 03310-18 Cast-In-Place Concrete b. Maintain the concrete temperature above 50 degrees F for at least 72-hours after placement. 3.14 PUMPING OF CONCRETE A. General: If the pumped concrete does not produce satisfactory end results, the Contractor shall discontinue the pumping operation and proceed with the placing of concrete using conventional methods. B. Pumping Equipment: 1. The pumping equipment shall have 2 cylinders and be designed to operate with one cylinder only in case the other one is not functioning. In lieu of this requirement, the Contractor may have a standby pump on the Site during pumping. 2. The minimum diameter of the hose conduits shall be in accordance with ACI 304. 3. Pumping equipment and hose conduits that are not functioning properly shall be replaced. 4. Aluminum conduits for conveying the concrete shall not be permitted. 3.15 TAMPING AND VIBRATING A. As concrete is placed in the forms or in excavations, it shall be thoroughly settled and compacted, throughout the entire depth of the layer which is being consolidated, into a dense, homogeneous mass, filling all corners and angles, thoroughly embedding the reinforcement, eliminating rock pockets, and bringing only a slight excess of water to the exposed surface of concrete. Vibrators shall be high speed power vibrators (8000 to 12,000 rpm) of an immersion type in sufficient number and with at least one standby unit as required. B. Concrete in walls shall be internally vibrated and at the same time rammed, stirred, or worked with suitable appliances, tamping bars, shovels, or forked tools until it completely fills the forms or excavations and closes snugly against all surfaces. Subsequent layers of concrete shall not be placed until the layers previously placed have been worked thoroughly. Vibrators shall be provided in sufficient numbers, with standby units as required, to accomplish the required results within 15 minutes after concrete of the prescribed consistency is placed in the forms. The vibrating head shall not contact the surfaces of the forms. Care shall be taken not to vibrate concrete excessively or to work it in any manner that causes segregation of its constituents. 3.16 FINISHING CONCRETE SURFACES A. General: Surfaces shall be free from fins, bulges, ridges, offsets, honeycombing, or roughness of any kind, and shall present a finished, smooth, continuous hard surface. Allowable deviations from plumb or level and from the alignment, profiles, and dimensions indicated are defined as tolerances and are indicated above. These tolerances are to be distinguished from irregularities in finish as described herein. Aluminum finishing tools shall not be used. B. Non-Exposed, Formed Surfaces: No treatment is required after form removal except for curing, repair of defective concrete, and treatment of surface defects. Technical Specifications 03310-19 Cast-In-Place Concrete 1. Surface holes larger than 1/2-inch in diameter or deeper than 1/4-inch are defined as surface defects. C. Exposed, Formed Surfaces: After initial concrete cure and the forms are removed, the Contractor shall patch all form tie holes, bug holes, and irregularities, and grind any fins flush with the face of the concrete. Contractor shall then hand sack all exposed faces to create a uniform surface to the satisfaction of the Engineer. D. Unformed Surfaces: After proper and adequate vibration and tamping, unformed top surfaces of slabs, floors, walls, and curbs shall be brought to a uniform surface with suitable tools. Whenever the air temperature exceeds 85 degrees F or the wind speed exceeds 25 mph at the time of placement, the concrete shall be treated as follows. Immediately after the concrete has been screeded, it shall be treated with a liquid evaporation retardant. The retardant shall be used again after each Work operation as necessary to prevent drying shrinkage cracks. The classes of finish for unformed concrete surfaces are designated and defined as follows: 1. Finish U1 - Sufficient leveling and screeding to produce an even, uniform surface with surface irregularities not to exceed 3/8-inch. No further special finish is required. 2. Finish U2 -After sufficient stiffening of the screeded concrete, surfaces shall be float finished with wood or metal floats or with a finishing machine using float blades. Excessive floating of surfaces while the concrete is plastic and dusting of dry cement and sand on the concrete surface to absorb excess moisture will not be permitted. Floating shall be the minimum necessary to produce a surface that is free from screed marks and is uniform in texture. Surface irregularities shall not exceed 1/4-inch. Joints and edges shall be tooled where indicated or as determined by the Engineer. 3. Finish U3 -After the Finish U2 surface has hardened sufficiently to prevent excess of fine material from being drawn to the surface, steel troweling shall be performed with firm pressure such as will flatten the sandy texture of the floated surface and produce a dense, uniform surface free from blemishes, ripples, and trowel marks. The finish shall be smooth and free of irregularities. Place Working Floor Surface Coating. 4. Finish U4 - Trowel the Finish U3 surface to remove local depressions or high points. In addition, the surface shall be given a light broom finish with brooming perpendicular to drainage unless otherwise indicated. The resulting surface shall be rough enough to provide a nonskid finish. E. Unformed surfaces shall be finished according to the following schedule: UNFORMED SURFACE FINISH SCHEDULE Area Finish Slabs U4 Top surface of walls U4 Technical Specifications 03310-20 Cast-In-Place Concrete F. Interior Floors of Hatchery Building. These floors shall receive an initial U3 finish. After curing, the floors shall be ground to a Partial Aggregate Exposure. The grinding technique shall use diamond cup wheels to produce a smooth and even finish. The work shall be performed by craftsmen who have a minimum of five years of experience in grinding high quality Partial Aggregate Exposure finishes. A test slab area of a minimum of 50 sf shall be cast, cured, ground and sealed to observe the quality and appearance of the technique. The test slab shall be demolished at the completion of the work. 3.17 CURING AND DAMPPROOFING A. General: Concrete shall be cured for not less than seven (7) days after placing, in accordance with the methods indicated below for the different parts of the Work. Surface to be Cured or Dampproofed Method Unstripped forms 1 Construction joints between footings and walls, and between 2 floor slab and columns Encasement and ductbank concrete and thrust blocks 3 Concrete surfaces not specifically provided for elsewhere in this 4 Paragraph Buried slabs and backfilled walls 5 B. Method 1: Wooden forms shall be wetted immediately after concrete has been placed and shall be kept wet with water until removal. If steel forms are used, the exposed concrete surfaces shall be kept continuously wet until the forms are removed. If forms are removed within seven (7) Days of placing the concrete, curing shall be continued in accordance with Method 4 below. C. Method 2: The surface shall be covered with burlap mats which shall be kept wet with water for the duration of the curing period, until the concrete in the walls has been placed. No curing compound shall be applied to surfaces cured under Method 2. D. Method 3: The surface shall be covered with moist earth not less than 4 hours nor more than 24 hours after the concrete is placed. Earthwork operations that may damage the concrete shall not begin until at least seven (7) days after placement of concrete. E. Method 4: The surface shall be sprayed with a liquid curing compound. 1. It shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions at a maximum coverage rate of 200 square feet per gallon and in such a manner as to cover the surface with a uniform film that will seal thoroughly. 2. Where the curing compound method is used, care shall be exercised to avoid damage to the seal during the seven (7) day curing period. If the seal is damaged or broken before the expiration of the curing period, the break shall be repaired immediately by the application of additional curing compound over the damaged portion. Technical Specifications 03310-21 Cast-In-Place Concrete 3. Wherever curing compound has been applied to surfaces against which concrete subsequently is to be placed and to which it is to adhere, compound shall be entirely removed by wet sandblasting just prior to the placing of new concrete. 4. Curing compound shall be applied as soon as the concrete has hardened enough to prevent marring on unformed surfaces, and within two (2) hours after removal of forms. Repairs required to be made to formed surfaces shall be made within the said two (2) hour period; provided, however, that any such repairs which cannot be made within the said two (2) hour period shall be delayed until after the curing compound has been applied. When repairs are to be made to an area on which curing compound has been applied, the area involved shall first be wet-sandblasted to remove the curing compound. 5. During the curing period, no traffic of any nature and no depositing of any materials, temporary or otherwise, shall be permitted on surfaces coated with curing compound. Foot traffic and the depositing of materials may be allowed after three (3) days if the surface is covered with 5/8-inch plywood placed over polyethylene sheets. F. Method 5: This method applies to both buried slabs and walls to be backfilled. 1. The concrete shall be kept continuously wet by the application of water for a minimum period of at least seven (7) days beginning immediately after the concrete has reached final set or forms have been removed. 2. Until the concrete surface is covered with the curing medium, the entire surface shall be kept damp by applying water through nozzles that atomize the flow so that the surface is not marred or washed. 3. Heavy curing mats shall be used as a curing medium to retain the moisture during the curing period. The curing medium shall be weighted or otherwise held substantially in contact with the concrete surface to prevent being dislodged by wind or any other causes. Edges shall be continuously held in place. 4. The curing blankets and concrete shall be kept continuously wet by the use of sprinklers or other means both during and after normal working hours. 5. Immediately after the application of water has terminated at the end of the curing period, the curing medium shall be removed, any dry spots shall be rewetted, and curing compound shall be immediately applied in accordance with Method 4 above. 6. The Contractor shall dispose of excess water from the curing operation to avoid damage to the Work. G. The Contractor may submit alternate methods of curing which maintain the concrete in a continuously wet condition for acceptance by the Engineer. 3.18 PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall protect concrete against damage until final acceptance. B. Fresh concrete shall be protected from damage due to rain, hail, sleet, or snow. The Contractor shall provide such protection while the concrete is still plastic and whenever precipitation is imminent or occurring. Technical Specifications 03310-22 Cast-In-Place Concrete 3.19 CURING IN COLD WEATHER A. Water curing of concrete may be reduced to six (6) days during periods when the mean daily temperature in the vicinity of the Site is less than 40 degrees F; provided that, during the prescribed period of water curing, when temperatures are such that concrete surfaces may freeze, water curing shall be temporarily discontinued. B. Concrete cured by an application of curing compound will require no additional protection from freezing if the protection at 50 degrees F for 72 hours is obtained by means of approved insulation in contact with the forms or concrete surfaces; otherwise, the concrete shall be protected against freezing temperatures for 72 hours immediately following 72 hours protection at 50 degrees F. Concrete cured by water shall be protected against freezing temperatures for 72 hours immediately following the 72 hours of protection at 50 degrees F. C. Discontinuance of protection against freezing temperatures shall be such that the drop in temperature of any portion of the concrete will be daily temperature rises above 40 degrees F for more than three (3) days, 72 hour protection at a temperature not lower than 50 degrees F may be discontinued for as long as the mean daily temperature remains above 40 degrees F; provided, that the concrete shall be protected against freezing temperatures for not less than 48 hours after placement. D. Where artificial heat is employed, special care shall be taken to prevent the concrete from drying. Use of unvented heaters will be permitted only when unformed surfaces of concrete adjacent to the heaters are protected for the first 24 hours from an excessive carbon dioxide atmosphere by application of curing compound; provided, that the use of curing compound for such surfaces is otherwise permitted by these Specifications. E. As soon as forms are removed, exposed concrete surfaces shall be carefully examined and any irregularities shall be immediately rubbed or ground in a satisfactory manner in order to secure a smooth, uniform, and continuous surface. Plastering or coating of surfaces to be smoothed will not be permitted. No repairs shall be made until after inspection by the Engineer. In no case will extensive patching of honeycombed concrete be permitted. Concrete containing minor voids, holes, honeycombing, or similar depression defects shall be repaired as indicated below. Concrete containing extensive voids, holes, honeycombing, or similar depression defects, shall be completely removed and replaced. Repairs and replacements shall be performed promptly. F. Defective surfaces to be repaired shall be cut back from trueline a minimum depth of 1/2-inch over the entire area. Feathered edges will not be permitted. Where chipping or cutting tools are not required in order to deepen the area properly, the surface shall be prepared for bonding by the removal of laitance or soft material, plus not less than 1/32-inch depth of the surface film from hard portions by means of an efficient sandblast. After cutting and sandblasting, the surface shall be wetted sufficiently in advance of shooting with shotcrete or with cement mortar so that while the repair material is being applied, the surfaces underneath will remain moist but not so wet as to overcome the suction upon which a good bond depends. The material used for repair shall consist of a mixture of one sack of cement to 3 cubic feet of sand. For exposed walls, the cement shall contain such a proportion of Atlas white portland cement as is required to make the color of the patch match the color of the surrounding concrete. Technical Specifications 03310-23 Cast-In-Place Concrete G. Holes left by tie-rod cones shall be reamed with suitable toothed reamers so as to leave the surfaces of the holes clean and rough. These holes then shall be repaired in an approved manner with dry-packed cement grout. Holes left by form-tying devices having a rectangular cross-section, and other imperfections having a depth greater than their least surface dimension, shall not be reamed but shall be repaired in an approved manner with dry-packed cement grout. H. Repairs shall be built up and shaped in such a manner that the completed Work will conform to the requirements of this Section as applicable, using approved methods which will not disturb the bond, cause sagging, or cause horizontal fractures. Surfaces of repairs shall receive the same kind and amount of curing treatment as required for the concrete in the repaired section. I. The Contractor shall protect concrete against injury or damage from excessive heat, lack of moisture, overstress, or any other cause until final acceptance. Particular care shall be taken to prevent the drying of concrete and to avoid roughening or otherwise damaging the surface. Any concrete found to be damaged, or which may have been originally defective, which becomes defective at any time prior to the final acceptance of the completed Work, which departs from the established line or grade, or which, for any other reason, does not conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, shall be satisfactorily repaired or removed and replaced with acceptable concrete. J. In the spring, when the mean daily temperature rises above 40 degrees F for more than three (3) days, 72-hour protection at a temperature not lower than 50 degrees F may be discontinued for as long as the mean daily temperature remains above 40 degrees F; provided, that the concrete shall be protected against freezing temperatures for not less than 48 hours after placement. K. Where artificial heat is employed, special care shall be taken to prevent the concrete from drying. Use of unvented heaters will be permitted only when unformed surfaces of concrete adjacent to the heaters are protected for the first 24 hours from an excessive carbon dioxide atmosphere by application of curing compound; provided, that the use of curing compound for such surfaces is otherwise permitted by these Specifications. 3.20 TREATMENT OF SURFACE DEFECTS A. As soon as forms are removed, exposed concrete surfaces shall be carefully examined and any irregularities shall be immediately rubbed or ground in a satisfactory manner in order to secure a smooth, uniform, and continuous surface. Plastering or coating of surfaces to be smoothed will not be permitted. No repairs shall be made until after inspection by the Engineer. In no case will extensive patching of honeycombed concrete be permitted. Concrete containing minor voids, holes, honeycombing, or similar depression defects shall be repaired as indicated below. Concrete containing extensive voids, holes, honeycombing, or similar depression defects, shall be completely removed and replaced. Repairs and replacements shall be performed promptly. Technical Specifications 03310-24 Cast-In-Place Concrete B. Defective surfaces to be repaired shall be cut back from trueline a minimum depth of 1/2-inch over the entire area. Feathered edges will not be permitted. Where chipping or cutting tools are not required in order to deepen the area properly, the surface shall be prepared for bonding by the removal of laitance or soft material, plus not less than 1/32-inch depth of the surface film from hard portions by means of an efficient sandblast. After cutting and sandblasting, the surface shall be wetted sufficiently in advance of shooting with shotcrete or with cement mortar so that while the repair material is being applied, the surfaces underneath will remain moist but not so wet as to overcome the suction upon which a good bond depends. The material used for repair shall consist of a mixture of one sack of cement to 3 cubic feet of sand. For exposed walls, the cement shall contain such a proportion of Atlas white portland cement as is required to make the color of the patch match the color of the surrounding concrete. C. Holes left by tie-rod cones shall be reamed with suitable toothed reamers so as to leave the surfaces of the holes clean and rough. These holes then shall be repaired in an approved manner with dry-packed cement grout. Holes left by form-tying devices having a rectangular cross-section, and other imperfections having a depth greater than their least surface dimension, shall not be reamed but shall be repaired in an approved manner with dry-packed cement grout. D. Repairs shall be built up and shaped in such a manner that the completed Work will conform to the requirements of this Section as applicable, using approved methods which will not disturb the bond, cause sagging, or cause horizontal fractures. Surfaces of repairs shall receive the same kind and amount of curing treatment as required for the concrete in the repaired section. 3.21 GROUTING OF BASES A. All equipment and structural base plates shall be firmly and solidly grouted in place, with non-shrink grout by methods that will ensure complete, uniform, and permanent filling of all space beneath the base without disturbing or displacing the alignment or level of the base in its correct position. B. Surface Preparation: 1. The surfaces of hardened concrete upon which grout will be placed shall be chipped to remove laitance and surface mortar and to expose the aggregate. 2. The surface of the hardened concrete shall be cleaned of all oil, grease, laitance, curing compound, and other foreign loose materials and shall be saturated with water for not less than 24 hours immediately before the grout is placed. 3. All excess water shall be removed. C. Alignment and Leveling: 1. Each base shall be set in place over its anchor bolts and shall be carefully aligned in proper position and then brought to accurate level using shims. 2. Small structural bases may be leveled by means of an extra nut below the base on each anchor bolt. Technical Specifications 03310-25 Cast-In-Place Concrete D. Mixing: 1. Non-shrinking grout shall be furnished factory premixed so only water is added at the job site. 2. Grout shall be mixed in a mechanical mixer for a minimum of three (3) minutes. 3. No more water shall be used than is recommended by the Manufacturer. E. Placement: 1. Non-shrinking grout shall be placed immediately after mixing and before stiffening sets in. 2. Grout shall be placed in strict accordance with the directions of the Manufacturer so that all grout space is completely filled without voids. 3. Non-shrinking grout shall be finished smooth in all locations where the grout will be exposed to view after it has reached its initial set. F. Finishing of Edges: 1. When the placing of the grout has been completed, it shall be allowed to stand undisturbed until set stiff. 2. Then immediately the form or dam, if any, shall be taken off, and the portions of the grout which extend beyond the edges of the base shall be cut off flush and removed, except where a sloping surface is indicated on the drawings. 3. Sloping surfaces shall be finished to a one-to-one slope. 4. All grouting shall be completed in a proper and workmanlike manner with the exposed edges of the foundation and the surfaces adjacent thereto left clean and free from cement and grout. 3.22 CARE AND REPAIR OF CONCRETE A. The Contractor shall protect concrete against injury or damage from excessive heat, lack of moisture, overstress, or any other cause until final acceptance. Particular care shall be taken to prevent the drying of concrete and to avoid roughening or otherwise damaging the surface. Any concrete found to be damaged, or which may have been originally defective, which becomes defective at any time prior to the final acceptance of the completed Work, which departs from the established line or grade, or which, for any other reason, does not conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, shall be satisfactorily repaired or removed and replaced with acceptable concrete. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 03310-26 Cast-In-Place Concrete SECTION 04050 COLD AND HOT WEATHER MASONRY CONSTRUCTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cold weather protection. 2. Hot weather protection. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI)/American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE)/The Masonry Society (TMS): a. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602, Specifications for Masonry Structures. 2. Brick Industry Association (BIA): a. Technical Notes 1 - All-Weather Construction. 3. International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council (IMIAWC): a. Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Masonry Construction. 4. National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA): a. TEK 3-1 C, All Weather Concrete Masonry Construction. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Hot Weather Construction: Per ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 hot weather construction is defined as occurring when ambient temperatures exceed 100 DegF or 90 DegF when the wind velocity is greater than 8 mph. B. Cold Weather Construction: Per ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 Cold Weather Construction is defined as occurring when ambient temperature falls below 40 DegF or when the temperature of the masonry units is below 40 DegF. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Applicable PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ERECTION AND APPLICATION A. General: 1. Comply with NCMA recommendations and practices. 2. Do not use frozen or ice coated materials. Technical Specifications 04050-1 Cold and Hot Weather Masonry Construction 3. At end of each day or at shutdown, cover tops of all walls not enclosed or sheltered with clear polyethylene minimum 6 mil thick. Extend down each side of wall minimum of 16 IN and secure. B. Temporary Facilities: 1. Construct and maintain temporary protection required to permit continuous and orderly progress of work. 2. Provide and maintain heat sufficient to assure temperature above 32 DegF within protected areas. 3. Remove all temporary facilities after completion of work. C. Cold Weather Construction and Protection Requirements Prior to and During Installation: 1. Air temperature: 32 to 40 DegF. a. Heat mixing water or aggregate to produce mortar temperatures between 40 and 120 DegF. 2. Air temperature: 25 to 32 DegF. a. Heat mixing water or aggregate to produce mortar temperatures between 40 and 120 DegF. b. Maintain mortar temperatures above freezing until used. 3. Air temperature: Below 25 DegF. a. Heat mixing water and aggregate to produce mortar temperatures between 40 and 120 DegF. b. Maintain mortar temperatures above freezing until used. c. Maintain temperature of units until laid at not less than 20 DegF. d. Provide heat on both sides of walls under construction to maintain air temperature above freezing. e. Provide windbreaks or shelters when wind is in excess of 15 mph. 1) Wind breaks or shelters shall be translucent. D. Cold Weather Construction and Protection Requirements after Installation: 1. Air temperature: 32 to 40 DegF. a. Protect from rain or snow for not less than 24 HRS by covering with weather- resistive translucent membrane. 2. Air temperature: 25 to 32 DegF. a. Completely cover with translucent weather-resistive membrane for not less than 24 HRS. 3. Air temperature: 20 to 25 DegF. a. Completely protect with insulating blankets for not less than 24 HRS or provide other protection approved by Engineer. 4. Air temperature: Below 20 DegF. Technical Specifications 04050-2 Cold and Hot Weather Masonry Construction a. Provide enclosed translucent shelters and heating to maintain air temperature on each side of wall above 32 DegF for 24 HRS. b. Do not allow rapid drop in temperature after removal of heat. E. Hot Weather Construction and Protection Requirements: 1. Comply with requirements of IMIAWC and ACl/ASCE/TMS. 2. Storage and preparation of materials. a. Cover or shade masonry units and mortar materials from direct sun. b. Maintain sand in a damp loose condition. 1) Sand moisture shall be maintained at minimum 8 percent. 2) Sprinkle with cool water as required to maintain moisture content. c. Use cool water for mixing mortars. d. Avoid using tools and equipment that have been sitting in the sun. 1) Sprinkle mortar boards, mortar pans, wheel barrows, mixers, etc. with cool water. e. Wet brick units having high initial rates of absorption. f. Do not wet concrete masonry units prior to use. 3. Installation: a. Masonry units shall be placed within one minute of the spreading of the mortar. 1) Mortar beds shall not be spread more than 4 FT ahead of the masonry unit being placed. b. Provide wind screens and shading partitions as required to eliminate direct sunlight exposure. c. Wet installed units using fog spray of clean water. d. Cover installed work immediately after installation to slow rate of loss of moisture from units. e. Fog-spray new masonry work until damp. Repeat fog spraying minimum of three times per day until masonry work has cured for 72 HRS. 1) In high humidity conditions, Engineer reserves the right to discontinue fog spraying if operation is found to be introducing excessive amounts of moisture into the Work. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 04050-3 Cold and Hot Weather Masonry Construction SECTION 04220 CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete masonry units (CMU's). 2. Decorative concrete masonry units. 3. Pre-faced concrete masonry units. 4. Steel reinforcing bars. 1.2 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. 1. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, according to ASTM C 140 for compressive strength. 2. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content. 3. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 780 for compressive strength. 4. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 1019. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product per Specifications Section 01340. B. Shop Drawings: For reinforcing steel. Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." C. Samples: For each type and color. D. Remaining paragraphs are defined in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" as "Informational Submittals." E. Material Certificates: For each type and size of product indicated. For masonry units include data on material properties. F. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content. Technical Specifications 04220 - 1 Concrete Masonry Unit 2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. B. Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section 01345 for mockups. C. Mock-Ups: The contractor shall submit one sample of each CMU type (size, color, texture) to be used as part of the work for approval, and construct a mock-up using the samples. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. B. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work. 2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Regional Materials: Provide CMUs that have been manufactured within 500 miles of Project site from aggregates that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles of Project site. B. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. C. Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with liquid polymeric, integral water repellent admixture that does not reduce flexural bond strength. Both masonry units and mortar shall have integral water repellent, such as the RainBloc Water Repellent System or approved equal. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Basalite Concrete Products: 8"x16"x4" thick ground face units. Occurs at Incubation #110 at Hatchery Building. Technical Specifications 04220 - 2 Concrete Masonry Unit b. Basalite Concrete Products: 12" wide x16" long x 8" high Hi-R H Wall System, with 2 '/2" thick integral insulation. Units to have U value of 0.081, R value of 12.347. Occurs at Sorting and Spawning Facility. D. CMUs: ASTM C 90. 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 2150 psi. 2. Density Classification: Normal weight. 2.3 CONCRETE LINTELS A. General: Provide one of the following: B. Concrete Lintels: ASTM C 1623, matching CMUs in color, texture, and density classification; and with reinforcing bars indicated. 2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Regional Materials: Provide aggregate for mortar and grout that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles of Project site. B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold- weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. D. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients. E. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Capital Materials Corporation; Flamingo Color Masonry Cement. b. Cemex S.A.B. de C.V. c. Essroc, Italcementi Group d. Holcim (US) Inc. e. Lafarge North America Inc. f. Lehigh Cement Company g. National Cement Company, Inc.; Coosa Masonry Cement. F. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Lafarge North America Inc. G. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. Technical Specifications 04220 - 3 Concrete Masonry Unit 1. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve. 2. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone. 3. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce required mortar color. H. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. I. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following] available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Accelguard 80. b. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Morset. c. Sonneborn Products, BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Trimix-NCA. J. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with CMUs, containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ACM Chemistries, Inc.; RainBloc for Mortar. b. BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Rheopel Mortar Admixture. c. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-Block Mortar Admixture. K. Water: Potable. 2.5 REINFORCEMENT A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60 (Grade 420). B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951 M. 1. Interior Walls: galvanized, carbon steel. 2. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.148-inch diameter. 3. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inch diameter. 4. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: 0.148-inch diameter. 5. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c. 6. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet with prefabricated corner and tee units. Technical Specifications 04220 -4 Concrete Masonry Unit 2.6 TIES AND ANCHORS A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated. 1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating. 2. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating. 3. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Anchor Bolts: L-shaped steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C; of dimensions indicated. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; formulated from PVC. B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from PVC, complying with ASTM D 2287, Type PVC-65406 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated. C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt). 2.8 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Use portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated. 3. For reinforced masonry, use portland cement-lime. 4. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent. B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site. C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated. 1. For interior non-load-bearing partitions, Type O may be used instead of Type N. Technical Specifications 04220 - 5 Concrete Masonry Unit PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TOLERANCES A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements: 1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or minus 1/4 inch 2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch. 3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total. B. Lines and Levels: 1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet 3/8 inch in 20 feet or 1/2 inch maximum. 4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, doorjambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet , 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. C. Joints: 1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. 2. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch or minus 1/4 inch. 3. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch. 3.2 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. B. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. Technical Specifications 04220 - 6 Concrete Masonry Unit C. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. D. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. E. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated. F. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. G. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow CMUs as follows: 1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings. 4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on footings where cells are not grouted. B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints. C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated. D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint) unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch (16 mm) on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls. 3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) above and below wall openings and extending 12 inches (305 mm) beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement. B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated. Technical Specifications 04220 - 7 Concrete Masonry Unit C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units. D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units. 3.5 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. 2. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces. 3.6 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil-contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed. 1. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade. B. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 04220 - 8 Concrete Masonry Unit SECTION 04232 REINFORCED CONCRETE BLOCK MASONRY PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall provide concrete masonry and other appurtenant Work, complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01340 - Contractor Submittals. B. Samples 1. Samples of concrete masonry unit colors with texture ranges indicated for selection of color. Full size samples of the blocks selected shall be submitted for final approval by the Engineer after color selection, if requested. If the required product is a colored and textured unit, the samples shall be colored and textured units. 2. Samples of mortar colors for color selection. 3. A 4-ft minimum square free-standing sample panel shall be prepared for approval before starting masonry work. The panel shall remain at the Site for reference until masonry work is completed. C. Documentation 1. Reports from testing masonry units 2. Reports from mortar and grout testing. 3. Reports from prism testing. D. Grout and mortar mix design 1. Proportions for all components 2. Mill tests for cement 3. Admixture certification. Include chloride ion content. 4. Aggregate graduation and certification 5. Lime certification 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicable Standards: Concrete masonry shall conform to the most recent International Building Code (IBC) and The Masonry Society TMS 402/602 - Building Technical Specifications 04232 - 1 Reinforced Concrete Block Masonry Code Requirements & Specifications for Masonry Structures, and other applicable codes and standards of the governing authorities. B. Work shall conform to the standard of quality established by the approved free-standing sample panel. C. Concrete block masonry units shall be sampled and tested in accordance with ASTM C 140 - Test Methods of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry and Related Units. D. Testing of Mortar and Grout: The Contractor shall have the mortar and grout tested to assure compliance with the Specifications and the governing codes by a recognized testing laboratory approved by the Engineer. Test reports shall be submitted to the Engineer. 1. Tests shall be taken at the following times: a. At commencement of masonry Work, at least 2 test samples each of mortar and grout shall be taken on 3 successive Days. b. At any change in materials or job conditions, at least 2 samples of each modified material, grout, and mortar shall be tested. c. Four random tests each of mortar and grout shall be made. The random test samples shall be taken when requested by the Engineer. d. Additional samples and tests may be required whenever, in the judgment of the Engineer, additional tests beyond the random tests are necessary to determine the quality of the materials. e. The costs of tests and test reports, except for any additional tests requested by the Engineer, shall be paid by the Contractor as part of the Work. The costs of the additional tests and reports, when reports verify compliance with the Contract Documents, will be paid by the OWNER. When tests or reports do not verify compliance, the cost of all additional tests and reports shall be paid by the Contractor. 2. Samples shall be stored in a moist environment until tested, unless directed otherwise by the Engineer or the testing laboratory. Testing for mortar shall be in accordance with ASTM C 270 - Mortar for Unit Masonry. Grout shall be tested per ASTM C 1019 - Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout. E. Unit Strength Testing: The OWNER will test the masonry units to assure compliance with the Specifications and the governing codes. Testing will be by a recognized testing laboratory. 1. Tests will be made of the following items: a. Prior to construction, at least 6 masonry units shall be tested for each type of block herein, except separate tests are not required for block which only varies by texture. b. At any change in materials during construction, at least 6 masonry units shall be tested. Technical Specifications 04232 - 2 Reinforced Concrete Block Masonry c. One set of at least 6 masonry units will be tested for each masonry structure, besides the structure that the sample is part of, or for each week in which block is laid, for each type of block involved; whichever occurs first. d. Additional sets of at least 6 masonry units shall be tested whenever, in the judgment of the Engineer, additional tests are necessary to determine the quality of the materials. e. The Contractor shall submit a letter of certification from the CMU Supplier at the time of, or prior to, delivery of the materials to the Site that the materials used in construction are representative of the materials used to construct the prisms. 2. The masonry units shall be sampled and tested in accordance with ASTM C 140. F. Extreme Weather Construction: Cold weather construction shall be per the more stringent of ACI 530.1/TMS 602, IBC and local Code requirements. Hot weather construction shall be per the more stringent of ACI 530.1/TMS 602, IBC and local Code requirements. G. Product Storage: Cement, lime, and other cementitious materials shall be delivered and stored in dry, weather-tight sheds or enclosures, in unbroken bags, barrels, or other approved containers, plainly marked and labeled with the manufacturers' names and brands. Mortar and grout shall be stored and handled in a manner that prevents the inclusion of foreign materials and damage by water or dampness. Masonry units shall be handled with care to avoid chipping and breakage, and shall be stored as directed in ACI 530.1/TMS 602. Materials stored on newly constructed floors shall be stacked in such manner that the uniformly-distributed loading does not exceed 30 psf. Masonry materials shall be protected from contact with the earth and exposure to the weather and shall be kept dry and clean until used. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Concrete masonry units shall conform to ASTM C 90 - Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. Units shall be normal weight, pre-insulated, hollow units unless indicated otherwise. B. Concrete masonry units shall be either 8-inch or 12-inch (as shown on drawings) by 8- inch by 16-inch modular size, with faces matching that of existing adjacent structures and/or as shown on structural drawings. Unit color shall be as stated on architectural drawings. C. Concrete masonry veneer units shall be 4-inch by 8-inch by 16-inch size, with faces to match that of adjacent existing structures and as shown on architectural drawings. Unit color shall be as shown on architectural drawings. D. Bond beam, corner, lintel, sill, and other specially shaped blocks shall be provided where required or necessary. Specially shaped non-structural blocks may be constructed by saw cutting. Color and texture shall match that of adjacent units. E. Concrete masonry units hidden from view entirely may be natural color units the same size as other adjacent masonry units. Technical Specifications 04232 - 3 Reinforced Concrete Block Masonry F. Concrete masonry units at interior walls shall be normal weight block 8-inch by 8-inch by 16-inch modular size. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Portland cement shall be Type I or 11, low alkali, conforming to ASTM C 150 - Portland Cement. B. Hydrated lime shall be Type S, conforming to ASTM C 207 - Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. C. Aggregate for mortar shall conform to ASTM C 144 - Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. Aggregate for grout shall conform to ASTM C 404 - Aggregates for Masonry Grout. D. Water for mixing shall be clear potable water. E. Reinforcing steel shall be deformed bars conforming to ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement, Grade 60. F. Joint reinforcing shall conform ASTM A951 - Masonry Joint Reinforcement. G. Admixture for mortar shall be Master Builders PS-235 or Rheomix-235, Sika Co., Sika Red Label, or equal. The admixture shall not be detrimental to the bonding or help the process of efflorescence. H. Admixture for grout shall be Sika Co., Sika Grout Aid, Type 11, Master Builders Pozzolith, normal, or equal. I. Veneer ties shall be per local governing code. 2.3 MORTAR A. Mortar for concrete block masonry shall conform to ASTM C 270 for Cement-Lime, Type M with a minimum 28 Day compressive strength of 2500psi. B. Mortar color shall match block color. 2.4 GROUT A. Grout shall conform to ASTM C 476 - Grout for Masonry, and have a minimum 28 Day compressive strength of 2500 psi. Where the grout space is less than 4-inches, coarse aggregate shall be omitted. B. Admixtures may only be used when approved by the Engineer. When approved for use, admixtures shall be used in accordance with the manufacturer's published recommendations for the grout. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Measurements for mortar and grout shall be accurately made. Shovel measurements are not acceptable. Mortar proportions shall be accurately controlled and maintained. Technical Specifications 04232 - 4 Reinforced Concrete Block Masonry B. Work shall be performed in accordance with the provisions of TMS 402/602, the IBC and the local codes for reinforced concrete hollow-unit masonry. C. The Contractor shall set or embed anchors, bolts, reglets, sleeves, conduits, and other items as required. D. Block cutting shall be by machine. E. Masonry units shall be supported off the ground and shall be covered to protect them from rain. Only clean, dry, uncracked units shall be incorporated. F. Reinforcing steel shall be cleaned of loose rust and scale, and oil, dirt, paint, laitance, or other substances which may be detrimental to or reduce bonding of the steel and concrete. G. Immediately before starting Work, the concrete upon which the masonry will be laid shall be cleaned with water under pressure. H. Full mortar joint for first course shall be provided. I. Units shall be shoved tightly against adjacent units to assure good mortar bond. J. Equipment for mixing and transporting the mortar and grout shall be clean and free from set mortar, dirt, or other foreign matter. 3.2 MIXING A. Mortar shall be mixed by placing 1/2 of the water and sand in the operating mixer, after which the cement, lime, and remainder of the sand and water shall be added. After ingredients are in the mixer, they shall be mechanically mixed for not less than 5 minutes. Retempering shall be done on the mortar board by adding water within a basin formed within the mortar, and the mortar reworked into the water. Mortar that is not used within one hour shall be discarded. 3.3 ERECTION OF CONCRETE BLOCK MASONRY A. Masonry Work shall be erected in-plane, plumb, level, straight, and true to dimensions and executed in accordance with acceptable practices of the trade and the tolerances of TMS 402/602. B. Unless indicated otherwise, masonry shall be laid up in straight uniform courses with running bond. C. Masonry shall be erected to preserve the unobstructed vertical continuity of the cells measuring not less than 3-inches by 3-inches in cross-section. Walls and cross webs shall be full bedded in mortar. Head (or end)joints shall be solidly filled with mortar for a distance in from the face of the wall or unit not less than the thickness of the longitudinal face shells. 3.4 JOINTS A. Vertical and horizontal joints shall be uniform and approximately 3/8-inch wide. Exterior joints and interior exposed block joints shall be concave-tooled to a dense surface. Technical Specifications 04232 - 5 Reinforced Concrete Block Masonry Special care shall be used in tooling joints to match existing construction. Interior or exterior non-exposed masonry and masonry behind plaster shall have flush joints. 3.5 CLEANOUTS A. Cleanout openings shall be provided at the bottoms of cells to be filled at each lift or pour of grout, where such lift or pour is over 4-ft in height. Any overhanging mortar or other obstructions or debris shall be removed from the insides of such cell walls. The cleanouts shall be sealed before grouting and after inspection. Cleanout openings shall match the finished wall in exposed masonry. 3.6 REINFORCEMENT A. Deep cut bond beam blocks shall be used where horizontal reinforcing steel is embedded. H-block bond beams may be used at locations other than openings. B. Knock-out openings shall have no steel or joint reinforcing running through the opening. Head, jambs, and sill blocks shall be used to provide an even finish surface to install window when blocks are removed. Joints at head, jambs, and sills shall be stacked and continuous. C. Vertical reinforcement shall be held in position at top and bottom and at intervals not exceeding 112 diameters of the reinforcement. 3.7 GROUTING A. Cells containing reinforcing and bond beam spaces shall be filled solidly with grout unless indicated otherwise. Grouting shall not be started until the wall has cured for 24 hours. Grout shall not be poured in more than 5-ft lifts. B. Grout shall be consolidated at time of pouring by puddling or vibrating. Where the grouting operation has been stopped for one hour or longer, horizontal construction joints shall be formed by stopping the grout pour 1-1/2 inches below the top of the uppermost unit. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Wall surfaces shall be protected from droppings of mortar or grout during construction. B. FINISHING AND CLEANING C. Masonry shall not be wet-finished unless exposed to extreme hot weather or hot wind and then only by using a nozzle-regulated fog spray sufficient only to dampen the face but not of such quantity to cause water to flow down over the masonry. D. Finish masonry shall be cleaned and pointed in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer, based upon the standards established by the approved sample panel. E. Interior and exterior colored masonry work exposed to view shall be cleaned by whip light sandblasting to remove stains and other imperfections. F. Exposed masonry surfaces of openings and window and door openings such as sills, heads, and jambs shall be finish block surfaces, not formed surfaces, unless indicated Technical Specifications 04232 - 6 Reinforced Concrete Block Masonry otherwise. Closed bottom bond beam blocks shall be used at heads and sills. Pour holes may be used at the sill under window frame and where approved by the Engineer. 3.9 VENEER TIES A. Veneer ties shall be provided per Building Code & as shown on the drawings and trade standards where veneered surfaces are indicated. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 04232 - 7 Reinforced Concrete Block Masonry SECTION 04730 MANUFACTURED STONE MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Samples for adhered masonry veneer units and colored mortar. B. Submit qualification data for masonry contractor, including a list of completed projects. C. Construct a sample wall panel approximately 48 inches long by 48 inches high to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. D. Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen subgrade or setting beds. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. E. Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ADHERED MASONRY VENEER UNITS A. Adhered Masonry Veneer Units: Units made from wet-cast lightweight concrete and intended to resemble natural stone. 1. Products: a. To be selected by contractor and approved by owner. 2. Shapes, Colors, and Texture: As selected. 3. Compressive Strength: Not less than 1,800 psi. 4. Saturated Density: Not more than 15 lb/sq. ft.. 5. Water Absorption: Not more than 18 lb/cu. ft.. 6. Freeze-Thaw Durability: Units shall have adequate durability for the intended use as demonstrated by test or by proven field performance. 2.2 MORTAR A. Mortar: ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification, Type S for setting stone, Type N for pointing. 1. Use portland cement-lime or masonry cement mortar. 2. Low-Alkali Cement: Use portland cement with not more than 0.60 percent total alkali per ASTM C 114. Technical Specifications 04730-1 Manufactured Stone Masonry 3. Colored Pointing Mortar: Use colored cement product of color selected. B. Latex-Modified Portland Cement Setting Mortar: Proportion and mix portland cement, aggregate, and latex additive to comply with latex-additive manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard water emulsion. a. Products: 1) Per manufacturer's specifications. C. Mortar for Scratch Coat over Metal Lath: 1 part portland cement, 1/2 part lime, and 5 parts sand. D. Mortar for Scratch Coat over Unit Masonry: 1 part portland cement, 1 part lime, and 7 parts sand. 2.3 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. Metal Flashing: Stainless steel, 0.016 inch thick. B. Laminated Flashing: Copper sheet 5 oz./sq. ft., bonded with asphalt between two layers of glass-fiber cloth. Use only where flashing is fully concealed. C. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Adhesive rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to polyethylene film, with an overall thickness of 0.030 inch. Use only where flashing is fully concealed. D. Elastomeric Thermoplastic Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a polyester-reinforced ethylene interpolymer alloy, 0.025 inch thick, with a 0.015-inch thick coating of adhesive. Use only where flashing is fully concealed. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Weep Holes: Round polyethylene tubing, 3/8-inch OD, Absorbent rope, 1/4 inch in diameter, 24 inches long or Free-draining polyethylene mesh, full width of head joint and 2 inches high. B. Expanded Metal Lath: ASTM C 847, 2.5-Ib/sq. yd., galvanized, self-furring, diamond- mesh lath. C. Acidic Cleaner: Cleaner designed for removing mortar stains from masonry surfaces; expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and adhered masonry veneer unit producer. 1. Products: a. Per manufacturer's specifications. Technical Specifications 04730-2 Manufactured Stone Masonry PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SETTING ADHERED MASONRY VENEER A. Comply with adhered masonry veneer unit manufacturer's written directions. B. Execute masonry by skilled masons experienced with the kind and form of units and installation method indicated. Arrange stones for good fit, in pattern indicated. C. Maintain uniform joint widths except for variations due to different stone sizes and minor variations required to maintain bond alignment. D. Install embedded flashing and weep holes at shelf angles, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. 1. Extend flashing 4 inches into masonry at each end and turn up 2 inches to form a pan. E. Install lath over weather-resistant sheathing paper by fastening through sheathing into framing to comply with ASTM C 1063. F. Install lath over unit masonry and concrete to comply with ASTM C 1063. G. Install 3/8-inch thick scratch coat over metal lath. Coat backs of units and face of scratch coat with cement-paste bond coat, then butter both surfaces with setting mortar. Tap units into place, completely filling space between units and scratch coat. H. Rake out joints for pointing 1/2 inch deep. 3.2 POINTING A. Point stone joints by placing and compacting pointing mortar in layers not more than 3/8 inch deep. Compact each layer thoroughly and allow mortar to become thumbprint hard before applying next layer. B. Tool joints, when pointing mortar is thumbprint hard, with a smooth jointing tool to produce joint profile indicated. 3.3 CLEANING A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean masonry as work progresses. Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly cured, remove large mortar particles, scrub, and rinse adhered masonry veneer. 1. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaner; remove cleaner promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. Technical Specifications 04730-3 Manufactured Stone Masonry END OF SECTION 04730 Technical Specifications 04730-4 Manufactured Stone Masonry SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Structural steel, including the fabrication and erection of framing and bracing members, including connections. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): a. Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings (referred to herein as AISC Specification). b. Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges c. Quality Certification Program for Fabricators d. Erector Certification Program. e. Manual of Steel Construction. 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): a. B18.22.1, Plain Washers. 3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A6, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling, and Bars for Structural Use. b. A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. c. A53, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc- Coated, Welded and Seamless. d. A108, Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold Finished, Standard Quality. e. A153, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. f. A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength. g. A325, Standard Specification of Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. h. A354, Standard Specification for Quenched and Tempered Alloy Steel Bolts, Studs, and Other Externally Threaded Fasteners. Technical Specifications 05120 - 1 Structural Steel i. A449, Standard Specification for Quenched and Tempered Steel Bolts and Studs. j. A490, Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Steel Structural Bolts. k. A496, Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement. I. A500, Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. m. A501, Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing. n. A563, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. o. A572, Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium- Vanadium Structural Steel. p. A582, Standard Specification for Free-Machining Stainless Steel Bars. q. {A618, Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless High- Strength Low-Alloy Structural Tubing). r. {A847, Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless High Strength, Low Alloy Structural Tubing with Improved Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance). s. A992, Standard Specification for Steel for Structural Shapes for Use in Building Framing. t. F436, Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers. u. F593, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Caps Screws and Studs. v. F959, Standard Specification for Compressible Washer Type Direct Tension Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners. w. F1554, Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength. 4. Specification for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts as approved by the Research Council on Structural Connections (RCSC) of the Engineering Foundation (referred to herein as Specification for Structural Joints). 5. American Welding Society (AWS): a. A5.1, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding. b. A5.5, Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Covered Arc-Welding Electrodes. c. A5.17, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for Submerged Arc Welding. d. A5.18, Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for Gas Metal-Arc Welding. e. A5.20, Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for Flux-Cored Arc Welding. Technical Specifications 05120 - 2 Structural Steel f. A5.23, Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for Submerged Arc Welding. g. A5.28, Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes and Rods for Gas Shielded Arc Welding. h. D1.1, Structural Welding Code Steel (referred herein as AWS Code). i. Steel stud connectors and their installation to comply with requirements of AWS Code. 6. Building code: a. International Code Conference (ICC): 1) International Building Code and associated standards, 2012 Edition including all State of Oregon amendments, referred to herein as Building Code. B. Qualifications: 1. Steel fabricator: Minimum of 5 years experience in fabrication of structural steel and shall be certified under AISC Quality Certification. a. Use a professional engineer on fabrication staff. 2. Steel erector: Minimum of 5 years of experience in erection of structural steel. a. With an active and enforced quality assurance program in place, as described in the Code. 3. Qualify welding procedures and welding operators in accordance with AWS. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Section 01340. 2. Fabrication and/or layout drawings: a. Prepare Shop Drawings under National Institute of Steel Detailing Quality Procedures Program certification. b. Complete Shop Drawings for all of the work showing clearly all pieces, sizes, dimensions, details, connections materials and shop coatings. 1) All Shop Drawings must be checked and signed "approved" before submittal. 2) Show all cuts, copes, and holes. 3) Indicate all shop and field bolts. 4) Indicate all shop and field welds using AWS symbols. 5) Be reviewed and sealed by a professional engineer retained by Contractor to verify conformance with design criteria stipulated in the Contract Documents. c. Prepare complete erection drawings showing the location and marks of all pieces. Technical Specifications 05120 - 3 Structural Steel 1) Copies of up-to-date erection drawings shall accompany the Shop Drawings. Use match marks on the erection drawings to indicate the sheet number on which each particular member is detailed. d. Correct any incorrect or unacceptable material or fabrication due to incorrect detailing, shop work, or erection, without additional charge. 3. Certifications: a. Certificates of compliance with standards specified for all major components and fasteners incorporated into work. b. Copies of current welding certificates for each welder assigned to perform welding indicating compliance with testing specified by AWS. c. Welder qualification data and prequalified procedures. 4. Test reports: a. Certified copies of mill tests. b. Manufacturer's load test and temperature sensitivity data for expansion anchor bolts and adhesive anchor bolts. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handle and store steel members above ground on skids or other supports. 1. Keep free of dirt and other foreign material and protect against corrosion. 1.5 DEFINITION A. Code: AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges. B. Owner: May mean the Owner's Designated Representative for Construction as defined by the Code. C. Galvanizing: Hot-dipped galvanizing per ASTM A153 with minimum coating of 2.0 OZ of zinc per square foot of metal (average of specimens) unless noted otherwise or dictated by standard. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Headed studs and deformed bar anchors: a. Nelson Stud Welding Division, TRW, Inc. b. Stud Welding Products, Inc. 2. Expansion anchor bolts: a. Kwik Bolts by Hilti, Inc. b. Trubolt by ITW Ramset/Red Head. Technical Specifications 05120 - 4 Structural Steel c. Powerbolt by DeWALT. 3. Adhesive anchors bolts: a. HVA Adhesive Anchor System by Hilti. b. HIT HY 200 Adhesive Anchor by Hilti. c. EPCON Ceramic 6 Epoxy by ITW Ramset/Red Head. B. Submit requests for substitution in accordance with Specifications. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel, Structural Shapes and Plate (unless noted otherwise on Drawings): 1. All W-shapes and WT-shapes: ASTM A572, Grade 50. a. Provide ASTM A572, Grade 50 with special requirements per AISC Technical Bulletin #3, New Shape Material, dated March 3, 1997. b. ASTM A992 may be used in lieu of ASTM A572, Grade 50. 2. All other plates and rolled shapes: ASTM A36 UNO. B. Plate and Bar: ASTM A36. C. Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B (Type E or S) (Fy=35). D. Hollow Structural Sections (HSS): 1. Round: ASTM A500, Grade B (Fy=42) {or A847 weathering steel). 2. Square or rectangular: ASTM A500, Grade B (Fy=46) {or A847 weathering steel). E. Bolts and Nuts, Unfinished: ASTM A307, Grade A. F. Washers, Plain (Unfinished Bolts): ANSI B18.22.1, Type B. G. Welding Electrodes (AWS): 1. Shielded metal arc: AWS A5.1 or AWS A5.5, E70XX or E801 X-X. 2. Submerged arc: AWS A5.17 or A5.23, F7XX-EXXX or FBXX-EXXX-XX. 3. Gas metal arc: AWS A5.18, E70S-X or E70U-1 or AWS A5.28, ER805-XX, E80C- XXX. 4. Flux cored arc: AWS A5.20, E7XT-X (except 2, 3, 10, GS), AWS A5.29, E7XT-X or EBXTX-X, EBXTX-XM. H. Anchor Rods and Bolts: 1. ASTM F1554, Grade 55 with weldability supplement S1 or ASTM A36 for threaded rods galvanized. 2. ASTM A307, Grade A for headed bolts galvanized. 3. ASTM F593 type 304 or 316 stainless steel with matching nut and washer. I. Headed Studs and Deformed Bar Anchors: 1. Studs: ASTM A108, complying with AWS Code Section 7, Type B; minimum yield strength 50,000 psi, minimum tensile strength 60,000 psi. Technical Specifications 05120 - 5 Structural Steel a. Uniform diameter. b. Heads: Concentric and normal to shaft. c. Weld end: Chamfered and solid flux. 2. Deformed anchor bars: ASTM A496, complying with AWS Code. Minimum yield strength 70,000 psi. Minimum tensile strength 80,000 psi. a. Straight, unless indicated otherwise. b. Solid flux. 3. After welding, remove ceramic ferrules and maintain free from any substance which would interfere with function, or prevent bonding to concrete. J. Nonshrink Grout: See Section 03310. K. Expansion Anchor Bolts and Adhesive Anchor Bolts for Fastening to Concrete: 1. Use of expansion bolts requires approval by Engineer. 2. Stainless steel, Type 304 or 316. 3. Provide minimum edge distance cover as recommended by manufacturer or as indicated on Drawings. 4. Submit manufacturer's data to verify at least the load test capacities of the following embedment depth: a. Submit manufacturer's load test data to verify at least the anchor bolt capacities at the following embedment depths: ANCHOR BOLT EMBEDMENT MINIMUM ULTIMATE TENSION DIAMETER IN IN CAPACITY KIP 3/8 3 4.8 1/2 4 8.1 5/8 5 11.4 3/4 6 15.4 7/8 7 1 20.0 1 8 24.7 1-1/4 10 34.3 Data must be based on actual tests performed in unreinforced mass concrete of not more than 4000 psi compressive strength. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Comply with requirements of applicable building codes and AISC Specification with modifications and additional requirements specified herein. 1. Identify high-strength steel material in fabricated members in accordance with ASTM A6. B. Minimize the amount of field welding. Shop assemble components into largest size possible commensurate with transportation and handling limitations. 1. Shop connections: Bolted with high-strength bolts or welded. C. Cut, drill, or punch holes at right angles to surface of metal. 1. Do not make or enlarge holes by burning. Technical Specifications 05120 - 6 Structural Steel 2. Make holes clean cut, without torn or ragged edges. 3. Remove outside burrs resulting from drilling or reaming operations with tool making 1/16 IN bevel. 4. Provide holes in members to permit connection of work of other trades or contractors. D. Make splices only where indicated or where approved. E. Tolerances (unless noted otherwise on Drawings): 1. ASTM A& When material received from the mill does not satisfy ASTM A6 tolerances for camber, profile, flatness or sweep, the Contractor is permitted to perform corrective work by the use of controlled heating, and mechanical straightening, subject to the limitations of the AISC specification. 2.4 WELDING A. Comply with AWS Code, and other requirements indicated herein, for all welding, techniques of welding employed, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used to correct defective work. 1. Qualify joint welding procedures or test in accordance with AWS qualification procedures. B. Test and qualify welders, welding operators and tackers in compliance with AWS Code for position and type of welding to which they will be assigned. 1. Conduct tests in presence of approved testing agency. 2. Certification within previous 12 months will be acceptable, provided samples of the welder's work are satisfactory. 2.5 SHOP COATING A. Refer to Section 09910 and coordinate shop primer, surface preparation and coating with field applied primers and coatings where specified. B. Provide suitable methods of handling and transporting painted steel to avoid damage to coating. C. Do not coat following surfaces: 1. Machined surfaces, surfaces adjacent to field welds, and surfaces fully embedded in concrete. 2. All other members for which no coating is specified. D. Clean thoroughly all surfaces not coated before shipping. Remove loose mill scale, rust, dirt, oil and grease. Protect machined surfaces. 2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner pays for inspection and testing: B. Responsibilities of Testing Agency: Technical Specifications 05120 - 7 Structural Steel 1. Inspect shop and field welding in accordance with Section 6 of AWS Code including the following non-destructive testing: a. Visually inspect all welds. b. In addition to visual inspection, test 50 percent of full penetration welds and 20 percent of fillet welds with liquid dye penetrant. 2. Inspect structural steel which has been erected. 3. Prepare and submit inspection and test reports to Owner to determine corrective measures necessary for defective work. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Contractor is solely responsible for safety. Construction means and methods and sequencing of work is the prerogative of the Contractor. Take into consideration that full structural capacity of many structural members is not realized until structural assembly is complete; e.g., until slabs, decks, bracing or rigid connections are installed. 1. Partially complete structural members shall not be loaded without an investigation by the Contractor. 2. Until all elements of the permanent structure and lateral bracing system are complete, provide temporary bracing designed, furnished, and installed by the Contractor for the partially complete structure. B. Adequate temporary bracing to provide safety, stability and to resist all loads to which the partially complete structure may be subjected, including wind, construction activities, and operation of equipment is the responsibility of the Contractor. 1. Use temporary guys, braces, shoring, connections, etc., necessary to maintain the structural framing plumb and in proper alignment until permanent connections are made, the succeeding work is in place, and temporary work is no longer necessary. 2. Use temporary guys, bracing, shoring, and other work to prevent injury or damage to adjacent work or construction from stresses due to erection procedures and operation of erection equipment, construction loads, and wind. 3. Contractor shall be responsible for the design of the temporary bracing system and must consider the sequence and schedule of placement of such elements and effects of loads imposed on the structural steel members by partially or completely installed work, including work of all other trades. If not obvious from experience or from the Drawings, the Contractor shall confer with the Engineer to identify those structural steel elements that must be complete before the temporary bracing system is removed. 4. Remove and dispose of all temporary work and facilities off-site. C. Examine work-in-place on which specified work is in any way dependent to ensure that conditions are satisfactory for the installation of the work. Report defects in work-in- place which may influence satisfactory completion of the work. Absence of such notification will be construed as acceptance of work-in-place. Technical Specifications 05120 - 8 Structural Steel D. Field Measurement: Take field measurements as necessary to verify or supplement dimensions indicated on the Drawings. Contractor responsible for the accurate fit of the work. E. Check the elevations of all finished footings or foundations and the location and alignment of all anchor bolts before starting erection. Notify Engineer of any errors or deviations found by such checking. 3.2 ERECTION A. Framing member location tolerances after erection shall not exceed the frame tolerances listed in Article 3.3. B. Erect plumb and level; introduce temporary bracing required to support erection loads. C. Use light drifting necessary to draw holes together. Drifting to match unfair holes is not allowed. D. Welding: Conform to AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code" and requirements of this Specification. When joining two sections of steel of different ASTM designations, welding techniques shall be in accordance with a qualified AWS D1.1 procedure. E. Clean stored material of all foreign matter accumulated during erection period. F. Clean bearing and contact surfaces before assembly. G. Set beam and column base and bearing plates accurately, as indicated, on nonshrink grout. 1. Set and anchor each base plate to proper line and elevation. 2. Use metal wedges, shims or setting nuts as required and tighten anchor bolts. a. Use same metal as base plate. b. Cut off protrusions of wedges and shims flush with edge of base plate. 3. Fill sleeves around anchor bolts with nonshrink grout. 4. Pack grout solidly between bottom of plate and bearing surface. 5. Refer to Section 03310 for non-shrink grout requirements. H. Do not use gas cutting to correct fabrication errors. In case members do not fit or holes do not match, ream out the holes and insert the next larger size bolt. If the connections require new holes, then drill new holes. Make no such corrections without prior approval of the Engineer. 1. Burning of holes: Not permitted. I. Prior to making field connections to existing structural steel, remove completely all paint from existing steel which will be in contact with new steel and new welds. J. Tighten and leave in place erection bolts used in welded construction. K. Provide beveled washers to give full bearing to bolt head or nut where bolts are to be used on surfaces having slopes greater than 1 in 20 with a plane normal to bolt axis. L. After bolts are tightened, upset threads of A307 unfinished bolts and anchor bolts to prevent nuts from backing off. Technical Specifications 05120 - 9 Structural Steel M. After erection, grind smooth all sharp surface irregularities resulting from field cutting or welding; power tool clean welds, bolts, washers and abrasions to shop coat removing all rust and foreign matter. N. Expansion anchor bolts and adhesive anchor bolts: 1. Minimum embedment as recommended by manufacturer or specified herein, whichever is larger. 2. Notify Engineer if required depth of embedment cannot be achieved at a particular bolt location. 3. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for installation and torque. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency responsibilities are described in Article 2.6. 3.4 CLEANING AND REPAIR OF SHOP PRIMER PAINT A. After erection, clean all steel of mud or other foreign materials, and repair any damage. Touchup coatings to comply with Section 09910. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 05120 - 10 Structural Steel SECTION 05300 METAL DECKING PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, install all metal deck, accessories and complete appurtenant work, all in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS A. All codes, as referenced herein. B. References herein to "Building Code" shall mean the International Building Code (IBC). C. Products and their installation shall be in accordance with the following trade standards, as applicable: 1. American Iron and Steel Institute: Specification for the Design of Cold - Formed Steel Structural Members. 2. Steel Deck Institute: Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, and Roof Decks. 3. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM)A 446, A 525, and A 611. 4. Specifications for welding sheet steel in structures, AWS 01.3. 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. General: Submittals shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 01340 - Contractor Submittals. B. Prior to commencement of any work, the deck manufacturer shall furnish an affidavit to the Engineer certifying to the yield strength, design thickness, and section properties of the metal deck. The deck manufacturer shall also furnish the diaphragm shear values for the deck supplied using the welding pattern and/or shear capacity shown on the Drawings. Failure to conform to this requirement shall be ample justification for rejection of the material. C. The deck manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer an erection layout drawing showing the location of deck sheets, end laps, side laps, types and locations of welds and details of accessories. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 STEEL DECK A. Unless noted on the Drawings, all metal deck shall be manufactured from steel conforming to ASTM Designation A 611, Grades C, 0, or E; or A 446, Grades A, B, C, 0, Technical Specifications 05300-1 Metal Decking E, or F, or equal, having a minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi. The maximum design working stress in the deck shall not exceed the product of 0.6 times the yield strength. B. The metal deck structural properties shall be as shown on the Drawings. This shall include minimum thickness of steel before coating, minimum depth of deck, minimum moment of inertia, and minimum section modulus. The moment of inertia and section modulus of the metal deck unit shall be computed in accordance with the Steel Deck Institute specifications, and in accordance with the American Iron and Steel Institute, "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members". C. All steel deck shall be galvanized and shall conform to ASTM 525 and to the applicable requirements of Section 05500 - Miscellaneous Metalwork. All steel deck shall be free of oil, grease, and dirt before coating. D. All steel deck shall be finished in accordance with Section 09910. E. Deck shall be free of oil, grease and dirt before finishing application. F. The metal deck shall have sheet length that covers three (3) or more spans. G. The metal deck sheets shall be formed at the longitudinal sides in such a manner that they will overlap and/or interlock. Where the end of sheets overlap, they shall be die- formed in such a manner that the sheet in the next row telescopes and snugly overlaps the sheet laid previously. 2.2 SUPPLIERS A. The metal decking shall be manufactured by Vercor, Phoenix, Arizona; ASC Pacific Inc., Tacoma, Washington; Vulcraft Nucor Corporation Inc.; or equal. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. The Contractor shall inspect supporting members for correct layout and alignment, and shall not proceed with installation until defects are corrected and supporting members are completely installed and secured. B. Metal deck sheets and accessories shall be placed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and shop drawings. Roofs having a slope of 1/4-inch per foot or more, shall be erected starting at the lowside to ensure that end laps are shingle fashion. C. Metal deck sheets shall be positioned on supporting steel framework and adjusted to final position with ends bearing a minimum of 2-inches on supporting members. Units shall be placed end to end with all ribs aligned over entire length of run, before being permanently fastened. D. Special care shall be exercised not to damage or overload the deck during installation. E. The deck shall not be used for storage or working platforms until permanently secured in position. Construction load shall not exceed deck carrying capacity. F. All openings in the deck shall be cut and fitted neatly and shall be reinforced with structural steel members to distribute the load. Technical Specifications 05300-2 Metal Decking G. Edges of any cut openings or any minor surface damage areas shall be repaired in accordance with applicable requirements of Section 09910 and Section 05500. H. After erection, all surfaces shall be cleaned and left free of all grime and dirt. The Contractor shall remove unused materials, tools, scaffolding and debris from the premises and leave area broom clean. 3.2 WELDING A. Care shall be exercised in the selection of electrodes and an amperage to provide positive welds and to prevent high amperage blow holes. Welds shall be made from the top side of the deck immediately after alignment. B. The metal deck shall be welded to all supporting members with 1/2-inch effective diameter puddle welds spaced as shown on the Drawings. Welding washers shall be used when welding steel deck of less than 0.028-inch thickness. Welding washers shall not be used when welding steel deck of 0.028-inches or greater. C. Side laps shall be welded with either 1/2-inch effective diameter puddle welds or 1-1/4- inch long seam welds, spaced as shown on the Drawings. D. Any weld found to be defective shall be replaced. E. All welds shall be free of sharp points or edges. All welds shall be cleaned immediately by chipping or wire brushing and shall be coated with a zinc dust type primer paint. F. Welding shall conform to the applicable requirements of AISC "Light Gauge Steel Design". Welders shall be AWS certified. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 05300-3 Metal Decking SECTION 05500 MISCELLANEOUS METALWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish, fabricate, and install miscellaneous metalwork and appurtenances, complete, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Codes: All codes, as referenced herein, are specified on the drawings. B. Federal Specifications: QQ-F-461 C (1) Floor Plate, Steel, Rolled. C. Commercial Standards: Aluminum Assn. AA-M32 C22A41. AISC Specifications and Commentary. AISI Specifications and Commentary. ASTM A36 Specification for Structural Steel. ASTM A48 Specification for Gray Iron Castings. ASTM A53 Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless. ASTM A123 Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. ASTM A153 Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. ASTM A307 Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 6,000 psi Tensile. ASTM A563 Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. ASTM A575 Specifications for Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality, M-Grades. ASTM B98 Specification for Copper-Silicon Alloy Rod, Bar, and Shapes. Technical Specifications 05500-1 Miscellaneous Metalwork ANSI/AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code - Steel. ANSI/AWS D1.6 Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code. 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings of all miscellaneous metalwork shall be submitted to the Engineer for review in accordance with Section 01340— Submittal Procedures. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Standard: All structural steel shall conform to the requirements of: 1. W-shapes and DWT-shapes: ASTM A572, Grade 50. 2. Pipe: ASTM A53, Types E or S, Grade B or ASTM A501. 3. Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A500, Grade B (yield 46ksi). 4. Other shapes and plates: ASTM A36. B. Corrosion Protection: Unless otherwise shown, miscellaneous metalwork of fabricated steel, which will be used in a corrosive environment and/or will installed in a humid area shall be coated in accordance with Section 09910 - Protective Coating and shall not be galvanized prior to coating. All other miscellaneous steel metalwork shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication as specified herein. C. Stainless Steel: Unless otherwise shown, stainless steel metalwork and bolts shall be of Type 304 stainless steel and shall not be galvanized. D. Aluminum: All aluminum shall be Type 5052. 2.2 STEEL PIPE HANDRAILS A. Steel pipe handrails shall be standard 1-1/2-inch black steel pipe made up by welding and hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. 2.3 STEEL STAIRS AND ALUMINUM SAFETY TREADS A. Steel Stairs: Steel stairs shall be fabricated in accordance with standard practice of the National Association of Ornamental Metal Manufacturers, and as shown. Steel stairs shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. B. Safety Treads: Safety stair treads shall be provided on all stairs, and elsewhere where shown. The safety treads shall be 3-inches wide, shall be of aluminum, and shall be American Abrasive Metals Company, Style A; American Mason Safety Tread Company; or equal. Technical Specifications 05500-2 Miscellaneous Metalwork 2.4 LADDERS A. Ladders which may be partially or wholly submerged, or which are located inside a hydraulic structure, shall be entirely of Type 316 stainless steel. All other ladders shall be of carbon steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. 2.5 METAL GRATING AND FLOOR HATCHES A. General: Metal grating and floor hatches shall be of the design, sizes and types shown. Aluminum in contact with other metal or concrete shall be shop-painted in accordance with Section 09910. B. Metal Grating: Metal grating shall be of aluminum or stainless steel as shown. No single piece of grating shall weigh more than 80 lb unless otherwise specified or shown. Aluminum shall be 6061 T6 Alloy Bearing Bars and 6063T5 Alloy Cross Bars. Stainless steel shall be Type 316. All grating shall be completely banded. C. Floor Hatches: Floor hatches shall be of steel or aluminum as shown. Hatches shall be double-swing, and shall be furnished with 2 stay bars designed to hold the cover in an open position and provide a railing around the opening, stay bar brackets designed to provide storage for the bars when the hatch is closed, 4 flush handles, joint gutter, and a moat-type edge drain complete with drain connection. Steel hatches shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. 2.6 PIPE COLUMNS A. Pipe column steel shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A53, Grade B. 2.7 IRON CASTINGS A. Iron castings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A48 unless otherwise shown. 2.8 SEAT ANGLES, SUPPORTS, AND GUIDES A. Seat angles for grating shall be carbon steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. 2.9 BOLTS AND ANCHORS A. Standard Service Bolts (Not Buried or Submerged): Except where otherwise shown or specified, all bolts, anchor bolts, and nuts shall be steel, galvanized after fabrication as specified herein. Threads on galvanized bolts and nuts shall be formed with suitable taps and dies such that they retain their normal clearance after hot-dip galvanizing. Except as otherwise specified herein, steel for bolts, anchor bolts and cap screws shall be in accordance with the requirements of ASTM A307 Grade A or B, or threaded parts of ASTM A36, unless otherwise noted. B. Bolt Requirements: 1. The bolt and nut material shall be free-cutting steel. Technical Specifications 05500-3 Miscellaneous Metalwork 2. The nuts shall be capable of developing the full strength of the bolts. Threads shall be Coarse Thread Series conforming to the requirements of the American Standard for Screw Threads. All bolts and cap screws shall have hexagon heads and nuts shall be Heavy Hexagon Series. 3. The length of all bolts shall be such that after joints are made up, each bolt shall extend through the entire nut, but in no case more than 1/2-inch beyond the nut. C. Adhesive Anchors: Unless otherwise shown or specified, all drilled, concrete or masonry anchors shall be adhesive anchors. No material substitutions will be considered unless accompanied with ICBO report verifying strength and material equivalency. 1. Epoxy adhesive anchors are required for drilled anchors where exposed to weather, in submerged, wet, splash, overhead, and corrosive conditions, and for anchoring handrails, pumps, mechanical equipment, and reinforcing bars. Epoxy systems shall be Sika/FI System with Sikadur Injection Gel Epoxy or Masterbuilders Concresive Epoxy Cartridge Dispensing System and Concresive Paste LPL. Threaded rod shall be stainless steel Type 316. 2. Unless otherwise shown, glass capsule, polyester resin adhesive anchors will be permitted in locations not specified above and shall be Hilti HV or Molly Parabond. Threaded rod shall be galvanized steel. D. Expanding-Type Anchors: Expanding-type anchors if shown or permitted, shall be steel expansion type Phillips Drill Company "Red Head" anchors; McCuliock Industries "Kwick-Bolt;" or equal. Lead caulking anchors will not be permitted. Size shall be as shown. Expansion type anchors which are to be embedded in grout may be steel. Non-embedded buried or submerged anchors shall be stainless steel. 2.10 POWDER-DRIVEN PINS A. Materials: Power-driven pins for installation in concrete or steel shall be heat-treated steel alloy. If the pins are not inherently sufficiently corrosion-resistant for the conditions to which they are to be exposed, they shall be protected in an acceptable manner. Pins shall have capped or threaded heads capable of transmitting the loads the shanks are required to support. Pins that are connected to steel shall have longitudinal serrations around the circumference of the shank. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Fabrication and Erection: Except as otherwise shown, the fabrication and erection of structural steel shall conform to the requirements of the American Institute of Steel Construction "Manual of Steel Construction." B. Steel Railings: Field welding of steel pipe handrail joints will be permitted only if approved by the Engineer, and then only in accordance with its instructions. C. Tolerances: All metalwork shall be sequenced and fabricated to ensure that the finished product is within the specified tolerances. Unless noted otherwise: 1. Overall width, height, and depth measurements shall not vary from design dimensions by more than +/- 1/16-in. Technical Specifications 05500-4 Miscellaneous Metalwork 2. Diagonal dimensions for symmetric fabrications shall not vary by more than +/- 1/16-in. 3. Flat fabrication faces (such as screens or gates) shall not vary from a true plane by more than 1/1 6-in. in 5 ft. or 1/8-in. over the entire face. 3.2 WELDING A. Method: All welding shall be by the metal-arc method or gas-shielded arc method as described in the American Welding Society's "Welding Handbook" as supplemented by other pertinent standards of the AWS. Qualification of welders shall be in accordance with the AWS Standards governing same. B. Quality: In assembly and during welding, the component parts shall be adequately clamped, supported and restrained to minimize distortion and for control of dimensions. Weld reinforcement shall be as specified by the AWS Code. Upon completion of welding, all weld splatter, flux, slag, and burrs left by attachments shall be removed. Welds shall be repaired to produce a workmanlike appearance, with uniform weld contours and dimensions. All sharp corners of material which is to be painted or coated shall be ground to a minimum of 1/32-inch on the flat. C. Inspection and Testing: All welds shall be inspected following criteria outlined in the applicable AWS standard by a certified inspector. When the applicable AWS standard does not explicitly state minimum weld testing requirements, coordinate with the Engineer for the required level of testing for each fabricated item. Submit all NDT results to the Engineer for review and approval. 3.3 GALVANIZING A. All structural steel plates shapes, bars and fabricated assemblies required to be galvanized shall, after the steel has been thoroughly cleaned of rust and scale, be galvanized in accordance with the requirements of ASTM A123. Any galvanized part that becomes warped during the galvanizing operation shall be straightened. Bolts, anchor bolts, nuts and similar threaded fasteners, after being properly cleaned, shall be galvanized in accordance with the requirements of ASTM A153. Field repairs to galvanizing shall be made using "Galvinox," "Galvo-Weld," or equal. 3.4 DRILLED ANCHORS A. Drilled anchors and reinforcing bars shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Holes shall be roughened with a brush on a power drill, cleaned and dry. Drilled anchors shall not be installed until the concrete has reached the specified 28-day compressive strength. Adhesive anchors shall not be loaded until the adhesive has reached its specified strength in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 05500-5 Miscellaneous Metalwork SECTION 05525 STEEL RAILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Steel handrail, stair rail and guardrail. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A36, Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. b. A53, Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless. c. A123, Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. d. A153, Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. e. A276, Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes.A307, Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength. f. A312, Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes. g. A501, Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing. h. A554, Standard Specification for Welded Stainless Steel Mechanical Tubing. i. A780, Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings. j. A924, Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. 2. American Welding Society (AWS): a. D1.1, Structural Welding Code Steel. 3. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): a. ANSI/NAAMM AMP 521, Pipe Railing Manual. 4. U S Department of Justice, Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board (Access Board): a. Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG). Technical Specifications 05525 - 1 Steel Railings 5. U S Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): a. 29 CFR 1910, OSHA Safety and Health Standards for General Industry (referred to herein as OSHA standards). 6. Building code: a. International Code Conference (ICC): 1) International Building Code and associated standards, latest Edition including all State of Oregon amendments, referred to herein as Building Code. B. Qualify welding procedures and welding operators in accordance with AWS. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Hardware: As defined in ASTM A153. B. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanizing per ASTM A123 or A153 with minimum coating of 2.0 OZ of zinc per square foot of metal (average of specimens) unless noted otherwise or dictated by standard. C. Guardrail: A system of building components located near the open sides of elevated walking surfaces for the purpose of minimizing the possibility of an accidental fall from the walking surface to the lower level. D. Handrail: A railing provided for grasping with the hand for support. E. Railing: A generic term referring to guardrail, handrail and/or stair rails. F. Stair Rail: A guardrail, installed at the open side of stairways with either a handrail mounted to the inside face of the guardrail, or where allowed by applicable codes, with the top rail mounted at handrail height and serving the function of a handrail. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Section 01340. 2. Fabrication and/or layout drawings. a. Plan showing profile, location, section and details of each railing, and type and details of anchorage system. b. Location and type of expansion joints. c. Materials of construction including shop-applied coatings. B. Miscellaneous Submittals: 1. See Section 01340. 2. Certification of welders and welding procedures indicating compliance with AWS. 3. Certification that railings have been designed and fabricated to meet the loading requirements specified. Technical Specifications 05525 - 2 Steel Railings 4. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver and handle railings to preclude damage. B. Store railings on skids, keep free of dirt and other foreign matter which will damage railings or finish and protect from corrosion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Welded railing systems: a. Any manufacturer meeting this specification. 2. Galvanizing repair paint: a. TNEMEC. b. ZRC Products. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Pipe: ASTM A53, Types E or S, Grade B, or ASTM A501. B. Steel Sheet, Bar (Pickets) and Plate: ASTM A36. C. Fasteners: See Section 05500. D. Expansion and Adhesive Anchors: See Section 05500. E. Welding Electrodes: AWS D1.1, E70 Series. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: 1. Verify field conditions and dimensions prior to fabrication. 2. For fabrication of items which will be exposed to view, use only materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness. a. Remove blemishes by grinding and buffing or by welding and grinding, prior to cleaning, treating and application of surface finishes. 3. Form exposed work with smooth, short radius bends, accurate angles and straight edges. a. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 IN. b. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. Technical Specifications 05525 - 3 Steel Railings 4. Form exposed connections with flush, smooth, hairline joints, using galvanized steel splice locks to splice sections together or by welding. Top rail splices and expansion joints shall be located within 8 IN of post or other support. 5. Provide for anchorage of type indicated on the Drawings or as required by field conditions. a. Drill or punch holes with smooth edges. 6. Design railing and anchorage system to withstand: a. 200 LB concentrated load applied at any point in any direction to top of rail system. b. 100 PLF vertical and 50 PLF horizontal uniform load applied simultaneously to the top rail of the guardrail. c. A load of 25 psf applied horizontally at right angles over the entire tributary area including openings and spaces between rails. d. Concentrated load need not be assumed to act concurrently with uniform load. 7. Custom fabricate pipe railings to dimensions and profiles indicated. a. Fabricate handrails mounted to walls or guardrail vertical posts using 1-1/4 IN nominal DIA Schedule 40 pipe. b. Fabricate all guardrail top rails using 1-1/2 IN nominal DIA Schedule 40 pipe. Fabricate all guardrail vertical posts using 1-1/2 IN nominal DIA Schedule 80 pipe. c. All intermediate rails shall be fabricated using minimum 1-1/2 IN nominal DIA Schedule 40 pipe. 1) Where details are not indicated, set horizontal rails to requirements of the Building Code or OSHA, whichever requires the more restrictive design. d. Provide 1/4 x 4 IN high toe boards at elevated walkways and platforms, where indicated on the Drawings or required by OSHA Standards. 1) Clearance between bottom of toe board and walking surface shall not exceed 1/4 IN. 8. Fit exposed ends of guardrails and handrails with solid terminations. a. Return ends of handrails to wall but do not attach to wall. 9. Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly of units at project site. B. Finish: 1. Galvanized after fabrication. Provide air expansion vent holes for all closed sections. C. Welded Railing Fabrication: 1. All welding to be continuous in accordance with AWS D1.1 for steel and ASW D1.2 for aluminum. a. All welded railing joints shall have full penetration welds. Technical Specifications 05525 -4 Steel Railings 2. All exposed welds to be ground and buffed smooth and flush to match and blend with adjoining surfaces. 3. No ragged edges, surface defects, or undercutting of adjoining surfaces will be accepted. D. Expansion Joints: 1. Allow thermal expansion and contraction of railing while still meeting design load requirements as required. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Prior to installation, inspect and verify condition of substrate. 1. Installation of product constitutes installer's acceptance of substrate condition for product compatibility. B. Correct surface defects or conditions which may interfere with or prevent a satisfactory installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Set work accurately in location, alignment and elevation; plumb, level and true. Measure from established lines and items which are to be built into concrete, masonry or similar construction. B. Provide removable railing sections where indicated on Drawings. C. Anchor railings to concrete with minimum 1/2 IN stainless steel adhesive anchors with stainless steel bolts, nuts and washers unless noted otherwise in the Contract documents. 1. Where exposed, bolts shall extend minimum 1/2 IN and maximum 3/4 IN above the top nut. D. Repair damaged galvanized surfaces in accordance with ASTM A780. 1. Properly prepare surface in accordance with galvanizing repair paint manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Apply minimum 6 mils DFT of galvanizing repair paint in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. E. Prepare and paint railings in accordance with Section 09910. F. Provide railings as required for stair construction identified in Section 05500. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 05525 - 5 Steel Railings SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall construct all rough carpentry and appurtenant work, complete, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. The work shall include, but not be limited to, completion of the following principal items: 1. Wood framing, including plates, studding,joists, rafters, purlins, and similar framing elements. 2. Wood blocking, furring, stripping, backing, and nailers, as shown, specified, or otherwise required for securing other work, except for such items as are specified to be furnished by other trades. 3. Structural sheathing, board sheathing, non-structural plywood sheathing, sidings and starter boards. 4. All rough hardware appurtenant to the work of this Section, as defined in the Paragraph in Part 2 entitled "Rough Hardware". 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Codes: All codes, as referenced herein, are specified on the drawings. B. Federal Specifications: FF-B-561 C Bolts, (Screw), Lag. FF-B-588C(1 ) Bolts, Hexagon and Square. FF-N-105B(3) Int. Amd A Bolts, Finned Neck; Key Head; Machine; Ribbed Neck; Square Neck; Tee Head. FF-B-584E(1 ) Bolt, Toggle: And Expansion Sleeve, Screw. FF-B-575C Nails, Brads, Staples and Spikes; Wire, Cut, and Wrought FF-N-836D (1) Nut: Square, Hexagon, Cap, Slotted, Castle, Knurled, Welding and Single Ball Seat. FF-S-111 D Screw, Wood. FF-S-1362 Stud, Plain, General Purpose. U.S. Commercial Std. Pine Plywood. CS-35 U.S. Product Std. PS-1 Softwood Plywood. Technical Specifications 06100-1 Rough Carpentry C. Commercial Standards: ASTM D 226 Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. AWPA C1 AWPA Manual of Recommended Practice, Standard for Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process--All Timber Products. FPL Bulletin 1069 Forestry Products Laboratory Bulletin. RIS Standard Specifications for Grades of California Redwood Lumber by the Redwood Inspection Service. SPIB Grading Rules for Southern Pine Lumber of the Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. UBC Std. 25-12 Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes and Quality Control Standards. WCLIB Standard Grading and Dressing Rules of the West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. WWPA Standard Grading Rules for Western Lumber, Western Wood Products Association. 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. The following shall be submitted to the Engineer for review or verification in accordance with Section 01340 — Submittal Procedures. 1. Manufacturers' catalogs showing rough hardware conforming to or equivalent to hardware shown. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 UNTREATED LUMBER A. Grading: Lumber shall be graded in accordance with the rules of one of the following associations: "Grading Rules for Southern Pine Lumber" of the Southern Pine Inspection Bureau; "Standard Grading and Dressing Rules No. 16" of the West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB); or"Grading Rules for Western Lumber" published by Western Wood Products Association. B. Grade Marking: Each piece of lumber shall bear the official grade mark of one of the above-mentioned grading rules. The Association standards for grading and grade marking of the lumber shall be acceptable to the Engineer. C. Size Dressing: All lumber, except as otherwise specified or shown, shall be dressed to size in accordance with the standards of the association under which the lumber is graded. All lumber shall be S4S unless otherwise specified. Technical Specifications 06100-2 Rough Carpentry D. Drying: All lumber incorporated in the work, except where otherwise specified, shall be air or kiln dried to a moisture content of not more than 19 percent and not less than one percent. E. Framing Lumber Grades: Grades of framing lumber for various uses shall conform to the following: Use WCLIB Grade Grading Rule Stress Fb Rafter, joist, studding 2x6 and larger, No. 1 & Btr Para. 123-b 1300 psi rep. miscellaneous framing, ledgers, etc Studding and plates 2x4 Const. Para. 112-b 1200 psi rep. to 4x4 Beams and Stringers Select. Struct. Para. 130-a 1600 psi Post and Timber No.1 Struct. Para. 131-b 1350 psi 2.2 TREATED LUMBER A. Marking: Each piece of treated lumber shall bear the approval mark of an approved testing agency. B. Kiln Drying: Kiln-dried lumber shall be treated with a water-borne preservative and shall have a maximum moisture content of 15 percent after treatment. C. Pressure-Treated Lumber: All wood nailing blocks, sills, and plates resting on or embedded in concrete or masonry within 18-inches of grade shall be pressure-treated in accordance with AWPA C1. Preservative shall conform to American Wood Preservers Assn. and American Wood Preservers Bureau Standard Specifications. Creosote shall not be used. D. Preservative: Two thorough coats of preservative, Zehrung "Pentaseal"; Sherwin Williams, "Kemwood Penta", or equal, shall be applied at least 2 hours before installation, to all surfaces which come in contact with, or are set close to concrete and plaster, except lumber specified to be pressure-treated. Tank dipping or pressure- treating may be used. E. Cuts: Wherever necessary to cut, notch, dap, drill, or frame treated lumber, newly cut or bored surfaces shall be treated with 2 heavy coats of the same preservative used in the original treatment. The minimum penetration depth shall be 1/4-inch. F. Fire-Retardant Treated Lumber: Where required, fire-retardant treatment for lumber shall conform to the requirements of the governing building code. 2.3 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS A. Laminated Veneer Lumber: The wood species, properties, adhesives, manufacturing parameters and finished product tolerances are specified in the ICC quality documents and manufacturing standard. Technical Specifications 06100-3 Rough Carpentry B. Connections: The design of mechanical connections must be in accordance with the NDS. C. Fire Resistance: Fire resistance for exposed LVL members must be in accordance with Chapter 16 of the NDS. D. Dimensions: The length and depth dimensions may be cut to size required for required application. Depth must not be cut to less than 3.50 inches. The thickness must not be cut. Wood may be notched, drilled, or tapered end cut provided the design is by a licensed professional. 2.4 PLYWOOD AND HARDBOARD A. Plywood: Plywood shall conform to the requirements of U.S. Product Standard PS-1 as specified herein. All plywood panels shall be marked with grade mark of the American Plywood Association. The mark shall identify the plywood as to species, glue type, and grade in compliance with the applicable commercial standard. Except as otherwise specified below or shown, structural plywood shall be Douglas Fir, Exterior, C-D, S1 S. Sheathing thickness and span ratings shall be as indicated on the drawings. Plywood for other specific applications shall be as follows: 1. Plywood for use in concrete forms shall conform to the requirements of Section 03310 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 2. Plywood for back-up boards behind telephone equipment, electrical equipment, or communication equipment shall be Douglas Fir, A-C INT grade for interior locations and A-C-EXT for exterior locations. B. Used Lumber: For concealed, non-load-bearing applications, used form lumber (excepting plywood)which is undamaged and complies with requirements specified herein may be reused if permitted by the Engineer. If approved by the Engineer, form plywood which is undamaged may be re-used in non-exposed locations where allowed by code if it otherwise meets all requirements for the particular use. 2.5 ROUGH HARDWARE A. General: The term "rough hardware" shall include nails, screws, lag screws, bolts, nuts, washers, plates, metal fasteners, and framing anchors; anchor bolts which are to be embedded into concrete, concrete masonry, or brick masonry; and similar items employed in erection and construction of the rough carpentry work. Rough hardware shall be of standard manufacture, approved by a recognized agency for the intended applications and shall be provided with laboratory test results on capabilities when requested by the Engineer. All hardware items shall be steel unless otherwise specified or shown. Specially fabricated rough hardware shall be provided in accordance with Section 05500 and shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. B. Anchors and Fasteners: Anchors and fasteners for securing wood items, unless otherwise shown, shall be as follows: 1. Bolts, nuts, and studs shall conform to the requirements of Federal Specifications FF-B-584E(1), FF-N-836D(1), FF-S-1362, and FF-B-575C, as applicable and as specified in Section 05500. Technical Specifications 06100-4 Rough Carpentry 2. Nails and staples shall conform to Federal Specification FF-N-105B(3) Int. Amd. 4, and shall be the type and size best suited for the intended application. Nails shall be galvanized steel, aluminum, or stainless steel, as appropriate, where exposed to weather. Nails used for fastening plywood to nailers on steel beams shall be of wire gage noted for common nails, but of 1/2 length. Nails used for exterior (exposed to view) plywood siding, siding, or trim shall be stainless steel. 3. Wood screws shall conform to the requirements of Federal Specification FF-S-111 D for the style and material as shown or best suited for the purpose. Wood screws shall be galvanized where exposed to view or to weather. 4. Lag screws or lag bolts shall conform to the requirements of Federal Specification FF-B-561 C for the type and grade best suited for the purpose. Lag screws or lag bolts shall be galvanized where exposed to view or weather. 5. Toggle bolts shall conform to the requirements of Federal Specification FF-B- 588C(1) for the type and grade best suited for the purpose. 6. Expansion shields shall be as specified in Section 05500. 7. Power-driven pins shall be as specified in Section 05500. C. Metal Framing Devices: Metal framing devices shall be specially-designed joist hangers, header hangers, framing anchors, post anchors, and structural framing connectors fabricated from steel and hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. They shall be designed to conform to code requirements. Documentation of load tests by an independent testing laboratory shall be submitted if requested by the Engineer. The framing devices shall be as manufactured by Silver Metal Products, Inc.; Easy Ardes Rib, Simpson Co.; Heckmanor Building Products; Harlen Metal Products, Inc.; or equal. The framing devices shall be equal or superior to those shown as per design, friction, and loading. The framing device shall be provided complete with the proper sized nails, bolts, lag bolts, or other required fasteners called for in the design calculations for the framing devices. D. Plyclips: Plyclips shall be extruded aluminum clips, manufactured from 6063-T6 aluminum alloy, and designed for intended use. Size shall be as required for plywood or shall be as shown. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS A. Building Paper: Building paper or felt shall be non-perforated, asphalt-saturated organic felt conforming to ASTM D 226, 15 Ib/100 sq ft. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Preliminaries: Rough carpentry shall be as specified, shown, and as necessary for complete work. The Contractor shall verify drawing dimensions with actual field conditions and shall inspect related work and adjacent surfaces and shall report to the Engineer all conditions which could prevent proper execution of this work. B. Work Coordination and Performance: The Contractor shall coordinate all the work and cooperate with the subcontractors and the trades doing related work. All work of construction shall be carefully planned and laid out. All work shall be performed under the direction of a capable, experienced supervisor. Technical Specifications 06100-5 Rough Carpentry C. Rough Hardware: All rough hardware not otherwise specified, and which is necessary for the satisfactory execution of framing, including nails, spikes, dowels, fasteners, and similar incidentals shall be provided and installed by the Contractor. Rough hardware shall be coordinated, furnished, installed, and embedded as shown and as required for a complete work. D. Framing: Framing members and assemblies shall be closely fitted, accurately set, and rigidly secured to required lines, levels, and arrangements shown. Framing shall be accurately and neatly cut and shall be securely nailed, spiked, or otherwise fastened in place in a workmanlike manner. Timber connectors and installation thereof shall conform to applicable requirements of AITC 104 and AITC 105. 3.2 FASTENERS AND FRAMING DEVICES A. Nailing: Where nail spacing is not otherwise regulated by the Building Code, nails shall not be driven closer together than 1/2 their length unless driven in drilled holes, nor driven closer to the edge of a member than 1/4 of their length. When necessary to prevent splitting, holes shall be drilled slightly smaller than nail diameters. The nails shall penetrate the second or farther member not less than 1/2 the nail length. Common nails shall be used unless otherwise specified or shown. B. Bolts and Nuts: Malleable or cut-steel washers shall be provided under bolt heads and nuts except where bearing on steel plates or other steel attachments or where flat- head countersunk bolts are shown. Bolt holes shall be drilled 1/32-inch to 1/16-inch larger diameter than the bolts they are to accommodate and shall be bored true-to-line. Members shall be clamped together, and bolts shall be driven in place and nuts drawn up tightly. Bolts shall be drawn tight again immediately prior to enclosing with finish or, if left exposed, upon completion of other work. Holes at anchor bolts embedded in concrete may be 1/1 6-inch larger than bolt diameter. C. Screws: Lag and wood screws shall be screwed, not driven, into place. Holes to receive lag screws shall be bored first of the same diameter and depth as shank, then continued to depth equal to length of screw with diameter equal to the base of the screw thread. Screws shall penetrate into the farther member a distance equal to a least 7 times the diameter of the screw shank. Washers shall be installed under each lag screw head bearing on wood. D. Metal Framing Devices: Metal framing devices shall be furnished and installed where shown. Nails for the framing devices shall be as furnished or recommended by the manufacturer of the anchor device. All nails shall be driven to their full depth at all holes in anchors. Bolt and lag fasteners shall be drawn tight. 3.3 FRAMING A. Strength Considerations: Structural wood framing members shall not be spliced between bearing points or supports. Approval shall be secured from the Engineer before cutting of any wood members that may weaken structure. Due care shall be exercised in placing framing so that structural and other important members do not require cutting for openings, pipes, vents, conduits, or ducts. Bearing surfaces on which wood structural members are to rest shall be finished to give full, true, and even support. Wedges or shims shall not be used to correct faulty work. Wood members which have been split or otherwise damaged to such an extent as to impair their strength shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. Technical Specifications 06100-6 Rough Carpentry B. Cutting and Notching: Only skilled workmen shall be used for all cutting and framing of wood members required to accommodate structural members, routing of piping, conduit, ducts, and the installation of mechanical, electrical, or other apparatus or equipment. Members shall not be cut, notched, nor bored more than 1/4 of their depth without adequate and approved reinforcing. C. Plate/Sill Material: Plates and sills shall be foundation grade redwood or Douglas fir, pressure-treated with a water-borne preservative meeting the requirements of AWPA Standard P5. Only pressure processes described in AWPA C1 shall be used. D. Plate and Sill Installation: Bottom plates and sill plates which are secured to concrete shall be located as shown. The anchor bolts shall be located as shown or as required by Referenced Standard if not shown. The plates and sills shall be leveled with shims. Washers shall be placed and nuts shall be tightened to level bearing, after which the space (1/2-inch minimum) between the sill and concrete shall be dry-packed with concrete as specified in Section 03310 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. E. Blocking and Backing: All blocking and backing in walls and ceilings shall be nominal 2-inch thick material of a depth as needed and shall be accurately located around light fixtures, ceiling registers, grilles, and other required mechanical and electrical items. The blocking shall fit snugly and shall be spiked into the supporting framing members. Wood blocking (backing) to receive sheathing, siding, metal lath, and gypsum board shall be provided wherever necessary for securing the facing materials. F. Backing for Specialties and Accessories: Backing shall be accurately located and installed for all building specialties, toilet accessories, and finish hardware items as required. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 06100-7 Rough Carpentry SECTION 06172 WOOD TRUSSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall provide wood trusses, 2x joists, bridging, bracing, and appurtenances, complete in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Single-Source Engineering Responsibility: Provide trusses engineered by the truss fabricator to support superimposed dead and live loads indicated. Design shall be approved and certified by a qualified professional engineer. C. Single-Source Responsibility for Connector Plates: Provide metal connector plates from one manufacturer. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Commercial Standards: AFPA NDS National Design Specification for Wood Construction and Supplement AITC Timber Construction Manual ANSI A58.1 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures ANSI/TPI 1 National Design Standard for Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Truss Construction. ASME B18.6.1 Wood Screws (Inch Series) ASME B18.2.1 Square and Hex Bolts and Screws (Inch Series) ASTM A 307 Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength ASTM A 563 Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts ASTM A 653 Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy- Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot Dip Process AWPA C1 Manual of Recommended Practice, Standard for Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process - All Timber Products CABO NER-272 Power Driven Staples and Nails for Use in all Types of Building Construction FF-N-107 Federal Specification for Nails, Brads, and Spikes: Wire Cut Technical Specifications 06172- 1 Wood Trusses FPL Bulletin 1069 Effect of Pretreatment of Wood on the Lignin Determination: Distribution of Methoxyls in Wood SPIB Grading Rules for Southern Pine Lumber TPI DSB Recommended Design Specification for Temporary Bracing of Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses TPI DST Design Specification for Light Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses TPI HIB Commentary and Recommendations for Handling Installing & Bracing Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses WCLIB Standard 17 Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber WWPA Standard Grading Rules for Western Lumber 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. General: Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01340. Also submit design drawings and calculations of the proposed roof system. B. Calculations and drawings shall be stamped by a Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Oregon. C. Submit 1. Shop Drawings detailing location, pitch, span, camber, configuration, dimensions, and spacing for each type of truss required; species, sizes, and stress grades of lumber to be used; splice details; type, size, material, finish, design values, and orientation and location of metal connector plates; bearing details; camber; permanent lateral bracing as required by design to reduce the buckling length of individual truss members; and handling and erection recommendations. 2. Approved ICC reports for all truss connector plates to be used, which show allowable design loads on the plates. 3. Product certificates signed by officer of truss fabricating firm, certifying that metal- plate-connected wood trusses comply with indicated requirements and Shop Drawings. 4. Qualification data for firms and persons to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information indicated. 5. Material test reports from a qualified independent testing agency listing and interpreting test results for compliance of fire-retardant-treated wood products with indicated requirements. 6. Material certificates for dimension lumber required to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee (ALSC) Board of Review Technical Specifications 06172- 2 Wood Trusses 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials: Materials and assembly shall be inspected to determine compliance with the Building Code. Every material shall be graded, marked, or labeled. B. Certificate: A certificate of approval from an agency approved in accordance with the Building Code shall be furnished with every prefabricated assembly. The certificate shall certify that the assembly in question has been inspected and meets all the requirements of the Building Code. C. Inspection: Continuous inspection is required for prefabrication and erection of wood trusses. The truss manufacturer shall retain an approved agency having no financial interest in the plant being inspected to make nonscheduled inspections of truss fabrication and delivery operations. The inspections shall cover all phases of the truss operation, including lumber storage, handling, cutting, fixtures, presses or rollers, fabrication, bundling and banding, handling and delivery. Continuous inspection during prefabrication may be waived if the approved agency certifies to the construction and furnishes evidence of compliance. D. Qualifications 1. General: The items in this Section shall be furnished by firms having at least five years experience with similar products and having a record of successful installations 2. Metal-Plate Connector Manufacturer: A manufacturer that is a member of Truss Plate Institute (TPI) and that complies with TPI quality-control procedures for manufacture of connector plates published in ANSI/TPI 1. 3. Fabricator: Engage a firm that: a. Complies with the following requirements for quality control and is experienced in fabricating metal-plate-connected wood trusses similar to those indicated and with a record of successful in-service performance: b. Participates in a recognized quality-assurance program that involves inspection by SPIB; Timber Products Inspection, Inc.; TPI; or other independent inspecting and testing agency acceptable to Engineer and authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally authorized to practice in the jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated that have resulted in installing metal-plate-connected wood trusses similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. 5. Installer: An experienced Installer who has completed wood truss installation similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated and with a record of successful in- service performance. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Design and Fabrication: The design and fabrication of metal plate connected wood trusses shall be in accordance with ANSI/TPI 1, applicable portions of TPI DSB and the AFPA NDS. B. The roof shall be designed to withstand the following vertical uniform loads: Technical Specifications 06172- 3 Wood Trusses 1. Dead Load: a. Self-weight of the members as shown on the drawings and other additional loads per applicable Building code requirements. 2. Live Load: 20 psf basic (min.) 3. Ground Snow Load of 40 psf. 4. Wind = 115mph; exposure C (design per IBC - acting upward and downward); occupancy category: Standard Occupancy structures. 5. Seismic Design Category D. C. Design trusses to withstand design loads without deflections greater than the following: 1. Vertical deflection of 1/360 of the span due to the live load. 2. Vertical deflection of 1/240 the span due to the total load. D. Individual roof elements shall be designed to resist additional lateral loads as indicated on the drawings and specifications. These additional loads are due to wind and/or seismic loading conditions and building code load duration factors may be used in calculating stresses. E. As a minimum, the following load conditions with appropriate building code prescribed load duration factors shall be considered in the roof design: 1. Dead Load + Live Load +/ Snow Load 2. Dead Load + Seismic 3. Dead Load + Wind Load (Up or Down) F. The maximum spacing of the trusses shall be 24-inches unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. G. Joist hangers, anchors, and other connectors to connect the wood trusses to the walls or other structural systems shall be designed by the manufacturer. H. The truss manufacturer shall coordinate the design with the HVAC Drawings and Shop Drawings to provide space and support for HVAC equipment to be supported on or from the bottom or top truss chords. 2.2 TRUSSES A. Lumber shall conform to the species and fully recognized nominal sizes according to the manufacturer's design. Members shall be cut from lumber bearing the proper grade mark stamps of a recognized grading association or licensed lumber inspection agency. No lumber shall be used which does not appear to conform to the proper dimensions and/or grades. B. Grading: Lumber shall be graded in accordance with the rules of one of the following associations: "Grading Rules for Southern Pine Lumber" of the SPIB; "Standard No.17" of the WCLIB; or"Grading Rules for Western Lumber" published by WWPA. C. Grade Marking: Each piece of lumber shall bear the official grade mark of one of the above-mentioned grading rules. D. Size Dressing: Lumber, except as otherwise indicated, shall be dressed to size in accordance with the standards of the association under which the lumber is graded. Lumber shall be S4S unless otherwise indicated. Technical Specifications 06172- 4 Wood Trusses E. Marking: Each truss shall be legibly branded, marked, or otherwise have permanently affixed thereto the following information located within 2 feet of the center of the span on the face of the bottom chord: 1. Identity of the company manufacturing the trusses and the address. 2. The design loads. 3. The spacing of the trusses. F. Moisture Content: At the time of fabrication, the moisture content of lumber shall be within the proper limits as stated in the referenced specifications and the appropriate load duration factors shall account for any variations in this moisture content. G. Kiln Drying: Kiln-dried lumber shall have a moisture content of 15 percent after treatment. H. Connector Plates 1. Connector plates shall be designed by the manufacturer. 2. Connector plates shall be structural-quality steel sheet, zinc coated by hot-dip process complying with ASTM A653, G60 coating designation; Grade 33, and not less than 0.0359 inch thick. 3. Connector plates shall be clearly marked with the manufacturer's name. 4. Connector plates shall be provided on both sides of the truss (2 plates per joint), and all connector plated truss joints shall be designed in accordance with the methods in the TPI Standards. I. Bracing: All permanent lateral bracing shall be 2x4 lumber minimum and be as shown on the truss manufacturer's drawings. J. Painting and Tagging: Prior to shipment, similar ends of trusses shall be painted to show erection orientation. Florescent red and green Truss Joist Institute safety and specialty tags cautioning against cutting trusses or altering trusses and indicating bearing locations, orientation, permanent lateral bracing, and field splices shall be affixed to trusses. 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with the manufacturer's requirements B. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-105 C. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. E. Lag Bolts and Screws: ASME B18.2.1. F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A307, Grade A; with ASTM A563 hex nuts and where indicated, flat washers. 2.4 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. General: Provide metal framing anchors of structural capacity, type, size, metal, and finish that comply with requirements, including the following: Technical Specifications 06172- 5 Wood Trusses 1. Research or Evaluation Reports: Provide products for which model code research or evaluation reports exist that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and that demonstrate compliance with IBC. 2. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with published allowable design loads that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and be demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A653, G60 coating designation; structural, commercial, or lock-forming quality, as standard with manufacturer for type of anchor indicated. 2.5 OTHER FRAMING MEMBERS A. Simple framing members shall be designed in accordance with Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry. B. Joist hangers, anchors, and other connection hardware shall be of standard manufacture, approved by a recognized agency for the intended applications. Specially fabricated hardware shall be provided in accordance with Section 05500, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TRUSS FABRICATION A. The top and bottom chords shall have a minimum size of 2 x 6 with a top chord extension as indicated. B. Trusses and other roof structural components shall be fabricated in a properly equipped manufacturing facility of a permanent nature. They shall be manufactured by experienced workmen, using precision cutting and truss fabricating equipment and meeting the requirements of ANSI/TPI 1, under the direct supervision of a qualified foreman. Trusses shall be fabricated under strict rules of inspection and quality control as required by the IBC and be open to the Engineer or its representative at all times. C. Truss members shall be accurately cut to length and angle, and shall be true to line to assure tight joints for the finished truss. Tolerances shall be per ANSI/TPI 1. D. Truss members and connector plates shall be properly placed in special jigs, and the members tightly clamped in place, remaining in that position until the connector plates have been installed. E. Camber shall be built into the trusses as noted on manufacturer's designs. 3.2 HANDLING, ERECTION, AND BRACING A. Handle and store trusses with care and comply with manufacturer's written instructions and TPI recommendations to avoid damage and lateral bending. B. Inspect trusses showing discoloration, corrosion, or other evidence of deterioration. Discard and replace trusses that are damaged or defective. Technical Specifications 06172- 6 Wood Trusses C. The Contractor shall be responsible for field erection of the trusses and other roof framing components, including items such as proper handling, safety precautions, temporary bracing to prevent toppling like dominoes of the trusses during erection, and any other safeguards or procedures which are consistent with good workmanship and building erection practices. D. The Contractor shall comply with applicable requirements and recommendations of TPI HIB. E. The Contractor shall comply with all engineered drawings, truss layout plans, and TPI HIB when erecting the truss. Fabricated trusses and sub-components shall be handled and stored so that they are not subject to damage. If the trusses are to be stockpiled prior to erection, sufficient bearing points and/or bracing shall be provided to prevent excessive lateral bending or tipping over or other damage. F. Framing anchors and/or truss hangers shall be provided by the Contractor in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and the Contract Documents. G. During the construction period, the Contractor shall provide means for adequate distribution of any concentrated loads, so the carrying capacity of any one truss and/or other component is not exceeded. H. The Contractor shall install proper erection bracing to hold the trusses true and plumb and in safe condition until the permanent truss bracing and bridging is solidly nailed in place, forming a structurally sound roof framing system. Erection and permanent bracing shall be installed, and all components firmly fastened before any loads are applied to the roof. 1. The Contractor shall install erection bracing in accordance with TPI HIB. Brace trusses as they are erected by forming 2x4 triangles within each of the three planes in a truss system. Attach bracing with 2-16D double-headed nails at each crossing truss minimum. Short cleats or spacer pieces of lumber between adjacent trusses shall not be used. I. The plywood sheathing shall be installed in accordance with the Drawings. Full bundles of plywood sheathing shall not be stacked on trusses. J. The Contractor shall not attempt to field repair, cut, or otherwise alter trusses without consulting the truss manufacturer. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 06172- 7 Wood Trusses SECTION 06413 WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Product Data, Shop Drawings, and material Samples. B. Verify dimensions by field measurements; measure for countertops after base cabinets are installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CASEWORK A. Products: 1. Lanz: Frameless Ecowood, veneer finish per finish schedules. B. Comply with KCMA A161.1. Provide cabinets with KCMA's "Certified Cabinet" seal affixed in a semiexposed location of each unit. C. Cabinets: 1. Face Style: Flush overlay. 2. Door Fronts: Slab. 3. Drawer Fronts: Slab 4. Exposed Cabinet End Finish: Laminate. 5. Exposed Wood: Solid wood or hardwood plywood with Grade A faces per HPVA HP-1, selected for compatible color and grain. 6. Semiexposed Materials: Solid wood or hardwood plywood with Grade C faces per HPVA HP-1, laminate to match faces. 7. Door and Drawer Pulls: Lanz 8004N. 8. Hinges: Concealed European-style self-closing hinges. 9. Drawer Guides: Epoxy-coated-metal, self-closing drawer guides with nylon-tired, ball-bearing rollers. D. Solid-Surfacing Material Countertops: Custom grade. 1. Solid-Surfacing Material Thickness: 3cm 2. Fabricate tops in one piece with shop-applied backsplashes and edges. Technical Specifications 06413- 1 Wood-Veneer-Faced Architectural Cabinets PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install cabinets with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces by using concealed shims. Where casework abuts other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. Provide filler strips, scribe strips, and moldings in finish to match casework face. B. Install cabinets without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are aligned. C. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet. D. Fasten each cabinet to adjacent unit and to structural members of wall construction. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not less than 24 inches o.c. 1. Use No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips. 2. Use toggle bolts through metal backing behind gypsum board. E. Fasten plastic-laminate countertops by screwing through corner blocks in base units into underside of countertop. Spline and glue joints in countertops and use concealed mechanical clamps. 1. Provide cutouts for sinks and lavatories, including holes for faucets and accessories. 2. Seal edges of cutouts by saturating with varnish. F. Fasten solid-surface countertops by screwing through corner blocks in base units into underside of countertop. Align adjacent surfaces. Form seams 1/8 inch wide and adhere with manufacturer's recommended joint adhesive in color to match countertop. Dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. 1. Seal edges of cutouts by saturating with varnish. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 06413- 2 Wood-Veneer-Faced Architectural Cabinets SECTION 07190 UNDER SLAB VAPOR RETARDER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. D882, Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting. b. D1709, Standard Test Methods for Impact Resistance of Plastic Film by the Free-Falling Dart Method. c. E96, Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. d. E1643, Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs. e. E1745, Standard Specification for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Section 01340. 2. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Miscellaneous Submittals: Manufacturer's recommendation on vapor retarder tape. C. Samples: Provide 6 IN x 6 IN sample of vapor retarder material and vapor retarder tape. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Vapor retarder: a. Henry Company. b. Raven. c. WR Meadows, Inc. B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specifications. Technical Specifications 07190 - 1 Under Slab Vapor Retarder 2.2 MATERIALS A. Vapor Retarder: Polyolefin film or reinforced polyethylene or new generation resin. B. Vapor Retarder Tape: As recommended by vapor retarder manufacturers. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Pipe Boots: Manufacturer's standard boot fabricated to maintain the integrity of the vapor retarder system. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Vapor Retarder: 1. ASTM E1745, Class A, minimum 15 mil thickness. 2. Water vapor permeance: 0.03 maximum per ASTM E96. 3. Puncture resistance: ASTM D1709, Method B, 2200 grams. 4. Minimum tensile strength: 45 LBS/IN, ASTM D882. B. Vapor Retarder Tape: As recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM E1643. B. Place continuous vapor retarder above granular fill subgrade material. C. Lap vapor retarder 3 IN at ends and edges of sheets and seal with tape. D. Extend to extremities of area, turn up at perimeter to form bond breaker between slab and wall. 1. Tape in place. 2. Do not turn up at perimeter if slab is keyed into perimeter wall. E. Provide pipe boot for all pipes penetrating the floor slab. F. Trim off excess material even with top of slab after slab is placed. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Ensure proper precautions are implemented to prevent damage to installed vapor retarder membrane prior to and during pouring of concrete floor slab. B. Patch all punctures, tears, holes, etc., with additional layer of vapor retarder and seal entire patch with vapor retarder tape. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 07190 - 2 Under Slab Vapor Retarder SECTION 07210 THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submit manufacturers product data in accordance with Section 01340. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION PRODUCTS A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84, and as follows: 1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less where exposed; otherwise, as indicated in Part 2 "Insulation Products" Article. 2. Smoked-Developed Index: 450 or less. B. Usually select Type IV in first paragraph below if extruded polystyrene is used. C. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, Type IV, with flame-spread index of 75 or less. D. Mineral-Fiber-Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I, unfaced with fibers manufactured from glass, with flame-spread index of 25 or less. E. Glass-Fiber Loose-Fill Insulation: ASTM C 764, Type 1, pneumatic application, with flame-spread index of 25 or less. F. F.Foil-Faced Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type I, Class 1 or 2, faced on both sides with aluminum foil, with flame-spread index of 75 or less for unfaced core material. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Vapor Retarder: Polyethylene, 6 mils thick. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install insulation in areas and in thicknesses indicated or required to produce R-values indicated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. B. Except for loose-fill insulation and insulation that is friction fitted in stud cavities, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. C. Place loose-fill insulation to comply with ASTM C 1015. 1. Comply with the CIMA's Special Report#3, "Standard Practice for Installing Cellulose Insulation." Technical Specifications 07210-1 Thermal Insulation D. Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage. Locate seams at framing members, overlap, and seal with tape. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 07210-2 Thermal Insulation SECTION 07411 METAL ROOF PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Summary: Factory-formed metal roof, fasciae, and trim. B. Submittals: Product Data, Shop Drawings, and color Samples. C. Warranties: Provide manufacturer's standard written warranty, without monetary limitation, signed by manufacturer agreeing to promptly repair or replace metal roof panels that fail to remain weathertight within 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL ROOF PANELS A. Products: 1. AEP SPAN: Select Seam Narrow Batten Metal Roofing B. Wind-Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies: UL 580, Class 90. C. Energy Performance of Roof Panels: Initial solar reflectance not less than 0.70 and emissivity not less than 0.75 when tested according to CRRC-1. D. Roof Panel Type: 12" wide standing-seam metal roof panels. E. Metallic-Coated Steel Roof Panels: Fabricated from galvanized structural-steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90. 1. Nominal Metal Thickness: 0.034 inch (22 ga.) 2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard two-coat fluoropolymer system with color coat containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Provide components required for a complete roof panel assembly including trim, fasciae, clips, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. B. Flashing and Trim: Formed from 0.025-inch (0.64-mm) nominal thickness, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal roof panels. C. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment, High Temperature: Butyl or SBS-modified asphalt; slip-resisting-polyethylene surfaced; with release paper backing; cold applied. Stable after testing at 240 deg F (116 deg C) and passes after testing at minus 20 deg F (29 deg C); ASTM D 1970. D. Felt Underlayment: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15) asphalt-saturated organic felts. Technical Specifications 07411-1 Metal Roof Panels E. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's recommended slip sheet, of type required for application. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Apply self-adhering sheet underlayment at eaves and rakes from edges of roof to at least 24 inches inside exterior wall line. B. Apply self-adhering sheet underlayment at valleys extending 18 inches on each side. C. Install felt underlayment on roof deck not covered by self-adhering sheet underlayment. D. Apply slip sheet over underlayment before installing metal roof panels. E. Install flashings to cover underlayment to comply with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." F. Rigidly fasten metal roof panels to structure at one and only one location for each panel. Allow remainder of panel to move freely for thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels for fasteners. 1. Steel Roof Panels: Use stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior and galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior. 2. Aluminum Roof Panels: Use aluminum or stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior and aluminum or galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior. 3. Provide metal closures at rake edges,rake walls, and each side of ridge caps. 4. Flash and seal metal roof panels with weather closures at eaves, rakes, and perimeter of all openings. 5. Install ridge caps as metal roof panel work proceeds. G. Install gaskets,joint fillers, and sealants where required for weatherproof performance of metal roof panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. H. Separate dissimilar metals with a bituminous coating or self-adhering sheet underlayment. I. Coat back side of aluminum panels with bituminous coating where they will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 07411-2 Metal Roof Panels SECTION 07412 METAL WALL PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Product Data, Shop Drawings, and color Samples. B. Warranties: Provide manufacturer's standard written warranty, signed by manufacturer agreeing to promptly repair or replace metal wall panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL WALL PANELS A. Products: 1. AEP SPAN: Select Seam Narrow Batten Metal Wall Panels. B. Wall Panel Type: 16" wide standing seam, concealed-fastener, lap-seam metal wall panels. C. Metallic-Coated Steel Wall Panels: Fabricated from galvanized structural-steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90. 1. Nominal Metal Thickness: 0.034 inch (22 ga.) 2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard two-coat fluoropolymer system with color coat containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight. D. Flashing and Trim: Formed from 0.018-inch (0.46-mm) nominal thickness, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal wall panels. E. Provide components required for a complete wall panel assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, seam covers, flashings, louvers, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. F. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Anchor panels securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Field cutting exterior panels by torch is not permitted. Install panels with concealed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Where exposed, use fasteners finished to match wall panels. Technical Specifications 07412-1 Metal Wall Panels 1. Steel Wall Panels: Use stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior and galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior. B. Install gaskets,joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for weatherproof performance of wall panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants as indicated, or as recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Separate dissimilar metals and metal panels from contact with wood or cementitious materials, by painting each metal surface in area of contact with a bituminous coating or by other permanent separation. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 07412-2 Metal Wall Panels SECTION 07601 GUTTERS, SCUPPERS AND DOWNSPOUTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference standards: 1. As noted for individual items. 2. ASTM Standards. 3. SMACNA architectural sheet metal manual, current edition. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings: 1. Details. B. Samples: 1. For finish, color(s) and color range selection. C. Contract closeout information: 1. Warranty, finish. 2. Warranty, installation. 1.3 JOB CONDITIONS A. Coordinate work with roofing. B. Provide components necessary to create watertight junctures between roofing and sheet metal work. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Furnish 20 year warranty on PVDF sheet metal finish. B. Furnish 10 year warranty on sheet metal work, signed jointly by Contractor and sheet metal installer. C. Agree to repair or replace work which leaks water, deteriorates excessively or otherwise fails to perform. D. Repair/replace finish of PVDF coated items which fades or is damaged. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Gutters, Downspouts and Scuppers: a. Base: Technical Specifications 07601 - 1 Gutters, Scuppers and Downspouts 1) Petersen Aluminum (PAC-Clad). 2.2 GENERAL A. Sealants: See Section 07900. B. Dissimilar metal and cementitious materials protection: 1. Alkali resistant bituminous paint. 2. Base Product: "Tneme Tar 46-413" by Tnemec. 2.3 GUTTERS A. General: 1. Factory-Fabricated, industrial quality. 2. Wind Design: Comply with FM 1-90. 3. Style 'F' gutter per SMACNA Figure 1-2. 4. Size as indicated on Drawings. 5. Clad aluminum. 6. Seamless construction fabricated in longest practical lengths. 7. Coated on each face with 1 mil fluorocarbon coating, 70 % PVDF (Kynar). 8. Color: a. To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard line. 9. Provide leaf screens at all gutters. 2.4 DOWNSPOUTS A. General: 1. Factory-Fabricated, industrial quality. 2. Wind Design: Comply with FM 1-90. 3. Rectangular, Corrugated. 4. Materials to match gutters. 5. Seamless construction fabricated in longest practical lengths. 6. Wall Straps: a. Color and material to match Downspout. b. Spacing: Not to exceed 4 FT apart. 7. Connections to accommodate thermal expansion. 8. Elbows and Transitions: Standard and custom, factory-fabricated pieces as indicated. 9. Coated on each face with 1 mil fluorocarbon coating, 70 % PVDF (Kynar). 10. Color: 11. To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard line. Technical Specifications 07601 - 2 Gutters, Scuppers and Downspouts B. Size and Profile: 1. Rectangular: a. 4 IN x 5 IN. 2. Face: a. Closed-face. C. Pre-cast Concrete Splash Blocks: 1. Concrete Quality: a. Minimum Compressive Strength: 5000 PSI. b. Air Entrainment: As required to resist freeze-thaw damage. 2. Color: Natural or White Portland Cement. 3. Plastic and fiberglass units are not acceptable. 4. Provide one for every downspout located at vegetated areas. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Verify suitability of substrates to accept work. B. Verify that blocking and nailers that sheet metal items will be secured to are attached to building superstructure adequately to resist design wind loads. C. Installation constitutes acceptance of responsibility for performance. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Provide items to be built into other construction to Contractor in time to allow their installation. 2. Fabricate and install in accordance with details and recommendations of SMACNA, current edition. 3. Set shop fabricated and welded interior and exterior preformed corners and intersections. a. Do not use field-joints at corners. b. Furnish factory formed corners. 4. Sealed Joints: a. Seal fixed seams and joints to achieve weathertight joints and required details. 1) Calk joints with 2 beads of sealant on each overlap: 2) Sealants to comply with Section 07900. 5. Fasten materials at recommended intervals. B. Provide slip joints to allow for thermal movement. 1. Utilize SMACNA details and guidelines. Technical Specifications 07601 - 3 Gutters, Scuppers and Downspouts C. Provide dissimilar metals and materials protection where dissimilar metals come in contact, or where sheet metal contacts mortar or concrete. D. Provide miscellaneous sheet metal items not specifically covered elsewhere, as indicated or required to provide a weathertight installation. 3.3 CLEAN-UP A. Upon completion of work, repair damaged areas. B. Clean stains and debris. C. Remove protective coverings. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 07601 - 4 Gutters, Scuppers and Downspouts SECTION 07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Product Data, Shop Drawings, and Samples. B. Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated. C. Coordinate installation of sheet metal flashing and trim with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METAL A. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Galvanized structural-steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90, or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated structural-steel sheet, ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation, Grade 40; 0.022-inch nominal thickness. 1. Finish: Manufacturer's standard two-coat fluoropolymer system with color coat containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight. 2. Concealed Finish: Manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Felt Underlayment: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15), asphalt-saturated organic felts. B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment, High Temperature: Butyl or SBS-modified asphalt; slip-resisting-polyethylene surfaced; with release paper backing; cold applied. Stable after testing at 240 deg F and passes after testing at minus 20 deg F; ASTM D 1970. C. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3-Ib/100 sq. ft. minimum, rosin sized. D. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular-threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners. 1. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal roofing using plastic caps or factory-applied coating. 2. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal gutter width. 3. Fasteners for Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Hot-dip galvanized steel or Series 300 stainless steel. E. Solder for Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, 100 percent tin. F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant. G. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. Technical Specifications 07620-1 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item indicated. B. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints. C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Allow for thermal expansion; set true to line and level. Install Work with laps,joints, and seams permanently watertight and weatherproof; conceal fasteners where possible. B. Sealed Joints: Form non-expansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. C. Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. For aluminum, form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength. D. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre- tin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches, except where pre-tinned surface would show in finished Work. 1. Do not solder metallic-coated steel and aluminum sheet. 2. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces. E. Aluminum Flashing and Trim: Coat back side of aluminum flashing and trim with bituminous coating where it will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. F. Separate dissimilar metals with a bituminous coating or polymer-modified, bituminous sheet underlayment. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 07620-2 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim SECTION 07900 SEALANTS AND CAULKING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish and install all caulking, sealing, moisture protection, and appurtenant work, complete, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Codes: All codes, as referenced herein, are specified on the drawings. B. Federal Specifications: TT-S-001543A Sealing Compound, Silicone Rubber Base, (For Caulking, Sealing and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures). TT -S-00230C(2) Sealing Compound, Elastomeric Type, Single Component, (For Caulking, Sealing, and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures). C. Commercial Standards: ASTM D 41 Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. ASTM D 226 Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. ASTM D 312 Specification for Asphalt Used in Roofing. D. Manufacturer's Standards: In addition to the standards listed above, the sealants and caulking products and their application shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's published recommendations and specifications. 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. General: All submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01340 — Submittal Procedures. B. Samples: The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review, samples (including color samples) of all the caulking and sealant materials and other moisture protection materials proposed for use on the work. The samples shall be clearly marked with the manufacturer's name and product identification. Technical Specifications 07900-1 Sealants and Caulking C. Technical Data: The Contractor shall submit a complete materials list along with the manufacturer's technical data and literature, specifications, and installation instructions. D. Certificates: The Contractor shall provide (if requested by the Engineer) certificates from an independent testing laboratory approved by the Engineer, certifying that the submitted materials meet all the requirements of the ASTM and Federal Specifications cited. E. Warranty: The Contractor shall furnish a copy of the manufacturer's warranty covering all sealants, caulking materials, and other moisture protection materials against defects in materials. 1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery of Materials: Manufactured materials shall be delivered in original, unbroken packages, containers, or bundles bearing the name of the manufacturer. B. Storage: All materials shall be carefully stored in a manner that will prevent damage and in an area that is protected from the elements. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 SEALANTS AND CAULKING MATERIALS A. All caulking and sealing materials shall conform to the following requirements: 1. Sealant for exterior and/or interior use shall be 2-part polyurethane, gun grade, as manufactured by Products Research Corp. "210"; Progress Unlimited "Iso-Flex 2000"; or equal. Sealant for interior use may be 1-part acrylic trypolymer sealant, as manufactured by Tremco's "Mono"; Dap "One-Part Acrylic"; or equal. 2. Caulking tapes shall be of the butyl-base, vulcanized type. Filler material shall be resilient, closed-cell polyethylene foam and/or bond breakers of proper size for joint widths. It shall be compatible with sealant manufacturer's product. 3. Primers shall be as recommended in the manufacturers printed instructions for caulking and sealants. 4. Cleaning and cleanup solvents shall be as recommended in the manufacturer's printed instructions for caulking and sealants. B. All sealants used as a filter must meet or exceed standard regulations, with the following limits of VOC contents: 1. Sealants VOC/Limit (grams/liter) Architectural 250 Roofing Material Installation 450 Technical Specifications 07900-2 Sealants and Caulking PVC Welding 480 Other 420 2. Sealant Primers VOC/Limit (grams/liter) Architectural — Nonporous 250 Architectural — Porous 775 Other 750 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Manufacturer's Recommendations: All work under this Section and all testing, where applicable, shall be performed in accordance with manufacturer's printed recommendations, specifications, and installation instructions except where more stringent requirements are specified or shown herein; and, except where project conditions require extra precautions or provisions to assure performance of the waterproofing system. B. Authorized Installers: Caulking, sealants, and moisture protection shall be complete systems, and installed only by installers authorized and approved by the respective manufacturers. 3.2 SEALANT FILLED JOINTS A. Surface Preparation: Joints and spaces to be sealed shall be clean, dry, and free of dust, loose mortar, and other foreign materials. Ferrous metal surfaces shall be cleaned of all rust, mill scale, and other coatings by wire brush, grinding, or sandblasting. Oil and grease shall be removed by cleaning in accordance with sealant manufacturer's printed recommendations. Protective coatings shall be removed from all aluminum surfaces against which caulking or sealing compound is to be placed. Bituminous or resinous materials shall be removed from surfaces to receive caulking or sealants. B. Sealant Depth: Sealant depth in joints shall be 1/2 the width of joint, but not less than 1/8-inch deep and 1/4-inch wide nor more than 1/2-inch deep and 1-inch wide. All joints shall have a rigid filler material installed to proper depth prior to application of sealant. 3.3 BACKING FOR SURFACES A. Where more than 3/4-inch wide pack with foam rod back-up material to within 1/2- inch of surface. B. Where less than 1/2-inch wide, install foam rod back-up material to within 1/4-inch of surface. Technical Specifications 07900-3 Sealants and Caulking C. Where less than 1/2-inch deep, apply bond breaker tape to bottom of joints to prevent adhesion of sealant to bottom of joint. D. Provide backing materials in as long lengths as practicable; install with proper tools. Force backing into joint to proper depth for sealant. 1. Do not insert with sharp objects. Backer rods must not be punctured. E. Joints in Porous Materials: Where required by the manufacturer, sides of joints of porous materials shall be primed immediately prior to caulking or sealing. F. Applications: A full bead of sealant shall be applied into the joint under sufficient pressure, with the nozzle drawn across sealant, to completely fill the void space and to ensure complete wetting of contact area to obtain uniform adhesion. During application the tip of the nozzle shall be kept at the bottom of the joint thereby forcing the sealant to fill from the bottom to the top. Sealants shall be tooled immediately after exposure with caulking tool or soft bristled brush moistened with solvent. The finished sealant filled joint shall be slightly concave unless otherwise shown. G. Cleaning: After application of sealant and caulking materials, adjacent materials which have been soiled shall be cleaned and left in a neat, clean, undamaged or unstained condition. On porous surfaces, excess sealant shall be removed per sealant or caulking manufacturer's printed instructions. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 07900-4 Sealants and Caulking SECTION 07920 JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Product Data and color Samples. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint- sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 JOINT SEALANTS A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under service and application conditions. B. Sealant for General Exterior Use Where Another Type Is Not Specified, One of the Following: 1. Single-component, neutral-curing silicone sealant, ASTM C 920, Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; for Use NT. 2. Single-component, non-sag urethane sealant, ASTM C 920, Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; and for Use NT. C. Sealant for Exterior Traffic-Bearing Joints, Where Slope Precludes Use of Pourable Sealant: 1. Single-component, non-sag urethane sealant, ASTM C 920, Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; for Use T. D. Sealant for Exterior Traffic-Bearing Joints, Where Slope Allows Use of Pourable Sealant: 1. Single-component, pourable urethane sealant, ASTM C 920, Type S; Grade P; Class 25; for Use T. E. Sealant for Use in Interior Joints in Ceramic Tile and Other Hard Surfaces in Kitchens and Toilet Rooms and Around Plumbing Fixtures: 1. Single-component, mildew-resistant silicone sealant, ASTM C 920, Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; for Use NT; formulated with fungicide. F. Sealant for Interior Use at Perimeters of Door and Window Frames: 1. Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF. G. Acoustical Sealant: Technical Specifications 07920-1 Joint Sealants 1. Non-sag, paintable, non-staining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces airborne sound transmission as demonstrated by testing according to ASTM E 90. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Provide sealant backings of material that are non-staining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. D. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with ASTM C 1193. B. Install sealant backings to support sealants during application and to produce cross- sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants that allow optimum sealant movement capability. C. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. D. Acoustical Sealant Installation: At sound-rated assemblies and elsewhere as indicated, seal perimeters, control joints, openings, and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions. Comply with ASTM C 919. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 07920-2 Joint Sealants SECTION 08100 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Product Data and Shop Drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, suitable for exposed applications. B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 101 VA 1011 M, free of scale, pitting, or surface defects. C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 or A60. D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591 M, 40Z coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1. For anchors built into exterior walls, sheet steel complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 101 VA 1011 M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. 2.2 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES A. Doors: Complying with ANSI 250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical- endurance level indicated, 1-3/4 inches thick unless otherwise indicated. 1. Interior Doors: Level 1 and Physical Performance Level C (Standard Duty). 2. Exterior Doors: Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), metallic- coated steel sheet faces. a. Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Doors: Where indicated, provide doors with thermal- resistance value (R-value) of not less than R-3 when tested according to ASTM C 1363. 3. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement plates from same material as door face sheets. B. Frames: ANSI A250.8; conceal fastenings unless otherwise indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Thickness for Interior Doors: 0.042 inch. 2. Steel Sheet Thickness for Exterior Doors: 0.053 inch. 3. Fabricate interior frames with mitered or coped and corners knocked down for field assembly. 4. Fabricate exterior frames from metallic-coated steel sheet, with mitered or coped and corners knocked down for field assembly. Technical Specifications 08100-1 HM Doors and Frames 5. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement plates from same material as frames. 6. Frame Anchors: Not less than 0.042 inch thick. C. Glazing Stops: Nonremovable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of interior doors; screw-applied, removable, glazing stops on inside, fabricated from same material as door face sheet in which they are installed. D. Door Louvers: Sight proof per SDI 111 C. 1. Fire-Rated Automatic Louvers: Actuated by fusible links and listed and labeled. E. Door Silencers: Three on strike jambs of single-door frames and two on heads of double-door frames. F. Grout Guards: Provide where mortar might obstruct hardware operation. G. Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to ANSI A250.6 and ANSI A115 Series standards. H. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install hollow metal frames to comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11. B. Install doors to provide clearances between doors and frames as indicated in ANSI/SDI A250.11. C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying rust-inhibitive primer. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 08100-2 HM Doors and Frames SECTION 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Samples for factory-finished doors. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL A. Quality Standard: WDMA I.S.1-A. B. Low-Emitting Materials: Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain urea formaldehyde. C. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: 1. Heavy Duty unless otherwise indicated. 2. Standard Duty: Closets (not including janitor's closets) and where indicated. D. Particleboard-Core Doors: Provide blocking in particleboard cores or provide structural composite lumber cores instead of particleboard cores for doors with exit devices or protection plates. 2.2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS A. Interior Solid-Core Doors: Premium grade, five-ply, particleboard structural or composite lumber cores. 1. Faces: Molded wood fiber facings (where indicated). 2. Faces: Grade A plain-sliced select birch (where indicated). 3. Veneer Matching: Pleasing match. 4. Pair matching. B. Interior Hollow-Core Doors: Premium grade, three-ply, institutional hollow cores with lock blocks on both sides. 1. Faces: Molded wood fiber facings. 2.3 LOUVERS AND LIGHT FRAMES A. Light Frames: Wood beads of species compatible with door faces. 2.4 FABRICATION AND FINISHING A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated and to comply with clearances specified. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Technical Specifications 08211-1 Flush Wood Doors C. Cut and trim openings to comply with referenced standards. 1. Trim light openings with moldings indicated. 2. Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. 3. Factory install louvers in prepared openings. D. Factory finish doors indicated for transparent finish with stain and manufacturer's standard finish complying with WDMA TR-6, catalyzed polyurethane for grade specified for doors. 1. Sheen: Satin. E. Factory finish doors indicated for opaque finish with manufacturer's standard finish complying with WDMA OP-4, for grade specified for doors. 1. Sheen: Semigloss. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and WDMA I.S.1-A, and as indicated. B. Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining. C. Clearances: As follows unless otherwise indicated: 1. 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. 2. 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. 3. 1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold. 4. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. D. Repair, refinish, or replace factory-finished doors damaged during installation, as directed by Architect. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 08211-2 Flush Wood Doors SECTION 08362 COILING DOORS (CD) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. CD: Coiling Door. B. Coiling Door types, refer to Overhead Door Schedule for and indication of where each type is to be used: 1. CD-IS: Coiling Door - Insulating Slat. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings. B. Project Information: 1. Certificate of UL construction. C. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Operating and maintenance data. 2. Owner instruction report. 1.3 JOB CONDITIONS A. Coordinate electrical hookups with Division 16. B. Verify structural door framing for acceptability. C. Correct deficiencies. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Acceptable manufacturer and model, or equal: 1. Lawrence Roll-Up Doors, Inc. Model HD. 2.2 COILING DOORS — GENERAL CRITERIA A. Door shall have motor operator. B. Curtain: 1. 2 —3 IN tall slats, interlocked to form an upward coiling curtain. 2. Gauge as determined by application, wind load, door width and materials. 3. Type of material and finish as indicated for each door. 4. Typical Slat Style(s): Technical Specifications 08362 - 1 Coiling Doors (CD) a. Insulated doors (CD-IS): 1) Double wall slats injected with polyurethane foam. 2) Thickness: 15/16IN. 3) Thermal Value: R=6.25 minimum. 4) Slat Type: Cornell 6F. 5. Endlocks: a. Minimum requirement: Provide malleable iron endlocks at each end of alternating slats to act as a wearing surface and to maintain slat alignment. C. Bottom Bar: 1. Curtain to be reinforced with bottom bar consisting of 2 back-to-back angles. 2. Material and Finishes: As indicated for each door type, generally matching the curtain material and finish. 3. Neoprene bottom seal to protect floor surface at sill. 4. Where floor surface slopes across width of opening: Fabricate bottom bar to match floor slope. 5. Notch for obstructions where indicated or as required. D. Bracket plates: 1. Minimum thickness: 1/4 IN. 2. Fitted with sealed ball bearing on drive end. E. Spring counterbalance: 1. Housed in a steel pipe of diameter and wall thickness to limit maximum deflection to 0.03 I N/FT. 2. Springs: Helical torsion type designed to include and overload factor of 25% and for optimal ease of operation. a. Utilize High Cycle springs rated at 100,000 cycles. 3. Springs to be grease-packed and mounted on a cold-rolled steel inner shaft. 4. Spring Tension: adjustable from end of bracket plate. 5. Include safety stop lock bearing which senses a sudden rapid acceleration of the curtain and engages to prevent curtain from crashing to the floor in the event of a spring failure. 6. Sealed ball bearings to minimize wear of pipe shaft rotation around inner shaft. F. Mounting: 1. Typical configuration: a. Face of wall (inside). G. Guide angles and wall angle assemblies: 1. Minimum thickness: 3/16 IN. 2. Provide adequate overlap of guide flanges over curtain to satisfy design windload. Technical Specifications 08362 - 2 Coiling Doors (CD) 3. Material and Finishes: Stainless Steel. 4. Include removable section on coil side for installation and service. a. Exception: Omit requirement where Stainless Steel or Aluminum guides are specified. H. Hood: 1. Typical profile: a. Round. b. Except where noted otherwise. 2. Reinforce to prevent sag. 3. Include intermediate hood supports where door width exceeds 16 FT. 4. Include neoprene hood baffle at doors used on the exterior. 2.3 EXTERIOR DOORS —SPECIFIC CRITERIA A. Design Exterior doors to meet Design Wind Load. 1. Design wind load pressure: 20 PSF minimum. B. Weather Seals: 1. Bottom Bar Seal: a. Motorized doors with safety edge: Combination electric safety edge device and weatherseal. 2. Guide weatherstripping which seals against the exterior face of slats. 3. Neoprene hood baffle. 4. Air infiltration: Maximum 1 CFM/FT of perimeter. C. Windlocks: 1. Provide windlocks on all doors used in an Exterior wall, regardless of width. 2.4 MATERIALS & FINISHES — GALVANIZED/STEEL (G/S) UNITS Materials and Finishes for Galv/Steel (G/S) Coiling Units Component Item Material 2 Primer 2 Finish Curtain Slats Galy Steel Baked-on Primer Powder Coat Bottom Bar Galy Steel Baked-on Primer Powder Coat Wall/Guide Angles Ferrous Steel Shop Coat Primer Paint in Field Hood Ferrous Steel Shop Coat Primer Paint in Field End Bracket Plates Ferrous Steel Shop Coat Primer Paint in Field Fascia Ferrous Steel I Shop Coat Primer I Paint in Field Footnotes: 1. Where Fascias are required. 2. Upgrade components which are exposed to weather to "Galy Steel"and 'Baked-on Primer". Technical Specifications 08362 - 3 Coiling Doors (CD) A. Definition of items indicated in above Table: 1. Material: a. Galvanized Steel, ASTM-A653 G90. 2. Primer: a. Baked-on Primer: Epoxy-modified polyester, applied at factory. 1) Use on galvanized components. b. Shop coat primer: Rust-inhibiting primer, applied at factory. 1) Use on non-galvanized components. c. Primer Color(s): Gray and/or Tan to be selected by Architect for each door. 3. Finish: a. Powder Coat: Factory-applied Powder Coat. b. Color(s) to be selected by Architect. 2.5 OPERATION — MOTORIZED UNITS A. Motorized doors, (typical operation type unless noted otherwise): 1. Comply with UL 325. 2. High starting torque Motor: 3. Opening rate: Between 8 and 9 IN/SEC. 4. Gear reduction. 5. Solenoid braking. 6. Limit switches for upper and lower limits of door travel. 7. Magnetic relay contactor. 8. Overload protection. 9. Pre-wiring to terminal block. 10. Motor to be removable for repair without affecting hand chain operation. 11. Safety System(s): a. Wireless Electric Safety Edge: 1) Causes curtain to stop and reverse when an obstruction is encountered when closing. 2) Self-monitoring, wireless. 3) Doors which are both motorized and used on exterior: Use Combination electric safety edge device and weatherseal. 12. Back-up operation: a. Hand Chain (HC) with electrical interlock to break motor circuit when hand chain is engaged. 1) Force required: Not to exceed 35 LBS. Technical Specifications 08362 -4 Coiling Doors (CD) 13. Controls: a. Key activated, flush mounted, 3 pushbutton control. b. Operation: 1) OPEN button to fully open door when button is depressed (momentary contact). 2) CLOSE button to close door when button is depressed (momentary contact). 3) STOP button stops door in either direction (momentary contact). c. Interlock motor so that CLOSE button will be deactivated when door is in full down position and OPEN button will be de-energized when door is in full open position. d. Electronic interlock, which discontinues the motor operator when it senses that the curtain has been secured by mechanical locking device. e. Control devices: 1) NEMA-12 explosion-proof. 2) Install 1 per door opening where directed by Architect. 14. Locking at motorized units: a. Primary: 1) Locking by motor operator's brake and gear drive. b. Secondary: 1) Electric interlock with locking device to prevent operation of motor when manual lock device is engaged. 2) Cylinder lock on bottom bar. a) Cylinder(s) as specified in Section 08710. 2.6 OPERATION — MANUAL TYPES A. Hand Chain (HC): 1. Manually operated galvanized chain loop utilizing gear reduction. 2. Pull force required: Not to exceed 35 LBS. B. Locking of manual operation types: 1. Cylinder lock on bottom bar. a. Cylinder(s) as specified in Section 08710. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that dimensions are correct. 1. Resolve any discrepancies between "design" dimensions and "actual" dimensions. Technical Specifications 08362 - 5 Coiling Doors (CD) B. Verify suitability of substrate and opening to accept installation. C. Installation constitutes acceptance of substrate and responsibility for performance. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. By manufacturer or authorized representative. B. Prior to occupancy, adjust door for smooth operation. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 08362 - 6 Coiling Doors (CD) SECTION 08411 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Product Data, Shop Drawings, and color Samples. 1. For entrance doors, include hardware schedule. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS A. Products: 1. Kawneer Trifab VG 451 T B. Accessible Entrances: Comply with ICC/ANSI A117.1. C. Performance Requirements: 1. Limit deflection of framing members normal to wall plane to 1/175 of clear span or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less. 2. Limit deflection of framing members parallel to glazing plane to L/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch, whichever is smaller. 3. Structural Testing: Systems tested according to ASTM E 330 at 150 percent of inward and outward wind-load design pressures do not evidence material failures, structural distress, deflection failures, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of clear span. 4. Air Infiltration: Limited to 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of system surface area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a static-air-pressure difference of 1.57 Ibf/sq. ft.. 5. For water-penetration test, pressure difference of 20 percent of wind-load design pressure provides satisfactory performance in most parts of the U.S. Locations where high winds and heavy rains frequently occur simultaneously require higher test-pressure differences. 6. Thermal Conductance: Average U-factor of not more than 0.57 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F when tested according to AAMA 1503. D. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated; ASTM B 209 sheet; ASTM B 221 extrusions. E. Glazing: As specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing." F. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. Technical Specifications 08411-1 Aluminum-Framed Entrances G. Doors: 1-3/4-inch- thick glazed doors with minimum 0.125-inch- thick, extruded- aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods. Provide snap-on extruded-aluminum glazing stops, and preformed gaskets. 1. Door Design: As indicated. 2. Accessible Doors: Smooth surfaced for width of door in area within 10 inches above floor or ground plane. 3. Interior Doors: Provide ANSI/BHMA A156.16 silencers, three on strike jamb of single-door frames and two on head of double-door frames. 4. Exterior Doors: Provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. At other locations, provide sliding weather stripping retained in adjustable strip mortised into door edge. 5. Hardware: As specified in Division 08 Section "Finish Hardware." H. Fasteners and Accessories: Compatible with adjacent materials, corrosion resistant, nonstaining, and nonbleeding. Use concealed fasteners except for application of door hardware. I. Fabrication: Fabricate framing in profiles indicated for flush glazing (without projecting stops). Provide subframes and reinforcing of types indicated or, if not indicated, as required for a complete system. Factory assemble components to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. 1. Door Framing: Reinforce to support imposed loads. Factory assemble door and frame units and factory install hardware to greatest extent possible. Reinforce door and frame units for hardware indicated. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed hardware before finishing components. J. Aluminum Finish: Class I, clear anodic finish; AA-M12C22A41; complying with AAMA 611. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Isolate metal surfaces in contact with incompatible materials, including wood, by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or primer, or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer. B. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. C. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation. D. Install framing components true in alignment with established lines and grades to the following tolerances: 1. Variation from Plane: Limit to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/4 inch over total length. 2. Alignment: For surfaces abutting in line, limit offset to 1/16 inch. For surfaces meeting at corners, limit offset to 1/32 inch. Technical Specifications 08411-2 Aluminum-Framed Entrances 3. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch. E. Install doors without warp or rack. Adjust doors and hardware to provide tight fit at contact points and smooth operation. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 08411-3 Aluminum-Framed Entrances SECTION 08523 ALUMINUM WINDOWS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Product Data, Shop Drawings, and color Samples. B. Provide AAMA- or WDMA-certified aluminum windows with an attached label. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ALUMINUM WINDOWS A. Products: 1. Kawneer Trifab VG 451 T. At fixed aluminum storefront windows. Minimum U- Value of 0.320 2. Kawneer 8400TL. At horizontal sliding aluminum windows. Minimum U-Value of 0.350. 3. Kawneer 8225TL. At casement aluminum windows. Minimum U-Value of 0.350. B. Window Types: As indicated on Drawings. 1. Fixed. C. Performance Requirements: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440. 1. Condensation-Resistance Factor: 45 2. Air Infiltration: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 283. Air infiltration rate shall not exceed 0.06 cfm/ft2 (0.3 I/s • m2) at a static air pressure differential of 6.24 psf(300 Pa). 3. Water Resistance: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 331. There shall be no leakage at a minimum static air pressure differential of 8 psf (383 Pa) as defined in AAMA 501. 4. Thermal Transmittance: Whole-window U-factor as noted on COMcheck report, per AAMA 1503. 5. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient: Whole-window SHGC as note on COMcheck report, per NFRC 200. D. Construction: Provide units with a concealed, thermal break. E. Glaze units with low-e coated, sealed insulating glass, complying with Division 08 Section "Glazing." Provide tempered glass where required by the 2015 International Building Code. F. Finish: Class 1, clear anodic finish; AA-M12C22A41; complying with AAMA 611. Technical Specifications 08523-1 Aluminum Windows PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Set units level, plumb, and true to line, without warp or rack of frames and panels. Provide proper support and anchor securely in place. B. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, to provide weathertight construction. C. Adjust operating panels, screens, and hardware to provide a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. Lubricate hardware and moving parts. D. Clean aluminum surfaces and glass immediately after installing windows. Remove nonpermanent labels from glass surfaces. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 08523-2 Aluminum Windows SECTION 08710 FINISH HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Hardware schedule and keying schedule. B. Deliver keys to Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 HARDWARE A. Hinges: 1. Brass/bronze hinges with stainless-steel pins for exterior. 2. Non-removable hinge pins for exterior and public interior exposure. 3. Ball-bearing hinges for doors with closers and entry doors. 4. 2 hinges for 1-3/8-inch- thick wood doors. 5. 3 hinges for 1-3/4-inch- thick doors 90 inches or less in height; 4 hinges for doors more than 90 inches in height. B. Locksets and Latch sets: 1. BHMA A156.2, Series 4000, Grade 1 for bored locks and latches (Grade 3 at apartment interior doors). 2. BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 for exit devices. 3. BHMA A156.5, Grade 1 for auxiliary locks. 4. Lever handles on locksets and latch sets. 5. Provide trim on exit devices matching locksets. C. Key locks to Owner's master-key system. 1. Provide construction keying. D. Closers: 1. Mount closers on interior side (room side) of door opening. Provide regular-arm, parallel-arm, or top-jamb-mounted closers as necessary. 2. Adjustable delayed opening (accessible to people with disabilities) feature on closers. E. Provide wall stops or floor stops for doors without closers. F. Provide hardware finishes as follows: Technical Specifications 08710- 1 Finish Hardware 1. Hinges: Matching finish of lockset/latchset. 2. Locksets, Latchsets, and Exit Devices: 626 Satin Chrome, submit samples to be approved by Owner prior to ordering. 3. Closers: Matching finish of lockset/latchset. 4. Other Hardware: Matching finish of lockset/latchset. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Mount hardware in locations recommended by the Door and Hardware Institute unless otherwise indicated. 3.2 HARDWARE SCHEDULE SEE DRAWING SHEET GA-03. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 08710- 2 Finish Hardware SECTION 08800 GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Product Data. B. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201. C. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Glazing Manual." 2. AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG-1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing," and AAMA TIR-A7, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines." 3. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use." D. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3. B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3. C. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190. 2.2 GLAZING SEALANTS A. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with combined recommendations of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are contained in GANA's "Glazing Manual." Technical Specifications 08800-1 Glazing B. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. C. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces immediately after installation. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 08800-2 Glazing SECTION 09250 GYPSUM WALLBOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ASTM Standards: 1. ASTM-C1396: Standard Specification for Gypsum Board. 2. ASTM-C475: Joint Treatment Materials for Gypsum Wallboard. 3. ASTM-0557: Adhesives. 4. ASTM-D3273: Mold-resistant Gypsum Board. 5. ASTM-C840: Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. 6. ASTM-C841: Installation of Interior Lathing and Furring. 7. ASTM-Cl002: Steel Drill Screws for Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases. 8. ASTM-E84: Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 9. ASTM-E90: Sound Transmission Testing. 10. ASTM-El19: Fire Tests of Building Construction. 11. GA-216 Recommended Specifications. 12. GA-238 Guidelines for Prevention of Mold Growth on Gypsum Board. B. Fire resistant materials and assembly standards: 1. Provide materials, accessories and application procedures tested in accordance with ASTM-El19. 2. Listed by UL, or other approved testing laboratory, for construction and rating type indicated. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Project Information: 1. Manufacturer name of listed products. 1.3 JOB CONDITIONS A. Coordinate installation with other trades to allow time for correct installation of their work. B. Maintain areas to receive gypsum wallboard installation and finishing between 50 and 70 degF. Technical Specifications 09250 - 1 Gypsum Wallboard PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Gypsum Wallboard and accessories: a. Base: 1) Georgia Pacific. b. Optional: 1) USG. 2) National Gypsum. 2. Lead products suppliers: a. Base: 1) A&L Shielding. b. Optional: 1) Ameray. 2) Radiation Protection Products. 3) Ray Bar Engineering. 4) Willard Industries. 5) Mayco. 3. Foam tape: a. Base: 1) Norton Performance Plastics. 4. Insulation, sound: a. Base: 1) Owens-Corning. b. Optional: 1) Johns Manville. 5. Acoustical Sealants: a. Base: 1) Tremco. b. Optional: 1) Pecora. 6. Pressure sensitive drywall tape. a. Base: 1) E-Z Taping System. Technical Specifications 09250 - 2 Gypsum Wallboard 7. Other manufacturers desiring approval to submit the proposal complying with specifications. 2.2 GYPSUM WALLBOARD (GWB) A. General: 1. Furnish in maximum available lengths, consistent with installation requirements. a. Long Edge: Tapered. b. Short Ends: Square. 2. Upgrade the listed types to fire-rated equivalent products when used in fire-rated assemblies. 3. Upgrade the listed types to moisture-resistant equivalent products when used in wet areas. 4. Upgrade the listed GWB products to mold-resistant types, where wallboard is installed in Electrical, Comm Rooms, Mechanical shafts, Stair Shafts and similar locations where wallboard is installed prior to building dry-in. B. Gypsum wallboard (GWB) (Interior face of exterior wall): 1. Thickness: 5/8 IN. 2. Conventional, Type X wallboard with paper facers. a. Base Product: "Toughrock Fireguard and Fireguard C Gypsum Wallboard" by Georgia Pacific. 3. Use where other types are not required. C. Gypsum wallboard (GWB) (Interior partitions and ceilings): 1. Regular board: a. Thickness: 5/8 IN. b. Conventional, paper-faced, with gypsum core. 1) Base Product: "Toughrock Regular Gypsum Wallboard" by Georgia Pacific. 2. Fire-rated board (Type X): a. Thickness: 5/8 IN. b. Conventional, Type X core, with paper facers. 1) Base Product: "Toughrock Fireguard and Firegard C Gypsum Wallboard" by Georgia Pacific. c. Use for fire rated walls. D. Tile Backer/Moisture-Resistant Gypsum Wallboard: (MR GWB): 1. Thickness: 5/8 IN. 2. Plastic-faced with moisture-resistant treated gypsum core. a. Base Product: "Dens Shield Tile Backer" by Georgia Pacific. b. Include Level 5 finish where not scheduled to receive tile. Technical Specifications 09250 - 3 Gypsum Wallboard 3. Uniform composition: a. Base Product: "Fiberock Interior Panel, Aqua-Tough" by USG. 4. Use fire rated type in fire walls. 5. Provide at showers and in walls behind plumbing fixtures. E. Backing for control and expansion joints: 1. Fire rated board. F. Joint Compound: ASTM-C475. As recommended by wallboard manufacturer. G. Joint Tape: As recommended by wallboard manufacturer. H. Adhesive: As recommended by wallboard manufacturer. I. Gypsum wallboard accessories: Galvanized for general use, zinc for wet and exterior areas. 1. Corner bead: a. Manufacturer's standard with perforated flanges. 2. Trim bead: a. Manufacturer's standard. 3. Control or expansion joints: a. Manufacturer's standard. J. Screws: 1. Self-tapping, bugle head, length to penetrate framing member minimum 5/8 IN. 2. Type S for gypsum wallboard to metal and type G for gypsum wallboard to gypsum wallboard. K. Sealants: 1. Other than acoustical sealant below, see Section 07900. L. Foam tape: 1. PVC 1/2 x 1/4 IN: With pressure sensitive adhesive; Norseal. 2. EPDM 1/2 x 1/4 IN: With pressure sensitive adhesive; Cellular rubber by Gasket Dynamics. M. Sealer for moisture resistant gypsum wallboard. 1. Manufacturer's standard compound. 2. Use at joints, cut edges and screw penetrations. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Examine supporting structure and conditions prior to wallboard installation. B. Correct unsatisfactory conditions. Technical Specifications 09250 -4 Gypsum Wallboard C. Start of installation assumes responsibility for shielding integrity of system. D. Verify areas scheduled to receive radiation shielding are suitable for installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION — GENERAL A. Erect wallboard vertically with edges over supporting members. B. Secure to each support or framing member with screws. C. Bring boards into contact but do not force into place. D. Fit neatly and carefully. E. Stagger edge joints on opposite side of partition so they occur on different framing members. F. Proceed with attachment from board center toward ends and edges. G. Make cuts neatly. H. Install with 1/4 IN gap between gypsum board and floor. I. Seal ends, cutouts and screw penetrations of moisture resistant boards with sealer. J. Remove loose materials and vacuum cavity of gypsum dust prior to enclosing stud space. K. Install suitable backing material to maintain required rating where Control Joints or Expansion Joints occur in fire or sound rated assemblies. L. Install corner bead where partition or ceiling abuts structural element or dissimilar wall or ceiling. 3.3 INSTALLATION - SINGLE LAYER SYSTEM A. Set screws between 3/8 to 1/2 IN from edges. 1. Space maximum 8 IN OC at edges and, 12 IN OC in field of board unless noted otherwise on drawings. 2. Where wallboard butts at wall/ceiling juncture, hold screws back 6 IN from edges. 3. Use closer screw spacing if required by UL. B. Drive screws so head rests in slight dimple without cutting face paper or fracturing core. 3.4 INSTALLATION -TWO LAYER SYSTEM A. Space screws in base layer maximum 8 IN OC at edges, and 12 IN OC in field of board unless noted otherwise on drawings. B. Screw apply finish layer. C. Stagger joints not less than one support from first layer. D. Install vapor barrier between GWB layers. 3.5 INSTALLATION - CEILING A. Install in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations and details shown on the drawings. Technical Specifications 09250 - 5 Gypsum Wallboard 1. Gypsum wallboard. B. Install fire rated ceiling assemblies as indicated. 1. Fasten minimum 3 IN wide fire rated board continuous over joints or use firestopping. C. Provide required items to support and trim out neatly flush or recessed mechanical and electrical items. D. Access Panels and Doors: Locate where required by Division 15 and 16, or where indicated. 3.6 CONTROL JOINTS A. General: 1. Install Control Joints in location indicated and as described in this article. 2. Comply with additional requirements of ASTM-C840, and GA-216. 3. Where Control Joints pass behind Rubber, Resilient Vinyl, Wood or other Wall Base: a. Caulk Control Joint using a color which matches the color of the Base, prior to installing Base. 4. Install suitable backing material to maintain required rating where Control Joints occur in fire or sound rated assemblies. B. Partitions: 1. Provide vertical Control Joints, aligned with door/window frames as follows: a. Single doors: Each side of jamb from head of opening to top of partition. b. Pair doors: Both jambs from head of opening to top of partition. 1) Exception: Control Joints are not required where partition forms a "Cross- corridor" condition. c. Cased openings: Both jambs from head of opening to top of partition. d. Window openings: Both jambs from head of opening to top of partition, and from sill to floor. e. Doors with adjacent sidelights: Both jambs from head of opening to top of partition, and, from sill to floor at sidelight. 2. Provide additional vertical Control Joints, spaced no more than 30 FT apart from each other, from frame-related (listed above), or from corners. 3. Provide horizontal Control Joints at partitions which are more than one story in height: a. Locate horizontal Control Joints where partitions bypass each intermediate floor. b. Align control joint with floor line, unless otherwise indicated. C. Ceilings: 1. Use Control Joints to subdivide ceilings as indicated, and within the following limits: Technical Specifications 09250 - 6 Gypsum Wallboard a. Ceilings without perimeter relief: 1) Subdivide so that no area exceeds 900 FT2, and no area has a length which exceeds 30 FT. b. Locate Control Joints at transitions between areas of different shapes. 3.7 WALLBOARD FINISHING A. Securely attach continuous corner beads to external corners in accordance with manufacturers directions. B. Where wallboard abuts dissimilar surfaces securely attach continuous trim beads in accordance with manufacturers directions. 1. Where bead abuts exterior metal window frames or other metal components, separate from other material by use of foam tape. 2. Install accessories. C. Apply joint treatment compound full height of partition in accordance with manufacturer's directions. D. Fill joints, screw heads and internal corners with compound. E. Perform Level 4 finishing in accordance with ASTM-C840. 1. Provide Level 4 finish unless otherwise indicated. 2. Locations: Wallboard scheduled to be finished with flat or eggshell paint, textured plastic coating, or wallcovering. 3. Draw down final coat of compound to a smooth even plane. 4. After drying, sand or otherwise smooth final coat of compound as needed to eliminate high spots or excess compound to leave smooth, even, and level surface. F. Have wall primed by painter. G. After painter has applied primer to wallboard surfaces, repair and refinish defective areas. H. If wallboard is damaged, or surfaces are roughened, repair, or remove and replace, to satisfaction of Architect, at no additional cost to Owner. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Protect installed wallboard from water damage during construction. B. Prior to finishing, all walls shall be inspected for visible mold growth. 1. Replace affected portions. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 09250 - 7 Gypsum Wallboard SECTION 09800 PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: 1. Product Data. 2. Samples. B. Mockups: Full-coat finish Sample of each type of coating, color, and substrate, applied where directed. C. Extra Materials: Deliver to Owner 1 gal. of each color and type of finish coat paint used on Project, in containers, properly labeled and sealed. D. Interior paint to be low VOC. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PAINT A. MPI Standards: Provide materials that comply with MPI standards indicated and listed in its "MPI Approved Products List." B. Material Compatibility: Provide materials that are compatible with one another and with substrates. 1. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. C. Use interior paints and coatings that comply with the following limits for VOC content: 1. Flat Paints and Coatings: Not greater than 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints, Coatings: Not greater than 150 g/L. 3. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L. 4. Clear Wood Finishes, Varnishes: 350 g/L. 5. Clear Wood Finishes, Lacquers: 550 g/L. 6. Floor Coatings: 100 g/L. 7. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L. 8. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L. 9. Stains: 250 g/L. 10. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: Not greater than 50 g/L. D. Colors: As selected. Technical Specifications 09800-1 Painting PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Comply with recommendations in MPI's "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B. Remove hardware, lighting fixtures, and similar items that are not to be painted. Mask items that cannot be removed. Reinstall items in each area after painting is complete. C. Clean and prepare surfaces in an area before beginning painting in that area. Schedule painting so cleaning operations will not damage newly painted surfaces. 3.2 APPLICATION A. Comply with recommendations in MPI's "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B. Paint exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 1. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. 2. Paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint the back side of access panels. 4. Color-code mechanical piping in accessible ceiling spaces. 5. Do not paint prefinished items, items with an integral finish, operating parts, and labels unless otherwise indicated. C. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use brushes only for exterior painting and where the use of other applicators is not practical. 2. Use rollers for finish coat on interior walls and ceilings. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. 1. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. E. Apply stains and transparent finishes to produce surface films without color irregularity, cloudiness, holidays, lap marks, brush marks, runs, ropiness, or other imperfections. Use multiple coats to produce a smooth surface film of even luster. 3.3 EXTERIOR PAINT APPLICATION SCHEDULE A. Wood Panel Products: Including siding. 1. Satin Latex: One coat over primer: MPI EXT 6.4K per siding manufacturer's specifications. B. Dressed Lumber: Including architectural/structural woodwork Technical Specifications 09800-2 Painting 1. Satin Latex: One coat over primer: MPI EXT 6.4K per siding manufacturer's specifications. C. Miscellaneous Metal: 1. DTM acrylic coating semi-gloss 3.4 INTERIOR PAINT APPLICATION SCHEDULE A. Gypsum Board: 1. Semigloss Latex: Two coats over primer/sealer: MPI INT 9.2A. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 09800-3 Painting SECTION 09910 PROTECTIVE COATINGS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENTS A. The Work of this Section shall include the protective coating of all specified surfaces including all surface preparation, pretreatment, coating application, touch-up of factory- coated surfaces, protection of surfaces not to be coated, cleanup, and appurtenant work, all in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Submittals: 1. Product Data. 2. Samples. C. The following surfaces shall not be coated: Concrete, unless indicated elsewhere in the Specifications or Drawings. Stainless Steel Electrical Conduit Machine Surfaces Grease Fittings Glass Equipment Nameplates Platform gratings, stair treads, door thresholds, and other walking surfaces, unless specifically indicated to be coated. PVC piping indoors not subject to UV exposure. D. The coating system schedules summarize the surfaces to be coated, the required surface preparation, and the coating systems to be applied. Coating notes on the drawings are used to show exceptions to the schedules, to show or extend the limits of coating systems, or to clarify or show details for application of the coating systems. E. Extra Materials: Deliver to Owner 1 gal. of each color and type of finish coat paint used on Project, in containers, properly labeled and sealed. F. Interior paint shall be low VOC. G. Submit color chart to Owner along with the submittal for each coating system. The Owner shall select the color of all protective coatings. H. Paint all exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. I. Color-code mechanical piping. Technical Specifications 09910-1 Protective Coatings 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS A. References herein to "SSPC Specifications" or"SSPC" shall mean the published standards of the Steel Structures Painting Council B. References herein to "NACE" shall mean the published standards of the National Association of Corrosion Engineers C. Commercial Standards: ANSI A 13.1 Scheme for Identification of Piping Systems. ANSI/AWWA C105 Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Piping for Water and Other Liquids. ANSI/AWWA C203 Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipelines - Enamel and Tape-Hot-Applied. ANSI/AWWA D102 Painting Steel Water-Storage Tanks D. Federal Specifications: TT-P-28F Paint, Aluminum, Heat Resisting (1200F) DOD-P-23236A(SH) Military Specification, Paint Coating Systems, Steel Ship Tank, Fuel and Salt Water Ballast. 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. All submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01340. B. Samples 1. Submit samples of all paint, finishes and other coating materials specified herein. Paint or coating samples shall be submitted on 8-1/2-in. by 11-in. sheet metal. Each sample shall be completely coated over its entire surface with one protective coating material, type and color. C. Manufacturer's Information 1. Paint manufacturer's data sheet for each product used, including statements on the suitability of the material for the intended use. 2. Paint manufacturer's instructions and recommendations on surface preparation and application. 3. Colors available for each product (where applicable). 4. Compatibility of shop and field coatings (where applicable). 5. Material safety data sheet for each product used. 6. Two sets of color samples to match each color selected by the Owner from the manufacturer's standard color sheets. If custom mixed colors are required by this Section, the color samples shall be made using color formulations prepared to match the color samples furnished by the Owner. The color formula shall be shown on the back of each color sample. Technical Specifications 09910-2 Protective Coatings 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: The Contractor shall give the Engineer a minimum of 3 days advance notice of the start of any field surface preparation work of coating application work, and a minimum of 7 days advance notice of the start of any shop surface preparation work. B. Inspection by the Engineer, or the waiver of inspection of any particular portion of the work, shall not relieve the Contractor of its responsibility to perform the work in accordance with these Specifications. C. Scaffolding shall be erected and moved to locations where requested by the Engineer to facilitate inspection. Additional illumination shall be provided to cover all areas to be inspected. D. Film Thickness Testing: On ferrous metals, the dry film coating thickness shall be measured in accordance with the SSPC "Paint Application Specification No.2" using a magnetic-type dry film thickness gauge such as Mikrotest model FM, Elcometer model 111/1 EZ, or equal. Each coat shall be tested for the correct thickness. No measurements shall be made until at least 8 hours after application of the coating. On non-ferrous metals and other substrates, the coating thicknesses shall be measured at the time of application using a wet film gauge. E. Surface Preparation: Evaluation of blast cleaned surface preparation work will be based upon comparison of the blasted surfaces with the standard samples available from the NACE, using NACE standard TM-01-70. F. Warranty Inspection: A warranty inspection may be conducted during the eleventh month following completion of all coating and painting work. The Contractor and a representative of the coating material manufacturer shall attend this inspection. All defective work shall be repaired in accordance with these specifications and to the satisfaction of the Owner. The Owner may, by written notice to the Contractor, reschedule the warranty inspection to another date within the one-year correction period, or may cancel the warranty inspection altogether. If a warranty inspection is not held the Contractor is not relieved of its responsibilities under the Contract Documents. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. The term "paint," "coatings," or"finishes" as used herein, shall include surface treatments, emulsions, enamels, paints, epoxy resins, and all other protective coatings, excepting galvanizing or anodizing, whether used as a pretreatment, primer, intermediate coat, or finish coat. The term "DF7 means minimum dry film thickness. B. Coating materials shall be sealed in containers that plainly show the designated name, formula or specification number, batch number, color, date of manufacture, manufacturer's directions, and name of manufacturer, all of which shall be plainly legible at the time of use. C. The Contractor shall use coating materials suitable for the intended use and recommended by their manufacturer for the intended service. Technical Specifications 09910-3 Protective Coatings D. In any coating system only compatible materials from a single manufacturer shall be used in the work. Particular attention shall be directed to compatibility of primers and finish coats. If necessary, subject to the approval of the Engineer, a barrier coat shall be applied between existing prime coat and subsequent field coats to ensure compatibility. E. All colors and shades of colors of all coats of paint shall be as selected or specified by the Owner. Each coat shall be of a slightly different shade, to facilitate inspection of surface coverage of each coat. Finish colors shall be as selected from the manufacturer's standard color samples by the Owner. F. Products shall be standard products produced by recognized manufacturers who are regularly engaged in production of such materials for essentially identical service conditions. Where requested, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with the names of not less than 10 successful applications of the proposed manufacturer's products demonstrating compliance with this specification requirement. 2.2 SYSTEM MANUFACTURERS A. Each of the following manufacturers is capable of supplying many of the industrial coating materials specified herein. Where manufacturers and paint numbers are listed, it is to show the type and quality of coatings that are required as a minimum. a. Sherwin-Williams b. Carboline Coatings Company c. Tnemec 2.3 COATING SYSTEM SCHEDULE A. Structural Steel, Metal Doors/Frames & other miscellaneous metals: 1. System (4)—Aliphatic Polyurethane Two component aliphatic polyurethane coating with a minimum solids content of 71 percent by volume. Primer shall be a low temperature cure two component epoxy coating with a minimum solids contents of 58 percent by volume. Finish coat shall include a UV Blocker additive, such as Tnemec Series 44-600 or equal. a. Materials Primer Type Rust-inhibitive, 2 component epoxy VOC Content, maximum 25 /L Finish Type 2 component aliphatic polyurethane VOC Content, maximum 300 g/L Demonstrated suitable Ferrous surfaces, superior color and gloss for retention, exceptional resistance to weathering, chemical fumes and splash Technical Specifications 09910-4 Protective Coatings b. Application and manufacturers: Surface Prime Coat Finish Coat Total System Preparation DFT = 3— 5 DFT = 3 —4 mils) DFT Tnemec Series 161 Tnemec Series 1075U SSPC SP6 Ameron Amerlock 400/2 Ameron Amershield 6 — 9 mils B. Wood / Gypsum: 1. System (210) —Acrylic For wood indoors & outdoors and cement and gypsum board indoors. a. Material: Primer Type As recommended by manufacturer Demonstrated suitable for Fluidized bed or electrostatic spray application, recommended for pumps, valves, pipe appurtenances, tanks, pipe hangers, flow meters, and hydrants Certification NSF 61 b. Application & Manufacturers: Surface Prime Coat Finish Coat Total System Preparation 1.5 to 2.5 mils (4 to 6 mils, 2 coats) DFT Clean, dry, smooth Ameron Amercoat 148 Amercoat 220 per manufacturer's 5.5 to 8.5 mils instructions Tnemec Elast-Grip Tneme-Cryl 6 151-1051 (2 coats) 2. Epoxy For application on mud room walls & concrete floors (grade slab). a. Material Primer As recommended by manufacturer Demonstrated suitable for Floors, walls and other substrates. Can withstand mild to moderate chemical and solvent exposures, as well as repeated cleaning. Technical Specifications 09910-5 Protective Coatings b. Application & Manufacturers: Surface Prime Coat Finish Coat Total System Preparation (4 to 6 mils -2 Coats) (2 to 3 mils, 2 coats) DFT Clean, dry, smooth Tnemec Series 287 per manufacturer's Tnemec Series 201 12 to 18 mils instructions C. Galvanized Surfaces (where indicated): 1. System (100)—Amine Cure Epoxy a. Material: Type High build, amine cure epoxy VOC content, g/L 220 maximum Demonstrated suitable for Steel, long-term immersion in water and wastewater, resistant to corrosion, chemical Certification NSF 61 if in contact with potable water b. Application and Manufacturers: Surface Preparation Products Total System DFT (3 coats or more) Ameron Amercoat 395 FD 15— 17 mils Carboline Carboguard For non-submerged valves SSPC SP10 891 and other equipment, Devoe Bar-Rust 233H DFT = 10— 12 mils c. Non-skid surfaces of steel or galvanized steel: Where non-skid surface is required, add grit or silica sand to the protective coating for slip protection. Texture shall be 30-50mesh grit or silica sand incorporated into the coating system. The CONTRACTOR shall submit and follow the manufacturer's recommended materials, number and thickness of coats, and methods. D. All Piping except Stainless Steel Pipes: 1. System (7) -Acrylic Latex a. Material Primer Product, surface preparation, and DFT as recommended by manufacturer for the surface Finish Type Single component, water based acrylic latex, with fungicide VOC Content, max 180 grams per gallon Demonstrated suitable for PVC piping, weather and mild chemical resistance, excellent color and gloss retention Technical Specifications 09910-6 Protective Coatings b. Application and Manufacturers: Surface Primer Finish Total System Preparation (DFT per (at least 2 coats DFT manufacturer) required Per Manufacturer Sherwin Williams DTM Sherwin Williams primer plus 6 Recommendation Bonding Primer Metalatex mils Carboline Sanitile 120 Carboline Carbocrylic 3359 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 STORAGE, MIXING, AND THINNING OF MATERIALS A. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Unless otherwise specified herein, the coating manufacturer's printed recommendations and instructions for thinning, mixing, handling, applying, and protecting its coating materials, for preparation of surfaces for coating, and for all other procedures relative to coating shall be strictly observed. The Contractor shall supply the Engineer with copies of each manufacturer's instructions in accordance with the requirements of Section 01340 — Submittal Procedures. B. All protective coating materials shall be used within the manufacturer's recommended shelf life. Storage and Mixing: Coating materials shall be protected from exposure to cold weather, and shall be thoroughly stirred, strained, and kept at a uniform consistency during application. Coatings of different manufacturers shall not be mixed together. 3.2 PREPARATION FOR COATING A. General: All surfaces to receive protective coatings shall be cleaned as specified herein prior to application of said coatings. The Contractor shall examine all surfaces to be coated and shall correct all surface defects before application of any coating material. All marred or abraded spots on shop-primed and on factory-finished surfaces shall receive touch-up restoration prior to any coating application. B. Protection of Surfaces Not to be Coated: Surfaces which are not to receive protective coatings shall be protected during surface preparation, cleaning, and coating operations. C. All hardware, lighting fixtures, switch plates, machined surfaces, couplings, shafts, bearings, nameplates on machinery, and other surfaces not to be painted shall be removed, masked or otherwise protected. Drop cloths shall be provided to prevent coating materials from falling on or marring adjacent surfaces. The working parts of all mechanical and electrical equipment shall be protected from damage during surface preparation and coating operations. Openings in motors shall be masked to prevent entry of coating or other materials. D. Spray painting shall be conducted under carefully controlled conditions. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for and shall promptly repair any and all damage to adjacent work or adjoining property occurring from blast cleaning or coating operations. Technical Specifications 09910-7 Protective Coatings E. Protection of Painted Surfaces: Cleaning and coating shall be so programmed that dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly coated surfaces. 3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION STANDARDS A. The following referenced surface preparation specifications of the Steel Structures Painting Council shall form a part of this specification: 1. Solvent Cleaning (SSPC-SP1): Removal of oil, grease, soil, salts, and other soluble contaminants by cleaning with solvent, vapor, alkali, emulsion, or steam. 2. Hand Tool Cleaning (SSPC-SP2): Removal of loose rust, loose mill scale, loose paint, and other loose detrimental foreign matter, by hand chipping, scraping, sanding, and wire brushing. 3. Power Tool Cleaning (SSPC-SP3): Removal of loose rust, loose mill scale, loose paint, and other loose detrimental foreign matter, by power tool chipping, descaling, sanding, wire brushing, and grinding. 4. White Metal Blast Cleaning (SSPC-SP5): Removal of all visible rust, oil, grease, soil, dust, mill scale, paint, oxides, corrosion products and foreign matter by blast cleaning. 5. Commercial Blast Cleaning (SSPC-SP6): Removal of all visible oil, grease, soil, dust, mill scale, rust, paint, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter, except that staining shall be limited to no more than 33 percent of each square inch of surface area. 6. Brush-Off Blast Cleaning (SSPC-SP7): Removal of all visible oil, grease, soil, dust, loose mill scale, loose rust, and loose paint. 7. Near-White Blast Cleaning (SSPC-SP10): Removal of all visible oil, grease, soil, dust, mill scale, rust, paint, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter, except that staining shall be limited to no more than 5 percent of each square inch of surface area. 3.4 METAL SURFACE PREPARATION (UNGALVANIZED) A. The minimum abrasive blasting surface preparation shall be as specified in the coating system schedules included at the end of this Section. Where there is a conflict between these specifications and the coating manufacturer's printed recommendations for the intended service, the higher degree of cleaning shall apply. B. Workmanship for metal surface preparation shall be in conformance with the current SSPC Standards and this Section. Blast cleaned surfaces shall match the standard samples available from the National Association of Corrosion Engineers, NACE Standard TM-01-70. C. All oil, grease, welding fluxes and other surface contaminants shall be removed by solvent cleaning per SSPC-SP1 prior to blast cleaning. D. All sharp edges shall be rounded or chamfered and all burrs, and surface defects and weld splatter shall be ground smooth prior to blast cleaning. Technical Specifications 09910-8 Protective Coatings E. The type and size of abrasive shall be selected to produce a surface profile that meets the coating manufacturer's recommendation for the particular coating and service conditions. Abrasives for submerged and severe service coating systems shall be clean, hard, sharp cutting crushed slag. F. The abrasive shall not be reused unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. For automated shop blasting systems, clean oil-free abrasives shall be maintained. G. The Contractor shall comply with the applicable federal, state, and local air pollution control regulations for blast cleaning. H. Compressed air for air blast cleaning shall be supplied at adequate pressure from well maintained compressors equipped with oil/moisture separators which remove at least 95 percent of the contaminants. I. Surfaces shall be cleaned of all dust and residual particles of the cleaning operation by dry air blast cleaning, vacuuming or another approved method prior to painting. J. Enclosed areas and other areas where dust settling is a problem shall be vacuum cleaned and wiped with a tack cloth. K. Damaged or defective coating shall be removed by the specified blast cleaning to meet the clean surface requirements before recoating. L. Shop applied coatings of unknown composition shall be completely removed before the specified coatings are applied. Valves, castings, ductile or cast iron pipe, and fabricated pipe or equipment shall be examined for the presence of shop-applied temporary coatings. Temporary coatings shall be completely removed by solvent cleaning per SSPC-SP1 before the abrasive blast cleaning work has been started. M. Shop primed equipment shall be solvent cleaned in the field before finish coats are applied. 3.5 WORKMANSHIP A. Skilled craftsmen and experienced supervision shall be used on all work. B. Clean drop cloths shall be used. All damage to surfaces resulting from the work hereunder shall be cleaned, repaired, and refinished to their original condition. C. All coatings shall be applied under dry and dust-free conditions. Coating shall be done in a workmanlike manner so as to produce an even film of uniform thickness. Edges, corners, crevices, and joints shall receive special attention to ensure that they have been thoroughly cleaned and that they receive an adequate thickness of coating material. The finished surfaces shall be free from runs, drops, ridges, waves, laps, brush marks, and variations in color, texture, and finish. The hiding shall be so complete that the addition of another coat would not increase the hiding. Special attention shall be given to ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and similar areas receive a film thickness equivalent to adjacent areas, and installations shall be protected by the use of drop cloths or other approved precautionary measures. Technical Specifications 09910-9 Protective Coatings 3.6 SHOP COATING REQUIREMENTS A. Unless otherwise indicated, all items of equipment, or parts of equipment which are not submerged in service, shall be shop primed and then finish coated in the field after installation with the specified or approved color. The methods, materials, application equipment and all other details of shop painting shall comply with this section. If the shop primer requires top coating within a specified period of time, the equipment shall be finish coated in the shop and then touch-up painted after installation. B. For certain small pieces of equipment, the manufacturer may have a standard coating system which is suitable for the intended service conditions. In such cases, the final determination of suitability will be made during review of the shop drawing submittals. Equipment of this type generally includes only indoor equipment such as instruments, small compressors, and chemical metering pumps. C. Shop painted surfaces shall be protected during shipment and handling by suitable provisions including padding, blocking, and the use of canvas or nylon slings. Primed surfaces shall not be exposed to the weather for more than 2 months before top coated, or less time if recommended by the coating manufacturer. D. Damage to shop-applied coatings shall be repaired in accordance with this Section and the coating manufacturers printed instructions. E. The Contractor shall make certain that the shop primers and field topcoats are compatible and meet the requirements of this Section. Copies of applicable coating manufacturer's data sheets shall be submitted with equipment shop drawings. 3.7 APPLICATION OF COATINGS A. The application of protective coatings to steel substrates shall be in accordance with "Paint Application Specification No.1, (SSPC-PA 1)," Steel Structures Painting Council. B. Cleaned surfaces and all coats shall be inspected prior to each succeeding coat. The Contractor shall schedule such inspection with the Engineer in advance. C. Blast cleaned ferrous metal surfaces shall be painted before any rusting or other deterioration of the surface occurs. Blast cleaning shall be limited to only those surfaces that can be coated in the same working day. D. Coatings shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, and this Section, whichever has the most stringent requirements. E. Special attention shall be given to edges, angles, weld seams, flanges, nuts and bolts, and other places where insufficient film thicknesses are likely to be present. Use stripe painting for these areas. F. Special attention shall be given to materials which will be joined so closely that proper surface preparation and application are not possible. Such contact surfaces shall be coated prior to assembly or installation. G. Finish coats, including touch-up and damage repair coats shall be applied in a manner which will present a uniform texture and color matched appearance. H. Coatings shall not be applied under the following conditions: 1. Temperature exceeding the manufacturer's recommended maximum and minimum allowable. Technical Specifications 09910-10 Protective Coatings 2. Dust or smoke laden atmosphere. 3. Damp or humid weather. 4. When the substrate or air temperature is less than 5 degrees F above dewpoint. 5. When air temperature is expected to drop below 40 degrees F or less than 5 degrees F above the dewpoint within 8 hours after application of coating. I. Dewpoint shall be determined by use of a sling psychrometer in conjunction with U.S. Dept. of Commerce, Weather Bureau psychometric tables. J. Steel piping shall be abrasive blast cleaned and primed before installation. 3.8 CURING OF COATINGS A. The Contractor shall provide curing conditions in accordance with the conditions recommended by the coating material manufacturer or by this Section, whichever is the highest requirement, prior to placing the completed coating system into service. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 09910-11 Protective Coatings SECTION 10200 ARCHITECTURAL LOUVERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Provide louvers complying with performance requirements indicated as demonstrated by testing according to AMCA 500-L. B. Submittals: Product Data, Shop Drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6. B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003 or 5005. C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 zinc coating. D. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304. E. Fasteners: Of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal or 300 Series stainless steel. 2.2 LOUVERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product(s) indicated on Mechanical Drawings. B. Horizontal Extruded-Aluminum, Storm-Resistant Louvers: 1. Louver Depth: 4 inches. 2. Aluminum Thickness: 0.060 inch (1.5 mm)for blades and 0.080 inch (2.0 mm) for frames. 3. Free Area: Not less than 5.0 sq. ft. for 48-inch wide by 48-inch high louver. 4. Air Performance: Not more than 0.10-inch wg static pressure drop at 600-fpm (3.0- m/s) free-area intake velocity. 5. Wind-Driven Rain Performance: Not less than 99 percent effectiveness when subjected to a rain fall rate of 3 inches per hour and a wind speed of 29 mph at a core area intake velocity of 300 fpm. 2.3 LOUVER SCREENS A. Provide screen at interior face of each exterior louver. Fabricate screen frames from same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are attached. 1. Screening: Aluminum, 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) square mesh. 2. Screening: Flattened, expanded aluminum, 3/4 by 0.050 inch thick. Technical Specifications 10200-1 Architectural Louvers 2.4 LOUVER FINISHES A. Aluminum Louvers: High-performance organic coating; AA-C12C42R1x; two-coat fluoropolymer system complying with AAMA 2604 with finish coats containing at least 70 percent PVDF resin by weight. B. Galvanized-Steel Louvers: Two-coat baked-enamel or powder-coat finish over cleaned and conversion-coated metal, with a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install louvers level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work. B. Provide perimeter reveals of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated. C. Use concealed anchorages where possible. D. Protect metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 10200-2 Architectural Louvers SECTION 10260 WALL PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: 1. Material samples of full range of standard and optional for selection of colors. 2. After color selection furnish two 12 IN long/square samples of each selected color. B. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Maintenance data. 1.2 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Schedule delivery of anchorage components as required for installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Stainless Steel Corner Guards: a. Base: 1) Pawling. b. Optional: 1) C/S Group. 2) Balco Inc. 3) InPro. B. Stainless steel corner guards, (SSCG): 1. 16 GA type 430 stainless. 2. Install units starting at top of base molding. 3. Length: 48IN. 4. SSGC-1: a. Base Product: Pawling model CG-50. 1) Size: Size: 3-1/2 IN x 3-1/2 IN. 2) Radius: 1/8IN. 3) For used on all metal stud/gypsum wall corners in the office and breakroom. 5. Attachment: a. Adhesively apply units to metal stud/gypsum walls/masonry walls. Technical Specifications 10260 - 1 Wall Protection Specialties PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify suitability of substrate to accept installation. B. Correct unsatisfactory conditions. C. Start of installation indicates acceptance of responsibility for performance. 3.2 INSTALLATION — GENERAL A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Just prior to acceptance of building, strip off protective coverings and clean. C. Remove and replace defective, misaligned or damaged units. 3.3 INSTALLATION - CORNER GUARDS A. Terminate corner guard at top of base material and install end caps. B. Install top cap. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 10260 - 2 Wall Protection Specialties SECTION 10400 IDENTIFICATION, STENCILING AND TAGGING SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Identification, stenciling, and tagging of piping, electrical equipment, and valves, pumps, ductwork, process equipment and similar items and including hazard and safety signs. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): a. A13.1, Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Section 01340. 2. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Identification register listing all items to be identified, type of identification system to be used, lettering, location and color. c. Catalog information for all tagging systems. d. Updated, complete, identification register with nonconflicting numerical assignments submitted prior to project acceptance. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Metal Tags (Type A): 1. Approved manufacturers: a. W H Brady Co., Catalog S-10, #23210 (1-1/2 IN Brass), #23211 (2 IN brass), #B-906 (2 IN aluminum). b. National Band and Tag Co., Catalog 862, Style 81 or Style 93. c. Carlton Industries, Inc., #8813 or#8814 (aluminum), #BT-220 or#BT-230 (brass). Technical Specifications 10400 - 1 Identification, Stenciling and Tagging Systems 2. Material: Brass or aluminum, optional, except where specified. 3. Size: a. 1-1/2 IN DIA for one line of text, 2 IN DIA for two lines. b. Brass: 12 gage. c. Aluminum: 0.04IN. 4. Legend: Stamped and filled. B. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Tags (Type B): 1. Approved manufacturers and catalog numbers: a. W H Brady Co., Catalog S-10, #B-120. 2. Material: Fiberglass reinforced plastic. 3. Size: Approximately 2 x 2 IN. 4. Legend: Preprinted and permanently embedded. C. Laminated Plastic Tags (Type C): 1. Approved manufacturers and catalog numbers: a. W H Brady Co., Catalog S-10, #B-911. 2. Material: Polyester laminate. 3. Size: Approximately 2 x 2 IN. 4. Legend: Preprinted and permanently embedded. D. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Signs (Type D): 1. Approved manufacturers and catalog numbers: a. W H Brady Co., Catalog S-10, #13-120. 2. Material: Fiberglass reinforced plastic. 3. Size: a. Surface: As scheduled. b. Thickness: 0.10IN. 4. Fabrication: a. Rounded corners. b. Drilled holes in corners with grommets. 5. Legend: Preprinted and permanently embedded. E. Phenolic Name Plates (Type E): 1. Approved manufacturers and catalog numbers: a. W H Brady Co., Catalog S-10, #B-1. Technical Specifications 10400 - 2 Identification, Stenciling and Tagging Systems 2. Materials: Phenolic. 3. Size: a. Surface: As required for text. b. Thickness: 1/16IN. 4. Fabrication: a. Three layers laminated. b. Legend engraved through top lamination into center lamination. c. Drilled holes with grommets for mounting. F. Pressure Sensitive Vinyl Cloth Markers (Type F): 1. Approved manufacturers and catalog numbers: a. W H Brady Co., Catalog S-10, #B-946. 2. Material: Self-sticking vinyl. 3. Size: a. Surface: As required by text. G. Underground Alarming Tape (Type G): 1. Approved manufacturers and catalog numbers: a. W H Brady Co., Catalog S-10, #91296. 2. Material: Polyethylene. 3. Thickness: 3.5 mils. 4. Tensile strength: 1750 psi. 5. Size: 6 IN wide (minimum). 6. Legend: Preprinted and permanently imbedded. a. Message continuous printed. H. Stenciling System (Type H): 1. Material: a. Exterior type stenciling enamel. b. Black or white for best contrast. c. Either brushing grade or pressurized spray can form and grade. I. Substitutions: 1. Submit requests for substitutions in accordance with Specifications. J. Acceptable Manufacturers and Catalog Numbers: Technical Specifications 10400 - 3 Identification, Stenciling and Tagging Systems 1. Products listed above by manufacturer and catalog number are approved, subject to compliance with Contract Documents. K. Underground Tracer Wire: 1. Approved Manufacturer a. Kris Tech Wire Company & Tracer Wire 2. Material: Copper 3. Thickness: 18 GA 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: 1. Bead chain: #6 brass or stainless steel (BC). 2. Plastic strap: Nylon, urethane or polypropylene (PS). 3. Screws: Self-tapping, stainless (screws). 4. Grommets: Stainless steel. 5. Anchor for brass tag: See paragraph 2.1 A. 6. Adhesive, solvent activated. 2.3 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish minimum of 5 percent extra stock of each identification material required, including tags (not less than 3). B. Where stenciled markers are provided, clean and retain stencils after completion and include in extra stock, along with required stock of paints and applicators. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install tagging, stenciling, and identification items at required locations. B. Provide arrows and identification markers on piping and ducts. 1. At 20 FT maximum centers along continuous lines. 2. At changes in direction (route) or obstructions. 3. At valves, risers, "T"joints, machinery or equipment. 4. Where pipes and ducts pass through floor, wall, ceiling, cladding assemblies and like obstruction. a. Provide markers on both sides of obstruction. C. Position markers on both sides of pipe or duct with arrow markers pointing in flow direction. If flow is in both directions use double headed arrow markers. D. Apply tapes and stenciling in uniform manner parallel to piping and ducts. Technical Specifications 10400 -4 Identification, Stenciling and Tagging Systems E. Attach tags to equipment with sufficient surface or body area with solvent activated adhesive applied to back of each tag. F. Attach tags with 1/8 IN round or flat head screws to equipment without sufficient surface or body area, or porous surfaces. Where attachment with screws should not or cannot penetrate substrate, attach with plastic strap. G. Single items of equipment enclosed in a housing or compartment to be tagged on outside of housing. Several items of equipment mounted in housing to be individually tagged inside the compartment. H. Anchor for Brass Tag Attached to Concrete: See Detail in Contract Drawings. I. For electrical trenches with ductbanks or directly buried cable, install underground hazard tape 6 IN below finished grade where conduit or ductbank is 12 IN or more below finished grade, and 3 IN below finished grade where conduit or ductbank is less than 12 IN below finished grade. 3.2 SCHEDULE A. Identify, tag, or stencil the items shown in the following schedule as applicable: ITEM ID TYPE FASTENER 1. Yard valves, buried, with valve box and concrete pad. A, Brass only Embedded a. Fastener: Use tag with anchor. Embed in concrete pad. b. Legend: Valve designation as indicated on Contract Drawings. 2. Valves and slidegates: a. Exterior. A or B BC or PS b. Interior. A or B BC or PS c. Legend: Item designation as indicated on Contract Drawings. 3. Pumps, pump motors, blowers, air compressors, and other A, B or H Screws or Adhesive rotating equipment: a. Legend: Item designation as indicated on Contract Drawings. 4. Instrumentation, e.g.,flow control valves, primary elements, A or B BC or PS etc.: a. Legend: Item designation as indicated on Contract Documents. 5. Process equipment tanks and basins. A or H Screws a. Legend: Item designation indicated on Contract Documents. b. Size: 7 x 10. c. Letters: 1 IN high black letters on white background. 6. Piping: F or H N/A a. Legend: Item designation as indicated on Contract Documents. Technical Specifications 10400 - 5 Identification, Stenciling and Tagging Systems b. In accordance with ANSI A13.1. c. Provide flow arrows. d. Frequency: 1Oft 7. Miscellaneous tanks, e.g., break tanks, chemical tanks, F or H N/A h dropneumatic tanks, air receivers,etc.: a. Legend: Item designation as indicated on Contract Documents. b. Size: As required by legend. c. Letters: 1 IN high black letters on white background. 8. HVAC equipment: a. If possible: Alternate,with approval of Shop Drawing by D or H Screws Owner. b. Legend: Item description as indicated on Contract Drawings. c. Size: As required by legend. d. Letters: 1 IN high black letters on white background. 9. Ductwork: F or H N/A a. Legend: Item designation as indicated on Contract Drawings. b. Size: As required by legend. c. Letters: 1 IN high black letters on white background. d. Provide flow arrows. e. Frequency: 10 ft. 10. Enclosures for electrical, mechanical, and I&C equipment, e.g., D Screws motor control centers, panelboards, switchboards, safety switches, control panels, PLC's, etc., that have a name and number as shown on the Contract Drawings. a. Legend: Name and number of enclosure as indicated on the Contract Drawings. b. Size: As required by legend. c. Letters: 1 IN black letters on white background. 11. Nameplate for elements or components within or surface E Screws mounted on enclosures for electrical, mechanical, and I&C equipment including switches, instruments, etc: a. Legend: Name and number of each element or component as indicated on the Contract Drawings. b. Size: As required by legend. c. Letters: 1/2 IN high letters for element or component names and 1/4 IN high letters for element or component number. White letters on black background. 12. Electrical wiring and cables carrying 600 V or less: F Self a. Legend: Wire or cable number as shown on Contract Drawings, on each end of each wire or cable. b. Size: As required by legend. Technical Specifications 10400 - 6 Identification, Stenciling and Tagging Systems c. Letters: Minimum 1/4 IN high yellow letters on standard background. 13. Electrical conduit carrying over 600 V: F Self a. Legend: Word "DANGER"followed by voltage from utility. Mark each end of conduit. b. Size: As required by legend. c. Letters: 1/2 IN high black letters on orange background. d. Interval: 20 ft. 14. Electrical panelboards with 480 V or more: F Self a. Legend: 480 volts b. Size:As required c. Letters: Danger 480 volts 15. Electrical trenches with ductbanks or directly buried conduit: G N/A a. Legend: CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION (1S'line) BURIED ELECTRIC LINE (2"d line) b. Letters: 1-1/4 IN minimum. c. Interval: Continuous. d. Color: Red with black letters. 16. Trenches with direct buried or conduit encased telephone lines: G N/A a. Legend: CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION (1st line) (2"d line) BURIED TELEPHONE LINE 17. Buried non-metallic potable water piping: G and K a. Legend: CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION (1S'line) (2"d line) BURIED WATER LINE 18. Buried non-metallic storm and sanitary sewer lines: G and K N/A a. Legend: CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION (lntlline) BURIED SEWER LINE (2 line) 19. Buried non-metallic(non-potable)water piping, except 3 IN and G and K N/A smaller irrigation pipe: a. Letters: 1-1/4 IN minimum. b. Interval: Continuous. c. Color: Green with black letters. 20. Trenches with direct buried or conduit encased computer or G N/A SCADA system communication lines,or fiber optic lines a. Legend: CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION (1st line) (2"d line) BURIED COMPUTER LINE 21. Hazard and safety signs: Screws a. To be installed where indicted in the schedule below: b. Type of sign: 1 Danger signs. 2 Caution signs. Technical Specifications 10400 - 7 Identification, Stenciling and Tagging Systems 3 Safety instructional signs. c. Size: 1 As required by legend. 2) Minimum size, 7 x 10 IN. 3 As indicated in the schedule below: d. Letters: 1) 2 IN for words"DANGER"or"CAUTION"or other words placed in the panel. 2) 3/4 IN for other text except as indicated in the schedule below. e. Danger signs: 1 White background. 2) White letters for word"DANGER"placed on standard red oval with black panel. 3 Additional letters black. 4 Additional text: As indicated on schedule below. f. Caution signs: 1 Yellow background. 2) Yellow letters for word"CAUTION"placed on black panel. 3 Additional letters black. 4 Additional text: As indicated in schedule below. g. Safety instruction signs: 1 White background. 2) White letters for words"SAFETY FIRST" placed on green panel. 3 Additional letters black. 4 Additional text: As indicated in schedule below. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 10400 - 8 Identification, Stenciling and Tagging Systems SECTION 10444 SIGNS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ADA Accessibility Guidelines. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: 1. Color and font for approval. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Acceptable manufacturers: 1. Signs: a. Base: 1) Mohawk Sign Systems. b. Optional: 1) ASI Sign Systems. 2) Best Manufacturing Sign Systems. 3) Innerface Architectural Signage. 4) InPro. 2. Other manufacturers desiring approval to submit proposal complying with specifications. B. Signs: 1. For indoors: Three-ply plastic laminate, 2.0 IN wide (min.) x length required for script. a. Nominal letter height: 3/4 IN. b. Letters and numbers: Raised 1/32 IN. c. Upper case. d. Letter style: Sans serif. e. Braille: Grade-2. f. Color: As selected. 1) Characters: Dark. Technical Specifications 10444 - 1 Signs 2) Background: Light. g. Finish: Nonglare. h. Proportion: i. Width-to-height ratio between 3:5 and 1:1. j. Stroke-width-to-height ratio between 1:5 and 1:10. k. Bevel edges. I. Pictograms shall be at least 6" high. C. Directional and identification signs for communications systems: International symbols. D. Adhesive: 3M double-coated urethane foam tape. 1. 4032 for smooth surfaces. 2. 4016 for rough surfaces. 2. For outdoors: a. Outdoor signs shall be aluminum composite material comprising of two aluminum sheets with solid polyethylene core suitable for exterior application. b. Text Heights and other details shall be same as for the indoor signs. 3. Exit Signs (Illuminated): a. General: An Exit sign, or similar designation, with an arrow indicating the directions, shall be placed in every location where the direction of travel to reach the nearest exit is not immediately apparent or as directed by local fire marshal. Each of the signs marking exits should have the word "Exit" in legible letters no smaller than six inches high. The main stroke of the letter should be 3/4 inch wide. If the path to the nearest exit isn't obvious, an exit sign that includes an arrow directing the reader to the nearest exit will be required. b. Illumination Requirements for Exit Signs: Exit signs must be properly illuminated by a reliable light source, with a minimum of 5 foot-candles on the illuminated surface. Ambient lights sources giving illumination to exit signs other than the Electrical Exit signs must have screens, discs, or lenses of not less than 25 square inches area made of translucent material to confirm Contrast. The requirements for the illumination of exit signs shall be per NFPA Life safety code (NFPA 101) which dictates that all signs should be lit under the following standards: 1. Every sign required should be suitably illuminated via a reliable source of light. Externally, internally, and photo luminescent illuminated signs are all permissible. Technical Specifications 10444 - 2 Signs 2. There must be at least 1.5 hrs. of emergency light if the building lighting fails. 3. The provided emergency lighting should put out light that is at least an avg. of 1 foot- candle, and never less than .1 foot-candle. 4. The decline of the strength of light and uniformity ratio shall be per NFPA requirements. 5. If a photo luminescent sign is used, a light must be provided to charge that sign so that if the lights go out, the sign will stay illuminated for at least 1.5 hours. 6. Any signs with internal illumination should be listed and comply with the standards of U L 924. Any additional Local state and government regulations that may apply in addition to these specifications shall be followed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION 1. Indoor/Outdoor Signs A. Location: 1. Single doors: Install on wall adjacent to latch side of door. 2. Double doors: Install on nearest adjacent wall. B. Mount: 5 FT above finish floor to centerline of sign. 2. Exit signs shall be installed not less than 80 IN above the finished floor to the bottom of the sign. 3.2 SCHEDULE A. Provide signs as follows: 1. "Mechanical Room" at each mechanical space door. 2. "Restroom" at toilet in Hatchery Building. 3. "Exit" at locations per relevant section of these specifications and OSHA/ NFPA requirements. B. Provide international accessibility symbols at: 1. Accessible toilets. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 10444 - 3 Signs SECTION 10802 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Product Data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, No. 4 finish (satin), 0.0312-inch minimum nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated. B. Brass: ASTM B 19, ASTM B 16, or ASTM B 30. C. Aluminum: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T6 or 6463-T6. D. Sheet Steel: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, 0.0359-inch minimum nominal thickness. E. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60. F. Chromium Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service). G. Baked-Enamel Finish: Factory-applied, gloss-white, baked-acrylic-enamel coating. H. Tempered Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered). I. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick. J. Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. K. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, tamper and theft resistant when exposed, and of galvanized steel when concealed. L. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative. 2.2 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES A. Paper Towel Dispenser: 1. Mounting: Surface mounted. 2. Minimum Capacity: 600 C-fold or 800 multifold towels. 3. Material: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 4. Lockset: Tumbler type. 5. Refill Indicators: Pierced slots at sides or front. B. Toilet Tissue Dispenser: 1. Type: Double-roll dispenser at Mens/Womens Restrooms. Technical Specifications 10802 - 1 Toilet and Bath Accessories 2. Mounting: Surface mounted with concealed anchorage. 3. Material: Stainless steel. 4. Operation: Noncontrol delivery with standard spindle. C. Grab Bar: 1. Material: Stainless steel, 0.050 inch thick. 2. Mounting: Exposed. 3. Gripping Surfaces: Slip-resistant texture. 4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches for heavy-duty applications. D. Underlavatory Guard: 1. Description: Insulating pipe coverings for supply and drain piping assemblies, which prevent direct contact with and burns from piping, and allow service access without removing coverings. 2. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded plastic, white. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. 1. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 Ibf, when tested according to method in ASTM F 446. B. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation and verify that mechanisms function properly. Replace damaged or defective items. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 10802 - 2 Toilet and Bath Accessories SECTION 11060 PUMPING EQUIPMENT GENERAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American National Standard Institute (ANSI): a. B16.1, Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250, and 800. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A48, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. b. A53, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc- Coated Welded and Seamless. c. A108, Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold Finished, Standard Quality. d. A120, Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless for Ordinary Uses. e. A153— Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. f. A276, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. g. B505, Standard Specification for Copper-Base Alloy Continuous Castings. h. B584, Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications. i. F593 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs. j. F594 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts. 3. American Water Works Association (AWWA): a. E101, Deep Well Vertical Turbine Pumps - Line Shaft Type. 4. Hydraulic Institute Standards (HI). a. 2.1-2.2 - Rotodynamic (Vertical) Pumps for Nomenclature and Definitions. b. 2.3 - Rotodynamic (Vertical) Pumps for Design and Application. c. 2.4 - Rotodynamic (Vertical) Pumps for Manuals Describing Installation, Operation and Maintenance. d. 9.1-9.5 - Pumps - General Guidelines for Types, Definitions, Application, Sound Measurement and Decontamination. Technical Specifications 11060 - 1 Pumping Equipment General e. 14.6 - Rotodynamic Pumps for Hydraulic Performance Acceptance Tests. f. 40.6 - Methods for Rotodynamic Pump Efficiency Testing. 5. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE). B. Fully coordinate all mechanical seal systems specified to ensure pump and seal compatibility. C. For variable speed pumping applications, the pump manufacturer is designated to have single source responsibility for coordination of the pump and VFD drive system. D. Unit Responsibility: The pump manufacturer shall be made responsible for furnishing the Work and for coordination of design, assembly, testing, and installation of each pump system; however, the Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for compliance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Pump Service Category - Pump or pumps having identical names (not tag numbers) used for specific pumping service. B. Pump head (total dynamic head, TDH), flow capacity, pump efficiency, net positive suction head available (NPSHa), and net positive suction head required (NPSHr): As defined in HI 2.1-2.2, 2.3, 9.1-9.5, and 14.6 and as modified in the Specifications. The pump head and efficiency are evaluated at the outlet of the pump bowls and include the net losses in the pump column and discharge. C. Flow, head, efficiency, and motor horsepower specified in this Section are minimums unless stated otherwise. D. Suction head: Gauge pressure available at pump intake flange or bell in feet of fluid above atmospheric. E. Tolerances: This Section and related sections contain tolerances that may be more stringent than Hydraulic Institute Standard tolerances. Where tolerances are not mentioned, Hydraulic Institute Standards 2.1-2.2, 2.3, 2.4, and 9.1-9.5 shall apply. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Section 01340 — Submittal Procedures 2. Drawings for equipment: a. Drawings that include cut-away drawings, parts lists, material specification lists, and other information required to substantiate that proposed equipment complies with specified requirements. 3. Outline drawings showing equipment, driver, driven equipment, pumps, seal, motor(s) or other specified drivers, variable frequency drive, shafting, couplings, drive arrangement, base plate or support dimensions, anchor bolt sizes and locations, bearings, and other furnished components. 4. Complete nameplate data. Technical Specifications 11060 - 2 Pumping Equipment General 5. Installation instructions including leveling and alignment tolerances, grouting, lubrication requirements, and initial installation testing procedures. 6. Wiring, control schematics, control logic diagrams and ladder logic or similar for computer-based controls. 7. Recommended or normal operating parameters such as temperatures and pressures. 8. Certifications: a. Certified pump performance curves as described in Article 2.5. 9. Test reports: a. Factory hydrostatic test. B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. See Section 01340. C. Miscellaneous: 1. Certifications: a. Statement relative to installation and start-up per Paragraph 3.2A.4. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Pumps: a. See individual pump specification sections and mechanical schedules. 2. Mechanical seals: a. Chesterton. b. Garlock. B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01340. 2.2 CENTRIFUGAL PUMP DESIGN A. Provide units with increasing head characteristics from the end run out portion of the curve to shutoff condition. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Each Unit: 1. Lifting eye bolts or lugs. 2. Plugged gage cock connection at suction and discharge nozzles. 3. Tapped and plugged openings for casing and bearing housing vents and drains. 4. Fittings for properly adding flushing lubricant. Technical Specifications 11060 - 3 Pumping Equipment General 5. Pressure relief fittings for grease lubrication. B. Packing Seal: 1. Provide packing unless mechanical seal is specified in narrow-scope pump sections. 2. Minimum of five rings graphite impregnated synthetic packing. 3. Provide minimum 1/4 IN DIA supply tap and 1/2 IN DIA minimum drain tap. 4. Provide split teflon or bronze water seal ring. 5. Adjustable split follower cast iron or bronze gland. C. Mechanical Seals: 1. Provide as specified in the narrow-scope pump sections and mechanical schedules. 2. Provide stationary balanced 0-ring type. 3. Provide water lubrication - cooling. 4. Materials: a. Metal parts except springs: 316 stainless steel. b. Springs: Hastelloy C. c. Seal faces: Unfilled carbon graphite versus silica-free Grade 99.5 ceramic. d. Elastomers: Viton. D. Seal Water Systems: 1. Pressure Reducing Stations (PRS): a. Individual (local) PRS for each drop leg off seal water header to individual pumps. b. See Drawings for system components and arrangements. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Pump Support: 1. Design base to support weight of drive, shafting and pump. 2. Comply with HI vibration limitations. 3. Mount horizontal pump, motor and coupling on single piece drip lip type baseplate. 4. Mount vertical pumps on single piece pedestal baseplate. 5. Fabricate to withstand all operating loads transmitted from the pump and drive. 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. If specifically required in the individual pump specification sections, provide factory tests: Technical Specifications 11060 - 4 Pumping Equipment General 1. All units: a. Hydrostatic test at 150 percent of shutoff head for a minimum of 5 minutes. 2. Adjustable speed units: a. Head (FT) verses flow (gpm) pump curves: 1) Maximum, minimum and two equally spaced intermittent speeds. 2) Efficiencies along each curve. 3) Brake horsepower along each curve. 3. Constant speed units: a. Head (FT) versus flow (gpm) pump curves: 1) Efficiencies along curve. 2) Brake horsepower along each curve. 4. Results certified by a registered professional engineer. B. Statically and dynamically balance each pump per HI standards. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. See Section 15010 — Basic Mechanical Requirements. B. Floor or Pad-Mounted Units (Non-Submersible): 1. Align vertically and horizontally level, wedge and plumb units to match piping interfaces. 2. Assure no unnecessary stresses are transmitted to equipment flanges. 3. Tighten flange bolts at uniform rate and manufacturer's recommended torque for uniform gasket compression. 4. Support and match flange faces to uniform contact over entire face area prior to bolting pipe flange and equipment. 5. Permit piping connecting to equipment to freely move in directions parallel to longitudinal centerline when and while bolts in connection flange are tightened. 6. Grout equipment into place prior to final bolting of piping but not before initial fitting and alignment. 7. Assemble connecting piping with gaskets in place and minimum of four bolts per joint installed and tightened. Test alignment by loosening flange bolts to see if there is any change in relationship of piping flange with equipment connecting flange. Realign as necessary, install flange bolts and make equipment connection. 8. Field paint units as defined in Section 09910. 9. Provide pressure gage on discharge of all pumps and on suction and discharge of all non-submersible units. C. Submersible Units: Technical Specifications 11060 - 5 Pumping Equipment General 1. Comply with requirements defined in paragraphs 3.1-13.7, 8, and 9. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide services of equipment manufacturer's field service representative(s) to: 1. Inspect equipment covered by these Specifications. 2. Supervise pre-start adjustments and installation checks. 3. Conduct initial startup of equipment and perform operational checks. 4. Provide a written statement that manufacturer's equipment has been installed properly, started up and is ready for operation by Owner's personnel. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel for the specified minimum number of hours at jobsite per Section 01060 on operation and maintenance of each of following pumping equipment: END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 11060 - 6 Pumping Equipment General SECTION 11072 PUMPING EQUIPMENT: VERTICAL TURBINE (LINE SHAFT AND SUBMERSIBLE) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Line shaft vertical turbine pumps. 2. Submersible turbine pumps. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI). 2. American National Standard Institute (ANSI): a. B16.1, Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250, and 800. 3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A48, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. b. A53, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc- Coated Welded and Seamless. c. A108, Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold Finished, Standard Quality. d. A120, Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless for Ordinary Uses. e. A153— Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. f. A276, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. g. B505, Standard Specification for Copper-Base Alloy Continuous Castings. h. B584, Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications. i. F593 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs. j. F594 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts. 4. American Water Works Association (AWWA): a. E101, Deep Well Vertical Turbine Pumps - Line Shaft Type. 5. Hydraulic Institute Standards (HI). Technical Specifications 11072 - 1 Pumping Equipment: Vertical Turbine (Line Shaft and Submersible) a. 2.1-2.2 - Rotodynamic (Vertical) Pumps for Nomenclature and Definitions. b. 2.3 - Rotodynamic (Vertical) Pumps for Design and Application. c. 2.4 - Rotodynamic (Vertical) Pumps for Manuals Describing Installation, Operation and Maintenance. d. 9.1-9.5 - Pumps - General Guidelines for Types, Definitions, Application, Sound Measurement and Decontamination. e. 14.6 - Rotodynamic Pumps for Hydraulic Performance Acceptance Tests. f. 40.6 - Methods for Rotodynamic Pump Efficiency Testing. 6. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE). 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Pump head (total dynamic head, TDH), flow capacity, pump efficiency, net positive suction head available (NPSHa), and net positive suction head required (NPSHr): As defined in HI 2.1-2.2, 2.3, 9.1-9.5, and 14.6 and as modified in the Specifications. The pump head and efficiency are evaluated at the outlet of the pump bowls and include the net losses in the pump column and discharge. B. Flow, head, efficiency, and motor horsepower specified in this Section are minimums unless stated otherwise. C. Suction head: Gauge pressure available at pump intake flange or bell in feet of fluid above atmospheric. D. Tolerances: This Section and related sections contain tolerances that may be more stringent than Hydraulic Institute Standard tolerances. Where tolerances are not mentioned, Hydraulic Institute Standards 2.1-2.2, 2.3, 2.4, and 9.1-9.5 shall apply. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Section 01340. 2. Drawings for equipment: a. Drawings that include cut-away drawings, parts lists, material specification lists, and other information required to substantiate that proposed equipment complies with specified requirements. 3. Outline drawings showing equipment, driver, driven equipment, pumps, seal, motor(s) or other specified drivers, variable frequency drive, shafting, couplings, drive arrangement, base plate or support dimensions, anchor bolt sizes and locations, bearings, and other furnished components. 4. Complete nameplate data. 5. Installation instructions including leveling and alignment tolerances, grouting, lubrication requirements, and initial installation testing procedures. Technical Specifications 11072 - 2 Pumping Equipment: Vertical Turbine (Line Shaft and Submersible) 6. Wiring, control schematics, control logic diagrams and ladder logic or similar for computer-based controls. 7. Recommended or normal operating parameters such as temperatures and pressures. 8. Pump curves with preferred operating ranges, design point, NPSH, power and efficiency curves. B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. See Section 01340. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Line Shaft Pumps: a. Cascade b. Johnston. c. Floway d. Flowserve e. Goulds 2. Submersible Pumps a. Goulds b. Franklin Water B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 01340 — Submittal Procedures. Technical Specifications 11072 - 3 Pumping Equipment: Vertical Turbine (Line Shaft and Submersible) 2.2 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Performance Parameters: Confirm all information with mechanical schedules Equipment Number P-10.1 P-10.2 P-20.1 P-20.2 P-20.3 Type Submersible Submersible Line shaft Line shaft Line shaft Location Hatchery Hatchery Intake Intake Intake Yard Yard Duty Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous Continuous Drive Electric Electric Motor Electric Electric Constant Speed Motor&VFD &VFD Motor&VFD Motor&VFD Electric Motor Fluid Service Water Water Water Water Water Fluid Temperature, degF 60 60 60 60 60 Fluid Specific Gravity 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 Minimum Available NPSH (ft) 43 43 36.0 36.0 36.0 Maximum Shutoff Head (ft) 135 250 180 180 480 Design Flow Capacity(gpm) 200 400 7,600 7,600 30 Design Flow Pump Head (TDH ft) 72.5 72.5 53 53 435 Design Flow Min. Pump Efficiency (%) 68 70 80 80 65 Max. Flow Capacity at Max. Speed (gpm) 295 - 8,000 8,000 - Max. Flow TDH (ft) 65 - 45 45 - Max. Flow Min. Pump Efficiency (%) 65 - 40 40 - Max. Flow NPSH Required (ft) 43 43 35 35 - Min. Flow Capacity at Max. Speed (gpm) - - 4,000 4,000 - Min. Flow TDH at Max. Speed (ft) - - 95 95 - Min. Flow Pump Efficiency(%) - - 60 60 - Maximum Pump Speed (rpm) 3600 3600 1200 1200 1800 Minimum Pump Speed (rpm) 1800 1800 600 600 - Maximum Motor Speed (rpm) 3600 3600 1200 1200 1800 Minimum Motor Size(hp) 7.5 15 150 150 10 Pump Dimensions: Length from base plate to suction inlet(ft) 60* 80* 32 32 32 Inside diameter of well casing or can (in) 8** 8** 42 42 12 Maximum outside diameter of bowls(in) 6.5* 6.5* 28 28 8 Minimum column diameter(in) 3 4 24 24 3 Diameter of discharge connection (in) 3 4 24 24 3 Discharge flange rating ANSI (psi) 150 150 150 150 250 * Dimension includes power cable. ** Contractor shall verify inside diameter of existing casing and confirm appropriate fit of equipment. t Contractor shall verify pump setting depth and maintain minimum 15' submergence at maximum well drawdown. B. Provide pumps with increasing head characteristics from secondary design conditions to shutoff condition. Provide pumps with net positive suction head requirements (NPSHR) less than the net positive suction head available (NPSHA) at all operating conditions. Technical Specifications 11072 - 4 Pumping Equipment: Vertical Turbine (Line Shaft and Submersible) 2.3 LINE SHAFT VERTICAL TURBINE COMPONENTS A. General: 1. Furnish units consisting of a vertical shaft turbine, direct connected to a vertical hollow shaft motor. Design unit with non-reversing ratchet drives. 2. Weight of revolving parts of pump including unbalanced hydraulic thrust of impeller is carried by thrust bearing in driver. 3. Make provision at driver shaft for adjusting impeller with reference to bowls. 4. Provide factory acceptance testing as detailed in Part 3 of this section. B. Column: 1. Construct discharge column pipe of steel and supply with connections as specified or detailed in the contract drawings. 2. Provide interchangeable column sections not exceeding 10 FT in length. Flanged connections shall have a registered fit and allow for installation of bearing retainers at each joint. 3. Design to withstand a working pressure not less than 1.20 times the maximum shutoff total dynamic head with the maximum diameter impeller at the maximum operating speed plus the maximum suction static head. 4. Column shall be sized to limit friction losses to 4 ft per 100 ft of length at the rated pump capacity. 5. Coat with a minimum 15 mils dry film thickness epoxy system at the factory. 6. Provide surface preparation and coating products in accordance with 09910 — Protective Coatings. C. Open Line Shaft: 1. Type 416 stainless steel, rolled and ground. 2. Maximum length: 10 FT. 3. Provide neoprene bearings at each column connection supported by bronze retainers butted between machined faces of discharge column. 4. Shaft couplings shall be Type 416 stainless steel, threaded or keyed to the shaft. 5. Design shafts able to withstand minimum 1.5 times maximum operating torque and other loads, and such that elongation due to maximum hydraulic thrust will not exceed the pump setting clearance between the impellers and bowls. D. Pump Bowl: 1. Provide bowl and suction bell constructed of close-grained cast iron, conforming to ASTM A48CL30, free from imperfections and accurately machined and fitted. 2. Bowls shall be flange connected. 3. Coat pump bowl water passages with an abrasion-resistant baked enamel, phenolic or epoxy. Technical Specifications 11072 - 5 Pumping Equipment: Vertical Turbine (Line Shaft and Submersible) 4. Provide epoxy coating suitable for potable water service. 5. Design to ensure easy removal of bearings and impeller. 6. The casing shall be tested to 1.5 times the design head or 1.25 times the shut off head whichever is greater. E. Bearings: 1. Provide units with sleeve bearings of SAE 600 or 660 bronze in each bowl and in suction bell. 2. In bowl, provide main bronze bearing immediately above impeller and a lower bronze bearing immediately below impeller. 3. Provide for lubrication of bowl bearings with pumped liquid. 4. Furnish suction bell bearing having minimum length equal to five shaft diameters. 5. Ensure bell bearing is permanently packed type with packing to be a non- soluble grease. 6. Provide SAE 40 bronze or Type 304 stainless steel collar for bell bearing to prevent abrasives from entering bearing. F. Pump Shaft and Impeller: 1. Provide pump unit shaft constructed of rolled and ground 416 stainless steel. 2. Furnish enclosed type impellers constructed of cast iron or stainless steel and securely attached to impeller shaft. 3. Ensure impeller is accurately fitted and statically and dynamically balanced. 4. Provide cast iron replacement radial type wear rings in each bowl to prevent wear on bowls. G. Discharge Head Assemblies: 1. Design discharge head assembly for 150 psi working pressure and 250 psi test pressure or as indicated in the schedule. 2. Provide discharge head for above ground mounting constructed of fabricated steel with and integral discharge flange. Unit shall be designed to elevate the discharge head natural frequency above the operating speed. 3. Construct discharge nozzle with a vertical vane to minimize turbulence. 4. Furnish ANSI B16.1 125/150 LB flange. 5. Mount discharge head on fabricated steel base plate which is of sufficient size to span opening in support structure. 6. Supply base plate with lifting lugs capable of supporting weight of entire unit. Technical Specifications 11072 - 6 Pumping Equipment: Vertical Turbine (Line Shaft and Submersible) 7. Furnish stuffing box constructed of cast iron and containing not less than four rings of graphited acrylic yarn packing and a lantern ring in the middle of the packing rings. Compress packing around shaft with adjustable gland. Furnish grease fitting to provide additional lubrication to bronze upper shaft bearing. Provide connections for grease inlet and pressure relief. 8. Provide 416 stainless steel shaft at top section of line shaft where it passes through stuffing box. Provide replaceable type 304 stainless steel shaft sleeve through packing box to protect shaft from wear. 9. Provide bronze upper shaft bearing directly below stuffing box, in the head, to eliminate any shaft whip which could damage the seal. 10. Hard pipe stuffing box bleedoff to wet pit below pumps. H. Motors: 1. Vertical solid shaft, squirrel cage, induction type, premium efficient, rated for inverter duty. 2. 460 V, 60 HZ, 3 PH. 3. WPI type enclosure with 1.15 service factor. 4. Size motor to drive pump continuously over the complete head - capacity range without the load exceeding the nameplate rating. 5. Design motor for 20 DegC ambient. 6. Motor shall be designed with non-reversing ratchets. 7. Comply with Section 16265— Low-Voltage Variable Frequency Drives. 8. Comply with Section 16405— Electric Motors. I. The Irrigation Water Supply Pump, P-20.3, and piping shall adhere to the requirements for vertical turbine pumps, except for the following modifications 1. Impeller material: Bronze may be substituted 2. Discharge Head: Cast iron with integral discharge flange 3. All components shall be rated to withstand 250 psi. 4. NSF 61 designations are not required for coating products 5. Motors shall be constant speed. 2.4 SUBMERSIBLE VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS A. Unless otherwise specified, submersible vertical turbine pumps shall be constructed in accordance with AWWA E101, driven by an electric motor, size as indicated on the Drawings. Pumps shall be designed for connection to piping as indicated. A strainer shall be provided at the pump suction. Pumps shall be operable for the entire range of flow denoted on the pump curve. B. Pump Head Assembly 1. Pump head assembly shall consist of a pitless adapter from which the vertical discharge pipe is suspended and fittings as required for connecting to the piping system. Head assembly shall be provided with provisions for securing slings to facilitate setting and lifting. Technical Specifications 11072 - 7 Pumping Equipment: Vertical Turbine (Line Shaft and Submersible) C. Pump Bowl Assembly 1. Pump bowl assembly shall include the pump bowls, impellers, shaft, and bearings and may be of single stage or multistage configuration. D. Pump Bowls 1. Pump bowls shall have integrally-cast vanes with smooth, streamlined water passageways, and shall be constructed of close-grained cast-iron or bronze. Pump bowls shall be equipped with replaceable seal rings on the suction side for pumps with enclosed impellers. E. Impellers 1. Impellers shall be carefully finished with smooth water passageways and shall not load the prime mover beyond the nameplate rating over the entire performance range of the pump. Impellers shall be of the enclosed or semi- open type and shall be constructed of cast-iron or stainless steel. F. Pump Shafts 1. Pump shafts shall be type 416 stainless steel and the pump-motor coupling shall be stainless steel capable of transmitting the required thrust in either direction. G. Bearings 1. Intermediate bowl bearings shall be water-lubricated bronze or fluted rubber. Top bowl bearings and suction interconnecting bearings shall be water-lubricated bronze or fluted rubber. Grease in grease-packed bearings shall be nonwater-soluble hydraulic type permanently sealed against loss. Grease-packed bearings shall be provided with sand caps to prevent intrusion of abrasive particles. Thrust bearings shall be located in the pump motor. H. Strainer 1. A stainless steel strainer shall be furnished at the pump suction. I. Discharge Pipe 1. Discharge pipe shall be sized as shown. Discharge column retainers or spiders shall be utilized to maintain the discharge pipe centered in the well casing. A minimum of one retainer shall be provided for each 20 feet of discharge pipe. Provisions shall be made for fastening the retainer spiders to prevent them from sliding on the pipe and damaging the power cable when the pump is installed in the well. 2.5 MOTORS A. Submersible motors shall be designed and manufactured expressly for the intended use. Motors shall be rated for the voltage and phase as indicated on the Drawings, 60 Hz and such rating shall be stamped on the nameplate. Submersible motors may be the wet-stator type, dry-stator type, or oil-filled stator type. Wet-stator motors shall be filled at the factory with water treated to minimize corrosion, and shall be provided with a seal to keep interchange of cooling water and water being pumped to a minimum. Windings shall be Technical Specifications 11072 - 8 Pumping Equipment: Vertical Turbine (Line Shaft and Submersible) insulated with a waterproof material. Dry-stator motors shall have rotor bearings immersed in a coolant lubricant of water-oil or water-glycol mixture, or a water-grease emulsion. When the coolant is water, it may be sealed in the motor or allowed to flow through the motor, depending upon design. Stator case shall be hermetically sealed and may be filled with a solid plastic material to help dissipate heat. Oil-filled stator motors shall be completely filled with high-dielectric constant oil. A mechanical seal shall be provided between the shaft and the motor housing and shall be designed to minimize the loss of oil. An oil reservoir shall be provided to replenish the oil loss for the life of the motor. Wet-stator motors and oil-filled stator motors shall employ a system to automatically balance the liquid pressure in the motor at any depth of submergence up to the maximum allowable. Motor bearings shall provide smooth operations under the conditions encountered for the life of the motor. Adequate thrust bearings shall be provided in the motor to carry the weight of all rotating parts plus the hydraulic thrust, and shall be capable of withstanding the upthrust imposed during pump starting. Motors shall be inverter duty rated and suitable for variable frequency drive operations. 2.6 POWER CABLES A. Submersible power cables shall be specifically designed for use with submersible pumps and motors, and shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the motors with which the cables are used. Each cable shall be not less than No. 12 AWG stranded copper and shall have an ampacity of not less than 125 percent of the motor full load current. Each conductor shall be insulated with a heat resistant, moisture resistant synthetic rubber or thermosetting plastic jacket. A separate stranded, green insulated, grounding conductor shall be provided for each circuit. Single- and multiple-conductor cables shall be jacketed with a watertight synthetic rubber, plastic, or metal jacket impervious to oil or water. Metal jackets shall have a polychloroprene covering. Submersible cables shall be suitable for continuous immersion in water at the maximum depth encountered. Multiple-conductor cables may be used for ampacities up to and including 200 amperes; for greater ampacities single-conductor cables or two multiple-conductor cables shall be used. Cables shall be securely supported from the pump column at intervals not to exceed 15 feet by corrosion-resistant bands or clamps designed to prevent damage to the cable jacket. Single-conductor cables shall be laced, cabled together, or clamped at intervals to prevent spreading apart. Except where cables are connected to the motor terminal wiring, cables shall contain no splices in the length from the junction box or motor starter to the motor. Cables shall be terminated at the junction box or motor starter with a watertight cable connector. Splices in cables will be allowed only at the connection to the motor, and may be made at that point only if there is sufficient room in the well casing without interfering with proper pump setting and operation. A waterproof plug and connector or other type of fitting may be provided for connection of the cable at the motor. Such connection shall be suitable for continuous immersion at the maximum water depth encountered. Splices shall use pressure connectors and shall be cast in an epoxy resin, providing a homogeneous waterproof bond to the outer jacket of the cables. Splices shall be factory fabricated and tested and shall be waterproof and suitable for continuous immersion at the maximum depth encountered. For each 50 feet of setting Technical Specifications 11072 - 9 Pumping Equipment: Vertical Turbine (Line Shaft and Submersible) depth, 1 foot of extra cable length shall be provided to compensate for possible twist or sag of the cable during installation. Where cables pass the pump bowl assembly, cables shall be flat or protected against damage by a corrosion-resistant shield forming a smooth rounded surface. Sharp bends in the cables at the shield or at the connection to the motor will not be allowed. 2.7 PUMP APPURTENANCES A. Gauges: 1. Pumps shall be equipped with pressure gauges installed at pump discharge lines, installed with isolation valves. 2. Gauges shall be located in a representative location, where not subject to shock or vibrations, in order to achieve true and accurate readings. Where subject to shock or vibrations, the gauges shall be wall-mounted or attached to galvanized channel floor stands and connected by means of flexible connectors. B. Data Plates: 1. Provide stainless steel data plate securely attached to pump. 2. Include manufacturer's name, pump size and type, serial number, speed, impeller diameter, capacity and head rating, and other pertinent data. 2.8 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Extra Materials: 1. Furnish the OWNER the following spare parts for each pump service category: a. Line shaft rubber bearings: 1 set for each type of pump. b. Line shaft bronze bearings: 1 set for each type of pump. c. Impeller and bowl wear rings: 1 set for each type of pump. d. Mechanical seal: 1 complete seal of each type. e. Packing: 1 complete set of each type. f. Packing gland follower, including studs and nuts. g. Lantern ring h. Motor/gear thrust bearing set: 1 for each type of pump. i. Motor radial bearing set: 1 for each size of motor (if specified). j. Pump impeller/bowl assembly: 1 of each type supplied. k. Line shaft: 1 length of each size and type, including couplings. 2. Lubricants of sufficient quantity for a complete initial installation of each unit and 1-yrs worth of lubricants for the equipment supplied including, but not limited to: a. Motor oil b. Grease Technical Specifications 11072 - 10 Pumping Equipment: Vertical Turbine (Line Shaft and Submersible) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FACTORY TESTING A. The following tests shall be conducted on each indicated pump system: 1. The pump shall be tested at the factory in accordance with the Hydraulic Institute's ANSI/HI 14.6 Rotodynamic Pumps for Hydraulic Performance Acceptance Tests. Manufacturer shall provide the Engineer a minimum of 1 week prior notice and allow the Engineer to witness factory testing. a. Test shall be performed using the complete pump and motor assembly to be installed. Testing of prototype models will not be acceptable. The following minimum test results shall be submitted: 1) Hydrostatic test results of bowl assembly, column and discharge head. 2) At maximum speed, a minimum of five (5) hydraulic test readings between shutoff head and 25 percent beyond the maximum indicated capacity, recorded on data sheets as defined by the Hydraulic Institute. 3) Pump curves showing head, flow, bhp, and efficiency test results. 4) NPSH required test curve. 5) Certification that the pump shaft horsepower demand did not exceed the rated motor horsepower of 1.0 service rating at any point on the curve. 6) The pump manufacturer shall record vibration during the performance test. B. Acceptance: In the event of failure of any pump to meet any of the requirements, the Contractor shall make necessary modifications, repairs, or replacements to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents and the pump shall be re-tested until found satisfactory. 1. Pump factory acceptance testing shall meet HI Acceptance Grade 1 U. 3.2 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER A. Inspection, Startup, and Field Adjustment: An authorized service representative of the Manufacturer shall be at the Site for a minimum of three (3) work days during installation of the system to witness the following and to certify in writing that the equipment and controls have been properly installed, aligned, lubricated, adjusted, and readied for operation. 1. Installation of the equipment. 2. Inspection, checking, and adjusting the equipment. 3. Startup and field testing for proper operation. 4. Performing field adjustments to ensure that the equipment installation and operation comply with requirements and controls strategies of facility. B. The Engineer may require that the inspection, startup, and field adjustment services above be furnished in up to three (3) separate trips. C. Instruction of the Owner's Personnel: Technical Specifications 11072 - 11 Pumping Equipment: Vertical Turbine (Line Shaft and Submersible) 1. An authorized training representative of the Manufacturer shall visit the site for one (1) day to instruct the Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance of the equipment, including step-by-step troubleshooting with necessary test equipment. Instruction shall be specific to the models of equipment provided. 2. The representative shall have at least two (2) years experience in training. A resume for the representative shall be submitted. 3. Training shall be scheduled a minimum of three (3)weeks in advance of the first session. 4. Proposed training material and a detailed outline of each lesson shall be submitted for review a minimum of two weeks in advance of training. Comments shall be incorporated into the material. 5. The training materials shall remain with the trainees and a complete digital copy of the training materials shall be provided to the Owner. D. The Owner may videotape the training for later use with the Owner's personnel. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 11060 — Equipment Testing and Startup. B. Each pump system shall be field tested after installation to demonstrate: 1. Satisfactory operation without excessive noise and vibration. 2. No overheating of bearings. C. The following field testing shall be conducted: 1. Startup, check, and operate the pump system over its entire speed range. If the pump is driven by a variable speed drive, the pump and motor shall be tested at 100 RPM increments. Unless otherwise indicated, vibration shall be within the amplitude limits recommended by the Hydraulic Institute Standards at a minimum of four (4) pumping conditions defined by the Engineer. 2. Obtain concurrent readings of motor voltage, amperage, pump suction head, and pump discharge head for at least four (4) pumping conditions at each pump rotational speed at 100 RPM increments. Check each power lead to the motor for proper current balance. 3. Determine bearing temperatures by infrared type thermometer. A run time until bearing temperatures have stabilized shall precede this test, unless insufficient liquid volume is available. 4. Electrical and instrumentation tests shall be conducted as necessary to demonstrate satisfactory performance, as determined by the Engineer. D. Field testing will be witnessed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall furnish minimum three (3) Days advance notice of field testing. E. In the event any pumping system fails to meet the indicated requirements, the pump shall be modified or replaced and re-tested as outlined above until it satisfies the requirements. Technical Specifications 11072 - 12 Pumping Equipment: Vertical Turbine (Line Shaft and Submersible) F. After each pumping system has satisfied the requirements, the Contractor shall certify in writing that it has been satisfactorily tested and that final adjustments have been made. Certification shall include the date of the field tests, a listing of persons present during the tests, and the test data. G. The Contractor shall be responsible for costs of field tests, including related services of the Manufacturer's representative, except for power and water, which the Owner will bear. H. Owner's operating personnel will provide assistance in field testing. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 11072 - 13 Pumping Equipment: Vertical Turbine (Line Shaft and Submersible) SECTION 11076 SANITARY SEWER LIFT STATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall provide a fully functional sanitary sewer lift station for pumping sanitary sewer to the existing drain field. B. The location of the lift station shall be as shown on the Drawings. C. The lift station shall be designed by a vendor as a packaged system, complete with wet well, access hatch, rail-mounted pumps, check and isolation valves, electrical, and controls. D. The Contractor's SCADA contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with the sanitary sewer lift station supplier for connecting all alarms and pump run status information to the hatchery's SCADA system. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI): a. Steel Products Manual. 2. American National Standard Institute (ANSI). 3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A48, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 4. FM Global (FM). 5. Hydraulic Institute Standards for Centrifugal, Rotary and Reciprocating Pumps (HI). 6. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). b. ICS 6, Enclosures for Industrial Controls. 7. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 8. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Sanitary Sewer Lift Station pumps raw wastewater. B. The packaged system supplier shall serve as a single party responsible for all coordination responsibility through the pump manufacturer for the entire system including but not limited to the following: 1. Wet Well. 2. Pumps. 3. Motors. 4. Controls. 5. Valves. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Technical Specifications 11076 - 1 Sanitary Sewer Lift Station 1. Requirements in Section 11060. B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. See Section 01340. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: a. Flygt. b. Barnes c. Crane d. Hydromatic e. Fairbanks Morse. f. Yeomans. g. Gorman Rupp. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Wet Pit Applications: 1. Pump case: Cast iron, ASTM A48, Class 30. 2. Motor housing: Cast iron, ASTM A48, Class 25 or Class 30. 3. Impeller: Cast iron, ASTM A48, Class 30. 4. Shaft: Stainless steel, ANSI, Series 300 or 400. Carbon steel C1035 is acceptable if not contacting pumped fluid. 5. Wear rings: Corrosion and wear resistant materials. 6. O-rings: Nitrile (Buns-N) or fluorocarbon (Viton). 7. Fasteners: Stainless steel. 8. Guide rails: Stainless steel. 9. Lifting chains and cables: Stainless steel. 10. Lower ring seal: Tungsten-carbide both faces. 11. Upper ring seal: Tungsten-carbide both faces or carbon and ceramic or carbon and Ni-resist. 12. Seal metal parts: Stainless steel. 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. The Contractor shall field verify the operating conditions for the sanitary sewer lift station to ensure they are compatible with the existing elevations, septic tank, drain field, and connecting pipe size. B. Performance and Configuration Requirements, 1. Sanitary Sewer Lift Station: a. Vortex grinder pump. b. Raw wastewater. c. Design condition: 50 gpm at 39 FT TDH. d. Secondary condition: 40 gpm at 32 FT TDH. e. Pump configuration: 1) Submersible wet pit. 2) Clockwise rotation when viewed from the driver end. f. Maximum pump speed: 3450 rpm. Technical Specifications 11076 - 2 Sanitary Sewer Lift Station g. Drive type: Constant speed. 2.4 COMPONENTS A. General: 1. Provide pumps capable of handling fluids designated above. 2. Where watertight sealing is required, machine and fit mating surfaces with 0-rings. 3. Provide with heavy duty lift lugs or hoisting bail designed for lifting the entire pump and motor assembly. B. Shaft: 1. Design pump shaft of sufficient size to transmit full driver output. 2. Use shaft which is accurately machined and constructed with sufficient materials. 3. Design shaft for a maximum deflection of 0.002 IN measured at the stuffing box. C. Shaft Seal: 1. Seal shaft with two independent, tandem mounted seals running in an oil filled chamber. 2. Provide seals requiring neither routine maintenance nor adjustment, but capable of being easily inspected and replaced. 3. Hold interface in contact by its own spring system. D. Bearings: 1. Support shaft on upper and lower permanently lubricated bearings with a minimum L-10 life of 40,000 HRS. E. Motors: 1. Provide pump with FM or UL listed motor designed for area classification shown on Drawings. 2. Provide motor of totally submersible design, constructed with epoxy or poly- seal encapsulated windings, air-filled or dielectric oil filled, with Class F insulation and rated for continuous duty operation. 3. Assure motor is capable of running dry for extended periods without damage to motor or seal. F. Power and Control Cables: 1. Provide power cable and control cable to pump suitable for submersible applications in wastewater and indicate same by a code or legend permanently embossed on cables. 2. Size cables in accordance with applicable NEC specifications. 3. Provide sufficient length of power cable and control cable to meet the site requirements. 4. Provide each cable with a strain relief, cord grip, and explosion-proof seal installed in accordance with NEC Article 500. G. Temperature Monitor: 1. Furnish each phase of the motor with a temperature monitor embedded in the motor windings. 2. Arrange controls so as to shut the pump down and sound alarm should any one of the monitors detect high temperature and automatically reset once the stator temperature returns to normal. Technical Specifications 11076 - 3 Sanitary Sewer Lift Station 3. Set temperature of the temperature monitors at not higher than 90 percent of insulation temperature rating. H. Coatings: 1. For wet pit applications, apply polyamidoamine epoxy system to the exterior of the pump casing and motor housing. 2. Protect all metallic surfaces coming into contact with sewage except stainless steel and bronze by a corrosion-resistant coating. I. Wet Pit Applications: 1. Provide sliding guide bracket integral to pump unit which properly aligns the pump discharge with the discharge connection elbow for watertight seal during pumping. 2. Guide the entire weight of the pumping unit by guide rail(s). 3. The guide rail(s) shall not support any portion of the weight of the pump. 4. Provide chains or cable of sufficient strength to lift pumps from sump. 5. Furnish guiding rail assembly and the discharge flange assembly of nonsparking components. 6. Design pump to allow for removal without entering the wet well and without removal of bolts, nuts or other fastenings. 7. Provide pump unit connecting to discharge connection with a simple downward motion without rotation. 8. Provide necessary sliding guide bracket and discharge connection which, when bolted to the floor of the sump and to the discharge line, will receive the pump discharge connecting flange without need of adjustment, fasteners, clamp, or similar devices. 9. No portion of the pump shall bear directly on the floor or the wet well. 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Controls: 1. Provide four sealed float-type mercury switches to control pumps and provide alarm signal. 2. Seal mercury tube switches in a solid polypropylene float. 3. Provide float with large radius top at electrical cable connection to assure trouble-free operation. 4. Suspend floats on their own cable. 5. Design floats to be field-adjustable. 6. Three floats are to control pumps: One for lead pump start, one for lag pump start and one for low water cutoff. An additional switch provides the signal for high level alarm. 7. Provide an intrinsically safe relay for each level control circuit to reduce the energy in the circuit to the point that no spark is created by switching. B. Control Panel: 1. Furnish and install automatic control panel for the lift station. 2. Include combination circuit breaker type controller with short circuit, overload, and three overload relays, interior-mounted motor starter(s), and transformer with disconnect and overload protection for control circuit of 24 V. 3. Include a terminal board for connection of level sensors. 4. Provide the following features: Technical Specifications 11076 - 4 Sanitary Sewer Lift Station a. NEMA 3 weatherproof enclosure with locking mechanism complete with padlock. b. Hand-Off-Automatic selector switches. c. Automatic alternator. d. High level alarm with silence, alarm horn, and alarm light. e. Low level alarm with silence and alarm light. f. Pump running lights. g. Elapsed time meters. h. Overload reset button to reset overload relays. i. Pump sequence selector switch which overrides automatic alternator. j. Lightning protection. k. Condensation heater. I. Moisture detector alarm light and pump shutdown. m. 100 watt utility light outlet. n. Float switch test pushbuttons. o. Auxiliary contacts wired to terminal blocks. p. Power ON control relay. q. Power OFF control relay. r. Remote telemetering contact. s. 12 Vdc alarm system: A safety device which will actuate when faced with an incoming power failure. t. Normal emergency power transfer switch. u. Inner door in cabinet-mounted on a continuous vertical steel hinge; size to completely cover wiring and components mounted on the back panel; provide for mounting of controls and instruments on inner door. v. Pedestal mounting. w. Pole mounting bracket. C. Manhole Access Doors and Frames: 1. Furnish and install double hinged HS-20 door constructed of aluminum. 2. Equip with nonsparking upper guide rail support, float bracket, and flush locking mechanism. 3. Door shall be able to remain in open position while work is being performed. 4. Securely place frame above pump(s). 5. Provide doors of skidproof design. 6. Provide doors with snap locks and removable handle. 7. Provide door hardware including latching mechanism and hinges of stainless steel materials. 2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Secure from the pump manufacturer the following inspections and tests on each pump before shipment from factory: 1. Check impeller, motor rating and electrical connections for compliance with Specification. 2. Test motor and cable insulation for moisture content or insulation defects. 3. Prior to submergence, run pump dry to establish correct rotation and mechanical integrity. 4. Run pump for 30 minutes submerged, a minimum of 6 FT under water. 5. After operational test#4, perform insulation test (#2) again. B. Factory test of head (FT) versus flow (gpm)for one pump of each service category. Technical Specifications 11076 - 5 Sanitary Sewer Lift Station PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. For wet pit pumps, permanently install discharge connection elbow in wet well along with discharge piping. B. Seal pump cable end with a high quality protective covering, to make it impervious to moisture or water seepage prior to electrical installation. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 11076 - 6 Sanitary Sewer Lift Station SECTION 11230 BULK AERATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The work includes furnishing design, labor, materials and equipment required to fabricate and install the bulk aerators as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01340 B. Shop drawings which includes plans, elevations, sections, dimensions and details for all components. Shop drawings shall show material specifications, fasteners and weld symbols. C. Manufacturer's experience per Section 2.1 of this Specification. D. Manufacturer's recommended methods of installation, operation and maintenance. 1. Certification that product meets specification requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 REQUIREMENTS A. All bulk aerators shall be provided by a single manufacturer. The manufacturer shall be recognized manufacturer of bulk aerators specifically for aquaculture and have at least 5 years experience specific to the design and manufacture of bulk aerators. A list of 4 installation references similar to these specifications shall be supplied along with other submittal materials. B. Bulk aerators shall be of the size and configuration shown on the Drawings. C. Bulk aerator must be able to operate with efficient water distribution and resist phase inversion at loading variances between 50 and 200 gpm per square foot. D. The fabrication shall be constructed entirely of stainless steel. E. Media shall be Jaeger Tri-Pack, or approved equal. Media shall be contained in a single, netted sack allowing removal of media as a unified step. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION A. The Contractor shall verify all measurements and take all necessary field measurements required for correct fabrication of the bulk aerator assemblies. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating connection details between the bulk aerators and the aeration tower. B. The bulk aerators shall be filled with media at the manufacturer's shop and shipped to the site as a unit. Install at locations shown on the Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Technical Specifications 11230-1 Bulk Aerators END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 11230-2 Bulk Aerators SECTION 11425 MECHANICAL FISH HANDLING EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This section contains requirements for the design, fabrication, testing, and installation of mechanical fish handling equipment, including the following systems: 1. Six raceway crowders of identical design, one for each of the adult holding raceways. 2. Two cross-channel crowders for installation and use in the cross- crowder channel. 3. Fish lift system comprised of brail, primary and back-up slide gates, and electrical anesthesia (EA) fish lift basket. 4. Two false floor lift systems, one for use in each of the spawning tanks. B. Conceptual drawings accompany the requirements of this specification in order to show the design intent of the fish handling equipment and their interface with the surrounding structure. The contractor shall provide all additional design work necessary to ensure fully functional equipment that meets the specified requirements and intended functionality. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1. B30 - Safety Standards for Cableways, Cranes, Derricks, Hoists, Hooks, Jacks, and Slings 2. HST-4 — Performance Standard for Overhead Electric Wire Rope Hoists. B. American Welding Society (AWS). C. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit as specified in Section 01340 - Submittal Procedures. B. Submit all manufacturer's cut sheets and fabrication drawings for each fish handling system, including but not limited to: 1. Fabrication shop drawings showing all structural and mechanical details. 2. Instrumentation and Control drawings including system architecture, sensors, communication devices. 3. Electrical system shop drawings and wiring diagrams. Technical Specifications 11425-1 Mechanical Fish Handling Equipment 4. Control panel and cabinet drawings. 5. Motor data. C. Design calculations, seismic calculations and anchor bolt calculations. Loads to the building frame structure shall be provided in calculations. Signed and stamped by registered engineer in Oregon. D. System operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All equipment furnished under this section shall comply in all respects with the requirements of OSHA, ASME B30 safety standards and the ASME HST-4 Performance Standard for Overhead Electric Wire Rope Hoists. B. Motor brakes shall be provided on all lift systems where required by OSHA or to prevent personal injury from falling loads, such as the fence lift on each crowder. Motor brakes shall also be provided for any system where the gear reduction does not prevent the motor from rotating when power is removed. C. Manufactured items provided under this Section shall be new, of current manufacture, and shall be the products of reputable manufacturers specializing in the manufacture of such products. D. Equipment and items furnished under this Section shall be from manufacturers experienced in the manufacture and assembly of similar products, with a record of successful installations. 2.2 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. General: All materials employed in the equipment shall be suitable for the intended application; materials not specifically called for shall be high-grade, standard commercial quality, free from all defects and imperfections that might affect the serviceability of the product for the purpose for which it is intended. B. Metals: All metals used in the construction of the equipment shall be minimum grade A36 steel, unless specified otherwise. All intermittently and continuously submerged metal shall be T304 stainless steel. C. All fabrication shall be completed in a workmanlike manner per best industry practices to the tolerances indicated on the drawings. D. All welding shall be performed in accordance with AWS Standards. Technical Specifications 11425-2 Mechanical Fish Handling Equipment 2.3 PROTECTIVE COATINGS A. All protective coatings shall comply with the requirements of Specification 09910 — Protective Coatings. B. All carbon steel shall receive a protective coating per the coating system schedule for structural steel. C. Carbon steel used for crowder framework shall be hot-dipped galvanized per ASTM A153. 2.4 CONTROLS A. The control of mechanical fish handling equipment shall comply with all requirements for the hatchery control systems described throughout the contract documents. B. Alarms shall be provided to the hatchery's main SCADA system to indicate a system fault or failure to operate. C. The operation of all lift motors shall be interlocked to end of travel sensors to prevent rotation past the intended travel limits. 2.5 RACEWAY AND CROSS-CHANNEL CROWDERS A. A single system integrator shall be responsible for the design, fabrication, testing, and overseeing installation of all crowders. B. The maximum height of any crowder feature shall be less than 11 feet above the top of the raceway walls. C. The design of each crowder shall allow for complete disassembly in- place. Disassembly shall not require anything larger than a 1-ton chain fall. Connection details for all replaceable parts including but not limited to strip brushes, rollers, track wheels, rubbing shoes, and bearings shall allow for replacement in-place, without disassembly or removal of complete crowder subsystems. D. Each crowder drive shaft shall have a manual disconnect coupling that can be used to disengage the drive motor without removing the drive shaft. E. Running and drive surfaces for the crowders, including rails, embedded plates for the cross channel crowder, and the rack drive gear shall be level to within 1/64-in. over any given 10 ft. The elevation over the entire length of the running and drive surfaces shall not vary by more than 1/16-in from maximum to minimum. F. The electrical power system for both types of crowder shall comply with the following requirements. 1. A 48-volt DC on board battery system shall power each crowder individually. The nominal energy capacity of the battery system shall enable at least 1 hour of continuous operation of the largest individual motor on the crowder at its peak load. Technical Specifications 11425-3 Mechanical Fish Handling Equipment 2. Batteries shall be lithium-ion type, with suitable design and capabilities for the intended operation conditions. 3. The control system shall monitor the battery system voltage and have two visual alarms: a. When the battery level gets low and amber colored light should come on to indicate that the crowder should be driven to the charging station and plugged in. b. When the battery level gets critically low, a red light should come on to indicate that that batter level is too low for reliable operation, and all crowder function should be turned off until the batteries are charged. 4. An onboard retractable cord for charging the battery system shall be provided at a length to reach the nearest receptacle when the crowder is positioned at its intended docking location. 5. The battery charge time from empty to 100% shall take no longer than 12 hours. 6. The crowder drive motor shall be rated for a washdown environment or contained inside a NEMA 4 rated enclosure, or equivalent. G. The control system for both types of crowder shall comply with the following requirements. 1. Each crowder shall have a self-contained, onboard controls system to allow for complete operation of the crowder. 2. Crowder operator shall have the ability at the control panel to control the speed of the crowder drive motor. Two-speed drive motor control shall be provided at a minimum, variable speed drive motor control is preferred. Provisions for speed adjustment of the crowder lift motor shall be provided inside the control cabinet. 1) The raceway crowder shall travel at speeds up to 2 fps. 2) The cross channel crowder shall travel at speeds up to 2.5 fps. 3. Each crowder shall have a radio transmitter/receiver that communicates status and alarms to the hatchery's main SCADA system. 4. Each raceway crowder shall have the ability to open and close the corresponding slide gate associated with that raceway. This shall be done via radio communication with the hatchery's main SCADA system. 5. Each cross-channel crowder shall have the ability to be remotely controlled from inside the sorting and spawning building. This shall be done via radio communication with the hatchery's main SCADA system. Technical Specifications 11425-4 Mechanical Fish Handling Equipment 6. Provide and E-stop button located on the control panel for each crowder. 7. All limit switches and sensors for the crowders shall be located onboard, travel with the crowder, and be hard-wired into the crowder control system. Wireless limit switches are not acceptable. Mechanical tripping devices or targets can be fastened to the raceways in locations that do not interfere with crowder operation or other facility functions. 8. Crowder lift motor operation shall be interlocked to end of travel sensors to prevent rotation past the travel limits of the crowder fence. The lift motor on the Raceway Crowders shall also be interlocked to a crowder position sensor to prevent operation of the lift motor when crowder is near the slide gate and protect the transfer tubes at the end of the raceway. 9. Crowder drive motor shall be interlocked to end of travel sensors to prevent crowder operation past operational limits in the raceway. Mechanical stops shall be provided on top of the raceway walls past the end of travel sensors to prevent collision of the crowder fence or framework with any aspect of the raceway including the walls, tail screen, slide gate, transfer tubes, or brail. 10. All crowder motor interlocks shall have individual indication on the control panel. H. Manufacturers, or equal: 1. Transco Industries, Portland, OR 2. Con-Vey, Roseburg, OR 3. Jesse Co., Tacoma, WA 2.6 FISH LIFT SYSTEM A. Wedge wire for brail: 1. The Manufacturer shall furnish one custom wedge wire screen panel, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents 2. The wedge wire shall be configured to provide a minimum of 35% open area on the screen face. 3. The screen shall be designed to minimize deflections that could produce openings allowing particles to bypass the screen through openings larger than the wedge wire spacing. 4. Wedge Wire Screen: a. Clear spacing between wires shall be 1/8-in. 5. Minimum wedge wire size shall be: a. Width: 0.125" Technical Specifications 11425-5 Mechanical Fish Handling Equipment b. Height: 0.200" c. Relief Angle: 13 degrees 6. Screen shall be designed and fabricated to ensure that the completed panels are within the tolerances specified herein while under a no load condition: The screen panel shall be flat to within 1/16 inch plus or minus. B. Electrical anesthesia (EA) and fish lift systems: 1. The EA and fish lift basket shall be designed and manufactured by Smith-Root, to provide a fully functional system complete with all necessary controls and hoisting equipment. The system shall be designed to interface with the infrastructure detailed in the contract documents. 2. The EA basket and hoist systems shall be sized to lift 15 fish, each weight 10 lbs. All components in the hoist system shall be oversized to lift a basket full of water and fish should the EA system not be able to be used in the future. 3. Submit design drawings complete with weights, sizes, dimensions, tolerances, and requirements for the system. 4. Certain elements of the Adult Holding Facility and Sorting and Spawning Buildings require coordination with the manufacturer- designed EA and fish lift systems. After these systems have been designed, submitted and approved, the necessary sizes and items shall be coordinated to ensure compatibility of the infrastructure shown on the contract documents and the fish lift system. These items include but are not limited the structural fish lift framing, the opening in the sorting building for receiving fish, the location and geometry of the transfer tube between the spawning room and the EA basket, and locations of all utilities, operators, and equipment associated with the fish lift system. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SHOP INSPECTION A. Up to three separate shop inspection will be required during fabrication and assembly of the equipment. Notify the Engineer two weeks in advance of shop testing dates, which include the following hold points: 1. After welding and machining is complete, prior to assembly. 2. After completing protective coatings. 3. After assembly is complete and all systems are operational. 3.2 TESTING REQUIREMENTS Technical Specifications 11425-6 Mechanical Fish Handling Equipment A. One of each type of crowder shall be completely fabricated and tested onsite after installation in the field and in the presence of the Engineer before the Contractor can proceed with any work on the remaining crowders. Work on the remaining crowders shall not begin until the Contractor has received written approval from the Engineer on the completed first crowder fabrication and installation. Any modifications required on the first unit shall be made in the shop and reflected in the fabrication of all remaining units. 1. Notify the Engineer two weeks in advance of testing dates. 2. Fabrication shall be 100 percent completed prior to the shop inspection. All fabrication, welding, fasteners, and other components shall be completely assembled on the crowder so that it is in its final condition in which it will operate in the field. 3. If any component of the crowder fabrication is not 100 percent complete at the time of inspection, or not assembled to the finished condition, a follow up inspection shall be conducted. 3.3 WARRANTY A. Each piece of fish handling equipment shall have a manufacturer warranty that covers material, workmanship, and labor for a minimum of 2 years after the date of substantial project completion. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 11425-7 Mechanical Fish Handling Equipment SECTION 11701 Ceiling-Mounted Fans PART GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: ceiling-mounted circulation fans as indicated on the drawings. The fans shall be furnished with all mounting hardware, variable speed control, a humidistat, and accessories to provide a complete and operable ventilation system. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Drawings detailing product dimensions, weights, and attachment methods. B. Product Data: Specification sheets on the fans including electrical data, installation requirements, controller information, and performance data. C. Installation Guide: The manufacturer shall furnish a copy of all installation, operating, and maintenance instructions. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The fans shall be of high quality workmanship, free from any defects in construction or installation, and shall not require field balancing of the airfoils. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: The fan and any accessories shall be supplied by a manufacturer that has a minimum of ten (10) years of product experience. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver the products in original, undamaged packaging with identification labels intact. The fan shall be new, free from defects, and factory tested. B. The fan and all components shall be stored in a secure, dry location until installation. 1.5 WARRANTY A. The manufacturer shall replace any products or components defective in material or workmanship for the customer free of charge (including transportation charges) in accordance to the following schedule: Airfoils Lifetime (Parts) Hub Lifetime (Parts) Technical Specifications 11701-1 Ceiling-Mounted Fans All other fan components 15 years (Parts) Labor 1 year PART PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER OR EQUAL: A. Delta T Corporation (dba Big Ass Fans), fan model Powerfoil X 3.0. 2.2 HIGH VOLUME, LOW SPEED FANS A. Provide the quantity and size of fans indicated on the drawings. B. The entire fan and drive system shall include a harsh environment package with seals for the VFD enclosure and a motor with IP55 NEMA classification. C. Controller: 1. The controller shall be designed to control the fans from a single location. The controller shall be suitable for being installed outdoors. The system shall include the capability to automatically control the fan speed using user- determined settings for built-in temperature and humidity sensors. 2. The controller shall support up to six fans controlled as a group and include all necessary accessories for controlling grouped fans. The fans shall be controlled in three banks, with different sized fans being located on the same controller/bank. 3. The controller shall provide fan start/stop, speed, and direction control functions as well as light on/off and brightness control functions. The controller shall allow for both manual and automatic operation of the fans (based upon temperature and humidity settings). 4. The controller shall be tied into the overall hatchery SCADA system to allow for fan control from the main hatchery building. D. Operating Conditions: 1. The fans, motors, controllers, and all components shall be rated for outdoor use in temperatures ranging from 0°F to 1220F ambient conditions. E. Mounting: 1. The fans shall be mounted according to the manufacturer's instructions and be braced sufficiently (with supports and guy wires) for all operating conditions and loads to prevent lateral movement of the fans for the planned installation. The mounting system shall allow for adjustments to achieve a level/plumb installation. Technical Specifications 11701-2 Ceiling-Mounted Fans PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Fans shall be mounted to the moment frames as indicated on the drawings. B. Fan locations shall be free from obstacles such as lights, cables, or other building components. C. All necessary fan accessories shall be supplied to achieve the intended control and system operation. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. The fans and controllers shall be installed by a factory-certified installer according to the manufacturer's installation guide, which includes acceptable structural dimensions and proper sizing and placement of supports. For installation methods outside the manufacturer's recommendation provide certification from a structural engineer, in the form of a stamped print or letter, submitted prior to installation. B. The controllers shall be mounted in a location that is representative of the temperature and humidity of the environment than the fans will control to allow for proper automatic operation. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 11701-3 Ceiling-Mounted Fans SECTION 11800 MONORAIL SYSTEM PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Monorail system, including trolley, hoist, monorail beam and/or track and suspension, restraint bracing, end stops, hangers and hanger connections to beams, and accessories. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1. B30.10 - Hooks 2. B30.11 - Monorails and Underhung Cranes. 3. B30.16 - Overhead Hoists (Underhung). 4. HST-2 — Performance Standards for Hand Chain Manually Operated Chain Hoist. B. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): 1. Specifications for Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings. C. American Welding Society (AWS). D. Crane Manufacturers Association of America (CMAA) 1. No 74 Specifications for Top Running and Under Running Single Girder Electric Traveling Cranes Utilizing Under Running Trolley Hoist E. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). F. Monorail Manufacturers' Association (MMA): 1. MH27.1 - Specifications for Underhung Cranes and Monorail Systems. G. Hoist Manufacturer's Institute (HMI) 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide two monorail systems. See Contract Drawings for locations. B. Trolley shall be a four-wheel type and travel on the bottom flange of a monorail beam, with underhung hand chain pull. Monorail shall be equipped for manual lift and travel. C. Design requirements: 1. Monorail systems will be used to lift and maintain the tail screens and the slide gate in the adult holding facility. The first monorail must be able to travel to each tail screen and lift them out of their slot. The second monorail shall be able to travel to each slide gate and lift the gates out of their slot. Technical Specifications 11800-1 Monorail System 2. Hoisting system: In accordance with ASME B30.11, ASME B30.16, and OSHA standards. 3. Structural steel construction: In accordance with AISC Specifications. 4. Safety factor of castings, forgings, and stampings: Minimum 5 with regard to ultimate strength. 5. Perform welding in accordance with AWS Standards. 6. Design equipment in accordance with MMA MH27.1. 7. The contractor shall examine the drawings for interference and obstructions which might impose additional limitations upon the equipment. D. Performance requirements: 1. Service classification: Class A, Standby or Infrequent Service. 2. Rated capacity: 2 ton. 3. Lift: 20 feet. 4. Runway Length: 90'-0" 5. Trolley Type: Plain 6. Hoist Type: Hand Chain Hoist 7. Elevation of hook in highest position: 1723.52' 8. Arrange working parts for convenient inspection, lubrication, adjustment, repair, or replacement. 9. Dimensions and lift requirements shall be as indicated in the drawings. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit as specified in Section 01340 - Submittal Procedures. B. Submittals shall include: 1. Product data. 2. Shop drawings: a. Include support types, sizes, spacing, bridging, connections, anchoring, bearing plates, and erection instructions. 3. Monorail beam and runway design calculations, seismic calculations and anchor bolt calculations. Loads to the building frame structure shall be provided in calculations. Calculations shall be signed and stamped by registered engineer. 4. Commissioning submittals: a. Provide Manufacturer's Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance. 5. Project closeout documents: a. Provide vendor operation and maintenance manual as specified in Section 01340. 6. Certificates: a. Certificate of tests conducted by the monorail manufacturer in accordance with industry standards and federal regulations prior to shipment of equipment. b. OSHA certificate upon completion of field load testing. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All equipment furnished under this section shall comply in all respects with the requirements of OSHA, the standards of the Crane Manufacturer's Association of Technical Specifications 11800-2 Monorail System America (CMAA), the Hoist Manufacturer Institute (HMI) and ASME HST-2 Performance Standard for Hand Chain Manually Operated Chain Hoist. 1.06 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE A. Assemble, paint, test, and adjust monorail system in manufacturer's shop before shipment as far as practical. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Warranty shall cover defects in materials and workmanship for a period of 10 years. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Mark rated capacity of the system in both ton and kilogram units, with each rating printed in a different color, on both sides of monorail beam/runway. 1. Provide labeling that is clearly visible to operators working from floor levels below the hoist. 2. Clearly mark bottom block and body of hoists with rated capacity. 3. Markings shall be in accordance with ASME B30.16 — Overhead Hoists. 2.02 RUNWAY BEAM A. Runway Beam: Structural steel as specified in 05120 - Structural Steel where indicated on the Drawings. 1. Runway beam: a. Section selected to span between support locations indicated on the Drawings or accepted by the Engineer, with maximum vertical deflection not exceeding 1/600 of span, and maximum lateral deflection not exceeding 1/400 of span when subjected to a lateral load equal to 20 percent of the lifted load. b. Runway beam shall be straight, parallel, level, and at the same elevation. Install with shims to provide level connections at the pre-fabricated metal building frame. 2. System bracing: a. Design and install lateral and longitudinal bracing for the runway as needed. B. Stops and bumpers: 1. Locate trolley stops at the ends of the runway beam in order to maintain a clearance between the crane and the building. 2. Bolt trolley stops to runway beam. 3. The stops/bumpers must be capable of absorbing energy and stopping moving fully loaded trolley traveling at 50 percent of the full load speed. C. Coating: Provide prime coat, intermediate coat, and finish coat as specified in Section 09910 — Protective Coatings. Technical Specifications 11800-3 Monorail System 2.03 TROLLEY HOISTS A. Manufacturer or approved equal: 1. CM Hurricane 360' Hand Chain Hoist a. Army-Type, Integrated Trolley Hoist b. Product: HU2000PA20 B. Type: Plain trolley and hand chain hoist with low headroom. C. Hoisting chain: Specifically designed for specified service loads; preformed, improved plow steel with fiber core; double-reeved wire rope. D. Hook: Safety type, able to rotate freely on bearing support with heavy-duty type safety latches. E. Trolley Frame: Shall be welded steel or cast steel. F. Lifting Beam: Provide a low headroom spreader beam with a 2 ton capacity for the tail screen monorail. Spread shall match the lifting hooks on the tail screens. G. Coating: Provide prime coat, intermediate coat, and finish coat in as specified in Section 09910 — Protective Coatings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Do not use monorail crane system for construction. B. Hoisting equipment shall not be used until receipt of OSHA certificate. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install the Work in this section in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions, shop drawings, and directions. B. Set work accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; plumb, level, and true. 3.03 LOAD TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Perform inspection and testing in accordance with ASME B30.16 — Overhead Hoist. B. The manufacturer shall provide a qualified representative to inspect the completed installation, service and operate the equipment under all design conditions with a contractor furnished test weight, instruct the Owner's personnel in proper operating and maintenance procedures, and provide Owner with a written certificate of approval. The representative shall submit a manufacturer's representative report for each site visit. C. Operational Test: The Work in this section shall be tested by the hoist manufacturer to very compliance with ASME B30.16. 1. Lifting and lowering functions should be tested under no-load conditions. Technical Specifications 11800-4 Monorail System 2. After testing under no-load conditions, a load of at least 50 lb times the number of load-supporting parts of chain shall be applied to the hoist, and the hoist shall be tested to check proper load control. D. Load Test: The Work in this section shall be tested by the manufacturer with a test lad of not less than 125% of the rated load. E. Perform test on all equipment in presence of OSHA certified manufacturer's representative and Engineer. F. Operate equipment through complete lift and lowering cycle and through complete travel of trolley to demonstrate quiet, smooth, and safe hoisting, braking, and traveling. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 11800-5 Monorail System SECTION 12340 RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Product Data, Shop Drawings, and material Samples. B. Verify dimensions by field measurements; measure for countertops after base cabinets are installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CASEWORK A. Products: 1. Lanz: Frameless Ecowood, veneer finish per finish schedules. B. Comply with KCMA A161.1. Provide cabinets with KCMA's "Certified Cabinet" seal affixed in a semiexposed location of each unit. C. Cabinets: 1. Face Style: Flush overlay. 2. Door Fronts: Slab. 3. Drawer Fronts: Slab 4. Exposed Cabinet End Finish: Laminate. 5. Exposed Wood: Solid wood or hardwood plywood with Grade A faces per HPVA HP-1, selected for compatible color and grain. 6. Semiexposed Materials: Solid wood or hardwood plywood with Grade C faces per HPVA HP-1, laminate to match faces. 7. Door and Drawer Pulls: Lanz 8004N. 8. Hinges: Concealed European-style self-closing hinges. 9. Drawer Guides: Epoxy-coated-metal, self-closing drawer guides with nylon-tired, ball-bearing rollers. D. Solid-Surfacing Material Countertops: Custom grade. 1. Solid-Surfacing Material Thickness: 3cm 2. Fabricate tops in one piece with shop-applied backsplashes and edges. Technical Specifications 12340-1 Residential Casework PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install cabinets with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces by using concealed shims. Where casework abuts other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. Provide filler strips, scribe strips, and moldings in finish to match casework face. B. Install cabinets without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are aligned. C. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet. D. Fasten each cabinet to adjacent unit and to structural members of wall construction. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not less than 24 inches on center. 1. Use No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips. 2. Use toggle bolts through metal backing behind gypsum board. E. Fasten plastic-laminate countertops by screwing through corner blocks in base units into underside of countertop. Spline and glue joints in countertops and use concealed mechanical clamps. 1. Provide cutouts for sinks and lavatories, including holes for faucets and accessories. 2. Seal edges of cutouts by saturating with varnish. F. Fasten solid-surface countertops by screwing through corner blocks in base units into underside of countertop. Align adjacent surfaces. Form seams 1/8 inch wide and adhere with manufacturer's recommended joint adhesive in color to match countertop. Dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. 1. Seal edges of cutouts by saturating with varnish. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 12340-2 Residential Casework SECTION 12512 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION REQUIREMENTS A. Submittals: Product Data and Samples. B. Product Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with WCMA A 100.1. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS A. Provide horizontal louver blinds in all exterior windows throughout building. B. Provide blinds passing flame-resistance testing according to NFPA 701. C. Louver Slats: Aluminum, antistatic polyester coated. D. Slat Width: 1 inch. E. Headrail: Formed steel or extruded aluminum; long edges returned or rolled; fully enclosing operating mechanisms on three sides and ends. F. Tilt Operation: Manual with wand. G. Valance: Manufacturer's standard. H. Mounting: End. I. Colors, Textures, Patterns, and Gloss: As selected from manufacturer's full range. J. Fabrication: Comply with AWCMA Document 1029 unless otherwise indicated. 1. Fabricate concealed components from noncorrodible or corrosion-resistant-coated materials. 2. Provide lifting and tilting mechanisms with permanently lubricated moving parts. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install blinds level, plumb, and located not closer than 1 inch to interior face of glass. 1. Flush Mounted: Install blinds with louver edges flush with finish face of opening when slats are tilted open. 2. Jamb Mounted: Install headrail flush with face of opening jamb and head. B. Adjust horizontal louver blinds to operate smoothly and easily throughout entire operational range. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 12512-1 Horizontal Louver Blinds SECTION 13065 PREFABRICATED WALK-IN FREEZER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The work includes furnishing all labor, materials, and equipment for the installation of the prefabricated walk-in freezer as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Make all submittals in accordance with Section 01340. B. Submittals shall contain complete dimensions and interface requirements including piping and electrical requirements. C. Shop drawings shall cover all details of doors, frames, refrigeration components, wall sections, ceiling and all other manufactured items. D. Supply three separately bound copies of operating, maintenance and lubrication instruction manual including complete parts lists of the refrigeration system. E. A complete set of installation instructions shall be included with the walk-in. These instructions shall cover the erection and assembly of the walk-in and the installation of refrigeration systems. A floor plan print shall be included. 1.3 GUARANTEES A. Manufacturer shall warrant that any part of installed walk-in freezer, including the refrigeration system and its related accessories, is free from defects in material or workmanship under normal use and service. Manufacturer shall be obligated to repair or replace any part of this equipment which proves to be defective within the period of five (5) years from the date of acceptance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver walk-in freezer and refrigeration system to the job-site as close to time of installation as possible. B. Store walk-in freezer and refrigeration system in an enclosed space adequately protected from weather, condensation and damage. C. Any damage occurring to walk-in freezer and refrigeration system prior to acceptance shall be repaired or replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WALK-IN FREEZER Technical Specifications 13065 - 1 Prefabricated Walk-In Freezer A. General. Freezer size and configuration shall be as indicated on the Drawings and in the specific product section of this spec. The Contractor shall verify all dimensions and interferences prior to submittals and fabrication. B. Panel construction. Wall and ceiling shall consist of interior and exterior metal pans insulated with 5 1/2 inch thick rigid urethane foam with a minimum R value of 34. Panels shall be made without internal wood or metal structural members and shall maintain a complete break in metal to metal continuity across the internal and external surfaces after freezer is installed. Panel edge must have tongues and grooves "foamed in place" to assure tight joints. A flexible vinyl gasket shall be fitted on the interior and the exterior of each panel along every tongue edge to provide gasketing at each joint. Ninety- degree angled panels shall be provided for each corner. C. Interior walls shall be 22 gauge Type 304 stainless steel, #4 finish. D. Ceiling shall be 26 gauge Galvanized steel. E. Panel locking assemblies. Assembly of walk-in shall be accomplished by Posi-Locs. Posi-Locs shall be foamed-in-place and activated by a hex wrench provided by the manufacturer. Access ports to locking devices shall be covered by snap caps. Access ports shall be on interior to allow assembly of walk-in from the inside. F. Section gaskets. N.S.F. listed gaskets shall be foamed-in-place to the male side of all panels, on both interior and exterior. Gaskets shall be impervious to stains, greases, oils, mildew, etc. G. Doors shall be equipped with magnetic gasket, Posi-Seal door closure and latch. Hardware shall have provisions for locking and a safety release which prevents entrapment of personnel with the box. H. Doors shall be sized and shall be swing or sliding doors as indicated on the Drawings. Doors shall be self-closing with two strap-type, cam-lift hinges. I. Doorjamb shall be made of Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic. An isolated, low wattage heater strip covered by magnetically attracting stainless steel shall be fitted onto this jamb. This strip shall provide perfect sealing of magnetic gasket and prevent frost and condensation build-up. J. Each entrance door section shall be provided with an incandescent type vapor-proof light, pilot light switch and conduit between switch box and outlet box. Concealed wiring shall be standard on each entrance door section. K. A threshold with non-skid striping shall be provided with each door section. Heater wire shall continue beneath the threshold. L. A single 2" dial thermometer shall be attached to the building's interior entrance door jamb to indicate the temperature inside the freezer box. The thermometer shall be flush mounted of a field replaceable design with a temperature range of-60°F to 80°F. Technical Specifications 13065 - 2 Prefabricated Walk-In Freezer M. N.S.F. All walk-ins shall be fabricated to comply with National Sanitation Foundation No. 7. The N.S.F. label shall be affixed to the interior door pan. N. Air vent. A Tri-Action air vent shall be provided to equalize pressure between the interior and exterior, caused by sudden temperature changes due to door openings and evaporator defrosting. The vent shall be heated to prevent moisture and/or frost accumulation. O. Drain Lines. Installing contractor shall provide suitable drain lines from all evaporators. Drains shall be trapped outside the walk-in. Freezer drains shall be copper tubing and shall be heated and insulated to prevent freeze-up. All plumbing to be in accordance with local codes. Q. Approved manufacturers shall be: 1. Wilderman Refrigeration Co. Seattle, WA 98109 2. Kalt Manufacturing Co., Inc. Portland, OR 97217 3. U. S. Cooler Quincy, IL 2.2 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM A. All refrigeration equipment shall be essentially the standard products of a reputable manufacturer and shall be of the best quality used for the purpose in commercial practice. Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are required, these units shall be the products of the same manufacturer. However, the component parts of the system need not be of the same manufacturer. Each major component shall have the manufacturer's name, address, and catalog number on a metal plate securely affixed in a conspicuous place. 1. All components shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer to be suitable for use as indicated in the Drawings and as specified herein. 2. Belts, pulleys, chains, gears, couplings, projecting setscrews, keys and other moving parts located where any person may come in close proximity to shall be fully enclosed or properly protected per OSHA standards. B. Freezer Condensing Unit. Freezer Condensing Unit shall be a stand alone, frame mounted, air cooled preassembled remote condensing unit sized to provide a minus 10°F box temperature with 120°F condensing temperature. This condensing unit is to be installed on top of the freezer box. 1. Compressor. Compressor shall be semi-hermetic low temperature design. The compressor shall be supplied with oil pressure safety switches, motor winding safeties and crank case heater with controls. Technical Specifications 13065 - 3 Prefabricated Walk-In Freezer 2. Refrigerant. Refrigerant shall be a toxicity class A, flammability class #1 Azeotrope refrigerant that can be "topped-off' in the field without refrigerant chemical component separation in the event of a leak. An ASHRAE listed 507 or equivalent 5XX refrigerant, any ASHRAE 4XX series blend type refrigerant is unacceptable. 3. Condensing Coil and Fan. The Condensing Unit shall have an integral air cooled condensing coil sized for 115% design capacity and a "head-pressure" controlled electric fan sized for the coil (115% of Condensing Unit capacity). 4. Refrigerant Accumulator. The Condensing Unit shall have a suction-line accumulator with a liquid refrigerant subcooling coil to subcool the refrigerant going to the evaporator and to also provide a heat source to evaporate any liquid refrigerant in the suction line. 5. Filter/Dryers. The Condensing Unit shall have replaceable cartridge type refrigerant filter/Dryer in the liquid line with a moisture sensing sight glass. A separate suction line cartridge filter element. Both filter cartridges shall be supplied with isolation valves. 6. Condensing unit operational controls. The condensing unit shall have a dual pressure control to operate the compressor. A separate "head-pressure" control to operate the condenser fan. 7. Condensing unit safeties. The condensing unit shall have as a minimum (but not limited to) the following safety switch controls: a. High Refrigerant "Head-Pressure" shut-off with manual reset. b. Low Compressor oil pressure switch with manual reset. c. Both switches shall have an indicator light to aid in trouble shooting a system shutdown. 8. Over pressure devices. The compressor's "Hot Gas" circuit shall have a relief valve and the receiver shall have a burst disk. Both devices shall discharge outside the condenser unit housing. 9. Vibration isolation. The compressor shall be mounted on vibration isolator mounts as recommended by the manufacturer and the condensing unit frame shall be mounted on vibration isolation pads. All piping and wiring conduit connecting to the compressor shall be installed with vibration isolation flexible connections. C. Freezer evaporator unit. Freezer evaporator shall be for use with Freon R-507 and shall be inner fin coil, copper sheathed electric defrost heating elements, propeller fans, heavy-duty motor designed for low temperatures, bonderized sturdy metal base with finished paint coat, galvanized mounting channels and hanger bolts, electric drain pan, heating pad, super heater, timer, motor starter, and contractor. D. Thermostats. One remote bulb thermostat shall be provided and installed for the freezer room. Thermostats shall be line voltage type for 120-volt, 1-phase service, range -50OF to +50°F. Thermostats shall be Minneapolis-Honneywell, White-Rogers or Johnson. Provide a thermostat or temperature switch, set to +25°F, to be used by the site alarm system for a freezer warm alarm. Technical Specifications 13065 -4 Prefabricated Walk-In Freezer E. Gauges and gauge board. Gauges for suction and liquid lines shall be for refrigeration service 3-1/2 inch diameter, surface mounted with 5 lb. major graduations and 1 lb. minor graduations. Gauges shall be Ashcroft, Marsh, or U.S. Gauge Company. Gauges and thermometers shall be mounted on a 5/8 inch marine plyboard, gauge board painted to match equipment. All instruments and gauges shall be provided with plastic nameplates identifying unit and function. Gauge board to be mounted on the inside of the condensing unit's cover. F. Piping. Suction, liquid line and drain line shall be copper tube of the sizes determined by the manufacturer with solder fittings. All piping shall be cleaned and firmly supported free from leaks, and installed in a neat workmanlike manner and in all respects in keeping with the best trade practice. Drain lines in refrigerated spaces shall have electrical heat tape wrapped thereon of sufficient capacity to prevent freezing and insulated. A manufacturer approved filter/drier and a sight glass shall be installed on the liquid line as a part of paragraph 2.2.13.5 of this section. G. Pipe insulation. Suction lines outside cold spaces shall be insulated as recommended by the equipment manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORIES, AND TESTING A. Installation. A complete set of instructions covering both assembly of the walk-in freezer and installation of the refrigeration equipment shall be supplied by the manufacturer and shall be strictly followed. Installation shall be complete and ready for use. B. Refrigerant Piping t. Evacuation and testing equipment. Provide a 2-stage high-vacuum pump with clean oil, capable of pumping down to 0.08 millimeters of mercury (95 microns), and a closed-end mercury manometer, thermocouple, or thermistor vacuum, gauges. 2. Install refrigerant piping in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. 3. Install refrigerant circuit piping with accessories and to configuration as shown on the drawings. 4. Support and anchor piping to adequately prevent sagging and vibration. 5. Evacuate refrigerant piping, condenser, and evaporator coil. Do not evacuate compressor. Evacuate system to 500-micron absolute pressure. Pressurize with dry nitrogen to 425 psi gauge, maximum allowable pressure drop is 4 psi gauge in 48 hours. Check for leaks. Re-evacuate system to 100 microns and hold vacuum for a minimum of 6 hours. Remake all leaking joints and repeat system evaluation procedure, including leak testing. Technical Specifications 13065 - 5 Prefabricated Walk-In Freezer C. Freezer room draw-down. Initial and subsequent pull-downs of low temperature room should be slow. Draw-down freezer room to -10°F. For proper pulldown schedule proceed as follows to avoid insulation damages: 24 Hour Days Freezer Room Temperature 1 st 750F 2nd 60OF 3rd 450F 4th 350F 5th 30OF 6th 20OF 7th 10OF 8th 0°F 9th -10OF Note: Period between 350F and 30OF very critical. D. Testing and Operation 1. Refrigerating units shall be fully charged with their proper refrigerant and oil ready for insulated rooms drawdown test. 2. At the completion of the test, the systems shall be fully charged and free of leaks. Any deficiency shall be corrected at no additional cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 13065 - 6 Prefabricated Walk-In Freezer SECTION 13121 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS PART GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal building system: a. Building system design. b. Materials. c. Fabrication. d. Shipment. e. Erection of building system. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA): a. 621-02, Voluntary Specifications for High Performance Organic Coatings on Coil Coated Architectural Hot Dipped Galvanized (HDG) and Zinc- Aluminum Coated Steel Substrates. 2. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): a. Specification for Structural Steel Buildings. b. AISC Code of Standard Practice. c. Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 Bolts. 3. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A36, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. b. A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength. Technical Specifications 13121-1 Metal Building Systems c. A325, Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. d. A490, Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Steel Structural Bolts, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. e. A792, Standard Specification for General Requirements, Steel Sheet, Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. f. C991, Standard Specification for Flexible Glass Fiber Insulation for Metal Buildings. g. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 4. Metal Building Manufacturer's Association (MBMA): a. Low Rise Building Systems Manual. 5. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC). a. SP 6/NACE No. 3, Commercial Blast Cleaning. 6. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. Building Materials Directory. B. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer's qualifications: a. Manufacturer must be member in good standing of the Metal Building Manufacturers Association (MBMA). b. Manufacturer must be an AISC Quality Certified Fabricator in the category of Metal Building Systems (MB). 2. Erector qualification: a. Erector (installer) must be approved in writing by metal building manufacturer. b. Erector must have minimum of 10 years current experience in erection of similar structures. 3. Manufacturer's Structural Engineer: Registered in the State of Oregon. Technical Specifications 13121-2 Metal Building Systems 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Code: 1. The word "code" refers to International Code Conference (ICC) International Building Code and associated standards, 2015 Edition including all State of Oregon amendments, referred to herein as Building Code. 2. Erector (installer): a. Individual(s) actually performing work on site. 1) Erector and installer are synonymous. 3. Nomenclature as listed in Bibliography of Low Rise Buildings Systems Manual by MBMA. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Building shall be non-insulated, rigid frame type with vertical walls and gable type roof. 1. Cross bracing shall be provided in the side walls perpendicular to the rigid frame. 2. Use of horizontal rod bracing shall be coordinated to accommodate lights, fans and other interferences. a. Coating system shall be as described in Section 09910 Protective Coatings—do not apply primer other than that specified. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Section 01330. 2. Product technical data including: a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. b. Manufacturer's technical reference manual containing all of the manufacturer's standard construction details and specifications. 1) Manufacturer's erection manual containing all details and methods for installation of building frame, roof system, and accessories. 2) Edit to mark out items not used for this installation. Technical Specifications 13121-3 Metal Building Systems c. Structural calculations stamped and signed by a professional Structural Engineer licensed in the State of Oregon. 1) Include list of design loads and loads transmitted to foundation through columns or walls and location where loads occur. 2) Calculations shall be submitted for information only. 3. Fabrication drawings: a. List of all design loads and combination of loads. b. Size and location of each component of the building. 1) Include clearance under structural framing members. 2) Include cross-section of components. c. Fasteners and details of fasteners connecting each component of the building. d. Size, location and details of anchor bolts, base plates, and all other components fastened to the foundation. e. Details roof panels, finishes, flashings, closures, closure strips, trim, gutters, downspouts, caulking, and all other miscellaneous components. B. Samples: 1. Metal color and finish samples of roof panels, roof trim, wall trim, and interior liner panel colors for Engineer's selection. 2. Color chart is not acceptable. C. Miscellaneous Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's and Erector's Qualifications. 2. Manufacturer's approval of erector. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's standard warranty. B. Manufacturer's 20-year warranty of factory applied premium paint finish against blistering, chipping, cracking, peeling, or fading of roof panels. C. Applicator's 20-year warranty of factory applied protective coating finish against blistering, chipping, cracking, peeling, or fading of structural frame and secondary elements. Technical Specifications 13121-4 Metal Building Systems D. Provide notice of any exceptions taken to warranties. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Metal building systems: a. Nucor Building Systems. b. Varco-Pruden. c. Big-D Builders d. R&M Steel 2.2 MATERIALS A. Structural Members: Steel. B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554 Grade 55. C. Fasteners: 1. Building frame, girts, and purlins: ASTM A325 or ASTM A307 bolts. 2. Roof panels: Stainless steel. 3. Miscellaneous fasteners: Stainless steel. D. Roof Panels: Steel. E. Grout: Grout for leveling of base plates shall be high strength non-metallic, non- shrink cementitious grout. 1. Product shall be Five Star Fluid Grout 100 having minimum compressive strength of 5000 psi at 28 days. Grout shall be mixed and placed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Grout shall be placed at 45 degree chamfer except where indicated as vertical. Vertical grout faces shall be formed. F. Closures: Neoprene. G. Trim: Same material as roof panel. Technical Specifications 13121-5 Metal Building Systems H. Coatings: As listed in Section 09910 Protective Coatings 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Roof Liner Panel: 1. Profile: Flat panel. 2. Minimum 24 GA steel. 3. Galvalume: a. ASTM A792, Grade 50B. b. Provide AZ50 coating for painted surfaces and AZ55 coating for unpainted surfaces. 4. Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked enamel. 2.4 BUILDING DESIGN CRITERIA A. Critical Dimensions: 1. Roof slope shall be as shown on the drawings. 2. The sequence of construction requires that the foundation be installed before the superstructure can be completed. Therefore, the locations of base column plate anchorage is critical and shall be adhered to. Refer to Section 01400 Quality Control. 3. Roof mounted equipment (As shown on drawings): a. Lighting b. Pendant ceiling fans B. Building Foundation: 1. All footings, foundations and anchor bolts have been designed based on assumed loadings and reactions. a. Member sizes and geometry may vary depending on the building being supplied. b. Do not construct these members until Engineer has verified design with approved Shop Drawings of metal building being supplied. C. Roof Live Loads: 1. Roof panels: Technical Specifications 13121-6 Metal Building Systems a. 40 psf uniformly distributed live load. b. 200 LB concentrated (point) live load (over a 1 x 1 FT area) located at center of maximum roofing (panel) span. c. The most severe condition governs. 2. Roof framing members: a. Per Building Code. b. Designed for 40 psf uniform or 200 LB concentrated live loads. D. Snow Loads: 1. Design structure for snow loading as set forth in the Building Code for balanced load, snow drift and unbalanced snow. a. Project site conditions are as follows: 1) Basic ground snow: 40 psf. 2) Importance factor: 1.0. 3) Snow exposure: C. 4) Thermal: unheated open structure. 5) Sliding and shedding shall be precluded by snow clips. 2. Design roof panels, secondary support members and primary framing where appropriate for a snow load drifting accumulation as specified in the Building Code. E. Wind Loads: 1. Design structure for wind loading as set forth in the Building Code. a. Project site conditions are as follows: 1) 3 second gust wind speed: 115 mph. 2) Site exposure: Class C. 3) Importance factor: 1.0. F. Seismic (Earthquake) Loads: 1. Design structure for seismic forces as set forth in the Building Code. Technical Specifications 13121-7 Metal Building Systems a. Project site conditions are as follows: 1) Seismic Design Category: D. 2) Occupancy importance factor: 1.0. 3) Response factor R: 4.5 (unless detailed to justify a higher value) G. Combination of Loads: 1. The combining of dead, live, wind, seismic and auxiliary loads for design purposes shall be set forth in the Building Code, unless otherwise specified. 2. Deflection of purlins and secondary members not to exceed L/180 of its span when supporting applicable vertical live and dead loads. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: 1. Fabricate building structure, roof panels, accessories and trim in accordance with requirements of AISC and MBMA. 2. Provide all necessary clips, flashing angles, caps, channels, closures, bases and any other miscellaneous trim required for complete water and airtight installation. a. Provide an inside closure at the base of all corrugated panels and an outside closure at the top of all corrugated panels in addition to all other closure strips required. 1) Closure strips shall be formed to fit the corrugation of the metal panels and shall be securely supported in place. 2) Closure strips shall fit between corrugated panels and trim or flashing as required to completely separate the interior of the building from the exterior. 3) Closure strips shall maintain 1/8 IN or less gap at ridge, eave and gable joints. 3. Fabricate and prepare material for shipment knocked down. 4. Frame shall be factory punched to receive all fasteners. 5. Finishes: a. Clean ferrous surfaces of oil, grease, loose rust, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Technical Specifications 13121-8 Metal Building Systems 1) All primary and secondary structural steel members, not noted as being galvanized, shall be cleaned in accordance with SSPC-SP 6. 2) Structural steel members shall not be primed except as provided in 09910 Protective coatings. B. Roof Panels: 1. Standing seam interlocking rib configuration. 2. Factory applied color coating. 3. Meet requirements of AAMA 621-02. 4. Length: Sufficient to cover entire length of any unbroken roof slope up to 40 FT. 2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: 1. Employ and pay for the services of a qualified independent testing agency to inspect and test all structural steel work for compliance with Contract Documents. 2. Independent testing agency shall have a minimum of 5 years performing similar work and shall be subject to Owner's approval. B. Responsibilities of Testing Agency: 1. Inspect field welding in accordance with Section 6 of AWS Code including the following non-destructive testing: a. Visually inspect all welds. b. Test 50 percent of full penetration welds and 10 percent of fillet welds with liquid dye penetrant. c. Test 20 percent of full penetration welds with ultrasonic or radiographic testing. 2. Inspect high strength bolting in accordance with Section 9 of the Specification for Structural Joints. a. Inspect while work is in progress. 3. Inspect structural steel which has been erected. 4. Prepare and submit test reports to Engineer. Technical Specifications 13121-9 Metal Building Systems a. Assist Engineer to determine corrective measures necessary for defective work. 2.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide 4 OZ of touch up paint for each color provided on the building per 10,000 SF of coated area. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Installed tolerances shall be in accordance with "AISC Code of Standard Practice." a. Install products straight without bowing, sagging, or warping. 2. Install all fasteners. B. Separate the roof support member from the roof panel, except at each concealed structural fastener, with a spacer of material having a density of not less than 2 pcf and, if of a combustible material, having a flame spread rating no greater than 25. C. Fasten roof panels to purlins or secondary support members in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. D. Install liner panels in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touch up paint any scratched factory finished surfaces or remove and replace as directed by Engineer. B. Remove and replace any damaged roof panels, frames, etc., as directed by Engineer. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 13121-10 Metal Building Systems SECTION 13400 CONTROL NARRATIVE 1. General Description Water supply to the hatchery is provided by two separate sources: • Snake River intake pumps (P-20.1 & P20.2) supply water to the bulk aerator (AER-30.1) within aeration tower based on aeration tank level setpoint. Water from the aeration tower is gravity fed to the adult holding raceways and sorting and spawning. Water from the raceways and overflow from the aeration tower outfalls to the Snake River. • The site wells (P-10.1 & P-10.2) supply water to the smaller aerator (AER-30.2) within aeration tower based on the operator adjustable level setpoint. A portion of the aerated ground water is pumped through a water cooler for chilled water supply to sorting and spawning and incubation. Water from incubation and overflow from the aeration tower will outfall to the Snake River. The hatchery will be provided with a main SCADA workstation and main control panel at the office/electrical building. The SCADA workstation will be provided with historian database capabilities and remote alarming via the local internet connection. Remote 1/0 panels will be located at the air burst building and at the adult holding and raceway building. The sorting and spawning building will also have a panel mounted touch screen HMI where an operator at this location can view and control the entire hatchery. All these components will be connected to the main PLC and SCADA workstation via single mode fiber optic communications. The hatchery will be generator backed to allow operations during outages. Uninterruptible power supplies will be provided at all control panel locations to allow the control system to remain up during a generator cutover. 2. Duplex Well Pumps (P-10.1 and P10.2), P&ID sheet 10 1 1 2.1. Description 2.1.1. Ground water is pumped to the (2) columns within aeration tower AER-30.2 from two submersible well pumps. Both pumps will be controlled with VFD in a lead/lag, auto alternate configuration. The lead pump will ramp motor speed up and down to maintain a level setpoint indicated by LIT-30.2 (operator adjustable). The max flow of well pump P-10.1 is 200 gpm and 10.2 is 400 gpm, flowmeters on the discharge of each well will report instantaneous and total flow (FIT-10.2 & 10.3) A three position (P-10.1 lead/auto alternate/P-10.2 lead) selector on the HMI will allow selection of a specific pump as lead, or to allow the PLC to automatically alternate lead/lag status of pumps based upon operating time. While operating on the generator, both pumps will operate as if under normal power. Technical Specifications 13400-1 Control Narrative — Rev. 0 Wednesday, December 30, 2020 2.2. Manual Control 2.2.1. Local: The two well pumps (P-10.1 and P-10.2) can be controlled manually by putting the VFD into manual using the human interface module (HIM) local to the drive. The VFD can be started and stopped and speed adjusted using the keypad on the HIM. 2.2.2. Remote: The operator shall also be able to place the motors in manual control from a motor control pop-up window that is opened when the motor is selected at SCADA. From the pop-up the operator will place the motor in hand, start and stop the motor and be able to adjust motor speed. 2.3. Auto Control 2.3.1. The two well pumps (P-10.1 and P-10.2) can be controlled automatically form the PLC by putting the VFD into auto using the (HIM) local to the drive. The PLC will control the VFDs Modbus TCP/IP communications while in auto. While in auto, the lead pump will start and ramp up/down to maintain the Aeration Tower level setpoint (operator adjustable) as indicated by LIT-30.2. If the lead motor is not able to maintain the level setpoint and is operating above 90% of gpm the lag motor will ramp in speed until tank level stabilizes. Once the setpoint is reached and maintained for a period of 30s the lag pump will decrease in speed and the lead pump will continue to maintain level. 2.3.2. LSL-30.2 & LSH-30.2will serve as secondary control measures should the level transmitter fail. If LSH-30.2 were to become true signaling a high level in the well section of the aeration tower the well pumps will be shut down until the condition clears. If LSL-30.2 were to become false signaling a low level in the well section of the aeration tank the well pumps are to turn on and fill the aeration tower to the high level shut off and throttle back to 50% (operator adjustable) When on secondary control the wells are intended to keep the aeration tower at an acceptable level for the process. The wells will continue to operate in this mode until the operator places them back on level transmitter control. The secondary control measures will only be active when the system is in auto plc control. 2.3.3. The discharge pressure transmitter PIT/PSH -10.1 will monitor the well discharge pressure and shutdown the motors should a high-pressure condition exist (95% of shutoff head for 5 seconds ). 2.3.4. When the aeration tower level (LIT-30.2) is > 1,724.90 ft (operator adjustable) the pumps will shut down to not overfill. 2.3.5. Flowmeter FIT-10.2 and FIT-10.3 will monitor individual well flows, which will be historicized and reported. 2.3.6. The sanitary lift station will be a manufacturer provided packaged system complete with proprietary control panel. The panel will be monitored by OXB-CCP for alarms over hardwired I/O. 2.4. Alarms Technical Specifications 13400-2 Control Narrative — Rev. 0 Wednesday, December 30, 2020 Alarm Field Device Setpoint Delay Notification Reset P-10.1 VFD P-10.1-VFD N/A 30 Sec HMI,Email, Text Auto Communication Fault P-10.2 VFD P-10.2-VFD N/A 30 Sec HMI, Email, Auto Communication Fault Text P-10.1 VFD Fault P-10.1-VFD N/A 30 Sec HMI, Email, Man Text P-10.2 VFD Fault P-10.2-VFD N/A 30 Sec HMI, Email, Man Text P-10.1 Fail To Start P-10.1-VFD N/A 30 Sec HMI,Email, Text Man' P-10.2 Fail To Start P-10.2-VFD N/A 30 Sec HMI,Email, Text Man' LE-30.2 Fault LE-30.2 N/A 30 Sec. HMI,Email, Text Man Aeration Tower High LIT-30.2 TBD Ft 30 Sec HMI, Email, Auto Leve12,3 Text Aeration Tower Low LIT-30.2 TBD Ft 30 Sec HMI, Email, Auto Leve12,3 Text Aeration Tower LSL-30.2 TBD 30 Sec HMI, Email, Man Secondary Low Leve12 Text Aeration Tower LSH-30.2 TBD 30 Sec HMI Man Secondary High Level2 'Fail To Start-The controller will try to restart the pump up to 3 times before setting the fail to start alarm. 21nterlock to automatically reset when tank returns to normal operating level and alarm clears. 3Alarm set points operator adjustable. 2.5. Interlocks 2.5.1. Well Pump 1 (P-10.1) Interlock Field Device P-10.1 Fail To Start P-10.1-VFD P-10.1 VFD Communication Fault P-10.1-VFD P-10.1 VFD Fault P-10.1-VFD Aeration Tower High Level Shut Off Setpoint LIT-30.2 Well Discharge High Pressure PIT-10 Aeration Tower Secondary High Level LSH-30.2 2.5.2. Well Pump 2 (P-10.2) Interlock Field Device P-10.2 Fail To Start P-10.1-VFD P-10.2 VFD Communication Fault P-10.1-VFD P-10.2 VFD Fault P-10.1-VFD Aeration Tower High Level Shut Off Setpoint LIT-30.2 Well Discharge High Pressure PIT-10 Aeration Tower Secondary High Level LSH-30.2 Technical Specifications 13400-3 Control Narrative - Rev. 0 Wednesday, December 30, 2020 3. Snake River Intake Pumps (P-20.1 And P-20.2), P&ID sheet 20 1 1 3.1. Description 3.1.1. Two vertical turbine water pumps draw water from the Snake River through intake screens that are cleaned by an existing air burst system. The two river pumps (P- 20.1 and P-20.2) are redundant and only one will run at a time. The primary pump will run continuously on VFD control based on level in Aeration Tower for adjustment of pump speed. The max flow of a single river pump is 7,600 gpm. The second pump is redundant and runs if the primary pump selected fails. A three position (P-20.1 primary/auto alternate/P-20.2 primary) selector on the HMI will allow selection of a specific pump as primary, or to allow the PLC to automatically alternate the pumps based upon operating time. While operating on the generator, only one pump will be commanded to operate, however both pumps will be wired to the genset to preserve system redundancy. 3.2. Manual Control 3.2.1. Local: The two river pumps (P-20.1 and P-20.2) can be controlled manually at the intake pump station platform by placing the HAND-OFF-AUTO into the Hand position. Once in Hand mode the operator can start the motor and adjust speed using the operators at the pump control station. 3.2.2. Remote: The operator shall also be able to place the motors in manual control from a motor control pop-up window that is opened when the motor is selected at SCADA. From the pop-up the operator will place the motor in hand, start and stop the motor and be able to adjust motor speed. 3.3. Auto Control 3.3.1. River pumps (P-20.1, P-20.2) can be controlled automatically by putting the HAND-OFF-AUTO switch on the local motor control panel into the Auto position. The PLC will control the VFDs over Modbus TCP/IP Ethernet communications while in auto. Primary pump (primary) will start and run when the Aeration Tank level (LIT-30.1) is below the level setpoint (operator adjustable). Should the primary pump fail to start or fail during operation the secondary pump will assume primary pump responsibility until the issue is resolved. 3.3.2. LSL-30.1 & LSH-30.1 will serve as secondary control measure should the level transmitter fail. If LSH-30.1 were to become true signaling a high level in the aeration tower the intake pumps will be shut down until the condition clears. If LSL-30.1 were to become false signaling a low level in the aeration tower the primary pump is to turn on and fill the aeration tower to the high level shut off and throttle back to 50% (operator adjustable) When on secondary control the intake pumps are intended to keep the aeration tower at an acceptable level for the process. The Intake pumps will continue to operate in this mode until the operator places them back on level transmitter control.. The secondary control measures will only be active when the system is in auto plc control. 3.3.3. The discharge pressure transmitter PIT/PSH -20.1 & 20.2 will monitor the pump discharge pressures and shutdown the motors should a high-pressure condition exist (95% of shutoff head for 5 seconds). Technical Specifications 13400-4 Control Narrative — Rev. 0 Wednesday, December 30, 2020 3.3.4. When the aeration tower level (LIT-30.1) is > 1,723.90 ft (operator adjustable) the pumps will shut down to not overfill. 3.3.5. When the level in the pump cans (LIT-20.2 < 1,685.50 ft. the pumps will shut down for protection. This will be disabled when in hand operation. 3.3.6. Flowmeter FIT-20.1 will monitor combined pump flow, which will be historicized and reported. 3.3.7. The level of the Snake River will be monitored, historicized and reported by LIT- 20.1. 3.3.8. The intake screens are cleaned on an operator adjustable time duration and/or pressure differential between LIT-20.1 and LIT-20.2 of 6 inches by an air burst system with a proprietary control panel. 3.4. Alarms Alarm Field Device Setpoint Delay Notification Reset P-20.1 VFD P-20.1-VFD N/A 30 Sec HMI, Email, Auto Communication Fault Text P-20.2 VFD P-20.2-VFD N/A 30 Sec HMI, Email, Auto Communication Fault Text P-20.1 VFD Fault P-20.1-VFD N/A 30 Sec HMI, Email, Man Text P-20.2 VFD Fault P-20.2-VFD N/A 30 Sec HMI, Email, Man Text P-20.1 Fail To Start P-20.1-VFD N/A 30 Sec HMI, Email, Man' Text P-20.2 Fail To Start P-20.2-VFD N/A 30 Sec HMI, Email, Man' Text P-20.1 Over Temp P-20.1-TSH N/A 30 Sec HMI, Email, Auto Text P-20.2 Over Temp P-20.2-TSH N/A 30 Sec HMI, Email, Auto Text Aeration Tower High LIT-30.1 TBD Ft 30 Sec HMI, Email, Auto Level2,3 Text Aeration Tower Low LIT-30.1 TBD Ft 30 Sec HMI, Email, Auto Level2,3 Text Aeration Tower LSL-30.1 TBD 30 Sec HMI, Email, Man Secondary Low Level2 Text Aeration Tower LSH-30.1 TBD 30 Sec HMI and Email Man Secondary High Level2 Pump 20.1 Can Low LIT-20.2 1,685.50 30 Sec HMI, Email, Auto Level2,3 Ft Text Screen Differential LIT-20.1 & 7 in H2O 30 sec HMI, Email, Auto Pressure High 20.2 Text Technical Specifications 13400-5 Control Narrative — Rev. 0 Wednesday, December 30, 2020 'Fail To Start-The controller will try to restart the pump up to 3 times before setting the fail to start alarm. zlnterlock to automatically reset when tank returns to normal operating level and alarm clears. 3Alarm set points operator adjustable. 3.5. Interlocks 3.5.1. River Pump 1 (P-20.1) Interlock Field Device P-20.1 Fail To Start P-20.1-VFD P-20.1 VFD Communication Fault P-20.1-VFD P-20.1 VFD Fault P-20.1-VFD Aeration Tower High Level Shut Off Setpoint LIT-30.1 Well Discharge High Pressure PIT-20.1 P-20.1 Overtemp P-20.1-TSH P-20.1 Local Disconnect Early Break P-20.1-DS Aeration Tower Secondary High Level LSH-30.1 Intake Pump Low Level LIT-20.2 3.5.2. River Pump 2 (P-20.2) Interlock Field Device P-20.2 Fail To Start P-20.1-VFD P-20.2 VFD Communication Fault P-20.1-VFD P-20.2 VFD Fault P-20.1-VFD Aeration Tower High Level Shut Off Setpoint LIT-30.1 Well Discharge High Pressure PIT-20.2 P-20.2 Local Disconnect Early Break P-20.2-DS Aeration Tower Secondary High Level LSH-30.1 Intake Pump Low Level LIT-20.3 4. Aeration Tower, P&ID sheet 30 1 1 4.1. Description 4.1.1. Water from the wells and/or river intake is pumped through columns within the aeration tower. The aeration tower is divided into two sections. The ground water feeds into a smaller section which supplies water for incubation and site utility water in Sorting and Spawning. The river intake pumps will supply water to the larger section of the aeration tower. The aerated water from the surface water section will supply water to the adult holding raceways and utility water in sorting and spawning. Overflow from both sections of the aeration tower will outflow to the Snake River. The level in both the surface water and ground water sections of the aeration tower will be monitored by submersible level transmitters (LIT-30.1 & 30.2). Secondary level monitoring float switches (LSH-30.1, LSL-30.1, LSH-30.2, LSL-30.2) will provide backup level alarming and motor control should either one of the level transmitters fail. Technical Specifications 13400-6 Control Narrative - Rev. 0 Wednesday, December 30, 2020 4.2. Auto Control 4.2.1. Secondary float switch level controls LSH-30.1, LSL-30.1, LSH-30.2 & LSL-30.2 will monitor tank level in the case one of the level transmitters should fail. 4.2.2. See sections 2 & 3. 4.2.3. Supply piping from river intake and wells above the tower's grating shall be provided with heat trace that will be monitored for fault (HT-30.1-30.16. 4.3. Alarms Alarm Field device Setpoint Delay Notification Reset Aeration Tower low LIT-30.1 TBD ft 30 sec HMI, Email, Auto level alarm',2 Text Aeration Tower high LIT-101 TBD ft 30 sec HMI, Email, Auto level alarm',2 Text Aeration Tower LSH-30.1 & TBD 30 sec HMI and email Auto Secondary High Level LSH-30.2 Aeration Tower LSL-30.1 & TBD 30 sec HMI and email Auto Secondary Low Level LSL-30.2 Heat Trace Fault HT-30.1 thru N/A 30 sec HMI and email Auto 30.6 'alarm to automatically reset when tower returns to normal operating level and alarm clears. 2tower level alarm set points operator adjustable. 5. Adult Holding Raceways, P&ID sheet 140 1 5.1. Description 5.1.1. Aerated water will gravity feed through the adult holding raceways and will outfall to the Snake River. Manual weirs on each of the outlets from the aeration tower will be adjusted by the operator to set the flow to the raceways. Each raceway will be provided with individual crowding platforms and motor operated gates (G-40.1 —40.6) to allow operators to crowd fish into other raceways or to sorting as required. Each raceway is provided with an ultrasonic level transmitter (LIT-40.1 — 40.6)which will be displayed at the HMI. 5.2. Manual Control 5.2.1. Gates G-40.1 — G-40.6: 5.2.1.1. Locally: The raceway gates can be operated locally at the gate motor by placing the Local Off Remote switch into the local position and pressing the Open/close buttons. 5.2.1.2. Remote Operation: The raceway gate can be operated remotely from the HMI by selecting the desired gate and selecting open or close from the pop-up window. Additionally, operators will be able to operate the gates from the crowders via the remote gate control pushbuttons on the crowder local control panel. When operating from the platform only the gate corresponding to that raceway shall be controllable from the crowder platform. Technical Specifications 13400-7 Control Narrative — Rev. 0 Wednesday, December 30, 2020 5.2.2. Fish Crowders: 5.2.2.1. Locally: The fish crowders (CRD-40.1 — CRD-40.8) can be operated manually from the local control station at each crowder. From the local control station, the operator shall be able to move the crowder forward and back, raise and lower the vertical frame and rotate the fence up and down. Operators shall also be able to operate the corresponding raceways gate through raceway area LAN. 5.2.2.2. Remote Operation: The cross-channel crowders (CRD-40.7 — CRD-40.8) can also be operated remotely from local control panel SIB-LCP at the sorting building by placing the local/off/remote selector switch at the crowder in remote position. From the manual operators at SB-LCP the operator shall be able to move the crowder forward and back, raise and lower the vertical frame and rotate the fence up and down. Operators shall also be able to operate gate 50.1 to allow fish access to the EA basket. These operations also be done at the HMI by placing the Local Off Remote interface on the pop-up window in the local position and pressing the corresponding buttons. 5.2.2.3. The crowder cross channel and weir will be monitored by three separate cameras that will provide operators a closer look at the channel. A screen adjacent to the 2nd story viewing window and SIB-LCP will show all three camera views. 5.2.3. Auto Control 5.2.4. N/A 5.2.5. Alarms Alarm Field Device Setpoint Delay Notification Reset Raceway Low Level',2, LIT-40.1 — TBD Ft 30 Sec HMI And Email Auto 3 40.6 Raceway High LIT-40.1 — TBD Ft 30 Sec HMI And Email Auto Level',2,3 40.6 Raceway Inlet Gate G-40.1 — G- N/A 30 Sec HMI And Email Auto Failed to O erate3 40.6 'Alarm to automatically reset when raceway returns to normal operating level and alarm clears. 2Raceway level alarm set points operator adjustable. 3Typical of all adult holding raceways 6. False Weir (V-40.1 & 40.2), PID sheet 40 11 6.1. The false weir will provide water flow at the head of the cross crowder channel to attract fish for sorting and spawning. The weir consists of two valves; one provides water to the weir and the other to the EA basket floor. The two valves will operate inversely of one another but not in equal percentages of open/close when the weir is either on or off. A weir setpoint pop up shall be provided to allow operators to adjust the position of valves to obtain the desired flow. Technical Specifications 13400-8 Control Narrative — Rev. 0 Wednesday, December 30, 2020 6.1.1. Local Operation: The valves can be operated manually by placing the Local-OFF- Remote switch on the actuator in the local position and pressing the open/close pushbuttons. 6.1.2. Remote Operation: The Weir can be activated by placing the weir on/off selector switch in the On position. When turned on valves V-40.1 & 40.2 will modulate to position (operator adjustable). Once set at the desired flow rates the HMI will retain those values and return the valves to the same position until modified for when the weir is on and off respectively. 6.1.3. Auto Operation: The PLC will automatically adjust valve position when the weir is either on or off to the setpoints entered on the weir setpoints HMI screen. 6.1.4. Alarms Alarm Field device Setpoint Delay Notification Reset Floor Diffuser Valve V-40.1 N/A 15 sec HMI, Email Man Failed to operated2 False Weir Valve V-40.2 N/A 15 sec HMI, Email Man Failed too erate,2 'Fail To Operate—The controller will try to position the valve up to 3 times before setting the fail to operate alarm. 7. Brail (BRL-M-1, BRL-M-VFD, BRL-ZS-1, BRL-ZS-2), P&ID sheet 501 1 7.1. The brail will allow operators to lift fish from the crowder into the EA basket for processing. 7.1.1. Manual Operation: The brail will be controlled from the raise/lower selector switch located at the operator control station SB-LCP. When the selector switch is placed in the raise or lower position respectively the VFD (BRL-M-VFD) operate the brail to the desired position until the limit switch for the desired position (BRL-ZS-1, BRL-ZS-2) is activated. Lights on the SB-LCP will indicate position. 7.1.2. Remote Operation: The HMI shall indicate brail position and motor run status. The HMI shall also include a pop-up to control the brail manually from the HMI. 7.1.3. Auto Operation: The brail operation is a completely manual operation; however, the PLC will monitor the VFD through Modbus TCP/IP communications. The HMI shall indicate brail position, motor run status and any associated alarms. 7.1.4. Alarms Alarm Field device Setpoint Delay Notification Reset Brail VFD BRL-M-VFD N/A 30 Sec HMI, Email Auto Communication Fault BRL-M-VFD Fault BRL-M-VFD N/A 30 Sec HMI, Email, Man Text 'Fail To Operate—The controller will try to operate the motor up to 3 times before setting the fail to operate alarm. 8. Slide Gate (G-50.1), PID 50 1 1 8.1. The slide gate will be opened/closed to allow fish access to the EA basket. Technical Specifications 13400-9 Control Narrative — Rev. 0 Wednesday, December 30, 2020 8.1.1. Manual Operation: Operators will open/close the gate by placing the selector switch at the operator console SB-LCP into the desired position. Local indication lights will provide feedback of gate position status. 8.1.2. Remote Operation: Operators can also operate the gate from the HMI and from the cross crowder channels. 8.1.3. Auto Operation: N/A 8.1.4. Alarms Alarm Field device Setpoint Delay Notification Reset Slide Gate Failed to G-50.1 N/A 15 sec HMI, Email Man operate,' 'Fail To Operate—The controller will try to position the gate up to 3 times before setting the fail to operate alarm. 9. Electroanesthesia Basket (EA BASKET, FBE-M-1, FBE-ZS-1 & 2), PID sheet 50 12 9.1. The EA basket will prepare fish for processing. The EA process will be controlled from a proprietary control panel. A hardwired output is provided from the manufacturer control panel to control panel SB-RIO for an alarm condition. Once the EA process has been completed the basket will lift fish to the 2nd floor of the Sorting Building for further processing. 9.1.1. Manual Operation: The electroanesthesia process is a manual procedure that will be controlled by the manufacturer provided control panel. The basket lift will be operated from the raise/lower selector switch located at the operator control station SB-LCP. When the selector switch is placed in the raise or lower position respectively the VFD (FBE-M-VFD) will operate the elevator to the desired position until the limit switch for the desired position (BRL-ZS-1, BRL-ZS-2) is activated. When in the desired position the brake will engage to hold the elevator in position. Lights on the SB-LCP will indicate basket position. 9.1.2. Remote Operation: The HMI shall indicate basket position and motor run status. The HMI shall also include a pop-up to control the basket lift manually from the HMI. 9.1.3. Auto Operation: The EA process is a completely manual operation; however, the PLC will monitor the VFD through Modbus TCP/IP communications. The HMI shall indicate brail position, motor run status and any associated alarms. 9.1.4. Lights IND-50.1 will provide basket raised/lowered indication for operators in the first floor of the sorting building 9.1.5. Alarms Alarm Field device Setpoint Delay Notification Reset Lift Basket VFD FBE-M-VFD N/A 30 Sec HMI, Email Auto Communication Fault BRL-M-VFD Fault FBE-M-VFD N/A 30 Sec HMI, Email, Man Text EA Basket Fault EA Basket mfr. N/A 10 sec HMI, Email Man panel 'Fail To Operate—The controller will try to operate the motor up to 3 times before setting the fail to operate alarm. Technical Specifications 13400-10 Control Narrative — Rev. 0 Wednesday, December 30, 2020 10. Female and Male Holding Tanks (FHT-1, MHT-1), PID Sheet 50 1 1 10.1.1. Fish will be placed in gender specific holding tanks with motor operated false floors. Water to the holding tanks will be sourced from either the surface water supply or ground water supply. The source selection will be determined by the Operator by manually operating hand valves V-50.7. 50.8, 50.16 & 15. 10.1.2. Manual Control: The holding tank floors will be controlled from the raise/lower selector switch located at the operator control station SB-LCP. When the selector switch doe either tank is placed in the raise or lower position respectively the VFD (MHT-M-VFD or FHT-M-VFD) operate the floor to the desired position until the limit switch for the desired position (MHT-ZS-1 & 2, FHT-ZS-1 & 2) is activated. Lights on the SB-LCP will indicate position for each tank. 10.1.3. Remote Operation: The HMI shall indicate tank floor position and motor run status. The HMI shall also include a pop-up to control the holding tank floors manually from the HMI. 10.1.4. Auto Operation: Holding Tank floor operation is a completely manual operation, however, the PLC will monitor the VFD through Modbus TCP/IP communications. The HMI shall indicate position, motor run status and any associated alarms. 10.1.5. Alarms Alarm Field device Setpoint Delay Notification Reset Male holding tank MHT-M-VFD N/A 30 Sec HMI, Email Auto VFD Communication Fault Male holding tank MHT-M-VFD N/A 30 Sec HMI, Email, Man Fault Text Female holding tank FHT-M-VFD N/A 30 Sec HMI, Email Auto VFD Communication Fault Female holding tank FHT-M-VFD N/A 30 Sec HMI, Email, Man Fault I I I Text 'Fail To Operate—The controller will try to operate the motor up to 3 times before setting the fail to operate alarm. 11. Utility Ground Water Pumps (P-50.1 — P-50.2) 11.1. Description: Pump P-50.1 & 50.2 will provide utility water from the ground water section of Aeration Tower AER-30,1. Ground water will be supplied to the holding tanks within the sorting building, truck fill station and site hose bibs. The two pumps (P-50.1 and P-50.2) are duty/standby and only one will run at a time continuously on VFD control to maintain the pressure setpoint of 130 psi (Operator Adjustable) as reported by PIT-50.1, TNK 50.1 is a pressurized vessel to mitigate pressure surges when upsets occur. 11.2. Manual Control 11.2.1. Local: Pumps (P-50.1 and P-50.2) can be controlled manually through the keypad mounted to the front of the VFD enclosure. Once in Hand mode the operator can start the motor and adjust speed using the operators at the pump control station. Technical Specifications 13400-11 Control Narrative — Rev. 0 Wednesday, December 30, 2020 11.2.2. Remote: The operator shall also be able to place the motors in manual control from a motor control pop-up window that is opened when the motor is selected at SCADA. From the pop-up the operator will place the motor in hand, start and stop the motor and be able to adjust motor speed. 11.3. Auto Control 11.3.1. P-50.1 & P-50.2 can be controlled automatically by putting the VFD in auto mode on the keypad mounted to the front of the enclosure. The PLC will control the VFDs over Modbus TCP/IP Ethernet communications while in auto. Primary pump (primary) will start and run when the pressure (PIT-50.1) is below the setpoint (operator adjustable). Should the primary pump fail to start or fail during operation the secondary pump will assume primary pump responsibility until the issue is resolved. 11.3.2. If pump discharge pressure exceeds high pressure setpoint 160 psi (operator adjustable) the pumps will be disabled until the pressure reaches system target pressure setpoint and proceed under normal operation. 11.3.3. If aeration tank level (LIT-30.2 or LSL 30.2) should fall below the operator adjustable low level setpoint the pumps shall shutdown for protection. Once the low-level interlock condition is cleared the pumps should proceed with normal operation. 11.4. Alarms Alarm Field Device Setpoint Delay Notification Reset P-50.1 VFD P-50.1-VFD N/A 30 Sec HMI, Email, Auto Communication Fault Text P-50.2 VFD P-50.2-VFD N/A 30 Sec HMI, Email, Auto Communication Fault Text P-50.1 VFD Fault P-50.1-VFD N/A 30 Sec HMI, Email, Man Text P-50.2 VFD Fault P-50.2-VFD N/A 30 Sec HMI, Email, Man Text P-50.1 Fail To Start P-50.1-VFD N/A 30 Sec HMI, Email, Man' Text P-50.2 Fail To Start P-50.2-VFD N/A 30 Sec HMI, Email, Man' Text Utility High Pressure PIT-50.1 150 psi 15 sec HMI, Email, Auto Text Aeration Tower Low LIT-30.2 TBD Ft 30 Sec HMI, Email, Auto Level2,3 Text Aeration Tower LSL-30.2 TBD 30 Sec HMI, Email, Man Secondary Low Leve12 Text 'Fail To Start—The controller will try to restart the pump up to 3 times before setting the fail to start alarm. 21nterlock to automatically reset when tank returns to normal operating level and alarm clears. 3Alarm set points operator adjustable. 11.5. Interlocks Interlock Field Device Technical Specifications 13400-12 Control Narrative — Rev. 0 Wednesday, December 30, 2020 P-50.1 Fail To Start P-50.1-VFD P-50.1 VFD Communication Fault P-50.1-VFD P-50.1 VFD Fault P-50.1-VFD P-50.2 Fail To Start P-50.2-VFD P-50.2 VFD Communication Fault P-50.2-VFD P-50.2 VFD Fault P-50.2-VFD Aeration Tank low level LIT-30.2 Aeration Tank low level LSL-30.2 12. Utility Surface Water Pumps (P-50.3— P-50.4) 12.1. Description: Pump P-50.3 & 50.34 will provide utility water from the surface water section of Aeration Tower AER-30,1. Surafce water will be supplied to the holding tanks within the sorting building, truck fill station, site hose bibs and fish transfer tubers/sorting table. The two pumps (P-50.1 and P-50.2) are lead/lag and will ramp motor speeds up/down continuously on VFD control to maintain the pressure setpoint of 35 psi (Operator Adjustable) as reported by PIT-50.2, TNK 50.2 is a pressurized vessel to mitigate pressure surges when upsets occur. 12.2. Manual Control 12.2.1. Local: Pumps (P-50.3 and P-50.4) can be controlled manually through the keypad mounted to the front of the VFD enclosure. Once in Hand mode the operator can start the motor and adjust speed using the operators at the pump control station. 12.2.2. Remote: The operator shall also be able to place the motors in manual control from a motor control pop-up window that is opened when the motor is selected at SCADA. From the pop-up the operator will place the motor in hand, start and stop the motor and be able to adjust motor speed. 12.3. Auto Control 12.3.1. The two well pumps (P-50.3 and P-50.4) can be controlled automatically form the PLC by putting the VFD into auto using the (HIM) local to the drive. The PLC will control the VFDs Modbus TCP/IP communications while in auto. While in auto, the lead pump will start and ramp up/down to maintain the pressure setpoint (operator adjustable) as indicated by PIT-50.2. If the lead motor is not able to maintain the level setpoint and is operating at 90% of speed the lag motor will ramp in speed and the lead will decrease in speed to match until the pressure stabilizes. Once the setpoint is reached and maintained until the lag pump minimum speed setpoint is reached (operator adjustable). Once reached the lag pump will decrease in speed and the lead pump will continue to maintain level. 12.3.2. If pump discharge pressure exceeds high pressure setpoint 60 psi (operator adjustable) the pumps will be disabled until the pressure reaches system target pressure setpoint and proceed under normal operation. 12.3.3. If aeration tank level (LIT-30.1 or LSL 30.1) should fall below the operator adjustable low level setpoint the pumps shall shutdown for protection. Once the low-level interlock condition is cleared the pumps should proceed with normal operation. 12.4. Alarms Alarm Field Device Setpoint Delay Notification Reset P-50.3 VFD P-50.1-VFD N/A 30 Sec HMI, Email, Auto Communication Fault Text Technical Specifications 13400-13 Control Narrative — Rev. 0 Wednesday, December 30, 2020 P-50.3 VFD P-50.2-VFD N/A 30 Sec HMI, Email, Auto Communication Fault Text P-50.3 VFD Fault P-50.1-VFD N/A 30 Sec HMI, Email, Man Text P-50.4 VFD Fault P-50.2-VFD N/A 30 Sec HMI, Email, Man Text P-50.3 Fail To Start P-50.1-VFD N/A 30 Sec HMI, Email, Man' Text P-50.4 Fail To Start P-50.2-VFD N/A 30 Sec HMI, Email, Man' Text Utility High Pressure PIT-50.2 60 psi 15 sec HMI, Email, Auto Text Aeration Tower Low LIT-30.1 TBD Ft 30 Sec HMI, Email, Auto Leve12,3 Text Aeration Tower LSL-30.1 TBD 30 Sec HMI, Email, Man Secondary Low Leve12 Text 'Fail To Start-The controller will try to restart the pump up to 3 times before setting the fail to start alarm. 21nterlock to automatically reset when tank returns to normal operating level and alarm clears. 3Alarm set points operator adjustable. 12.5. Interlocks Interlock Field Device P-50.3 Fail To Start P-50.3-VFD P-50.3 VFD Communication Fault P-50.3-VFD P-50.3 VFD Fault P-50.3-VFD P-50.3 Fail To Start P-50.4-VFD P-50.3 VFD Communication Fault P-50.4-VFD P-50.3 VFD Fault P-50.4-VFD Aeration Tank low level LIT-30.1 Aeration Tank low level LSL-30.1 13. Ground Chilled Water Supply Pumps (P-60.1 & P-60.2), P&ID sheet 60 1 1, 60 12 & 60 13 13.1. Description: The temperature of water supply to Incubation is maintained at a constant temperature by continuously pumping water through a chilled water heat exchanger. The two pumps (P-60.1 and P-60.2) are duty/standby and only one will run one at a time. One of them will run continuously on VFD control based on the ground chilled water supply level setpoint (operator adjustable) indicated by LIT-60.1 at the incubation overflow box for adjustment of pump speed. The second pump is redundant and runs if the primary pump selected fails. A three position (P-60.1 primary/auto alternate/P-60.2 primary) selector on the HMI will allow selection of a specific pump as primary, or to allow the PLC to automatically alternate the pumps based upon operating time. 13.1.1. TIT-60.1 will monitor water temperature at the inlet of the ground chilled water heat exchanger and TIT-60.2 will monitor water temperature at the outlet of the ground chilled water heat exchanger. Both will be displayed on the HMI and Technical Specifications 13400-14 Control Narrative - Rev. 0 Wednesday, December 30, 2020 included in the historical database. The chilled ground water outlet temperature to Incubation is maintained by modulating the three way valve on the 350 glycol chilled water system to the heat exchanger. 13.1.2. Flowmeter FIT-60.1 shall display system flow at the HMI and will be entered into the historical database. 13.1.3. While operating on the generator, only one of the chilled water supply pumps will be commanded to operate, however both pumps will be wired to the genset to preserve system redundancy. 13.1.4. TIT-60.11 & 10 will display temperature at incubation for alarming and historical database. 13.1.5. LIT-60.1 will display level in the overflow box and provide the process variable for ramping the p-60.1 & 60.2 duty pump. 13.1.6. LSH-60.1 will provide secondary level high level indication on the overflow box should the transmitter fail to read. 13.1.7. LSL-60.2 de secondary low level indication on the overflow box should the transmitter fail to read. 13.2. Manual Control 13.2.1. Local: N/A 13.2.2. Remote: The operator shall also be able to place the motors in manual control from a motor control pop-up window that is opened when the motor is selected at the HMI. From the pop-up the operator will place the motor in hand, start and stop the motor and be able to adjust motor speed. 13.2.3. Each of the pumps can be isolated by operating the hand valves on the suction and discharge side of the pumps. 13.2.4. The chilled water cooler can be isolated by closing the hand valves on pump discharge and at the discharge side of the cooler. 13.3. Auto Control 13.3.1. Chilled water supply pumps (P-60.1, P-60.2) can be controlled automatically by putting the HAND-OFF-AUTO switch at the local control station into the AUTO position. The PLC will control the VFDs over Modbus TCP/IP Ethernet communications while in auto. Primary pump (primary) will start and increase/decrease the speed of the primary pump based on the level setpoint of the overflow box 2' (operator adjustable), indicated by LIT-60.1. When either of the ground chilled water supply pumps (P-60.1 and P-60.2) are commanded to run, the start-up sequence for the chiller (CH-1), chilled water pumps (P-60.3 and P-60.4), and condenser water pumps (P-60.5 and P-60.6) shall be enabled and run. 13.3.2. LSH-60.1 will monitor the overflow box for high level as a secondary control measure if the level transmitter were to fail. Should a high level occur the PLC will shutdown pumps P-60.1 & 60.2. Duty pump will restart when the condition is removed. Technical Specifications 13400-15 Control Narrative — Rev. 0 Wednesday, December 30, 2020 13.3.3. LSL-60.1 will monitor the overflow box for low level as a secondary control measure if the level transmitter were to fail. Should a low level occur the PLC will ramp up the selected duty pump of pumps P-60.1 & 60.2 to 100% speed and the pumps will be controlled from the secondary level switches until the level transmitter signal is verified by the operator. 13.3.4. FIT-60.1 will monitor pump flows and an alarm at the HMI will be generated should the flow go out of range while a pump is called to run. 13.3.5. Pump runtime is balanced based upon automatic alternating of the primary pump based upon time (operator selected), initially set for weekly alternation. 13.3.6. The backup pump will start if the primary pump fails to operate or faults and will then run as the primary pump. 13.3.7. If a low level were to occur in the Aeration Tank (LIT-30.1) the primary pump will shutdown for protection. 13.4. Alarms Alarm Field Device Setpoint Delay Notification Reset P-60.1 VFD P-60.1-VFD N/A 30 Sec HMI, Email, Auto Communication Fault Text Alarm P-60.2 VFD P-60.2-VFD N/A 30 Sec HMI, Email, Auto Communication Fault Text Alarm P-60.1 VFD Fault P-101-VFD N/A 30 Sec HMI, Email, Man Alarm Text P-60.2 VFD Fault P-102-VFD N/A 30 Sec HMI, Email, Man Alarm Text P-60.1 Fail To Start P-101-VFD N/A 30 Sec HMI, Email, Man' Alarm3 Text P-60.2 Fail To Start P-102-VFD N/A 30 Sec HMI, Email, Man' Alarm3 Text Chilled Water Supply FIT-60.1 TBD 30 Sec HMI, Email, Auto Low Flow Alarm2 Text Chilled Water Supply TIT-60.2 10OF > 30 Sec HMI, Email, Auto Temp High Alarm2 Temp Text Setpoint Chilled Water Supply TIT-60.2 10OF < 30 Sec HMI, Email, Auto Temp Low Alarm2 Temp Text Setpoint Incubation Overflow LIT-60.1 2.3 ft 15 Sec HMI, Email, Auto Box High level Alarm2 Text Incubation Overflow LSH-60.1 N/A 10 Sec HMI, Email, Auto Box Secondary High- Text Level Alarm Technical Specifications 13400-16 Control Narrative — Rev. 0 Wednesday, December 30, 2020 Incubation Overflow LSL-60.1 N/A 10 Sec HMI, Email, Auto Box Secondary Low- Text Level Alarm 'Fail To Start—the controller will try to restart the pump up to 3 times before setting the fail to start alarm. 2Level alarm set points operator adjustable. 13.5. Interlocks While operating on the generator, only one chilled water pump will be commanded to operate, however both pump will be wired to the genset to preserve system redundancy. Interlock Field Device P-60.1 Fail To Start P-60.1-VFD P-60.1 VFD Communication Fault P-60.1-VFD P-60.1 VFD Fault P-60.1-VFD P-60.2 Fail To Start P-60.2-VFD P-60.2 VFD Communication Fault P-60.2-VFD P-60.2 VFD Fault P-60.2-VFD Overflow Box High Level LIT-60.1 Overflow Box Secondary High Level LSH-60.1 Aeration Tank Low Level Shut Off Setpoint LIT-30.1 Aeration Tank Secondary Low Level LSL-30.1 Chiller Fault/ No flow Chiller Control Panel 14. Chilled Water Loop Pumps (P-60.3 & P-60.4), P&ID sheet 60 12 14.1. Description 14.1.1. The temperature of water supply to Incubation and Utility is maintained at a constant temperature by a continuous chilled water loop passing through the heat exchanger. A 3-way valve on the glycol chilled water 35°F loop will modulate to bypass heat exchanger glycol chilled as required to maintain ground chilled water outlet temperature to Incubation. The two chilled water loop pumps (P-60.3 and P- 60.4) are redundant and only one will run at a time. The primary pump will run continuously. The second pump is redundant and runs if the primary pump selected fails. A three position (P-60.3 primary/auto alternate/P-60.4 primary) selector on the HMI will allow selection of a specific pump as primary, or to allow the PLC to automatically alternate the pumps based upon operating time. When either of the ground chilled water supply pumps (P-60.1 and P-60.2) are commanded to run, the start-up sequence for the chiller (CH-1), chilled water pumps (P-60.3 and P-60.4), and condenser water pumps (P-60.5 and P-60.6) shall be enabled and run. 14.1.2. TIT-60.3 will monitor chilled water supply temperature at the inlet of the heat exchanger and TIT-60.4 will monitor the chilled water return temperature. Both will be displayed on the HMI and included in the historical database. 14.1.3. While operating on the generator, only one of the chilled water loop pumps will be commanded to operate, however both pumps will be wired to the genset to preserve system redundancy. Technical Specifications 13400-17 Control Narrative — Rev. 0 Wednesday, December 30, 2020 14.2. Manual Control 14.2.1. Local: The chilled water loop pumps (P-60.3 and P-60.4) can be controlled manually at the motor starter panel of the pump by placing the HAND-OFF-AUTO into the Hand position. Once in Hand mode the operator can start the motor and adjust speed using the operators at the pump control station. 14.2.2. Remote: The operator shall also be able to place the motors in manual control from a motor control pop-up window that is opened when the motor is selected at the HMI. From the pop-up the operator will place the motor in hand, start and stop the motor and be able to adjust motor speed. 14.2.3. Each of the pumps can be isolated by operating the hand valves on the suction and discharge side of the pumps. 14.2.4. The heat exchanger can be isolated by closing the hand valves on pump discharge and at the discharge side of the cooler. 14.3. Auto Control 14.3.1. Glycol chilled water loop pumps (P-60.3, P-60.4) can be controlled automatically by putting the HAND-OFF-AUTO switch at the motor starter panel into the AUTO position. The PLC will control the VFDs over hardwired controls while in auto. When either of the ground chilled water supply pumps (P-60.1 and P-60.2) are commanded to run, the start-up sequence for the chiller (CH-1), chilled water pumps (P-60.3 and P-60.4), and condenser water pumps (P-60.5 and P-60.6) shall be enabled and run. 14.3.2. Pump runtime is balanced based upon automatic alternating of the primary pump based upon time (operator selected), initially set for weekly alternation. 14.3.3. The backup pump will start if the primary pump fails to operate or faults and will then run as the primary pump. 14.4. Alarms Alarm Field Device Setpoint Delay Notification Reset P-60.3 Fault P-60.3-MS N/A 30 Sec HMI, Email, Man Text P-60.4 Fault P-60.4-MS N/A 30 Sec HMI, Email, Man Text P-60.3 Fail To Start P-60.3-MS N/A 30 Sec HMI, Email, Man' Alarm3 Text P-60.4 Fail To Start P-60.4-MS N/A 30 Sec HMI, Email, Man' Alarm3 Text Chilled Water Loop TIT-60.4 10OF > 30 Sec HMI, Email, Auto Temp High Alarm,2 Temp Text Set point Technical Specifications 13400-18 Control Narrative — Rev. 0 Wednesday, December 30, 2020 Chilled Water Loop TIT-60.4 10OF < 30 Sec HMI, Email, Auto Temp Low Alarm,2 Temp Text Setpoint Chilled Water Loop Chiller N/A 10 sec HMI, Email, Man Low Flow Alarm Control Text Panel 'Fail To Start—the controller will try to restart the pump up to 3 times before setting the fail to start alarm. 2Alarm set points operator adjustable. 14.5. Interlocks While operating on the generator, only one chilled water loop pump will be commanded to operate, however both pump will be wired to the genset to preserve system redundancy. 15. Condenser Water Loop Pumps (P-60.5 & P-60.6), P&ID sheet 60 12 & 60 13 15.1. Description 15.1.1. The temperature of chiller condenser water supply to Chiller (CH-1) maintained at a constant temperature 60OF (adj) by a 2-way valve and ground water blending water loop. The 2-way valve shall modulate open and closed to maintain incoming loop water temperature. On chiller start-up, 2-way valve shall be in full recirculation position until condenser water loop temperature reaches set point. The two condenser water loop pumps (P-60.5 and P-60.6) are redundant and only one will run at a time. The primary pump will run continuously at constant speed. The second pump is redundant and runs if the primary pump selected fails. A three position (P-60.5 primary/auto alternate/P-60.6 primary) selector on the HMI will allow selection of a specific pump as primary, or to allow the PLC to automatically alternate the pumps based upon operating time. 15.1.2. TIT-60.9 will monitor condenser water supply temperature at the inlet of the chiller and TIT-60.6 will monitor the condenser water return temperature. Both will be displayed on the HMI and included in the historical database. 15.1.3. While operating on the generator, only one of the condenser water loop pumps will be commanded to operate, however both pumps will be wired to the genset to preserve system redundancy. 15.2. Manual Control 15.2.1. Local: The condenser water loop pumps (P-60.5 and P-60.6) can be controlled manually at the control station local to the pump by placing the HAND-OFF-AUTO on the front of the motor starter into the Hand position and pushing the start/stop buttons respectively. 15.2.2. Remote: The operator shall also be able to place the motors in manual control from a motor control pop-up window that is opened when the motor is selected at the HMI. From the pop-up the operator will place the motor in hand and start/stop the motor. 15.2.3. Each of the pumps can be isolated by operating the hand valves on the suction and discharge side of the pumps. Technical Specifications 13400-19 Control Narrative — Rev. 0 Wednesday, December 30, 2020 15.2.4. The heat exchanger can be isolated by closing the hand valves on pump discharge and at the discharge side of the cooler. 15.3. Auto Control 15.3.1. Condenser water loop pumps (P-60.5, P-60.6) can be controlled automatically by putting the HAND-OFF-AUTO switch at the local control station into the auto position. 15.3.2. Pump runtime is balanced based upon automatic alternating of the primary pump based upon time (operator selected), initially set for weekly alternation. 15.3.3. The backup pump will start if the primary pump fails to operate or faults and will then run as the primary pump. 15.4. Alarms Alarm Field Device Setpoint Delay Notification Reset P-60.5 Fail To Start P-60.5-MS N/A 30 Sec HMI, Email, Man' Alarm3 Text P-60.6 Fail To Start P-60.6-MS N/A 30 Sec HMI, Email, Man' Alarm3 Text P-60.5 Fault P-60.5-MS N/A 15 Sec HMI, Email, Man' Text P-60.6 Fault P-60.6-MS N/A 15 Sec HMI, Email, Man' Text Condenser Water TIT-60.4 10OF > 30 Sec HMI, Email, Auto Loop Temp High Temp Text Alarm,2 Setpoint Condenser Water TIT-60.4 10OF < 30 Sec HMI, Email, Auto Loop Temp Low Temp Text Alarm,2 Setpoint 'Fail To Start—the controller will try to restart the pump up to 3 times before setting the fail to start alarm. 2Alarm set points operator adjustable. 15.5. Interlocks While operating on the generator, only one condenser water loop pump will be commanded to operate, however both pump will be wired to the genset to preserve system redundancy. 16. Chiller, P&ID sheet 60 1 1, 60 12 & 60 13 16.1. Description 16.1.1. The refrigerated chiller will be provided as a single manufactured unit with a manufacturer provided control panel and local HMI. The hatchery control system will communicate with the chiller control panel over Modbus TCP/IP communications allowing the hatchery control system to monitor chiller statuses and alarms. The hatchery control system will provide the chiller with the chilled Technical Specifications 13400-20 Control Narrative — Rev. 0 Wednesday, December 30, 2020 water supply temperature setpoint as indicated by TIT-60.2. The setpoint shall be operator adjustable and the chiller shall automatically regulate to achieve the temperature setpoint of the water after it passes through the water cooler. 16.2. Alarms Alarm Field Device Setpoint Delay Notification Reset Chiller Chiller N/A 30 Sec HMI, Email, Auto Communication Control Text Failure Alarm Panel Chiller Start/Stop Chiller N/A 30 Sec HMI, Email, Auto Fault Control Text Panel Chiller Condenser low Chiller N/A 30 Sec HMI, Email, Auto water flow alarm Control Text Panel Chiller Chilled water Chiller N/A 30 Sec HMI, Email, Auto Evaporator low flow Control Text alarm Panel Chiller low refrigerant Chiller N/A N/A HMI, Email, Auto pressure alarm Control Text Panel Chiller vibration alarm Chiller N/A N/A HMI, Email, Auto Control Text Panel Glycol Feed tank low Glycol Feed N/A N/A HMI, Email, Auto level alarm Tank Text Chiller emergency Chiller N/A N/A HMI, Email, Auto shut down and alarm Control Text Panel Chilled Water Supply TIT-60.3 10OF > 30 Sec HMI, Email, Auto Temp High Alarm' Temp Text Setpoint Chilled Water Supply TIT-60.3 10OF < 30 Sec HMI, Email, Auto Temp Low Alarm' Temp Text Setpoint Condenser Water TIT-60.9 10OF < 30 Sec HMI, Email, Auto Supply Temp High Temp Text Alarm' Setpoint Condenser Water TIT-60.9 10OF < 30 Sec HMI, Email, Auto Supply Temp Low Temp Text Alarm' Setpoint 'Alarm set points operator adjustable. 17. Back-up Generator 17.1. Description 17.1.1. The back-up generator will provide emergency back-up power to the hatchery should a power failure occur. The generator will be provided as a complete Technical Specifications 13400-21 Control Narrative — Rev. 0 Wednesday, December 30, 2020 manufactured unit with a manufacturer provided control panel and HMI. The generator control panel will be provided with landing points for monitoring by the Owners SCADA system. 17.2. Manual Control 17.2.1. The operator can operate and exercise the generator locally through the manufacturer provided local controls. 17.3. Auto Control 17.3.1. The generator shall be provided with an automatic transfer switch that will provide automatic switchover to emergency power should a loss of utility power occur. 17.4. Ventilation Control 17.4.1. Generator room damper actuators are to be fast acting, spring return to open, and power to close. On loss of power, spring return in actuator shall open air INLET and generator radiator EXHAUST dampers to a fail safe operation position. Damper operation shall be integrated with both Manual Control and Auto Control functions. 17.4.2. Provide limit switches on INLET and EXHAUST air dampers for proof positive indication of position. 17.4.3. Room heating recirculation damper located in Generator radiator exhaust shall modulate slowly open and closed to maintain space minimum temperature via wall mounted temperature sensor. Room set point shall be 50°F (adj). 17.5. Alarms Alarm Field Device Setpoint Delay Notification Reset Loss of Utility Power ATS N/A 30 Sec HMI, Email, Auto Text Generator Fault Generator N/A 30 Sec HMI, Email, Auto Control Text Panel Damper Failure Limit Switch N/A None HMI, Email, Manual Text Day Tank Low Fuel Generator N/A None HMI, Email, Manual Control Text Panel Room High Building 950F None HMI, Email, Auto Temperature Controls Text Room Low Building 40OF None HMI, Email, Auto Temperature Controls Text 18. Refrigeration Room Monitoring, P&ID sheet 60 14 18.1. Description 18.1.1. Per Oregon Mechanical Specialty Code, Section 1105.3: Refrigeration equipment rooms require a refrigerant detector located in the refrigeration equipment room in an area where refrigerant from a leak will concentrate, set to alarm Technical Specifications 13400-22 Control Narrative — Rev. 0 Wednesday, December 30, 2020 and start the ventilation system when the level reaches the refrigerant's toxicity level (for R-134a OEL = 1000). The alarm shall annunciate both visual and audible alarms inside the refrigerating machinery room and outside each entrance to the refrigerating machine room. The alarm shall be of the manual reset type with the reset located inside the refrigeration equipment room. 18.1.2. Emergency shutdown of the refrigeration equipment shall be provided immediately outside the machinery room door. 18.1.3. Emergency fan circuit shall fail open. 18.1.4. The ventilation system will be controlled as follows: a. Minimum ventilation rate of 290 cfm (continuous) shall be maintain via EF-5. b. Heat rise T-stat (TE-60.1) will start EF-6 and stop EF-5. EF-6 (1475 cfm) shall remain in operation until temperature falls below room setpoint of 85 OF. c. If a refrigerant leak is detected, start EF-6 and stop EF-5. EF-6 (1475 cfm) shall remain in operation until leak is either fixed or no high refrigeration levels are longer detected. d. Provide graphic of room and exhaust fans status. e. Provide alarm acknowledge to AIT-60.1. f. Chiller equipment shall be shutdown if estop ES-60.1 is pressed or if a high refrigerant level is detected (AIT-60.1) 18.2. Alarms Alarm Field Setpoint Delay Notification Reset Device Refrigeration Room AIT-60.1 OEL = 1000 30 Sec HMI, Email, Auto High Toxicity Text EF-6 Fault EF-6-MS N/A 15 Sec HMI, Email, Man' Text EF-5 Fault EF-5-MS N/A 15 Sec HMI, Email, Man' Text PH-1 Failed to PH-1-MD N/A 15 Sec HMI, Email, Man' Operate Text EF-5 Low Flow FE-60.5 180 cfm (Not 15 Sec HMI, Email, Man' active during Text refrigeration leak alarm EF-6 No Flow FS-60.1 Only when 10 Sec. HMI, Email, Man' Indication Refrigerant Text level is high >1200cfm 'Fail To Start—the controller will try to restart the pump up to 3 times before setting the fail to start alarm. Technical Specifications 13400-23 Control Narrative — Rev. 0 Wednesday, December 30, 2020 19. HMI Access Levels 19.1. To restrict access to setpoint modification, hatchery water control, and alarm history clearing functionality, the security levels and permissions shown below are implemented in the HMI application graphics screens. Access to security levels higher than the default (security level 0) is granted via password entry at the HMI. Idaho Power/ Idaho Fish And Game will assign passwords and their corresponding security levels. HMI application graphics screens sec rity permissions Security View Control Modify Acknowledge Alarm Clear Alarm Level Scre Equipment Setpoints History ens 0 YES NO NO NO NO 1 YES YES NO YES NO 2 YES YES YES YES NO 3 YES YES YES YES NO Technical Specifications 13400-24 Control Narrative — Rev. 0 Wednesday, December 30, 2020 SECTION 13440 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM — GENERAL PART1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. General:This section sets forth the requirements for furnishing, installing, and testing a complete process control system. B. Related Sections: 1. The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions, Sections, and Drawings apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and PROGRAMMER and their Sub-Contractors to review all of the Contract Documents to insure a complete and coordinated project. C. The CONTRACTOR scope of work shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Provide PLC process control system hardware, SCADA hardware and software, and instrument submittals for Engineering review. 2. Procurement of all hardware and software required to conform to the Drawings and Specifications. 3. Furnish and install all process control system instruments, equipment and hardware. This includes SCADA hardware and software. 4. Coordinating Vendor and Manufacturer's Services. 5. Furnish all required tools, supplies, operations and maintenance manuals, and reproducible record drawings as specified herein. D. The PROGRAMMER scope of work shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Programming and configuring of the Process Control System 2. Coordinating and scheduling of Programming and Process control System configuration through the Owner. 3. Functional & Operational Process Control System Testing. 4. Furnish all required tools,test equipment, operations and maintenance manuals, and reproducible record drawings as specified herein. Technical Specifications 13440- 1 Process Control System -General 5. Instructing and training of Owner and operators in the proper operation of the system. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The CONTRACTOR and/or PROGRAMMER must satisfy the following minimum requirements to be awarded this work: 1. Demonstration of at least 5 years' experience with providing equipment and systems of the types, ratings, and sizes this project will require. 2. Demonstration of a manufacturer certified installer located within a 350 mile radius of the project with at least 5 years of experience installing equipment and systems of the types, ratings, and sizes this project will require. 3. Programming shall be by DC Engineering, Control System Technology or pre-approved equal, none others accepted 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. All process and control equipment shall be compatible for the installed site conditions and location including but not limited to installed temperature and humidity conditions, area classification, material compatibility, and installation application. B. Reference General Specification sections for project environmental conditions. 1.4 SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTALS A. General: Follow the procedures specified in Division 1 Section. Submit for final and official approval through the General Contractor. B. The Contractor shall submit data for all control system related equipment, and devices. Submittals shall include: 1. The submittal shall be submitted as a singular complete bound volume or multi-volume package and shall have the following contents: a. A complete index shall appear in the front of each bound volume. 1) All drawings and data sheets associated with a panel shall be grouped together with the panels being indexed by systems or process areas. 2) Instrument and Equipment Data sheets shall be labeled with the instrument and equipment name listed in the Drawings and panel shop drawings.All panel tagging Technical Specifications 13440- 2 Process Control System -General and nameplate nomenclature shall be consistent with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate process control equipment installation with other process components. B. Coordinate installing required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed. C. Sequence, coordinate, and install the process control system materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building. D. The Programmer shall coordinate Programming and Startup Activities through the Owner. E. Hatchery Functional Testing shall be conducted by the Programmer/ Process Control System Integrator. F. The Programmer shall coordinate any manufacturer's representatives to be present as required during the Operational Testing period. 1.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. At Substantial Completion of Project, be ready to demonstrate the following list of items below. If this is not possible, inform the General Contractor and Engineer no less than 1 week prior to Engineer's visitation of the site for Substantial Completion. 1. All Process and Control systems and items specified shall be installed and operational. 2. The process control system shall be capable of running and operating in a "Hand" mode. All equipment should be capable of operating with the Process Controller powered off. 3. Functional Test documentation shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and approval. 1.7 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Prepare Record Documents in accordance with the requirements in Division 1. In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, indicate the following installed conditions: 1. Actual location of all process control equipment feeders, all major underground or under slab conduits, all conduit stubs for future use, any changed 1/0 from Drawings and panel shop drawings, key junction boxes and pull boxes not indicated on Drawings, any control locations or indicator lights not shown on Drawings. Technical Specifications 13440-3 Process Control System -General 2. Addendum items, Change Order items and all changes made to Drawings from Bidding phase through to Project completion. 3. Actual equipment and materials installed. Where manufacturer and catalog number are indicated on Drawings,generally or in equipment schedules, change to reflect actual products installed. 4. Documentation of operating system, including but not limited to, alarm codes, descriptions, and troubleshooting options or procedures, and operating instructions shall be submitted to IPC at commissioning. 1.8 MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Division 1. In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1. Assemble O & M Manuals as follows: B. Manuals shall be assembled in three-ring binders. Binders shall be 3 inch thick or less and have slip sleeve jacket on binder side and front. More than one binder shall be used for each set of data if required to prevent overfilling of one binder. All information shall be arranged in Sections and each Section shall have a tabbed and clearly labeled divider. Shop Drawings which are larger than 8-1/2-inch by 11 inch shall be individually folded so they are 8-1/2-inch by 11 inch or less and inserted behind the appropriate tab. C. Tabs shall be labeled and arranged as follows: 1. Index: Furnish under the first tab an index of Sections listing name of Section and Specification numbers. 2. Equipment Manufacturers: Furnish under the second tab a complete typed list of equipment suppliers and manufacturer's representative including type of equipment, name, address and phone number.The company listed here should be the one which could furnish replacement parts and offer technical information about the equipment. 3. Product Literature: Each tab, starting with the third shall contain the name of a Specification Section. Behind each tab shall be the previously submitted and approved Shop Drawing,factory published operation and maintenance instructions and parts lists. Also include description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replacement parts. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules. Technical Specifications 13440-4 Process Control System -General 4. Upon completion and approval of the booklets, one hard copy and one PDF file copy shall be provided to the Owner. Using the booklet,the Electrical Contractor shall explain in detail and instruct the Owner's operating personnel in the correct operation and maintenance of the equipment. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. CONTROL SYSTEM WORK shall conform to or exceed the applicable requirements of the National Electrical Code. Conflicts between the requirements of the Contract Documents and any codes or referenced standards or specifications shall be resolved according to Division 1 - Reference Standards. B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements,furnish and install the products as indicated on Drawings or comparable products. C. Hardware Commonality: Instruments which utilize a common measurement principle (for example, dip cells, pressure transmitters, level transmitters that monitor hydrostatic head) shall be furnished by a single manufacturer. Panel mounted instruments shall have matching style and general appearance. Instruments performing similar functions shall be of the same type, model, or class, and shall be from a single manufacturer. D. The manufacturer selected shall have local or regional factory authorized and certified representation to support the installed equipment.The manufacturer shall have representation located within the state of the project or in an immediately adjacent state.The representative shall be readily available to provide technical support and assistance including but not limited to assistance in annual factory bench calibration and certification. E. Equipment or methods requiring redesign of any project details are not acceptable without prior written approval of the ENGINEER.Any proposal for approval of alternative equipment or methods shall include evidence of improved performance, operational advantage, and maintenance enhancement over the equipment as specified, or shall include evidence that the specified component is not available. F. No proprietary passwords shall be allowed. Passwords may be utilized during construction to preserve settings on instruments and equipment.All passwords for all password protected instruments or equipment shall be provided to the Owner prior to Programming and Startup by the Process Control System Integrator. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION Technical Specifications 13440-5 Process Control System -General A. Install control system components per the Drawings Specifications, requirements of NEC, and the manufacturer's instructions. B. Nameplates 1. Furnish nameplates for panels, instruments, and all other field mounted process control equipment and components. a. Nameplates shall be made of adhesive backed laminated plastic cut through to a high contrast background. 1) Panel nameplates shall have a 3/4"tall lettering. 2) Instruments and all other components shall have 1/4"tall lettering. 3.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of instruments and installation equipment such as support racks with piping, electrical, site grading and surface features as determined in the field. B. Provide adequate clearances for maintenance, repair and replacement for all instruments and process control equipment. 3.3 INSTRUMENTATION INSTALLATION, INSPECTION AND CALIBRATION A. Each instrument shall be checked against the latest version of the design documents for tagging, manufacturer, model number, range, action, etc., before functional testing or calibration. B. Care shall be observed when connecting electric power supplies to the instrumentation. Insure correct voltage and frequency on AC power supplies. Insure correct voltage, polarity, and superimposed ripple on DC power supplies. Insure correct polarity of the supply and proper grounding before connecting instruments. C. Conduit shall be installed per Raceways and Cabinets, Boxes, and Fittings specification sections. D. Cable shall be installed per Conductors and Cables, and Process Control System Conductors specification sections. E. Instruments which require external electronic calibrators for calibration shall be supplied with one electronic calibrator for the project. Technical Specifications 13440-6 Process Control System -General F. Instrument checkout sheets shall be provided that indicate instrument mfr., model and range. Checkout sheets shall also provide instrument scaled range within the PLC and the engineering units used. 3.4 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall guarantee all equipment and installation of all equipment,for a period of one year following the date of completion of the work. Warranty services shall be performed within 5 calendar days after notification by the OWNER. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 13440-7 Process Control System -General SECTION 13421 FLOW MEASURMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. The Contractor shall provide flow measuring systems, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. The transmitter portion of the system may be remotely mounted unless noted otherwise in the Contract Documents. B. This section describes the requirements for magnetic flow meters and their respective microprocessor-based signal converters. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Commercial Standards: 1. ISA— S 5.1 Instrumentation Symbols and Identification 2. ANSI — B16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250, and 800 3. ANSI/AWWA C207 Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service— Sized 4-inch through 144-inch 4. ANSI/AWWA C700 Cold Water Meters 5. ANSI/NSF 61 Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects 6. ASME Report Fluid Meters, Sixth Edition, 1971 7. IP Rating International Protection Rating 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Division 01 and Section 13440 — Process Control System - General. B. Each meter shall be identified with its equipment number, as indicated in the Contract Documents. The following shall be included in the submittal for this section: 1. Data sheets and catalog literature for the flow meter and the microprocessor-based transmitter. 2. Connection diagrams for equipment wiring. 3. Certified curves indicating flow versus differential pressure. 4. Materials of construction and connection fittings. 5. Any mounting or additional accessories to be provided. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Each electromagnetic flowmeter shall be calibrated at a facility which is traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technologies or ISO. A real-time computer generated printout of the actual calibration data shall be submitted to the Engineer at least 30 days prior to shipment to the Site. Technical Specifications 13441- 1 Flow Measurement B. Accuracy Requirements: Unless otherwise indicated, flow meters shall be guaranteed to register flow to an accuracy of plus and minus .5 percent of actual flow throughout the range indicated. C. Guarantees, Warranties: After completion the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner the manufacturer's written guarantees, that the metering system swill operate within the published accuracies and flow ranges and meet these specifications. The Contractor shall also furnish the manufacturer's warranties as published in its literature. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Provide instruments suitable for the installed site conditions including, but not limited to, material compatibility, site altitude, process and ambient temperature and humidity conditions. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for confirming necessary cable length with meter manufacturer prior to ordering any meter equipment. C. All meters to be installed in vaults less than 3 feet shall be IP67 rates, IP68 for vaults deeper than 3 feet. 2.2 ELECTROMAGNETIC (MAG) FLOW METERS A. The electromagnetic flowmeter shall consist of a flow sensor based on Faraday's Law of Electromagnetic Induction, the flow of liquid through the sensor induces an electrical voltage that is proportional to the velocity of the flow. B. Electromagnetic flowmeter systems shall be the low frequency electromagnetic induction type which produces a DC pulsed signal directly proportional to and linear with the liquid flow rate. Complete zero stability shall be an inherent characteristic of the flowmeter system. Each magnetic flow metering system shall include a metering tube, signal cable, transmitter, and flowmeter grounding rings. C. Meter tube: The tube shall be constructed of 304 or 316 stainless steel tube with ductile iron flanged connections and include a minimum of two (2) self-cleaning electrodes. The electrodes shall be constructed of materials conforming to the manufacturer's recommendation for the intended service as specified in Table 1 and conforming to the manufacturer's recommendation for the intended service. The meter housing shall be rated NEMA 4X. Grounding rings shall conform to the manufacturer's bore and material recommendation for the intended service. Grounding rings shall be provided and designed to protect and shield the liner's edge interface from abrasion at the meter end. D. Performance Requirements: The flow metering system shall conform to the following: No. Item Units Value 1 Time Constant Secs 0.5— 1,000 2 Accuracy % 0.5 of Full Flow and 10 to 100 for velocities over 3 feet per second 3 Repeatability % 0.25 full scale 4 Power Consumption watts 30 or less Technical Specifications 13441- 2 Flow Measurement 5 1 Power Requirements I VAC 1 120 E. Sensor/Transmitter: The microprocessor-based signal converter/transmitter shall have the following: 1. Output: 4-20mA into 700 ohms max. (1) relay rated at 1A, 24VDC. Two eight digit totalizers for forward, net or reverse flow. 2. Six digit LCD displays for flowrate, percent of span, and totalization. An operator interface with keypad which responds to English text entry. 3. Integral low flow cutoff and zero return to produce a consistent zero output signal in response to an external dry contact closure. 4. Automatic range change and capability to measure flow in both directions. 5. Programmable parameters including meter size, full scale Q, magnetic field frequency, primary constant, time constant. 6. Data retention for a minimum of five (5) years without auxiliary power (main or battery). 7. Self-diagnostics and automatic data checking. 8. Protected terminals and fuses in a separate compartment which isolates field connection from electronics. 9. The transmitter shall carry the minimum rating IP65 for indoor installations, IP67 for outdoor installations or IP68 in areas prone to flooding or where the transmitter will be mounted in a vault. 10. Installation shall follow manufacturers recommended pipe diameters both upstream and downstream. F. Manufacturers: 1. Endress & Hauser, Proline Promag Series 2. Siemens Sitrans Series 3. Rosemount Series 8705 4. Or preapproved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE A. Installation and Startup Assistance: During erection and startup of the flow meters, the System Vendor shall obtain all necessary assistance from an experienced factory service representative to ensure a correct and first class installation, in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. B. Instruction of Owner's Personnel: After completion of the installation and during startup of the plant, the System Vendor shall instruct the Owner's personnel in the proper operation, maintenance and repair of all metering equipment. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 13441- 3 Flow Measurement SECTION 13442 LEVEL MEASUREMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. The Contractor shall provide level sensing equipment, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with specification sections Division 01 and 13440 - Process Control System - General. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer instruments facilities certified to the quality standards of ISO Standard 9001 - Quality Systems - Model for Quality Assurance in Design/Development, Production, Installation, and Servicing. B. Calibration: All level sensing equipment shall be shipped to the project site factory calibrated and accompanied with certificate of such. C. Warranty: A written Installation Contractor's warranty shall be provided for the equipment specified in this section. The warranty shall be for a minimum period of one (1) year from the date of Substantial Completion equipment. The Installation Contractor shall repair or replace all defects of materials or workmanship in the equipment. 1.4 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Provide instruments suitable for the installed site conditions including, but not limited to, material compatibility, site altitude, process and ambient temperature, space classification, and humidity conditions. B. The maximum measuring error must be no more than ±0.2 % of the maximum span of the sensor and typical measuring error must be no more than ±0.2 % of the maximum span of the sensor with a measured value resolution of 1 mm (0.04 in). 1.5 SAFETY A. All electrical equipment shall meet the requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70, NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE, latest addition. B. All devices shall be certified for use in hazardous areas: Class 1, Div. 2, Groups B/C; temperature rating T3 (200 deg. C) C. All devices shall be suitable for use as non-incendive devices when used with appropriate non-incendive associated equipment/ Devices with intrinsically safe ratings will normally be acceptable with vendor's approval. D. Electrical equipment housing shall conform to NEMA 4X classification. Technical Specifications 13442- 1 Level Measurement E. Non-intrinsically safe electrical equipment shall be approved by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) such as FM, UL, ETL, CSA, etc.) for the specified electrical area classification. F. Electrical equipment specified as intrinsically safe shall qualify as "simple apparatus" or NTRL approved intrinsically safe equipment per ANSI/ISA- RP12.6 "Installation of Intrinsically Safe Systems for Hazardous (Classified) Locations", latest edition. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 NON-INTRUSIVE ULTRASONIC LEVEL SENSORS A. Non-intrusive ultrasonic level sensors shall consist of a transducer, transmitter/receiver, and control relays. The ultrasonic level sensor transmitter shall generate pulses that are directed to the liquid level. The transmitter shall detect reflected signals and measure the time-delay between transmitting and receiving. A microprocessor shall calculate the level and output a 4-20mA and a digital HART signal. B. The sensor shall be hermetically welded PVDF pulse time of flight C. Pulse Time of Flight transducer transmits high frequency pulse and receives echo signal back which is transferred to transmitter via wiring. D. The temperature limits of the sensor— minus 40 degrees F to 176 degrees F ; relative humidity— 0 to 100 percent for transducers ranged to 63 feet (liquids) or 0— 95 percent for transducers with greater range; Sensors shall be provided with automatic air temperature compensation; Beam angle 12 degrees or less. E. Sensors provided with 1" —2" NPT thread for mounting. Sensor shall be completely encapsulated in a hermetically welded PVDF housing. F. Sensors shall be rated for NEMA 6P submergence. Sensors shall have mechanical decoupling between sensor membrane and outer housing. Sensors shall be provided with automatic build up compensation to provide self-cleaning when condensation may occur. Sensors shall be provided with internal heating elements and separate power supplies for these elements when freezing condensation may occur. G. Where hazardous area approvals are required, sensors will be provided with appropriate ratings for that area. Sensors shall be provided with optional flood protection tube. H. The transmitter will generate pulse signal to transducer, receive echo signal back from transducer, calculate distance based on time for signal return; transmit a linear 4-20mA signal proportional to distance measured and provide local indication. Technical Specifications 13442- 2 Level Measurement I. The output of the transmitter: one 4-20 mA DC output for single channel level measurement or two 4-20 mA DC outputs for dual channel level measurement; built-in features required — interference echo suppression; adjustable blocking distance down to 3 inches. J. The transmitter shall have automatic volume calculation for horizontal or vertical tanks with 32 point linearization; pre-programmed linearization tables for flumes and weirs; back water detection for submerged flow conditions; sludge detection; synchronization of pulses between two ultrasonic units used in same tank; automatic sensor detection; alternating pump control; rake/screen control; K. An integral keypad will be supplied with each transmitter which will allow for full configuration of the transmitter. L. Output alarm relays— up to 3 SPDT contacts with individually adjustable set points— actual quantity indicated by schedule. M. The transmitter has a temperature range of minus 40 to 175 degrees Fahrenheit. N. NEMA 4X rated enclosures are provided for the transmitter; where hazardous areas are indicated, the equipment shall be rated for that area. Mounting —wall mount or panel mount as indicated by schedule O. Local indicator— illuminated LCD display scaled to read in engineering units of flow, level and volume. P. Power supply shall be 90-253 VAC, or 10.5-32 VDC Q. The measuring uncertainty of the transmitter is +/- .2% of maximum sensor span per NAMUR EN 61208-2 R. Provide cable between sensor and transmitter where transmitter is remotely mounted. S. Where mounted in a tank or pressurized vessel the transducer shall be flange type and installed within stilling well meeting manufacturer recommended installation methods. T. Provide sunshields for all units mounted in direct sunlight. U. Manufacturers: a. Siemens b. Endress and Hauser c. Rosemount d. Or approved Equal 2.2 GUIDED RADAR LEVEL METERS Technical Specifications 13442- 3 Level Measurement A. The pulsed time of flight radar transmitter used primarily for solids applications,which shall operate at 26 GHz using 2-wire technology for level measurement and provide a 4-20 mA HART output. Ethernet/IP will also be available if required. B. The transmitter housing shall have dual compartments and be available in plastic, die cast aluminum with a powder Epoxy coating or 316L Stainless steel based on the application environment. C. Unit shall have ATEX, FM, CSA or IECEx approvals as required. D. Unit shall employ multi echo tracking algorithms for reliable level measurement. E. The unit shall not be affected by changing media, changing temperatures, gas blankets or vapors. The transmitter shall measure almost completely independent from product properties. F. The transmitter will contain a gas tight feed through to prevent process from intruding into the housing from the process vessel when required. G. The transmitter will have a 4 line LCD display, which can be remote mounted if required. All programming and set-up can be done by the three buttons on the display. The unit will have the capability of mapping out any object that causes an interference the in the radar reflections. H. FDT based software shall be provided for optional remote method of configuration, set-up and storage of parameters via a computer. I. The display module shall be capable of data backup, data comparison and data transfer functions. J. It must be possible to view a graphical representation of the actual signal and envelope curve on the display. K. The transmitter will have a 32 point Iinearizer to correct output to represent volume measurement or use as a strapping table for level correction. L. The unit shall have a measuring range up to 50 ft M. The unit shall be suitable for process temperatures up to 8420 F (4500 C). It shall also withstand pressures of-14.5 to 2,320 psi. N. Where installed in an area exposed to the sun the transmitter shall be provided with UV protection. O. Manufacturers: 1. Endress and Hauser 2. Siemens 3. Rosemount 4. Or approved Equal Technical Specifications 13442- 4 Level Measurement 2.3 SUBMERSIBLE PRESSURE BASED CONTINUOUS LEVEL MEASUREMENT A. The principle of pressure level measurement is based on the change reflectance on the diaphragm of the pressure sensor due to the change in the level. The transducer shall produce a 4-20ma signal relational to the inches of water column above the transducer. B. The transducer housing shall be constructed of 304 or 316 stainless steel and have an outside diameter of no greater than 1". C. The transducer shall be available as a loop powered 2-wire device with an option for 4-wires (AC or DC powered options available). D. The instrument shall be capable of handling process temperatures between -40 degrees F and 185 degrees F. It should also withstand process pressures of- 14.5 psi to 511 psi. E. Unit shall have ATEX, FM, CSA or IECEx approvals available as required. F. Outputs for the transmitter shall be 4 to 20 mA with HART. G. A stilling well shall be provided in vessels or liquid streams with a high level of turbulence or surges. H. The remote display shall have local indicator with a 4-line LCD display scaled to read in engineering units of level. The local indicator shall be capable of displaying an envelope curve of the actual signal used for commissioning/troubleshooting purposes and have the capability of backing up/duplicating the instrument's data. I. The local display will have the capability to store data, which will serve as backup for the configuration and allow the set-up data to be transferred to another transmitter. J. Complete set-up and configuration shall be possible via the display. No further equipment or parts shall be required for commissioning the unit. K. Manufacturers: a. Endress and Hauser b. Siemens C. Rosemount d. Or approved Equal PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION Technical Specifications 13442- 5 Level Measurement A. As shown on installation details and process piping/mechanical drawings. B. As recommended by the manufacturer's installation and operation manual. C. Specific attention should be given to the following technical requirements: 1. Verify the transmitter is mounted in an appropriate location in the vessel as per the instructional manual. 3.2 SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE A. Installation and Startup Assistance: During installation and startup, the Installation Contractor shall obtain all necessary assistance from an experienced factory service representative to ensure a correct and first class installation, in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. B. Instruction of Owner's Personnel: After completion of the installation and during startup of the plant, the Installation Contractor shall instruct the Owner's personnel in the proper operation, maintenance and repair of all equipment. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 13442- 6 Level Measurement SECTION 13443 PRESSURE, STRAIN AND FORCE MEASUREMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall provide pressure measuring devices, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. The pressure sensor shall be an external device mounted as recommended by the manufacturer's installation instructions for optimum accuracy. B. Diaphragm Seal: Where indicated on Drawings, transmitters shall be equipped with diaphragm seals, or equal protective pressure or vacuum sensing devices. Unless otherwise shown, diaphragm seals shall be provided on all transmitters where medium fluid has solids (i.e. mixed liquor) or high temperatures that might affect accuracy of pressure transmitter. 1.2 SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Division 01 and Section 13440 — Process Control System - General. B. Each transmitter shall be identified with its equipment number as indicated on plans. The following shall be included in the submittal for this section: 1. Data sheets and catalog literature for the pressure transmitter. 2. Connection diagrams for equipment wiring. 3. Material of construction, cable lengths and dimensional data. 1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. At Substantial Completion of Project, be ready to demonstrate that all pressure measuring systems are installed and operational. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Division 01. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Accuracy Requirements: Unless otherwise indicated, pressure transmitters shall be guaranteed to register pressure to an accuracy of+/-1% of actual pressure throughout the range indicated. B. Manufacture instruments facilities certified to the quality standards of ISO Standard 9001 - Quality Systems - Model for Quality Assurance in Design/Development, Production, Installation, and Servicing. C. Warranties: After completion the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner the manufacturer's written guarantees, that the pressure measurement system will operate within the published accuracies and level ranges and meet these specifications. The Contractor shall also furnish the manufacturer's warranties as published in its literature. 1.6 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS Technical Specifications 13443- 1 Pressure, Strain and Force Measurements A. Provide instruments suitable for the installed site conditions including, but not limited to, material compatibility, site altitude, process and ambient temperature and humidity conditions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRESSURE TRANSMITTER A. The pressure transmitter shall be pipe mounted gage pressure transmitter. The materials in contact with the process shall be 316L stainless steel. The Electronics housing shall be 316L stainless steel, IP65 NEMA 4X enclosure. B. Process connections shall be an ASME '/2" MNPT Female port. C. Transmitter electronics shall be a 2 wire 4-20mA output device with built in noise immunity, thermal compensation and transient protection. The transmitter shall be protected from reverse polarity connection, under current and over current. Transmitter shall be powered by a 9-24 VDC regulated supply. D. Transmitter shall have a static pressure limit at least 1.5 times the nominal pressure range. Unit shall use DC loop-power supply 10.5 to 45 VDC with self-diagnostic capability and a non-volatile memory. E. Transmitter shall provide a 24VDC high pressure output. Range shall be adjustable through the transmitter interface. F. Display shall be an integrally mounted 4-line LCD scaled with engineering units. G. The unit shall be rated for process temperature of minus 13°F to 302°F and an ambient environment of minus 40 degrees F to 185 degrees F. H. All wetted materials must comply with applicable AWWA standards and be certified by an accredited ANSI certification body to meet ANSI/NSF Standard 53,58, or 61. I. The unit shall be rated for process temperature of minus 130F to 302OF and an ambient environment of minus 40 degrees F to 185 degrees F. J. Contractor is to verify required pressure ranges of pressure measuring devices with engineer prior to ordering. K. Unit shall have ATEX, FM, CSA or IECEx approvals as required. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. IFM B. Endress & Hauser C. Siemens D. Rosemount E. Approved Equal 2.3 DIAPHRAGM SEALS A. Diaphragm seals shall consist of bottom housing, lower ring, diaphragm capsule, fill screw, flushing connection, and a top housing. 1. The diaphragm seal shall have a removable bottom housing to permit servicing. Technical Specifications 13443-2 Pressure, Strain and Force Measurements 2. The diaphragm seal shall be factory assembled to the corresponding pressure instrument and be factory-filled. The assembly shall be shipped with a tag reading "Do not disassemble for installation". 3. Exposed surfaces housings shall be constructed of Type 316 stainless steel for pressure service over 15 psi. 4. The diaphragm seal shall attach to the inlet connection of a pressure instrument to isolate its measuring element from the process fluid. The space between the diaphragm and the pressure element shall be completely filled with a suitable liquid. Displacement of the liquid fill in the pressure element through the movement of the diaphragm shall transmit process pressure changes directly to a gauge, transmitter, switch, or other pressure instrument. B. Materials of Diaphragm: Seals shall be of Type 316 stainless steel with stainless steel diaphragm for pressure over 15 psi and elastomer diaphragm for pressure of 15 psi and less. Type 316 stainless steel nuts and bolts, fill connection and valved flush port size 1/4-inch NPT capable of disassembly without loss of filler fluid 2.4 MANUFACTURERS A. Ashcroft B. WIKA C. Ametek PART 3 - PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall assemble and install all equipment specified herein, in strict accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions. All installations shall be accomplished by competent craftsman in a workmanlike manner. B. Final acceptance of the equipment is contingent on satisfactory operation after installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. The pressure sensor shall be mounted in such a way that it does not protrude from the piping and inhibit walkways or operation of nearby equipment. B. Piping assembly shall include a shutoff valve so that the transmitter may be removed for cleaning and calibration with out shutting down the process. C. Wiring between pressure transmitter and PLC shall use cable type and procedures as per the manufacturer's recommendations. D. Pressure Transmitter power shall be supplied by a fused terminal in the PLC cabinet. E. Final acceptance of the equipment is contingent on satisfactory operation after installation. F. Vent bellows shall be provided and installed for submersible pressure transducers. 3.3 SPARE PARTS A. One complete pressure transmitter shall be provided as spare parts. Technical Specifications 13443-3 Pressure, Strain and Force Measurements END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 13443-4 Pressure, Strain and Force Measurements SECTION 13444 TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. The Contractor shall provide temperature measuring equipment, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with specification sections Division 01 and 13440 — Process Control System — General. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI). 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): a. PTC 19.3, Instruments and Apparatus, Part 3 Temperature Measurement. 4. The International Electrotechnical Comission (IEC) a. IEC 751 Platinum Resistance Thermometer Sensor 5. The International Society of Automation (ISA): a. MC96.1, Temperature Measurement Thermocouples. B. All temperature measuring systems shall be provided with manufacturer's standard one-year product warranty. 1.4 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Provide instruments suitable for the installed site conditions including, but not limited to, material compatibility, site altitude, process and ambient temperature, space classification, and humidity conditions. 1.5 SAFETY A. All electrical equipment shall meet the requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70, NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE, latest addition. B. All devices shall be certified for use in hazardous areas: Class 1, Div. 1, Div 2, Groups B/C; temperature rating T3 (200 deg. C). C. Electrical equipment housing shall conform to NEMA 4X classification. D. Non-intrinsically safe electrical equipment shall be approved by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) such as FM, UL, ETL, CSA, etc.) for the specified electrical area classification. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS Technical Specifications 13444- 1 Temperature Measurement A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the manufacturers listed in the Articles describing the elements are acceptable. B. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 13440. 2.2 TEMPERATURE COMPONENTS A. Temperature Transmitters: 1. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Outdoor Installation 1) IFM b. Indoor Installation 1) IFM 2. Materials: a. Housing: Aluminum or Stainless Steel 3. Design and fabrication: a. Smart transmitter utilizing microprocessor based electronics. b. Input: RTD, thermocouple or millivolt, as specified in schedule. c. Transmitter inaccuracy shall be in accordance with the following: 1) 100 ohm platinum RTD input: +/-0.36 DEGF +0.08 PCT of span. 2) Type E thermocouple input: +/-0.81 DEGF +0.025 PCT of span. 3) Type J thermocouple input: +/-0.81 DEGF +0.025 PCT of span. 4) Type K thermocouple input: +/-0.81 DEGF +0.025 PCT of span. 5) Type R thermocouple input: +/-0.81 DEGF +0.025 PCT of span. 6) Type S thermocouple input: +/-0.81 DEGF +0.025 PCT of span. 7) Type T thermocouple input: +/-0.81 DEGF +0.025 PCT of span. 8) Millivolt input: +/-0.02 mV +0.02 PCT of span. d. Stability: 1) Any of the following drift limits are acceptable: a) Greater of: 0.1 PCT of reading or 0.1 DEGC per 12 months. b) 0.05 PCT of input reading plus 0.043 PCT of span per 12 months. c) 0.05 PCT of maximum span per 12 months. e. Ambient temperature limits: 1) -40 to 185 DEGF. 2) Integral LCD meter: -4 to 158 DEGF. f. Output: 4-20 mA DC signal linearly proportional to temperature. g. Power supply: 24 VDC. h. Adjustable span. Technical Specifications 13444-2 Temperature Measurement i. Adjustable zero. B. Temperature Switches: 1. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Endress & Hauser. b. Rosemount. c. IFM. d. Approved equal. 2. Design and fabrication: a. Contact rating: 1) 2 PNP switch output. b. Switch accuracy: 1 PCT or better. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Furnish all mounting brackets, hardware and appurtenances required for mounting primary elements and transmitters. 1. Materials, unless otherwise specified, shall be as follows: a. Bolts, nuts, washers, expansion anchors: 316 stainless steel. b. Mounting brackets: 1) Standard: Carbon steel. 2) Highly corrosive areas: 316 stainless steel. c. Mounting plates, angles: 1) Standard: Carbon steel. 2) Corrosive areas: 316 stainless steel. d. Instrument pipe stands: 1) Standard: Hot-dip galvanized 2 IN schedule 40, ASTM A106, Grade B carbon steel. 2) Corrosive areas: 316 stainless steel. B. Tubing Support Angles and Brackets: 1. Any of the following materials are acceptable: a. Aluminum support with dielectric material between support and tubing. b. Type 316 stainless steel. c. Fiberglass. C. Tubing Tray or Channel: 1. Aluminum. 2. Provide dielectric material between tray or channel and tubing. D. Provide handheld communicator compatible with all intelligent transmitters furnished. Technical Specifications 13444- 3 Temperature Measurement 1. Hand held communicator shall provide capability to check calibration, change transmitter range, and provide diagnostics. 2. If these features are provided with the intelligent transmitter, the hand held communicator is not required. E. Cable lengths between sensors and transmitters shall be continuous (without splices) and as required to accommodate locations as shown on Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install instrument mounting pipe stands level and plumb. C. Locate instrument piping and tubing so as to be free of vibration and interference with other piping, conduit, or equipment. D. Keep foreign matter out of the system. E. Remove all oil on piping and tubing with solvent before piping and tubing installation. F. Plug all open ends and connections to keep out contaminants. G. Threaded Connection Seals: 1. Use Tite-Seal or acceptable alternate. 2. Use of lead base pipe dope or Teflon tape is not acceptable. 3. Do not apply Tite-Seal to tubing threads of compression fittings. H. Temperature Elements: 1. Assemble in the following sequence: a. Remove temperature sensor sheaths and terminal blocks from the head and nipple assembly. b. Connect nipple and head to thermowell installed in the pipe. c. Insert sheath and terminal block until it seats in the thermowell. d. Connect to the head. I. Instrument Mounting: 1. Mount all instruments where they will be accessible from fixed ladders, platforms, or grade. 2. Mount all local indicating instruments with face forward toward the normal operating area, within reading distance, and in the line of sight. 3. Mount instruments level, plumb, and support rigidly. 4. Mount to provide: a. Protection from heat, shock, and vibrations. b. Accessibility for maintenance. c. Freedom from interference with piping, conduit and equipment. Technical Specifications 13444-4 Temperature Measurement 3.2 SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE A. Installation and Startup Assistance: During installation and startup, the Installation Contractor shall obtain all necessary assistance from an experienced factory service representative to ensure a correct and first class installation, in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 13444- 5 Temperature Measurement SECTION 13447 PANEL MOUNTED INSTRUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pilot devices: a. Selector switches. b. Pushbuttons. c. Indicating lights. d. Combination selector switch/indicator light. e. Potentiometer 2. Relays/timers: a. Program timers. b. Percentage timers. c. Reset timers. d. Control relay. e. Signal-level switching relays. f. Time delay relays. 3. Termination equipment: a. Terminal blocks. b. Fuse holders. 4. Power supplies: a. DC power supplies. b. Isolation transformers. 5. Voltage surge protection devices. 6. Running time indicator. 7. Instrument air compressor. 8. Clocks. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Section 13440 - Process Control System - General 4. Division 16 - Low Voltage Surge Protective Devices (SPD). Technical Specifications 13447- 1 Panel Mounted Instruments 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. The International Society of Automation (ISA): a. S18.1, Annunciator Sequences and Specifications. 2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). b. ICS 2, Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays Rated 600 Volts. 3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). B. Miscellaneous: 1. Assure units comply with electrical area classifications and NEMA enclosure type shown on Drawings. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specifications Division 01 and Process Control System 13440 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. B. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. See Division 01 and Process Control System 13440 for requirements for the mechanics, administration, and the content of Operation and Maintenance Manual submittals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the manufacturers listed in the applicable Articles below are acceptable. B. Provide similar components from the same manufacturer for uniformity of appearance, operations, and maintenance. C. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Division 01. 2.2 PILOT DEVICES A. Selector Switches: 1. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Allen-Bradley. b. Eaton. 2. Design and fabrication: a. Heavy-duty type. b. [Oiltight] [NEMA 4] [NEMA 4X]. Technical Specifications 13447-2 Panel Mounted Instruments c. Mounting hole: [30.5 MM] [22.5 MM]. d. Supply switches having number of positions required with contact blocks to fulfill functions shown and specified. e. UL listed. f. Maintained contact type. g. [Knob] [Lever] type operators. h. [Black] [Red] [Green] [Yellow] [Orange] [Blue] [Brown] [Gray] [White] colored operators. i. Designed with cam and contact block with approximate area of 2 IN SQ. j. Legend plate marked per Contract Documents. k. Contact block requirements: 1) Dry and indoor locations: Standard contact blocks rated for 10 A continuous current. 2) Wet or outside locations: Hermetically sealed contact blocks. B. Pushbuttons: 1. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Allen Bradley. b. Eaton. 2. Materials: a. Backing diaphragm: Buna-N. 3. Design and fabrication: a. Heavy-duty type [ b. [Oiltight] [NEMA 4] [NEMA 4X]. c. Mounting hole: [30.5 MM] [22.5 MM]. d. Diaphragm backed. e. UL listed. f. Emergency stop pushbuttons to have mushroom head operator and maintained contact. g. Non-illuminated type: 1) Momentary contact with necessary contact blocks. 2) Molded, solid color melamine buttons. 3) [Standard flush] [Long, mushroom] operators with [full] [half] [no] shroud. 4) [Black] [Green] [Red] colored buttons for START or ON and [black] [green] [red] color for STOP or OFF. 5) Appropriate contact blocks to fulfill functions shown or specified. h. Contact block requirements: Technical Specifications 13447- 3 Panel Mounted Instruments 1) Dry and indoor locations: Standard contact blocks rated for 10A continuous current. 2) Wet or outside locations: Hermetically sealed contact blocks. 3) Legend plate marked per Contract Documents. i. Illuminating type: 1) Momentary contact with necessary contact blocks. 2) Serves as both pushbutton control and indicating light. 3) [Green] [Red] colored lenses for start or on and [green] [red] for STOP or OFF. 4) Resistor-type full voltage light unit with lens and panel gasket. 5) Legend plate marked per Contract Documents. 6) Appropriate contact blocks to fulfill functions shown or specified. C. Indicating Lights: 1. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Allen-Bradley. b. Eaton 2. Design and fabrication: a. Heavy duty [ b. [Oiltight] [NEMA 4] [NEMA 4X]. c. Type allowing replacement of bulb without removal from control panel. d. [Transformer type] [Full voltage] [LED]. e. UL listed. f. 24 V lamp. g. Legends marked per Contract Documents. h. Nominal 2 IN SQ face. i. Mounting hole: [30.5 MM] [22.5 MM]. j. Push-to-test indicating lights. k. Plastic lens. I. Color code lights as follows: 1) Green:[OFF or stopped] [ON or running]; valve [open] [closed]. 2) Amber: Standby; auto mode; ready. 3) Red: [ON or running] [OFF or stopped]; valve [open] [closed]. m. Legend plate engraved for each light. D. Potentiometer: 1. Acceptable manufacturers: Technical Specifications 13447-4 Panel Mounted Instruments a. Allen-Bradley. b. Eaton. 2. Design and fabrication: a. Heavy-duty, NEMA type. b. Mounting hole: 30.5 MM. c. UL listed. d. Linear adjustment through 0-1000 ohms with 1 PCT resolution. e. 3-wire interface. f. Dial plate with 0-100 PCT scale. g. Panel mounted. h. One-turn adjustment knob. 2.3 RELAYS/TIMERS A. Control Relays: 1. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Allen-Bradley. 2. Design and fabrication: a. Plug-in general purpose slim relay. b. Blade connector type. c. Switching capacity: 8A. d. Contact material: Silver nickel. e. Provide relays with a minimum of 3 SPDT contacts. f. Coil voltage: 120 VAC or 24 VDC. g. Relay sockets are DIN rail mounted. h. Internal neon or LED indicator is lit when coil is energized. i. Clip fastener. j. Check button. k. Temperature rise: 1) Coil: 85 DEGF max. 2) Contact: 65 DEGF max. I. Insulation resistance: 100 Meg min. m. Frequency response: 1800 operations/hour. n. Operating temperature: -20 to +150 DEGF. o. Life expectancy: 1) Electrical: 500,000 operations or more. 2) Mechanical: 50,000,000 operations or more. Technical Specifications 13447- 5 Panel Mounted Instruments p. UL listed or recognized. B. Time Delay Relays: 1. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Allen-Bradley 2. Design and fabrication: a. Heavy-duty. b. Solid-state construction. c. External adjusting dial. d. Auxiliary relays as required to perform functions specified or shown on Drawings. e. Operates on 117 VAC (±10 PCT) power source. f. Contact rating: A150 per NEMA ICS 2-125. g. Furnish with "on" and "timing out" indicators. 2.4 TERMINATION EQUIPMENT A. Terminal Blocks: 1. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Allen-Bradley. 2. Design and fabrication: a. Modular type with screw compression clamp. b. Screws: Stainless steel. c. Current bar: Nickel-plated copper allow. d. Thermoplastic insulation rated for-40 to +90 DEGC. e. Wire insertion area: Funnel-shaped to guide all conductor strands into terminal. f. Install end sections and end stops at each end of terminal strip. g. Install machine-printed terminal markers on both sides of block. h. Spacing: 6 MM. i. Wire size: 22-12 AWG. j. Rated voltage: 600 V. k. Din rail mounting. I. UL listed. 3. Standard-type block: a. Rated current: 30 A. b. Color: Gray body. 4. Bladed-type block: Technical Specifications 13447-6 Panel Mounted Instruments a. Terminal block with knife blade disconnect which connects or isolated the two (2) sides of the block. b. Rated current: 10 A. c. Color: 1) Panel control voltage leaves enclosure - normal: Gray body, orange switch. 2) Foreign voltage entering enclosure: Orange body, orange switch. 5. Grounded-type block: a. Electrically grounded to mounting rail. b. Use to terminal ground wires and analog cable shields. c. Color: Green and yellow body. B. Fuse Holders: 1. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Allen-Bradley. 2. Design and fabrication: a. Modular-type with screw compression clamp. b. Screws: Stainless steel. c. Current bar: Nickel-plated copper alloy. d. Thermoplastic insulation rated for-40 to +105 DEGC. e. Wire insertion area: Funnel-shaped to guide all conductor strands into terminal. f. Blocks can be ganged for multi-pole operation. g. Install end sections and end stops at each end of terminal strip. h. Install machine-printed terminal markers on both sides of block. i. Spacing: 9.1 MM. j. Wire size: 30-12 AWG. k. Rated voltage: 300 V. I. Rated current: 12 A. m. Fuse size: 1/4 x 1-1/4. n. Blown fuse indication. o. DIN rail mounting. p. UL listed. 2.5 POWER SUPPLIES A. DC Power Supplies: 1. Acceptable manufacturers: a. Allen-Bradley. b. Phoenix Contact. Technical Specifications 13447- 7 Panel Mounted Instruments c. I FM 2. Design and fabrication: a. Converts 120 VAC input to DC power at required voltage. b. DIN rail mount with enclosure (i.e., not open frame). c. Switching type. d. AC input: 120 VAC +/-15 PCT, nominal 60 Hz. e. Efficiency: Minimum 86 PCT. f. Rated mean time between failure (MTBF): 500,000 HRS. g. Voltage regulation: 1) Static: Less than 1.0 PCT VoUt. 2) Dynamic: +/-2 PCT Vogt overall. h. Output ripple/noise: Less than 100 mV peak to peak (20 MHz). i. Overload, short circuit and open circuit protection. j. Temperature rating: 0 to 60 DEGC full rated, derated linearly to 50 PCT at 70 DEGC. k. Humidity rating: Up to 90 PCT, non-condensing. I. LED status indication for DC power. 2.6 RUNNING TIME INDICATORS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1. Eaton. B. Design and Fabrication: 1. Six-digit LCD Display. 2. Non-reset type. 3. Time range in hours. 4. Automatic recycle at zero. 5. Accuracy: 1 PCT. 6. Sealed against dirt and moisture. 7. Tamperproof. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 13447- 8 Panel Mounted Instruments SECTION 13448 PROCESS CONTROL PANELS AND HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. General: This section sets forth the general specifications and requirements for all the control panels and enclosures being provided under this contract. 1. Including but not limited to all: a. All custom built and designed control panels. 2. The Contractor shall furnish, supply and install all custom control panels for this project in accordance with Contract Documents. 3. This specification covers the requirements for the fabrication of instrument panel boards, mounting, finishing, piping and wiring of instrument equipment. B. Related Sections: 1. The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and its Sub- Contractors to review all sections to insure a complete and coordinated project. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. In accordance with Section 13440, "Process Control Systems - General." B. CP - Control Panel (Contractor Furnished) C. PLC— Programmable Logic Controller D. 1/0— Input/Output E. HMI — Human Machine Interface F. SCADA— Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition. Generally refers to software suite used to monitor and or control facilities automated systems via HMI or other visual terminal. 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. UL 508A Industrial Control Panels B. NEC National Electric Code 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. In accordance with Section 13440, "Process Control Systems - General." B. Scope: 1. Custom control panels shall include but not be limited to the following: a. PLC enclosure. 2. Enclosure Types: a. Outdoor non-hazardous location enclosures shall be NEMA 4 Technical Specifications 13448 - 1 Process Control Panels and Hardware b. Indoor non-hazardous enclosures shall be NEMA 12. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with Division 1 and Section 13440, "Process Control Systems - General." B. If UL508A control panel shop drawings were provided as part of the Contract Documents these documents shall be used by the Contractor for panel construction. 1. Any panel shop modifications or variations are to be provided to the Engineer for approval. 2. Prior to shipping the Contractor is to provide a set of redlined shop drawings to the Engineer at completion of factory acceptance testing to be incorporated into the conformed documents. 3. Conformed documents shall be provided with the panel prior to shipping/delivery to the project site. C. Control Panel Shop Drawings: The CONTRACTOR shall submit shop drawings for each control panel and enclosure being provided for this project if none were included as part of the Contract Documents. The shop drawings shall completely define and document the construction, finish, layout, power, signal and safety grounding circuits, fuses, circuit breakers, internally mounted instruments, face plate mounted instrument components, internal panel arrangements and external panel arrangements. 1. Control Panel Hardware submittal which shall include but not be limited to: a. An index shall be provided in the front of each bound volume. Drawings and data sheets associated with the panel shall be grouped together with the panels being indexed by system or process area. b. Enclosure construction details and NEMA type. c. Finish. d. Front and Interior layout. e. Power circuits. f. Signal and safety grounding circuits. g. Fuses. h. Circuit breakers. i. Signal circuits. j. Internally mounted instrumentation. k. PLCs. I. Faceplate mounted instrumentation components. m. Internal panel arrangements. n. External panel arrangements. o. Construction drawings drawn to scale which define and quantify: 1) The type and gage of fabrication steel to be used for panel fabrication. 2) The ASTM grade to be used for structural shapes and straps. Technical Specifications 13448 -2 Process Control Panels and Hardware 3) Panel door locks and hinge mechanisms. 4) Type of bolts and bolt locations for section joining and anchoring. 5) Details on the utilization of"UNISTRUT" and proposed locations. 6) Stiffener materials and locations. 7) Electrical terminal box and outlet locations. 8) Electrical access locations. 9) Print pocket locations. 10)Writing board locations. 11)Lifting lug material and locations. p. A bill of material that enumerates all devices associated with the control panel. q. Schematic/Elementary diagrams shall depict all control devices and circuits and their functions. r. Wiring/Connection diagrams shall locate and identify: 1) Electrical devices. 2) Terminals. 3) Interconnecting wiring. 4) These diagrams shall show interconnecting wiring by lines, designate terminal assignments, and show the physical location of all electrical and control devices. s. Interconnection diagrams shall locate and identify all external connections between the control panel/control panel devices and associated equipment: 1) These diagrams shall show interconnecting wiring by lines, designate terminal assignments, and show the physical location of all panel ingress and egress points. t. Control sequence diagrams shall be submitted to portray the contact positions or connections required to be made for each successive step of the control action. u. Calculations shall include but not be limited to: 1) Interior heat load 2) Required cooling and airflow 3) Required heating 2. All panel drawings shall be 22 inches by 34 inches reduced to and fully legible at 11 inches by 17 inches, and submitted at 11 inches by 17 inches format size, with all data sheets and manufacturer specification sheets being 8.5 inches by 11 inches. 3. The submittal shall be in conformance with NEMA Standard ICS-1-1.01, and each phase shall be submitted as a singular complete bound volume or multi-volume package and shall have the following contents: a. A complete index shall appear in the front of each bound volume. Technical Specifications 13448 -3 Process Control Panels and Hardware 1) All drawings and data sheets associated with a panel shall be grouped together with the panels being indexed by systems or process areas. 2) All panel tagging and nameplate nomenclature shall be consistent with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. In accordance with Division 1 and Section 13440, "Process Control Systems - General." B. All control panels and assemblies shall be labeled and listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory: 1. U.L. 508. 2. Or approved equal. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. In accordance with Section 13400, "Process Control and Instrumentation Systems General." B. All panels are to be crated for shipment using a heavy framework and skids: 1. The panel sections shall further be cushioned satisfactorily to protect the finish of the instruments and panel during shipment. 2. All instruments, which are shipped with the panel, shall further have suitable shipping stops and cushioning material installed in a manner to protect instrument parts that could be damaged due to mechanical shock during shipment. 3. Each separate panel unit shall be provided with removable lifting lugs to facilitate handling. C. All shipments shall be by dedicated air ride van, unless otherwise specified or approved. 1.8 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. In accordance with Division 1 and Section 13440, "Process Control Systems - General." 1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. In accordance with Division 1 and Section 13440, "Process Control Systems - General." B. All control panel testing shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR prior to shipping. 1.10 WARRANTY A. In accordance with Division 1 and Section 13440, "Process Control Systems - General." 1.11 MAINTENANCE A. In accordance with Division 1 and Section 13440, "Process Control Systems - General." Technical Specifications 13448 -4 Process Control Panels and Hardware PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONTROL PANEL ENCLOSURES A. Environmental Suitability: 1. All indoor and outdoor control panels and instrument enclosures shall be suitable for operation in the ambient conditions associated with the locations designated in the Contract Documents. a. Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, enclosures shall be: 1) Dry, indoor locations: NEMA 12. 2) Corrosive locations: NEMA 4X. 3) Hose down locations: NEMA 4X with slopped top. 4) Outdoor installations: NEMA 4 2. Enclosures are to be provided with an equivalently sized and compatible back panel as manufactured by the same manufacturer of the enclosure. 3. Enclosures, panels, and enclosure accessories shall be labeled with a serialized label and listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory 4. Heating, cooling, and dehumidifying devices shall be provided in order to maintain all instrumentation devices to within a range equal to 20 percent above the minimum and 20 percent below the maximum of the rated environmental operating ranges. Provide all power wiring for these devices. 5. All control panel instrumentation and enclosures in hazardous areas shall be suitable for use in the particular hazardous or classified location in which it is to be installed. B. Requirements for wall-mount enclosures: 1. Fabricate enclosures from steel with continuous welded seams. 2. External formed 90-degree minimum-width body flange. 3. Mounting holes. 4. Furnished with panel-mounting nuts, panel grounding hardware and sealing washers for wall-mounting holes. 5. Furnish with manufacturer's mounting brackets to ensure a complete UL installation. 6. Doors: Corner formed and removable by pulling the hinge pins. 7. Gaskets: Seamless foam-in-place. 8. Quarter turn latches. 9. Furnish with on door print pocket. 10. Bonding provision on door and grounding stud on body. C. Requirements for NEMA 4X enclosures: 1. Provide enclosures that consist of Type 304 stainless steel. D. Finishes Technical Specifications 13448 -5 Process Control Panels and Hardware 1. Provide NEMA 12 and NEMA 4 enclosures with a light gray enamel ANSI 61 exterior finish. Interior panels shall have a white enamel finish. 2. NEMA 4X enclosures shall be a natural smooth brushed finish. Do not paint. E. Requirements for enclosure accessories: 1. Lighting: Shall be LED as supplied by the panel manufacturer. a. Panel lighting should be mounted above the door on the front edge of the enclosure or magnetically held in a manufacturer approved method. b. Lighting shall be activated with a door switch or sensor and shall turn on when the door is opened. c. Lighting shall be able to be switched off when the door is open. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Standard manufactured panels shall be used, whenever, possible: 1. As manufactured by: a. Hoffman Engineering. b. Rittal. c. Or approved equal. 2.3 PROCESS CONTROL PANEL A. General Requirements for Process Control Panels and Hardware: 1. All control panels and assemblies shall be labeled with a serialized label and listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory: a. UL 508A for Industrial Control Panels. b. UL 698A for Industrial Control Panels Relating to Hazardous Locations. c. Or approved equal. 2. All control panel components shall be UL listed or recognized for the application in which it is being used. 3. Process Control Panel enclosures shall be appropriately sized to fit all required components. B. Basis-of-Design Product: A custom process control panel shall be supplied subject to compliance with requirements. C. Description: Process Control Panel Description: The process control panel shall house the programmable logic controller. The process control panels shall terminate field wiring for all analog and digital inputs and outputs. The control panel shall terminate instrument and pilot devices that are internally mounted. The control panel shall have wiring and provisions for communications networks, including but not limited to other process control panels, programmable automation equipment, process equipment, HMI and SCADA applications and hardware. The process control panel shall hold all process and control components, devices, equipment and accessories that are not otherwise specifically located on the drawings. D. Internal control components shall be mounted on an internal back-panel. Technical Specifications 13448 -6 Process Control Panels and Hardware E. Programmable Logic Controller: The Contractor shall provide and install the following per the Contract documents: 1. Central Control Panel OXB-CCP: a. Furnish and install Schneider Electric Modicon M340 BMXP342020 processor, in Modicon 12-slot Backplane_BMXXBP1200, with BMXCPS3500 power supply, spare 12-slot chassis and the following 1/0 modules in the quantities required to accommodate field 1/0 plus 20% spare capacity: b. Modicon Analog Input_BMXAM10810 c. Modicon Analog Output_BMXAMO0410 d. Modicon Digital Input_BMXDD11602 e. Modicon Digital Output_BMXDDO1602 2. Sorting Building Distribute 1/0 SB-RIO: a. Furnish and install Schneider Electric Modicon X80 BMXPRA0100 peripheral remote 1/0 Adapter, in Modicon 12-slot Backplane_BMXXBP1200, with BMXCPS3500 power supply and the following 1/0 modules in the quantities required to accommodate field 1/0 plus 20% spare capacity: b. Modicon Analog Input_BMXAM10810 c. Modicon Analog Output_BMXAMO0410 d. Modicon Digital Input_BMXDD11602 e. Modicon Digital Output_BMXDDO1602 3. Airburst Building Distributed 1/0 INT-RIO: a. Furnish and install Schneider Electric Modicon X80 BMXPRA0100 peripheral remote 1/0 Adapter, in Modicon 12-slot Backplane_BMXXBP1200, with BMXCPS3500 power supply and the following 1/0 modules in the quantities required to accommodate field 1/0 plus 20% spare capacity: b. Modicon Analog Input_BMXAM10810 c. Modicon Analog Output_BMXAMO0410 d. Modicon Digital Input_BMXDD11602 e. Modicon Digital Output_BMXDDO1602 4. Crowder Panels CR#-LCP: a. Furnish and install Schneider Electric Modicon M241 CE24R, with 14 discrete input and 10 discrete output onboard 1/0. 5. The PLC 1/0 shall be wired per the requirements of this specification section. 6. The PLC shall be powered from the battery system. 7. For PLC 1/0 modules requiring external 24V DC power, a fused circuit shall be provided (one common fused circuit for each PLC 1/0 module). 8. Provide panel and din rail space for mounting a minimum of two additional 1/0 modules for future expansion. Provide din rail space for the associated future 1/0 field wiring terminals. Technical Specifications 13448 - 7 Process Control Panels and Hardware 9. The PLC shall be connected to the Industrial Network Switch for system communications via manufacturer terminated and tested Ethernet patch cable. F. 1/0: Shall be per Drawings and specifications. 1. 1/0 points shall be connected to terminal blocks located within the panel. 2. 1/0 connections shall not be made directly to the PLC or PLC modules. a. Digital Inputs: Shall be 24V DC sinking type inputs. 1) An individually fused terminal block shall be provided from the positive 24VDC bus for each group of digital inputs. No more than 8 shall be allowed per group. 2) A knife disconnect terminal block shall be used for the field supply of each digital input 3) A pass-thru terminal connection shall be used for the return voltage to the input. 4) All Digital inputs shall be grouped together on the DIN rail with 24VDC supply fuse terminal block preceding each group it feeds. 5) Provide space for future terminal blocks. Provide enough space for an additional 25% of required 1/0. b. Digital Outputs: 1) Control relays shall be provided for all digital output points. 2) Digital outputs should activate the coil of the control relay. 3) Field wiring shall terminate at the contacts of the control relay. 4) Digital output control relays should be grouped together on the din rail. 5) Provide space for future digital output control relays. Provide enough space for an additional 25% of required 1/0. c. Analog Inputs: Shall be capable of single ended or differential current (4-20mA) input types. 1) An individually fused terminal block shall be provided from the positive 24VDC bus for single ended loop powered circuit. 2) A pass-thru terminal connection shall be used for the return voltage to the input on a single ended loop powered circuit. 3) Two pass-thru terminal connections shall be used for a differential circuit. 4) A grounding terminal block shall be used for connecting analog cable shield drain wire. d. Analog input wiring shall be shielded twisted pair cable with the cable shield grounded only at the grounding terminal block inside the process control panel. e. The shield drain wire shall not be connected at the transmitter or field end of the circuit. 1) All analog inputs shall be grouped together on the DIN rail. Technical Specifications 13448 -8 Process Control Panels and Hardware 2) Provide space for future terminal blocks. Provide enough space for an additional 25% of required 1/0. f. Analog Outputs: Shall be current (4-20mA) output type. 1) Two pass-thru terminal connections shall be used for output circuits. 2) A grounding terminal block shall be used for connecting analog cable shield drain wire. g. Analog input wiring shall be shielded twisted pair cable with the cable shield grounded only at the grounding terminal block. h. The shield drain wire shall not be connected at the transmitter or field end of the circuit. 1) All analog outputs shall be grouped together on the DIN rail. 2) Provide space for future terminal blocks. Provide enough space for an additional 25% of required 1/0. G. Uninterruptable Power Supply: 1. Furnish and install APC SUA500PDR-H with (2) high temp batteries or approved alternate. a. The UPS shall be installed within the enclosure on the backpanel. b. Provide with 10 card with relay outputs. Outputs shall include the following: 1) Battery Fail 2) Utility Fail 3) UPS Fault c. The UPS shall be wired for UPS fault and Loss of Line Power indication. H. Industrial Network Switch: Provide Industrial Ethernet Switch as indicated in the contract documents.. 1. Furnish and install Ethernet Patch cables for connection between all Ethernet connected devices and instruments. a. Connect Programmable Process Controller to switch via male RJ45 to male RJ45 manufactured and tested patch cord. 1. 24V DC Power Supply: Provide (2) 24VDC power supplies for powering the control panel components and field instruments. 1. Furnish and install Allen Bradley 1606-XLS120E. 2. The power supplies shall be configured as redundant, so that the failure of one will not affect the operation of the PCP and connected components. 3. The power supplies shall have the "Power Supply OK" signals wired for indication. 4. The power supplies shall be powered from the 120 VAC UPS backed control power circuit. 5. The input shall be fuse protected per manufacturer recommendations. 6. The outputs of each power supply shall be fuse protected. Technical Specifications 13448 -9 Process Control Panels and Hardware 7. The negative or com of 24V DC supply shall be grounded. J. HMI: Sorting and Spawning "SB-LCP" 1. Touch Screen Panel Mount Monitor as indicated in contract documents. 2. The touch screen operator interface shall be mounted through the enclosure console top and sealed with the proper manufacturer gaskets and hardware in order to maintain the panel enclosure rating. K. Panel HVAC Equipment: Panels mounted outdoors, or in high humidity areas shall have the following accessories: Thermostatically controlled heaters that shall maintain the inside temperature above 40 degrees Fahrenheit. 1. HVAC components shall be Hoffman, or approved alternate. L. Control Power Requirements: 1. Source power for control panels: Supply all transformers, protection, and power supplies needed to convert the supply voltage to the needed utilization voltage within each control panel. a. All control panels shall be supplied with 120 VAC, Single phase, 60 Hz. power, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. b. The control power shall be terminated within the process control panel at a main circuit breaker rated for the internal and external control loads. 1) The hot conductor shall terminate on the line side of the main circuit breaker. 2) The Neutral conductor shall terminate on a pass through terminal block mounted adjacent to the main circuit breaker. 3) The ground conductor shall terminated and on a grounding terminal block adjacent to the main circuit breaker. c. Surge protective devices shall be installed on the 120 VAC circuit and shall provide line and neutral protection. 1) The line conductor shall be wired in parallel to the surge protective device on the load side of the main control power circuit breaker. 2) The neutral conductor shall be wired in parallel to the surge protective device at the incoming neutral pass thru terminal block. 3) The surge protective devices shall be grounded per the manufacturer's installation instructions. Grounding terminal blocks shall be used for ground connections. d. The Process Control Panel power shall be UPS backed. 1) The 120 VAC UPS line power shall be sourced from the surge protected 120 VAC process control panel circuit. The cord shall be wired to terminal blocks within the panel. 2) The Process Control Panel 120V AC control power bus shall be cord and plug connected to the UPS outlet power. The cord shall be wired to terminal blocks within the panel. Technical Specifications 13448 - 10 Process Control Panels and Hardware 2. Where the supply voltage to the control panel is 480 or 240 VAC as indicated on the electrical plans the control panel is to be furnished with a front mounted pad lockable integral disconnect. 3. The Process Control Panel control power shall be the source of power for all control instruments connected to the Process Control Panel, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. a. All circuits being used to power field devices from the control panel 120 VAC bus are to be connected to a fused terminal block adequately sized for the device it serves. b. Terminal blocks shall be provided for all internal and field installed equipment being powered from control panel 120 VAC power bus. c. Provide a minimum of 30% spare terminal blocks for future 120 VAC powered equipment. 4. The Process Control Panel shall be the source of power for all 24 VDC control instruments and devices connected to the Process Control Panel, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. a. All circuits being used to power field devices from the control panel 24VDC bus are to be connected to a fused terminal block adequately sized for the device it serves. b. Terminal blocks shall be provided for all internal and field installed equipment being powered from 24 VDC control power. c. Provide a minimum of 30% spare terminal blocks for future 24 VDC powered equipment. M. Wiring Requirements: 1. Wiring Methods: Wiring methods and materials for all panels shall be in accordance with the NEC requirements for General Purpose (all wiring shall be finger safe). 2. Each terminal connection shall have a terminal number. 3. Signal Wiring: a. Wiring shall be UL type, SIS, or MTW, flexible stranded copper, control wire with 90°C, 600 V insulation. b. Analog signal wiring shall be shielded, twisted, pair. c. Minimum conductor sizes shall be as follows: 1) AC power circuits: #14 AWG minimum. 2) Digital DC circuits: #16 AWG minimum. 3) Instrument and communication circuits: #16 AWG minimum. d. Multi-conductor cables, wire ways and conduit shall be sized to allow for 20 percent spare signal wire. 4. Wire Marking: All wires shall be labeled at both ends with unique wire labels and shall be identified on panel shop drawings. a. These numbers shall be marked on all conductors at every terminal. Technical Specifications 13448 - 11 Process Control Panels and Hardware b. Wire labels shall be white heat shrink polyolefin sleeves with black lettering. c. Wire labels shall Panduit or equal. 5. Wire ways: Where possible, wiring shall be run in plastic wire duct with covers. a. Where it is not possible to contain the wiring in the duct, the wiring shall be wrapped with plastic spiral binding. b. The plastic wire duct and spiral binding shall be as manufactured by the Panduit Company or equal. c. Wire bundles crossing hinges shall be securely clamped to both the door and panel, and run parallel to the hinge for at least half the door length to prevent chafing. d. No splicing shall be permitted in the wire duct or spiral wrapped bundle. 6. Wiring Installation: a. Signal and low voltage control wiring shall be run separately from 480 VAC wiring: 1) 480 & 240 VAC circuits shall be run through gray colored plastic wire ways. 2) 120 VAC & 24 VDC circuits shall be run through white colored plastic wire ways. 7. Grounding: a. Furnish equipment ground bus with lugs for connection of all equipment grounding wires. N. All control panel mounted operator interface devices shall be mounted between: 1. A minimum of 3 feet above finished floor or grade elevation. 2. A maximum of 6 feet above finished floor or grade elevation. O. All Process Control Panels shall be factory tested prior to shipping. 2.4 CONTROL PANEL COMPONENTS A. Miniature circuit breakers 1. Miniature circuit breakers shall be thermal-magnetic, current-limiting type. Breaker housing shall satisfy Insulation Group II/RAL 7035, shall have IP20 finger-safe design, shall be suitable for DIN rail mounting and shall include status indicator window and scratch- and solvent-resistant printing. a. Miniature circuit breakers shall be Allen-Bradley Bulletin 1489-M or approved equal. b. Miniature circuit breakers shall be rated for: 1) Voltage — Max. 480Y/277 VAC, 48V DC (UL/CSA), 2) Interrupting capacity— 10 kA (UL/CSA) 2. Miniature circuit breakers shall support reversible line and load connections and shall have dual terminals that: a. Connect up to 4 wires, or 2 wires and a bus bar. Technical Specifications 13448 - 12 Process Control Panels and Hardware b. Clamp conductors from both the top side and bottom side. 3. Miniature circuit breakers shall be compatible with UL 508 Listed bus bars, auxiliary contacts, signal contacts, shunt trips and toggle-mount lockout attachments. B. Surge protector 1. Surge protectors shall use an MOV to clamp high voltage surges. The surge protective device shall provide visual indication, internal thermal disconnecting as well as remote monitoring of event and end of life failure. The surge protector shall be UL 1449 certified. a. Surge protective devices shall be Allen Bradley bulletin 4983-DS or approved equal. C. Control Relays - Miniature 1. Miniature relays shall be, 2-pole, plug-in type with blade-style terminals and ON/OFF flag indicators. Miniature relays shall have an electrical schematic on the faceplate and a clear cover for visual inspection. a. Miniature relays shall be Allen Bradley Bulletin 700-HK or approved equal. b. Shall be furnished with a plug-in, latching, finger safe, DIN rail mounted type socket with coil and contact separation. c. Coils shall be rated for the voltage applied. 2. Miniature relay contacts shall be silver nickel and have 8A minimum, DPDT ratings. D. Wire terminating components 1. Feed-through and fused terminal blocks for control wiring shall be molded type, screw compression clamp, DIN rail mounted with barriers rated not less than 300V, 25A, suitable for conductor ranging between No. 22 and No. 14. a. Terminal blocks shall be Allen Bradley Bulletin 1492-J4 or approved equal. b. Grounding terminal blocks shall provide DIN rail grounding clamp. Grounding terminal blocks shall be Allen Bradly 1492-JG4 or approved equal. c. Fuse blocks shall be Allen Bradley 1492-WFB4 or approved equal 1) All fuse holders shall be populated with fuses and 100% spare fuses shall be supplied. d. Fuses shall be appropriately sized for the application and power requirements of the load. 2. Terminal block end anchors shall be used to secure all components onto the DIN rail at both ends of the DIN rail. a. End anchors shall be 1492-EAJ35 or approved equal. E. Pilot devices 1. Pilot devices shall be 30.5 MM type 4/4X push buttons, selector switches and pilot lights. a. Provide Allen Bradley series 800H NEMA 4X switches. b. Switches shall be maintained positions type switches with a positive detent to prevent the switch from hanging up between positions. Technical Specifications 13448 - 13 Process Control Panels and Hardware c. Provide SCADA indication of remote status of local/remote switch on all remote process control panels. 2. Provide stainless steel keyed legend plates supplied by the pilot device manufacturer identifying the functionality for all pilot devices. For example, an HOA switch shall have a legend indicating the Hand, Off and Auto positions. 3. Process control panel pilot devices shall be mounted on the enclosure door and appropriately spaced to allow unobstructed operation of switching mechanisms. 4. An enclosure door panel layout detailing pilot device locations and labels shall be included with submittal material. F. Nameplates 1. Furnish nameplates for enclosure and door mounted components. a. Nameplates shall be made of adhesive backed laminated plastic cut through to a high contrast background. 1) Door mounted components such as switches and indicating lights shall have 1/4" tall lettering. 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Labor and Workmanship: All panels shall be fabricated, piped, and wired by fully qualified workmen who are properly trained, experienced and supervised. B. General: Calibration, testing, and instruction shall be provided in accordance with the applicable requirements of Section 13440, "Process Control Systems - General." C. Inspection and Approval: 1. The CONTRACTOR shall conduct the following tests prior to arrival of the OWNER and/or OWNER's representative: a. All alarm circuits rung out to determine their operability. b. All electrical circuits checked for continuity and where applicable, operability. c. All nameplates checked for correct spelling and size of letters. d. The PLC 1/0 test as identified in Section 13400, "Process Control and Instrumentation Systems General." 2. It shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to furnish all necessary testing devices and sufficient manpower to perform the tests required by the OWNER and/or OWNER's representative. 3. If the above tests have not been performed prior to the arrival of the OWNER and/or OWNER's representative, the CONTRACTOR shall be liable for back charges by the OWNER for the extra time required for the witnessing services. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. In accordance with Section 13440, "Process Control Systems - General." 3.2 INSTALLATION Technical Specifications 13448 - 14 Process Control Panels and Hardware A. Control panel installation shall be provided in accordance with: B. The applicable requirements of Section 13440, "Process Control Systems - General." 1. The requirements of Electrical specifications. 2. The requirements and installation instructions of the CONTRACTOR. C. Control panels that are adjacent to Motor Starters shall be fully wired to the motor control by the Electrical Contractor, using wireways integral to the Motor Starters or additional conduits as needed: D. Control panels that are not adjacent to Motor Starters shall be fully wired to the Motor Starters by the Electrical Contractor. The Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install all necessary conduits and wire between the control panel and MCC based upon the loop drawings furnished by the CONTRACTOR, at no additional cost to the OWNER. E. Absolutely no penetrations shall be made through the top of the enclosure. Penetrations are to be made in either the side, bottom of the enclosure or both. F. Process Control Panels shall be fully wired to all field devices as indicated by the Drawings. G. Protect the internal panel components from metal shavings, liquids and construction debris at all times. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. All enclosures shall be mounted so that their surfaces are plumb and level to within ± 1/16 inch over the entire surface of the panel. 3.4 CLEANING A. In accordance with Section 13400, "Process Control and Instrumentation Systems General." 3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. In accordance with Section 13400, "Process Control and Instrumentation Systems General." B. Manufacture representative is required to provide product overview, demonstration, training and training materials adequate to the needs of NPS Contracting officer and site operators. 3.6 IDENTIFICATION A. On each Control Panel and field instrument, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and Operation and Maintenance Manual. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect all surfaces from damage, any surface damage, shall be repaired and/or replaced as directed by the OWNER. 3.8 SCHEDULES A. All control panel testing shall be performed prior to shipping. B. In accordance with Division 1 and Section 13440, "Process Control Systems - General." Technical Specifications 13448 - 15 Process Control Panels and Hardware 3.9 TRAINING A. In accordance with Division 1 and Section 13440, "Process Control Systems - General." END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 13448 - 16 Process Control Panels and Hardware SECTION 13450 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (PLC) CONTROL SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Programmable logic controller (PLC) control system(s), including software, programming, and training. B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions, Sections, and Drawings apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and its Sub-Contractors to review all of the Contract Documents to insure a complete and coordinated 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): a. C37.90.2, Trial-Use Standard Withstand Capability of Relay Systems to Radiated Electromagnetic Interference from Transceivers. b. C62.41, Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits. 2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. ICS 1, General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems. B. Qualifications: 1. Installation supervisor shall have had experience in overseeing installation and startup of at least three (3) similar installations. 2. Programmer(s) shall have had experience in programming PLCs for at least two (2) projects of similar size and complexity. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Division 01 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. See Specification Section 13440. 3. Product technical data including: a. Annotated hard copies of PLC software programs. 1) Submit program for logic in ladder diagram format as used for the specific PLC system. 2) Annotate program listing to include the following: Technical Specifications 13450- 1 PLC System a) Written description of each rung's function. b) Reference to control loop number for each rung where applicable. c) Reference to instrumentation tag number of 1/0 devices for each rung where applicable. 3) Provide written descriptions completely defining all function blocks used in program. 4) Provide list of all addresses referenced in logic diagram with description of data associated with each address. b. Results of factory testing procedures. c. Catalog cut sheets containing information on PLC components to be submitted as part of this Specification Section submittals. 4. Certifications: a. Qualifications of installation supervisor. b. Qualifications of programmer(s). B. Contract Closeout Information: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. See Specification Division 01 for requirements for the mechanics, administration, and the content of Operation and Maintenance Manual submittals. 2. Submit maintenance procedures available to Owner. a. Include the location and phone numbers of service centers (including 24 HR "hot lines"). b. Provide specific information including operation and maintenance requirements, programming assistance, troubleshooting guide, parts ordering, field service personnel requests, and service contracts. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Schneider Electric, Modicon. 2. No like, equivalent, "or equal" item or substitution is permitted. 2.2 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. See Specification Section 13440. B. The PLC system shall accomplish the control requirements of the Functional Descriptions/Sequence of Operations, Drawings, and Specifications. C. PLC programming shall be documented and factory tested. D. The PLC system shall operate in ambient conditions of 32 to 140 DegF temperature and 5 to 95 percent relative humidity without the need for purging or air conditioning. Technical Specifications 13450-2 PLC System E. Environmental Controls: 1. Furnish circulation fans in solid state control system enclosures. 2. Over-temperature switches shall be utilized to provide special cooling if required to maintain operating temperatures within the manufacturer's specified range. 3. Air conditioning applications shall include means of preventing moisture condensation. F. Where the PLC is utilized to control multiple trains of equipment and where the equipment in each train operates as a unit relatively independent of other equipment trains the PLC components (1/0 modules, power supplies, etc.) shall be assigned so that the failure of any one (1) component does not affect equipment on all trains. 1. 1/0 modules shall be segregated on a train basis unless required otherwise for safety reasons. 2. Where several equipment units operate in parallel, but are not considered assigned to a particular equipment train (e.g., multiple raw water pumps or chemical feed pumps all discharging into a common system), the PLC 1/0 modules associated with each equipment unit shall be assigned so that the failure of any one (1) 1/0 module does not affect all of the parallel operating equipment units. G. All PLC control system components shall be capable of meeting or exceeding electromagnetic interference tests per IEEE C37.90.2. H. Incorporate the following minimum safety measures: 1. Watchdog function to monitor: a. Internal processor clock failure. b. Processor memory failure. c. Loss of communication between processor and 1/0 modules. d. Processor ceases to execute logic program. 2. Safety function wiring: Emergency shutdown switches shall not be wired into the controller. 3. Safe wiring: a. Unless otherwise specified, activation of alarms and stopping of equipment shall result from the de-energization of control circuits, rather than the energization of control circuits. b. Low voltage control signal wires: 1) Place in conduit segregated for that purpose only. 2) Twisted shielded wire pair. 3) Not located in the same conduit or bundle with power wiring. 4. Initial safety conditions: a. Utilize program module to dictate output states in a known and safe manner prior to running of control program. b. Utilize program each time PLC is re-initiated and the control program activated. Technical Specifications 13450-3 PLC System 5. Monitoring of internal faults and display: a. Internal PLC system status and faults shall be monitored and displayed. 1) Monitored items shall include: a) Memory ok/loss of memory. b) Processor ok/processor fault. c) Scan time overrun. 6. Control of programs: Protect access to PLC program loading with password protection or with locked, key operated selector switches. 7. Design PLC system with high noise immunity to prevent occurrence of false logic signals resulting from switching transients, relay and circuit breaker noise or conducted and radiated radio frequency interference. 8. Operator intervention: a. Logic system failure shall not preclude proper operator intervention. b. Safety shutdown of equipment or a system shall require manual operator intervention before the equipment or system operation may be reestablished. 2.3 COMPONENTS A. PLC System Communications Processor: 1. The Communications Processor shall provide communications with the PLC Central Processor, other control systems, and man-machine interfaces as specified. B. PLC System Enclosure: 1. In accordance with Specification Section 13448. 2. Wiring and grounding to be in accordance with Specification Section 13448. 3. Termination requirements: a. In accordance with Specification Section 13448. b. Make connections to 1/0 subsystem by terminating all field wiring on terminal blocks within the enclosure. c. Prewire 1/0 modules to terminal blocks. d. Size terminals to accommodate all active database points and spares. e. Provide terminals for individual termination of each signal shield. f. Field wiring shall not be disturbed when removing or replacing an 1/0 module. C. PLC System Software and Programming: 1. Provide all hardware and programming required to provide communication between the PLC and the human-machine interface. 2. Provide programming to accomplish all control and monitoring requirements of the Drawings and Specifications. 3. Provide two (2) copies of control logic program on memory stick. 4. Full documentation capability. Technical Specifications 13450-4 PLC System a. Provide description for each rung. 5. On/off line programming. 6. Offline simulation prior to download. 7. Two-step commands requiring operator verification prior to deletion of any programming. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Provide all accessories required to furnish a complete PLC control system to accomplish the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications. 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide a performance test after factory completion and prior to shipment. 1. Conduct a test where the system is operated continuously and checked for correct operation including loop controls, displays, printing, keyboard functions, alarm responses, and on/off sequencing control. 2. Conduct testing with emulated 1/0 to verify each control loop operation. 3. Allow for Owner and Engineer representatives to witness testing program. a. Provide minimum of 15 days notice prior to testing. 4. Do not ship prior to successful completion of this testing program. 2.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish Owner with the following extra materials: 1. One (1) spare 1/0 card of each card type for every 10 cards or fraction thereof installed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install PLC control system in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Employ and pay for services of field service representative(s) to: 1. Inspect equipment covered by these Specifications. 2. Supervise adjustments and installation checks. 3. Maintain and submit an accurate log of all commissioning functions. a. All commissioning functions may be witnessed by the Engineer. b. All reports shall be cosigned by the Contractor and the Engineer if witnessed. 4. Conduct startup of equipment and perform operational checks. 5. Provide Owner with a written statement that manufacturer's equipment has been installed properly, started up, and is ready for operation by Owner's personnel. 3.3 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate system in accordance with Specification Section 13441. Technical Specifications 13450-5 PLC System END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 13450-6 PLC System SECTION 13451 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM —TESTING 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY 1.1.1 General: This section sets forth the requirements for testing a complete process control system. 1.1.2 Related Sections: 1.1.2.1 The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and its Sub-Contractors to review all sections to insure a complete and coordinated protect. 1.1.3 Proper Process Control System 1/0 Loop Testing shall be carried out by the CONTRACTOR prior to the Control System Programmer coming onsite to startup the system. 1.2 SUBMITTALS 1.2.1 General: Follow the procedures specified in Division 1 Section. Submit for final and official approval through the General Contractor. 1.2.2 Prior to system testing, CONTRACTOR/PROGRAMMER shall provide test scripts and written procedures for system testing to IPC 1.2.3 CONTRACTOR shall submit 1/0 Loop Test Documentation to the Engineer and to the Owner. Specific documentation requirements are detailed in Part 3 of this specification. 1.2.4 Control System Programmer shall submit Functional Test documentation to the Engineer and to the Owner for review and approval prior to system startup. 1.2.5 Once control system startup has been completed, Control System Programmer shall submit complete and signed Functional Test documentation. 2.0 PRODUCTS Not Applicable. Technical Specifications 13451- 1 Process Control System Testing 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 110 LOOP TESTING 3.1.1 General Testing Procedures: The CONTRACTOR shall provide all necessary labor, tools, and equipment to field test, inspect and adjust each instrument installed under this contract to its specified performance requirement in accordance with manufacturer's specifications and instructions. 3.1.2 The Contractor shall test all wiring and primary control devices. The contractor shall provide documentation to the Owner of the testing procedures and results of the following: 3.1.2.1 All Process Control Panels are installed, connected to power, and fully wired for all 1/0 points shown on the Process Control Panel Shop drawings. 3.1.2.2 All field instruments are installed, wired, powered and produce the appropriate signal at the Process Control Panel. 3.1.2.3 All panels and devices capable of being powered on and off have had power cycled for verification and have been documented as functional. 3.1.3 When possible the Contractor shall simulate events of actual processes during testing. 3.1.3.1 All 1/0 points shall be tested. The results of the test shall be documented. 3.1.3.2 Any 1/0 point that is not tested shall be documented as well as the reason for not being tested. 3.1.4 If system malfunctions are found during 1/0 Loop Testing, efforts to correct malfunctions must be made. Any malfunction not capable of being corrected prior to submitting 1/0 Loop Testing documentation to the Owner shall be documented including the procedures and actions taken attempting to correct the malfunction. 3.1.5 Loop testing shall be performed on all digital inputs, digital outputs, analog inputs, and analog outputs. Testing shall be performed without unwiring and rewiring when possible. 3.1.5.1 Digital input testing shall be performed and completed by exercising the field instrument or device. Continuity between the field side of the disconnect terminal block and input field wiring terminal block shall be verified. Results of the tests shall be documented with field device name and input number. 3.1.5.2 Analog inputs shall be verified and documented for proper current/voltage range received at the PLC panel from the powered field instrument. Document the results of the tests. If the field Technical Specifications 13451-2 Process Control System Testing instrument is unavailable, verify wiring is correct and proper current/voltage range is received at the panel using a signal generating device such as a process meter or other loop calibrator. 3.1.5.3 Digital output circuits shall be tested by lumping the digital output relay contacts in the process control panel. The proper response should be observed and verified at the field instrument or device. Document the results of the tests. 3.1.5.4 Analog outputs should be tested using a process stvlg test meter that can provide a 4-20mA simulated source. An appropriate response should be observed and verified at the field device. Document the results of the tests. 3.1.6 All motors and valves with automated controls and a Hand-Off-Auto switch shall be operated in Hand to verify functionality. Results of the test shall be documented. 3.2 FUNCTIONAL TESTING 3.2.1 Functional testing shall prove out the Control system operation as outlined in the contract documents and the Process Control Description. 3.2.2 All alarm conditions shall be simulated and verified that alarms are generated and properly notified through the SCADA system. 3.2.3 The touch screen Operator Interface shall be capable of system navigation and adjustment of all Operator adjustable set points. 3.2.4 Provide documentation of all conditions and alarms tested and provided with project closeout material. 3.2.5 Provide documentation showing instrument manufacturer, model, range and scaled range within PLC/SCADA with engineering units. 3.2.6 Testing shall be completed when the system is capable of being automatically operated (without manual Operator intervention) for a period of approximately one week. At the end of this time period, the Owner shall sign-off as testing complete and system operational. Alternatively, the Owner may sign-off before the one week time period if completely satisfied and willing to sign off early. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 13451- 3 Process Control System Testing SECTION 13452 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENTS: HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI) AND REPORTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Configuration requirements for HMI and reports which includes but is not necessarily limited to. a. Specific software functional descriptions. b. Graphics requirements. c. HMI functionality requirements. d. Plant overview screens. e. Process overview screens. f. Detail displays. g. Trend displays. h. PLC hardware/HMI status screen. i. Alarm monitoring. j. Report generation. k. Configuration standards and conventions. I. Screen configuration review meetings. m. Report configuration review meetings. n. Coordination. B. Related Specification Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements. 2. Division 01 - General Requirements. 3. Section 13440 - Instrumentation for Process Control: Basic Requirements. Technical Specifications 13452- 1Configuration Requirements: Human Machine Interface (HMI) and Reports 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Programmer(s) shall have had experience in software configuration and installation for at least two (2) projects of similar size and complexity. B. Standards: 1. The International Society of Automation a. ISA— 101.01 Human Machine Interfaces for Process Automation Systems 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. HMI: Human Machine Interface. B. 1/0: Input/Output. C. OLE: Object Linking and Embedding, a document standard developed by Microsoft that enables the creation of an object with one application and the linking or embedding of the object in a second application. D. OPC: "OLE for Process Control"; a software standard utilizing a client/server model that makes interoperability possible between automation/control applications and field systems/devices. E. PC: Personal Computer. F. PLC: Programmable Logic Controller. G. SCADA: Supervisory Control And Data Acquisiton 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. See Specification Section 13440 for requirements for the mechanics and administration of the submittal process. 2. Software Configuration Standards and Conventions document. 3. Graphic screen displays; provide in actual colors utilized. 4. Sample reports. 5. Certifications: a. Qualifications of programmer(s). B. Contract Closeout Information: Technical Specifications 13452- 2Configuration Requirements: Human Machine Interface (HMI) and Reports 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. See Specification Section 13440 for requirements for the mechanics, administration, and the content of Operation and Maintenance Manual submittals. 2. Software Configuration Standards and Conventions -final version. C. Informational Submittals: 1. Results of factory testing procedures. 2. Proposed training agendas and schedule. 1.5 GENERAL FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. Software Functional Requirements: 1. General functional requirements for system configuration are indicated on the Drawings and described in the Specifications. 2. The information presented herein and indicated on the Drawings illustrates the general functional intent of the system and may not be sufficient to fully configure the system. 3. The Contractor is responsible for determining what additional information may be required to complete the configuration tasks, and for obtaining this information from the Owner. B. Available Process Values: 1. All process alarm, equipment status, process variable values and process interlocks shall be available at any HMI. 2. If communications to a particular 1/0 point has failed for any reason, then wherever that data is displayed, the software shall post a visual indication that the point is not valid. C. Provide comprehensive on-line help for all development functions. D. Manual Entry of Data: 1. All PC-based HMIs must allow manual entry of surrogate data and other variables, which must then be available for display and use in reports. a. Operator-entered commands from any of the operator workstations must be logged by the computer servers. E. System Failure: 1. Failure of any PLC, remote 1/0 hardware, or network communication link must be individually alarmed at HMIs. Technical Specifications 13452-Konfiguration Requirements: Human Machine Interface (HMI) and Reports 2. Unless otherwise specified, each alarm must be specific to a single point of failure. F. Software shall be as indicated on the Network Diagram. G. All process related functions, calculations, timers, and numeric manipulations, shall be accomplished in the PLC hardware and not in the HMI. 1. The HMI shall function as a monitoring system, not as a process controller. 2. The HMI shall transfer data to the PLC system and the PLC system shall perform all control algorithms. 1.6 SECURITY A. Fully integrate security into the SCADA system to allow only users with appropriate security levels access to individual parts of the system. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SPECIFIC SOFTWARE FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTIONS A. Specific functional requirements for various software control blocks within the computer system are as follows. B. Descriptions are general and are not intended to fully indicate the complete functionality of the system. 1. Monitoring of process values: a. Process values derived from analog process variable signals must be historically archived. 1) Store all historical data with time and date of occurrence. 2) Make values available for use in reports. 3) Assign high and low alarms to process values as defined below and otherwise deemed appropriate. b. Provide capability for computer server(s) to retrieve real-time values from the PLC system at adjustable time periods. c. Alarm limits: 1) Set per direction from the Owner. a) Owner (Idaho Power) has asked for three main types of alarm priorities: (1) High Priority (2) Low Priority (3) Information (can be delt with on the next business day) Technical Specifications 13452-4Configuration Requirements: Human Machine Interface (HMI) and Reports b) Owner (Idaho Power) has asked that any life-critical alarms activate the siren or auditory alarm horn on the exterior of the building 2) An operator having proper security authorization must be able to enable, disable, and adjust the setpoint of any individual alarm. C. Utilize graphic screen displays at the HMI(s) to provide monitoring and control functionality. 1. Hierarchy of HMI screens is in descending order as follows: a. Plant overview screen(s). b. Process overview screens. c. Process screens. d. Pop-up/control screens. D. HMI operator interface functionality shall include: 1. Indication of process variables. 2. Configuration of control loop parameters (e.g., setpoints, gains, etc.). 3. Adjustment of controller output. 4. Display of real time and historical process trends. 5. Selector switch and pushbutton station controls. 6. System and process status indicators. 7. Graphic representation of plant operations with interactive status and measurement symbols. 8. Annunciation. E. Graphics: 1. Utilize dynamic variables with unique tags per graphic. 2. Dragging the mouse over designated process areas of screen shall allow the operator to select predetermined processes or equipment and drill down to site-specific detail screens. 3. Critical 'overview" information such as tank levels, flows and pressures shall be indicated through data fields or animation effects such as level fills or color change. Technical Specifications 13452-Konfiguration Requirements: Human Machine Interface (HMI) and Reports 4. All monitored and or controlled process equipment shall indicate status changes. a. For example, a pump "running" condition shall be indicated differently than a pump that is "not running." 5. Tank and vessel levels shall be indicated with a tabular data field and by a scaled analog graphic with a real time trend indicating a rising or falling level within the tank or vessel. The same Graphic shall also include scaled alarm points to provide an understanding of abnormal conditions approaching alarm levels. 6. Provide the ability to "drill down" to detail screens or graphics. a. Clicking on a device or process area shall generate a detail graphic or pop-up window to access specific data or control functions. b. All operator adjustments (e.g., set point adjustment, mode selection) shall be accomplished via a pop-up display, and shall not be allowed on the process screen. 7. Standard symbol library: a. Must follow ISA 101.01 b. User defined. c. Must not require software programming. 8. Single keystroke access from graphic to group display or other custom graphic displays. 9. Capable of being edited by moving, copying, or grouping user defined areas of screen. 10. Utilize a navigation bar. a. Navigation bar utilized on every screen. b. Navigation bar to include navigation functions, active alarm notification, security functions, current date/time display, "PRINT SCREEN" pushbutton, and other functions as required and as agreed upon at the Screen Configuration Review Meetings. 11. The displays shall be animated as necessary to clearly convey equipment status, operation modes, process displays, alarms, etc: a. Equipment status colors: Must follow ISA 101.01. 12. Provide numeric representation of process signals in engineering units. Graphical animation shall also be used to depict levels in tanks, wetwells, and sumps where these signals are available. Technical Specifications 13452-Konfiguration Requirements: Human Machine Interface (HMI) and Reports F. Process Overview Screens: 1. As a minimum, provide screens as listed below. a. This list is meant to serve as an initial guide; final determination of process and equipment screen requirements will be made during the Configuration Conferences. 2. At a process overview screen, the operator shall be able to select a specific process screen for monitoring/control purposes. a. Monitoring and control functions available at the selected process screen include but are not limited to the following: 1) Select individual equipment items for monitoring and control. 2) Select a control loop or point for control action. 3) Change control mode of loop selected (manual, automatic, cascade). 4) Change setpoint. 5) Issue commands to start/stop and open/close two-state equipment. 6) For manual loading output stations, the operator shall be able to manipulate analog output values. 7) Select a loop and initiate further display, such as the detail display, trend, or hourly averaging. 8) Display and change ratio and bias values. 9) Control field equipment such as motor-operated valves and switches. 10) In general, any timer, setpoint values, or other control parameter that could be changed during commissioning testing or normal operations should be made available to the Operator. Password protection should be required to make changes. 11)Entries made by the operator (such as operation modes, setpoints, etc.) shall be displayed on the process screens for information. All entries and changes shall be tracked in an event log. 12)The PLC shall keep track of daily equipment run-times. The run-time values shall be automatically reset once a day, at 8:30 am after the values have been automatically recorded. 3. Screens: Technical Specifications 13452-Konfiguration Requirements: Human Machine Interface (HMI) and Reports a. General: The screens for process control/observation shall be configured using a three level hierarchy plus an alarm screen, PLC System status screen, Report Selection screen, and real-time/historical trend displays. The top level is the plant overview. The second level is the process screens with the equipment control detail screens the bottom level. Plant screens shall be based on the existing general layout and color conventions currently in use at the plant. b. Plant overview: The process overview screen shall consist of a full schematic of the process and contain active displays for the major plant flows and levels. Each process area shall be "active" so that clicking with the mouse will take the operator to a process screen showing full status for all of the items in that process area. At the bottom of the process overview screen shall be a button to move to the alarm screen, a button to move to the historical/real time trend display screen, a button to move to report generation, and a button to move to the PLC system status screen. c. Process screens: The Process Screens shall be developed to show the full status for each piece of equipment within the process displayed. The color of the equipment shall vary as well as a text indicator to show the status of each valve, pump, etc. All analog values associated with the process HVACs displayed shall be shown. Each piece of equipment which can be controlled shall be "active" and allow the operator to click on the equipment and bring up a pop-up equipment control detail screen. There shall be three buttons in the same location at the bottom of each process screen to move back to the plant overview screen, the alarm screen, and the trend screen. d. Equipment control detail pop-up: Develop a set of standard equipment control detail pop-ups to be used for each type of equipment controlled from the OIS. Each pop-up shall include a DONE button which hides the pop-up when done. Equipment symbol elements in the pop-up shall be animated to show when the equipment changes state to the command state. e. Alarm screen: Regardless of which screen an operator is on, a flashing red ALARM box will come up on the current screen directing the user to the alarms screen. The flashing red ALARM box will not go away until the alarm is acknowledged by a user. Alarm designation names are called out in the respective control loop description. By clicking the alarm box on any screen, the operator will view the Alarm Screen. f. Trend screen: The trend screens shall include an adjustable 8 pen display with adjustable time scales and adjustable process value scales. The eight variables shall be selected by use of the mouse from a plain English pull-down menu for each pen. The trend screen shall include the capability to show both real-time and historical trend information on a continuous graph. Technical Specifications 13452-Konfiguration Requirements: Human Machine Interface (HMI) and Reports g. PLC system status screen: The PLC system status screen shall depict a block diagram of the plant PLC system and the communication links to the PLCs and 1/0 Bases distributed throughout the plant. The status of the communication links shall be indicated by color and the status of the individual 1/0 racks shall also be indicated by color. Colors: Gray - nominal, Yellow flashing - alarm/failed. h. The OIS displays shall be animated as necessary to clearly convey equipment status, operation modes, process displays, alarms, etc: G. Detail Display: 1. Provide separate display for each point. a. Representations of each analog and digital point shall be single user configured faceplate. b. Display shall include alphanumeric representations of all variables and parameters for single loops including but not limited to: 1) Alarm points. 2) Limits. 3) Constants. 4) Interconnections to other loops. 5) Calculating functions. H. Trend Displays: 1. Real time historical trend displays. 2. Real time on-line trend displays. 3. Capable of displaying multiple points per display. 4. Operator shall be able to select any desired sample time interval. 5. Provide flexibility and easy access to real time and historical trend information for any variable TAG defined within the SCADA application. a. As a minimum, provide the following: 1) Provide capability for the user to define trend scenarios. 2) Provide a button to open a dialog window to select multiple variable TAGS and save them as a trend scenario for future use. 3) Provide a pull-down menu to allow the user to open saved trend scenarios. Technical Specifications 13452-Konfiguration Requirements: Human Machine Interface (HMI) and Reports 4) Provide a button to allow the user to select real-time or historical trends. 5) Provide a button to save displayed trend info to a file for export to external software applications (such as Microsoft Excel). 6) Provide a Print Trend button to allow user to print current trend. 6. Utilize Historical Data Server(s) to collect and manage data. At a minimum equipment run times, electrical characteristics and instrumentation values shall be logged. I. PLC Hardware/HMI Status Screen: 1. Provide a status screen to depict status conditions and diagnostic information for all major networked equipment. 2. Depict communication status for all networked communicating devices, such as PLC processors, Ethernet switches, PCs, and radios. J. Alarm Monitoring: 1. Provide standard alarm screen functionality to ensure flexibility and quick access to live alarms, alarm history and alarm grouping parameters. a. As a minimum, include the following features and functionality: 1) An Alarm Screen header bar to head all alarm pages and reside below the Navigation Bar. 2) Buttons to dynamically switch between Alarm Summary and Alarm H istory. 3) A menu to allow user to select and open historical alarm archives. a) Utilize a time-date stamp file structure. 4) Pull-down menu bar to select operator configured alarm groups. 5) Capability to sort alarms by priority and to define priority for all system alarms. 6) Capability to filter or group alarms. 2. Analog alarms: a. The SCADA software shall monitor analog and discrete variables and calculated conditions, and determine if the variable is in an alarm condition. b. For each Analog Tag, an alarm for each of the following conditions shall be assignable, and its priority must be classiefed per section 2.1.B.1.0 Technical Specifications 13452- 10Configuration Requirements: Human Machine Interface (HMI) and Reports 1) Low. 2) High. 3) Deviation low. 4) Deviation high. 5) Rate of change. c. Provide adjustable dead bands and delay timers for all analog alarms. 3. Present alarms in order of: a. Priority. b. Time of occurrence. c. Non-acknowledged presented ahead of acknowledged. 4. Utilize single keystroke or pushbutton to: a. Acknowledge alarms. 5. Alarm list presented to operator shall include: a. Time of occurrence. b. Time of acknowledgement. c. Description. d. Acknowledgement status. 6. Alarm list printed by either of the following: a. On command. b. Periodically. 7. Audible alarming capability for user selected alarms. K. Report Generation: 1. Base bid on the generation of the following reports: a. Minimum of two formatted reports. 1) Report form and content shall be determined at the Report Configuration Review Meetings. Technical Specifications 13452- 11Configuration Requirements: Human Machine Interface (HMI) and Reports 2) Each report shall contain daily, weekly, and monthly average calculated values. 3) Each report shall contain between three and ten measured parameters. b. List of all entries initiated by operator including the following: 1) Console key changes. 2) Beginning and final values of setpoint and output changes. 3) Mode changes (i.e., auto to manual). 4) Time change was made. c. Event list: 1) Description of selected events. 2) Time of event. 2. Custom report capabilities: a. User configurable. b. Contain selected information from any log, event, or alarm list. c. Capable of producing custom log report for periodic and on-demand printing of a list of process or calculated variables. d. Reports shall not require software programming by the user to setup. 3. Control of programs: a. Protect access to configuration via password protection. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONFIGURATION REQUIREMENTS A. Provide all programming modifications and configurations required for all HMIs: 3.2 CONFIGURATION STANDARDS AND CONVENTIONS A. It is the intent of these specifications to provide the end user with state-of-the- art functionality. 1. Minimum standards are as follows: a. Depict the actual process equipment configuration as accurately as possible. Technical Specifications 13452- 12Configuration Requirements: Human Machine Interface (HMI) and Reports 2. All overview and site-specific screens shall incorporate a "navigational header bar" similar in function and appearance to Microsoft Internet Explorer. a. The intention of this Specification is to provide a familiar, user-friendly navigation throughout the graphical displays. 3.3 SCREEN AND REPORT CONFIGURATION REVIEW MEETINGS A. Conduct a minimum of one configuration conferences with the Owner to review and discuss system configuration programming and related topics. 1. The purpose of the conferences will be to discuss, in detail, how each 1/0 point will be handled and the types, quantities, hierarchies, and functioning of display screens. 2. Review of the Owner's existing systems, standards, conventions, file and tag naming requirements, font type and size requirements, and reporting requirements must be part of each conference. 3. Review the navigation bar to be utilized. 4. Review of the Owner's existing systems, standards, conventions, and reporting requirements must be part of each conference. 5. Bring equipment to project screens on wall or provide multiple monitors for viewing by attendees. 3.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate as required with other contractors and vendors to seamlessly integrate all HMI monitoring and control functions. 1. To the greatest extent possible, integrate graphics presentation for all systems into screens utilizing one common HMI software. B. Examples of systems that utilize separate application software packages and thus require coordination include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Generator Controls. 2. Digital Metering Package. 3. Distributed UPS System. 4. Pre-purchased control systems: Press system, Duplex pumping station 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Employ and pay for services of field service representative(s) to: 1. Inspect equipment covered by this Specification Section. Technical Specifications 13452- 13Configuration Requirements: Human Machine Interface (HMI) and Reports 2. Supervise adjustments and installation checks. 3. Maintain and submit an accurate daily or weekly log of all commissioning functions. a. All commissioning functions may be witnessed by the Engineer. b. All reports shall be cosigned by the Contractor and the Engineer if witnessed. 4. Conduct startup of equipment and perform operational checks. 5. Provide Owner with a written statement that manufacturer's equipment has been installed properly, started up, and is ready for operation by Owner's personnel. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate system in accordance with applicable Division 1 Specification Section. 1. Provide On-Site Training in accordance with applicable Division 1 Specification Section. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 13452- 14Configuration Requirements: Human Machine Interface (HMI) and Reports SECTION 15010 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 ALTERNATES A. Take cognizance of any change required in this work which may be a direct result of any alternate bid item listed and include the price deemed necessary to meet the requirements of the respective al- ternate. 1.2 BIDDING A. The Contractor shall provide labor, materials, equipment, items, articles, operations and methods listed, shown, scheduled, or mentioned on the drawings, and/or specified, including all incidentals required for their completion. B. The Contractor shall refer to the General part of these specifications, such as Instructions to Bidders, Special Conditions and DIVISION 1 for restrictions covering time that work can be performed in certain areas, noisy and dusty operations, sequence of work, access to restricted areas and similar types of work and operations. 1.3 SUBSTITUTIONS A. All items in this DIVISION are NOT eligible for SUBSTITUTION without PRIOR APPROVAL as explained below: 1. Items to match job existing items shall be furnished and installed as specified. 2. Items requested by the Owner shall be furnished and installed as specified. 3. The Contractor shall furnish and install the specified item when only one name is listed, select between items when more than one name is listed, or request substitution of an item in writing to the Engineer ten (10)working days prior to the bid letting, giving the reason for the substitution and providing literature on the item which shall give the Engineer enough information to make a decision. Substitution requests must be received by the close of standard business day or week ending Friday. Substitution requests received after this date will be rejected. All substitution requests must be accompanied with self-addressed, stamped envelopes for reply. Faxed substitution requests are not acceptable. See Part 4 for the substitution request form. B. When the Engineer deems it necessary, to assure satisfactory installation and compatibility with other equipment, piping, ductwork, electrical provisions and other appurtenances, the Contractor shall prepare scale drawings of the substitute item showing proposed location, connections, relation to other equipment and other pertinent data such as maintenance space requirements, electrical requirements, height and weight. Drawings must receive Engineer's approval before the substitution is made. C. It is the Contractor's responsibility that the substitute item shall fit into the space allocated and that the item can be installed and function as intended. Should changes in the work of any Contractor become necessary as a result of any substitute item under this Division, such changes shall be arranged and paid for by this Contractor. D. Capacities of substitute items shall not be less than that of the specified item. E. The performance of the factory representative and supplier on past work will be a consideration in Technical Specifications 15010- 1 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS the approval process of substitute items. F. The final decision as to acceptability rests with the Engineer. 1.4 CODES, REGULATIONS AND PERMITS A. All materials and equipment shall be new, approved by the governing authority, and be in new, undamaged condition when installed. B. Comply with the International Mechanical Code, National Fire Protection Association Fire Codes, International Building Code, and all other applicable Federal, State, County and City codes, regulations and ordinances. Comply with DIVISION 16 and all codes referenced therein for any and all electrical work accomplished under this Division or by this Contractor. OR International Family of codes. C. Arrange for and obtain all permits and approvals required for the execution of the work. 1.5 INTENT OF DRAWINGS A. Pipe or duct risers and other diagrams are schematic only and not to scale. They are intended only to indicate sizes or relative arrangement of pipe and equipment shown elsewhere in plan view. 1.6 WORKMANSHIP A. Work shall be accomplished by workmen skilled in the particular trade, in conformance with best practices and to meet all applicable codes. B. This Contractor shall replace materials or equipment not properly installed or finished, without increase in payment received. 1.7 RESPONSIBILITY A. The Contractor is responsible for installation of a satisfactory and complete piece of work in accordance with true intent of the drawings and specifications. B. Consult all drawings for the project to predetermine that the work and equipment will fit as planned. C. The location of piping, ducts, equipment, etc., shall be checked to ensure clearance from openings, structural members, cabinets, lights, outlets, and equipment having fixed locations. This shall be accomplished prior to fabrication of pipe or ducts. D. If, at any time, and in any case, changes in location of piping, ducts, equipment, etc., becomes necessary due to existing obstacles or installation of other trades shown on any of the project drawings and such conflict could have been avoided by proper coordination between trades or proper pre-planning of work, such required changes shall be made by the Contractor at no extra cost. These changes are to be recorded on the record drawings. E. This Contractor is responsible to provide all incidental electrical interconnections, control wiring, etc., which are necessary for system completion and which are not specifically shown or otherwise indicated on the electrical drawings or specified in DIVISION 16. F. All electrical work incidental to or accomplished under this Division shall comply with all requirements of DIVISION 16. 1.8 DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS Technical Specifications 15010-2 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS A. Make provisions for introduction into the building of equipment furnished under this Division. Refer to DIVISION I for additional provisions to allow equipment passage into the building. B. All materials shall be protected from damage and from weather. Cover, enclose and protect all stored materials and preserve in new, clean condition. Keep all openings in pipe, ductwork and equipment closed with caps and covers. All materials shall be elevated above the ground or floor during storage. 5. C. All materials and products installed shall be new and shall be in new and undamaged condition. Materials that are rusted, weathered or otherwise depleted in condition shall not be installed. 1.9 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS A. Manufactured materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned as directed by the manufacturer unless noted otherwise herein or on the drawings. B. Certain items of equipment, as noted herein, shall be checked out, started and put into service by factory representatives. 1.10 CUTTING, PATCHING, REPAIRING A. Cutting, patching and repairing required by the work of this Division shall be the responsibility of this Contractor. B. Work shall be performed in accordance with DIVISION 1 of these specifications. C. The performance of this work shall not weaken the structural integrity of the building. D. Any abrasion or disfigurement of the finished work or any portion of the building where any such abrasion or disfigurement is caused by the activities of the Contractor shall be repaired and neatly re- finished to match the adjacent work. 1.11 OPENINGS IN PIPES A. Openings in pipes shall be kept closed during progress of work. C. The Contractor is required to clean new systems found dirty to the satisfaction of the Engineer at no additional cost. 1.11 OPENINGS IN DUCTS A. Openings in ducts shall be kept closed during progress of work. B. The Contractor is required to clean new systems found dirty to the satisfaction of the Engineer at no additional cost. 1.12 CLEANUP A. Upon completion of work, remove materials, scraps, etc., relative to this work and leave the premises in a clean and orderly condition. This applies equally to finished, unfinished and concealed spaces. B. Clean equipment of dirt and debris. Technical Specifications 15010- 3 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 1.13 SAMPLES A. The Contractor shall submit actual production samples on any material or equipment requested if, in the Engineer's opinion, it is necessary in order to determine the quality, workmanship, operation, etc. of the item. B. Samples will be returned to the Contractor. Approved samples may be used on the job. C. Costs incurred in providing and returning samples will be the responsibility of the Contractor. 1.14 TEMPORARY SERVICES A. See DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS for Temporary Facilities. 1.15 FIRE PROTECTION A. Metallic pipe, duct and other penetrations of all fire partitions, walls and floors shall be effectively fire-stopped to equal the fire rating of the floor or partition using materials and methods UL approved and tested to meet all conditions of ASTME E119, UL 1479 and ASTME 814 tests. One such material is Carborundum bulk"Fiberfrax"fiber packing for filling the annual space between pipe and sleeve or hole and Fiberfrax LDS moldable caulking for sealing in the fiber packing. Other acceptable materials are Dow Corning 3-6548 Silicon RTV foam firestop system, General Electric'Pensil' 851 system or U.S.G. fire code compound and Thermafire. B. PVC pipe, duct penetrations to be fire stopped same as metallic penetrations with the addition of an intumescent wrap to effectively close the hole if PVC vaporizes. C. Construction of permanent bracing, framing, roof curbs and platforms or other structures which utilize wood construction shall be fabricated from fire resistant treated materials or shall be otherwise protected by approved fire resistant materials. 1.16 ACCESS DOORS A. Where access to valves, dampers, equipment, etc. is required, provide Inryco/Milcor Type "K", "DW", or"M" doors. Access doors required in fire-rated walls or ceilings shall be U.L. approved, similar and equal to Ruskin #APW 1. Size of door shall be sufficient to provide proper access to item, if size is not listed on the drawings. 1.17 COMPLETION AND TESTS A. Complete and test each system as specified. Submit all reports and complete the Project Completion Checklist in PART 3 of this Section. Leave all systems in proper operation. B. At the time of finalizing the project, a demonstration of all systems shall be performed in the presence of the Owner's designated representative. The Contractor shall demonstrate that the systems perform in the manner described in the specifications and indicated on the drawings. 1.18 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. The Contractor shall provide qualified personnel to instruct the Owner's maintenance personnel in the operation and maintenance of all the new systems and equipment. In general, the installer of the system may give these instructions. Some equipment or systems may require instruction be given by an authorized agent of the supplier or manufacturer. See the individual Sections of this Division for specific training requirements. B. Written operation and maintenance instructions, as produced by the manufacturer, shall be provided for all equipment. These instructions shall be bound and submitted as described in this Section. 1.19 RECORD DRAWINGS Technical Specifications 15010-4 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS A. A separate set of mechanical drawings shall be maintained at the job site at all times and shall be used as record drawings. This set shall be kept up to date with all changes and/or additions in the construction and/or mechanical systems, and shall be delivered to the Engineer at the completion of this job. This set of drawings shall be kept clean and protected at all times. PART 2 SUBMITTALS AND BROCHURES OF EQUIPMENT 2.1 GENERAL A. The literature required to be submitted and approved in order to fulfill the requirements of this Division falls into two general categories. These are the "Brochures of Equipment" and "Submittals." B. "Submittals" is a general term for informational literature that must be supplied to and approved by the Contractor and the Engineer prior to installing, receiving, or in some instances, ordering equipment. The normal required types of submittals include shop drawings, manufacturer's literature, installation and operation instructions (from the manufacturer) and wiring diagrams. System reports, such as start-up reports or balancing reports, and the project completion checklist are two forms of submittals that are required after the equipment has been installed and is operational C. Brochures of Equipment are booklets assembled by the contractor that contain operation, maintenance and repair literature for all equipment installed under the requirements of the project. They will be used by the Owner's personnel as the primary source of information for operating and maintaining the installed systems. As such, they shall exhibit a professional quality, high degree of clarity and durability that will allow their use throughout the useful life of the installed system. 2.2 SUBMITTALS A. The contractor shall procure all manufacturer's literature and produce or have produced, all drawings, calculations or other data as required by either the Submittal Schedule contained in this Section or as specifically called out in the individual Sections of this Division. B. Submittal materials shall be complete in every respect and shall clearly indicate equipment features, dimensions, weights, performance characteristics and capacities. Capacity and performance calculations shall be adjusted to indicate actual equipment performance at the project elevation. Literature or drawings that describe more than one model or size of equipment shall be marked with arrows or otherwise clearly inscribed to identify the actual equipment that will be furnished. All options and special parts of features shall also be clearly identified. All submitted materials must be clear, complete and legible. Copies or duplications of poor quality will not be reviewed or accepted. C. Where specified or otherwise required, proof of equipment compliance with standards or listings by specific agencies (e.g. AGA, ASME, etc.) shall be included in submittal material. D. Submittals for all equipment shall be routed through and reviewed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall check all submittals for adequate identification, number of copies, correctness and compliance with contract drawings and specifications and apply his stamp of approval. For submittals that are required to be reviewed by the Engineer, a minimum of six copies shall be forwarded for approval after review and approval by the Contractor. These shall be returned and shall be revised and resubmitted until acceptable and approved by the Engineer. A minimum of two copies of each submittal will be retained by the Architect and Engineer. Copies of ALL submittals, including those which are not required to be forwarded for the Engineer's approval, shall be included in the Brochures of Equipment. E. Submittals may be accepted or rejected by the Engineer in their entirety. Upon rejection of any entire submittal, the entire submittal package shall be resubmitted. No partial approval will be granted for any equipment that is a part of a submittal which has been rejected in its entirety. Technical Specifications 15010- 5 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 6. 7. F. If the Engineer"Rejects"or asks for"Revise and Resubmit'for any individual item in a particular submittal, then just that individual item shall be re-submitted by the Contractor. 8. G. Individual submittals may include data for more than one piece of equipment. However, submittal data for equipment specified in different sections of specifications shall not be included in the same submittal package. For example, submittal data for plumbing fixtures specified in Section 15410 shall not be included in the same submittal package as data for pipe hangers as specified in Section 15060. H. Acceptance of submittals by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for deviations from drawings or specifications, nor shall it relieve him from responsibility for errors in shop drawings or other submittal literature. 2.3 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. The following is an index of the Sections of this Division and a schedule of the submittal data required for each Section. Items marked "c" under each heading for the various submittal forms shall be submitted to the Contractor for review and approval. Items marked "c" and "e" are to be forwarded to the Engineer for review and approval after the Contractor has affixed his approval. All marked items shall be included in the Brochures of Equipment whether or not they require initial forwarding to the Engineer. All submittal literature appearing in the Brochures of Equipment shall be stamped or marked as approved by the Contractor. B. All submittals required by the schedule shall be checked, revised as necessary, and approved by the Contractor. Submittals, which are required to be forwarded to the Engineer, shall first be reviewed and approved by the Contractor. C. Submit any additional materials, not found on the Submittal Schedule, as required by the contract drawings or individual Sections of this Division of contract specifications. Section Title Shop Mfr. Install Wiring Report Dwg. Lit. Oper. Diag. Book 15010 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS ce ce 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALSS AND METHODS ce 15055 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT ce ce 15060 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS ce 15074 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC FOR PIPING AND EQUIPMENT ce ce ce ce 15075 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION ce 15080 MECHANICAL INSULATION ce 15082 HVAC EQUIPMENT INSULATION ce 15083 DUCT INSULATION ce 15110 VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING ce ce 15115 VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING ce ce 15122 METERS AND GAGES ce ce 15140 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING ce 15145 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES ce ce 15150 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING ce Technical Specifications 15010-6 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15155 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES ce ce 15181 HYDRONIC PIPING ce ce 15182 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES ce ce 15183 REFRIGERANT PIPING ce ce 15185 INLINE, DOMESTIC-WATER PUMPS ce ce ce 15186 HYDRONIC PUMPS ce ce ce 15189 WATER TREATMENT FOR CLOSED-LOOP HYDRONIC SYSTEMS ce ce ce 15410 PLUMBING FIXTURES ce ce 15487 HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC ce ce ce 15626 WATER-COOLED, ROTARY-SCREW WATER CHILLERS ce ce ce 15736 PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR-CONDITIONING UNTS (HEAT PUMPS) ce ce ce 15738 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS ce ce ce 15767 PROPELLER UNIT HEATERS ce ce 15815 METAL DUCTS ce 15820 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES ce ce ce 15838 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS ce ce ce 15855 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES ce ce 15861 PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION ce 15950 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC ce ce 2.4 BROCHURES OF EQUIPMENT A. The Contractor shall prepare and submit three complete Brochures of Equipment. Each shall contain all required submittal data for the construction materials and each piece of equipment (reference Submittal Schedule, 15010.2.3) installed under this project. The literature required for submittal purposes shall be expanded to include operation and maintenance literature for each piece of equipment. Maintenance information shall be complete in every respect and shall include parts lists and assembly drawings wherever applicable. Manuals, catalogs, etc., shall be new, as supplied by the factory, and not photocopied. The Brochures shall also include a copy of the SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE and a final copy of the project COMPLETION CHECKLIST. 9. B. All literature shall clearly indicate the equipment it represents and shall be labeled with the equipment identification abbreviation found on the drawings, e.g. EF-1, etc. All information which is not applicable to the particular model and size supplied shall be clearly and neatly crossed out with heavy black marker or other suitable means. This includes dimensional drawings, maintenance information, parts lists, wiring diagrams, etc. Only the information applicable to the particular equipment supplied shall remain and it shall be easy to follow. Booklets not meeting these requirements shall be returned for correction. C. Binders shall be high quality telescoping post type with slide or lever release, metal hinges, and covered hardboard or rigid plastic covers. D. Dividers shall be used to separate the literature for equipment supplied under each of the various Sections of this Division. Divider headings shall read the same as the Section title e.g. "15186 HYDRONIC PUMPS" E. Large size drawings or diagrams shall be folded and placed in heavyweight sheets with pockets. F. The format of the Brochure shall begin with the submittal requirement list at the front as an index sheet. The dividers for each section shall then progress sequentially and the project completion checklist shall be included at the back as the appendix. G. Authorization for final payment shall not be made prior to final acceptance of the Brochures of Equipment. Technical Specifications 15010-7 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS PART III PROJECT CLOSEOUT 3.1 COMPLETION CHECKLIST A. The following checklist shall be completed by contractor and submitted to A/E before final site visitation or job acceptance is made. B. Refer to each specific specification section listed for a more complete description of listed test requirements. MECHANICAL: SPEC. ITEM DATE CORRECTED OR SECTION COMPLETED BY (NAME OR INITIALS) 15010 Demonstrate to owner that all systems are functioning properly. 15010 Provide record drawings. 15010 Provide Brochures of Equipment. 15140 Test water service. 15140 Test domestic water system. 15150 Test drain, waste &vent piping. 15150 Test sewer system. 15010 Provide plumbing equipment instructions to owner's personnel Job Name: Oxbow Fish Hatchery Location: DC Job#: 20DAC01 Contractor: Submitted by: Name Date PART 4—SUBSTITUTION REQUEST Technical Specifications 15010-8 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 4.1 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM A. The following Substitution Request Form shall be completed by Contractor and submitted to A/E for review of equipment or materials prior to bid as defined in sub-section 1.3 of Section 15010. B. Review of the substitution request form is only for general conformance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. Any action shown is subject to the requirements of the plans and specifications. Contractor is responsible for: dimensions which shall be confirmed and correlated at the job site, fabrication processes and techniques of construction, coordination of their work with that of all other trades, and the satisfactory performance of the work. PROJECT: SPECIFIED ITEM: Section Page Paragraph Description/Tag The undersigned requests consideration of the following: PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION: Attached data includes product description,specifications,drawings,photographs,performance and test data adequate for evaluation of the request;applicable portions of the data are clearly identified. Attached data also includes a description of changes to Contract Documents that the proposed substitution will require for its proper installation. The undersigned certifies that the following paragraphs, unless modified by attachments, are correct: 1. The proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on Drawings. 2. The undersigned will pay for changes to the project design,including engineering design,detailing and construction costs caused by the requested substitution. 3. The proposed substitution will have no adverse affect on other trades,the construction schedule,or specified warranty requirements. 4. Maintenance and service parts will be locally available for the proposed substitution. 5. The undersigned further certifies that the performance,capacity,function,appearance and quality of the proposed substitution are equivalent or superior to the specified item. The undersigned agrees that,if this page is reproduced,the terms and conditions for substitutions found in the Bidding Documents apply to this request. Submitted by:- Name General Contractor(if after award of contract) Signature For use by the A/E Technical Specifications 15010 No Exception Exception Taken, Taken Revise as noted. Firm Name Address City, State, Zip Date Telephone Fax END SECTION 15010 Technical Specifications 15010- 10 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Dielectric fittings. 3. Mechanical sleeve seals. 4. Sleeves. 5. Escutcheons. 6. Grout. 7. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 8. Concrete Bases 9. Supports and anchorages. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than plumbing and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels. B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and plumbing equipment rooms. C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations. D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases. E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Welding certificates. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current. C. Electrical Characteristics for Plumbing Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in Technical Specifications 15050 - 1 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods. B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings. 2.2 JOINING MATERIALS A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below. B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. C. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series or BAg1, unless otherwise indicated. F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12. G. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping: 1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235. 2. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. 3. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138. 2.3 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials. B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F. D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300- psig minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures. E. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F. F. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F. Technical Specifications 15050 - 2 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 2.4 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve. B. Sealing Elements: EPDM or NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. C. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel or stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element. D. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel or Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element. 2.5 SLEEVES A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint. B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends. C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated. D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing. 1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws. E. Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. F. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40. G. Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. 2.6 ESCUTCHEONS A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening. B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome- plated finish. C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw. 1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated. D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw. 1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated. Technical Specifications 15050 - 3 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 2.7 GROUT A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, non-shrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic- cement grout. 1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, non-staining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. F. Install piping to permit valve servicing. G. Install piping at indicated slopes. H. Install piping free of sags and bends. I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. J. Install piping to allow application of insulation. K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. M. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs. N. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter. Technical Specifications 15050 - 4 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter. 3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. O. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. P. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for materials. Q. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in. R. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements. 3.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32. E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8. F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. Technical Specifications 15050 - 5 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article. H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: 1. Comply with ASTM F 402, for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. 2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes. 3. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix. 4. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855. 5. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855. 6. PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D 3138 Appendix. J. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139. K. Plastic Non-pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212. L. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657. 1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. 2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion. M. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. 4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. 3.4 CONCRETE BASES A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project. Technical Specifications 15050 - 6 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit. 2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base. 3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor. 4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in Division 3 Section. 3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated. B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install plumbing equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations. D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope. 3.6 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel. B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor plumbing materials and equipment. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1. 3.7 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor plumbing materials and equipment. B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members. C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads. 3.8 GROUTING A. Mix and install grout for plumbing equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors. B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout. Technical Specifications 15050 - 7 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout. D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout. E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases. F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment. G. Place grout around anchors. H. Cure placed grout. END OF SECTION 15050 Technical Specifications 15050 - 8 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 15055 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general- purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation. 1.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following: 1. Motor controllers. 2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. 3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in HVAC equipment schedules or Sections. B. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feetabove sea level. B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor. 2.3 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application: 1. Permanent-split capacitor. 2. Split phase. 3. Capacitor start, inductor run. 4. Capacitor start, capacitor run. B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type. C. Bearings: Pre-lubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading. D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type. Technical Specifications 15055 - 1 Common Motor Requirements for Equipment E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 15055 Technical Specifications 15055 - 2 Common Motor Requirements for Equipment SECTION 15059 GENERAL PIPING PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. Provide the piping system indicated, complete and operable in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The provisions of the Section shall apply to all piping sections in Division 15. C. The mechanical and civil drawings define the general layout, configuration, routing, method of support, pipe size and pipe type. D. The mechanical and civil drawings are not pipe construction or fabrication drawings. E. Where pipe supports and spacings are indicated on the Drawings and are referenced to a Standard Detail, the Contractor shall use that Detail. F. Where pipe supports are not indicated on the Drawings, it is the Contractor's responsibility to develop the details necessary to design and construct mechanical piping systems to accommodate the specific equipment provided and to provide spacers, adapters, supports, and connectors for a complete and functional system. G. Coordinate flange bolting patterns between connecting piping, valves and equipment as necessary. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01340. B. Shop Drawings shall contain the following information at a minimum: 1. Layout drawings including necessary dimensions, details, pipe joints, fittings, specials, bolts and nuts, gaskets, valves, appurtenances, anchors, guides, and materials of construction. Fabrication drawings shall include spacers, adapters, connectors, fitting and pipe supports to accommodate the equipment and valves in a complete and functional system. 2. Submit gasket manufacturer's catalog indicating that the recommended product is suitable for each fluid service application. 3. Manufacturer's catalog sheet showing materials and installation procedures for all sleeve couplings, dismantling joints, and other mechanical couplings for pipes. C. Necessary certifications, test reports and affidavits of compliance shall be obtained by the Contractor. D. A certification from the pipe fabricator that each pipe will be manufactured subject to the fabricator's or a recognized Quality Control Program. An outline of the program shall be submitted to the Engineer for review prior to the manufacture of any pipe. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Technical Specifications 15059-1 General Piping Provisions A. Protect pipe coating during handling using methods recommended by manufacturer. Use of bare cables, chains, hooks, metal bars or narrow skids in contact with coated pipe is not permitted. B. Piping materials, fittings, valves and accessories shall be delivered in a clean and undamaged condition and stored off the ground for protection against oxidation caused by ground contact. Materials subject to damage from exposure to the sun shall be covered. C. Prevent damage to pipe during transit. Repair abrasions, scars, and blemishes. If repair of satisfactory quality cannot be achieved, replace damaged material immediately. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Pipe Supports 1. Pipes shall be adequately supported, restrained and anchored in accordance with Section 15091 and as indicated on the Drawings. B. Pipe Lining and Coating 1. Pipes shall be lined and coated in accordance with Section 15063. C. Pressure Rating 1. Piping systems shall be constructed for a maximum test pressure of 150 psi unless otherwise noted. D. Inspection 1. Pipes shall be subject to inspection at the place of manufacture. 2. During the manufacture, the Engineer and Owner shall be given access to areas where manufacturing is in progress and shall be permitted to make inspections necessary to confirm compliance with requirements. E. Tests 1. Except where otherwise indicated, materials used in the manufacture of the pipe shall be tested in accordance with the applicable specifications and standards. 2. Welds shall be tested as indicated. 3. The Contractor shall be responsible for performing all material tests. F. Welder Qualifications 1. Welding shall be performed by skilled welders and welding operators who have adequate experience in the methods and materials to be used. 2. Welders shall be qualified under the provisions of AWS D1.1. 3. Machines and electrodes similar to those used in the work shall be used in qualification tests. 4. Qualification testing of welders and materials used during the testing is part of the work. Technical Specifications 15059-2 General Piping Provisions 2.2 PIPE FLANGES A. General 1. Flanges shall be provided with flat faces and shall be attached with bolt holes straddling the vertical axis of the pipe unless otherwise indicated. 2. Attachment of the flanges to the pipe shall conform to the applicable requirements of AWWA C207 and the Drawings. 3. Flange faces shall be perpendicular to the axis of the adjoining pipe. 4. Flanges for miscellaneous small diameter pipes shall be in accordance with the standards indicated for these pipes. B. Flange Type 1. Flanges shall be 150 lb class conforming to AWWA Class D. 2. Do not expose flanges to test pressures to greater than 125 percent of rated capacity. 3. For higher test pressures, the next higher rated AWWA flange should be selected. C. Blind Flanges 1. Provide blind flanges in accordance with AWWA C207 or as indicated for miscellaneous small pipes. D. Flange Coating 1. Machined faces of metal blind flanges and pipe flanges shall be coated with a temporary rust-inhibitive coating to protect the metal until the installation is completed. E. Flange Bolts 1. Exposed (above-ground) flange bolts shall be ASTM A307, Grade A. zinc plated. 2. Below-ground and submerged flange bolts shall be stainless steel, Type 304, 314 or 316. 3. Washers shall be the same material and alloy as found in accompanying bolts and nuts. 4. Use all-thread studs on valve flange connections where space restrictions preclude the use of regular bolts. F. Flange Gaskets 1. Gaskets for flanged joints used in general water service shall be full-faced type, non-asbestos type with material and thickness in accordance with AWWA C207, suitable for temperatures to 300 degrees F, a pH of 1 to 11, and pressures up to 150 psi. 2. Blind flanges shall be provided with gaskets covering the entire inside face of the blind flange and shall be cemented to the blind flange. 3. Ring gaskets will not be accepted unless otherwise indicated. 4. Manufacturers, or equal a. John Crane, Style 2160. Technical Specifications 15059-3 General Piping Provisions b. Garlock, Style 3000. 5. Gaskets for flanged joints used in water with chloramines shall be Glyon, style 3500 as manufactured by Garlock or equal. 6. Gaskets for flanged joints used in chemicals, air, solvents, hydrocarbons, steam, chlorine and other fluid service shall be made of materials compatible with the service, pressure and temperature. G. Insulating Flange Sets 1. Provide insulating flange sets where indicated. 2. Each insulating flange set shall consist of an insulating gasket, insulating sleeves and washers, and a steel washer. 3. Insulating flanges shall be provided with bolt holes '/4-in. diameter greater than the bolt diameter. 4. Steel washers shall be in conformance with ASTM A325, 120/105ksi tensile strength. 5. Insulating gaskets shall be full-face. 6. Insulating sleeves and washers shall be one piece when flange bolt diameter is 1'/2-in. or smaller and shall be made of acetal resin. 7. For bolt diameters larger than 1 '/2-in. insulating sleeves and washers shall be 2- piece and shall be made of polyethylene or phenolic material. 8. Manufacturers, or equal: a. JM Red Devil, Type E. b. Maloney Pipeline Products Co. c. PSI Products, Inc. 2.3 MECHANICAL-TYPE COUPLINGS (GROOVED OR BANDED PIPE) A. Provide cast mechanical-type couplings where indicated, conforming to the requirements of AWWA C606. B. Gaskets for mechanical couplings shall be compatible with the piping service, temperatures and pH, and fluid used in accordance with the coupling manufacturer's recommendations. C. The wall thickness of grooved piping shall conform to the coupling manufacturer's recommendations to suit the highest expected pressure. D. In order to avoid excessive load on equipment caused by pipe movement due to steady state or transient pressure conditions, equipment connections with mechanical- type couplings shall be provided with rigid grooved couplings or flexible type couplings with harness in sizes where rigid type couplings are not available, unless thrust restraint is provided by other means. E. The contractor shall have the coupling manufacturer's service representative verify the correct choice and application of couplings and gaskets, and the workmanship, to assure the correct installation. F. Grooving tools shall be from the same manufacturer as the grooved components. Technical Specifications 15059-4 General Piping Provisions G. Testing: Shop proof test in accordance with AWWA C606. Couplings shall be leak proof. H. Manufacturers, or equal: 1. Victaulic Style 41 or 44 (banded, flexible) 2. Victaulic Style 77 (grooved, flexible or rigid) 3. Victaulic Style 07 or HP-70 (grooved, rigid) 2.4 SLEEVE COUPLINGS A. Provide self-contained sleeve couplings where indicated, conforming to AWWA C219. Sleeve couplings shall be furnished as a complete assembly consisting of a center ring, gaskets, and fasteners. B. Rating: Class 150 C. Fasteners: Type 316 stainless steel D. Paint: Manufacturers fusion bonded epoxy E. Testing: Shop proof test in accordance with AWWA C219. Sleeve couplings shall be leak proof. F. Manufacturers, or equal: 1. Smith-Blair, Style 411 2. Romac Style 400 for pipe greater than 12-in. diameter 3. Romac Style 511 for pipe under 12-in. diameter 2.5 DISMANTLING JOINTS A. Provide self-contained flanged restrained dismantling joints conforming to AWWA C219. Dismantling joints shall be furnished as a complete assembly consisting of spigot piece, flange adaptor, tie bars and gasket. Flanges shall conform to AWWA C207. B. Rating: Class 150 C. Materials of Construction: 1. Spigot: Carbon steel per ASTM A283, Grade C 2. Flange Adaptor: Ductile iron as per ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12 or carbon steel per ASTM A283, Grade C 3. Tie bars and miscellaneous hardware: Type 304 stainless steel unless otherwise approved by Owner D. Paint: Manufacturer's standard epoxy paint system E. Testing: Shop proof test in accordance with AWWA C219. Dismantling joint shall be leak proof. F. Manufacturers, or equal: 1. Viking Johnson 2. Romac Technical Specifications 15059-5 General Piping Provisions PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Install piping, fitting and appurtenances in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, the Drawings and the applicable Sections of Division 15. B. Flange Bolts: 1. All bolts shall be tightened in a progressively diametrically opposite sequence and torqued with a suitable, approved and calibrated torque wrench. Torque values shall be as recommended by the pipe manufacturer. All clamping torque shall be applied to the nuts only. a. All torqueing shall proceed in a progressive sequence of: 1) hand tight, 2) 25% of required torque, 3) 75% of required torque, and 4) 100% of required torque. C. Harness, Thrust Restraint, and Tie Rod Bolts: 1. Harness, thrust restraint, and tie rod bolts used for sleeve couplings, flange coupling adaptors or dismantling joints shall be tightened gradually and equally at diametrically opposed sides until snug in order to prevent misalignment and to ensure that all studs carry equal loads. 2. In order to prevent induced stress or misalignment, do not over-torque connections to adjoining pumps or equipment. D. Groove ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections and roll marks in the area from the pipe end to the groove. E. After installation, joints shall meet the indicated leakage rate. 3.2 EXTERIOR BURIED PIPING INSTALLATION A. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, provide a minimum of 3 FT and maximum of 8 FT earth cover over exterior buried piping systems and appurtenances conveying water, fluids, or solutions subject to freezing. B. All piping underneath the Hatchery Building or other structures shall be encased in concrete. C. Enter and exit through structure walls, floors, and ceilings by using penetrations, seals and mechanical joints as shown on Drawings. D. Install expansion devices as necessary to allow expansion and contraction movement. E. Laying Pipe in Trench: 1. Excavate and backfill trench in accordance with Section 02200. 2. Clean each pipe length thoroughly and inspect for compliance to Specifications. 3. Grade trench bottom and excavate for pipe bell and lay pipe on trench bottom. 4. Install gasket or joint material according to manufacturer's directions after joints have been thoroughly cleaned and examined. 5. Lay pipe in only suitable weather with good trench conditions. Never lay pipe in water except where approved by Engineer. 6. Seal open end of line with watertight plug if pipe laying stopped. Technical Specifications 15059-6 General Piping Provisions a. Remove water in trench before removal of plug. F. Anchorage and Blocking: 1. Provide thrust blocking, anchors, joint harnesses, or other acceptable means for preventing movement of piping caused by forces in or on buried piping tees, wye branches, plugs, or bends. 2. Place concrete blocking so that it extends from fitting into solid undisturbed earth wall. Concrete blocks shall not cover pipe joints. 3. Provide bearing area of concrete in accordance with the Drawings. G. Install insulating components where dissimilar metals are joined together. 3.3 INTERIOR AND EXPOSED EXTERIOR PIPING INSTALLATION A. Install piping in vertical and horizontal alignment as shown on Drawings. B. Alignment of piping smaller than 4 IN may not be shown. However, install according to Drawing intent and with clearance and allowance for: 1. Expansion and contraction. 2. Operation and access to equipment, doors, windows, hoists, moving equipment. 3. Headroom and walking space for working areas and aisles. 4. System drainage and air removal. C. Enter and exit through structure walls, floors, and ceilings by using penetrations, seals and mechanical joints as shown on Drawings. D. Install vertical piping runs plumb and horizontal piping runs parallel with structure walls. E. Pipe Support: Use methods of piping support as shown on Drawings and as required in Section 15091. F. Use reducing fittings throughout piping systems. Bushings will not be allowed unless specifically approved. G. Equipment Drainage and Miscellaneous Piping: 1. Provide drip pans and piping at equipment where condensation may occur. 2. Hard pipe stuffing box leakage to nearest floor drain. 3. Avoid piping over electrical components such as motor control centers, panelboards, etc. a. If piping must be so routed, use 16 GA, 316 stainless steel drip pan under piping and over full length of electrical equipment. H. Hard pipe drainage to nearest floor drain. 1. Collect system condensate at drip pockets, traps and blowoff valves. 2. Provide drainage for process piping at locations shown on Drawings and in accordance with the Drawing details. 3. For applications defined above and for other miscellaneous piping which is not addressed by a specific piping service category in PART 1, provide 304 stainless steel piping and fittings. Size to handle application with %-in. being minimum size provided. Technical Specifications 15059-7 General Piping Provisions I. Unions: 1. Install in position which will permit valve or equipment to be removed without dismantling adjacent piping. 2. Mechanical-type couplings, sleeve couplings, or dismantling joints may serve as unions. J. Install expansion devices as necessary to allow expansion/contraction movement. K. Install insulating components where dissimilar metals are joined together. 3.4 CONNECTIONS WITH EXISTING PIPING A. Where connection between new work and existing work is made, use proper fittings to suit conditions encountered. B. Perform connections with existing piping at time and under conditions which will least interfere with service to hatchery operations affected by such operation. 1. Notify Owner in writing a minimum of 7 days before a connection is made that may impact hatchery operations. C. Provide suitable equipment and facilities to dewater, drain, and dispose of liquid removed without damage to property. D. Where connection involves potable water systems, provide disinfection methods as required by the local jurisdiction. E. Once tie-in to each existing system is initiated, continue work continuously until tie-in is made, tested and approved by Owner. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Pipe Testing - General: 1. Test piping systems as follows: a. Test exposed, non-insulated piping systems upon completion of system. b. Test exposed, insulated piping systems upon completion of system but prior to application of insulation. c. Test concealed interior piping systems prior to concealment and, if system is insulated, prior to application of insulation. d. Test buried piping (insulated and non-insulated) prior to backfilling and, if insulated, prior to application of insulation. 2. Use pressures, media and pressure test durations as specified on the Piping Schedules. 3. Isolate equipment which may be damaged by the specified pressure test conditions. 4. Perform pressure test using calibrated pressure gages and calibrated volumetric measuring equipment to determine leakage rates. a. Select each gage so that the specified test pressure falls within the upper half of the gage's range. 5. Notify the Engineer 48 hours prior to each test. Technical Specifications 15059-8 General Piping Provisions 6. Completely assembly and test new piping systems prior to connection to existing pipe systems. 7. Acknowledge satisfactory performance of tests and inspections in writing to Owner and Engineer prior to final acceptance. 8. Contactor shall bear the cost of all testing and inspecting, locating and remedying of leaks and any necessary retesting and re-examination. B. Pressure Testing: 1. Allowable leakage rates: a. All exposed piping systems, all pressure piping systems and all buried, insulated piping systems which are hydrostatically pressure tested shall have zero leakage at the specified test pressure throughout the duration of the test. 2. Hydrostatic pressure testing methodology: a. General: 1) All joints, including welds, are to be left exposed for examination during the test. 2) Provide additional temporary supports for piping systems designed for vapor or gas to support the weight of the test water. 3) Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints for additional pressure load under test. 4) Isolate equipment in piping system with rated pressure lower than pipe test pressure. 5) Do not paint or insulate exposed piping until successful performance of pressure test. b. Soil, waste, drain and vent systems: 1) Test at completion of installation of each section of piping by filling system with water and checking joints and fittings for leaks. 2) Eliminate leaks before proceeding with work or concealing piping. 3) Minimum test heights shall be 10 ft above highest stack inlet. c. 12-in. diameter gravity plant piping: 1) Plug downstream end of segment to be tested. Provide bracing as required. 2) Fill segment and upstream structure to normal operating level as per hydraulic profile. 3) Allow 24 HRS for absorption losses. Refill to original level. 4) Record reservoir water volume at beginning and end of test. 3.6 CLEANING, DISINFECTION AND PURGING A. Cleaning: 1. Clean interior of piping systems thoroughly before installing. 2. Maintain pipe in clean condition during installation. Technical Specifications 15059-9 General Piping Provisions 3. Before jointing piping, thoroughly clean and wipe joint contact surfaces and then properly dress and make joint. 4. Immediately prior to pressure testing, clean and remove grease, metal cuttings, dirt, or other foreign materials which may have entered the system. 5. At completion of work and prior to Final Acceptance, thoroughly clean work installed under these Specifications. Clean equipment, fixtures, pipe, valves, and fittings of grease, metal cuttings, and sludge which may have accumulated by operation of system, from testing, or from other causes. Repair any stoppage or discoloration or other damage to parts of building, its finish, or furnishings, due to failure to properly clean piping system, without cost to Owner. B. Disinfection of Potable Water Systems: 1. After favorable performance of pressure test and prior to Final Acceptance, thoroughly flush entire potable water piping system including supply, source and any appurtenant devices and perform disinfection as prescribed. 2. Perform work, including preventative measures during construction, in full compliance with AWWA C651. 3. Perform disinfection using sodium hypochlorite complying with AWWA B300. 4. Flush each segment of system to provide flushing velocity of not less than 2.5 FT per second. 5. Drain flushing water to sanitary sewer. Do not drain flushing water to receiving stream. 6. Use continuous feed method of application. Tag system during disinfection procedure to prevent use. 7. After required contact period, flush system to remove traces of heavily chlorinated water. 8. After final flushing and before placing water in service, obtain an independent laboratory approved by the Owner to collect samples and test for bacteriological quality. Repeat entire disinfection procedures until satisfactory results are obtained. 9. Secure and deliver to Owner, satisfactory bacteriological reports on samples taken from system. Ensure sampling and testing procedures are in full compliance to AWWA C651, local water purveyor and applicable requirements of State of Oregon. 3.7 LOCATION OF BURIED OBSTACLES A. Furnish exact location and description of buried utilities encountered and thrust block placement. B. Reference items to reference point locations such as found property corners, entrances to buildings, existing structure lines, fire hydrants and related fixed structures. C. Include such information as location, elevation, coverage, supports and additional pertinent information. D. Incorporate information on the As-Built Drawings. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 15059-10 General Piping Provisions SECTION 15060 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Thermal hanger-shield inserts. 4. Fastener systems. 5. Pipe-positioning systems. 6. Pipe stands. 7. Equipment supports. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze hangers for pipe and equipment supports. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following; include Product Data for components. 1. Trapeze pipe hangers. 2. Metal framing systems. 3. Pipe stands. 4. Equipment supports. C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For trapeze hangers indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Detail fabrication and assembly of trapeze hangers. 2. Include design calculations for designing trapeze hangers. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Welding certificates. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural-Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M. B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to "2015 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX." Technical Specifications 15060 - 1 Hangers and Supports PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports. B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for plumbing piping and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water. 2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. 3. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction. 2.2 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. 2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized, hot-dip galvanized, or electro- galvanized. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coated or epoxy powder coated. 4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to support bearing surface of piping. 5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel or stainless steel. B. Stainless-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. 2. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to support bearing surface of piping. 3. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of stainless steel. C. Copper Pipe and Tube Hangers: 1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory- fabricated components. 2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated steel or stainless steel. 2.3 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS A. MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Flex-Strut Inc. b. G-Strut. C. MIRO Industries. Technical Specifications 15060 - 2 Hangers and Supports 2. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated, pipe-support assembly made of steel channels, accessories, fittings, and other components for supporting multiple parallel pipes. 3. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4 factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 4. Channels: Continuous slotted carbon-steel and galvanized carbon steel, channel with interned lips. 5. Channel Width: Selected for applicable load criteria. 6. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel. 7. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel. 8. Metallic Coating: Pregalvanized G90 Hot-dip galvanized . 2.4 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS A. Description: MSS SP-58, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly, made from structural-carbon-steel shapes, with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts. 2.5 THERMAL HANGER-SHIELD INSERTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. National Pipe Hanger Corporation. 2. Pipe Shields Inc. 3. Piping Technology & Products, Inc. 4. Value Engineered Products, Inc. B. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C552, Type II cellular glass with 100- psig or ASTM C591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier. C. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent-treated, ASTM C533, Type I calcium silicate with 100-psig ASTM C552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig or ASTM C591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanu rate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength. D. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe. E. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe. F. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature. 2.6 FASTENER SYSTEMS A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Hilti, Inc. Technical Specifications 15060 - 3 Hangers and Supports b. MKT Fastening, LLC. B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type anchors, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Eaton (B-line). b. Hilti, Inc. C. MKT Fastening, LLC. 2. Indoor Applications: Zinc-coated or stainless steel. 3. Outdoor Applications: Stainless steel. 2.7 PIPE-POSITIONING SYSTEMS A. Description: IAPMO PS 42 positioning system composed of metal brackets, clips, and straps for positioning piping in pipe spaces; for plumbing fixtures in commercial applications. 2.8 PIPE STANDS A. General Requirements for Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated assemblies made of manufactured corrosion-resistant components to support roof-mounted piping. B. Low-Profile, Single Base, Single-Pipe Stand: 1. Description: Single base with vertical and horizontal members, and pipe support, for roof installation without membrane protection. 2. Base: Single, vulcanized rubber, molded polypropylene, or polycarbonate. 3. Vertical Members: Two, galvanized-steel, continuous-thread 1/2-inch rods. 4. Horizontal Member: Adjustable horizontal, galvanized-steel pipe support channels. 5. Pipe Supports: Strut clamps. 6. Hardware: Galvanized steel. 7. Accessories: Protection pads. 8. Height: 12 inches above roof. 2.9 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural- carbon-steel shapes. 2.10 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: ASTM B221. B. Carbon Steel: ASTM Al011/A1011 M. C. Structural Steel: ASTM A36/A36M carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. D. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M. Technical Specifications 15060 - 4 Hangers and Supports E. Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications. 1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping materials and installation, for penetrations through fire-rated walls, ceilings, and assemblies. B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components, so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb. 3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-58. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure. B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-58. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers. 1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size, or install intermediate supports for smaller-diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers. 2. Field fabricate from ASTM A36/A36M carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1 M. C. Fiberglass Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with applicable portions of MSS SP-58. Install hangers and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure. D. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and support together on field-assembled strut systems. E. Thermal Hanger-Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping. F. Fastener System Installation: 1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick in concrete, after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual. 2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete, after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions. G. Pipe-Positioning-System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and waste piping connections to each plumbing fixture. Technical Specifications 15060 - 5 Hangers and Supports H. Pipe Stand Installation: 1. Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounted Type: Assemble components and mount on smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane. 2. Curb-Mounted-Type Pipe Stands: Assemble components or fabricate pipe stand and mount on permanent, stationary roof curb. See Section 077200 "Roof Accessories" for curbs. I. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. J. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes. K. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units. L. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying. M. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms, and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. N. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports, so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. O. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping. P. Insulated Piping: 1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping. a. Piping Operating Above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation. b. Piping Operating Below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal hanger- shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert. C. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping. 2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. a. Option: Thermal hanger-shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight- distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees. a. Option: Thermal hanger-shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight- distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. Technical Specifications 15060 - 6 Hangers and Supports 4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. C. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. 5. Thermal Hanger Shields: Install with insulation of same thickness as piping insulation. 3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor. B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment, and make bearing surface smooth. C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports. 3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports. B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1 M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe. B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches. 3.6 PAINTING A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded, shop-painted areas. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as those used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. B. Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded, shop-painted areas on miscellaneous metal are specified in sections for "Exterior Painting" and/or "Interior Painting" as required C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A780/A780M. 3.7 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment. Technical Specifications 15060 - 7 Hangers and Supports B. Comply with MSS SP-58 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. C. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. D. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finishes. E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports and metal trapeze pipe hangers and attachments for general service applications. F. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper or stainless-steel attachments for copper piping and tubing. G. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching. H. Use thermal hanger-shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing. I. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation. 3. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 24 if little or no insulation is required. 4. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection. 5. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 8. 6. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. 7. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. 8. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. 9. Split Pipe Ring with or without Turnbuckle Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 8. 10. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 3. 11. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 12. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or contraction. 13. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction occurs. 14. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 24, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction occurs. Technical Specifications 15060 - 8 Hangers and Supports 15. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction occurs but vertical adjustment is unnecessary. 16. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 24 if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction occurs and vertical adjustment is unnecessary. 17. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 30 if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation, in addition to expansion and contraction, is required. J. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24. 2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps. K. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment of up to 6 inches for heavy loads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. 3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11 split pipe rings. 4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of building attachments. 5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. L. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel or Malleable-Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling. 2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar- joist construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape. 3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles. 4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large. 6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to flange edge. 8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams. 9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-beams for heavy loads. 10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-beams for heavy loads, with link extensions. 11. Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to structural steel. Technical Specifications 15060 - 9 Hangers and Supports 12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads: a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. C. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb. 13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required. 15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear horizontal movement where headroom is limited. M. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation. 3. Thermal Hanger-Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe. N. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement. 2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-1/4 inches. 3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with springs. 4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal expansion in piping systems. 5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load, and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger. 6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load, and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from base support. 7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load, and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze support. 8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load- adjustment capability. These supports include the following types: a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally. b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically. C. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member. Technical Specifications 15060 - 10 Hangers and Supports O. Comply with MSS SP-58 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. P. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction. Q. Use pipe-positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply and waste piping for plumbing fixtures. END OF SECTION 15060 Technical Specifications 15060 - 11 Hangers and Supports SECTION 15063 PIPE AND FITTING MATERIALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Requirements for pipe and fitting materials, including: 1. Fabricated Steel Pipe 2. Cast Iron Soil Pipe 3. Stainless Steel Pipe 4. PVC Pressure Piping 5. Fish Transfer Tubes 6. Plastic Pressure Piping 7. HDPE Drainage Pipe B. See the Piping Schedule on the drawings for additional piping system specifications. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS A. American National Standard Institute (ANSI) B. ASTM International (ASTM) C. American Water Works Association (AWWA) 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01340. B. Shop drawings for each pipe assembly shall include, but not be limited to the following: 1. Layout drawings including necessary dimensions, details, pipe joints, fittings, specials, bolts and nuts, gaskets, valves, appurtenances, anchors, guides, and materials of construction. Fabrication drawings shall include spacers, adapters, connectors, fitting and pipe supports to accommodate the equipment and valves in a complete and functional system. 2. Manufacturer's catalog sheet showing materials and installation procedures for all sleeve couplings, dismantling joints, and other mechanical couplings for pipes. C. Necessary certifications, test reports and affidavits of compliance shall be obtained by the Contractor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FABRICATED STEEL PIPE A. Unless otherwise indicated, AWWA steel pipe shall conform to AWWA C200 as indicated in the Piping Schedule and Drawings. B. Fittings for fabricated steel pipe: AWWA C208. Technical Specifications 15063-1 Pipe and Fitting Materials C. Fittings for Mill Pipe: 1. ASTM A234. 2. ASTM B 16.3. 3. ANSI B 16.5. 4. ANSI B 16.9 5. ANSI B16.11 D. Wall thickness unless indicated otherwise: 1. 1/8 to 5-in. diameter pipe: SCH 40 2. 6 to 10-in. diameter pipe: 3/16-in. E. Sized through 12-in. diameter are true OD pipe. F. Pipe coating and lining: LifeLast DuraShield 210. 2.2 CAST IRON SOIL PIPE A. Cast Iron Soil Pipe shall conform to ASTM A74 and CISPI 301 with no hub joints and fittings and gaskets conforming to ASTM C564. 2.3 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE A. Provide Type 304 Schedule 40S pipe with Type 304 Schedule 40S fittings and appurtenances meeting the requirements of ANSI B16.3 at the locations shown on the Drawings and indicated on the Piping Schedule. 2.4 PVC PRESSURE PIPING A. Provide SCH 80 PVC or CPVC piping systems as indicated on the Piping Schedule. B. Provide piping with Schedule 80 fittings and appurtenances meeting the requirements of ASTM D1785 at the locations shown on the Drawings and indicated on the Piping Schedule. C. Manufacture pipe, fittings and valves from materials that have been tested and approved for conveying potable water by the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF). D. Fittings shall be solvent welded socket or flanged as shown on the Drawings and meet ASTM D1785 with the same pressure and temperature rating as the pipe. E. Coat all PVC exposed to sunlight per Section 09910. 2.5 FISH TRANSFER TUBES A. Provide polyvinyl chloride pressure pipe with bell and spigot joints meeting the requirements of ASTM D2241. Restrain all joints with two PVC romagrip fittings and galvanized restraint rods. B. Fittings shall be fabricated from the same material as the pipe segments and bent. Pipes shall be bent by packing with sand or filling with compressed air before heating and pulling the radius and angle specified by the engineer. Pipes shall be kept round to within '/4" tolerances. C. Pipe interior spigot joint edges, corners, protrusions or miscellaneous burrs shall be rounded/ground smooth to avoid injury to the fish. Technical Specifications 15063-2 Pipe and Fitting Materials D. Before shipping, Contractor shall coordinate with Engineer and Owner for a shop inspection of the pipe fittings. Manufacturer shall be available to assist with field installation and repairs or modifications as necessary. E. Pipes shall be fabricated by a manufacturer with 5 projects of similar scope. Provide references and photos of past projects via submittal. F. Approved Manufacturers, Or Equal: 1. Specified Fittings Bellingham, WA 2.6 PLASTIC PRESSURE PIPING A. Install AWWA C900 PVC with a minimum pressure class of 100 psi at the locations shown on the Drawings and as indicated on the Piping Schedule. 2.7 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) DRAINAGE PIPE A. HDPE drainage pipe shall be placed as shown on the Drawings and in the Pipe Schedule. 1. The pipe shall have a smooth interior wall and a corrugated exterior wall. 2. The pipe shall meet AASHTO M252 specifications and be water tight according to the requirements of ASTM D3212. 3. Pipe gaskets shall meet the requirements of ASTM F477 and shall be installed by the pipe manufacturer and covered with a removable, protective wrap to ensure the gasket is free from debris. 4. Fittings shall conform to ASTM F2306. Bell and spigot connections shall use a spun-on or welded bell and valley or saddle gasket meeting the watertight joint performance requirements of ASTM F2306. 5. Material for pipe production shall be of virgin quality using PE 4710 resin listed as TR-4 by the Plastic Pipe Institute. Resin shall meet ASTM D3350. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with industry standards (ANSI, ASTM, AWWA, etc.) and manufacturer's instructions. Technical Specifications 15063-3 Pipe and Fitting Materials B. Bell-and-spigot pipe shall be laid with the bells upstream of the flow. All types of piping shall be laid and fitted together so that, when complete, the pipe will have a smooth and uniform invert. Lay pipe, fittings and accessories with proper equipment and in a manner to prevent damage. Each length of pipe laid shall be thoroughly swabbed to remove all foreign material before the next length is laid. Each pipe shall be inspected for defects before being lowered into the trench. Any defective pipe materials found during inspection, prior to placing within the trench, shall be replaced at the expense of the Contractor. When pipe laying is not in progress, seal the open ends of installed pipe to prevent entrance of water into the line. Whenever water is excluded from the interior of the pipe, place enough backfill on the pipe to prevent floating in the event of dewatering failure. Remove any pipe that has floated from the trench and restore the bedding. No pipe shall be laid when the trench conditions or the weather are unsuitable for proper installation as determined by the Owner. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test piping systems in accordance with Section 15060. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 15063-4 Pipe and Fitting Materials SECTION 15074 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Isolation pads. 2. Isolation mounts. 3. Restrained elastomeric isolation mounts. 4. Restrained spring isolators. 5. Housed spring mounts. 6. Elastomeric hangers. 7. Spring hangers. 8. Spring hangers with vertical-limit stops. 9. Pipe riser resilient supports. 10. Resilient pipe guides. B. Mechanical systems shall include the following items to the extent required on plans or in other sections of these specifications. 1. All piping systems inside the building. 2. All piping systems exterior to the building. 3. All air distribution systems and ductwork. 4. All equipment associated with the above systems. C. The manufacturer of the air handler is required to provide anchoring requirements for their equipment. The supplier of the materials provided under this section shall coordinate with the manufacturer of the above noted equipment to provide the required anchoring systems. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic-Restraint Loading (Refer to Structural Drawing Sheet GS-1): 1. Site Class as Defined in the IBC: D. 2. Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC: II. a. Component Importance Factor: 1.0. b. Seismic Design Category: D. 3. Design Spectral Response Coefficient (Sds-0.439): See ASCE 7-05 for applicable system requirements. 4. Design Spectral Response Coefficient: (Sd1-0.209): See ASCE 7-05 for applicable system requirements. B. Wind-Restraint Loading: 1. Basic Wind Speed: 115 mph, Exposure C 2. Building Classification Category: II Technical Specifications 15074 - 1 Vibration and Seismic Controls 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For vibration isolation and seismic-restraint calculations and details indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. The isolator manufacturer shall furnish submittals indicating capacities and sizes of isolators and bases for isolated equipment. Data shall include outside diameter and heights (free, operating, solid) of springs; free and operating heights of neoprene and fiberglass isolators; and loads on each isolator. Calculations and selection data shall include structural consideration , such as floor span, slab on grade, etc. D. All calculations and selection shall be based on the actual equipment to be installed whether the equipment is as specified or is a substitute item. E. Provide a schedule of equipment being supported listing the specific isolation device proposed for approval. Include the approved schedule with the Operation and Maintenance Manual. F. Welding certificates. G. Qualification Data: For professional engineer. H. Field quality-control test reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC and ASCE 7-05 unless requirements in this Section are more stringent. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1 M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." C. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproved by ICC-ES, or preapproved by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. D. The Contractor shall coordinate with the supplier of vibration isolation equipment to ensure isolators are sized for the actual equipment supplied. E. The supplier of equipment specified in this Section shall coordinate with all trades to identify the locations of all required isolation devices. Technical Specifications 15074 - 2 Vibration and Seismic Controls PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATION PRODUCTS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Kindorf. 2. Grinnell. 3. Elcen. 4. Unistrut. 5. Kinetics Noise Control. 6. Mason Industries. 7. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. 8. Amber Booth B. SUPPORTS 1. Equipment isolator pads shall be Mason type W neoprene waffle pad. Provide an appropriate durometer or equal (hardness) for a recommended loading of 40 to 60 psi. Provide pad with steel backing plate or other options as required for the application. 2. Neoprene isolators shall be Mason model ND or equal and shall incorporate completely enclosed metal inserts to permit bolting to the supported unit. 3. Spring isolators shall be Mason model SLF or equal. Units to be freestanding, unhoused, laterally stable spring mounts, incorporating leveling bolts and 1/4" thick noise isolation pads. The outside spring diameter shall be equal to or greater than 80% of the designed spring operating height, and the horizontal stiffness shall be at least 80% of the vertical stiffness. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. C. HANGERS 1. Ductwork isolation hangers shall be spring and neoprene washer type equal to Mason Industrial model W30. the minimum deflection of the hanger or support shall be 0.75 inches. 2. Equipment hanger isolators shall be combination series elastomer spring type, Mason Industries model 30N or equal. Elastomer element shall provide an isolation bushing for the hanger rod. Units shall have stamped or welded housings with a lower hole large enough to allow 300 movement of the lower rod before contacting the housing. Springs shall be laterally stable and shall have a minimum addition travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Elastomer element shall be rated for a minimum of .25" deflection. 3. Hanger isolators for equipment under 75 lbs. shall be Mason Model HD or equal. 4. Isolated ceiling hangers shall include welded steel assemblies designed to be incorporated into the isolated ceiling suspension system specified for this project. Hanger assembly brackets shall be designed to allow a 15 degrees off vertical alignment of ht suspension member without making metal-to-metal contact between suspension and hanger assembly members. Isolation hanger load capacities shall be selected by the manufacturer to provide a minimum vertical static deflection of the steel spring element of 1.0 inch and maintain an additional deflection to solid of 0.5 inch. Hanger assemblies shall include a method by which the installing contractor can preload the steel spring element to restrict additional vertical deflection of the steel spring to 1/4" on installation of finish ceiling materials. Technical Specifications 15074 - 3 Vibration and Seismic Controls 2.2 SEISMIC PRODUCTS A. CABLE SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES 1. Cables and Cable End Connections: a. Manufacturers 1) X Kindorf. 2) Grinnell. 3) Elcen. 4) Unistrut. 5) Kinetics Noise Control. 6) Mason Industries. 7) Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. 8) Amber Booth b. Steel cables sized to resist seismic loads with a minimum safety factor of two and arranged to provide an all directional restraint. C. Cable end connections shall be steel assemblies that swivel to final installation angle. Cable end connections shall utilize two clamping bolts to provide proper angle angagements. 2. Rod Clamps: a. Manufacturers 1) X Kindorf. 2) Grinnell. 3) Elcen. 4) Unistrut. 5) Kinetics Noise Control. 6) Mason Industries. 7) Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. 8) Amber Booth b. Clamps designed to secure steel angles to rods. B. PIPE SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES 1. Manufacturer: a. B-Line 2. Pre-engineering piping seismic restraint system designed to resist seismic loading in any direction. 3. Certified and signed by registered professional structural engineer that details are in accordance with the requirements of the International Building Code for the listed seismic criteria. 4. System shall be a complete seismic system and shall include: a. Installation details and devices for vertical, transverse and longitudinal bracing. b. Attachment details to structure complete with bolt types and sizes. C. CHILLER RESTRAINTS 1. Manufacturers: a. Holdrite BS Series b. Amber Booth C. Engineer approved equal Technical Specifications 15074 -4 Vibration and Seismic Controls 2. Heavy duty spring isolators with seismic snubbers for support of equipment and to resist horizontal displacement due to earthquake motion in listed seismic zone, in accordance with International Building Code and Structural drawings. 3. Designed for weight and center of gravity of chillers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATIONS A. Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight. B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation. C. Adjust active height of spring isolators. 3.3 VIBRATION ISOLATION SPECIFIC 1. Ductwork a. The first 50 feet of the supply and return ductwork from the air handler shall be provided with isolation hangers and/or supports. 2. Air Handler a. Provide waffle pad under base rail. 3. Unit Heaters a. Mason model HD 4. Inline Pumps a. Provide waffle pad under base of pump. Hang first 50 feet of supply and return pipe with Mason 30N or provide waffle pad under support stand. 5. Exhaust Fan a. Mason model 30N. 3.4 SEISMIC PROVISION SPECIFIC 1. General: a. All in-line equipment shall be braced independently of pipe or ducts. b. Welding shall conform to AWS D1.1 and shall use either shielded or submerged arc methods. C. When conduit is to be installed, it shall be braced the same as the equivalent weight pipe. d. Use either cable or solid bracing for all situations. Do not mix bracing types in the same direction. e. Bolt holes shall be 1/8 inch larger than the bolt diameter unless otherwise noted. 2. Piping System a. Support and brace piping as specified herein. Refer to list of details from SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual inserted at the end of this section. 1) At the Contractor's option, a pre-engineered support system specified in this section may be utilized. Support and brace piping system in complete accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. b. Brace all pipes 2-1/2 inch and larger. 1) Exceptions: a) Brace all fuel oil, gas piping (including fuel gases, medical gases and compressed air) 1 inch ID and larger. Technical Specifications 15074 - 5 Vibration and Seismic Controls b) Brace all piping in boiler and mechanical equipment rooms 1- 1/4" ID and larger. c) Bracing is not required for piping suspended form individual hangers 12 inches or less in length, as measured from the top of the pipe to the bottom of the support where the hanger is attached and where the hanger provide s a non-moment generating (swivel) connection to the structure. C. Details indicated provide lateral bracing system. A typical vertical support system must also be used. However, where brace occurs, the vertical angle shown may replace a typical vertical support. d. Transverse bracings at 40 feet on center maximum. 1) Except gas piping shall be at 20 feet. 2) Except where lesser spacing is indicated in the tables. e. Longitudinal bracings at 80 feet on center maximum. 1) Except gas piping shall be at forty feet. 1) Except where lesser spacing is indicated in the tables. f. Transverse bracing from one pipe section may also act as longitudinal bracing for the pipe section connected perpendicular to it, if the bracing is installed within 24 inches of the elbow or tee and similar size. g. Do not use branch lines to brace main lines. h. Provide oversized pipe sleeves through walls or floors to allow for anticipated differential movements. i. Provide flexibility in joints where pipes pass through building seismic or expansion joints, or where rigidly supported pipes connect to equipment with vibration isolators. 1) For threaded piping, the flexibility may be provided by the installation of swing joints. 2) For piping with manufactured ball joints, select the length of piping offset using Seismic Drift in place of the expansion given in the joint manufacturer's selection table. Seismic Drift = 0.015 feet per foot of height above the base where seismic separation occurs. j. At vertical pipe risers, wherever possible, support the weight of the riser at a point or points above the center of gravity of the riser. Provide lateral guides at the top and bottom of the riser, and at intermediate points not to exceed 30 feet (9.1 m) on center. k. Do not fasten one rigid piping system to two dissimilar parts of a building that may respond in a different mode during an earthquake; for example, a wall and a roof. I. Piping grouped for support on trapeze-type hangers shall be brazed at the same intervals as determined by the smallest diameter pipe of the group. Hanger rods shall be increased in cross-sectional area proportionate to the increased weight per linear foot of pipe and contents supported at each trapeze hanger. No trapeze-type hanger shall be secured with less than two inch bolts. Technical Specifications 15074 - 6 Vibration and Seismic Controls M. Bracing rigidly attached to pipe flanges, or similar, shall not be used where it would interfere with thermal expansion of piping. n. Spreaders shall be provided between racked or adjacent piping runs to prevent contact during seismic activity whenever pipe or insulated pipe surfaces are less than 4 inches or four times the maximum displacement due to seismic force. Spreaders to be applied at same interval as sway braces. Spreaders shall be applied to surface of bare or insulated hot pipe and over insulation utilizing high-density inserts and pipe protection shields where vapor-barrier-type insulation is employed. o. Flexible Couplings or Joints: 1) Flexible couplings or joints in building piping shall be provided at bottom of all pipe risers 3-1/2 inches (89 mm) size and larger. Cast-iron waste and vent piping need only comply with these provisions when caulked joints are used. Flexible bell and spigot pipe joints using rubber gaskets or no-hub fittings may be used at each branch adjacent to tees and elbows for underground waste piping inside of building to comply with these requirements. 2) All underground piping except heat distribution system, shall have flexible couplings installed adjacent to building as shown. Additional flexible couplings shall be provided as follows: a) On each side of the joints of demarcation between soils having widely differing degrees of consolidation. b) At all points that can be considered to act as anchors. c) On every branch of a tee and each side of an elbow. 3. Ductwork: a. Support and brace ductwork as specified herein. b. Brace all rectangular ductwork 6.0 sq. ft. of area and larger. Brace all round ductwork 28 inch diameter and larger. Brace flat oval ductwork the same as rectangular ducts of the same nominal size. C. Bracing is not required for ductwork suspended by hangers 12 inches or less in length as measured from the top of the duct to the bottom of the support where the hanger is attached. Hangers shall be positively attached to the duct within 2 inches of the top of the duct with a minimum of two #10 sheet metal screws. d. Details shown provide a lateral bracing system. A typical vertical support system must also be used. However, where bracing occurs, the vertical angle shown may replace a typical vertical support. This includes a trapeze vertical supporting system. e. Transverse bracing at the intervals specified in the tables or a both ends if the duct run is less than the specified interval. Transverse bracing shall be installed at each duct turn and at each end of a duct run, with a minimum of one brace at each end. f. Longitudinal bracing shall occur at the intervals specified in the tables with at least one brace per duct run. Technical Specifications 15074 - 7 Vibration and Seismic Controls g. Transverse bracing for one duct may also act as longitudinal bracing for a duct section connected perpendicular to it if the bracing is installed within four feet of the intersection of the ducts and if the bracing is sized for the larger duct. h. Walls, including gypsum non-bearing walls, in which ducts pass through may be considered a transverse. Provide solid blocking around duct penetrations at stud wall construction. i. A group of ducts may be combined in common frames. Frame size and combined weights to determine supports. j. Unbraced ducts shall be installed with a 6-inch clearance to vertical ceiling hanger wires. 4. Air Inlets and Outlets: In seismic use Group II or III, air inlets and outlets installed in lay-in t-bar ceilings shall be secured to the lay-in t-bar ceiling with ceiling clips furnished with the air inlets and outlets. 5. Equipment: a. Support all equipment as specified herein and as detailed on the drawings. b. Multidirectional Seismic Snubbers: Multidirectional seismic snubbers employing elastomer pads shall be installed on all floor- or slab-mounted equipment when equipment items are otherwise required to be mounted on resilient-type vibration isolation devices. The Snubbers and Anchor Bolts shall be sized by the equipment manufacturer to conform to the seismic requirements of this specification section. C. All floor and pad-mounted equipment will have a minimum of four anchor- bolts securely fastened through bases. Anchor bolts shall have an embedded straight length equal to at least ten times the nominal diameter of the bolt and shall be sized by the equipment manufacturer to conform to the seismic requirements of this specification section. d. Install specified water heater restraints at water heaters and water storage tanks (50 to 120 gallon range) to prevent horizontal displacement during an earthquake. Install in complete accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. e. Suspended Equipment: 1) Equipment sway bracing shall be provided for all items supported from overhead floor or roof structures. Braces shall consist of angles,rods, bars, or pipes run at a 45 degree angle from the equipment frame to the building structure secured at both ends with not less than '/z inch bolts. 2) Bracing shall be provided in two planes of direction, 90 degrees apart, for each item of equipment. 3) Details of all equipment bracing not detailed on the drawings shall be submitted for approval. 4) In lieu of bracing with vertical supports, these items may be supported with hangers inclined at 45 degrees, provided that Technical Specifications 15074 - 8 Vibration and Seismic Controls supporting members are properly sized to support operating weight of equipment when inclined at a 45 degree angle. END OF SECTION 15074 Technical Specifications 15074 - 9 Vibration and Seismic Controls SECTION 15075 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Equipment labels. 2. Warning signs and labels. 3. Pipe labels. 4. Duct labels. 5. Stencils. 6. Valve tags. 7. Warning tags. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device. C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label. D. Valve numbering scheme. E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS A. Metal Labels for Equipment: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Brady Corporation. b. Brimar Industries, Inc. C. Champion America. d. Craftmark Pipe Markers. e. emedco. f. Marking Services, Inc. 2. Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware. 3. Letter Color: White. 4. Background Color: Blue. 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. Technical Specifications 15075 - 1 Mechanical Identification 6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering. 7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. B. Plastic Labels for Equipment: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Brady Corporation. b. Brimar Industries, Inc. C. Champion America. d. Craftmark Pipe Markers. e. emedco. f. Marking Services, Inc. 2. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. 3. Letter Color: White. 4. Background Color: Blue. 5. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. 6. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. 7. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-quarters the size of principal lettering. 8. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 9. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. C. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. D. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-1 1- inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number, and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules) and the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data. 2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Brady Corporation. 2. Brimar Industries, Inc. 3. Champion America. 4. Craftmark Pipe Markers. 5. emedco. 6. Marking Sevices Inc. Technical Specifications 15075 - 2 Mechanical Identification B. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. C. Letter Color: Black. D. Background Color: Yellow. E. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. F. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. G. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three- quarters the size of principal lettering. H. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. I. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. J. Label Content: Include caution and warning information plus emergency notification instructions. 2.3 PIPE LABELS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Brady Corporation. 2. Brimar Industries, Inc. 3. Champion America. 4. Craftmark Pipe Markers. 5. emedco. 6. Marking Sevices Inc. B. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction according to ASME A13.1. C. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive. D. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing. E. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include pipe size and an arrow indicating flow direction. 1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction. 2. Lettering Size: Size letters according to ASME A13.1 for piping. At least 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Technical Specifications 15075 - 3 Mechanical Identification 2.4 STENCILS A. Stencils for Ducts: 1. Lettering Size: Minimum letter height of 1-1/4 inches for viewing distances up to 15 feet and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. 2. Stencil Material: Aluminum or Brass. 3. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, acrylic enamel. Paint may be in pressurized spray- can form. 4. Identification Paint: Exterior, acrylic enamel. Paint may be in pressurized spray- can form. B. Stencils for Access Panels and Door Labels, Equipment Labels, and Similar Operational Instructions: 1. Lettering Size: Minimum letter height of 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. 2. Stencil Material: Aluminum or Brass. 3. Stencil Paint: Exterior, gloss, acrylic enamel. Paint may be in pressurized spray- can form. 4. Identification Paint: Exterior, acrylic enamel. Paint may be in pressurized spray- can form. 2.5 VALVE TAGS A. Description: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch numbers. 1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware. 2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link chain or beaded chain. B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-1 1-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses. 1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data. 2.6 WARNING TAGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Brady Corporation. 2. Brimar Industries, Inc. 3. Champion America. 4. Craftmark Pipe Markers. 5. emedco. 6. Marking Sevices Inc. B. Description: Preprinted or partially preprinted accident-prevention tags of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing. 1. Size: 3 by 5-1/4 inches minimum. 2. Fasteners: Brass grommet and wire. 3. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO NOT OPERATE." 4. Color: Safety-yellow background with black lettering. Technical Specifications 15075 -4 Mechanical Identification PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants. 3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors. C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. 3.3 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment. B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible. 3.4 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION A. Piping Color Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting." B. Pipe Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows: 1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations and on both sides of through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 25 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 10 feet in areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels. C. Directional Flow Arrows: Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow in pipes, including pipes where flow is allowed in both directions. D. Pipe Label Color Schedule: 1. Heating Water Piping: White letters on a safety-green background. 2. Refrigerant Piping: White letters on a safety-purple background. 3. Natural Gas: White letters on a safety-yellow background 4. Defined by User: White letters on a safety-purple background, black letters on a safety-white background, white letters on a safety-gray background, and white letters on a safety-black background E. Pipe Label Color Schedule: Technical Specifications 15075 - 5 Mechanical Identification 1. Ground Water Piping: a. Background: Safety green. b. Letter Colors: White. 2. Chilled Ground Water Piping: a. Background: Safety green. b. Letter Colors: White 3. Chilled Water Piping: a. Background: Safety blue b. Letter Colors: White 4. Domestic Water Piping a. Background: Safety green. b. Letter Colors: White. 5. Sanitary Waste and Storm Drainage Piping: a. Background Color: Safety purple. b. Letter Color: White. 6. Refrigerant Piping: a. Background Color: Safety purple b. Letter Color: White F. 3.5 DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION A. Stenciled Duct Label Option: Stenciled labels showing service and flow direction may be provided instead of plastic-laminated duct labels, at Installer's option. B. Locate labels near points where ducts enter into and exit from concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 25 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system. 3.6 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves, valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, shutoff valves, faucets, convenience and lawn-watering hose connections, and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing- in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule. B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs: 1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape: a. Refrigerant: 2 inches, round. b. Potable and Other Water: 2 inches, round C. Hydronic: 2 inches, round Technical Specifications 15075 - 6 Mechanical Identification d. Natural Gas: 2 inches, round. 2. Valve-Tag Colors: a. Refrigerant: White letters on a safety-purple background. b. Chilled Water: White letters on a safety-blue background C. Ground Water: White letters on a safety-green background. d. Natural Gas: White letters on a safety-yellow background. e. Potable and Other Water: White letters on a safety-green background. f. Defined by User: White letters on a safety-purple background, black letters on a safety-white background, white letters on a safety-gray background, and white letters on a safety-black background 3.7 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where required. END OF SECTION 15075 Technical Specifications 15075 - 7 Mechanical Identification SECTION 15080 MECHANICAL INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes insulating the following plumbing piping services: 1. Domestic cold-water piping. 2. Domestic hot-water piping. 3. Domestic recirculating hot-water piping. 4. Refrigerant piping 5. Ground Water piping 6. Chilled Ground Water piping 7. Supplies and drains for handicap-accessible lavatories and sinks. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 15080 "HVAC Equipment Insulation" for equipment insulation. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger. 2. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation. 3. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of insulation. 4. Detail application of field-applied jackets. 5. Detail application at linkages of control devices. C. Samples: For each type of insulation and jacket indicated. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. B. Material test reports. C. Field quality-control reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training. B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products in accordance with ASTM E84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket Technical Specifications 15080 - 1 Mechanical Insulation materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke- developed index of 50 or less. 2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less and smoke- developed index of 150 or less. C. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous components: 1. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Section 15060 "Hangers and Supports." B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance. C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing. 1.6 SCHEDULING A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results. B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Piping Insulation Schedule," "Outdoor, Aboveground Piping Insulation Schedule," and "Outdoor, Underground Piping Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied. B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. C. Products that come into contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested in accordance with ASTM C871. D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable in accordance with ASTM C795. E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process. F. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid, hermetically sealed cells. Comply with ASTM C552. Technical Specifications 15080 - 2 Mechanical Insulation 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation. 2. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Type II, Class 1, without jacket. 3. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Type II, Class 2, with factory-applied ASJ jacket. 4. Factory fabricate shapes in accordance with ASTM C450 and ASTM C585. 5. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. G. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C547. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. b. Knauf Insulation. C. Manson Insulation Inc. d. Owens Corning. 2. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Type I, Grade A with factory-applied ASJ. 3. 850 deg F. 4. Factory fabricate shapes in accordance with ASTM C450 and ASTM C585. 5. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. 2.2 ADHESIVES A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated. B. Cellular-Glass Adhesive: Two-component, thermosetting urethane adhesive containing no flammable solvents, with a service temperature range of minus 100 to plus 200 deg F. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. D. ASJ Adhesive and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A, for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints. Technical Specifications 15080 - 3 Mechanical Insulation 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. C. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc. E. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Dow Consumer Solutions. b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. C. Speedline Corporation. 2.3 MASTICS AND COATINGS A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials,jackets, and substrates. B. Vapor-Retarder Mastic, Water Based: Suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. C. Knauf Insulation. d. Vimasco Corporation. 2. Water-Vapor Permeance: Comply with ASTM E96/E96M or ASTM F1249. 3. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F. 4. Comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II, for permeance requirements. 5. Color: White. C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above-ambient services. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. C. Knauf Insulation. d. Vimasco Corporation. 2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E96/E96M, greater than 1.0 perm at manufacturer's recommended dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F. 4. Color: White. Technical Specifications 15080 - 4 Mechanical Insulation 2.4 SEALANTS A. Materials shall be as recommended by the insulation manufacturer and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. B. Joint Sealants: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. C. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc. d. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation. 2. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 58 to plus 176 deg F. 4. Color: White or gray. C. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. C. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc. 2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 4. Color: Aluminum. D. ASJ Flashing Sealants and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. 2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 4. Color: White. 2.5 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: 1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C1136, Type I. Technical Specifications 15080 - 5 Mechanical Insulation 2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C1136, Type I. 3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C1136, Type II. 2.6 FIELD-APPLIED FABRIC-REINFORCING MESH A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Approximately 2 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by 10 strands/sq. in. for covering pipe and pipe fittings. 2.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C1136, Type I, unless otherwise indicated. B. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing. C. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc. C. Speedline Corporation. 2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer. 3. Color: White. 4. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate. a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories. D. Metal Jacket: 1. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005, Temper H-14. a. Factory cut and rolled to size. b. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. C. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 1-mil-thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper. d. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil-thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper. e. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers: 1) Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket. 2) Preformed two-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long- radius elbows. 3) Tee covers. 4) Flange and union covers. Technical Specifications 15080 - 6 Mechanical Insulation 5) End caps. 6) Beveled collars. 7) Valve covers. 8) Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not available. E. Underground Direct-Buried Jacket: 125-mil-thick vapor barrier and waterproofing membrane, consisting of a rubberized bituminous resin reinforced with a woven-glass fiber or polyester scrim and laminated aluminum foil. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation. b. Polyguard Products, Inc. F. Self-Adhesive Outdoor Jacket: 60-mil-thick, laminated vapor barrier and waterproofing membrane for installation over insulation located aboveground outdoors; consisting of a rubberized bituminous resin on a cross-laminated polyethylene film covered with white aluminum-foil facing. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Polyguard Products, Inc. G. PVDC Jacket for Indoor Applications: 4-mil-thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.02 perms when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M and with a flame-spread index of 10 and a smoke-developed index of 20 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. ITW Insulation Systems; Illinois Tool Works, Inc. H. PVDC Jacket for Outdoor Applications: 6-mil-thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.01 perms when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M and with a flame-spread index of 25 and a smoke-developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. ITW Insulation Systems; Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 2.8 TAPES A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C1136. Technical Specifications 15080 - 7 Mechanical Insulation 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. 3M Industrial Adhesives and Tapes Division. b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division. C. Knauf Insulation. 2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 11.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 Ibf/inch in width. 7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape. B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C1136. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. 3M Industrial Adhesives and Tapes Division. b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division. C. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company. d. Knauf Insulation. 2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 6.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 Ibf/inch in width. 7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape. C. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive; suitable for indoor and outdoor applications. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. 3M Industrial Adhesives and Tapes Division. b. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company. 2. Width: 2 inches. 3. Thickness: 6 mils. 4. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 500 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 18 Ibf/inch in width. D. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive. Technical Specifications 15080 - 8 Mechanical Insulation 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. 3M Industrial Adhesives and Tapes Division. b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division. C. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company. d. Knauf Insulation. 2. Width: 2 inches. 3. Thickness: 3.7 mils. 4. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 5 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 34 Ibf/inch in width. E. PVDC Tape for Indoor Applications: White vapor-retarder PVDC tape with acrylic adhesive. 1. Width: 3 inches. 2. Film Thickness: 2 mils. 3. Adhesive Thickness: 1.5 mils. 4. Elongation at Break: 120 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 20 psi in width. F. PVDC Tape for Outdoor Applications: White vapor-retarder PVDC tape with acrylic adhesive. 1. Width: 3 inches. 2. Film Thickness: 6 mils. 3. Adhesive Thickness: 1.5 mils. 4. Elongation at Break: 145 percent. 5. Tensile Strength: 55 psi in width. 2.9 SECUREMENTS A. Bands: 1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal. 2. Aluminum: ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal. B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch-wide, stainless steel or Monel. 2.10 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS A. Protective Shielding Pipe Covers, as specified on drawings or fixtures: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Just Manufacturing. b. McGuire Manufacturing. C. Truebro. d. Zurn Industries, LLC. Technical Specifications 15080 - 9 Mechanical Insulation 2. Description: Manufactured plastic wraps for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold-water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements. B. Protective Shielding Piping Enclosures, : as specified on drawings or fixtures. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Truebro. b. Zurn Industries, LLC. 2. Description: Manufactured plastic enclosure for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold-water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with ADA requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. B. Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows: 1. Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils thick and an epoxy finish 5 mils thick if operating in a temperature range of between 140 and 300 deg F. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range. 2. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature of between 32 and 300 deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range. C. Coordinate insulation installation with the tradesman installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation. D. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless steel surfaces, use demineralized water. 3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping, including fittings, valves, and specialties. B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and of thicknesses required for each item of pipe system, as specified in insulation system schedules. C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. Technical Specifications 15080 - 10 Mechanical Insulation E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties. G. Keep insulation materials dry during storage, application, and finishing. Replace insulation materials that get wet. H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends attached to structure with vapor-barrier mastic. 3. Install insert materials and insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield. K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows: 1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward-clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c. 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self- sealing lap. Staple laps with outward-clinching staples along edge at 4 inches O.C. a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples. 4. Cover joints and seams with tape, in accordance with insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal. 5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings. M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 25 percent of its nominal thickness. N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. Technical Specifications 15080 - 11 Mechanical Insulation O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches in similar fashion to butt joints. P. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following: 1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Cleanouts. 3.3 PENETRATIONS A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing. 4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches. 4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant. D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. 1. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers. F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations: 1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping." Technical Specifications 15080 - 12 Mechanical Insulation 3.4 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials, except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles. B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, Mechanical Couplings, and Unions: 1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, mechanical couplings, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated. 2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation made from same material and density as that of adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation. 3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as that used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive. 4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as that used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than 2 times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. 5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than 2 times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers, so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier. 6. Insulate flanges, mechanical couplings, and unions, using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than 2 times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union" matching size and color of pipe labels. 7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric- reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour. 8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket, except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing, using PVC tape. C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the Technical Specifications 15080 - 13 Mechanical Insulation connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant. D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following: 1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as that of adjoining pipe insulation. 2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union at least 2 times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket. 3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body. 4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish. 5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands, and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient services, secure laps with outward-clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. 4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient services, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive, as recommended by insulation material manufacturer, and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular- glass block insulation of same thickness as that of pipe insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: Technical Specifications 15080 - 14 Mechanical Insulation 1. Install preformed sections of same material as that of straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of cellular-glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed sections of cellular-glass insulation to valve body. 2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as that of pipe insulation. 4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as that of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties, and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. 3.7 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands, and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. Technical Specifications 15080 - 15 Mechanical Insulation 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward-clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. 4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive, as recommended by insulation material manufacturer, and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as that of straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as that of straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body. 3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 3.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION A. Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with factory-applied jackets. 1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints. 2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch-thick coats of lagging adhesive. 3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation. B. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows: 1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight. 2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket. 3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch-wide joint strips at end joints. Technical Specifications 15080 - 16 Mechanical Insulation 5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation with vapor-barrier mastic. C. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge. D. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints. 3.9 FINISHES A. Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting." 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof. a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size. B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating. C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work. D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless steel jackets. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. C. Perform tests and inspections[with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative]. D. Tests and Inspections: Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article. E. All insulation applications will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. F. Prepare test and inspection reports. Technical Specifications 15080 - 17 Mechanical Insulation 3.11 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following: 1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces. 2. Underground piping. 3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury. 3.12 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Domestic Cold Water: 1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following: a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1/2 inch thick. 2. NPS 1-1/4 and Larger: Insulation shall be the following: a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick. B. Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water: 1. NPS 1-1/4 and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following: a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick. C. Hot Service Vents: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following: a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick. D. Ground Water and Chilled Ground Water Supply and Return, 60 Deg F and Below: 1. NPS 12 and Smaller: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Cellular Glass: 1 inches thick. b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 1 inches thick. E. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Piping: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Cellular Glass: 1-1/2 inches thick. b. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick. C. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick. d. Polyolefin: 1 inch thick. F. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Flexible Tubing: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following: Technical Specifications 15080 - 18 Mechanical Insulation a. Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches thick. b. Polyolefin: 2 inches thick. G. Refrigerant Liquid Piping: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Cellular Glass: 1-1/2 inches thick. b. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick. C. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick. d. Polyolefin: 1 inch thick. 3.13 OUTDOOR, ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Ground Water and Chilled Ground Water Supply and Return, 60 Deg F and Below: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Cellular Glass: 1-1/2 inches thick. b. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1-1/2 inches thick. B. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Piping: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Cellular Glass: 2 inches thick. b. Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches thick. C. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 2 inches thick. d. Polyolefin: 2 inches thick. C. Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Flexible Tubing: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches thick. b. Polyolefin: 2 inches thick. D. Refrigerant Liquid Piping: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following: a. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 inch thick. b. Polyolefin: 1 inch thick. 3.14 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket. B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. C. Piping, Concealed: 1. None. Technical Specifications 15080 - 19 Mechanical Insulation D. Piping, Exposed: 1. None. 2. PVC: 20 mils thick. 3.15 OUTDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket. B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. C. Piping, Concealed: 1. None. D. Piping, Exposed: 1. Aluminum, Smooth with Z-Shaped Locking Seam: 0.020 inch thick. 3.16 UNDERGROUND, FIELD-APPLIED INSULATION JACKET A. For underground direct-buried piping applications, install underground direct-buried jacket over insulation material. END OF SECTION 15080 Technical Specifications 15080 - 20 Mechanical Insulation SECTION 15082 HVAC EQUIPMENT INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes insulating HVAC equipment that is not factory insulated. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 15083 "Duct Insulation." 2. Section 15080 "Mechanical Insulation." 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Material test reports. B. Field quality-control reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Section 15060 "Hangers and Supports." B. Coordinate clearance requirements with equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing. 1.6 SCHEDULING A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results. B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products in accordance with ASTM E84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. Technical Specifications 15082 - 1 HVAC Equipment Insulation 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke- developed index of 50 or less. 2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke- developed index of 150 or less. 2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in "Breeching Insulation Schedule," "Indoor Equipment Insulation Schedule," and "Outdoor, Aboveground Equipment Insulation Schedule? articles for where insulating materials shall be applied. B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested in accordance with ASTM C871. D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable in accordance with ASTM C795. E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process. F. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C553, Type II and ASTM C1290, Type III with factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. b. Manson Insulation Inc. C. Owens Corning. G. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C1393. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. b. Manson Insulation Inc. C. Owens Corning. 2. Semirigid board material with factory-applied FSK jacket. 3. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. or more. 4. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 100 deg F is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or less. 5. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. 2.3 ADHESIVES A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated. Technical Specifications 15082 - 2 HVAC Equipment Insulation B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. 2. Adhesive: As recommended by mineral fiber manufacturer and with a VOC content of 80 g/L or less. C. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Dow Consumer Solutions. b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. C. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc. 2. Adhesive: As recommended by Adhesive - PVC Jacket manufacturer and with a VOC content of 50 g/L or less. 2.4 MASTICS AND COATINGS A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials,jackets, and substrates. 1. Mastics: As recommended by insulation manufacturer and with a VOC content of 50 g/L or less. B. Vapor-Retarder Mastic, Water-Based: Suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below- ambient services. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. C. Vimasco Corporation. 2. Water-Vapor Permeance: Comply with ASTM E96/E96M or ASTM F1249. 3. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F. 4. Comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II, for permeance requirements. 5. Color: White. C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above-ambient services. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. C. Vimasco Corporation. Technical Specifications 15082 - 3 HVAC Equipment Insulation 2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E96/E96M, greater than 1.0 perm at manufacturer's recommended dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F. 4. Color: White. 2.5 SEALANTS A. Materials shall be as recommended by the insulation manufacturer and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. B. Joint Sealants: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. C. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc. 2. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 58 to plus 176 deg F. 4. Color: White or gray. C. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. C. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc. 2. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 4. Color: Aluminum. 5. Verify sealant has a VOC content of 420 g/L or less. 2.6 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: 1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C1136, Type I. 2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C1136, Type I. 3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C1136, Type II. 4. Vinyl Jacket: White vinyl with a permeance of 1.3 perms when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M, Procedure A, and complying with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B. 2.7 FIELD-APPLIED FABRIC-REINFORCING MESH A. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Approximately 4 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 5 strands by 5 strands/sq. in. for covering equipment. Technical Specifications 15082 -4 HVAC Equipment Insulation 2.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C1136, Type I, unless otherwise indicated. B. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing. C. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc. C. Proto Corporation. 2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer. 3. Color: White. 4. Factory-fabricated tank heads and tank side panels. D. Metal Jacket: 1. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005, Temper H-14. a. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing or factory cut and rolled to size. b. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. C. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 3-mil-thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper. d. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil-thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper. e. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers: 1) Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket. 2) Preformed two-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long- radius elbows. 3) Tee covers. 4) Flange and union covers. 5) End caps. 6) Beveled collars. 7) Valve covers. 8) Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not available. 2.9 TAPES A. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C1136. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Technical Specifications 15082 - 5 HVAC Equipment Insulation a. 3M. b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division. C. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company. 2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 6.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 Ibf/inch in width. 7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape. B. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive; suitable for indoor and outdoor applications. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company. 2. Width: 2 inches. 3. Thickness: 6 mils. 4. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 500 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 18 Ibf/inch in width. C. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. 3M. b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division. C. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company. 2. Width: 2 inches. 3. Thickness: 3.7 mils. 4. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 5 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 34 Ibf/inch in width. 2.10 SECUREMENTS A. Bands: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ITW Insulation Systems; Illinois Tool Works, Inc. b. RPR Products, Inc. 2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A240/A240M, Type 316; 0.015 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal. 3. Aluminum: ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal. Technical Specifications 15082 - 6 HVAC Equipment Insulation 4. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to accept metal bands. Spring size is determined by manufacturer for application. B. Insulation Pins and Hangers: 1. Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding; 0.135-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. 2. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding; 0.135-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon- steel washer. 3. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. a. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. b. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low-carbon steel, Aluminum or Stainless steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch-diameter shank; length to suit depth of insulation indicated. C. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Use product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates. 4. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick, galvanized-steel, aluminum or stainless steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter. a. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations. C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch-wide, stainless steel or Monel. D. Wire: 0.080-inch nickel-copper alloy, 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel, or 0.062-inch soft-annealed, galvanized steel. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. C & FWire. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. B. Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows: Technical Specifications 15082 - 7 HVAC Equipment Insulation 1. Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils thick and an epoxy finish 5 mils thick if operating in a temperature range of between 140 and 300 deg F. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range. 2. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 32 and 300 deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range. C. Coordinate insulation installation with the tradesman installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation. D. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless steel surfaces, use demineralized water. 3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment. B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, and jackets, of thicknesses required for each item of equipment, as specified in insulation system schedules. C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. F. Keep insulation materials dry during storage, application, and finishing. Replace insulation materials that get wet. G. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. H. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. I. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends attached to structure with vapor-barrier mastic. 3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield. Technical Specifications 15082 - 8 HVAC Equipment Insulation J. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. K. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows: 1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c. 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c. a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples. 4. Cover joints and seams with tape, in accordance with insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal. 5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints. L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 25 percent of its nominal thickness. M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches in similar fashion to butt joints. O. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following: 1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Manholes. 5. Handholes. 6. Cleanouts. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT, TANK, AND VESSEL INSULATION A. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels: Secure insulation with adhesive, anchor pins, and speed washers. 1. Apply adhesives in accordance with manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of tank and vessel surfaces. 2. Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to equipment, including contours. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for tight joints. Stagger end joints. 3. Protect exposed corners with secured corner angles. 4. Install adhesively attached or self-sticking insulation hangers and speed washers on sides of tanks and vessels as follows: a. Do not weld anchor pins to ASME-labeled pressure vessels. Technical Specifications 15082 - 9 HVAC Equipment Insulation b. Select insulation hangers and adhesive that are compatible with service temperature and with substrate. C. On tanks and vessels, maximum anchor-pin spacing is 3 inches from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. in both directions. d. Do not over-compress insulation during installation. e. Cut and miter insulation segments to fit curved sides and domed heads of tanks and vessels. f. Impale insulation over anchor pins, and attach speed washers. g. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 5. Secure each layer of insulation with stainless steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation materials. 6. Where insulation hangers on equipment and vessels are not permitted or practical and where insulation support rings are not provided, install a girdle network for securing insulation. Stretch prestressed aircraft cable around the diameter of vessel and make taut with clamps, turnbuckles, or breather springs. Place one circumferential girdle around equipment approximately 6 inches from each end. Install wire or cable between two circumferential girdles 12 inches o.c. Install a wire ring around each end and around outer periphery of center openings, and stretch prestressed aircraft cable radially from the wire ring to nearest circumferential girdle. Install additional circumferential girdles along the body of equipment or tank at a minimum spacing of 48 inches o.c. Use this network for securing insulation with tie wire or bands. 7. Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 3 inches. 8. Install insulation in removable segments on equipment access doors, manholes, handholes, and other elements that require frequent removal for service and inspection. 9. Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes, handholes, ASME stamps, and nameplates. 10. For equipment with surface temperatures below ambient, apply mastic to open ends, joints, seams, breaks, and punctures in insulation. B. Insulation Installation on Pumps: 1. Fabricate metal boxes lined with insulation. Fit boxes around pumps and coincide box joints with splits in pump casings. Fabricate joints with outward bolted flanges. Bolt flanges on 6-inch centers, starting at corners. Install 3/8-inch- diameter fasteners with wing nuts. Alternatively, secure the box sections together using a field-adjustable latching mechanism. 2. Fabricate boxes from aluminum or stainless steel, at least 0.050 inch thick. 3. For below-ambient services, install a vapor barrier at seams, joints, and penetrations. Seal between flanges with replaceable gasket material to form a vapor barrier. 3.4 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION A. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows: 1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight. 2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket. 3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Technical Specifications 15082 - 10 HVAC Equipment Insulation 4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch-wide joint strips at end joints. 5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation with vapor-barrier mastic. B. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge. C. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints. 3.5 FINISHES A. Do not field paint aluminum jackets. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. C. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative. D. Tests and Inspections: Inspect field-insulated equipment, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location(s) for each type of equipment defined in "Indoor Equipment Insulation Schedule" and "Outdoor, Aboveground Equipment Insulation Schedule? articles. For large equipment, remove only a portion adequate to determine compliance. E. All insulation applications will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. F. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.7 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Insulation conductivity and thickness per pipe size shall comply with schedules in this Section or with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent. B. Acceptable insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials is Contractor's option. 3.8 INDOOR EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Insulate indoor and outdoor equipment that is not factory insulated. B. Ground water and Chilled Ground water pump insulation shall be one of the following: Technical Specifications 15082 - 11 HVAC Equipment Insulation 1. Cellular Glass: 1 inches thick and minimum R-4 per energy code. 2. Mineral-Fiber Board: 1 inches thick and minimum R-4 per energy code. C. Chilled water Expansion tank and Buffer tank insulation shall be one of the following: 1. Cellular Glass: 1 inches thick and minimum R-4 per energy code. 2. Mineral-Fiber Board: 1 inch thick and minimum R-4 per energy code. 3. Mineral-Fiber Pipe and Tank: 1 inch thick and minimum R-4 per energy code. D. Chilled-water air-separator insulation shall be one of the following: 1. Cellular Glass: 1 inches thick and minimum R-4 per energy code. 2. Mineral-Fiber Board: 1 inches thick and minimum R-4 per energy code. 3. Mineral-Fiber Pipe and Tank: 1 inches thick and minimum R-4 per energy code. E. Piping system filter-housing insulation shall be one of the following: 1. Cellular Glass: 1 inches thick and minimum R-4 per by energy code. 2. Mineral-Fiber Board: 1 inches thick and minimum R-4 per energy code. 3. Mineral-Fiber Pipe and Tank: 1 inches thick and minimum R-4energy code. 3.9 OUTDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket. B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. C. Equipment, Exposed, up to 48 Inches in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces of up to 72 Inches: 1. Aluminum, Smooth with Z-Shaped Locking Seam: 0.020 inch thick. D. Equipment, Exposed, Larger Than 48 Inches in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces Larger Than 72 Inches: 1. Aluminum, Smooth with: 0.040 inch thick. END OF SECTION 15082 Technical Specifications 15082 - 12 HVAC Equipment Insulation SECTION 15083 DUCT INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes insulating the following duct services: 1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air. 2. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air. 3. Indoor, concealed return located in unconditioned space. 4. Indoor, exposed return located in unconditioned space. 5. Outdoor, concealed supply and return. 6. Outdoor, exposed supply and return. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 15082 "HVAC Equipment Insulation." 2. Section 15080 "Mechanical Insulation." 3. Section 15815 "Metal Ducts" for duct liners. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger. 2. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, dampers, specialties and flanges for each type of insulation. 3. Detail application of field-applied jackets. 4. Detail application at linkages of control devices. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality-control reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke- developed index of 50 or less. 2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke- developed index of 150 or less. Technical Specifications 15083 - 1 Duct Insulation PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in "Duct Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule," and "Aboveground, Outdoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied. B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C871. D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C795. E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process. F. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C553, Type II and ASTM C1290, Type III with factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. C. Knauf Insulation. d. Manson Insulation Inc. e. Owens Corning. G. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide insulation with factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. C. Knauf Insulation. d. Manson Insulation Inc. e. Owens Corning. 2.2 FIRE-RATED INSULATION SYSTEMS A. Fire-Rated Blanket: High-temperature, flexible, blanket insulation with FSK jacket that is tested and certified to provide a 1 or 2-hour (as required) fire rating by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Technical Specifications 15083 - 2 Duct Insulation a. 3M. b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. 2.3 ADHESIVES A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated. B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. C. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc. 2. Verify adhesive complies with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." C. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries. C. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc. 2. Verify adhesive complies with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." D. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. b. The Dow Chemical Company. 2. Verify adhesive complies with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." 2.4 MASTICS AND COATINGS A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials,jackets, and substrates. Technical Specifications 15083 - 3 Duct Insulation B. Vapor-Retarder Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. C. Knauf Insulation. 2. Water-Vapor Permeance: Comply with ASTM C755, Section 7.2.2, Table 2, for insulation type and service conditions. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 4. Comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II, for permeance requirements. 5. Color: White. C. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. C. Knauf Insulation. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc. 2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E96, greater than 1.0 perm at manufacturer's recommended dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 4. Color: White. 2.5 SEALANTS A. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. C. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc. 2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials,jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 5. Color: Aluminum. B. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. Technical Specifications 15083 -4 Duct Insulation 2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials,jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 5. Color: White. 2.6 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: 1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C1136, Type I. 2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C1136, Type I. 3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C1136, Type II. 2.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated. B. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing. C. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc. C. Proto Corporation. d. Speedline Corporation. 2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer. 3. Color: White. D. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005, Temper H-14. 1. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing or factory cut and rolled to size. 2. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. 3. Moisture Barrier for Indoor Applications: 3-mil-thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper or 2.5-mil-thick polysurlyn. 4. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil-thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and kraft paper or 2.5-mil-thick polysurlyn. E. Self-Adhesive Outdoor Jacket: 60-mil-thick, laminated vapor barrier and waterproofing membrane for installation over insulation located aboveground outdoors; consisting of a rubberized bituminous resin on a crosslaminated polyethylene film covered with white aluminum-foil facing. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: Technical Specifications 15083 - 5 Duct Insulation a. Polyguard Products, Inc. 2.8 TAPES A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C1136. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division. b. Compac Corporation. C. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company. d. Venture Tape. 2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 11.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 Ibf/inch in width. 7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape. B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C1136. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division. b. Compac Corporation. C. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company. d. Venture Tape. 2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 6.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 Ibf/inch in width. 7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape. C. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive; suitable for indoor and outdoor applications. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Compac Corporation. b. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company. C. Venture Tape. 2. Width: 2 inches. 3. Thickness: 6 mils. 4. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 500 percent. Technical Specifications 15083 - 6 Duct Insulation 6. Tensile Strength: 18 Ibf/inch in width. D. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division. b. Compac Corporation. C. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company. d. Venture Tape. 2. Width: 2 inches. 3. Thickness: 3.7 mils. 4. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 5 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 34 Ibf/inch in width. 2.9 SECUREMENTS A. Aluminum Bands: ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch thick, 1/2 inch, 3/4 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ITW Insulation Systems; Illinois Tool Works, Inc. b. RPR Products, Inc. B. Insulation Pins and Hangers: 1. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Gemco. 2) Midwest Fasteners, Inc. b. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. C. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low-carbon steel, Aluminum or Stainless steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates. 2. Nonmetal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate fastened to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness Technical Specifications 15083 - 7 Duct Insulation indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Gemco. 2) Midwest Fasteners, Inc. b. Baseplate: Perforated, nylon sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 1-1/2 inches in diameter. C. Spindle: Nylon, 0.106-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated, up to 2-1/2 inches. d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates. 3. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick, galvanized-steel, aluminum or stainless-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) AGM Industries, Inc. 2) Gemco. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc. 4) Nelson Stud Welding. b. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations. C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch-wide, stainless steel or Monel. D. Wire: 0.080-inch nickel-copper alloy, 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel or 0.062-inch soft-annealed, galvanized steel. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. C & F Wire. 2.10 CORNER ANGLES A. PVC Corner Angles: 30 mils thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, PVC according to ASTM D1784, Class 16354-C. White or color-coded to match adjacent surface. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. Technical Specifications 15083 - 8 Duct Insulation 3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings. B. Install insulation materials, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of duct system as specified in insulation system schedules. C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. G. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. H. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. I. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic. 3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. J. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. K. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows: 1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c. 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c. a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples. 4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal. Technical Specifications 15083 - 9 Duct Insulation 5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings. L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness. M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints. 3.3 PENETRATIONS A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing. 4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches. 4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. D. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches. 1. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers. E. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations: 1. Duct: For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match Technical Specifications 15083 - 10 Duct Insulation adjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches. 2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping." 3.4 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. C. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not over compress insulation during installation. e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers. f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 4. For ducts and ple nums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-barrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches. 5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c. 6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. Technical Specifications 15083 - 11 Duct Insulation 7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch-wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c. B. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, space pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. C. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-barrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches. 5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch-wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c. Technical Specifications 15083 - 12 Duct Insulation 3.5 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION A. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows: 1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight. 2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket. 3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch-wide joint strips at end joints. 5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation with vapor-barrier mastic. B. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge. C. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints. 3.6 FIRE-RATED INSULATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Where fire-rated insulation system is indicated, secure system to ducts and duct hangers and supports to maintain a continuous fire rating. B. Insulate duct access panels and doors to achieve same fire rating as duct. C. Install firestopping at penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Fire-stop systems are specified in Sections for"Penetration Firestopping." 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location(s) for each duct system defined in the "Duct Insulation Schedule, General" Article. C. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements. 3.8 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation: 1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air. 2. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air. 3. Indoor, concealed return located in unconditioned space. 4. Indoor, exposed return located in unconditioned space. Technical Specifications 15083 - 13 Duct Insulation 5. Outdoor, concealed supply and return. 6. Outdoor, exposed supply and return. B. Items Not Insulated: 1. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. 2. Factory-insulated flexible ducts. 3. Factory-insulated plenums and casings. 4. Flexible connectors. 5. Vibration-control devices. 6. Factory-insulated access panels and doors. 3.9 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Concealed, Supply-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: 1. Mineral-fiber Blanket : R-6 minimum per Energy Code. B. Concealed, Return-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: 1. Mineral-fiber Blanket : R-6 minimum per Energy Code. C. Concealed, Outdoor-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: 1. Mineral-fiber Blanket : R-6 minimum per Energy Code. D. Exposed, Supply-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: 1. Mineral-fiber Blanket : R-6 minimum per Energy Code. E. Exposed, Return-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: 1. Mineral-fiber Blanket : R-6 minimum per Energy Code. F. Exposed, Outdoor-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: 1. Mineral-fiber Blanket : R-6 minimum per Energy Code. 3.10 ABOVEGROUND, OUTDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is listed for a duct system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. B. Concealed, Supply-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: 1. Mineral-fiber Blanket— R-8 minimum per Energy Code 2. Mineral-fiber Board — R-8 minimum per Energy Code C. Concealed, Return-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: 1. Mineral-fiber Blanket— R-8 minimum per Energy Code 2. Mineral-fiber Board — R-8 minimum per Energy Code D. Concealed, Outdoor-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Technical Specifications 15083 - 14 Duct Insulation 1. Mineral-fiber Blanket— R-8 minimum per Energy Code 2. Mineral-fiber Board — R-8 minimum per Energy Code E. Exposed, Supply-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: 1. Mineral-fiber Blanket — R-8 minimum per Energy Code with weather proof aluminum jacket 2. Mineral-fiber Board — R-8 minimum per Energy Code with weather proof aluminum jacket F. Exposed, Return-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: 1. Mineral-fiber Blanket — R-8 minimum per Energy Code with weather proof aluminum jacket 2. Mineral-fiber Board — R-8 minimum per Energy Code with weather proof aluminum jacket 3.11 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket. B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. C. Ducts and Plenums, Concealed: 1. None. D. Ducts and Plenums, Exposed: 1. Aluminum, Smooth: 0.016 inch thick. 3.12 OUTDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket. B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. C. Ducts and Plenums, Concealed: 1. None. D. Ducts and Plenums, Exposed, up to 48 Inches in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces up to 72 Inches: Aluminum, Smooth: 0.016 inch thick. END OF SECTION 15083 Technical Specifications 15083 - 15 Duct Insulation SECTION 15091 PIPE SUPPORTS — GENERAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMNET A. Provide pipe supports, hangers, guides and anchors, complete and in place, as indicated in the Drawings. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the pipe supports for the civil and mechanical system valves and piping: 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with the requirements of Section 01340. B. Submit shop drawings of the pipe supports that include the following information: 1. Drawings of pipe supports, including locations dimensions, materials of construction, and methods of fabrication or product number if applicable. 1.4 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." 2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." 3. AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel." 4. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX. PART 2 - PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Piping systems and pipe connections to equipment shall be properly anchored and supported in order to prevent undue deflection, vibration and dislocation due to seismic events, line pressures, pipe weight, fluid weight, liquid movement, thermal changes, vibration, probable forces applied during construction and stresses on piping, equipment and structures. B. Supports for plumbing piping shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the applicable plumbing code or local administration requirements. C. Structural members 1. Wherever possible, pipes shall be supported from structural members. 2. Where it is necessary to frame structural members between existing members, such supplementary members shall be provided by the Contractor in accordance with the requirements of the Building Code and the American Institute of Steel Construction as acceptable to the Engineer. Technical Specifications 15091-1 Pipe Supports - General D. Pipe hangers 1. Pipe hangers shall be capable of supporting the pipe in operation, allowing free expansion and contraction of the piping and preventing excessive stress on equipment. 2. Hangers shall have a means of vertical adjustment after erection. 3. Hangers shall be designed to prevent becoming disengaged by any movement of the supported pipe. 4. Hangers subject to shock, seismic disturbances or thrust imposed by the actuation of safety valves shall include hydraulic shock suppressors. 5. Hanger rods shall be subjected to vertical loading only. E. Hangers subject to horizontal movement 1. At hanger locations where lateral or axial movement is anticipated, suitable linkage shall be provided to permit such movement. 2. Where horizontal pipe movement is greater than '/z-in., or where the hanger rod deflection from the vertical is greater than 4 degrees from the cold-to-hot position of the pipe, the hanger rod and structural attachment shall be offset in such a manner that the rod is vertical in the hot position. F. Riser Supports 1. Where practical, risers shall be supported on each floor with riser clamps and lugs, independent of the connected horizontal piping. G. Freestanding Pipe 1. Freestanding pipe connections to equipment such as chemical feeders and pumps shall be firmly attached to steel frames fabricated from angles, channels, or WF members anchored to the structure. 2. Exterior, freestanding overhead piping shall be supported on fabricated pipe stands consisting of pipe columns anchored to concrete footings, or with horizontal, welded steel angles and U-bolts or clams securing the pipes. H. Materials of Construction 1. Pipe support assemblies, including framing, hardware and anchors, shall be of steel construction, galvanized after fabrication, or fiberglass unless otherwise indicated. 2. Submerged supports, as well as piping, conduits and equipment in hydraulic structures within 24 inches of the water level, shall be supported with support assemblies, including framing, hardware and anchors constructed of Type 316 stainless steel unless otherwise indicated. I. Point Loads 1. Meters, valves, heavy equipment and other point loads on PVC, FRP or other plastic pipes shall be supported on both sides, according to manufacturer's recommendations in order to avoid undue pipe stresses and failures. 2. In order to avoid point loads, the supports on PVC, FRP or other plastic piping shall be equipped with extra wide pipe saddles, bracket, clip or hanger. Technical Specifications 15091-2 Pipe Supports - General J. Noise Reduction 1. In order to reduce the transmission of noise in piping systems, copper tubes in buildings and structures shall be wrapped with a 2-in. wide strip of rubber fabric or similar suitable material at each pipe support, bracket, clip or hanger. 2.2 SUPPORT SPACING A. Supports for piping with the longitudinal axis in approximately a horizontal position shall be spaced to prevent excessive sag, bending and shear stresses in the piping with special consideration given where components such as flanges and valves impose concentrated loads. B. Pipe support spacing shall not exceed the maximum indicated spans. C. For temperatures other than ambient temperature or those listed, and for other piping materials or wall thicknesses, the pipe support spacings shall be modified in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. D. Vertical supports shall be provided to prevent the pipe from being overstressed from the combination of loading effects. 2.3 MANUFACTURED SUPPORTS A. Stock Parts 1. Where not specifically indicated, designs that are generally accepted as exemplifying good engineering practice and using stock or production parts shall be used whenever possible. 2. Such parts shall be locally available, new, of best commercial quality and designed and rated for the intended purpose. B. Manufacturers, or equal: 1. Grinnell Corp. (Anvil International) 2. Tolco Incorporated 3. Bergen-Paterson Pipe Support Corp. 2.4 COATINGS A. Galvanizing 1. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricated pipe supports other than stainless steel or non-ferrous supports shall be blast-cleaned after fabrication and hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123. B. Other Coatings 1. Other than stainless steel or non-ferrous supports, supports shall receive protective coatings in accordance with the requirements of Section 09910. PART 3 - PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General Technical Specifications 15091-3 Pipe Supports - General 1. Pipe supports, hangers, brackets, anchors, guides and inserts shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Appearance 1. Pipe supports and hangers shall be positioned in order to produce an orderly, neat piping system. 2. Hanger rods shall be vertical, without offsets 3. Hangers shall be adjusted to line up groups of pipes at the proper grade for drainage and venting, as close to ceilings and roofs as possible, and without interference with other work. 3.2 FABRICATION A. Quality Control 1. Pipe hangers and supports shall be fabricated and installed by experienced welders and fitters, using the best welding procedures available. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 15091-4 Pipe Supports - General SECTION 15110 VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Brass ball valves. 2. Bronze ball valves. 3. Bronze swing check valves. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of valve. 1. Certification that products comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer. B. ASME Compliance: 1. ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded end valves. 2. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 3. ASME B16.18 for solder-joint connections. 4. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves. C. Drinking Water System Components — Health Effects and Drinking Water System Components — Lead Content Compliance: NSF Compliance: NSF 61 and NSF 372 for valve materials for potable-water service. D. Bronze valves shall be made with dezincification-resistant materials. Bronze valves made with copper alloy (brass) containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted. E. Valve Pressure-Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures. F. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated. G. Valve Actuator Types: 1. Gear Actuator: For quarter-turn valves NPS 4 and larger. 2. Hand lever: For quarter-turn valves smaller than NPS 4. H. Valves in Insulated Piping: 1. Include 2-inch stem extensions. Technical Specifications 15110 - 1 Valves for Plumbing Piping 2. Extended operating handles of nonthermal-conductive material and protective sleeves that allow operation of valves without breaking vapor seals or disturbing insulation. 3. Memory stops that are fully adjustable after insulation is applied. 2.2 BRASS BALL VALVES A. Brass Ball Valves, Two-Piece with Full Port and Brass Trim, Threaded or Soldered Ends: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Apollo Flow Controls; Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Milwaukee Valve Company. G. NIBCO INC. d. WATTS. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-110 or MSS SP-145. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. C. Body Design: Two piece. d. Body Material: Forged brass. e. Ends: Threaded and soldered. f. Seats: PTFE. g. Stem: Brass. h. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. i. Port: Full. B. Brass Ball Valves, Two-Piece with Full Port and Brass Trim, Press Ends: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Apollo Flow Controls; Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Milwaukee Valve Company. C. NIBCO INC. d. WATTS. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-110 or MSS SP-145. b. CWP Rating: Minimum 200 psig. C. Body Design: Two piece. d. Body Material: Forged brass. e. Ends: Press. f. Press Ends Connection Rating: Minimum 200 psig. g. Seats: PTFE or RPTFE. h. Stem: Brass. i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. j. Port: Full. k. O-Ring: Buna-N or EPDM. Technical Specifications 15110 - 2 Valves for Plumbing Piping 2.3 BRONZE BALL VALVES A. Bronze Ball Valves, Two-Piece with Full Port, and Bronze or Brass Trim, Threaded or Soldered Ends: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Apollo Flow Controls; Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Milwaukee Valve Company. C. NIBCO INC. d. WATTS. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-110 or MSS-145. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. C. Body Design: Two piece. d. Body Material: Bronze. e. Ends: Threaded and soldered. f. Seats: PTFE. g. Stem: Bronze or brass. h. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. i. Port: Full. B. Bronze Ball Valves, Two-Piece with Full Port, and Bronze or Brass Trim, Press Ends: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Apollo Flow Controls; Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Milwaukee Valve Company. C. NIBCO INC. d. WATTS. e. Zurn Industries, LLC. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-110 or MSS-145. b. CWP Rating: Minimum 200 psig. C. Body Design: Two piece. d. Body Material: Bronze. e. Ends: Press. f. Press Ends Connections Rating: Minimum 200 psig. g. Seats: PTFE or RTPFE. h. Stem: Bronze or brass. i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. j. Port: Full. 2.4 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES A. Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc, Class 125: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Apollo Flow Controls; Conbraco Industries, Inc. Technical Specifications 15110 - 3 Valves for Plumbing Piping b. Milwaukee Valve Company. C. NIBCO INC. d. WATTS. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. C. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded or soldered. See valve schedule articles. f. Disc: Bronze. B. Bronze Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc, Class 125: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Apollo Flow Controls; Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Milwaukee Valve Company. C. NIBCO INC. d. WATTS. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 4. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. C. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded or soldered. See valve schedule articles. f. Disc: PTFE. C. Bronze Swing Check Valves, Press Ends: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Apollo Flow Controls; Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Milwaukee Valve Company. C. NIBCO INC. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-80 and MSS SP-139. b. CWP Rating: Minimum 200 psig. C. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B584, bronze. e. Ends: Press. f. Press Ends Connection Rating: Minimum 200 psig g. Disc: Brass or bronze. h. O-Ring Seal: EPDM or Buna-N. 2.5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe. Technical Specifications 15110 - 4 Valves for Plumbing Piping D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs. 3.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS A. If valves with specified CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves with higher CWP ratings may be substituted. B. Select valves with the following end connections: 1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder- joint valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below. 2. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends. C. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following: 1. Pump-Discharge Check Valves: a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze or nonmetallic disc. D. If valves with specified CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves with higher CWP ratings may be substituted. E. End Connections: 1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded or soldered or press-ends. 3.4 LOW-PRESSURE, COMPRESSED-AIR VALVE SCHEDULE (150 PSIG OR LESS) A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: 1. Bronze and Brass Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends. 2. Brass ball valves, two-piece with full port and brass trim. 3. Bronze ball valves, two-piece with full port and bronze or brass trim. B. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: 1. Horizontal and Vertical Applications: Bronze swing check valves with bronze nonmetallic disc, Class 125, with soldered or threaded end connections. 3.5 DOMESTIC HOT-AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: 1. Brass ball valves, two-piece with full port and brass trim. Provide with threaded, solder or press connection-joint ends. 2. Bronze ball valves, two-piece with full port and bronze or brass trim. Provide with threaded, solder or press-connection-joint ends. B. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: 1. Bronze swing check valves bronze nonmetallic disc, Class 125, with soldered or threaded end connections. 2. Bronze swing check valves with press-end connections. Technical Specifications 15110 - 5 Valves for Plumbing Piping END OF SECTION 15110 Technical Specifications 15110 - 6 Valves for Plumbing Piping SECTION 15114 VALVES AND APPURTENANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Gate Valves 2. Butterfly Valves 3. Check Valves 4. Backflow Preventers 5. Air Vacuum/Air Release Valves 6. Pressure Reducing Valves 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS A. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. C500, Metal-Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service. 2. C504, Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. B16.1, Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250, and 800. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01340. B. Shop Drawings for each type/size of valve shall include, but not be limited to the following: 1. Catalog data and drawings complete with dimensions, part numbers, materials of construction and material specifications (AISI, ASTM, SAE, etc.). 2. Drawings of actuators including dimensions and dynamic seating and unseating torque for motor actuated valves. 3. Installation instructions. 4. Quantity and valve numbers on each submittal. 5. Include manufacturer's certification that the valve complies with the applicable AWWA provisions. C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals for each type/size of valve and according to Section 01340. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL Technical Specifications 15114-1 Valves and Appurtenances A. Valves shall be of the body, type, pressure class, end joint and actuator indicated on the Drawings. B. All valves and appurtenances installed on the how water system shall be rated for a operating temperature of 200 degrees Fahrenheit. C. All valves in the hatchery tank room shall be gate valves as indicated on the drawings, unless noted otherwise. D. Coordinate bolt hole drilling pattern and orientation and flange face design between valves, gates and adjacent flanges. E. Materials for all valves that come in contact with water used for fish rearing shall not contain bronze, brass or any other yellow metals. F. Valve Labeling: 1. Valves shall have the name of the manufacturer and size of the valve cast or molded onto the valve body or bonnet or shown on a permanently attached nameplate as indicated in Section 10400 Identification, Stenciling, and Tagging System. 2. Direction of flow shall be cast or stamped on the valve body. 3. Direction of opening for the valve manual actuator shall be indicated on the actuator mechanism. G. Protective Coatings: 1. Coat the exterior surface of valves and the wet interior surfaces of ferrous valves of sizes 4-inch and larger in accordance with the requirements of Section 09910. 2. Do not epoxy-coat the flange face of valves. 3. The valve manufacturer shall certify in writing that the required coating has been applied and tested in the manufacturer's plant prior to shipment, in accordance with the indicated requirements. H. Valve Factory Testing: 1. As a minimum, unless otherwise indicated or recommended by the reference standards, test valves 3 inches in diameter and smaller in accordance with the manufacturer's standard procedure. 2. Factory-test valves 4 inches in diameter and larger as follows: a. Hydrostatic Testing 1) Subject valve bodies to an internal hydrostatic pressure equivalent to twice the water-rated pressure of the valve. 2) Metallic valves rating pressure shall be at 100 degrees F. 3) Plastic valves pressure rating pressures shall be at 71 degrees F, or at a higher temperature according to material type. 4) During the hydrostatic test, there shall be no leakage through the valve body, end joints, or shaft seals, nor shall parts of the valve be permanently deformed. 5) Allow a test duration of at least 10 minutes in order to visually examine for leakage. Technical Specifications 15114-2 Valves and Appurtenances b. Seat Testing 1) Test the valves for leaks in the closed position, with the pressure differential across the seat equal to the water rated pressure of the valve. 2) Provide a test duration of at least 10 minuets in order to visually examine for leakage. 3) The leakage rate shall be the more stringent of the following: a) As recommended by the reference standard for that type of valve b) Leakage past the closed valve not to exceed one fluid ounce per hour per inch diameter for metal seated valves and drop-tight for resilient seated valves. c. Performance Testing 1) Shop-operate the valves from the fully-closed to the fully-open position, and reverse under no-flow conditions in order to demonstrate that the valve assembly operates properly. 2.2 GATE VALVES A. Gate Valves for steady-state water working pressure and steady-state differential pressure up to 150 psi and for fresh water service having a pH range from 6 to 10 and temperatures range from 30 to 60 degrees F shall conform to AWWA C500 and be as indicated. B. Materials of Construction: 1. Body: Cast Iron 2. End Flanges: AWWA Class D, same material as valve body 3. Disc: Cast Iron 4. Seating surfaces: stainless steel 5. Non-Rising Stem: stainless steel with o-ring stem seal C. Manual Actuators: Unless otherwise indicated, manually-actuated butterfly valves shall be equipped with a handwheel or 2-in. square actuating nut and position indicator. D. Electric Actuators: Electric actuators shall meet the requirements of AWWA C540. Electric actuators in open and close service shall be rated to produce an output torque of at least 1.5 times the required valve maximum seating or maximum dynamic torque, whichever is greater. For valves in modulating service with dynamic torque exceeding the seating torque, the rated output torque of the actuator shall be twice the dynamic torque required by the valve. Actuator rated torque is defined as pullout torque rated at 10 percent below the rated voltage of the motor. The torque switch shall be field set at no greater than 60 percent and 50 percent of the maximum actuator rated torque for open/close service and modulating service, respectively. After plant startup, the manufacturer shall prepare a certification including a torque curve to demonstrate that the torque requirements have been met. E. Manufacturers, or equal: 1. American Flow Control 2. Clow Technical Specifications 15114-3 Valves and Appurtenances 3. M&H Valve Company 4. Mueller 2.3 BUTTERFLY VALVES A. Butterfly valves for steady-state water working pressures and steady-state differential pressure up to 150 psi and for fresh water service having a pH range from 6 to 10 and temperatures range from 30 to 60 degrees F shall conform to AWWA C504 and be as indicated. B. Materials of Construction: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, material of construction shall be in accordance with AWWA C504, suitable for the service. 2. Body: Ductile Iron, Grade 65-45-12 or 70-50-05 3. Coating: Fusion-Bonded Epoxy 4. End Flanges: AWWA Class D, same material as valve body 5. Valve Shafts: Stainless Steel 6. Valve Discs: Stainless Steel 7. Seats: New natural or synthetic rubber a. Seats shall be positively clamped or bonded into the disc or body of the valve, but cartridge-type seats that rely on a high coefficient of friction for retention shall not be acceptable. Seat materials shall be guaranteed to last for at least 75 percent of the number of cycles in the AWWA C504 proof-of-design test without premature damage. 8. Seat Mating Surface: Stainless Steel, Type 316 9. Clamps and Retainer Rings: Type 316 retaining rings and cap screws 10. Valve Bearings: Self lubricating materials per AWWA C504 11. Shaft Seals: Resilient non-metalic materials suitable for service C. Manual Actuators: Unless otherwise indicated, manually-actuated butterfly valves shall be equipped with a handwheel or 2-in. square actuating nut and position indicator. 1. Direction of opening and the word OPEN to be cast in handwheel. 2. Size actuator to produce required torque with a maximum pull of 50 LB at the maximum pressure rating of the valve provided and withstand without damage a pull of 200 LB on handwheel or chainwheel or 300 foot-pounds torque on the operating nut. 3. Valve actuators located more the 60 in. above the operating floor shall be equipped with a chain operator. The chain shall include a means to secure it out of the way of other equipment and walking paths. Technical Specifications 15114-4 Valves and Appurtenances D. Electric Actuators: Electric actuators shall meet the requirements of AWWA C540. Electric actuators in open and close service shall be rated to produce an output torque of at least 1.5 times the required valve maximum seating or maximum dynamic torque, whichever is greater. For valves in modulating service with dynamic torque exceeding the seating torque, the rated output torque of the actuator shall be twice the dynamic torque required by the valve. Actuator rated torque is defined as pullout torque rated at 10 percent below the rated voltage of the motor. The torque switch shall be field set at no greater than 60 percent and 50 percent of the maximum actuator rated torque for open/close service and modulating service, respectively. After plant startup, the manufacturer shall prepare a certification including a torque curve to demonstrate that the torque requirements have been met. E. Manufacturers, or equal: 1. Keystone 2. Bray 3. Kennedy Valve 4. M&H Valve Company 5. Mueller Company 2.4 CHECK VALVES A. Swing check valves for water service shall be designed for a working pressure of not less than 150 psi unless otherwise indicated. 1. Materials of Construction: a. Body: ASTM A536 Ductile Iron. The top access port shall be full size, allowing removal of the disc without removal of the valve from the pipe and shall include a position indicator. b. Disc: Cast iron, stainless steel or other suitable metal for water service. c. Seat: Bubble tight design with a resilient seat of Buna-N, Teflon or other suitable metal. d. Hinge Pin: Stainless steel. 2. Manufacturers, or equal: a. Crane Company b. Milwaukee Valve Company c. Stockham Valves and Fittings d. Valmatic B. Dual disc check valves for water service shall be designed for a working pressure of not less than 150 psi unless otherwise indicated. 1. Materials of Construction a. Body: ASTM A536 Ductile Iron. Body shall be constructed of a single piece with a wafer style connection. Coated and lined with fusion bonded epoxy in accordance with AWWA C550. Technical Specifications 15114-5 Valves and Appurtenances b. Disc: ASTM A536 Ductile Iron or Cast Type 316 Stainless Steel. The disc pin and stop pin shall be Type 316 Stainless Steel. c. Seat: Leak tight resilient seat of Buna-N, Viton or suitable metal seat material. d. Torsion Spring: Type 316 Stainless Steel or Type 17-7 PH Stainless Steel. Torsion spring shall induce complete closure of valve to prevent flow reversal in pipelines. 2. Manufactures, or equal: a. Valmatic b. Dezurik/Apco c. Bray 2.5 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Backflow preventers shall work on the reduced pressure principle. They shall consist of 2 spring-loaded check valves, automatic differential pressure relief valve, drain valves, and shut-off valves. The body material shall be cast iron for a working pressure of not less than 150 psi with stainless steel trim. Drain lines with air gaps shall be provided. The backflow preventer valves shall be in accordance with AWWA C511 standard. B. Manufacturers, or equal: 1. Cla-Val Company 2. Febco, (CMB Industries) 3. Hersey Products 4. Watts, ACV 5. Wilkins Regulator Division (Zurn Industries) 2.6 AIR RELEASE AND VACUUM RELIEF VALVES A. General: 1. Conform to AWWA C512. C. Air Release Valve (Water): 1. Acceptable manufacturers or approved equal: a. APCO b. Valmatic c. GA Industries 2. Materials: a. Body and cover: Cast iron or Ductile iron. b. Float: Stainless steel. c. Linkage and trim: Stainless steel. d. Seal: Buna-N e. Accessories: Tubing fittings and pilots - stainless steel. Technical Specifications 15114-6 Valves and Appurtenances 3. Design requirements: a. Provide 3/16" orifice for valves. b. Release 10 cfm at 10 psi differential at 150 psi line pressure. G. Air Vacuum Valves (Water): 1. Acceptable manufacturers or approved equal: a. GA Industries b. APCO c. Valmatic 2. Materials: a. Body and cover: Cast iron. b. Float, linkage and hardware: Stainless steel. c. Seal: Buna-N. 3. Design requirements: a. Air vacuum capacity 716 scfm at 5 psi differential from atmospheric for 2 IN valves, and 1610 scfm at 5 psi differential from atmospheric for 3 IN valves, and 179 scfm at 5 psi differential from atmospheric for 1 IN valves. b. Provide surge check unit on valves located in pump houses. c. Provide butterfly isolation valve. H. Single Body Combination Air Valves (Water): 1. Single Body Combination Air Valves shall serve the dual purposes of Air Release Valves and Air Vacuum Valves, contained in a single body construction. a. Venting large amounts of air during pipeline filling and permit large volumes of air to enter during pipeline draining b. Release entrapped air accumulated in the pipeline during pressurized operation of the system. 2. Acceptable manufacturers or approved equal: a. APCO b. Valmatic c. GA Industries 3. Materials: a. Body and cover: Cast iron or Ductile iron. b. Float: Stainless steel. c. Linkage and trim: Stainless steel. d. Seal: Buna-N e. Accessories: Tubing fittings and pilots - stainless steel. 4. Design requirements: Technical Specifications 15114-7 Valves and Appurtenances a. Meet those listed above for Air Release Valves and Air Vacuum Valves. 2.7 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES A. Diaphragm-actuated hydraulically operated. 1. Acceptable manufacturers (Similar to scheduled model): a. Cla-Val b. Singer c. Watts d. Or approved equal. B. Materials: 1. Body: Ductile iron. 2. Seat insert: Stainless steel. 3. Trim: Stainless Steel 4. Disc: Buna-N. 5. Diaphragm: Nylon fabric bonded with synthetic rubber. 6. Design requirements: a. Do not use diaphragm as seating surface. C. Fusion Bonded Epoxy coating and lining D. Valves shall be provided with stainless steel, pilot lines, stop valves, solenoid valves, strainers and all necessary control equipment for valve operation. E. Electronic components shall operate on 120 v, 1 phase power. F. Provide manual overrides on solenoid valves to allow the valves to be actuated manually. G. Design requirements: 1. Size: Refer to Drawings. 2. Operating line pressure: Refer to Drawings 3. Flow range: Refer to Drawings. H. Valves to be hydraulically actuated using a water source from the same line the valve is installed. Pressure downstream of the valve will vary from 5 to 20 psi. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 JOINTS A. Flanges shall be two-holed. Bolt holes of flanged valves shall straddle the horizontal and vertical centerlines of the pipe run to which the valves are attached. Flange assembly, sequence of tightening bolts and controlling torque shall be in accordance with the Drawings. If flanges leak under pressure testing, loosen or remove the nuts and bolts, reseat or replace the gasket, re-install bolts and nuts and retest the joints. Joints shall be watertight. Technical Specifications 15114-8 Valves and Appurtenances B. Clean threaded joints by wire brushing or swabbing. Apply Teflon joint compound or Teflon tape to pipe threads before installing threaded valves and fittings. Joints shall be watertight. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF VALVES AND OPERATORS A. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, install valves with their operating stems vertical. 3.3 VALVE FIELD AND LEAKAGE TESTING A. Clean, inspect, and operate valve to ensure all parts are operable and valve seats properly. B. Operate manual valves through five (5) full cycles of opening and closing. Valves and gates shall operate from full open to full close without sticking or binding. If valves or gates stick or bind, repair or replace and repeat the tests. C. Gear actuators shall operate gates and valves from full open to full close through five (5) cycles without binding. D. The pull required to operate handwheel-operated valves shall not exceed 30 pounds. The torque required to operate valves having a 2-in. AWWA nuts shall not exceed 100 ft-lbs. E. If actuators stick or bind or if pulling forces and torques exceed the values stated previously, repair or replace the actuator and repeat the tests. Fully lubricate operators in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations prior to operating. F. Test valves and gates for leakage at the same time that the connecting piping is tested. Protect or isolate any parts of the valves, actuators, or other systems whose pressure rating is less than the pressure test. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 15114-9 Valves and Appurtenances SECTION 15115 VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Bronze globe valves. 2. Iron globe valves. 3. Brass ball valves 4. Bronze ball valves 5. Iron, single-flange butterfly valves 6. High-performance butterfly valves 7. Bronze lift check valves 8. Bronze swing check valves 9. Iron swing check valves 10. Chainwheels. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of valve. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer. B. ASME Compliance: 1. ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded-end valves. 2. ASME B16.1 for flanges on iron valves. 3. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 4. ASME B16.18 for solder-joint connections. 5. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves. 6. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves. C. Bronze valves shall be made with dezincification-resistant materials. Bronze valves made with copper alloy (brass) containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted. D. Refer to HVAC valve schedule articles for applications of valves. E. Valve Pressure-Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures. F. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated. G. Valves in Insulated Piping: 1. Include 2-inch stem extensions. Technical Specifications 15115 - 1 Valves for HVAC Piping 2. Extended operating handle of nonthermal-conductive material, and protective sleeves that allow operation of valves without breaking the vapor seals or disturbing insulation. 3. Memory stops that are fully adjustable after insulation is applied. H. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45. I. Valve Actuator Types: 1. Gear Actuator: For valves NPS 8 and larger. 2. Handlever: For valves NPS 6 and smaller. 3. Chainwheel: Device for attachment to gear, stem, or other actuator of size and with chain for mounting height, according to "Valve Installation" Article. 2.2 BRONZE GLOBE VALVES A. Bronze Globe Valves, Class 125: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Apollo Valves; a part of Aalberts Integrated Piping Systems. b. Crane; a Crane brand. C. Milwaukee Valve Company. d. NIBCO INC. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. C. Body Material: ASTM B62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet. d. Ends: Threaded. e. Stem and Disc: Bronze. f. Packing: Asbestos free. g. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum. B. Bronze Globe Valves, Class 150: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Apollo Valves; a part of Aalberts Integrated Piping Systems. b. Crane; a Crane brand. C. Hammond Valve. d. Milwaukee Valve Company. e. NIBCO INC. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 2. b. CWP Rating: 300 psig. C. Body Material: ASTM B62, bronze with integral seat and union-ring bonnet. d. Ends: Threaded. e. Stem: Bronze. Technical Specifications 15115 - 2 Valves for HVAC Piping f. Disc: Bronze. g. Packing: Asbestos free. h. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum. 2.3 IRON GLOBE VALVES A. Iron Globe Valves, Class 125: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Apollo Valves; a part of Aalberts Integrated Piping Systems. b. Crane; a Crane brand. C. Hammond Valve. d. Milwaukee Valve Company. e. NIBCO INC. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-85, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. C. Body Material: ASTM A126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. d. Ends: Flanged. e. Trim: Bronze. f. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free. g. Operator: Handwheel or chainwheel. B. Iron Globe Valves, Class 250: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Apollo Valves; a part of Aalberts Integrated Piping Systems. b. Crane; a Crane brand. C. Hammond Valve. d. Milwaukee Valve Company. e. NIBCO INC. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-85, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 500 psig. C. Body Material: ASTM A126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. d. Ends: Flanged. e. Trim: Bronze. f. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free. g. Operator: Handwheel or chainwheel. 2.4 BRASS BALL VALVES A. Brass Ball Valves, Two-Piece with Full Port and Brass Trim, Threaded Ends: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Technical Specifications 15115 - 3 Valves for HVAC Piping a. Apollo Flow Controls; Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Milwaukee Valve Company. C. NIBCO INC. d. WATTS. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig. C. CWP Rating: 600 psig. d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: Forged brass. f. Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE. h. Stem: Brass. i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. j. Port: Full. B. Brass Ball Valves, Two-Piece with Full Port and Brass Trim, Press Ends: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Apollo Flow Controls; Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Milwaukee Valve Company. G. NIBCO INC. d. WATTS. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. CWP Rating: 600 psig. C. Body Design: Two piece. d. Body Material: Forged brass. e. Ends: Press. f. Seats: PTFE or RPTFE. g. Stem: Brass. h. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. i. Port: Full. j. O-Ring Seal: Buna-N or EPDM. C. Brass Ball Valves, Two-Piece with Full Port and Stainless-Steel Trim, Threaded Ends: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Milwaukee Valve Company. b. NIBCO INC. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig. Technical Specifications 15115 -4 Valves for HVAC Piping C. CWP Rating: 600 psig. d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: Forged brass. f. Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE. h. Stem: Stainless steel. i. Ball: Stainless steel, vented. j. Port: Full. 2.5 BRONZE BALL VALVES A. Bronze Ball Valves, Two-Piece with Full Port and Bronze or Brass Trim, Threaded Ends: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Apollo Flow Controls; Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Milwaukee Valve Company. C. NIBCO INC. d. WATTS. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig. C. CWP Rating: 600 psig. d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: Bronze. f. Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE. h. Stem: Bronze. i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. j. Port: Full. B. Bronze Ball Valves, Two-Piece with Full Port and Stainless-Steel Trim: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Apollo Flow Controls; Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Milwaukee Valve Company. C. NIBCO INC. d. WATTS. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig. C. CWP Rating: 600 psig. d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: Bronze. f. Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE. Technical Specifications 15115 - 5 Valves for HVAC Piping h. Stem: Stainless steel. i. Ball: Stainless steel, vented. j. Port: Full. 2.6 IRON, SINGLE-FLANGE BUTTERFLY VALVES A. Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with Aluminum-Bronze Disc: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Apollo Flow Controls; Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Milwaukee Valve Company. C. NIBCO INC. d. WATTS. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 150 psig. C. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated pressure without use of downstream flange. d. Body Material: ASTM A126, cast iron or ASTM A536, ductile iron. e. Seat: EPDM or NBR. f. Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel. g. Disc: Aluminum bronze. B. Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with Ductile-Iron Disc: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Apollo Flow Controls; Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Milwaukee Valve Company. C. NIBCO INC. d. WATTS. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 150 psig. C. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated pressure without use of downstream flange. d. Body Material: ASTM A126, cast iron or ASTM A536, ductile iron. e. Seat: EPDM or NBR. f. Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel. g. Disc: Nickel-plated or-coated ductile iron. C. Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with Stainless-Steel Disc: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Apollo Flow Controls; Conbraco Industries, Inc. Technical Specifications 15115 - 6 Valves for HVAC Piping b. Milwaukee Valve Company. C. NIBCO INC. d. WATTS. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 150 psig. C. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated pressure without use of downstream flange. d. Body Material: ASTM A126, cast iron or ASTM A536, ductile iron. e. Seat: EPDM or NBR. f. Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel. g. Disc: Stainless steel. 2.7 Grooved-End Butterfly Valves 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Victaulic Co. of America 2. Description: a. CWP Rating: 300 psi b. Body design: Grooved-end; suitable for bi-directional, bubble tight, dead- end service at rated pressure. C. Body Material: Black enamel coated ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536 d. Seat: Pressure-responsive EPDM rated to 250 Deg. F. e. Stem: Blowout proof 416 stainless steel f. Disc: Electroless nickel plated ductile iron 2.8 HIGH-PERFORMANCE BUTTERFLY VALVES A. Single-Flange, High-Performance Butterfly Valves, Class 150: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Apollo Flow Controls; Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Milwaukee Valve Company. C. NIBCO INC. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-68. b. CWP Rating: 285 psig at 100 deg F. C. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated pressure without use of downstream flange. d. Body Material: Carbon steel, cast iron, ductile iron, or stainless steel. e. Seat: Reinforced PTFE or metal. f. Stem: Stainless steel; offset from seat plane. g. Disc: Carbon steel. h. Service: Bidirectional. Technical Specifications 15115 - 7 Valves for HVAC Piping 2.9 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES A. Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc, Class 125: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Apollo Flow Controls; Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Milwaukee Valve Company. C. NIBCO INC. d. WATTS. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. C. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Disc: Bronze. B. Bronze Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc, Class 125: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Apollo Flow Controls; Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Milwaukee Valve Company. C. NIBCO INC. d. WATTS. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 4. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. C. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Disc: PTFE. 2.10 IRON SWING CHECK VALVES A. Iron Swing Check Valves with Metal Seats, Class 125: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Apollo Flow Controls; Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Milwaukee Valve Company. C. NIBCO INC. d. WATTS. 2. Description: Technical Specifications 15115 - 8 Valves for HVAC Piping a. Standard: MSS SP-71, Type I. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12, CWP Rating: 200 psig. C. Body Design: Clear or full waterway. d. Body Material: ASTM A126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. e. Ends: Flanged. f. Trim: Bronze. g. Gasket: Asbestos free. B. Iron Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic-to-Metal Seats, Class 125: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Crane; a Crane brand. b. Stockham; a Crane brand. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-71, Type I. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12, CWP Rating: 200 psig. C. Body Design: Clear or full waterway. d. Body Material: ASTM A126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. e. Ends: Flanged. f. Trim: Composition. g. Seat Ring: Bronze. h. Disc Holder: Bronze. i. Disc: PTFE. j. Gasket: Asbestos free. C. Iron Swing Check Valves with Metal Seats, Class 250: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Apollo Flow Controls; Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Milwaukee Valve Company. C. NIBCO INC. d. WATTS. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-71, Type I. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12, CWP Rating: 500 psig. C. Body Design: Clear or full waterway. d. Body Material: ASTM A126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. e. Ends: Flanged. f. Trim: Bronze. g. Gasket: Asbestos free. 2.11 IRON SWING CHECK VALVES WITH CLOSURE CONTROL A. Iron Swing Check Valves with Spring-Closure Control, Class 125: Technical Specifications 15115 - 9 Valves for HVAC Piping 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. NIBCO INC. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-71, Type I. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12, CWP Rating: 200 psig. C. Body Design: Clear or full waterway. d. Body Material: ASTM A126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. e. Ends: Flanged. f. Trim: Bronze. g. Gasket: Asbestos free. h. Closure Control: Factory-installed, exterior lever and spring. 2.12 Grooved-End Check Valves A. 2" through 12" Sizes Spring Assisted: Black enamel coated ductile iron body, ASTM A- 536, Grade 65-45-12, elastomer encapsulated ductile iron disc suitable for intended service, stainless steel spring and shaft, welded-in nickel seat, 300 psi. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. Victaulic Co. of America 2.13 CHAINWHEELS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Babbitt Steam Specialty Co. 2. Roto Hammer Industries; Rotork. 3. Trumbull Industries. B. Description: Valve actuation assembly with sprocket rim, chain guides, chain, and attachment brackets for mounting chainwheels directly to handwheels. 1. Sprocket Rim with Chain Guides: Ductile iron, of type and size required for valve. Include zinc or epoxy coating. 2. Chain: Hot-dip-galvanized steel, of size required to fit sprocket rim. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe. Technical Specifications 15115 - 10 Valves for HVAC Piping D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement. E. Install chainwheels on operators for globe valves NPS 4 and larger and more than 96 inches above floor. Extend chains to 60 inches above finished floor. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs. 3.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following: 1. Throttling Service except Steam: Globe valves. 2. Throttling Service, Steam: Globe valves. B. If valves with specified CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves with higher CWP ratings may be substituted. C. Select valves with the following end connections: 1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder- joint valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules. 2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules. 3. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends. 4. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules. 5. For Steel Piping, NPS and Larger: Flanged ends D. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following: 1. Pump-Discharge Check Valves: a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze or nonmetallic disc. b. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Iron swing check valves with spring; metal or resilient-seat check valves. 3.4 HEATING-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze globe valves, Class 125, with bronze disc, and threaded ends. B. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: Brass or bronze ball valves, two piece with brass, bronze or stainless-steel trim, and full port C. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Iron globe valves, Class 125, with flanged ends. D. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 1. Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: Aluminum-bronze, Ductile-iron, or Stainless-steel disc, 200 CWP, and EPDM or NBR seat. 2. High-Performance Butterfly Valves: Single flange, Class 150. Technical Specifications 15115 - 11 Valves for HVAC Piping 3. Grooved-End Butterfly valves E. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: 1. Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends. 2. Bronze swing check valves with bronze or nonmetallic disc, Class 125. F. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 1. Iron Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: May be provided with threaded or grooved ends instead of flanged ends. 2. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: Iron swing check valves with lever and spring-closure control, Class 125. 3. Iron swing check valves with metal or nonmetallic-to-metal seats, Class 125. END OF SECTION 15115 Technical Specifications 15115 - 12 Valves for HVAC Piping SECTION 15122 METERS AND GAGES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Bimetallic-actuated thermometers. 2. Liquid-in-glass thermometers. 3. Duct-thermometer mounting brackets. 4. Thermowells. 5. Dial-type pressure gages. 6. Gage attachments. 7. Flowmeters. 8. Thermal-energy meters. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For each type of meter and gage. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BIMETALLIC-ACTUATED THERMOMETERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Blue Ribbon Corp. 2. Ernst Flow Industries. 3. WATTS. 4. Weiss Instruments, Inc. B. Standard: ASME B40.200. C. Case: Liquid-filled and sealed type(s); stainless steel with 5-inch nominal diameter. D. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings and scales in deg F. E. Connector Type(s): Union joint, adjustable angle, with unified-inch screw threads. F. Connector Size: 1/2 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads. Technical Specifications 15122 - 1 Meters and Gages G. Stem: 0.25 or 0.375 inch in diameter; stainless steel. H. Window: Plain glass. I. Ring: Stainless steel. J. Element: Bimetal coil. K. Pointer: Dark-colored metal. L. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range. 2.2 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS A. Metal-Case, Industrial-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Blue Ribbon Corp. b. Flo Fab Inc. C. Weiss Instruments, Inc. 2. Standard: ASME B40.200. 3. Case: Cast aluminum; 9-inch nominal size unless otherwise indicated. 4. Case Form: Adjustable angle unless otherwise indicated. 5. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue or red organic liquid. 6. Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in deg F. 7. Window: Glass. 8. Stem: Aluminum and of length to suit installation. a. Design for Air-Duct Installation: With ventilated shroud. b. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem. 9. Connector: 1-1/4 inches, with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 10. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a maximum of 1.5 percent of scale range. 2.3 DUCT-THERMOMETER MOUNTING BRACKETS A. Description: Flanged bracket with screw holes, for attachment to air duct and made to hold thermometer stem. 2.4 THERMOWELLS A. Thermowells: 1. Standard: ASME B40.200. 2. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion in piping tee fitting. 3. Material for Use with Copper Tubing: CNR or CUNT. 4. Material for Use with Steel Piping: CRES or CSA. 5. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated. 6. External Threads: NPS 1/2, NPS 3/4, or NPS 1, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads. 7. Internal Threads: 1/2, 3/4, and 1 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads. Technical Specifications 15122 - 2 Meters and Gages 8. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 9. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 10. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing. 11. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of thermometer connection. B. Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin. 2.5 DIAL-TYPE PRESSURE GAGES A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Ametek U.S. Gauge. b. Ashcroft Inc. C. Flo Fab Inc. d. WATTS. e. Weiss Instruments, Inc. 2. Standard: ASME B40.100. 3. Case: Liquid-filled Sealed type(s); cast aluminum or drawn steel; 6-inch nominal diameter. 4. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated. 5. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated. 6. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer. 7. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi. 8. Pointer: Dark-colored metal. 9. Window: Glass. 10. Ring: Metal. 11. Accuracy: Grade B, plus or minus 2 percent of middle half of scale range. B. Remote-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Ametek U.S. Gauge. b. Ashcroft Inc. C. WATTS. d. Weiss Instruments, Inc. 2. Standard: ASME B40.100. 3. Case: Liquid-filled type; metal; 6-inch nominal diameter with back flange and holes for panel mounting. 4. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated. 5. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated. 6. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer. 7. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi. Technical Specifications 15122 - 3 Meters and Gages 8. Pointer: Dark-colored metal. 9. Window: Glass. 10. Ring: Metal. 11. Accuracy: Grade B, plus or minus 2 percent of middle half of scale range. 2.6 GAGE ATTACHMENTS A. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and piston-type surge-dampening device. Include extension for use on insulated piping. B. Siphons: Loop-shaped section of brass stainless-steel pipe with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2 pipe threads. C. Valves: Brass ball, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads. 2.7 FLOWMETERS A. Turbine Flowmeters: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ABB (Industrial Automation Division). b. ONICON Incorporated. 2. Description: Flowmeter with sensor and indicator. 3. Flow Range: Sensor and indicator shall cover operating range of equipment or system served. 4. Sensor: Impeller turbine; for inserting in pipe fitting or for installing in piping and measuring flow directly in gallons per minute. a. Design: Device or pipe fitting with inline turbine and integral direct-reading scale for steam water. b. Construction: Bronze or stainless-steel body, with plastic turbine or impeller. C. Minimum Pressure Rating: 150 psig. d. Minimum Temperature Rating: 180 deg F. 5. Indicator: Hand-held meter; either an integral part of sensor or a separate meter. 6. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1-1/2 percent. 7. Display: Shows rate of flow, with register to indicate total volume in gallons. 8. Operating Instructions: Include complete instructions with each flowmeter. 2.8 THERMAL-ENERGY METERS A. Impeller-Turbine, Thermal-Energy Meters: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. ONICON Incorporated. 2. Description: System with strainer, flow sensor, temperature sensors, transmitter, indicator, and connecting wiring. Technical Specifications 15122 -4 Meters and Gages 3. Flow Sensor: Impeller turbine with corrosion-resistant-metal body and transmitter; for installing in piping. a. Design: Total thermal-energy measurement. b. Minimum Pressure Rating: 150 psig. C. Minimum Temperature Range: 40 to 250 deg F. 4. Temperature Sensors: Insertion-type transducer. 5. Indicator: Solid-state, integrating-type meter with integral battery pack; for wall mounting. a. Data Output: Six-digit electromechanical counter with readout in kilowatts per hour or British thermal units. b. Battery Pack: Five-year lithium battery. 6. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent. 7. Display: Visually indicates total fluid volume in gallons and thermal-energy flow in kilowatts per hour or British thermal units. 8. Strainer: Full size of main line piping. 9. Operating Instructions: Include complete instructions with each thermal-energy meter system. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install thermowells with socket extending a minimum of 2 inches into fluid or to center of pipe and in vertical position in piping tees. B. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if required to match sizes. C. Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping. D. Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium. E. Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions. F. Install remote-mounted thermometer bulbs in thermowells and install cases on panels; connect cases with tubing and support tubing to prevent kinks. Use minimum tubing length. G. Install duct-thermometer mounting brackets in walls of ducts. Attach to duct with screws. H. Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at the most readable position. I. Install remote-mounted pressure gages on panel. J. Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids (except steam). K. Install valve and syphon fitting in piping for each pressure gage for steam. Technical Specifications 15122 - 5 Meters and Gages L. Install test plugs in piping tees. M. Install flow indicators in piping systems in accessible positions for easy viewing. N. Assemble and install connections, tubing, and accessories between flow-measuring elements and flowmeters according to manufacturer's written instructions. O. Install flowmeter elements in accessible positions in piping systems. P. Install wafer-orifice flowmeter elements between pipe flanges. Q. Install differential-pressure-type flowmeter elements, with at least minimum straight lengths of pipe, upstream and downstream from element according to manufacturer's written instructions. R. Install permanent indicators on walls or brackets in accessible and readable positions. S. Install connection fittings in accessible locations for attachment to portable indicators. T. Mount thermal-energy meters on wall if accessible; if not, provide brackets to support meters. U. Install thermometers in the following locations: 1. Inlet and outlet of each water heater. 2. Inlets and outlets of each domestic water heat exchanger. 3. Inlet and outlet of each domestic hot-water storage tank 4. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone. 5. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler. 6. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air-handling units. 7. Two inlets and two outlets of each hydronic heat exchanger. 8. Outside-, return-, supply-, and mixed-air ducts. V. Install pressure gages in the following locations: 1. Building water service entrance into building. 2. Inlet and outlet of each pressure-reducing valve. 3. Suction and discharge of each domestic water pump. 4. Discharge of each pressure-reducing valve. 5. Suction and discharge of each pump 6. Inlet and outlet of each heat exchanger. W. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance of meters, gages, machines, and equipment. X. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow space for service and maintenance of meters, gages, machines, and equipment. Technical Specifications 15122 - 6 Meters and Gages B. Connect flowmeter-system elements to meters. C. Connect flowmeter transmitters to meters. D. Connect thermal-energy meter transmitters to meters. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. After installation, calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility. 3.4 THERMOMETER SCHEDULE A. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone shall be one of the following: 1. Liquid-filled, bimetallic-actuated type. 2. Direct-mounted, metal-case, vapor-actuated type. 3. Industrial-style, liquid-in-glass type. B. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler shall be one of the following: 1. Liquid-filled, bimetallic-actuated type. 2. Direct-mounted, metal-case, vapor-actuated type. 3. Industrial-style, liquid-in-glass type. C. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air-handling units and built-up central systems shall be one of the following: 1. Liquid-filled, bimetallic-actuated type. 2. Direct-mounted, metal-case, vapor-actuated type. 3. Industrial-style, liquid-in-glass type. D. Thermometers at inlets and outlets of each hydronic heat exchanger shall be one of the following: 1. Liquid-filled, bimetallic-actuated type. 2. Direct-mounted, metal-case, vapor-actuated type. 3. Industrial-style, liquid-in-glass type. E. Thermometers at outside-, return-, supply-, and mixed-air ducts shall be one of the following: 1. Liquid-filled, bimetallic-actuated type. 2. Direct-mounted, metal-case, vapor-actuated type. 3. Industrial-style, liquid-in-glass type. F. Thermometer stems shall be of length to match thermowell insertion length. 3.5 THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE A. Scale Range for Domestic Cold-Water Piping: 0 to 100 deg F and minus 20 to plus 50 deg C. B. Scale Range for Domestic Hot-Water Piping: 0 to 250 deg F and 0 to 150 deg C. Technical Specifications 15122 - 7 Meters and Gages C. Scale Range for Heating, Hot-Water Piping: 0 to 250 deg F. D. Scale Range for Steam and Steam-Condensate Piping: 0 to 250 deg F. E. Scale Range for High Pressure Steam and Steam-Condensate Piping: 20 to 400 deg F. F. Scale Range for Air Ducts: Minus 40 to plus 160 deg F. G. Scale Range for Air Ducts: 0 to 100 deg F. 3.6 PRESSURE-GAGE SCHEDULE A. Pressure gages at discharge of each water service into building shall be the following: 1. Liquid-filled, sealed, direct-mounted, metal case. B. Pressure gages at inlet and outlet of each water pressure-reducing valve shall be the following: 1. Liquid-filled, sealed, direct-mounted, metal case. 2. Test plug with EPDM self-sealing rubber inserts. C. Pressure gages at suction and discharge of each domestic water pump shall be the following: 1. Liquid-filled Sealed, direct-mounted, metal case. D. Pressure gages at discharge of each pressure-reducing valve shall be one of the following: 1. Liquid-filled, direct-mounted, metal case. E. Pressure gages at suction and discharge of each hydronic pump shall be one of the following: 1. Liquid-filled, direct-mounted, metal case. 3.7 PRESSURE-GAGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE A. Scale Range for Water Service Piping: 0 to 100 psi. B. Scale Range for Domestic Water Piping: 0 to 100 psi. C. Scale Range for Heating, Hot-Water Piping: 0 to 100 psi. D. Scale Range for Steam Piping: 0 to 160 psi. 3.8 FLOWMETER SCHEDULE A. Flowmeters for Heating, Hot-Water Piping: Turbine type. B. Flowmeters for Steam and Steam-Condensate Piping: Turbine type. 3.9 THERMAL-ENERGY METER SCHEDULE A. Thermal-Energy Meters: Impeller-turbine type. Technical Specifications 15122 - 8 Meters and Gages END OF SECTION 15122 Technical Specifications 15122 - 9 Meters and Gages SECTION 15140 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Copper tube and fittings. 2. Piping joining materials. 3. Transition fittings. 4. Dielectric fittings. B. Related Requirements: 1. See civil drawings and specifications for water-service piping and water meters outside the building from source to the point where water-service piping enters the building. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For transition fittings and dielectric fittings. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. System purging and disinfecting activities report. B. Field quality-control reports. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes. B. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 14, NSF 61, and NSF 372. Include marking "NSF-pw" on piping. 2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, drawn temper. B. Cast-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings. C. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings. D. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends. E. Grooved-End Fittings: Fittings shall be manufactured to copper tubing sizes, with grooves designed to accept grooved end couplings of the same manufacturer. Fittings shall be wrought copper, conforming to ASTM B-75 alloy C12200 or ASTM B-152 alloy C11000 and ANSI B16.22, or bronze sand casting ANSI B16.18 and UNS-C89836. Technical Specifications 15140 - 1 Domestic Water Piping F. Copper Unions: 1. MSS SP-123. 2. Cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body. 3. Ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces. 4. Solder-joint or threaded ends. G. Copper, Brass, or Bronze Pressure-Seal-Joint Fittings: 1. Fittings: Cast-brass, cast-bronze, or wrought-copper with EPDM 0-ring seal in each end. Sizes NPS 2-1/2and larger with stainless steel grip ring and EPDM 0- ring seal. 2. Minimum 200-psig working-pressure rating at 250 deg F. H. Copper Push-on-Joint Fittings: 1. Cast-copper fitting complying with ASME B16.18 or wrought-copper fitting complying with ASME B 16.22. 2. Stainless-steel teeth and EPDM-rubber, 0-ring seal in each end instead of solder-joint ends. 2.3 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: 1. AWWA C110/A21.10, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free unless otherwise indicated. 2. Full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated. C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. D. Flux: ASTM B 813, water flushable. E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8M/A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated. F. Grooved-End Copper Tube: 1. Mechanical Couplings: 2"-8" for copper tubing consisting of ductile iron cast housings, complete with a synthetic rubber gasket of a pressure-responsive design, with plated nuts and bolts to secure unit together. Couplings shall be manufactured to connect copper tubing sized tube and fittings. 2. Coupling Housings: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12, coated with copper colored alkyd enamel. Housings cast with offsetting, angle- pattern bolt pads to provide rigidity. 3. Coupling Gaskets: Gasket shall be EPDM compound designed for operating temperatures from -30 deg F to +250 deg F. G. Grooved-End Copper Butterfly Valves 1. 2-1/2" — 4", 300 psi maximum pressure rating, with copper tubing sized grooved ends. Cast brass body to UNS C87850. Aluminum bronze disc to UNS C95500, with pressure responsive elastomer seat. Stem shall be offset from the disc Technical Specifications 15140 - 2 Domestic Water Piping centerline to provide complete 360-degree circumferential seating. Bubble tight, dead-end or bi-directional service, with memory stop for throttling, metering or balancing service. Valve may be automated with electric, pneumatic, or hydraulic operators. Certified to the low lead requirements of NSF-372. 2.4 TRANSITION FITTINGS A. General Requirements: 1. Same size as pipes to be joined. 2. Pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined. 3. End connections compatible with pipes to be joined. B. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting. 2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined. B. Dielectric Unions: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. WATTS. b. Zurn Industries, LLC. C. Victaulic Co. of America 2. Standard: ASSE 1079. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F. 4. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous. C. Dielectric Flanges: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. WATTS. b. Zurn Industries, LLC. 2. Standard: ASSE 1079. 3. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly. 4. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F. 5. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous. D. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Technical Specifications 15140 - 3 Domestic Water Piping a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 2. Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges. 3. Pressure Rating: 150 psig. 4. Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic. 5. Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene. 6. Washers: Phenolic with steel backing washers. E. Dielectric Nipples: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. b. Victaulic Company. 2. Standard: IAPMO PS 66. 3. Electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F 1545. 4. Pressure Rating and Temperature: 300 psig at 225 deg F. 5. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved. 6. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EARTHWORK A. Comply with requirements in Specification Section for "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling. 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings. B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." C. Install ductile-iron piping under building slab with restrained joints according to AWWA C600 and AWWA M41. D. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve inside the building at each domestic water-service entrance. Comply with requirements for pressure gages in Section 15122 "Meters and Gages" and with requirements for drain valves and strainers in Section 15145 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties ." E. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting. F. Install water-pressure-reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves. Comply with requirements for pressure-reducing valves in Section 15145 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties." G. Install domestic water piping level without pitch and plumb. Technical Specifications 15140 - 4 Domestic Water Piping H. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's requirements. I. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices in Section 15074 "Vibration and Seismic for Piping and Equipment." J. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. K. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. L. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space. M. Install piping to permit valve servicing. N. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than the system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated. O. Install piping free of sags and bends. P. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. Q. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and specialty. R. Install pressure gages on suction and discharge piping for each plumbing pump and packaged booster pump. Comply with requirements for pressure gages in Section 15122 "Meters and Gages S. Comply with requirements for thermostats in Section 15185 "Inline, Domestic-Water Pumps." T. Install thermometers on inlet and outlet piping from each water heater. Comply with requirements for thermometers in Section 15122 "Meters and Gages." U. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. V. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. W. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. 3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly. Technical Specifications 15140 - 5 Domestic Water Piping C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. D. Brazed Joints for Copper Tubing: Comply with CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints" chapter. E. Soldered Joints for Copper Tubing: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." F. Pressure-Sealed Joints for Copper Tubing: Join copper tube and pressure-seal fittings with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer. G. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9. H. Joint Construction for Solvent-Cemented Plastic Piping: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: 1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. Apply primer. 2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix. 3. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855. 3.4 TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION A. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping. B. Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping: 1. Fittings for NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Fitting-type coupling. 2. Fittings for NPS 2 and Larger: Sleeve-type coupling. 3.5 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing. B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric couplings or nipples. C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges or flange kits. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices in Section 15074 "Vibration and Seismic for Piping and Equipment." B. Comply with requirements for hangers, supports, and anchor devices in Section 15060 "Hangers and Supports." 1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps. Technical Specifications 15140 - 6 Domestic Water Piping 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. C. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls. 3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. 4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers. C. Install hangers for copper, with maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters, to comply with MSS-58, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent. D. Support horizontal piping within 12 inches of each fitting. E. Support vertical runs of copper to comply with MSS-58, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent. 3.7 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. When installing piping adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for service and maintenance. C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials. D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to the following: 1. Domestic Water Circulation Pumps: Cold-water suction and discharge piping. 2. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections. 3. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than that required by plumbing code. 4. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for NIPS 2-1/2 and larger. 3.8 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification materials and installation in Section 15075 " Mechanical Identification." B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Piping Inspections: a. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. Technical Specifications 15140 - 7 Domestic Water Piping b. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction: 1) Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing in after roughing in and before setting fixtures. 2) Final Inspection: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified in "Piping Tests" Subparagraph below and to ensure compliance with requirements. C. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. d. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Piping Tests: a. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water. b. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. C. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. d. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow it to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. e. Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained. f. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required. B. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.10 ADJUSTING A. Perform the following adjustments before operation: 1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. 2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position. 3. Open throttling valves to proper setting. 4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow. a. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide hot-water flow in each branch. b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated. Technical Specifications 15140 - 8 Domestic Water Piping 5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during installation. 6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs. 7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for application where used and are clean and ready for use. 8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation. 3.11 CLEANING A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows: 1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using. 2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below: a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets. b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following: 1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours. 2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours. C. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time. d. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination. e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. Include copies of water-sample approvals from authorities having jurisdiction. C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. 3.12 PIPING SCHEDULE A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated. B. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated. C. Fitting Option: Extruded-tee connections and brazed joints may be used on aboveground copper tubing. D. Under-building-slab, domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following: 1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and brazed joints. E. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be one of the following: Technical Specifications 15140 - 9 Domestic Water Piping 1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; cast- or wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and brazed or soldered joints. 2. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; copper pressure-seal-joint fittings; and pressure-sealed joints. F. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4, shall be one of the following: 1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; cast- or wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and brazed or soldered joints. 2. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; copper pressure-seal-joint fittings; and pressure-sealed joints. 3. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; grooved-joint, copper-tube appurtenances; and grooved joints. Technical Specifications 15140 - 10 Domestic Water Piping SECTION 15145 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Vacuum breakers. 2. Backflow preventers. 3. Balancing valves. 4. Temperature-actuated, water mixing valves. 5. Strainers. 6. Hose bibbs. 7. Wall hydrants. 8. Drain valves. 9. Water-hammer arresters. 10. Trap-seal primer valves. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 15122 "Meters and Gauges" for thermometers, pressure gages, and flow meters in domestic water piping. 2. Section 15140 "Domestic Water Piping" for water meters. 3. Section 15412 "Emergency Plumbing Fixtures" for water tempering equipment. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For domestic water piping specialties. 1. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality-control reports. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 61 and NSF 14. B. Comply with NSF 372 for low lead. Technical Specifications 15145 - 1 Domestic Water Piping Specialties 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 VACUUM BREAKERS A. Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Apollo Flow Controls; Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. WATTS. C. Zurn Industries, LLC. 2. Standard: ASSE 1001. 3. Size: NPS 1/4 to NPS 3, as required to match connected piping. 4. Body: Bronze. 5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded. 6. Finish: Rough bronze or chrome plated. B. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Apollo Flow Controls; Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. MIFAB, Inc. C. WATTS. d. Woodford Manufacturing Company. e. Zurn Industries, LLC. 2. Standard: ASSE 1011. 3. Body: Bronze, nonremovable, with manual drain. 4. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose threaded complying with ASME B1.20.7. 5. Finish: Chrome or nickel plated or rough bronze. 2.4 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Intermediate Atmospheric-Vent Backflow Preventers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Apollo Flow Controls; Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. WATTS. C. Zurn Industries, LLC. 2. Standard: ASSE 1012. 3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 4. Size: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4. 5. Body: Bronze. 6. End Connections: Union, solder joint. 7. Finish: Chrome plated or rough bronze. Technical Specifications 15145 - 2 Domestic Water Piping Specialties B. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Apollo Flow Controls; Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. WATTS. C. Zurn Industries, LLC. 2. Standard: ASSE 1013. 3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 4. Pressure Loss: 12 psig maximum, through middle third of flow range. 5. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining that complies with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved or stainless steel for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 6. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 7. Configuration: Designed for vertical-inlet, horizontal-center-section, and vertical- outlet flow. Refer to plans for configuration required. 8. Accessories: a. Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet. b. Valves NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Outside-screw and yoke-gate type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet. C. Air-Gap Fitting: ASME Al 12.1.2, matching backflow-preventer connection. C. Double-Check, Backflow-Prevention Assemblies: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Ames Fire & Waterworks; A WATTS Brand. b. Apollo Flow Controls; Conbraco Industries, Inc. C. WATTS. d. Zurn Industries, LLC. 2. Standard: ASSE 1015. 3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications unless otherwise indicated. 4. Pressure Loss: 5 psig maximum, through middle third of flow range. 5. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining that complies with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 6. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 7. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight-through flow. 8. Accessories: a. Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet. b. Valves NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Outside-screw and yoke-gate type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet. 2.5 BALANCING VALVES A. Memory-Stop Balancing Valves <Insert drawing designation if any>: Technical Specifications 15145 - 3 Domestic Water Piping Specialties 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Apollo Flow Controls; Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Crane; a Crane brand. C. Hammond Valve. d. Milwaukee Valve Company. e. NIBCO INC. 2. Standard: MSS SP-110 for two-piece, copper-alloy ball valves. 3. Pressure Rating: 400-psig minimum CWP. 4. Size: NPS 2 or smaller. 5. Body: Copper alloy. 6. Port: Standard or full port. 7. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 8. Seats and Seals: Replaceable. 9. End Connections: Solder joint or threaded. 10. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel with memory-setting device. 2.6 TEMPERATURE-ACTUATED, WATER MIXING VALVES A. Water-Temperature Limiting Devices: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Acorn Engineering Company; a Division of Morris Group International. b. Apollo Flow Controls; Conbraco Industries, Inc. C. TACO Comfort Solutions, Inc. d. WATTS. e. Zurn Industries, LLC. 2. Standard: ASSE 1017. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig. 4. Type: Thermostatically controlled, water mixing valve. 5. Material: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components. 6. Connections: Threaded or union inlets and outlet. 7. Accessories: Check stops on hot- and cold-water supplies, and adjustable, temperature-control handle. 8. Tempered-Water Setting: 105 deg F or as prescribed by owner 9. Tempered-Water Design Flow Rate: sized per fixture served (gpm. 10. Valve Finish: Chrome plated or rough bronze. B. Primary, Thermostatic, Water Mixing Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Leonard Valve Company. b. POWERS; A WATTS Brand. C. Symmons Industries, Inc. 2. Standard: ASSE 1017. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated. Technical Specifications 15145 - 4 Domestic Water Piping Specialties 4. Type: Exposed-mounted or cabinet-type, thermostatically controlled, water mixing valve. 5. Material: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components. 6. Connections: Threaded or union inlets and outlet. 7. Accessories: Manual temperature control, check stops on hot- and cold-water supplies, and adjustable, temperature-control handle. 8. Tempered-Water Setting: 105 deg F or as directed by owner. 9. Valve Finish: Polished, chrome plated or rough bronze. 10. Cabinet: Factory fabricated, stainless steel, for recessed or surface mounting (refer to plans) and with hinged, stainless-steel door. 2.7 STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING A. Y-Pattern Strainers <Insert drawing designation if any>: 1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated. 2. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining that complies with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved, epoxy coated and for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 3. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations unless otherwise indicated. 5. Perforation Size: a. Strainers NPS 2 and Smaller: 0.020 inch. b. Strainers NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: 0.045 inch. 6. Drain: Factory-installed, hose-end drain valve. 2.8 HOSE BIBBS A. Hose Bibbs (HB-X. refer to fixture schedule): 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Jay R. Smith Mfg Co; a division of Morris Group International. b. Woodford Manufacturing Company. C. Zurn Industries, LLC. 2. Standard: ASME Al 12.18.1 for sediment faucets. 3. Body Material: Bronze. 4. Seat: Bronze, replaceable. 5. Supply Connections: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 threaded or solder-joint inlet. 6. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7. 7. Pressure Rating: 125 psig. 8. Vacuum Breaker: Integral nonremovable, drainable, hose-connection vacuum breaker complying with ASSE 1011. 9. Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze, or chrome or nickel plated. 10. Finish for Service Areas: Rough bronze or chrome or nickel plated. 11. Finish for Finished Rooms: Chrome or nickel plated. 12. Operation for Equipment Rooms: Wheel handle or operating key. 13. Operation for Service Areas: Wheel handle or operating key. 14. Operation for Finished Rooms: Wheel handle or operating key. 15. Include operating key with each operating-key hose bibb. Technical Specifications 15145 - 5 Domestic Water Piping Specialties 16. Include integral wall flange with each chrome- or nickel-plated hose bibb. 2.9 WALL HYDRANTS A. Nonfreeze Wall Hydrants <Insert drawing designation if any>: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Jay R. Smith Mfg Co; a division of Morris Group International. b. Josam Company. C. WATTS. d. Woodford Manufacturing Company. e. Zurn Industries, LLC. 2. Standard: ASME Al 12.21.3M for concealed or exposed-outlet, self-draining wall hydrants. B. Nonfreeze, Hot- and Cold-Water Wall Hydrants: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Jay R. Smith Mfg Co; a division of Morris Group International. b. Josam Company. C. WATTS. d. Woodford Manufacturing Company. e. Zurn Industries, LLC. 2. Standard: ASME Al 12.21.3M for concealed or exposed-outlet, self-draining wall hydrants. 2.10 DRAIN VALVES A. Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves: 1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves. 2. Pressure Rating: 400-psig minimum CWP. 3. Size: NPS 3/4. 4. Body: Copper alloy. 5. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable. 7. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel. 8. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint. 9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7 and cap with brass chain. 2.11 TRAP-SEAL PRIMER DEVICE A. Supply-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Device: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Jay R. Smith Mfg Co; a division of Morris Group International. b. Precision Plumbing Products. Technical Specifications 15145 - 6 Domestic Water Piping Specialties C. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. d. WATTS. 2. Standard: ASSE 1018. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum. 4. Body: Bronze. 5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: NPS 1/2 threaded, union, or solder joint. 6. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: NPS 1/2 threaded or solder joint. 7. Finish: Chrome plated, or rough bronze for units used with pipe or tube that is not chrome finished. B. Drainage-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Device: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Jay R. Smith Mfg Co; a division of Morris Group International. b. MIFAB, Inc. C. Precision Plumbing Products. d. Zurn Industries, LLC. 2. Standard: ASSE 1044, lavatory P-trap with NPS 3/8 minimum, trap makeup connection. 3. Size: NPS 1-1/4 minimum. 4. Material: Chrome-plated, cast brass. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Backflow Preventers: Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system. 2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-gap fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe diameters in drain piping and pipe-to-floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are unacceptable for this application. 3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers. B. Water Regulators: Install with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and bypass with memory- stop balancing valve. Install pressure gauges on inlet and outlet. C. Balancing Valves: Install in locations where they can easily be adjusted. D. Temperature-Actuated, Water Mixing Valves: Install with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets and with shutoff valve on outlet. 1. Install cabinet-type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as specified. E. Y-Pattern Strainers: For water, install on supply side of each control valve water pressure-reducing valve, solenoid valve and pump. Technical Specifications 15145 - 7 Domestic Water Piping Specialties F. Supply-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Device: Install with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow. G. Drainage-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Device: Install as lavatory trap with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. When installing piping specialties adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for service and maintenance. C. Comply with requirements for grounding equipment in Specification Section for "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Plastic Labels for Equipment: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or sign on or near each of the following: 1. Reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventers. 2. Double-check, backflow-prevention assemblies. 3. Dual-check-valve backflow preventers. 4. Calibrated balancing valves. 5. Primary, thermostatic, water mixing valves. 6. Primary water tempering valves. 7. Outlet boxes. 8. Hose stations. B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Section 15075 "Mechanical Identification." 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Test each pressure vacuum breaker reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer double-check, and backflow-prevention assembly according to authorities having jurisdiction and the device's reference standard. B. Domestic water piping specialties will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Set field-adjustable flow set points of balancing valves. B. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated, water mixing valves. Technical Specifications 15145 - 8 Domestic Water Piping Specialties END OF SECTION 15145 Technical Specifications 15145 - 9 Domestic Water Piping Specialties SECTION 15150 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings. 2. Copper tube and fittings. 3. ABS pipe and fittings. 4. PVC pipe and fittings. 5. Specialty pipe fittings. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For waste and vent piping, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. B. Field quality-control reports. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Listed manufacturers to provide labeling and warranty of their respective products. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure unless otherwise indicated: 1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water. B. Seismic Performance: Soil, waste, and vent piping and support and installation shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 2.2 PIPING MATERIALS A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. B. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes. 2.3 HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Technical Specifications 15150 - 1 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping 1. Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company. 2. Tyler Pipe; a part of McWane family of companies. B. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class. C. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber. D. Calking Materials: ASTM B 29, pure lead and oakum or hemp fiber. 2.4 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Copper Type DWV Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper. B. Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper or ASME B16.29, wrought copper, solder-joint fittings. C. Copper Pressure Fittings: 1. Copper Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought- copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated. 2. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and- socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends. D. Copper Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, cast copper with solder-joint end. 1. Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, full-face, flat, nonmetallic, asbestos- free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. 2. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated. E. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead free with ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux. 2.5 ABS PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping. B. Solid-Wall ABS Pipe: ASTM D 2661, Schedule 40. C. ABS Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2661, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns. D. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2235. 2.6 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping. B. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent. Technical Specifications 15150 - 2 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping C. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns and to fit Schedule 40 pipe. D. Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656. E. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564. 2.7 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS A. Transition Couplings: 1. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting. 2. Unshielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings: a. Standard: ASTM C 1173. b. Description: Elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition pattern. Include shear ring and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. C. End Connections: Same size as and compatible with pipes to be joined. d. Sleeve Materials: 1) For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber. 2) For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC. 3) For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe materials being joined. 3. Shielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings: a. Standard: ASTM C 1460. b. Description: Elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion- resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. C. End Connections: Same size as and compatible with pipes to be joined. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EARTH MOVING A. Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in Specification Section for"Earth Moving." 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. 1. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Technical Specifications 15150 - 3 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping 2. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings. B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. E. Install piping to permit valve servicing. F. Install piping at indicated slopes. G. Install piping free of sags and bends. H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. I. Install piping to allow application of insulation. J. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 15074 "Vibration and Seismic for Piping and Equipment." K. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. 1. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. 2. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if two fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. a. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. 3. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. 4. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. a. Reducing size of waste piping in direction of flow is prohibited. L. Lay buried building waste piping beginning at low point of each system. 1. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. 2. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. 3. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed. Technical Specifications 15150 - 4 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping M. Install soil and waste and vent piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise indicated: 1. Horizontal Sanitary Waste Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow. 2. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack. N. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." O. Install aboveground copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." P. Install aboveground ABS piping according to ASTM D 2661. Q. Install aboveground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2665. R. Plumbing Specialties: 1. Install backwater valves in sanitary waster gravity-flow piping. a. Comply with requirements for backwater valves specified in Section 15155 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties." 2. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary sewers in sanitary waste gravity-flow piping. a. Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Section 15155 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties." 3. Install drains in sanitary waste gravity-flow piping. 4. Comply with requirements for drains specified in Section 15050 "Basic Mechanical Requirements." a. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. S. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. 1. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 15050 "Basic Mechanical Requirements." T. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. 1. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 15050 "Basic Mechanical Requirements." 2. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. 3. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 15050 "Basic Mechanical Requirements." 4. JOINT CONSTRUCTION Technical Specifications 15150 - 5 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping U. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints. V. Join copper tube and fittings with soldered joints according to ASTM B 828. Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux and ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder. W. Grooved Joints: Cut groove ends of pipe according to AWWA C606. Lubricate and install gasket over ends of pipes or pipe and fitting. Install coupling housing sections, over gasket, with keys seated in piping grooves. Install and tighten housing bolts. X. Plastic, Nonpressure-Piping, Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: 1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. 2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 appendixes. 3. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM D 2665 appendixes. 3.3 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION A. Transition Couplings: 1. Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in ODs. 2. In Waste Drainage Piping: Shielded, non-pressure transition couplings. 3.4 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements in Section 15110 "Valves for Plumbing Piping," for general- duty valve installation requirements. B. Shutoff Valves: 1. Install shutoff valve on each sewage pump discharge. 2. Install gate or full-port ball valve for piping NPS 2 and smaller. 3. Install gate valve for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger. C. Check Valves: Install swing check valve, between pump and shutoff valve, on each sewage pump discharge. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 15074 "Vibration and Seismic for Piping and Equipment." B. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified in Section 15060 "Hangers and Supports." 1. Install carbon-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosive environments. Technical Specifications 15150 - 6 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping 2. Install stainless-steel pipe hangers for horizontal piping in corrosive environments. 3. Install carbon-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosive environments. 4. Install stainless-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in corrosive environments. 5. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 6. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs: a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. C. Longer Than 100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls. 7. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. 8. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers. C. Install hangers for cast-iron and copper soil piping, with maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters, to comply with MSS-58, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent. D. Install hangers for ABS and PVC piping, with maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters, to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent. E. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches of each fitting, valve, and coupling. F. Support vertical runs of cast iron and copper soil piping to comply with MSS-58, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent. G. Support vertical runs of ABS and PVC piping to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent. 3.6 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials. C. Connect waste and vent piping to the following: Technical Specifications 15150 - 7 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping 1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect waste piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. 2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect waste and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. 4. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor and floor cleanouts with cover flush with floor. 5. Install horizontal backwater valves with cleanout cover flush with floor. 6. Comply with requirements for backwater valves, cleanouts and drains specified in Section 15155 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties." 7. Equipment: Connect waste piping as indicated. a. Provide shutoff valve if indicated and union for each connection. b. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 and larger. D. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of equipment. E. Make connections according to the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 3.7 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify exposed sanitary waste and vent piping. B. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 15075 "Mechanical Identification." 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures. 2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. Technical Specifications 15150 - 8 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Test sanitary waste and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows: 1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. a. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced waste and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. a. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. 3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test waste and vent piping except outside leaders on completion of roughing-in. a. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. b. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. C. Inspect joints for leaks. 4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. a. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg. b. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. C. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. d. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks. 5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained. 6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. 3.9 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. B. Protect sanitary waste and vent piping during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work. Technical Specifications 15150 - 9 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops. D. Exposed ABS and PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of water-based latex paint. E. Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by waste and vent piping installation. 3.10 PIPING SCHEDULE A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless otherwise indicated. B. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be the following: 1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Copper Type DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints. 3. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, non-pressure transition couplings. C. Aboveground, vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following: 1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Copper Type DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints. a. Option for Vent Piping, NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3-1/2: Hard copper tube, Type M; copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints. 3. Solid-wall ABS pipe, ABS socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. 4. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. 5. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, non-pressure transition couplings. D. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following: 1. Service class, cast-iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Solid wall ABS pipe, ABS socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. 3. Solid wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. 4. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, non-pressure transition couplings. Technical Specifications 15150 - 10 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping SECTION 15155 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cleanouts. 2. Roof flashing assemblies. 3. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 15410 "Plumbing Fixtures". 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene. B. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality-control reports. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTIONS A. Sanitary waste piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. B. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic sanitary waste piping specialty components. 2.2 CLEANOUTS A. Cast-Iron Exposed Cleanouts: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Jay R. Smith Mfg Co; a division of Morris Group International. b. Josam Company. C. MIFAB, Inc. d. WATTS. e. Zurn Industries, LLC. 2. Standard: ASME Al 12.36.2M for cast iron for cleanout test tee. 3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping 4. Body Material: match connected piping. 5. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. 6. Closure: Stainless-steel plug with seal. Technical Specifications 15155 - 1 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties B. Cast-Iron Exposed Floor Cleanouts: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Jay R. Smith Mfg Co; a division of Morris Group International. b. Josam Company. C. MIFAB, Inc. d. WATTS. e. Zurn Industries, LLC. 2. Standard: ASME Al 12.36.2M for threaded, adjustable housing cleanout. 3. Size: Same as connected branch. 4. Type: Heavy-duty, adjustable housing. 5. Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket 6. Adjustable Housing Material: match installed piping 7. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel-bronze, copper alloy 8. Frame and Cover Shape: Round. 9. Top Loading Classification: Heavy Duty. C. Cast-Iron Wall Cleanouts : 1. <Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Jay R. Smith Mfg Co; a division of Morris Group International. b. Josam Company. C. MIFAB, Inc. d. WATTS. e. Zurn Industries, LLC. 2. Standard: ASME Al 12.36.2M. Include wall access. 3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping. 4. Body: as required to match connected piping. 5. Closure Plug: a. Brass b. Countersunk or raised head. C. Drilled and threaded for cover attachment screw. d. Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. 6. Wall Access: Round, flat, chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel cover plate with screw. 2.3 ROOF FLASHING ASSEMBLIES A. Roof Flashing Assemblies: 1. <Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Acorn Engineering Company; a Division of Morris Group International. b. Thaler Metal Industries Ltd. C. Zurn Industries, LLC. Technical Specifications 15155 - 2 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties 2. Description: Manufactured assembly made of 6.0-Ib/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch-thick, lead flashing collar and skirt extending at least 8 inchesfrom pipe, with galvanized-steel boot reinforcement and counterflashing fitting. a. Open-Top Vent Cap: Without cap. b. Extended Vent Cap: With field-installed, vandal-proof vent cap. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Open Drains: 1. Description: Shop or field fabricate from ASTM A74, Service class, hub-and- spigot, cast-iron soil-pipe fittings. Include P-trap, hub-and-spigot riser section; and where required, increaser fitting joined with ASTM C564 rubber gaskets. 2. Size: Same as connected waste piping. B. Deep-Seal Traps: 1. Description: Cast-iron or bronze casting, with inlet and outlet matching connected piping and cleanout trap-seal primer valve connection. 2. Size: Same as connected waste piping. a. NPS 2: 4-inch-minimum water seal. b. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 5-inch-minimum water seal. C. Floor-Drain, Trap-Seal Primer Fittings: 1. Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap- seal primer valve connection. 2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2 side inlet. D. Air-Gap Fittings : 1. Standard: ASME Al12.1.2, for fitting designed to ensure fixed, positive air gap between installed inlet and outlet piping. 2. Body: Bronze or cast iron. 3. Inlet: Opening in top of body. 4. Outlet: Larger than inlet. 5. Size: Same as connected waste piping and with inlet large enough for associated indirect waste piping. E. Sleeve Flashing Device: 1. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron fitting, with clamping device that forms sleeve for pipe floor penetrations of floor membrane. Include galvanized-steel pipe extension in top of fitting that will extend 1 inch above finished floor and galvanized-steel pipe extension in bottom of fitting that will extend through floor slab. 2. Size: As required for close fit to riser or stack piping. F. Vent Caps: 1. Description: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal-proof design. Include vented hood and setscrews to secure to vent pipe. Technical Specifications 15155 - 3 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties 2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack. G. Expansion Joints: 1. Standard: ASME Al 12.6.4. 2. Body: Cast iron with bronze sleeve, packing, and gland. 3. End Connections: Matching connected piping. 4. Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent piping. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated. 2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. 3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for larger piping. 4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack. B. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor. C. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall. D. Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof. Comply with requirements in Section 076200, Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. E. Install flashing fittings on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof. Comply with requirements in Section 076200, Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. F. Assemble open drain fittings and install with top of hub 1 inch above floor. G. Install deep-seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, if indicated. H. Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-seal primer connection. 1. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection. 2. Size: Same as floor drain inlet. I. Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste piping discharge into sanitary drainage system. J. Install sleeve and sleeve seals with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof membrane. K. Install vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof. Technical Specifications 15155 -4 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties L. Install expansion joints on vertical stacks and conductors. Position expansion joints for easy access and maintenance. M. Install wood-blocking reinforcement for wall-mounting-type specialties. N. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is indicated. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Comply with requirements in Section 15150 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping" for piping installation requirements. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance. C. Ground equipment according to Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. 3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." B. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are required. C. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors and roofs with waterproof membrane. 1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches, and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe. 2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around sleeve. 3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around specialty. D. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement. E. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device. F. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or commercially made flashing fittings, according to Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." G. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure flashing into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess. 3.4 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING A. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit. 1. Nameplates and signs are specified in Section 15075 "Mechanical Identification." 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work. Technical Specifications 15155 - 5 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops. END OF SECTION 15155 Technical Specifications 15155 - 6 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties SECTION 15181 HYDRONIC PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes pipe and fitting materials and joining methods for the following: 1. Steel pipe and fittings. 2. Plastic pipe and fittings 3. Joining materials. 4. Transition fittings. 5. Dielectric fittings. 6. Bypass chemical feeder. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of the following: 1. Pipe. 2. Fittings. 3. Joining materials. 4. Bypass chemical feeder. B. Delegated-Design Submittal: 1. Design calculations and detailed fabrication and assembly of pipe anchors and alignment guides, hangers and supports for multiple pipes, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to the building structure. 2. Locations of pipe anchors and alignment guides and expansion joints and loops. 3. Locations of and details for penetrations, including sleeves and sleeve seals for exterior walls, floors, basement, and foundation walls. 4. Locations of and details for penetration and firestopping for fire- and smoke-rated wall and floor and ceiling assemblies. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality-control reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation. Technical Specifications 15181 - 1 Hydronic Piping B. Grooved-End Mechanical Joints: 1. To assure uniformity and compatibility of piping components in grooved end piping systems, all grooved products utilized shall be supplied by a single manufacturer. Grooving tools shall be supplied by the same manufacturer as the grooved components. 2. A representative from grooved piping system supplier (direct employee) shall periodically visit the job site and review installation. Contractor shall remove and replace any improperly installed products. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure and temperature unless otherwise indicated: 1. Hot-Water Heating Piping: 100 psig at 200 deg F. 2. Makeup-Water Piping: 80 psig at 73 deg F. 3. Air-Vent Piping: 180 deg F. 4. Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping: Equal to the pressure of the piping system to which it is attached. 2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B B. DWV Copper Tubing: ASTM B 306, Type DWV. C. Grooved, Mechanical-Joint, Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Victaulic Company. 2. Grooved-End Copper Fittings: ASTM B 75, copper tube or ASTM B 584, bronze casting. 3. Grooved-End-Tube Couplings: Rigid pattern unless otherwise indicated; gasketed fitting. Ductile-iron housing with keys matching pipe and fitting grooves, pre-lubricated EPDM gasket rated for minimum 230 deg F for use with housing, and steel bolts and nuts. D. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME 1316.22. 2.3 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel with plain ends; welded and seamless, Grade B, and wall thickness as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article. B. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125 and 250 as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article. Technical Specifications 15181 - 2 Hydronic Piping C. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300 as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article. D. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300 as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article. E. Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 25, 125, and 250; raised ground face, and bolt holes spot faced as indicated in "Piping Applications" Article. F. Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings: 1. Material Group: 1.1. 2. End Connections: Butt welding. 3. Facings: Raised face. G. Plain-End Mechanical-Joint Couplings: 1. Housing: ASTM A-536 Grade 65-45-12 segmented ductile iron or type 304 stainless steel. 2. Housing Coating: None. 3. Gasket: EPDM. 4. Sealing Mechanism: Double-lip sealing system or carbon steel case-hardened jaws. 5. Bolts, hex nuts, washers, or lock bars based on manufacturer's design. 6. Minimum Pressure Rating: Equal to that of the joined pipes. H. Grooved-End Mechanical-Joint Couplings 1. Standard Mechanical Couplings, 2 inch through 12 inch: Manufactured in two segments of cast ductile iron, conforming to ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12. Gaskets shall be pressure-responsive synthetic rubber, grade to suit the intended service, conforming to ASTM D-2000. (Gaskets used for potable water applications shall be UL classified in accordance with ANSI/NSF-61 for potable water service.) Mechanical Coupling bolts shall be zinc plated (ASTM B-633) heat treated carbon steel track head conforming to ASTM A-449 and ASTM A- 183, minimum tensile strength 110,000 psi as provided standard Victaulic. a. Rigid Type: Coupling housings with offsetting, angle-pattern bolt pads shall be used to provide system rigidity and support and hanging in accordance with ANSI B31.1, B31.9, and NFPA 13. a. 2" through 12": Installation ready rigid coupling for direct stab installation without field disassembly. Gasket shall be Grade Technical Specifications 15181 - 3 Hydronic Piping EPDM compound designed for operating temperatures from - 30 deg F to +250 deg F without the use of high-heat /silicone lubricant. b. Flexible Type: Use in locations where vibration attenuation and stress relief are required. Flexible couplings may be used in lieu of flexible connectors at equipment connections. Three couplings, for each connector, shall be placed in close proximity to the vibration source. a. 2" through 8": Installation ready flexible coupling for direct stab installation without field disassembly. Gasket shall be EPDM compound designed for operating temperatures from -30 deg +250 deg F without the use of high-heat/silicone lubricant. 2.4 PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS A. PVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 80, Normal Impact. Piping to match materials provide and listed on drawing sheet GM-2, Piping Materials Schedule Group No. 8. B. PVC Plastic Pipe Fittings: Socket-type pipe fittings,; ASTM D 2467 for Schedule 80 pipe. Solvent shall be compatible with fluid service. Fittings to match materials provide and listed on drawing sheet GM-2, Piping Materials Schedule Group No. 8. 2.5 JOINING MATERIALS A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents. 1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless otherwise indicated. a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges. B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated. C. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for joining copper with copper; or BAg-1, silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel. F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. 2.6 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined. Technical Specifications 15181 - 4 Hydronic Piping B. Dielectric Unions: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company. C. HART Industrial Unions, LLC. d. WATTS. e. Zurn Industries, LLC. f. Victaulic Co. of America 2. Description: a. Standard: ASSE 1079. b. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F. C. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous. 2.7 BYPASS CHEMICAL FEEDER A. Description: Welded steel construction; 125-psig working pressure; 5-gal. capacity; with fill funnel and inlet, outlet, and drain valves. 1. Chemicals: Specially formulated, based on analysis of makeup water, to prevent accumulation of scale and corrosion in piping and connected equipment. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Ground water and Condenser Water piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be any of the following: 1. Type L (B, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and brazed joints. 2. Schedule 40, Grade B steel pipe; Class 150, malleable-iron fittings; cast-iron flanges and flange fittings; and threaded joints. 3. Schedule 80 solid core PVC pipe and fittings and solvent-weld joints. B. Ground water and Condenser Water piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, shall be the following: 1. Schedule 40 steel pipe, plain-end mechanical-coupled joints or grooved-end mechanical joints. 2. Schedule 80 solid core PVC pipe and fittings and solvent-weld joints. C. Chilled ground water piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be any of the following: 1. Type L (B, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and brazed joints. Technical Specifications 15181 - 5 Hydronic Piping 2. Schedule 40, Grade B steel pipe; Class 150, malleable-iron fittings; cast-iron flanges and flange fittings; and threaded joints. D. Chilled ground water piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, shall be the following: 1. Schedule 40 steel pipe, plain-end mechanical-coupled joints or grooved-end mechanical joints. E. Makeup-water piping installed aboveground shall be the following: 1. Type L (B, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and brazed joints. F. Air-Vent Piping: 1. Inlet: Same as service where installed with metal-to-plastic transition fittings for plastic piping systems according to piping manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Outlet: Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing with soldered or flared joints. G. Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping for Hydronic Water Piping: Same materials and joining methods as for piping specified for the service in which safety valve is installed with metal-to-plastic transition fittings for plastic piping systems according to piping manufacturer's written instructions. 3.2 PIPING INSTALLATIONS A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. E. Install piping to permit valve servicing. F. Install piping at indicated slopes. G. Install piping free of sags and bends. H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. I. Install piping to allow application of insulation. J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. Technical Specifications 15181 - 6 Hydronic Piping K. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves. L. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage. M. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow. N. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up. O. Install branch connections to mains using mechanically formed tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, connect the branch to the top of the main pipe. P. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Q. Install flanges in piping, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, at final connections of equipment and elsewhere as indicated. R. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting. S. Comply with requirements in Section 15075 "Mechanical Identification" for identifying piping. T. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 15050 "Basic Mechanical Material and Methods." U. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 15050 "Basic Mechanical Material and Methods." V. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 15050 "Basic Mechanical Material and Methods." W. DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION X. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing. Y. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric nipples. Z. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flange kits or nipples. AA. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits. 3.3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 15074 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Piping and Equipment." Technical Specifications 15181 - 7 Hydronic Piping B. Comply with requirements in Section 15060 "Hangers and Supports" for hangers, supports, and anchor devices. C. Install the following pipe attachments: 1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long. 2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet or longer. 3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer, supported on a trapeze. 4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs. 5. Provide copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with copper pipe. 6. On plastic pipe, install pads or cushions on bearing surfaces to prevent hanger from scratching pipe. D. Install hangers for copper tubing and steel piping, with maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters, to comply with MSS-58, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent. E. Support vertical runs of copper tubing and steel piping to comply with MSS-58, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent. F. Install hangers for plastic piping, with maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters, to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, locally enforced code, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent. G. Support horizontal piping within 12 inches of each fitting and coupling 3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. C. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8/A5.8M. D. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. Technical Specifications 15181 - 8 Hydronic Piping 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. E. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. F. Plain-End Mechanical-Coupled Joints: Prepare, assemble, and test joints in accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions. G. Grooved-End Mechanical Joints: Couplings installation shall be complete when visual metal-to-metal contact is reached. 3.5 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment connections. B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment. C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If parallel control valves are installed, only one bypass is required. D. Install ports for pressure gages and thermometers at coil inlet and outlet connections. Comply with requirements in Section 230519 "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping." 3.6 CHEMICAL TREATMENT A. Fill system with fresh water and add liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and detergents to remove grease and petroleum products from piping. Circulate solution for a minimum of 24 hours, drain, clean strainer screens, and refill with fresh water. B. Add initial chemical treatment and maintain water quality in ranges noted above for the first year of operation. C. Fill systems that have antifreeze or glycol solutions with the following concentrations: 1. Chilled-Water Piping: Minimum of 25% percent propylene glycol. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows: 1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test. 2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing. 3. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace strainer screens. Technical Specifications 15181 - 9 Hydronic Piping 4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment. 5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test. B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping: 1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used. 2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid. 3. Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water. 4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the system's working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times the "SE" value in Appendix A in ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping." 5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks. 6. Prepare written report of testing. C. Perform the following before operating the system: 1. Open manual valves fully. 2. Inspect pumps for proper rotation. 3. Set makeup pressure-reducing valves for required system pressure. 4. Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type). 5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow. 6. Inspect and set operating temperatures of hydronic equipment, such as boilers, chillers, cooling towers, to specified values. 7. Verify lubrication of motors and bearings. END OF SECTION 15181 Technical Specifications 15181 - 10 Hydronic Piping SECTION 15182 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Hydronic specialty valves. 2. Air-control devices. 3. Strainers. 4. Connectors. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 15115 "Valves for HVAC Piping" for specification and installation requirements for valves common to most HVAC piping systems. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product: 1. Include construction details and material descriptions for hydronic piping specialties. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. 3. Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for calibrated-orifice balancing valves and automatic flow-control valves. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Pipe Welding: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX. B. Safety Valves and Pressure Vessels: Shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 HYDRONIC SPECIALTY VALVES A. Plastic Ball Valves: 1. Body: One-, two-, or three-piece CPVC or PVC to match piping. 2. Ball: Full-port CPVC or PVC to match piping. 3. Seats: PTFE. 4. Seals: EPDM. 5. End Connections: Socket, union, or flanged. 6. Handle Style: Tee shape. 7. CWP Rating: Equal to piping service. 8. Maximum Operating Temperature: Equal to piping service. 9. Comply with MSS SP-122. B. Plastic Butterfly Valves: 1. Body: PVC or CPVC to match piping wafer type for installation between flanges. Technical Specifications 15182 - 1 Hydronic Piping Specialties 2. Disc: EPDM-coated steel. 3. Seats: PTFE. 4. Handle Style: Locking lever. 5. CWP Rating: Equal to piping service. 6. Maximum Operating Temperature: Equal to piping service. C. Plastic Check Valves: 1. Body: One-, two-, or three-piece PVC or CPVC to match piping. 2. Ends: Socket or flanged. 3. Seats: PTFE. 4. Check Style: Swing or ball type. 5. CWP Rating: Equal to piping service. 6. Maximum Operating Temperature: Equal to piping service. D. Bronze, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves: 1. Body: Bronze, ball or plug type with calibrated orifice or venturi. 2. Ball: Brass or stainless steel. 3. Plug: Resin. 4. Seat: PTFE. 5. End Connections: Threaded or socket. 6. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter. 7. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position. 8. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig. 9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F. E. Diaphragm-Operated, Pressure-Reducing Valves: ASME labeled. 1. Body: Bronze or brass. 2. Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE. 3. Seat: Brass. 4. Stem Seals: EPDM O-rings. 5. Diaphragm: EPT. 6. Low inlet-pressure check valve. 7. Inlet Strainer: Stainless Steel, removable without system shutdown. 8. Valve Seat and Stem: Noncorrosive. 9. Valve Size, Capacity, and Operating Pressure: Selected to suit system in which installed, with operating pressure and capacity factory set and field adjustable. F. Diaphragm-Operated Safety Valves: ASME labeled. 1. Body: Bronze or brass. 2. Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE. 3. Seat: Brass. 4. Stem Seals: EPDM O-rings. 5. Diaphragm: EPT. 6. Wetted, Internal Work Parts: Brass and rubber. 7. Inlet Strainer: Stainless Steel, removable without system shutdown. 8. Valve Seat and Stem: Noncorrosive. 9. Valve Size, Capacity, and Operating Pressure: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IV, and selected to suit system in which installed, with operating pressure and capacity factory set and field adjustable. 2.2 AIR-CONTROL DEVICES A. Manual Air Vents: Technical Specifications 15182 - 2 Hydronic Piping Specialties 1. Body: Bronze. 2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous. 3. Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew. 4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2. 5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8. 6. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F. B. Expansion Tanks: 1. Tank: Welded steel, rated for 125-psig working pressure and 375 deg F maximum operating temperature, with taps in bottom of tank for tank fitting and taps in end of tank for gage glass. Tanks shall be factory tested after taps are fabricated and shall be labeled according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. 2. Air-Control Tank Fitting: Cast-iron body, copper-plated tube, brass vent tube plug, and stainless-steel ball check, 100-gal. unit only; sized for compression- tank diameter. Provide tank fittings for 125-psig working pressure and 250 deg F maximum operating temperature. 3. Tank Drain Fitting: Brass body, nonferrous internal parts; 125-psig working pressure and 240 deg F maximum operating temperature; constructed to admit air to compression tank, drain water, and close off system. C. In-Line Air Separators: 1. Tank: One-piece cast iron with an integral weir constructed to decelerate system flow to maximize air separation. 2. Maximum Working Pressure: Up to 175 psig. 3. Maximum Operating Temperature: Up to 300 deg F. 2.3 STRAINERS A. Y-Pattern Strainers: 1. Body: ASTM A126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 3. Strainer Screen: Stainless-steel, 20-mesh strainer, or perforated stainless-steel basket. 4. CWP Rating: 125 psig. 2.4 CONNECTORS A. Stainless-Steel Bellow, Flexible Connectors: 1. Body: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing protective jacket. 2. End Connections: Threaded or flanged to match equipment connected. 3. Performance: Capable of 3/4-inch misalignment. 4. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Install shutoff-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains and at supply connection to each piece of equipment. Technical Specifications 15182 - 3 Hydronic Piping Specialties B. Install throttling-duty valves at each branch connection to return main. C. Install calibrated-orifice, balancing valves in the return pipe of each heating or cooling terminal. D. Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction. E. Install safety valves at hot-water generators and elsewhere as required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Install drip-pan elbow on safety-valve outlet and pipe without valves to the outdoors; pipe drain to nearest floor drain or as indicated on Drawings. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, for installation requirements. F. Install pressure-reducing valves at makeup-water connection to regulate system fill pressure. 3.2 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting. B. Install piping from boiler air outlet, air separator, or air purger to expansion tank with a 2 percent upward slope toward tank. C. Install in-line air separators in pump suction. Install drain valve on air separators NPS 2 and larger. D. Install expansion tanks above the air separator. Install tank fitting in tank bottom and charge tank. Use manual vent for initial fill to establish proper water level in tank. 1. Install tank fittings that are shipped loose. 2. Support tank from floor or structure above with sufficient strength to carry weight of tank, piping connections, fittings, plus tank full of water. Do not overload building components and structural members. E. Install expansion tanks on the floor. Vent and purge air from hydronic system, and ensure that tank is properly charged with air to suit system Project requirements. END OF SECTION 15182 Technical Specifications 15182 -4 Hydronic Piping Specialties SECTION 15183 REFRIGERANT PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Refrigerant pipes and fittings. 2. Refrigerant piping valves and specialties. 3. Refrigerants. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of valve, refrigerant piping, and refrigerant piping specialty. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Show piping size and piping layout, including oil traps, double risers, specialties, and pipe and tube sizes to accommodate, as a minimum, equipment provided, elevation difference between compressor and evaporator, and length of piping to ensure proper operation and compliance with warranties of connected equipment. 2. Show interface and spatial relationships between piping and equipment. 3. Shop Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch equals 1 foot. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality-control reports. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Refrigeration Systems." B. Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-410A: 1. Suction Lines for Air-Conditioning Applications: 300 psig. 2. Suction Lines for Heat-Pump Applications: 535 psig. 3. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: 535 psig. 2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K or L or ASTM B 280, Type ACR. B. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME 1316.22. Technical Specifications 15183 - 1 Refrigerant Piping C. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22. D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32. Use 95-5 tin antimony or alloy HB solder to join copper socket fittings on copper pipe. E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M. F. Flexible Connectors: 1. Body: Tin-bronze bellows with woven, flexible, tinned-bronze-wire-reinforced protective jacket. 2. End Connections: Socket ends. 3. Offset Performance: Capable of minimum 3/4-inch misalignment in minimum 7- inch-long assembly. 4. Working Pressure Rating: Factory test at minimum 500 psig. 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F. 2.3 VALVES AND SPECIALTIES A. Diaphragm Packless Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Danfoss Inc. b. Parker Hannifin Corp. 2. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze; globe design with straight- through or angle pattern. 3. Diaphragm: Phosphor bronze and stainless steel with stainless-steel spring. 4. Operator: Rising stem and hand wheel. 5. Seat: Nylon. 6. End Connections: Socket, union, or flanged. 7. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 8. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F. B. Packed-Angle Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Danfoss Inc. b. Parker Hannifin Corp. 2. Body and Bonnet: Forged brass or cast bronze. 3. Packing: Molded stem, back seating, and replaceable under pressure. 4. Operator: Rising stem. 5. Seat: Nonrotating, self-aligning polytetrafluoroethylene. 6. Seal Cap: Forged-brass or valox hex cap. 7. End Connections: Socket, union, threaded, or flanged. 8. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F. C. Check Valves: Technical Specifications 15183 - 2 Refrigerant Piping 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Apollo Valves; a part of Aalberts Integrated Piping Systems. b. Danfoss Inc. C. Parker Hannifin Corp. 2. Body: Ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; globe pattern. 3. Bonnet: Bolted ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; or brass hex plug. 4. Piston: Removable polytetrafluoroethylene seat. 5. Closing Spring: Stainless steel. 6. Manual Opening Stem: Seal cap, plated-steel stem, and graphite seal. 7. End Connections: Socket, union, threaded, or flanged. 8. Maximum Opening Pressure: 0.50 psig. 9. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 10. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F. D. Service Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Danfoss Inc. b. Parker Hannifin Corp. C. Refrigeration Sales, Inc. 2. Body: Forged brass with brass cap including key end to remove core. 3. Core: Removable ball-type check valve with stainless-steel spring. 4. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene. 5. End Connections: Copper spring. 6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. E. Solenoid Valves: Comply with AHRI 760 and UL 429; listed and labeled by a National Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL). 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Danfoss Inc. b. Parker Hannifin Corp. 2. Body and Bonnet: Plated steel. 3. Solenoid Tube, Plunger, Closing Spring, and Seat Orifice: Stainless steel. 4. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene. 5. End Connections: Threaded. 6. Electrical: Molded, watertight coil in NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by location with 1/2-inch conduit adapter, and 115-V ac coil. 7. Working Pressure Rating: 400 psig. 8. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F. F. Safety Relief Valves: Comply with 2010 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; listed and labeled by an NRTL. Technical Specifications 15183 - 3 Refrigerant Piping 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Danfoss Inc. b. Parker Hannifin Corp. 2. Body and Bonnet: Ductile iron and steel, with neoprene 0-ring seal. 3. Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel. 4. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene. 5. End Connections: Threaded. 6. Working Pressure Rating: 400 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F. G. Thermostatic Expansion Valves: Comply with AHRI 750. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Danfoss Inc. b. Heldon Products; Henry Technologies. 2. Body, Bonnet, and Seal Cap: Forged brass or steel. 3. Diaphragm, Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel. 4. Packing and Gaskets: Non-asbestos. 5. Capillary and Bulb: Copper tubing filled with refrigerant charge. 6. Suction Temperature: match equipment performance requiremetns. 7. Superheat: Adjustable. 8. Reverse-flow option (for heat-pump applications). 9. End Connections: Socket, flare, or threaded union. 10. Working Pressure Rating: 450 psig or as required by equipment. H. Straight-Type Strainers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Danfoss Inc. b. Parker Hannifin Corp. 2. Body: Welded steel with corrosion-resistant coating. 3. Screen: 100-mesh stainless steel. 4. End Connections: Socket or flare. 5. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 6. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F. I. Moisture/Liquid Indicators: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Danfoss Inc. b. Parker Hannifin Corp. Technical Specifications 15183 -4 Refrigerant Piping 2. Body: Forged brass. 3. Window: Replaceable, clear, fused glass window with indicating element protected by filter screen. 4. Indicator: Color coded to show moisture content in parts per million (ppm). 5. Minimum Moisture Indicator Sensitivity: Indicate moisture above 60 ppm. 6. End Connections: Socket or flare. 7. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 8. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F. J. Replaceable-Core Filter Dryers: Comply with AHRI 730. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Danfoss Inc. b. Parker Hannifin Corp. 2. Body and Cover: Painted-steel shell with ductile-iron cover, stainless-steel screws, and neoprene gaskets. 3. Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless-steel support. 4. Desiccant Media: Activated alumina or charcoal. 5. Designed for reverse flow (for heat-pump applications). 6. End Connections: Socket. 7. Access Ports: NPS 1/4 connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure differential measurement. 8. Maximum Pressure Loss: 2 psig. 9. Rated Flow: varies, see drawing schedules. 10. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 11. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F. K. Permanent Filter Dryers: Comply with AHRI 730. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Danfoss Inc. b. Parker Hannifin Corp. 2. Body and Cover: Painted-steel shell. 3. Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless-steel support. 4. Desiccant Media: Activated alumina or charcoal. 5. Designed for reverse flow (for heat-pump applications). 6. End Connections: Socket. 7. Access Ports: NPS 1/4 connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure differential measurement. 8. Maximum Pressure Loss: 2 psig. 9. Rated Flow: varies, see schedules. 10. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 11. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F. 2.4 REFRIGERANTS A. ASHRAE 34, R-410A: Pentafluoroethane/Difluoromethane. Technical Specifications 15183 - 5 Refrigerant Piping 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Arkema Inc. b. DuPont Fluorochemicals Div. C. Genetron Refrigerants; Honeywell International Inc. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS FOR REFRIGERANT R-410A A. Suction Lines: Copper, Type ACR, annealed-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed joints. B. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: Copper, Type ACR, Type L, annealed- or drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed joints. C. Safety-Relief-Valve Discharge Piping: Copper, Type ACR or Type L, annealed- or drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed joints. D. Safety-Relief-Valve Discharge Piping: Copper, Type K, annealed- or drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed joints. 3.2 VALVE AND SPECIALTY APPLICATIONS A. Install diaphragm packless or packed-angle valves in suction and discharge lines of compressor. B. Install service valves for gage taps at inlet and outlet of hot-gas bypass valves and strainers if they are not an integral part of valves and strainers. C. Install a check valve at the compressor discharge and a liquid accumulator at the compressor suction connection. D. Except as otherwise indicated, install diaphragm pack-less or packed-angle valves on inlet and outlet side of filter dryers. E. Install a full-size, three-valve bypass around filter dryers. F. Install solenoid valves upstream from each expansion valve and hot-gas bypass valve. Install solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at top. G. Install thermostatic expansion valves as close as possible to distributors on evaporators. 1. Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb. 2. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using two bulb straps. Do not mount bulb in a trap or at bottom of the line. 3. If external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will reflect suction-line pressure at bulb location. H. Install safety relief valves where required by 2010 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Pipe safety-relief-valve discharge line to outside according to ASHRAE 15. Technical Specifications 15183 - 6 Refrigerant Piping I. Install moisture/liquid indicators in liquid line at the inlet of the thermostatic expansion valve or at the inlet of the evaporator coil capillary tube. J. Install strainers upstream from and adjacent to the following unless they are furnished as an integral assembly for the device being protected: 1. Solenoid valves. 2. Thermostatic expansion valves. 3. Hot-gas bypass valves. 4. Compressor. K. Install filter dryers in liquid line between compressor and thermostatic expansion valve, and in the suction line at the compressor. L. Install receivers sized to accommodate pump-down charge. M. Install flexible connectors at compressors. 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems; indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings. B. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15. C. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. F. Install piping adjacent to machines to allow service and maintenance. G. Install piping free of sags and bends. H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. I. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. J. Refer to manufacturers written instructions and operation manuals for expansion valves and for solenoid valve controllers, control wiring, and sequence of operation. K. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows, and fittings. L. Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of refrigeration equipment. Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection. Install Technical Specifications 15183 - 7 Refrigerant Piping access doors or panels as specified in Section for "Access Doors and Frames" if valves or equipment requiring maintenance is concealed behind finished surfaces. M. Install refrigerant piping in protective conduit where installed belowground. N. Install refrigerant piping in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where exposed to mechanical injury. O. Slope refrigerant piping as follows: 1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward away from compressor. 2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor. 3. Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs. 4. Liquid lines may be installed level. P. When brazing or soldering, remove solenoid-valve coils and sight glasses; also remove valve stems, seats, and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply heat near expansion-valve bulb. Q. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or between pipes for insulation installation. R. Identify refrigerant piping and valves according to Section 15075 "Mechanical Identification." S. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 15050 "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods." T. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 15050 "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods." U. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 15050 "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods." V. PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION W. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. X. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. Y. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." Z. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe and Tube." 1. Use Type BCuP (copper-phosphorus) alloy for joining copper socket fittings with copper pipe. Technical Specifications 15183 - 8 Refrigerant Piping 2. Use Type BAg (cadmium-free silver) alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Comply with requirements for seismic restraints in Section 15074 "Vibration and Seismic for Piping and Equipment." B. Comply with Section 15060 "Hangers and Supports" for hangers, supports, and anchor devices. C. Install the following pipe attachments: 1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet long. 2. Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet or longer. 3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer, supported on a trapeze. 4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs. 5. Copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with copper pipe. D. Install hangers for copper tubing, with maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters, to comply with MSS-58, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent. E. Support horizontal piping within 12 inches of each fitting. F. Support vertical runs of copper tubing to comply with MSS-58, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Comply with ASME B31.5, Chapter VI. 2. Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor, condenser, evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure if they are not rated above the test pressure. 3. Test high- and low-pressure side piping of each system separately at not less than the pressures indicated in "Performance Requirements" Article. a. Fill system with nitrogen to the required test pressure. b. System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout duration of test. C. Test joints and fittings with electronic leak detector or by brushing a small amount of soap and glycerin solution over joints. d. Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory results are achieved. B. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.6 SYSTEM CHARGING A. Charge system using the following procedures: 1. Install core in filter dryers after leak test but before evacuation. Technical Specifications 15183 - 9 Refrigerant Piping 2. Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to 500 micrometers. If vacuum holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging. 3. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig. 4. Charge system with a new filter-dryer core in charging line. 3.7 ADJUSTING A. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat. B. Adjust high- and low-pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to fluctuating suction pressure. C. Adjust set-point temperature of air-conditioning or chilled-water controllers to the system design temperature. D. Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system, according to manufacturer's written instructions: 1. Open shutoff valves in condenser water circuit. 2. Verify that compressor oil level is correct. 3. Open compressor suction and discharge valves. 4. Open refrigerant valves except bypass valves that are used for other purposes. 5. Check open compressor-motor alignment and verify lubrication for motors and bearings. E. Replace core of replaceable filter dryer after system has been adjusted and after design flow rates and pressures are established. END OF SECTION 15183 Technical Specifications 15183 - 10 Refrigerant Piping SECTION 15185 INLINE, DOMESTIC-WATER PUMPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. In-line, sealless centrifugal pumps. 2. Horizontally mounted, in-line, close-coupled centrifugal pumps. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Detail pumps and adjacent equipment, drawn to scale and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved. B. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for inline, domestic-water pumps, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. C. Field quality-control reports. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. UL Compliance: UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps. C. Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects and Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content Compliance: NSF 61 and NSF 372. D. Seismic Performance: Inline, domestic-water pumps shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to Seismic Zone B, see structural plans for local Seismic information. 1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event." 2. Component Importance Factor: 1.0. 2.2 IN-LINE, SEALLESS CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, in-line, close-coupled, canned-motor, sealless, overhung-impeller centrifugal pumps. Technical Specifications 15185 - 1 Inline, Domestic-Water Pumps B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Flo Fab Inc. 2. Grundfos Pumps Corp. 3. TACO Comfort Solutions, Inc. 4. WILO USA LLC - WILO Canada Inc. C. Capacities and Characteristics: 1. Refer to drawing schedules for performance data D. Pump Construction: 1. Pump and Motor Assembly: Hermetically sealed, replaceable-cartridge type with motor and impeller on common shaft and designed for installation with pump and motor shaft horizontal. 2. Minimum Working Pressure: 125 psig. 3. Maximum Continuous Operating Temperature: 140 deg F. 2.3 MOTORS A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 15055 "Common Motor Requirements for Equipment." 1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0. 2.4 CONTROLS A. Thermostats: Electric; adjustable for control of hot-water circulation pump. 1. Operation of Pump: On or off. 2. Transformer: Provide if required. 3. Power Requirement: 120 V ac 4. Settings: Start pump at 130 deg Fand stop pump at 140 deg F 5. Retain "Timers" Paragraph below if applying controls to limit hot-water circulation pump operation to periods when hot water is required, which is required by LEED v4, IgCC, and ASHRAE 189.1. B. Timers: Electric, for control of hot-water circulation pump. 1. Type: Programmable, seven-day clock with manual override on-off switch. 2. Operation of Pump: On or off. 3. Transformer: Provide if required. 4. Power Requirement: 120 V ac. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with HI 1.4. B. Mount pumps in orientation complying with manufacturer's written instructions. C. Install continuous-thread hanger rods and vibration isolation of size required to support pump weight. Technical Specifications 15185 - 2 Inline, Domestic-Water Pumps 1. Comply with requirements for hangers and supports specified in Section 15060 "Hangers and Supports." D. Install thermostats in hot-water return piping. E. Install timers on wall near pump. F. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 15075 "Mechanical Identification" for identification of pumps. 3.2 PIPING CONNECTIONS A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 15140 "Domestic Water Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Where installing piping adjacent to inline, domestic-water pumps, allow space for service and maintenance. C. Connect domestic-water piping to pumps. Install suction and discharge piping equal to or greater than size of pump nozzles. 1. Install flexible connectors adjacent to pumps in suction and discharge piping of the following pumps: a. Horizontally mounted, in-line, close-coupled centrifugal pumps. b. Comply with requirements for flexible connectors specified in Section 15140 "Domestic Water Piping." D. Install shutoff valve and strainer on suction side of each pump, and check, shutoff, and throttling valves on discharge side of each pump. Install valves same size as connected piping. Comply with requirements for strainers specified in Section 15145 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties." Comply with requirements for valves specified in the following: 1. Section 15110 "Valves for Plumbing Piping." 2. Install pressure gauge and snubber at suction of each pump and pressure gauge and snubber at discharge of each pump. Install at integral pressure-gauge tappings where provided or install pressure-gauge connectors in suction and discharge piping around pumps. Comply with requirements for pressure gauges and snubbers specified in Section 15122 "Meters and Gages." 3.3 CONTROL CONNECTIONS A. Install control and electrical power wiring to field-mounted control devices. B. Connect control wiring between temperature controllers and devices. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. C. Tests and Inspections: Technical Specifications 15185 - 3 Inline, Domestic-Water Pumps 1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Inline, domestic-water pump will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust inline, domestic-water pumps to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. B. Adjust initial temperature set points. C. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated. END OF SECTION 15185 Technical Specifications 15185 -4 Inline, Domestic-Water Pumps SECTION 15186 HYDRONIC PUMPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Close-coupled, in-line centrifugal pumps. 2. Automatic condensate pump units. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. ECM: Electronically commutated motor. B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene diene monomer. C. FKM: Fluoroelastomer polymer. D. HI: Hydraulic Institute. E. NBR: Nitrile rubber or Buna-N. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of pump. B. Shop Drawings: For each pump. C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For each pump. 1. Include design calculations for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Plans, or BIM model, drawn to scale, showing the items described in this Section, and coordinated with all building trades. B. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for pumps, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. C. Field quality-control reports. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in "Quality Requirements," to design vibration isolation and seismic restraints. Technical Specifications 15186 - 1 Hydronic Pumps C. Seismic Performance: Pumps shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined in accordance with ASCE/SEI 7. 1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified." 2. Component Importance Factor: 1.0. 2.2 CLOSE-COUPLED, IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. 2. Grundfos Pumps Corporation. 3. ITT Corporation. 4. PACO Pumps; Grundfos Pumps Corporation, USA. 5. Patterson Pump Company; a Gorman-Rupp company. 6. Peerless Pump Company. 7. TACO Comfort Solutions, Inc. B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, centrifugal, overhung-impeller, close- coupled, in-line pump as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3; designed for installation with pump and motor shafts mounted horizontally or vertically. C. Pump Construction: 1. Casing: Radially split, cast iron, with threaded gauge tappings at inlet and outlet and threaded union-end connections. 2. Impeller: ASTM B584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft, and secured with a locking cap screw. For constant-speed pumps, trim impeller to match specified performance. 3. Pump Shaft Sleeve: Bronze. 4. Pump Stub Shaft: Type 304 stainless steel. 5. Seal: Mechanical seal consisting of carbon rotating ring against a ceramic seat held by a stainless steel spring, and rubber bellows and gasket. Include water slinger on shaft between motor and seal. 6. Seal Flushing: Flush, cool, and lubricate pump seal by directing pump discharge water to flow over the seal. D. Shaft Coupling: Rigid, axially-split spacer coupling to allow service of pump seal without disturbing pump or motor. E. Motor: Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." 1. Enclosure : Totally enclosed, fan cooled. 2. NEMA Premium Efficient motors as defined in NEMA MG 1. 3. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0. 4. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and connections specified in electrical Sections. 5. Variable-speed motor. Technical Specifications 15186 - 2 Hydronic Pumps 6. Provide integral pump motor variable-speed controller. F. Capacities and Characteristics: (see drawing schedules) 2.3 PUMP SPECIALTY FITTINGS A. Triple-Duty Valve: 1. Angle or straight pattern. 2. 175-psig pressure rating, ductile-iron body, pump-discharge fitting. 3. Valve with multi-turn stem and memory stop to allow valve to be returned to its original position after shutoff. 4. Brass valve disc with EPDM rubber seat. 5. Type 304 stainless steel valve stem. 6. Drain plug and bronze-fitted shutoff, balancing, and check valve features. 7. Brass gauge ports with integral check valve and orifice for flow measurement. 2.4 INTEGRAL PUMP MOTOR VARIABLE-SPEED CONTROLLERS A. Where specified or scheduled, provide pumps with an integral pump motor speed controller. 1. Motor: Operates as constant- or variable-speed pump with speed regulated by an integrated variable-speed drive. 2. Integrated Pump Controller: Supports direct communication with the building management system (BMS) with built-in support. 3. Commissioning and pump set up access to pump controls via the following: a. A web interface (data exchange). b. A user interface located on the face of speed controller to adjust modes and mode values. C. An electronic display that reads real-time mode set values, flow, head, speed, and power and that locks out unauthorized adjustment of pump. 4. Provide electronics with "Auto" as factory default but slope of the proportional curve will automatically match the required system curve, constant pressure control (delta-p/c), variable differential pressure control (delta-p/v), constant curve duty (uncontrolled pump), and rpm regulation. RPM (speed) regulation can be accomplished by the following: a. Manual (via user interface or HTML). b. Remote via 0 to 10 V dc. C. Data protocol communications with the BMS. 5. Pump Electronics: Standard with multiple digital inputs and one external digital output to be available for additional mechanical room control and pump status monitoring. 6. Controller: Mounted on or adjacent to the motor. Provide enclosure rated to UL Type 12. 7. Electronically Protected Pumps: Rated for continuous duty and with built-in startup circuit. Provide overcurrent, line surge and current limit protection, thermal monitoring, heat sink status and over temperature protection. 8. Pump capable of being monitored continuously via integrated Internet link. 9. Integrated pump controller system to have the following features: Technical Specifications 15186 - 3 Hydronic Pumps a. Controller software shall be capable of sensorless control in variable- volume systems without need for pump-mounted (internal/external) or remotely mounted differential pressure sensor. b. Integrated Pump Controller Sensorless Control: Operates under Quadratic Pressure Control (QPC) to ensure that head reduction with reducing flow conforms to quadratic control curve. C. Controller: 1) Minimum head of 40 percent of design duty head. 2) User-adjustable control mode settings and minimum/maximum head set points using built-in programming interface. d. Controller Integrated Control Software: 1) Capable of controlling pump performance for non-overloading power at every point of operation. 2) Capable of maintaining flow rate data. 2.5 ELECTRONICALLY COMMUTATED MOTOR (ECM) A. Provide pumps so they are specified or scheduled with ECM. 1. Synchronous, constant torque, ECM with permanent magnet rotor. Rotor magnets to be time-stable, nontoxic ceramic magnets (Sr-Fe). 2. Driven by a frequency converter with an integrated power factor correction filter. Conventional induction motors will not be acceptable. 3. Each motor with an integrated variable-frequency drive, tested as one unit by manufacturer. 4. Motor speed adjustable over full range from 0 rpm to maximum scheduled speed. 5. Variable motor speed to be controlled by a 0- to 10 V-dc or 4- to 20-mA input. 6. Integrated motor protection verified by UL to protect the pump against over- /undervoltage, overtemperature of motor and/or electronics, overcurrent, locked rotor, and dry run (no-load condition). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PUMP INSTALLATION A. Comply with HI 1.4. B. Install pumps to provide access for periodic maintenance including removing motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories. C. Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and weight of pumps is not supported by piping. D. Automatic Condensate Pump Units: Install units for collecting condensate and extend to open drain. E. Equipment Mounting: 1. Install base-mounted pumps on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases. Comply with requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in "Cast-in- Place Concrete." Technical Specifications 15186 - 4 Hydronic Pumps 2. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic-control devices specified in Section 15074 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Piping and Equipment." F. Equipment Mounting: Install in-line pumps with continuous-thread hanger rods and elastomeric hangers of size required to support weight of in-line pumps. 1. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 15074 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Piping and Equipment." 2. Comply with requirements for hangers and supports specified in Section 15060 "Hangers and Supports." 3.2 ALIGNMENT A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform alignment service. B. Perform alignment service. When required by manufacturer to maintain warranty coverage, engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform it. C. Comply with requirements in HI standards for alignment of pump and motor shaft. Add shims to the motor feet and bolt motor to base frame. Do not use grout between motor feet and base frame. D. Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers' written instructions. E. After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Completely fill baseplate with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout while metal blocks and shims or wedges are in place. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts. 3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS A. Where installing piping adjacent to pump, allow space for service and maintenance. B. Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are same size as piping connected to pumps. C. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles. D. Install triple-duty valve on discharge side of pumps. E. Install Y-type strainer and shutoff valve on suction side of pumps. 1. Use startup strainer for initial system startup. Install permanent strainer element before turnover of system to Owner. F. Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge sides of base-mounted pumps between pump casing and valves. G. Install pressure gauges on pump suction and discharge or at integral pressure-gauge tapping, or install single gauge with multiple-input selector valve. H. Install check valve on each condensate pump unit discharge unless unit has a factory- installed check valve. Technical Specifications 15186 - 5 Hydronic Pumps 3.4 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. Connect wiring in accordance with Division 16 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."Division 16 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." B. Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer, but not factory mounted, in accordance with NFPA 70 and NECA 1. C. Install nameplate for each electrical connection, indicating electrical equipment designation and circuit number feeding connection. 1. Nameplate shall be laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs, as specified in Division 16 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 2. Nameplate shall be laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs with a black background and engraved white letters at least 1/2 inch high. 3.5 CONTROL CONNECTIONS A. Install control and electrical power wiring to field-mounted control devices. B. Connect control wiring in accordance with Division 16 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables." 3.6 STARTUP SERVICE A. Perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Check piping connections for tightness. 3. Clean strainers on suction piping. Use startup strainer for initial startup. 4. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting: a. Verify bearing lubrication. b. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquid is free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do not operate until cause of trouble is determined and corrected. C. Verify that pump is rotating in correct direction. 5. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for operation. 6. Start motor. 7. Open discharge valve slowly. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Hydronic pumps will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 15186 Technical Specifications 15186 - 6 Hydronic Pumps SECTION 15189 WATER TREATMENT FOR CLOSED-LOOP HYDRONIC SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes water treatment for closed-loop hydronic systems. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Pretreatment and chemical-treatment equipment, showing tanks, maintenance space required, and piping connections to hydronic systems. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For components, from manufacturer. B. Water-Analysis Provider Qualifications: Verification of experience and capability of HVAC water-treatment service provider. C. Field quality-control reports. D. Water-Treatment Program: Written sequence of operation on an annual basis for the application equipment required to achieve water quality defined in "Performance Requirements" Article. E. Water Analysis: Illustrate water quality available at Project site. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. HVAC Water-Treatment Service Provider Qualifications: An experienced HVAC water- treatment service provider, capable of analyzing water qualities, installing water- treatment equipment, and applying water treatment as specified in this Section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide all hardware, chemicals, and other material necessary to maintain HVAC water quality in all systems, as indicated in this Specification. Water quality for hydronic systems shall minimize corrosion, scale buildup, and biological growth for optimum efficiency of hydronic equipment without creating a hazard to operating personnel or the environment. B. Base HVAC water treatment on quality of water available at Project site, hydronic system equipment material characteristics and functional performance characteristics, operating personnel capabilities, and requirements and guidelines of authorities having jurisdiction. C. Closed hydronic systems, including glycol heating shall have the following water qualities: Technical Specifications 15189 - 1 Water Treatment for Closed-Loop Hydronic Systems 1. pH: Maintain a value within 8.8 to 9.5. 2. Scale Control: Provide softened water for initial fill and makeup. 3. Dispersants: Provide sufficient dispersants to prevent sedimentation of fine particulate matter. 4. Microbiological Limits: a. Total Aerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 1000 organisms/mL. b. Total Anaerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 100 organisms/mL. C. Nitrate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of 100 organisms/mL. d. Sulfate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of 0 organisms/mL. e. Iron Bacteria: Maintain a maximum value of 0 organisms/mL. 2.2 MANUAL CHEMICAL-FEED EQUIPMENT A. Bypass Feeders: Provide steel feeders with corrosion-resistant exterior coating, minimum 3-1/2-inch fill opening in the top, and NPS 3/4 bottom inlet and top side outlet. Provide quarter turn or threaded fill cap with gasket seal and diaphragm to lock the top on the feeder when exposed to system pressure in the vessel. 1. Capacity: 5 gal.. 2. Minimum Working Pressure: 125 psig. B. Chemical Solution Tubing: Polyethylene tubing with compression fittings and joints except ASTM A269/A269M, Type 304 stainless steel for steam boiler injection assemblies. C. Injection Assembly: 1. Quill: Minimum NPS 1/2 with insertion length sufficient to discharge into at least 25 percent of pipe diameter. 2. Ball Valve: Three-piece, stainless steel; selected to fit quill. 3. Packing Gland: Mechanical seal on quill of sufficient length to allow quill removal during system operation. 4. Assembly Pressure/Temperature Rating: Minimum 600 psig at 200 deg F. 2.3 CHEMICALS A. Chemicals shall be as recommended by water-treatment system manufacturer, compatible with piping system components and connected equipment, and able to attain water quality specified in "Performance Requirements" Article. 2.4 INHIBITED PROPYLENE GLYCOL A. Inhibited Propylene Glycol: 1. Propylene glycol with inhibitor additive, to provide freeze protection for heat- transfer fluid and corrosion protection for carbon steel, brass, copper, stainless steel, and cast-iron piping and fittings. 2. Inhibitor creates a passive layer on all surfaces that contact propylene glycol to prevent corrosion and stabilizes fluid pH, to compensate for acids formed from glycol degradation. 3. pH value shall be maintained between 8.8 to 9.5. 4. Concentrated inhibited propylene glycol is to be 95.5 percent propylene glycol by weight and 4.5 percent performance additives. Technical Specifications 15189 - 2 Water Treatment for Closed-Loop Hydronic Systems 5. Concentrated inhibited propylene glycol is mixed with water in proper proportion specified by the manufacturer to provide 25% by volume for freeze protection of chilled ground water system. Premixed heat-transfer fluid may be used, or glycol/water mixture may be prepared at the time of installation. Use only deionized water for mixing. 6. Provide only propylene glycol that is specifically blended for HVAC application. Automotive-type antifreeze is unacceptable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WATER ANALYSIS A. Perform an analysis of supply water to determine quality of water available at Project site. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install chemical-application equipment on concrete bases, level and plumb. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units, so controls and devices that require servicing are accessible. Anchor chemical tanks and floor-mounting accessories to substrate. Install all chemical application equipment within a spill- containment area without floor drain. B. Install seismic restraints for equipment and floor-mounting accessories, and anchor to building structure. Comply with requirements in Section 15074 "Vibration and Seismic for Piping and Equipment" for seismic restraints. C. Install interconnecting control wiring for chemical-treatment controls and sensors. D. Mount sensors and injectors in piping circuits. E. Bypass Feeders: Install in closed hydronic systems, including glycol heating, and equip with the following: 1. Install bypass feeder in a bypass circuit around circulating pumps unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. 2. Install water meter in makeup-water supply. 3. Install a gate or full-port ball isolation valves on inlet, outlet, and drain below the feeder inlet. 4. Install a swing check on the inlet after the isolation valve. F. Install automatic fluid make-up equipment for glycol water system, and include the following: 1. Chemical solution tanks. 2. Chemical solution injection pumps. 3. Water meter in makeup supply to system. 4. Pressure switch to operate injection pump as necessary to maintain glycol system pressure. 3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirement are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance. Technical Specifications 15189 - 3 Water Treatment for Closed-Loop Hydronic Systems C. Make piping connections between HVAC water-treatment equipment and dissimilar- metal piping with dielectric fittings. Dielectric fittings are specified in Section 15181 "Hydronic Piping." D. Install shutoff valves on HVAC water-treatment equipment inlet and outlet. E. Comply with requirements in Section 15145 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for backflow preventers required in makeup-water connections to potable-water systems. 3.4 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. Confirm applicable electrical requirements in electrical Sections for connecting electrical equipment. B. Ground equipment in accordance with Division 16 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." C. Connect wiring in accordance with Division 16 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. D. Perform tests and inspections. E. Tests and Inspections: 1. Inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical connections. 2. Inspect piping and equipment to determine that systems and equipment have been cleaned, flushed, and filled with water, and are fully operational before introducing chemicals for water-treatment system. 3. Place HVAC water-treatment system into operation and calibrate controls during the preliminary phase of hydronic systems' startup procedures. 4. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is tested and satisfactory test results are achieved. 5. Test for leaks and defects. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 6. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, and replaced water piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed before it has been tested and approved. 7. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow test pressure to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects. 8. Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest piping until no leaks exist. Technical Specifications 15189 - 4 Water Treatment for Closed-Loop Hydronic Systems F. Equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. G. Prepare test and inspection reports. H. At six-week intervals following Substantial Completion, perform separate water analyses on hydronic systems to show that automatic chemical-feed systems are maintaining water quality within performance requirements specified in this Section. Submit written reports of water analysis, advising Owner of changes necessary to adhere to "Performance Requirements" Article. I. Comply with ASTM D3370 and with the following standards: 1. Silica: ASTM D859. 2. Acidity and Alkalinity: ASTM D1067. 3. Iron: ASTM D1068. 4. Water Hardness: ASTM D1126. 3.6 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Scope of Maintenance Service: Provide chemicals and service program to maintain water conditions required above, to inhibit corrosion and scale formation for hydronic piping and equipment. Services and chemicals shall be provided for a period of one year from date of Substantial Completion and shall include the following: 1. Initial water analysis and HVAC water-treatment recommendations. 2. Startup assistance for Contractor to flush the systems, clean with detergents, and initially fill systems with required chemical treatment prior to operation. 3. Periodic field service and consultation. 4. Customer report charts and log sheets. 5. Laboratory technical analysis. 6. Analyses and reports of all chemical items concerning safety and compliance with government regulations. END OF SECTION 15189 Technical Specifications 15189 - 5 Water Treatment for Closed-Loop Hydronic Systems SECTION 15252 FABRICATED SLIDE GATES PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 References A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American Water Works Association (AWWA): C513, Open-Channel, Fabricated- Metal Slide Gates. 2. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A167, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium- Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. b. A193, Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service. c. A240, Standard Specification for Heat-Resisting Chromium and Chromium- Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels. d. A276, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Bars and Shapes. e. Standard Structural Shapes. 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum). 1.2 Submittals A. Action Submittals 1. Shop Drawings: a. Make, model, weight of each equipment assembly. b. Manufacturer's catalog information, descriptive literature, specifications, and identification of materials of construction. c. Detailed structural drawings showing the equipment fabrications and interface with other items. Include dimensions, size, and locations of connections to other work, and weights of associated equipment associated therewith. d. Gate operator, gearbox, and stem sizing calculations for each gate and service condition. e. Gate opening and closing thrust forces that will be transmitted to the support structure with operator at extreme positions and load. B. Informational Submittals Technical Specifications 15252-1 Fabricated Slide Gates 1. Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions. 2. Manufacturer's written/printed installation instructions. 3. Routine maintenance requirements. 4. Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation. 1.3 System Description A. Coordinate such that electric motor operators are fully assembled and tested at the factory. 1.4 Extra Materials A. Furnish, tag, and box for shipment and storage the following spare parts and special tools: Item Quantity Stem collars for all gate stems One of each different size Bronze lift nuts One of each different size Special tools required to maintain or One complete set dismantle PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 Materials A. Stainless Steel: 1. Plate, Sheet, and Strip: ASTM A240, Type 304L. 2. Bars and Shapes: ASTM A276, Type 304L. 2.2 Performance Requirements A. Leakage shall not exceed 0.1 gallon per minute per foot of gate periphery under either seating or unseating head conditions. B. Shim and adjust gate seals as necessary to meet the specified leakage requirements 2.3 Slide Gates A. Rising stem type for mounting in channels with guide slot and invert embedded in concrete. B. Guide Frames: 1. Stainless steel. 2. Vertical Guides: Design for maximum rigidity and extend in one continuous piece from the gate invert to form posts for support of gate operators of self-contained Technical Specifications 15252-2 Fabricated Slide Gates gates. When guides extended above the operating floor, they shall be sufficiently strong so that no further reinforcements are required. 3. Join vertical guide frames and invert with factory welded corners. 4. Size guide slot to provide a minimum disc engagement of 1 inch on each side. C. Disc: 1. Disc Plate (Sliding Member): One-piece stainless steel plate. Reinforce as required so that the disc will not deflect more than 1/360 of the gate span, when the upstream liquid depth (seating head side) is as shown on the schedule and the downstream liquid depth is zero. D. Operator Support Yoke: 1. For self-contained gate operators, attached to the vertical extensions of the guide frames. 2. Constructed from at least two stainless steel channels, or two other suitable shapes, and bolt in place to provide a rigid assembly. 3. Maximum Deflection: Not to exceed 1/4 inch under maximum operator loading. E. Stems: 1. 2.5-inch minimum diameter, ASTM A276, Type 316 stainless steel. 2. Threads: Acme type with RMS surface roughness of 63 microinches or less on the flanks for manually operated gates and 32 microinches or less on the flanks for electrically operated gates. Extend threaded portion of stem 2 inches above operator when gate is in CLOSED position. 3. Ratio of the unsupported stem length to the radius of gyration, both in inches, shall not exceed 200. 4. Stems to withstand in compression, without damage, the thrust equal to at least 2-1/2 times the rated output of the hoisting mechanism, with a 40-pound effort applied to the handwheel or crank. 5. Design electric motor-driven floor stands to withstand at least 1.25 times the output thrust of the motor in the stalled condition. 6. Adjustable stop collar for the CLOSED position. 7. Slide gates having a width greater than twice the height or width greater than 84 inches shall have dual stems. F. Stem Covers: 1. Transparent plastic, vented pipe stem cover and cap. 2. Provide with OPEN/CLOSED designators with 1-inch graduations on clear mylar pressure sensitive, adhesive tape, suitable for outdoor application. Technical Specifications 15252-3 Fabricated Slide Gates G. Manufacturers, or approved equal: 1. Whipps, Inc. 2. HydroGate Corp. 3. Rodney Hunt Co. 4. Craft Machine Works, Inc. H. Operator Requirements: 1. Maximum manual crank effort to operate gate shall not exceed 40 pounds. 2. Lift Nut: Internally threaded, solid bronze with Acme threads. 3. Furnish ball thrust or tapered roller bearings above and below the lift nut to support both opening and closing thrusts. a. Grease lubrication fittings for bearings. b. Input pinions with needle or ball bearings. c. Mechanical seals at all housing penetrations. 2.4 Appurtenances A. Lifting Lugs: Furnish suitably attached for equipment assemblies and components weighing over 100 pounds. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 Installation A. In accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. B. Disassemble factory assembled gate components before installation. C. Field mount operators after installing gates. D. Brace thimbles internally during concrete placement. E. Accurately place anchor bolts using templates furnished by the manufacturer and as specified in Section 05500 — Miscellaneous Metalwork. F. Lubricate stems before operating. 3.2 Field Quality Control A. Functional Tests: Conduct on each slide gate. B. Performance Test: Conduct on each slide gate. C. Perform under actual or approved simulated operating conditions. Technical Specifications 15252-4 Fabricated Slide Gates D. Test for a continuous 3-hour period without malfunction. E. Adjust, realign, or modify units and retest if necessary. 3.3 Manufacturer's Services A. Provide manufacturer's representative at Site for installation assistance, inspection and certification of proper installation, equipment testing, startup assistance, and training of Owner's personnel for specified component, subsystem, equipment, or system. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 15252-5 Fabricated Slide Gates SECTION 15410 PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Faucets for lavatories, and sinks. 2. Toilet seats. 3. Protective shielding guards. 4. Fixture supports. 5. Water closets. 6. Lavatories. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic. B. Accessible Fixture: Plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by people with disabilities. C. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic. D. PMMA: Polymethyl methacrylate (acrylic) plastic. E. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. F. Solid Surface: Nonporous, homogeneous, cast-polymer-plastic material with heat-, impact-, scratch-, and stain-resistance qualities. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring. C. Operation and maintenance data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; for plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures. Technical Specifications 15410 - 1 Plumbing Fixtures D. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water. E. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are compatible. F. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for plumbing fixtures: 1. Enameled, Cast-Iron Fixtures: ASME Al 12.19.1 M. 2. Plastic Shower Enclosures: ANSI Z124.2. 3. Porcelain-Enameled, Formed-Steel Fixtures: ASME Al 12.19.4M. 4. Slip-Resistant Bathing Surfaces: ASTM F 462. 5. Solid-Surface-Material Lavatories and Sinks: ANSI/ICPA SS-1. 6. Stainless-Steel Residential Sinks: ASME Al 12.19.3. 7. Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME Al 12.19.2M. 8. Water-Closet, Flushometer Tank Trim: ASSE 1037. G. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for lavatory and sink faucets: 1. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Side Spray: ASME Al 12.18.3M. 2. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Hose-Thread Outlet: ASME Al 12.18.3M. 3. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1. 4. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011. 5. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7. 6. Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001. 7. NSF Potable-Water Materials: NSF 61. 8. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. 9. Supply Fittings: ASME A112.18.1. 10. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME Al 12.18.2. H. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for bathtub, bathtub/shower, and shower faucets: 1. Combination, Pressure-Equalizing and Thermostatic-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASSE 1016. 2. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1. 3. High-Temperature-Limit Controls for Thermal-Shock-Preventing Devices: ASTM F 445. 4. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7. 5. Manual-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444. 6. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. 7. Pressure-Equalizing-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444 and ASSE 1016. 8. Thermostatic-Control Antiscald Faucets: ASTM F 444 and ASSE 1016. I. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous fittings: 1. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001. 2. Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME Al 12.18.1. Technical Specifications 15410 - 2 Plumbing Fixtures 3. Manual-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037. 4. Plastic Tubular Fittings: ASTM F 409. 5. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME Al 12.18.2. J. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous components: 1. Flexible Water Connectors: ASME Al 12.18.6. 2. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7. 3. Off-Floor Fixture Supports: ASME Al 12.6.1 M. 4. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. 5. Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5. 6. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LAVATORY FAUCETS A. Lavatory Faucets, (Low Flow) 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on drawings. 2.2 SINK FAUCETS A. Sink Faucets, (Low Flow) 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated on drawings. 2.3 TOILET SEATS A. Toilet Seats, 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated on drawings. 2.4 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS A. Protective Shielding Pipe Covers, 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Plumberex Specialty Products Inc. b. TRUEBRO, Inc. C. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Tubular Brass Plumbing Products Operation. Technical Specifications 15410 - 3 Plumbing Fixtures 2.5 WATER CLOSETS A. Water Closets 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated on drawings. 2.6 LAVATORIES A. Lavatories, 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated on drawings. 2. Provide Thermostatic mixing valve for each Lavatory PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Assemble plumbing fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers' written instructions. B. Install back-outlet, wall-mounting fixtures onto waste fitting seals and attach to supports. C. Install floor-mounting fixtures on closet flanges or other attachments to piping or building substrate. D. Install wall-mounting fixtures with tubular waste piping attached to supports. E. Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings. F. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation. G. Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected to sanitary drainage system. H. Install tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be indirectly connected to drainage system. I. Install tanks for accessible, tank-type water closets with lever handle mounted on wide side of compartment. J. Install toilet seats on water closets. K. Install faucet-spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required. L. Install water-supply flow-control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies at stop valves. Technical Specifications 15410 - 4 Plumbing Fixtures M. Install faucet flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required. N. Install shower flow-control fittings with specified maximum flow rates in shower arms. O. Install traps on fixture outlets. 1. Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps. 2. Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes, unless otherwise indicated. P. Install disposer in outlet of each sink indicated to have disposer. Install switch where indicated or in wall adjacent to sink if location is not indicated. Q. Install dishwasher air-gap fitting at each sink indicated to have dishwasher. Install in sink deck. Connect inlet hose to dishwasher and outlet hose to disposer. R. Install escutcheons at piping wall and ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Escutcheons are specified in Section 15050 "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods." S. Set bathtubs and showers in leveling bed of cement grout. Grout is specified in Section 15050 "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods." T. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and countertops using sanitary-type, one- part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Sealants are specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures. C. Ground equipment according to Division 16 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." D. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Verify that installed plumbing fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where installed. B. Check that plumbing fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified components. C. Inspect installed plumbing fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components. Technical Specifications 15410 - 5 Plumbing Fixtures D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate properly. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings. B. Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner. END OF SECTION 15410 Technical Specifications 15410 - 6 Plumbing Fixtures SECTION 15487 HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes gasketed-plate heat exchangers. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints and for designing bases. 2. Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. C. Delegated-Design Submittal: Details and design calculations for seismic restraints for heat exchangers. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Equipment room plan or BIM model, drawn to scale, showing the items described in this Section, and coordinated with all building trades. B. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for heat exchanger, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. C. Product Certificates: For each type of shell-and-tube heat exchanger. Documentation that shell-and-tube heat exchangers comply with "TEMA Standards." D. Source quality-control reports. E. Field quality-control reports. F. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's warranty. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of heat exchangers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Periods: From date of Substantial Completion. a. Shell-and-Tube Heat Exchangers: 1) Tube Coil: One year(s). Technical Specifications 15487 - 1 Heat Exchangers for HVAC 2) Other Components: One year(s). b. Plate Heat Exchangers: 1) Gasketed-Plate Type; One year(s). PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section for "Quality Requirements," to design seismic restraints for heat exchangers. B. Seismic Performance: Heat exchangers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SE17. Refer to structural drawings and requirements 1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event." 2. Component Importance Factor is 1.0. 2.2 GASKETED-PLATE HEAT EXCHANGERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of, but not limited to the following: 1. Alfa Laval Inc. 2. API Heat Transfer Inc. 3. Armstrong Fluid Technology. 4. Bell & Gossett; a Xylem brand. 5. Flo Fab Inc. 6. TACO Comfort Solutions, Inc. B. Configuration: Freestanding assembly, consisting of frame support, top and bottom carrying and guide bars, fixed and movable end plates, tie rods, individually removable plates, and one-piece gaskets. Floor-mounted heat exchangers must have integral legs with mounting feet. C. Construction: Fabricate and label heat exchangers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," Division 1. D. Frame: 1. Capacity to accommodate 28 percent additional plates. 2. Painted carbon steel with provisions for anchoring to support. E. Top and Bottom Carrying and Guide Bars: Painted carbon steel, aluminum, or stainless steel. 1. Fabricate attachment of heat-exchanger support bars and guide bars with reinforcement strong enough to resist heat-exchanger movement during seismic event when heat-exchanger support bars and guide bars are anchored to building structure. F. End-Plate Material: Painted carbon steel. Technical Specifications 15487 - 2 Heat Exchangers for HVAC G. Tie Rods and Nuts: Steel or stainless steel. H. Plate Material: Double Wall, 0.8mm thick before stamping; 316 Alloy stainless steel. I. Gasket Materials: NBRP Clip-on. J. Piping Connections: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with heat-exchanger shell. Attach tappings to shell before testing and labeling. 1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends in accordance with ASME B1.20.1. 2. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends in accordance with ASME B16.5 for steel and stainless steel flanges. K. Enclose plates in solid aluminum or stainless steel removable shroud. L. Capacities and Characteristics: Refer to drawing schedule information for performance requirements 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Pressure-Relief Valves: Bronze„ ASME rated and stamped. 1. Pressure-relief valve setting: 50 psig. 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory Tests: Test and inspect heat exchangers in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," Division 1. Affix ASME International label. B. Hydrostatically test heat exchangers to minimum of one and one-half times pressure rating before shipment. C. Heat exchangers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF HEAT EXCHANGER, GENERAL A. Equipment Mounting: 1. Install floor-mounted heat exchangers on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases. Install all heat exchangers level and plumb in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Install floor-mounted and wall-hung steam heat exchangers at sufficient height, using sufficient length supports, to achieve required steam and condensate pipe pitch. Comply with requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in "Cast-in-Place Concrete." 2. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic control devices specified in Section 15074 "Vibration and Seismic for Piping and Equipment." 3.2 INSTALLATION OF GASKETED-PLATE HEAT EXCHANGER A. Install floor-mounted gasketed-plate heat exchangers on cast-in-place concrete equipment base, and fasten legs to base. Technical Specifications 15487 - 3 Heat Exchangers for HVAC B. Install metal shroud over installed gasketed-plate heat exchanger in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 15181 "Hydronic Piping" and Section 15182 "Hydronic Piping Specialties." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for tube removal, service, and maintenance. C. Install piping adjacent to heat exchangers to allow space for service and maintenance of heat exchangers. Arrange piping for easy removal of heat exchangers. D. Install shutoff valves at heat-exchanger inlet and outlet connections. E. Install pressure-relief valves on heat-exchanger shells where a connection has been provided on shell. When no shell pressure-relief valve connection has been provided, install pressure-relief valve on shell outlet piping before any isolation valves. F. Install pressure-relief valves on heat-exchanger tube outlet piping before any isolation valves. G. Pipe pressure-relief valves, full size of valve connection, to floor drain. H. Install vacuum breaker at heat-exchanger steam inlet connection. I. Install hose end valve to drain shell. J. Install thermometer on each heat-exchanger fluid inlet and outlet piping. Comply with requirements for thermometers specified in Section 15122 "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping." K. Install pressure gauges on each heat-exchanger fluid inlet and outlet piping. Comply with requirements for pressure gauges specified in Section 15122 "Meters and Gauges for HVAC Piping." 3.4 CLEANING A. After completing system installation, including outlet fitting and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris, and repair damaged finishes. B. Isolate heat exchangers from piping before flushing piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blind flanges in flanged joints to isolate equipment. C. Flush heat-exchanger piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace strainer screens before reopening flow to heat exchangers. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency, Owner: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. Technical Specifications 15487 -4 Heat Exchangers for HVAC B. Testing Agency, Contractor: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. C. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative: D. Tests and Inspections: 1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. E. Heat exchanger will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. F. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain heat exchangers. END OF SECTION 15487 Technical Specifications 15487 - 5 Heat Exchangers for HVAC SECTION 15626 WATER-COOLED, ROTARY-SCREW WATER CHILLERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes packaged, water-cooled, multiple-compressor chillers. B. Related Requirements: 1. See controls for "Refrigerant Detection and Alarm" for refrigerant monitors, alarms, supplemental breathing apparatus, and ventilation equipment interlocks. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. COP: Coefficient of performance. The ratio of the rate of heat removal to the rate of energy input using consistent units for any given set of rating conditions. B. DDC: Direct digital control. C. EER: Energy-efficiency ratio. The ratio of the cooling capacity given in terms of Btu/h to the total power input given in terms of watts at any given set of rating conditions. D. IPLV: Integrated part-load value. A single-number part-load efficiency figure of merit calculated per the method defined by AHRI 550/590 and referenced to AHRI standard rating conditions. E. kVAr: Kilovolt amperes reactive. F. kW/Ton: The ratio of total power input of the chiller in kilowatts to the net refrigerating capacity in tons at any given set of rating conditions. G. NPLV: Nonstandard part-load value. A single-number part-load efficiency figure of merit calculated per the method defined by AHRI 550/590 and intended for operating conditions other than AHRI standard rating conditions. H. RTD: Resistance temperature detector. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, drawn to scale, and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved. Technical Specifications 15626 - 1 Water-Cooled, Rotary-Screw Water Chillers B. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for chillers, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Submit full seismic design by professional engineer according to the seismic design requirements indicated in Section 15074 "Vibration and Seismic for Piping and Equipment" and as detailed on Structural drawings for Seismic conditions. C. Source quality-control reports. D. Field Quality-Control: Startup service reports. E. Sample warranty. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. AHRI Certification: Certify chiller according to AHRI 550 certification program. B. AHRI Rating: Rate chiller performance according to requirements in AHRI 550/590. C. ASHRAE Compliance: 1. ASHRAE 15 for safety code for mechanical refrigeration. 2. ASHRAE 147 for refrigerant leaks, recovery, and handling and storage requirements. D. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1. E. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label chiller to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, and include an ASME U-stamp and nameplate certifying compliance. F. Comply with NFPA 70. G. Comply with requirements of UL and UL Canada and include label by a qualified testing agency showing compliance. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of chillers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Chillers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7 and as noted on the structural drawings and as indicated in Section 15074 "Vibration and Seismic for Piping and Equipment" and Structural drawings. 1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event." Technical Specifications 15626 - 2 Water-Cooled, Rotary-Screw Water Chillers 2. Provide full seismic calculation package from licensed engineer. Seismic calculations to include all information for anchorage to provided housekeeping pad system. B. Condenser-Fluid Temperature Performance: 1. Startup Condenser-Fluid Temperature: Chiller shall be capable of starting with an entering condenser-fluid temperature of 60 deg F and providing stable operation until the system temperature is elevated to the minimum operating entering condenser-fluid temperature. 2. Minimum Operating Condenser-Fluid Temperature: Chiller shall be capable of continuous operation over the entire capacity range indicated with an entering condenser-fluid temperature of 65 deg F. 3. Make factory modifications to standard chiller design if necessary to comply with performance indicated. C. Site Altitude: Chiller shall be suitable for altitude in which installed without affecting performance indicated. Make adjustments to affected chiller components to account for site altitude. D. Performance Tolerance: Comply with the following in lieu of AHRI 550/590: 1. Allowable Capacity Tolerance: zero percent. 2. Allowable IPLV/NPLV Performance Tolerance: zero percent. 2.2 PACKAGED, WATER-COOLED, MULTIPLE-COMPRESSOR CHILLERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Trane 2. Carrier Corporation. 3. Daikin Applied. 4. YORK; a Johnson Controls company. B. Description: Factory-assembled and run-tested chiller with compressor(s), compressor motors and motor controllers, evaporator, condenser where indicated, electrical power, controls, and indicated accessories. C. Fabricate chiller mounting base with reinforcement strong enough to resist chiller movement during a seismic Category D event when chiller is anchored to field support structure. (Refer to Structural and Section 15074) D. Compressors: 1. Description: Positive displacement, hermetically sealed. 2. Casing: Cast iron, precision machined for minimum clearance about periphery of rotors. 3. Rotors: Manufacturer's standard one- or two-rotor design. E. Service: Easily accessible for inspection and service. Technical Specifications 15626 - 3 Water-Cooled, Rotary-Screw Water Chillers F. Capacity Control: On-off compressor cycling and modulating slide-valve assembly or port unloaders combined with hot-gas bypass, if necessary, to achieve performance indicated. 1. Maintain stable operation throughout range of operation. Configure to achieve most energy-efficient operation possible. 2. Operating Range: From 100 to 10 percent of design capacity. 3. Condenser-Fluid Unloading Requirements over Operating Range: Constant- design, entering condenser-fluid temperature. 4. Chiller shall be capable of unloading to 25% of individual compressor full load capacity and sustain operation on a single compressor. G. Oil Lubrication System: Consisting of pump if required, filtration, heater, cooler, factory- wired power connection, and controls. 1. Provide lubrication to bearings, gears, and other rotating surfaces at all operating, startup, shutdown, and standby conditions including power failure. 2. Thermostatically controlled oil heater properly sized to remove refrigerant from oil. 3. Factory-installed and pressure-tested piping with isolation valves and accessories. 4. Oil compatible with refrigerant and chiller components. 5. Positive visual indication of oil level. H. Vibration Control: 1. Vibration Balance: Balance chiller compressor and drive assembly to provide a precision balance that is free of noticeable vibration over the entire operating range. a. Overspeed Test: 25 percent above design operating speed. 2. Isolation: Mount individual compressors on vibration isolators. I. Compressor Motors: 1. Hermetically sealed and cooled by refrigerant suction gas. 2. High-torque, induction type with inherent thermal-overload protection on each phase. J. Refrigerant Circuits: 1. Refrigerant Type: R-134a or any HFC. Classified as Safety Group Al according to ASHRAE 34. 2. Refrigerant Compatibility: Chiller parts exposed to refrigerants shall be fully compatible with refrigerants, and pressure components shall be rated for refrigerant pressures. 3. Refrigerant Circuit: Each shall include a thermal- or electronic-expansion valve, refrigerant charging connections, a hot-gas muffler, compressor suction and discharge shutoff valves, a liquid-line shutoff valve, a replaceable-core filter- dryer, a sight glass with moisture indicator, a liquid-line solenoid valve, and an insulated suction line. 4. Pressure Relief Device: Technical Specifications 15626 - 4 Water-Cooled, Rotary-Screw Water Chillers a. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 15 and in applicable portions of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. b. ASME-rated, spring-loaded pressure relief valve; single- or multiple- reseating type. K. Evaporator: 1. Description: Shell-and-tube design. a. Direct-expansion type with fluid flowing through the shell, and refrigerant flowing through the tubes within the shell. b. Flooded type with fluid flowing through tubes and refrigerant flowing around tubes within the shell. 2. Code Compliance: Tested and stamped according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. 3. Shell Material: Carbon steel. 4. Shell Heads: Removable carbon-steel heads with multipass baffles, and located at each end of the tube bundle. 5. Fluid Nozzles: Terminated with mechanical-coupling or flanged end connections for connection to field piping. 6. Tube Construction: Individually replaceable copper tubes with enhanced fin design, expanded into tube sheets. L. Condenser: 1. Shell and tube, or without integral condenser; as indicated. 2. Shell and Tube: a. Description: Shell-and-tube design with refrigerant flowing through shell, and fluid flowing through tubes within shell. b. Provides positive subcooling of liquid refrigerant. C. Code Compliance: Tested and stamped according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. d. Shell Material: Carbon steel. e. Water Boxes: Removable, of carbon-steel construction, located at each end of the tube bundle with fluid nozzles terminated with mechanical- coupling end connections for connection to field piping. f. Tube Construction: Individually replaceable copper tubes with enhanced fin design, expanded into tube sheets. g. Provide each condenser with a pressure relief device, purge cock, and liquid-line shutoff valve. 3. Provide chiller without an integral condenser and design chiller for field connection to remote condenser. Coordinate requirements with Section 236313 "Air-Cooled Refrigerant Condensers." M. Electrical Power: 1. Factory-installed and -wired switches, motor controllers, transformers, and other electrical devices necessary shall provide a single-point, field-power connection to chiller. Technical Specifications 15626 - 5 Water-Cooled, Rotary-Screw Water Chillers 2. House in a unit-mounted, NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure with hinged access door with lock and key or padlock and key. 3. Wiring shall be numbered and color-coded to match wiring diagram. 4. Install factory wiring outside of an enclosure in a raceway. 5. Field-power interface shall be to wire lugs NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, nonfused disconnect switch and UL 489, instantaneous-trip circuit breaker with lockable handle. a. Disconnect means shall be interlocked with door operation. b. Minimum withstand rating shall be as required by electrical power distribution system, but not less than 5,000 A. 6. Provide branch power circuit to each motor and to controls with one of the following disconnecting means: a. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, fusible switch with rejection-type fuse clips rated for fuses. Select and size fuses to provide Type 2 protection according to IEC 60947-4-1. b. UL 489, motor-circuit protector (circuit breaker) with field-adjustable, short- circuit-trip set point. 7. Provide each motor with overcurrent protection. 8. Overload relay sized according to UL 1995 or an integral component of chiller control microprocessor. 9. Phase-Failure and Undervoltage Relays: Solid-state sensing with adjustable settings. 10. Control Transformer: Unit-mounted transformer with primary and secondary fuses and sized with enough capacity to operate electrical load plus spare capacity. 11. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable time-delay relays. 12. For chiller electrical power supply, indicate the following: a. Current and phase to phase for all three phases. b. Voltage, phase to phase, and phase to neutral for all three phases. C. Three-phase real power (kilowatts). d. Three-phase reactive power (kVAr). e. Power factor. f. Running log of total power versus time (kilowatt-hours). g. Fault log, with time and date of each. N. Compressor Motor Controllers: 1. Star-Delta, Reduced-Voltage Controller: NEMA ICS 2, closed or open transition, or solid state. O. Controls: 1. Standalone and microprocessor based. 2. Enclosure: Share enclosure with electrical-power devices or provide a separate enclosure of matching construction. 3. Operator Interface: Multiple-character digital or graphic display with dynamic update of information and with keypad or touch-sensitive display located on front of control enclosure. In either imperial or metric units, display the following information: Technical Specifications 15626 - 6 Water-Cooled, Rotary-Screw Water Chillers a. Date and time. b. Operating or alarm status. C. Fault history with not less than last 10 faults displayed. d. Set points of controllable parameters. e. Trend data. f. Operating hours. g. Number of chiller starts. h. Outdoor-air temperature or space temperature if required for chilled-water reset. i. Temperature and pressure of operating set points. j. Entering- and leaving-fluid temperatures of evaporator and condenser. k. Difference in fluid temperatures of evaporator and condenser. I. Refrigerant pressures in evaporator and condenser. M. Refrigerant saturation temperature in evaporator and condenser. n. No cooling load condition. o. Elapsed time meter (compressor run status). p. Pump status. q. Antirecycling timer status. r. Percent of maximum motor amperage. S. Current-limit set point. t. Number of compressor starts. U. Compressor refrigerant suction and discharge temperature. V. Oil temperature. W. Oil discharge pressure. X. Phase current. y. Percent of motor rated load amperes. Z. Phase voltage. 4. Control Functions: a. Manual or automatic startup and shutdown time schedule. b. Entering and leaving chilled-water temperatures, control set points, and motor load limits. Chilled-water leaving temperature shall be reset based on return-water temperature. C. Current limit and demand limit. d. Condenser-fluid temperature. e. External chiller emergency stop. f. Antirecycling timer. g. Automatic lead-lag switching. h. Variable evaporator flow. i. Thermal storage. 5. Manually Reset Safety Controls: The following conditions shall shut down chiller and require manual reset: a. Low evaporator pressure or high condenser pressure. b. Low chilled-water temperature. C. Refrigerant high pressure. d. High or low oil pressure. e. High oil temperature. f. Loss of chilled-water flow. g. Loss of condenser-fluid flow. h. Control device failure. Technical Specifications 15626 - 7 Water-Cooled, Rotary-Screw Water Chillers 6. Trending: Capability to trend analog data of up to five parameters simultaneously over an adjustable period and frequency of polling. 7. Security Access: Provide electronic security access to controls through identification and password with at least three levels of access: view only; view and operate; and view, operate, and service. 8. Control Authority: At least four conditions: Off, local manual control at chiller, local automatic control at chiller, and automatic control through a remote source. 9. Interface with DDC System for HVAC: Factory-installed hardware and software to enable the DDC system for HVAC to monitor, control, and display chiller status and alarms. a. Hardwired Points: 1) Monitoring: On-off status, common trouble alarm, electrical power demand (kilowatts), electrical power consumption (kilowatt-hours). 2) Control: On-off operation, chilled-water, discharge temperature set- point adjustment. b. ASHRAE 135 (BACnet) or Modbus PCP/IP (preferred). Coordinate with controls contractor prior to ordering. Communication interface with the DDC system for HVAC shall enable the DDC system for HVAC operator to remotely control and monitor the chiller from an operator workstation. Control features and monitoring points displayed locally at chiller control panel shall be available through the DDC system for HVAC. P. Insulation: Closed-cell, flexible elastomeric, thermal insulation complying with ASTM C534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials. Q. Finish: Paint chiller, using manufacturer's standard procedures. R. Accessories: 1. Factory-furnished, chilled- and condenser-water flow switches for field installation. 2. Individual compressor suction and discharge pressure gages with shutoff valves for each refrigerant circuit. 3. Factory-furnished spring isolators for field installation. S. Capacities and Characteristics: 1. Refer to equipment schedules for equipment capacity and performance requirements. 2. Number of Refrigerant Circuits: Two. 3. Compressors: a. Number of Compressors: 2. 4. Noise Rating: 90 sound power level when measured according to AHRI 575. Provide factory-installed sound treatment if necessary to achieve the performance indicated. Technical Specifications 15626 - 8 Water-Cooled, Rotary-Screw Water Chillers 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform functional tests of chillers before shipping. B. Factory performance test water-cooled chillers, before shipping, according to AHRI 550/590. 1. Test the following conditions: a. Design conditions indicated. b. Reduction in capacity from design to minimum load in steps of 10 with condenser fluid at design conditions. C. Reduction in capacity from design to minimum load in steps of 10 with varying entering condenser-fluid temperature from design to minimum conditions in 5 deg F increments. d. At 10 point(s) of varying part-load performance to be selected by Owner at time of test. 2. Prepare test report indicating test procedures, instrumentation, test conditions, and results. Submit copy of results within one week of test date. C. Factory sound test water-cooled chillers, before shipping, according to AHRI 575. 1. Test the following conditions: a. Design conditions indicated. b. Chiller operating at calculated worst-case sound condition. C. At five point(s) of varying part-load performance to be selected by Owner at time of test. 2. Prepare test report indicating test procedures, instrumentation, test conditions, and results. Submit copy of results within one week of test date. D. Factory test and inspect evaporator and condenser according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section Vill, Division 1. E. For chillers located indoors, rate sound power level according to AHRI 575. F. For chillers located outdoors, rate sound power level according to AHRI 370. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CHILLER INSTALLATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. B. Coordinate sizes, locations, and anchoring attachments of structural-steel support structures. C. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with actual equipment provided. D. Install chillers on support structure indicated. Technical Specifications 15626 - 9 Water-Cooled, Rotary-Screw Water Chillers E. Equipment Mounting: 1. Install chillers on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases. Comply with requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in "Cast-in-Place Concrete." specifications 2. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic control devices specified in Section 15074 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Equipment." F. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance. G. Charge chiller with refrigerant and fill with oil if not factory installed. H. Install separate devices furnished by manufacturer and not factory installed. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Section 15181 "Hydronic Piping," Section 15182 "Hydronic Piping Specialties," Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to chiller to allow service and maintenance. C. Evaporator Fluid Connections: Connect to evaporator inlet with shutoff valve, strainer, flexible connector, thermometer, and plugged tee with pressure gage. Connect to evaporator outlet with shutoff valve, balancing valve, flexible connector, flow switch, thermometer, plugged tee with shutoff valve and pressure gage, flow meter, and drain connection with valve. Make connections to chiller with a flange or mechanical coupling. D. Condenser Fluid Connections: Connect to condenser inlet with shutoff valve, strainer, flexible connector, thermometer, and plugged tee with pressure gage. Connect to condenser outlet with shutoff valve, balancing valve, flexible connector, flow switch, thermometer, plugged tee with shutoff valve and pressure gage, flow meter, and drain connection with valve. Make connections to chiller with a flange or mechanical coupling. E. Refrigerant Pressure Relief Device Connections: For chillers installed indoors, extend vent piping to the outdoors without valves or restrictions. Comply with ASHRAE 15. Connect vent to chiller pressure relief device with flexible connector and dirt leg with drain valve. F. Connect each chiller drain connection with a union and drain pipe, and extend pipe, full size of connection, to floor drain. Provide a shutoff valve at each connection. 3.3 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Verify that refrigerant charge is sufficient and chiller has been leak tested. 3. Verify that pumps are installed and functional. 4. Verify that thermometers and gages are installed. 5. Operate chiller for run-in period. 6. Check bearing lubrication and oil levels. Technical Specifications 15626 - 10 Water-Cooled, Rotary-Screw Water Chillers 7. For chillers installed indoors, verify that refrigerant pressure relief device is vented outdoors. 8. Verify proper motor rotation. 9. Verify static deflection of vibration isolators, including deflection during chiller startup and shutdown. 10. Verify and record performance of fluid flow and low-temperature interlocks for evaporator and condenser. 11. Verify and record performance of chiller protection devices. 12. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment. B. Inspect field-assembled components, equipment installation, and piping and electrical connections for proper assembly, installation, and connection. C. Prepare test and inspection startup reports. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain chillers. Video record the training sessions. END OF SECTION 15626 Technical Specifications 15626 - 11 Water-Cooled, Rotary-Screw Water Chillers SECTION 15736 PACKAGED AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS (HEAT PUMP, GROUND MOUNTED) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes packaged, large-capacity, rooftop air conditioning units (RTUs) with the following components: 1. Casings. 2. Fans, drives, and motors. 3. Coils. 4. Refrigerant circuit components. 5. Air filtration. 6. Gas furnaces. 7. Dampers. 8. Electrical power connections. 9. Controls. 10. Roof curbs. 11. Accessories. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of RTU. B. Shop Drawings: For each packaged, large-capacity, rooftop air-conditioning units. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting and attachment details. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For RTU supports indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Include design calculations for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans and other details, or BIM model, drawn to scale, showing the items described in this Section, and coordinated with all building trades. B. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's warranty. C. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for RTUs, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. Technical Specifications 15736 - 1 Packaged Rooftop Air-Conditioning Units D. Product Certificates: Submit certification that specified equipment will withstand wind forces identified in "Performance Requirements" Article and in Section 15074 "Vibration and Seismic for Piping and Equipment." E. Source quality-control reports. F. System startup reports. G. Field quality-control reports. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For RTUs to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of outdoor, semi- custom, air-handling unit that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 1 year(s) from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Warranty Period for Heat Exchangers: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than five years from date of Substantial Completion PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application. B. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A for design, fabrication, and installation of RTUs and components. C. ASHRAE 62.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup." D. ASHRAE 15 Compliance: For refrigeration system safety. E. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning." F. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1995. G. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section for "Quality Requirements," to design mounting and restraints for RTUs, including comprehensive engineering analysis. 1. Design RTU supports to comply with seismic performance requirements. H. Seismic Performance: RTUs shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE 7. Refer to Seismic requirements on Structural drawings and Section 15074 "Vibration and Seismic for Piping and Equipment" 1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified". Technical Specifications 15736 - 2 Packaged Rooftop Air-Conditioning Units 2. Component Importance Factor: 1.0. 3. Review site specific seismic performance requirements as shown on structural drawings. 2.2 CAPACITIES AND CHARACTERISTICS A. Meet or exceed capacity and performance as indicated on mechanical equipment schedules. B. Coordinate requirements of other specification sections as they relate to specified equipment, for a full and functioning system. 2.3 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. AAON. 2. Daikin Applied. 3. Trane. 4. Valent. 5. YORK; a Johnson Controls company. 2.4 UNIT CASINGS A. General Fabrication Requirements for Casings: Formed and reinforced double-wall insulated panels, fabricated to allow removal for access to internal parts and components, with joints between sections sealed. B. Double-Wall Construction: 1. Outside Casing Wall: Galvanized steel, minimum 18 gauge thick with manufacturer's standard finish, with pitched roof panels and knockouts with grommet seals for electrical and piping connections and lifting lugs. 2. Inside Casing Wall: G90-coated galvanized steel, 0.034 inch thick, perforated 40 percent free area. 3. Floor Plate: G90 galvanized steel,minimum thick. 4. Casing Insulation: a. Materials: Injected polyurethane foam insulation. b. Casing Panel R-Value: Minimum 9. C. Insulation Thickness: 2 inches. d. Thermal Break: Provide continuity of insulation with no through-casing metal in casing walls, floors, or roof of unit. C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1. D. Static-Pressure Classifications: 1. For Unit Sections Upstream of Fans: Minus 2-inch wg. 2. For Unit Sections Downstream and Including Fans: 2-inch wg. E. Panels and Doors: Technical Specifications 15736 - 3 Packaged Rooftop Air-Conditioning Units 1. Panels: a. Fabrication: Formed and reinforced with same materials and insulation thickness as casing. b. Fasteners: Two or more camlock type for panel lift-out operation. Arrangement shall allow panels to be opened against air-pressure differential. C. Gasket: Neoprene, applied around entire perimeters of panel frames. d. Size: Large enough to allow inspection and maintenance of air-handling unit's internal components. Dimensions to be at least 24 inches wide by full height of unit casing up to a maximum height of 60 inches. 2. Access Doors: a. Hinges: A minimum of two ball-bearing hinges or stainless steel piano hinge and two wedge-lever-type latches, operable from inside and outside. Arrange doors to be opened against air-pressure differential. b. Gasket: Neoprene, applied around entire perimeters of panel frames. C. Size: Large enough to allow inspection and maintenance of air-handling unit's internal components. Dimensions to be at least 18 inches wide by full height of unit casing up to a maximum height of 60 inches. 3. Locations and Applications: a. Fan Section: Inspection and access doors and/or inspection and access panels. b. Access Section: Doors. C. Coil Section: Inspection and access panels. d. Damper Section: Inspection and access panels. e. Filter Section: Doors large enough to allow periodic removal and installation of filters. f. Mixing Section: Doors. 4. Service Light: 100-W vaporproof fixture with switched junction box located outside adjacent to door. F. Condensate Drain Pans: 1. Location: Each type of cooling coil. 2. Construction: a. Single-wall, stainless steel sheet. 3. Drain Connection: a. Located at lowest point of pan and sized to prevent overflow. Terminate with threaded nipple on one end of pan. b. Minimum Connection Size: NPS 1. 4. Slope: Minimum 0.125-in./ft. slope, to comply with ASHRAE 62.1, in at least two planes to collect condensate from cooling coils (including coil piping connections, coil headers, and return bends) and from humidifiers and to direct water toward drain connection. Technical Specifications 15736 - 4 Packaged Rooftop Air-Conditioning Units 5. Length: Extend drain pan downstream from leaving face for distance to comply with ASHRAE 62.1. 6. Width: Entire width of water producing device. 7. Depth: A minimum of 2 inches deep. 8. Pan-Top Surface Coating for Galvanized-Steel Drain Pans: Asphaltic waterproofing compound. 9. Units with stacked coils shall have an intermediate drain pan to collect condensate from top coil. 2.5 FANS, DRIVES, AND MOTORS A. Fan and Drive Assemblies: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous operation at maximum-rated fan speed and motor horsepower. B. Supply-Air Fans: Centrifugal, rated according to AMCA 210; galvanized or painted steel; mounted on solid-steel shaft. 1. Shafts: With field-adjustable alignment. a. Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway. 2. Shaft Bearings: a. Heavy-duty, self-aligning, pillow-block type with an L-50 rated life of minimum 100,000 hours according to ABMA 9. 3. Housings: Formed- and reinforced-steel panels to form curved scroll housings with shaped cutoff and spun-metal inlet bell. a. Bracing: Steel angle or channel supports for mounting and supporting fan scroll, wheel, motor, and accessories. 4. Centrifugal Fan Wheels: Inlet flange, backplate, and shallow blades with inlet and tip curved forward in direction of airflow and mechanically fastened to flange and backplate; steel or aluminum hub swaged to backplate and fastened to shaft with setscrews. 5. Mounting: For internal vibration isolation and seismic control. Factory-mount fans with manufacturer's standard restrained vibration isolation mounting devices having a minimum static deflection of 1 inch. 6. Shaft Lubrication Lines: Extended to a location outside the casing. 7. Flexible Connector: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip minimum 3-1/2 inches wide, attached to two strips of minimum 2-3/4-inch-wide by 0.028-inch-thick, galvanized-steel sheet. a. Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric, double coated with neoprene. Fabrics, coatings, and adhesives shall comply with UL 181, Class 1. C. Drives, Direct: Factory-mounted, direct drive. D. Drives, Belt: Factory-mounted, V-belt drive, with adjustable alignment and belt tensioning, and with 1.25 service factor based on fan motor. 1. Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing, dynamically balanced at the factory. Technical Specifications 15736 - 5 Packaged Rooftop Air-Conditioning Units 2. Belts: Oil resistant, non-sparking and nonstatic; in matched sets for multiple-belt drives. 3. Belt Guards: Comply with requirements specified by OSHA and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards"; 0.146-inch- thick, 3/4-inch diamond-mesh wire screen, welded to steel angle frame; prime coated. E. Condenser-Coil Fan: propeller, mounted on shaft of permanently lubricated multispeed ECM motors. F. Relief-Air Fan: Backward inclined, shaft mounted on permanently lubricated motor. G. Motors: 1. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 15055 "Common Motor Requirements for Equipment." 2. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0. 3. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled. 4. Enclosure Materials: Cast iron. 5. Motor Bearings: . 6. Unusual Service Conditions: a. Ambient Temperature: 100F. 7. Efficiency: Premium efficient as defined in NEMA MG 1. 8. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with 5-hp motors and smaller; fixed pitch for use with motors larger than 5 hp. Select pulley size so pitch adjustment is at the middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions. 9. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and connections specified in electrical Sections. 2.6 COILS A. General Requirements for Coils: 1. Comply with AHRI 410. 2. Fabricate coils section to allow removal and replacement of coil for maintenance and to allow in-place access for service and maintenance of coil(s). 3. Coils shall not act as structural component of unit. B. Supply-Air Refrigerant Coil: 1. Tubes: Copper. 2. Fins: a. Material: Aluminum or Copper. b. Fin Spacing: Maximum 10 fins per inch. 3. Fin and Tube Joints: Mechanical bond. 4. Headers: Seamless-copper headers with brazed connections. 5. Frames: Galvanized steel. 6. Ratings: Designed, tested, and rated according to ASHRAE 33 and AHRI 410. Technical Specifications 15736 - 6 Packaged Rooftop Air-Conditioning Units a. Working Pressure: Minimum 300 psig. C. Outdoor-Air Refrigerant Coil: 1. Tubes: Copper. 2. Fins: a. Material: Aluminum or Copper. b. Fin Spacing: Maximum 10 fins per inch. 3. Fin and Tube Joints: Mechanical bond. 4. Headers: Seamless-copper headers with brazed connections. 5. Frames: Galvanized steel. 6. Ratings: Designed, tested, and rated according to ASHRAE 33 and AHRI 410. a. Working Pressure: Minimum 300 psig. 2.7 REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT COMPONENTS A. Number of Refrigerant Circuits: Two. B. Compressor: Hermetic,scroll, mounted on vibration isolators; with internal overcurrent and high-temperature protection, internal pressure relief, and crankcase heater. C. Refrigeration Specialties: 1. Refrigerant: R-410A. 2. Expansion valve with replaceable thermostatic element. 3. Refrigerant filter/dryer. 4. Manual-reset high-pressure safety switch. 5. Automatic-reset low-pressure safety switch. 6. Minimum off-time relay. 7. Automatic-reset compressor motor thermal overload. 8. Brass service valves installed in compressor suction and liquid lines. 9. Low-ambient kit high-pressure sensor. 10. Four-way reversing valve with a replaceable magnetic coil, thermostatic expansion valves with bypass check valves, and a suction line accumulator. 2.8 AIR FILTRATION A. Particulate air filtration is specified in Section 15861 "Particulate Air Filtration." B. Panel Filters: 1. Description: Pleated factory-fabricated, self-supported, disposable air filters with holding frames. 2. Filter Unit Class: UL 900. 3. Media: Interlaced glass, synthetic or cotton fibers coated with nonflammable adhesive and antimicrobial coating. 4. Filter-Media Frame: Beverage board with perforated metal retainer, or metal grid, on outlet side. C. Adhesive, Sustainability Projects: As recommended by air-filter manufacturer and with a VOC content of 80 g/L or less. Technical Specifications 15736 - 7 Packaged Rooftop Air-Conditioning Units 1. Adhesive, LEED for Schools Projects: As recommended by air-filter manufacturer and that complies with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." 2.9 DAMPERS A. Dampers: Comply with requirements in Section 15820 "Air Duct Accessories" B. Outdoor- and Return-Air Dampers: Low-leakage, double-skin, airfoil-blade, galvanized- steel dampers with compressible jamb seals and extruded-vinyl blade edge seals in opposed-blade arrangement with zinc-plated steel operating rods rotating in sintered bronze or nylon bearings mounted in a single galvanized-steel frame, and with operating rods connected with a common linkage. Leakage rate shall not exceed 4 cfm/sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and 8 cfm/sq. ft. at 4-inch wg C. Barometric relief dampers. D. Damper Operators: Provide gear driven damper linkages and actuators. Comply with requirements in Section 15820 "Air Duct Accessories." E. Electronic Damper Operators: 1. Direct-coupled type designed for minimum 60,000 full-stroke cycles at rated torque. 2. Electronic damper position indicator shall have visual scale indicating percent of travel and 2- to 10-V dc, feedback signal. 3. Operator Motors: a. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 15055 "Common Motor Requirements for Equipment." b. Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or two-position action. C. Permanent Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil immersed and sealed. Equip spring-return motors with integral spiral-spring mechanism in housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary switches, or feedback potentiometer. 4. Nonspring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running torque of 150 in. x Ibf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x Ibf. 5. Spring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running and breakaway torque of 150 in. x Ibf. 6. Size dampers for running torque calculated as follows: a. Parallel-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 4 inch-lb/sq. ft of damper. b. Opposed-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 3 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper. C. Dampers with 2- to 3-Inch wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 1000 to 2500 fpm: Increase running torque by 1.5. 7. Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle. 8. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry. 9. Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism with external, manual gear release on nonspring-return actuators. Technical Specifications 15736 - 8 Packaged Rooftop Air-Conditioning Units 10. Power Requirements (Two-Position Spring Return): 24 V dc. 11. Power Requirements (Modulating): Maximum 10 VA at 24 V ac or 8 W at 24 V dc. 12. Proportional Signal: 2 to 10 V do or 4 to 20 mA, and 2- to 10-V do position feedback signal. 13. Temperature Rating: Minus 22 to plus 122 deg F. 14. Run Time: 12 seconds open, 5 seconds closed. 2.10 ELECTRICAL POWER CONNECTIONS A. RTU shall have a single connection of power to unit with unit-mounted disconnect switch accessible from outside unit and control-circuit transformer with built-in overcurrent protection. 2.11 CONTROLS A. Basic Unit Controls: 1. Control-voltage transformer. 2. Wall-mounted thermostat or sensor with the following features: a. Heat-cool-off switch. b. Fan on-auto switch. C. Fan-speed switch. d. Automatic changeover. e. Adjustable deadband. f. Exposed set point. g. Exposed indication. h. Degree F indication. i. Unoccupied-period-override push button. j. Data entry and access port to input temperature set points, occupied and unoccupied periods, and output room temperature, supply-air temperature, operating mode, and status. 2.12 ACCESSORIES A. Electric heater with integral thermostat maintains minimum 50 deg F temperature in gas burner compartment. B. Duplex, 1154, ground-fault-interrupter outlet with 15-A overcurrent protection. Include transformer if required. Outlet shall be energized even if the unit main disconnect is open. C. Filter differential pressure switch with sensor tubing on either side of filter. Set for final filter pressure loss. D. Remote potentiometer to adjust minimum economizer damper position. E. Return-air bypass damper. F. Factory- or field-installed demand-controlled ventilation. G. Safeties: 1. Smoke detector. 2. Condensate overflow switch. Technical Specifications 15736 - 9 Packaged Rooftop Air-Conditioning Units 3. Phase-loss reversal protection. 4. High and low pressure control. H. Coil guards of painted, galvanized-steel wire. I. Hail guards of galvanized steel, painted to match casing. J. Concentric diffuser with white louvers and polished aluminum return grilles, insulated diffuser box with mounting flanges, and interior transition. K. Vertical vent extensions to increase the separation between the outdoor-air intake and the flue-gas outlet. L. Door switches to disable heating or reset set point when open. M. Outdoor air intake weather hood with moisture eliminator. N. Service Lights and Switch: Factory installed in fan and coil sections with weatherproof cover. Factory wire lights to a single-point field connection. 2.13 MATERIALS A. Steel: 1. ASTM A36/A36M for carbon structural steel. 2. ASTM A568/A568M for steel sheet. B. Stainless Steel: 1. Manufacturer's standard grade for casing. 2. Manufacturer's standard type, ASTM A240/A240M for bare steel exposed to airstream or moisture. C. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M. D. Aluminum: ASTM B209. E. Comply with Section 230546 "Coatings for HVAC" for corrosion-resistant coating. 2.14 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. AHRI Compliance: 1. Comply with AHRI 340/360 for testing and rating energy efficiencies for RTUs. 2. Comply with AHRI 210/240 for testing and rating energy efficiencies for RTUs 3. Comply with AHRI 270 for testing and rating sound performance for RTUs. 4. Comply with AHRI 1060 for testing and rating performance for air-to-air exchanger. B. AMCA Compliance: 1. Comply with AMCA 11 and bear the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal for air and sound performance according to AMCA 211 and AMCA 311. 2. Damper leakage tested in accordance with AMCA 500-D. 3. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99. Technical Specifications 15736 - 10 Packaged Rooftop Air-Conditioning Units PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Examine roughing-in for RTUs to verify actual locations of piping and duct connections before equipment installation. B. Curb: Install on concrete houskeeping base, level and secure, according to AHRI Guideline B. Install RTUs on matched curbs and coordinate with housekeeping pad requirements. Secure RTUs to upper curb rail, and to concrete base with anchor bolts. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs with actual equipment provided. C. Unit Support: Install unit level on structural curbs or steel supports. Coordinate wall penetrations and flashing with wall construction. Secure RTUs to structural support with anchor bolts. 3.2 PIPING CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Where installing piping adjacent to RTU, allow space for service and maintenance. C. Connect piping to unit mounted on vibration isolators with flexible connectors. D. Connect condensate drain pans using size shown on plans, ASTM B88, Type M copper tubing. Extend to nearest equipment or roof drain. Construct deep trap at connection to drain pan and install cleanouts at changes in direction. E. Refrigerant Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 15183 "Refrigerant Piping." Install shutoff valve and union or flange at each supply and return connection. 3.3 DUCT CONNECTIONS A. Comply with duct installation requirements specified in other HVAC Sections. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. The following are specific connection requirements: 1. Install ducts to termination at top of roof curb. 2. Remove roof decking only as required for passage of ducts. Do not cut out decking under entire roof curb. 3. Connect supply ducts to RTUs with flexible duct connectors specified in Section 15820 "Air Duct Accessories." 4. Install return-air duct continuously through roof structure. 3.4 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. Connect electrical wiring according to Division 16 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." B. Ground equipment according to Division 16 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." C. Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer, but not factory mounted, according to NFPA 70 and NECA 1. Technical Specifications 15736 - 11 Packaged Rooftop Air-Conditioning Units D. Install nameplate for each electrical connection, indicating electrical equipment designation and circuit number feeding connection. 1. Nameplate shall be laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs as specified in Division 16 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 2. Nameplate shall be laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs as layers of black with engraved white letters at least 1/2 inch high. 3. Locate nameplate where easily visible. 3.5 CONTROL CONNECTIONS A. Install control and electrical power wiring to field-mounted control devices. B. Connect control wiring according to manufacturer's written installation instructions. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. C. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative: 1. After installing RTUs and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units for compliance with requirements. 2. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. RTU will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain RTUs. END OF SECTION 15736 Technical Specifications 15736 - 12 Packaged Rooftop Air-Conditioning Units SECTION 15738 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes split-system air-conditioning and heat-pump units consisting of separate evaporator-fan and compressor-condenser components. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. ASHRAE Compliance: 1. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems." 2. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 4 - "Outdoor Air Quality," Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment," Section 6 - " Procedures," and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up." C. ASHRAE/IES Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of split-system air-conditioning units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: a. For Compressor: One year(s) from date of Substantial Completion. b. For Parts: One year(s)from date of Substantial Completion. C. For Labor: One year(s) from date of Substantial Completion. Technical Specifications 15738 - 1 Split-System Air-Conditioners PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Carrier Corporation. 2. Daikin. 3. Lennox Industries, Inc.; Lennox International. 4. Mitsubishi Heavy Industries America, Inc. 5. Samsung HVAC. 2.2 INDOOR UNITS (5 TONS OR LESS) A. Concealed or Vertical Evaporator-Fan and Components: 1. Chassis: Galvanized steel with flanged edges, removable panels for servicing, and insulation on back of panel. 2. Insulation: Faced, glass-fiber duct liner. 3. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and thermal-expansion valve. Comply with ARI 206/110. 4. Electric Heat Coil: Helical, nickel-chrome, resistance-wire heating elements; with refractory ceramic support bushings, automatic-reset thermal cutout, built-in magnetic contactors, manual-reset thermal cutout, airflow proving device, and one-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection. 5. Fan: Forward-curved, double-width wheel of galvanized steel; directly connected to motor. 6. Fan Motors: a. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements specified in Section 15055 "Common Motor Requirements for Equipment." b. Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and permanent lubrication. C. Wiring Terminations: Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection. 7. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1. 8. Filters: Permanent, cleanable. 9. Condensate Drain Pans: a. Fabricated with one percent slope in at least two planes to collect condensate from cooling coils (including coil piping connections, coil headers, and return bends) and humidifiers, and to direct water toward drain connection. 1) Length: Extend drain pan downstream from leaving face to comply with ASHRAE 62.1. 2) Depth: A minimum of 2 inches deep. b. Single-wall, stainless-steel sheet. C. Drain Connection: Located at lowest point of pan and sized to prevent overflow. Terminate with threaded nipple on one end of pan. Technical Specifications 15738 - 2 Split-System Air-Conditioners 1) Minimum Connection Size: NPS 1. d. Pan-Top Surface Coating: Asphaltic waterproofing compound. e. Units with stacked coils shall have an intermediate drain pan to collect condensate from top coil. B. Wall-Mounted, Evaporator-Fan Components: 1. Cabinet: Enameled steel with removable panels on front and ends in color selected by Architect, and discharge drain pans with drain connection. 2. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and thermal-expansion valve. Comply with ARI 206/110. 3. Electric Coil: Helical, nickel-chrome, resistance-wire heating elements; with refractory ceramic support bushings, automatic-reset thermal cutout, built-in magnetic contactors, manual-reset thermal cutout, airflow proving device, and one-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection. 4. Fan: Direct drive, centrifugal. 5. Fan Motors: a. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements specified in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." b. Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and permanent lubrication. G. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled. d. NEMA Premium (TM) efficient motors as defined in NEMA MG 1. e. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and connections specified in electrical Sections. f. Mount unit-mounted disconnect switches on exterior of unit. 6. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1. 7. Condensate Drain Pans: a. Fabricated with one percent slope in at least two planes to collect condensate from cooling coils (including coil piping connections, coil headers, and return bends) and humidifiers, and to direct water toward drain connection. 1) Length: Extend drain pan downstream from leaving face to comply with ASH RAE 62.1. 2) Depth: A minimum of 1 inch deep. b. Single-wall, stainless-steel sheet. C. Drain Connection: Located at lowest point of pan and sized to prevent overflow. Terminate with threaded nipple on one end of pan. 1) Minimum Connection Size: NPS 1. d. Pan-Top Surface Coating: Asphaltic waterproofing compound. 8. Air Filtration Section: Technical Specifications 15738 - 3 Split-System Air-Conditioners a. General Requirements for Air Filtration Section: 1) Comply with NFPA 90A. 2) Minimum MERV according to ASHRAE 52.2. 3) Filter-Holding Frames: Arranged for flat or angular orientation, with access doors on both sides of unit. Filters shall be removable from one side or lifted out from access plenum. b. Disposable Panel Filters: 1) Factory-fabricated, viscous-coated, flat-panel type. 2) Thickness: 1 inch. 3) Recommended Final Resistance: 0.25" we max. 2.3 OUTDOOR UNITS (5 TONS OR LESS) A. Air-Cooled, Compressor-Condenser Components: 1. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel in color selected by Architect, with removable panels for access to controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing. 2. Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration isolation device. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current- sensitive overload devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor. a. Compressor Type: Scroll. b. Two-speed compressor motor with manual-reset high-pressure switch and automatic-reset low-pressure switch. C. Refrigerant: R-410A. d. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and liquid subcooler. Comply with ARI 206/110. 3. Heat-Pump Components: Reversing valve and low-temperature-air cutoff thermostat. 4. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor. 5. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection. 6. Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to 15 deg F. 7. Mounting Base: Polyethylene. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Thermostat: Low voltage with subbase to control compressor and evaporator fan. B. Thermostat: Wireless infrared functioning to remotely control compressor and evaporator fan, with the following features: 1. Compressor time delay. 2. 24-hour time control of system stop and start. 3. 7-day programmable 4. Liquid-crystal display indicating temperature, set-point temperature, time setting, operating mode, and fan speed. 5. Fan-speed selection including auto setting. C. Automatic-reset timer to prevent rapid cycling of compressor. Technical Specifications 15738 - 4 Split-System Air-Conditioners D. Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried, pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends. E. Drain Hose: For condensate. F. Monitoring: 1. Monitor constant and variable motor loads. 2. Monitor variable-frequency-drive operation. 3. Monitor economizer cycle. 4. Monitor cooling load. 5. Monitor air distribution static pressure and ventilation air volumes. 2.5 CAPACITIES AND CHARACTERISTICS A. Heating/Cooling Capacity: 1. Refer to equipment schedules on drawings for all capacity and performance data. PART 3 - 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install units level and plumb. B. Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely fastened to building structure. C. Equipment Mounting: 1. Install ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on cast-in-place concrete equipment base(s). Comply with requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Section for"Cast-in-Place Concrete." 2. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic control devices specified in Section 15074 "Vibration and Seismic for Piping and Equipment." D. Install and connect pre-charged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings. Install tubing to allow access to unit. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Where piping is installed adjacent to unit, allow space for service and maintenance of unit. C. Duct Connections: Duct installation requirements are specified in Section 15815 "Metal Ducts." Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. Connect supply and return ducts to split-system air-conditioning units with flexible duct connectors. Flexible duct connectors are specified in Section 15820 "Air Duct Accessories." 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. Technical Specifications 15738 - 5 Split-System Air-Conditioners 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain units. END OF SECTION 15738 Technical Specifications 15738 - 6 Split-System Air-Conditioners SECTION 15767 PROPELLER UNIT HEATERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes propeller unit heaters with electric-resistance heating coils suitable for hazardous locations. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details. 2. Include equipment schedules to indicate rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. 3. Indicate location and arrangement of integral controls. 4. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, reflected ceiling plans, and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Suspended ceiling components. 2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. 3. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following: a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. C. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. e. Access panels. B. Seismic Qualification Data: Submit certification that propeller unit heaters, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 15074 "Vibration and Seismic for Piping and Equipment." C. Field quality-control reports. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. Technical Specifications 15767 - 1 Propeller Unit Heaters PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 UNIT HEATERS — FOR HAZARDOUS SERVICE 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Refer to drawing schedules for alternate manufacturer's 2.3 DESCRIPTION A. Assembly including casing, coil, fan, and motor in vertical and horizontal discharge configuration with adjustable discharge louvers. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup." B. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning." C. Seismic Performance: Propeller unit heaters shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event." 2.5 HOUSINGS A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked enamel applied to factory-assembled and - tested propeller unit heaters before shipping. B. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1. C. Discharge Louver: Adjustable fin diffuser for horizontal units and conical diffuser for vertical units. 2.6 COILS A. General Coil Requirements: Test and rate hot-water propeller unit-heater coils according to ASHRAE 33. A. Electric-Resistance Heating Coil: Heavy walled, painted carbon steel with aluminum fins liquid heat exchanger, liquid filled with three-immersion type copper sheathed elements. The elements shall have the highest quality nickel-chromium resistance wire encased in a magnesium oxide dielectric and be hermetically sealed into the heat exchanger core. The heat transfer fluid is Ethylene-glycol solution for operation to -49 degrees F. Stainless steel and aluminum pressure relief valve for overpressure. Technical Specifications 15767 - 2 Propeller Unit Heaters 1. Circuit Protection: The capillary tupe manual reset thermal cutout shall be rated for 6000 cycles of service and mounted in the liquid filled heat exchanger. An optional pilot light to indicate manual reset tripped, if safe operating temperatures are exceeded, is located on control enclosure. 2. Wiring Terminations: Stainless-steel or corrosion-resistant material. 2.7 FAN AND MOTOR A. Fan: Propeller type with aluminum wheel directly mounted on motor shaft in the fan venturi. B. Motor: The motor shall be permanent split capacitor type, permanently lubricated, ball bearing type. Motor shall be rated for hazardous location and operate at rated voltage of heater, 60 Hz, 1725 RPM. Comply with requirements in Section 15055 "Common Motor Requirements for Equipment." 2.8 CONTROLS A. Control Devices: 1. Unit-mounted, fan-speed switch. 2. Unit-mounted or wall mounted thermostat. Refer to drawing floor plans. 2.9 CAPACITIES AND CHARACTERISTICS A. Refer to drawing schedules for capacity information and performance. B. Electrical Characteristics for Single-Point Connection: 2.10 WALL AND CEILING HEATERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Berko Electric Heating; a division of Marley Engineered Products. 2. Chromalox, Inc.; a division of Emerson Electric Company. 3. Markel Products; a division of TPI Corporation. 4. Marley Electric Heating; a division of Marley Engineered Products. 5. QMark Electric Heating; a division of Marley Engineered Products. 6. Trane. B. Description: An assembly including chassis, electric heating coil, fan, motor, and controls. Comply with UL 2021. C. Cabinet: 1. Front Panel: Stamped-steel louver, with removable panels fastened with tamperproof fasteners. 2. Finish: Baked enamel over baked-on primer with manufacturer's standard color, applied to factory-assembled and -tested wall and ceiling heaters before shipping. D. Surface-Mounting Cabinet Enclosure: Steel with finish to match cabinet. Technical Specifications 15767 - 3 Propeller Unit Heaters E. Electric-Resistance Heating Coil: Nickel-chromium heating wire, free from expansion noise and hum, embedded in magnesium oxide refractory and sealed in corrosion- resistant metallic sheath. Terminate elements in stainless-steel, machine-staked terminals secured with stainless-steel hardware, and limit controls for high temperature protection. Provide integral circuit breaker for overcurrent protection. F. Fan: Aluminum propeller directly connected to motor. 1. Motor: Permanently lubricated, multispeed. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment." G. Controls: Unit-mounted thermostat. H. Electrical Connection: Factory wire motors and controls for a single field connection. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas to receive propeller unit heaters for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations before unit-heater installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install propeller unit heaters to comply with NFPA 90A. B. Install propeller unit heaters level and plumb. C. Suspend propeller unit heaters from structure with all-thread hanger rods and elastomeric hangers. Hanger rods and attachments to structure are specified in Section 15060 "Hangers and Supports for Piping and Equipment." D. Install wall-mounted thermostats and switch controls in electrical outlet boxes at heights to match lighting controls. Verify location of thermostats and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and room details before installation. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Install wall-mounted thermostats and switch controls in electrical outlet boxes at heights to match lighting controls. Verify location of thermostats and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and room details before installation. B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance. C. Comply with safety requirements in UL 1995. D. Ground equipment according to Division 16 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." E. Connect wiring according to Division 16 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Technical Specifications 15767 -4 Propeller Unit Heaters 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative: 1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 2. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. B. Units will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 15767 Technical Specifications 15767 - 5 Propeller Unit Heaters SECTION 15815 METAL DUCTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings. 2. Single-wall round ducts and fittings. 3. Sheet metal materials. 4. Duct liner. 5. Sealants and gaskets. 6. Hangers and supports. 7. Seismic-restraint devices. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 15095 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements for metal ducts. 2. Section 15820 "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct- mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of the following products: 1. Liners and adhesives. 2. Sealants and gaskets. 3. Seismic-restraint devices. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work. 2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings. 3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, liner material, and static-pressure classes. 4. Elevation of bottom of ducts. 5. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines. 6. Fittings. Bull nose T-fittings or otherwise are not allowed. 7. Reinforcement and spacing. 8. Seam and joint construction. 9. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions. 10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project. 11. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and panels. Technical Specifications 15815 - 1 Metal Ducts 12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment, seismic restraints, and vibration isolation. C. Delegated-Design Submittal: 1. Sheet metal thicknesses. 2. Joint and seam construction and sealing. 3. Reinforcement details and spacing. 4. Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports. 5. Design Calculations: Calculations, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation for selecting hangers and supports and seismic restraints. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: A single set of plans or BIM model, drawn to scale, showing the items described in this Section, and coordinated with all building trades. B. Welding certificates. C. Field quality-control reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel in accordance with the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports. 2. AWS D9.1/D9.1M, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and with performance requirements and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article. B. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports and seismic restraints shall withstand the effects of gravity and seismic loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and ASCE/SEI 7. Seismically brace duct hangers and supports in accordance with SMACNA's "Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems." 1. Seismic Hazard Level (SHL): Refer to structural plans for seismic information . 2. Importance Factor: Refer to structural plans for seismic information . C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1. D. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment," and Section 7 - "Construction and System Startup." E. ASHRAE/IES Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation." Technical Specifications 15815 - 2 Metal Ducts F. Duct Dimensions: Unless otherwise indicated, all duct dimensions indicated on Drawings are inside clear dimensions and do not include insulation or duct wall thickness. 2.2 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated. 1. Construct ducts of galvanized sheet steel unless otherwise indicated. 2. For ducts exposed to weather, construct of Type 316 stainless steel indicated by manufacturer to be suitable for outdoor installation. B. Transverse Joints: Fabricate joints in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 1. For ducts with longest side less than 36 inches, select joint types in accordance with Figure 2-1. 2. For ducts with longest side 36 inches or greater, use flange joint connector Type T-22, T-24, T-24A, T-25a, or T-25b. Factory-fabricated flanged duct connection system may be used if submitted and approved by engineer of record. C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." All longitudinal seams shall be Pittsburgh lock seams unless otherwise specified for specific application. 1. Where specified for specific applications, all joints shall be welded. D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Ch. 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static- pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." Refer to figures 3-4 and 3-5 1. Bull nose T-fittings or otherwise are not allowed. 2. Provide high efficiency lateral branches or conical take off's 2.3 DOUBLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. McGill AirFlow LLC. 2. MKT Metal Manufacturing. 3. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc. Technical Specifications 15815 - 3 Metal Ducts B. Rectangular Ducts: Fabricate ducts with indicated dimensions for clear internal dimensions of the inner duct. C. Outer Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated. 1. Construct ducts of galvanized sheet steel unless otherwise indicated. 2. For ducts exposed to weather, construct outer duct of Type 316 stainless steel indicated by manufacturer to be suitable for outdoor installation. D. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 1. For ducts with longest side less than 36 inches, select joint types in accordance with Figure 2-1. 2. For ducts with longest side 36 inches or greater, use flange joint connector Type T-22, T-24, T-24A, T-25a, or T-25b. Factory-fabricated flanged duct connection system may be used if submitted and approved by engineer of record. 3. Where specified for specific applications, all joints shall be welded. E. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." All longitudinal seams shall be Pittsburgh lock seams unless otherwise specified for specific application. 1. Where specified for specific applications, all joints shall be welded. F. Interstitial Insulation: Fibrous-glass liner complying with ASTM C1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 9013; and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard." 1. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean temperature. Equivalent to R-8 insulation system per Energy Code. 2. Install spacers that position the inner duct at uniform distance from outer duct without compressing insulation. 3. Coat insulation with antimicrobial coating. 4. Cover insulation with polyester film complying with UL 181, Class 1. G. Interstitial Insulation: Flexible elastomeric duct liner complying with ASTM C534/C534M, Type II for sheet materials, and with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B. 1. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.25 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean temperature. Equivalent to R-8 insulation system per Energy Code. H. Inner Duct: Minimum 24-gauge solid galvanized sheet steel. Technical Specifications 15815 -4 Metal Ducts 2.4 SINGLE-WALL ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Ch. 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated. 1. Construct ducts of galvanized sheet steel unless otherwise indicated. 2. For ducts exposed to weather, construct of Type 316 stainless steel indicated by manufacturer to be suitable for outdoor installation. 3. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. McGill AirFlow LLC. b. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc. C. Lindab Inc. d. Spiral Manufacturing Co., Inc. B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 1. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches in Diameter: Flanged. C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 1. Fabricate round ducts larger than 90 inches in diameter with butt-welded longitudinal seams. D. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." Refer to figures 3-4 and 3-5 1. Bull nose T-fittings or otherwise are not allowed. 2. Provide high efficiency lateral branches or conical take off's 2.5 SHEET METAL MATERIALS A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A653/A653M. 1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60. Technical Specifications 15815 - 5 Metal Ducts 2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized. C. Carbon-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A1008/A1008M, with oiled, matte finish for exposed ducts. D. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A480/A480M, Type 304 or 316, as indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article; cold rolled, annealed, sheet. Exposed surface finish shall be No. 2B, No. 2D, No. 3, or No. 4 as indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article. E. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B209 Alloy 3003, H14 temper; with mill finish for concealed ducts, and standard, one-side bright finish for duct surfaces exposed to view. F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A36/A36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. 1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials. G. Tie Rods: No internal duct tie rods are allowed. All duct to be externally braced. 2.6 DUCT LINER (Provide duct liner on all supply and return ducts within 15 feet of equipment) A. Fibrous-Glass Duct Liner: Comply with ASTM C1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 9013; and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard." 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. CertainTeed Insulation. b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. C. Owens Corning. 2. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: a. Type I, Flexible: 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean temperature. b. Type II, Rigid: 0.23 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean temperature. 3. Water-Based Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with ASTM C916. a. Adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less. b. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." B. Flexible Elastomeric Duct Liner: Preformed, cellular, closed-cell, sheet materials complying with ASTM C534/C534M, Type II, Grade 1; and with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B. Technical Specifications 15815 - 6 Metal Ducts 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Aeroflex USA. b. Armacell LLC. C. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with UL 723; certified by an NRTL. 3. Liner Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer and complying with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B. a. Adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less. C. Insulation Pins and Washers: 1. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.135-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon- steel washer. 2. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-thick galvanized steel, aluminum or stainless steel; with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place, but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter. D. Shop Application of Duct Liner: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 7-11, "Flexible Duct Liner Installation." 1. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers of duct liner is prohibited. 2. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal nosing. 3. Butt transverse joints without gaps, and coat joint with adhesive. 4. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-edge overlapping. 5. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts, unless duct size and dimensions of standard liner make longitudinal joints necessary. 6. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 2500 fpmor greater. 7. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not exceeding 12 inches transversely; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches longitudinally. 8. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have either channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings at the following locations: a. Fan discharges. b. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct. C. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are higher than 2500 fpm or where indicated. Technical Specifications 15815 - 7 Metal Ducts 9. Secure insulation between perforated sheet metal inner duct of same thickness as specified for outer shell. Use mechanical fasteners that maintain inner duct at uniform distance from outer shell without compressing insulation. a. Sheet Metal Inner Duct Perforations: 3/32-inch diameter, with an overall open area of 23 percent. 10. Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers, turning vane assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct walls with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds. 2.7 SEALANT AND GASKETS A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with UL 723; certified by an NRTL. B. Two-Part Tape Sealing System: 1. Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal. 2. Tape Width: 4 inches. 3. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. 7. Service: Indoor and outdoor. 8. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum. 10. Sealant shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less. 11. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: 1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent. 3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water). 7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. 8. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets. 10. Sealant shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less. 11. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation Technical Specifications 15815 - 8 Metal Ducts of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." 12. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive or negative. 13. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 14. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets. D. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C920. 1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric. 2. Type: S. 3. Grade: NS. 4. Class: 25. 5. Use: O. 6. Sealant shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less. 7. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." E. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer. F. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals: 1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and shall be rated for10-inch wg static-pressure class, positive or negative. 2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot. 3. Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated couplings and fitting spigots. 2.8 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Galvanized-steel rods and nuts. B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electroga Ivan ized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation. C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct." D. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A603. E. Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A492. F. Steel Cable End Connections: Galvanized-steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device. G. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials. H. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Technical Specifications 15815 - 9 Metal Ducts 1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates. 2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates. 3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc chromate. 2.9 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Eaton (B-line). 3. Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 4. Mason Industries, Inc. B. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and applications shall be as defined in reports by an evaluation service member of the ICC Evaluation Service or an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected. C. Channel Support System: Shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel channels rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces and with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end. Include matching components and corrosion-resistant coating. D. Restraint Cables: ASTM A603, galvanized or ASTM A492, stainless-steel cables with end connections made of galvanized-steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; and with an automatic-locking and clamping device or double-cable clips. E. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted connections or reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod. F. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested in accordance with ASTM E488/E488M. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and coordination drawings. B. Install ducts in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated. C. Install ducts in maximum practical lengths with fewest possible joints. Technical Specifications 15815 - 10 Metal Ducts D. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections. E. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines. F. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. G. Install ducts with a clearance of 2inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness. H. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures. I. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches. J. Install fire, combination fire/smoke, and smoke dampers where indicated on Drawings and as required by code, and by local authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with requirements in Section 15820 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and specific installation requirements of the damper UL listing. K. Install heating coils, cooling coils, air filters, dampers, and all other duct-mounted accessories in air ducts where indicated on Drawings. L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials both before and after installation. Comply with SMACNA's "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction," Appendix G, "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines." Duct cleanliness shall be maintained at SMACNA Level B — Intermediate, for this project type. M. Elbows: Use long-radius elbows wherever they fit. 1. Fabricate 90-degree rectangular mitered elbows to include turning vanes. 2. Fabricate 90-degree round elbows with a minimum of three segments for 12 inches and smaller and a minimum of five segments for 14 inches and larger. N. Branch Connections: Use lateral or conical branch connections. 1. Bull nose T-fittings or otherwise are not allowed.. 2. Installed with high efficiency lateral branches or conical take off's 3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged. Repair and seal and damaged surfaces B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two-part tape sealing system. Technical Specifications 15815 - 11 Metal Ducts C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding. D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets. E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements. 3.3 DUCTWORK EXPOSED TO WEATHER A. All external joints are to be welded or have secure watertight mechanical connections. Seal all openings to provide weatherproof construction. B. Construct ductwork to resist external loads of wind, snow, ice, and other effects of weather. Provide necessary supporting structures. C. Double Wall, Insulated R-8 minimum: 1. Ductwork shall be Type 316 stainless steel. 2. Ductwork shall be galvanized steel. 3. Where ducts have external insulation, provide weatherproof aluminum jacket or ducts of double wall construction. See Section 15080 "Mechanical Insulation." D. All roof mounted duct to be supported with Mirro Industries duct support system or equivalent. 3.4 DUCT SEALING A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct Schedule" Article in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." B. Seal ducts at a minimum to the following seal classes in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible": 1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2. Outdoor, Supply-Air Ducts: Seal Class A. 3. Outdoor, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C. 4. Outdoor, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C. 5. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal Class B. 6. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg: Seal Class A. 7. Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C. 8. Unconditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class B. 9. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal Class C. 10. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg: Seal Class B. 11. Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class B. 12. Conditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C. Technical Specifications 15815 - 12 Metal Ducts 3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports." B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached. 1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. 2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. 3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches thick. 4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. 5. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints. C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection. D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports. E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet. F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull- out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 3.6 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT-DEVICE INSTALLATION A. Install ducts with hangers and braces designed to support the duct and to restrain against seismic forces required by applicable building codes. Comply with SMACNA's "Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems." And/or ASCE/SEI 7. 1. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet o.c., and longitudinal supports a maximum of 80 feet o.c. 2. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet. B. Select seismic-restraint devices with capacities adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads. C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure. D. Install cable restraints on ducts that are suspended with vibration isolators. E. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation service member of the ICC Evaluation Service or an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Technical Specifications 15815 - 13 Metal Ducts F. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing and restraints to structure, to flanges of beams, to upper truss chords of bar joists, or to concrete members. G. Drilling for and Setting Anchors: 1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcement or embedded items during drilling. Notify Architect if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines. 2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength. 3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy- duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened. 4. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench. 5. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior applications and stainless-steel anchors for applications exposed to weather. 3.7 CONNECTIONS A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Section 15820 "Air Duct Accessories." B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections. 3.8 PAINTING A. Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles and that do not have duct liner. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible galvanized- steel primer. Paint materials and application requirements as specified in sections for "Exterior Painting" and "Interior Painting." 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Leakage Tests: 1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." Submit a test report for each test. 2. Test the following systems: a. Ducts with a Pressure Class Higher Than 3-Inch wg: Test representative duct sections, selected by Engineer from sections installed, totaling no less than 25 percent of total installed duct area for each designated pressure class. b. Supply Ducts with a Pressure Class of 2-Inch wg or Higher: Test representative duct sections, selected by Engineer from sections installed, totaling no less than 50 Insert number percent of total installed duct area for each designated pressure class. C. Return Ducts with a Pressure Class of 2-Inch wg or Higher: Test representative duct sections, selected by Engineer from sections installed, Technical Specifications 15815 - 14 Metal Ducts totaling no less than 50 percent of total installed duct area for each designated pressure class. d. Exhaust Ducts with a Pressure Class of 2-Inch wg or Higher: Test representative duct sections, selected by Engineer from sections installed, totaling no less than 50 percent of total installed duct area for each designated pressure class. e. Outdoor-Air Ducts with a Pressure Class of 2-Inch wg or Higher: Test representative duct sections, selected by Engineer from sections installed, totaling no less than 100 percent of total installed duct area for each designated pressure class. 3. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing and for compliance with test requirements. 4. Testing of each duct section is to be performed with access doors, coils, filters, dampers, and other duct-mounted devices in place as designed. No devices are to be removed or blanked off so as to reduce or prevent additional leakage. 5. Test for leaks before applying external insulation. 6. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section being tested. If static-pressure classes are not indicated, test system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure. 7. Give seven days' advance notice for testing. C. Duct System Cleanliness Tests: 1. Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present. 2. Test sections of metal duct system, chosen randomly by Owner, for cleanliness in accordance with "Description of Method 3 - NADCA Vacuum Test" in NADCA ACR, "Assessment, Cleaning and Restoration of HVAC Systems." a. Acceptable Cleanliness Level: Net weight of debris collected on the filter media shall not exceed 0.75 mg/100 sq. cm. D. Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.10 DUCT CLEANING A. Clean new duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Use duct cleaning methodology as indicated in NADCA ACR. C. Use service openings for entry and inspection. 1. Provide openings with access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure and leakage class at dampers, coils, and any other locations where required for inspection and cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined duct. Patch insulation and liner as recommended by duct liner manufacturer. Comply with Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for access panels and doors. 2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection. 3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process. D. Particulate Collection and Odor Control: Technical Specifications 15815 - 15 Metal Ducts 1. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles. 2. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into building. E. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits: 1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers). 2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies. 3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains. 4. Coils and related components. 5. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums and mechanical equipment rooms. 6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes. 7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems. F. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology: 1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building. 2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure. 3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories. 4. Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner to get wet. Replace fibrous-glass duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated, or delaminated or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth. 5. Clean coils and coil drain pans in accordance with NADCA ACR. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and straighten fins. 6. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures. 3.11 STARTUP A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Section 15950 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC." 3.12 DUCT SCHEDULE A. Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel except as otherwise indicated and as follows: 1. Fabricate all ducts to achieve SMACNA pressure class, seal class, and leakage class as indicated below. B. Supply Ducts: 1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, Furnaces, and Terminal Units: Technical Specifications 15815 - 16 Metal Ducts a. Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. C. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 2. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round: 2. 2. Ducts Connected to Constant-Volume Air-Handling Units: a. Pressure Class: Positive 4-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. C. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 2. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 2. 3. Ducts Connected to Equipment Not Listed Above: a. Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. C. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 2. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 2. C. Return Ducts: 1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, Furnaces, and Terminal Units: a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. C. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 2. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 2. 2. Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units: a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. C. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 2. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 2. 3. Ducts Connected to Equipment Not Listed above: a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. C. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 2. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 2. D. Exhaust Ducts: 1. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air: a. Pressure Class: Negative 2-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A if negative pressure, and A if positive pressure. C. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 2. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 2. E. Outdoor-Air (Not Filtered, Heated, or Cooled) Ducts: Technical Specifications 15815 - 17 Metal Ducts 1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, Furnaces, Heat Recovery Units, Unit Ventilators, and Terminal Units: a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. C. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 8. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 8. 2. Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units: a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. C. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 2. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 2. F. Intermediate Reinforcement: 1. Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel or carbon steel coated with zinc- chromate primer. 2. Stainless-Steel Ducts: a. Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material. 3. Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc chromate. G. Liner (Provide duct liner on all supply and return ducts within 15 feet of equipment) 1. Supply-Air Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type I or Flexible elastomeric, 1-1/2 inches thick. 2. Return-Air Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type I or Flexible elastomeric, 1-1/2 inches thick. 3. Supply Fan Plenums: Fibrous glass, Type II , 1-1/2 inches thick. 4. Return- and Exhaust-Fan Plenums: Fibrous glass, 1-1/2 inches thick. H. Elbow Configuration: 1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows." a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes. b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. 3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." Technical Specifications 15815 - 18 Metal Ducts 2. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows." a. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. b. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. C. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." 3. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "Round Duct Elbows." a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3-1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have proportionately fewer segments. 1) Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three segments for 90-degree elbow. 2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four segments for 90-degree elbow. 3) Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5. b. Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated. C. Round Elbows, 14 Inches and Larger in Diameter: Standing seam or Welded. Branch Configuration: 4. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-6, "Branch Connection." a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry. b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Conical spin in. 5. Round: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct. a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90-degree tap. b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap. Technical Specifications 15815 - 19 Metal Ducts SECTION 15820 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Backdraft and pressure relief dampers. 2. Manual volume dampers. 3. Control dampers. 4. Fire dampers. 5. Smoke dampers. 6. Flange connectors. 7. Turning vanes. 8. Duct-mounted access doors. 9. Flexible connectors. 10. Duct accessory hardware. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 15050 "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for insulated and non- insulated flexible ducts. 2. Section 15815 "Metal Ducts" for roof-mounted ventilator caps. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work. 1. Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction. Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following: a. Special fittings. b. Manual volume damper installations. C. Control-damper installations. d. Fire-damper and smoke-damper installations, including sleeves; and duct- mounted access doors. e. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. Technical Specifications 15820 - 1 Air Duct Accessories PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A653/A653M. 1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60. 2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized. B. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A480/A480M, Type 304, and having a No. 2 finish for exposed ducts. C. Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14; with mill finish for concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts. D. Extruded Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B221, Alloy 6063, Temper T6. E. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts. 2.3 BACKDRAFT AND PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 2. Nailor Industries Inc. 3. Ruskin Company. 4. United Enertech. B. Description: Gravity balanced. C. Maximum Air Velocity: 2000 fpm. D. Maximum System Pressure: 3-inch wg. E. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.05-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.063-inch-thick extruded aluminum, with welded corners or mechanically attached and mounting flange. F. Blades: Multiple single-piece blades, center pivoted, maximum 6-inch width, 0.025- inch-thick, roll-formed aluminum 0.050-inch-thick aluminum sheet with sealed edges. G. Blade Action: Parallel. Technical Specifications 15820 - 2 Air Duct Accessories H. Blade Seals: Felt or neoprene, mechanically locked. I. Blade Axles: 1. Material: Galvanized steel or Stainless steel. 2. Diameter: 0.20 inch. J. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. K. Return Spring: Adjustable tension. L. Bearings: Steel ball or synthetic pivot bushings. M. Accessories: 1. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure. 2. Counterweights and spring-assist kits for vertical airflow installations. 3. Electric actuators. 4. Chain pulls. 5. Screen Mounting: Front mounted in sleeve. a. Sleeve Thickness: 20 gauge minimum. b. Sleeve Length: 6 inches minimum. 6. Screen Mounting: Rear mounted. 7. Screen Material: Galvanized steel or Aluminum. 8. Screen Type: Bird or Insect. 9. 90-degree stops. 2.4 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers (Low Leakage): 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Air Balance; a division of MESTEK, Inc. b. Aire Technologies. C. Greenheck Fan Corporation. d. McGill AirFlow LLC. e. Nailor Industries Inc. f. Ruskin Company. 2. Low leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream. 3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 4. Frames: a. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.094-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.05-inch- thick stainless steel. b. Mitered and welded corners. C. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts. 5. Blades: Technical Specifications 15820 - 3 Air Duct Accessories a. Multiple or single blade. b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design. C. Stiffen damper blades for stability. d. Galvanized, 0.064 inch thick. 6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel or nonferrous metal. 7. Bearings: a. Oil-impregnated bronze, molded synthetic or Stainless-steel sleeve. b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. 8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. B. Jackshaft: 1. Size: 0.5-inch diameter. 2. Material: Galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing assembly mounted on supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies. 3. Length and Number of Mountings: As required to connect linkage of each damper in multiple-damper assembly. C. Damper Hardware: 1. Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch-thick zinc- plated steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut. 2. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size. 3. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting. 2.5 CONTROL DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Carnes Company. 2. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 3. McGill AirFlow LLC. 4. Nailor Industries Inc. 5. Ruskin Company. 6. United Enertech. B. Frames: 1. Hat or angle shaped. 2. 0.094-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel. 3. Mitered and welded corners. C. Blades: 1. Multiple blade with maximum blade width of 6 inches. 2. Opposed-blade design. 3. Galvanized-steel or Stainless steel. 4. 0.064 inch thick single skin. 5. Blade Edging: Closed-cell neoprene. 6. Blade Edging: Inflatable seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals. Technical Specifications 15820 - 4 Air Duct Accessories D. Blade Axles: 1/2-inch-diameter; galvanized steel or nonferrous metal; blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass; ends sealed against blade bearings. 1. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. E. Bearings: 1. Oil-impregnated bronze, molded synthetic, or stainless-steel sleeve. 2. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. 3. Thrust bearings at each end of every blade. 2.6 FIRE DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Air Balance; a division of MESTEK, Inc. 2. Arrow United Industries. 3. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 4. NCA Manufacturing, Inc. 5. Ruskin Company. 6. United Enertech. B. Type: Static and dynamic; rated and labeled according to UL 555 by an NRTL. C. Closing rating in ducts up to 4-inch wg static pressure class and minimum 2000-fpm velocity. D. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 and 3 hours. E. Frame: Multiple-blade type; fabricated with roll-formed, galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners; gauge in accordance with UL listing. F. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed, galvanized sheet steel; gauge in accordance with UL listing. G. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated. H. Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, galvanized sheet steel; gauge in accordance with UL listing. I. Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring. J. Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165 deg F and 212 deg F rated, fusible links. K. Heat-Responsive Device: Electric, resettable link and switch package, factory installed, 165 deg F and 212 deg F rated. 2.7 SMOKE DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Air Balance; a division of MESTEK, Inc. Technical Specifications 15820 - 5 Air Duct Accessories 2. Cesco Products; a division of MESTEK, Inc. 3. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 4. Ruskin Company. 5. United Enertech. 6. Nailor Industries Inc B. General Requirements: Label according to UL 555S by an NRTL. C. Smoke Detector: Integral, factory wired for single-point connection. D. Frame: Hat-shaped, galvanized sheet steel, with welded or mechanically attached corners and mounting flange; gauge in accordance with UL listing. E. Blades: Roll-formed, horizontal, interlocking, galvanized sheet steel; gauge in accordance with UL listing. F. Leakage: Class I or Class II as required for system parameters G. Rated pressure and velocity to exceed design airflow conditions. H. Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, galvanized sheet steel; length to suit wall or floor application with factory-furnished silicone caulking; gauge in accordance with UL listing. I. Damper Motors: two-position action. J. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 15055 "Common Motor Requirements for Equipment." 1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0. 2. Permanent-Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Motors: With oil-immersed and sealed gear trains. 3. Spring-Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral-spring mechanism where indicated. Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for service or adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 150 in. x Ibf and breakaway torque rating of 150 in. x Ibf. 4. Outdoor Motors and Motors in Outdoor-Air Intakes: Equip with O-ring gaskets designed to make motors weatherproof. Equip motors with internal heaters to permit normal operation at minus 40 deg F. 5. Nonspring-Return Motors: For dampers larger than 25 sq. ft., size motor for running torque rating of 150 in. x Ibf and breakaway torque rating of 300 in. x Ibf. 6. Electrical Connection: 115 V, single phase, 60 Hz. K. Accessories: 1. Auxiliary switches for position indication. 2. Test and reset switches, remote mounted. 2.8 TURNING VANES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: Technical Specifications 15820 - 6 Air Duct Accessories 1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Duro Dyne Inc. 3. Ward Industries; a brand of Hart & Cooley, Inc. B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting. 1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fibrous-glass fill. C. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Nonmetal Ducts: Fabricate curved blades of resin- bonded fiberglass with acrylic polymer coating; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting. D. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." E. Vane Construction: Single wall for ducts up to 48 inches and double wall for larger ducts 2.9 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cesco Products; a division of MESTEK, Inc. 2. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 3. Duro Dyne Inc. 4. McGill AirFlow LLC. 5. Ruskin Company. 6. United Enertech. B. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 7-2, "Duct Access Doors and Panels," and 7-3, "Access Doors - Round Duct." 1. Door: a. Double wall, rectangular. b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. C. Vision panel. d. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches. e. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class. 2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets. 3. Number of Hinges and Locks: a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks. b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks. C. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches: Three hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside handles. Technical Specifications 15820 - 7 Air Duct Accessories d. Access Doors Larger Than 24 by 48 Inches: Continuous and two compression latches with outside and inside handles. 2.10 DUCT ACCESS PANEL ASSEMBLIES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. CL WARD & Family Inc. 2. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 3. Flame Gard, Inc. B. Labeled according to UL 1978 by an NRTL. C. Panel and Frame: Minimum thickness 0.0528-inch carbon steel. D. Fasteners: Carbon or stainless steel. Panel fasteners shall not penetrate duct wall. E. Gasket: Comply with NFPA 96; grease-tight, high-temperature ceramic fiber, rated for minimum 2000 deg F. F. Minimum Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg, positive or negative. 2.11 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Duro Dyne Inc. 3. Ventfabrics, Inc. 4. Ward Industries; a brand of Hart & Cooley, Inc. B. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics. C. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1. D. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch-wide, 0.028-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch-thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts. E. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene. 1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd.. 2. Tensile Strength: 480 Ibf/inch in the warp and 360 Ibf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. F. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof, synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone. 1. Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd.. 2. Tensile Strength: 530 Ibf/inch in the warp and 440 Ibf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250 deg F. Technical Specifications 15820 - 8 Air Duct Accessories 2.12 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct-insulation thickness. B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts. B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts. C. Install backdraft dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust fan unless otherwise indicated. D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel. 1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts. 2. Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts. E. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing. F. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated. G. Install fire and smoke dampers according to UL listing. H. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations: 1. On both sides of duct coils. 2. Upstream from duct filters. 3. At outdoor-air intakes and mixed-air plenums. 4. At drain pans and seals. 5. Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, backdraft dampers, and equipment. 6. Adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers, to reset or reinstall fusible links. Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible links shall be pressure relief access doors and shall be outward operation for access doors installed upstream from dampers and inward operation for access doors installed downstream from dampers. 7. At each change in direction and at maximum 50-foot spacing. 8. Upstream and downstream from turning vanes. 9. Upstream or downstream from duct silencers. Technical Specifications 15820 - 9 Air Duct Accessories 10. Control devices requiring inspection. 11. Elsewhere as indicated. I. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure. J. Access Door Sizes: 1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches. 2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches. 3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches. 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches. 5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches. 6. Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches. K. Label access doors according to Section 15075 "Mechanical Identification" to indicate the purpose of access door. L. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment. M. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: 1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement. 2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be performed. 3. Operate fire and smoke dampers to verify full range of movement and verify that proper heat-response device is installed. 4. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation. END OF SECTION 15820 Technical Specifications 15820 - 10 Air Duct Accessories SECTION 15838 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Ceiling-mounted ventilators. 2. Centrifugal ventilators - roof downblast. 3. Centrifugal ventilators - roof upblast. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 4. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints. C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For unit hangars and supports indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, reflected ceiling plans, and other details, or BIM model, drawn to scale and coordinated with all building trades. B. Seismic Qualification Data: For fans, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. C. Field quality-control reports. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. Technical Specifications 15838 - 1 HVAC Power Ventilators PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Unusual Service Conditions: 1. Base fan-performance ratings on the following: a. Altitude: 4,600 feet above sea level. B. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design vibration isolation and seismic restraints, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. C. Seismic Performance: HVAC power ventilators shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to specification section 15074 "Vibration and Seismic for Piping and Equipment" 1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event." D. Capacities and Characteristics: 1. Refer to schedules on drawings 2.2 CEILING-MOUNTED VENTILATORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 2. Loren Cook Company. 3. PennBarry. B. Housing: Steel, lined with acoustical insulation. C. Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheels directly mounted on motor shaft. Fan shrouds, motor, and fan wheel removable for service. D. Back-draft damper: Integral. E. Grille: Stainless steel, Aluminum or Painted aluminum, louvered grille with flange on intake and thumbscrew or spring retainer attachment to fan housing. F. Electrical Requirements: Junction box for electrical connection on housing and receptacle for motor plug-in. G. Accessories: 1. Variable-Frequency Motor Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50 percent. 2. Manual Starter Switch: Single-pole rocker switch assembly with cover and pilot light. Technical Specifications 15838 - 2 HVAC Power Ventilators 3. Time-Delay Switch: Assembly with single-pole rocker switch, timer, and cover plate. 4. Motion Sensor: Motion detector with adjustable shutoff timer. 5. Ceiling Radiation Damper: Fire-rated assembly with ceramic blanket, stainless steel springs, and fusible link. 6. Filter: Washable aluminum to fit between fan and grille. 7. Isolation: Rubber-in-shear vibration isolators. 8. Manufacturer's standard roof jack or wall cap, and transition fittings. 2.3 CENTRIFUGAL VENTILATORS - ROOF DOWNBLAST A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 2. Loren Cook Company. 3. PennBarry. B. Housing: Downblast; removable spun-aluminum dome top and outlet baffle; square, one-piece aluminum base with venturi inlet cone. C. Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades; sparkproof construction. D. Belt Drives: 1. Resiliently mounted to housing. 2. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub. 3. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings. 4. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at factory. 5. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions. Provide fixed pitch for use with motors larger than 5 hp. 6. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream. E. Accessories: 1. Variable-Frequency Motor Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50 percent. 2. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted outside fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit. 3. Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2-inchmesh, aluminum or brass wire. 4. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb base; factory set to close when fan stops. 5. Motorized Dampers: Parallel-blade dampers mounted in curb base with electric actuator; wired to close when fan stops. 6. Spark-resistant, all-aluminum wheel construction. 7. Mounting Pedestal: Galvanized steel with removable access panel. Technical Specifications 15838 - 3 HVAC Power Ventilators F. Prefabricated Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 1-1/2-inch- thick, rigid, fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 1-1/2-inch wood nailer. Size as required to suit roof opening and fan base. 1. Configuration: Built-in raised cant and mounting flange, manufactured to accommodate roof slope. 2. Overall Height: 16 inches. 3. Sound Curb: Curb with sound-absorbing insulation. 4. Hinged sub-base to provide access to damper or as cleanout for grease applications. 5. Pitch Mounting: Manufacture curb for roof slope. Refer to architectural plans 6. Metal Liner: Galvanized steel. 7. Mounting Pedestal: Galvanized steel with removable access panel. 2.4 CENTRIFUGAL VENTILATORS - ROOF UPBLAST OR SIDEWALL A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Aerovent; a division of Twin City Fan Companies, Ltd. 2. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 3. Loren Cook Company. 4. PennBarry. B. Configuration: Centrifugal roof upblast or roof upblast, kitchen ventilator. C. Housing: Removable spun-aluminum dome top and outlet baffle or spun aluminum; square, one-piece aluminum base with venturi inlet cone. 1. Upblast Units: Provide spun-aluminum discharge baffle to direct discharge air upward, with rain and snow drains. D. Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades; sparkproof construction. E. Belt Drives: 1. Resiliently mounted to housing. 2. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub. 3. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings; minimum ABMA9, L(10) of 100,000 hours. 4. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at factory. 5. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions. Provide fixed pitch for use with motors larger than 5 hp. 6. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream. F. Accessories: 1. Variable-Frequency Motor Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50 percent. Technical Specifications 15838 - 4 HVAC Power Ventilators 2. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted outside fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit. 3. Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2-inch mesh, aluminum or brass wire. 4. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb base; factory set to close when fan stops. 5. Motorized Dampers: Parallel-blade dampers mounted in curb base with electric actuator; wired to close when fan stops. 6. Spark-resistant, all-aluminum wheel construction. 7. Mounting Pedestal: Galvanized steel with removable access panel. 8. Wall Mount Adapter: Attach wall-mounted fan to wall. 9. Grease Hood Kitchen Exhaust: UL 762 listed for grease-laden air exhaust. G. Prefabricated Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 1-1/2-inch- thick, rigid, fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 1-1/2-inch wood nailer. Size as required to suit roof opening and fan base. 1. Configuration: Built-in raised cant and mounting flange manufactured to accommodate roof slope. 2. Roof Curb for Formaline Storage exhaust fan curb is to be rated and installed in accordance with Seismic Design requirements as noted in Specification Section 15074 "Vibration and Seismic for Piping and Equipment". a. Fan is to remain fixed and operational after a Seismic Event. 2.5 MOTORS A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Section 15055 "Common Motor Requirements for Equipment." 1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0. 2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by an NRTL, and marked for intended location and application. B. AMCA Certification: Fans shall comply with AMCA 11 and bear the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal. C. Fan Sound Ratings: Comply with AMCA 311, and label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal. Sound ratings shall comply with AMCA 301. The fans shall be tested according to AMCA 300. D. Fan Performance Ratings: Comply with AMCA 211 and label fans with AMCA-Certified Rating Seal. The fans shall be tested for air performance - flow rate, fan pressure, power, fan efficiency, air density, speed of rotation, and fan efficiency - according to AMCA 210/ASHRAE 51. E. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99. F. UL Standards: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705. Power ventilators for use for restaurant kitchen exhaust shall also comply with UL 762. Technical Specifications 15838 - 5 HVAC Power Ventilators PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF HVAC POWER VENTILATORS A. Install power ventilators level and plumb. B. Equipment Mounting: 1. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation and seismic-control devices specified in Section 15074 "Vibration and Seismic for Piping and Equipment." 2. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 15074 "Vibration and Seismic for Piping and Equipment." C. Secure roof-mounted fans to roof curbs with zinc-plated hardware. See Section for "Roof Accessories" for installation of roof curbs. D. Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure; use steel wire or metal straps. E. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and elastomeric hangers having a static deflection of 1 inch. Vibration-control devices are specified in Section 15074 "Vibration and Seismic for Piping and Equipment." F. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance. G. Label units according to requirements specified in Section 15075 "Mechanical Identification." 3.2 DUCTWORK CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Section 15820 "Air Duct Accessories." 3.3 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. Connect wiring according to Division 16 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." B. Ground equipment according to Division 16 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." C. Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer, but not factory mounted, according to NFPA 70 and NECA 1. 1. Nameplate shall be laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs, as specified in Division 16 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 2. Nameplate shall be laminated acrylic or melamine plastic signs with a black background and engraved white letters at least 1/2 inch high. 3.4 CONTROL CONNECTIONS A. Install control and electrical power wiring to field-mounted control devices. B. Connect control wiring according to Division 16 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables." Technical Specifications 15838 - 6 HVAC Power Ventilators 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. C. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative. D. Tests and Inspections: 1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches. 3. Verify that there is adequate maintenance and access space. 4. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. 5. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards. 6. Adjust belt tension. 7. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. 8. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. 9. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected ductwork systems are in fully open position. 10. Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage. 11. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators. 12. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. E. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Controls and equipment will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. F. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. B. Adjust belt tension. C. Comply with requirements in Section 15950 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures. D. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow. E. Lubricate bearings. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain centrifugal fans. Technical Specifications 15838 - 7 HVAC Power Ventilators END OF SECTION 15838 Technical Specifications 15838 - 8 HVAC Power Ventilators SECTION 15855 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Rectangular and square ceiling diffusers. 2. Louver face diffusers. 3. Fixed face registers, grilles, registers and grilles. B. Related Sections: 1. Specification Section for "Louvers and Vents" for fixed and adjustable louvers and wall vents, whether or not they are connected to ducts. 2. Division 15 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume-control dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated on drawing schedules, include the following: 1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings. 2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Anemostat Products; a Mestek company. b. Carnes. C. Hart & Cooley Inc. d. METALAIRE, Inc. e. Nailor Industries Inc. f. Shoemaker g. Tuttle & Bailey. h. Price 2.2 CEILING DIFFUSERS A. Rectangular and Square Ceiling Diffusers: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the manufacturers listed in section 2.1. B. Louver Face Diffuser: Technical Specifications 15855 - 1 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the manufacturers listed in section 2.1. 2.3 REGISTERS AND GRILLES A. Fixed Face Register: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the manufacturers listed in section 2.1. B. Fixed Face Grille: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the manufacturers listed in section 2.1. 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb. B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location. C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing. END OF SECTION 15855 Technical Specifications 15855 - 2 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles SECTION 15861 PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pleated panel filters. 2. V-bank cell filters. 3. Front- or back-access filter frames. 4. Side-access filter housings. 5. Filter gauges. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 15838 "Power Ventilators" for customized fan and filter units. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For air filters. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Show filter rack assembly, dimensions, materials, and methods of assembly of components. 2. Include setting drawings, templates, and requirements for installing anchor bolts and anchorages. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Seismic Qualification Data: Certificates, for filters, accessories, and components from manufacturer. B. Product test reports. C. Field quality-control reports. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of filter and rack to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Filters shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event." Technical Specifications 15861 - 1 Particulate Air Filtration B. ASHRAE Compliance: 1. Comply with applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 4 - "Outdoor Air Quality"; Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment"; and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup." 2. Comply with ASHRAE 52.2 for MERV for methods of testing and rating air-filter units. C. Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B. D. Comply with UL 900. E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2.2 PLEATED PANEL FILTERS A. Description: Factory-fabricated, self-supported, extended-surface, pleated, panel-type, disposable air filters with holding frames. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. 3M. b. AAF International. C. Camfil Farr. B. Capacities and Characteristics: 1. Match scheduled equipment requirements. 2. Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value: MERV 8, with "Composite Average Particle Size Efficiency, Percent in Size Range, Micrometers" according to ASHRAE 52.2. 3. Access: Front or Side. C. Media: Interlaced glass or Cotton and synthetic fibers coated with nonflammable adhesive. 1. Separators shall be bonded to the media to maintain pleat configuration. 2. Welded-wire grid shall be on downstream side to maintain pleat. 3. Media shall be bonded to frame to prevent air bypass. 4. Support members on upstream and downstream sides to maintain pleat spacing. D. Filter-Media Frame: Cardboard frame with perforated metal retainer sealed or bonded to the media. 2.3 FRONT- OR BACK-ACCESS FILTER FRAMES A. Description: Galvanized-steel or Aluminum framing members with access for either upstream (front) or downstream (back) filter servicing, cut to size and pre-punched for assembly into modules. Vertically support filters to prevent deflection of horizontal members without interfering with filter installation or operation. B. Prefilters: Incorporate a separate track with spring clips, removable from front. Technical Specifications 15861 - 2 Particulate Air Filtration C. Sealing: Factory-installed, positive-sealing device for each row of filters, to ensure seal between gasketed filter elements and to prevent bypass of unfiltered air. 2.4 SIDE-ACCESS FILTER HOUSINGS A. Description: Factory-assembled, side-service housings, constructed of galvanized steel or aluminum, with flanges to connect to duct or casing system. B. Prefilters: Integral tracks to accommodate 2-inch-thick, disposable filters. C. Access Doors: Hinged, with continuous gaskets on perimeter and positive-locking devices, and arranged so filter cartridges can be loaded from either access door. D. Sealing: Incorporate positive-sealing gasket material on channels to seal top and bottom of filter cartridge frames and to prevent bypass of unfiltered air. 2.5 FILTER GAUGES A. Diaphragm-type gauge with dial and pointer in metal case, vent valves, black figures on white background, and front recalibration adjustment. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. AirGuard; Clarcor Air Filtration Products, Inc. b. Dwyer Instruments, Inc. 2. Diameter: 4-1/2 inches. 3. Scale Range for Filter Media Having a Recommended Final Resistance of 0.5- Inch wg or Less: 0- to 0.5-inch wg. 4. Scale Range for Filter Media Having a Recommended Final Resistance of 0.5- to 1.0-Inch wg or Less: 0- to 1.0-inch wg. B. Manometer-Type Filter Gauge: Molded plastic, with epoxy-coated aluminum scale and logarithmic-curve tube gage with integral leveling gage, graduated to read from 0- to 3.0-inch wg, and accurate within 3 percent of the full-scale range. C. Accessories: Static-pressure tips, tubing, gauge connections, and mounting bracket. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF FILTERS A. Position each filter unit with clearance for normal service and maintenance. Anchor filter holding frames to substrate. B. Install filters in position to prevent passage of unfiltered air. C. Install filter gauge for each filter bank. D. Do not operate fan system until filters (temporary or permanent) are in place. Replace temporary filters used during construction and testing with new, clean filters. E. Coordinate filter installations with duct and air-handling-unit installations. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF FILTER GAUGES A. Install filter gauge for each filter bank. Technical Specifications 15861 - 3 Particulate Air Filtration B. Install filter-gauge, static-pressure tips upstream and downstream from filters. Install filter gauges on filter banks with separate static-pressure taps upstream and downstream from filters. Mount filter gauges on outside of filter housing or filter plenum in an accessible position. Adjust and level inclined gauges. 3.3 CONTROL CONNECTIONS A. Install control and electrical power wiring to field-mounted control devices. B. Connect control wiring between pressure sensors and DDC system. C. Connect control wiring between controlled devices. D. Connect control wiring according to Division 16 "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables." 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. C. Perform tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative. D. Tests and Inspections: 1. Test for leakage of unfiltered air while system is operating. E. Air filter will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. F. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.5 CLEANING A. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing of air- handling and air-distribution systems, clean filter housings and install new filter media. END OF SECTION 15861 Technical Specifications 15861 - 4 Particulate Air Filtration SECTION 15950 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Balancing Air Systems: a. Constant-volume air systems. b. Variable-air-volume systems. 2. Balancing Hydronic Piping Systems: a. Constant-flow hydronic systems. b. Variable-flow hydronic systems. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council. B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau. C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau. E. TAB Specialist: An independent entity meeting qualifications to perform TAB work. F. TDH: Total dynamic head. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. TAB Report: Documentation indicating that Work complies with ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing." 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 90 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article. B. Certified TAB reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. TAB Specialists Qualifications: Certified by NEBB. Submit alternate certifications to engineer of record for approval prior to bid. 1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by NEBB. 2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by NEBB as a TAB technician. Technical Specifications 15950 - 1Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC B. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 111, Section 4, "Instrumentation." C. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES 90.1, Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing." PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment. B. Examine installed systems for balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are applicable for intended purpose and are accessible. C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment. D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls. E. Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to verify that they are properly separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in plenum walls are sealed and fire-stopped if required. F. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. 1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. 2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design." Compare results with the design data and installed conditions. G. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed. H. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections. I. Examine HVAC equipment and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, filters are clean, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation. J. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning. K. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens have been replaced by permanent screens with indicated perforations. Technical Specifications 15950 - 2Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC L. Examine control valves for proper installation for their intended function of throttling, diverting, or mixing fluid flows. M. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins. N. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping. O. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment. P. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures for balancing the systems. B. Perform system-readiness checks of HVAC systems and equipment to verify system readiness for TAB work. Include, at a minimum, the following: 1. Airside: a. Duct systems are complete with terminals installed. b. Volume, smoke, and fire dampers are open and functional. C. Clean filters are installed. d. Fans are operating, free of vibration, and rotating in correct direction. e. Variable-frequency controllers' startup is complete and safeties are verified. f. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. g. Ceilings are installed. h. Windows and doors are installed. i. Suitable access to balancing devices and equipment is provided. 2. Hydronics: a. Verify leakage and pressure tests on water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed. b. Piping is complete with terminals installed. C. Water treatment is complete. d. Systems are flushed, filled, and air purged. e. Strainers are pulled and cleaned. f. Control valves are functioning per the sequence of operation. g. Shutoff and balance valves have been verified to be 100 percent open. h. Pumps are started and proper rotation is verified. i. Pump gage connections are installed directly at pump inlet and outlet flanges or in discharge and suction pipe prior to valves or strainers. j. Variable-frequency controllers' startup is complete and safeties are verified. k. Suitable access to balancing devices and equipment is provided. 3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in ASHRAE 111, NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Technical Specifications 15950 - 3Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC Balancing of Environmental Systems", SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and in this Section. B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures. 1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness as used to construct ducts. 2. After testing and balancing, install test ports and duct access doors that comply with requirements in Section 15820 "Air Duct Accessories." 3. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation, coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Section 15083 "Duct Insulation." C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings. D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units. 3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Cross-check the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes. B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts. C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity. D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements. E. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers. F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters. G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection. H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path. I. Check for airflow blockages. J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning. K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components. L. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Section 15815 "Metal Ducts." 3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer. Technical Specifications 15950 -4Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 1. Measure total airflow. a. Set outside-air, return-air, and relief-air dampers for proper position that simulates minimum outdoor-air conditions. b. Where duct conditions allow, measure airflow by main Pitot-tube traverse. If necessary, perform multiple Pitot-tube traverses, close to the fan and prior to any outlets, to obtain total airflow. C. Where duct conditions are not suitable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, a coil traverse may be acceptable. 2. Measure fan static pressures as follows: a. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan inlet or through the flexible connection. C. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up the air- handling system. d. Report artificial loading of filters at the time static pressures are measured. 3. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend adjustments to accommodate actual conditions. 4. Obtain approval from engineer of record or commissioning authority for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated speed. Comply with requirements in HVAC Sections for air-handling units for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air-handling-unit performance. 5. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload occurs. Measure amperage in full-cooling, full-heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required brake horsepower. B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows. 1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts. 2. Adjust submain and branch duct volume dampers for specified airflow. 3. Re-measure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. C. Adjust air inlets and outlets for each space to indicated airflows. 1. Set airflow patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts. 2. Measure inlets and outlets airflow. 3. Adjust each inlet and outlet for specified airflow. 4. Re-measure each inlet and outlet after they have been adjusted. 3.6 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS A. Adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows: 1. Verify that the system static pressure sensor is located two-thirds of the distance down the duct from the fan discharge. 2. Verify that the system is under static pressure control. Technical Specifications 15950 - 5Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 3. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow. Measure inlet static pressure, and adjust system static pressure control set point so the entering static pressure for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal-unit manufacturer's recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome terminal-unit discharge system losses. 4. Calibrate and balance each terminal unit for maximum and minimum design airflow as follows: a. Adjust controls so that terminal is calling for maximum airflow. Some controllers require starting with minimum airflow. Verify calibration procedure for specific project. b. Measure airflow and adjust calibration factor as required for design maximum airflow. Record calibration factor. C. When maximum airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units. d. Adjust controls so that terminal is calling for minimum airflow. e. Measure airflow and adjust calibration factor as required for design minimum airflow. Record calibration factor. If no minimum calibration is available, note any deviation from design airflow. f. When in full cooling or full heating, ensure that there is no mixing of hot- deck and cold-deck airstreams unless so designed. g. On constant volume terminals, in critical areas where room pressure is to be maintained, verify that the airflow remains constant over the full range of full cooling to full heating. Note any deviation from design airflow or room pressure. 5. After terminals have been calibrated and balanced, test and adjust system for total airflow. Adjust fans to deliver total design airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer. a. Set outside-air, return-air, and relief-air dampers for proper position that simulates minimum outdoor-air conditions. b. Set terminals for maximum airflow. If system design includes diversity, adjust terminals for maximum and minimum airflow so that connected total matches fan selection and simulates actual load in the building. C. Where duct conditions allow, measure airflow by Pitot-tube traverse. If necessary, perform multiple Pitot-tube traverses to obtain total airflow. d. Where duct conditions are not suitable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, a coil traverse may be acceptable. e. If a reliable Pitot-tube traverse or coil traverse is not possible, measure airflow at terminals and calculate the total airflow. 6. Measure fan static pressures as follows: a. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan inlet or through the flexible connection. C. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up the air- handling system. d. Report any artificial loading of filters at the time static pressures are measured. Technical Specifications 15950 - 6Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 7. Set final return and outside airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outdoor airflow. a. Balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described for constant- volume air systems. b. Verify that terminal units are meeting design airflow under system maximum flow. 8. Re-measure the inlet static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the system static pressure set point to the most energy-efficient set point to maintain the optimum system static pressure. Record set point and give to controls contractor. 9. Verify final system conditions as follows: a. Re-measure and confirm that minimum outdoor, return, and relief airflows are within design. Readjust to match design if necessary. b. Re-measure and confirm that total airflow is within design. C. Re-measure final fan operating data, rpms, volts, amps, and static profile. d. Mark final settings. e. Test system in economizer mode. Verify proper operation and adjust if necessary. Measure and record all operating data. f. Verify tracking between supply and return fans. 3.7 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports for pumps, coils, and heat exchangers. Obtain approved submittals and manufacturer-recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required coil and heat exchanger flow rates with pump design flow rate. B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts. C. In addition to requirements in "Preparation" Article, prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing as follows: 1. Check liquid level in expansion tank. 2. Check highest vent for adequate pressure. 3. Check flow-control valves for proper position. 4. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters. 5. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection. 6. Check that air has been purged from the system. 3.8 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Adjust pumps to deliver total design gpm. 1. Measure total water flow. a. Position valves for full flow through coils. b. Measure flow by main flow meter, if installed. C. If main flow meter is not installed, determine flow by pump TDH or exchanger pressure drop. 2. Measure pump TDH as follows: Technical Specifications 15950 - 7Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC a. Measure discharge pressure directly at the pump outlet flange or in discharge pipe prior to any valves. b. Measure inlet pressure directly at the pump inlet flange or in suction pipe prior to any valves or strainers. C. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights. d. Verify pump impeller size by measuring the TDH with the discharge valve closed. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow, and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size. e. With valves open, read pump TDH. Adjust pump discharge valve until design water flow is achieved. 3. Monitor motor performance during procedures and do not operate motor in an overloaded condition. B. Adjust flow-measuring devices installed in mains and branches to design water flows. 1. Measure flow in main and branch pipes. 2. Adjust main and branch balance valves for design flow. 3. Re-measure each main and branch after all have been adjusted. C. Adjust flow-measuring devices installed at terminals for each space to design water flows. 1. Measure flow at terminals. 2. Adjust each terminal to design flow. 3. Re-measure each terminal after it is adjusted. 4. Position control valves to bypass the coil, and adjust the bypass valve to maintain design flow. 5. Perform temperature tests after flows have been balanced. D. For systems with pressure-independent valves at terminals: 1. Measure differential pressure and verify that it is within manufacturer's specified range. 2. Perform temperature tests after flows have been verified. E. For systems without pressure-independent valves or flow-measuring devices at terminals: 1. Measure and balance coils by either coil pressure drop or temperature method. 2. If balanced by coil pressure drop, perform temperature tests after flows have been verified. F. Verify final system conditions as follows: 1. Re-measure and confirm that total water flow is within design. 2. Re-measure final pumps' operating data, TDH, volts, amps, and static profile. 3. Mark final settings. G. Verify that memory stops have been set. Technical Specifications 15950 - 8Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 3.9 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Balance systems with automatic two- and three-way control valves by setting systems at maximum flow through heat-exchange terminals, and proceed as specified above for hydronic systems. B. Adjust the variable-flow hydronic system as follows: 1. Verify that the differential-pressure sensor is located as indicated. 2. Determine whether there is diversity in the system. C. For systems with no diversity: 1. Adjust pumps to deliver total design gpm. a. Measure total water flow. 1) Position valves for full flow through coils. 2) Measure flow by main flow meter, if installed. 3) If main flow meter is not installed, determine flow by pump TDH or exchanger pressure drop. b. Measure pump TDH as follows: 1) Measure discharge pressure directly at the pump outlet flange or in discharge pipe prior to any valves. 2) Measure inlet pressure directly at the pump inlet flange or in suction pipe prior to any valves or strainers. 3) Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights. 4) Verify pump impeller size by measuring the TDH with the discharge valve closed. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size. 5) With valves open, read pump TDH. Adjust pump discharge valve until design water flow is achieved. C. Monitor motor performance during procedures and do not operate motor in an overloaded condition. 2. Adjust flow-measuring devices installed in mains and branches to design water flows. a. Measure flow in main and branch pipes. b. Adjust main and branch balance valves for design flow. C. Re-measure each main and branch after all have been adjusted. 3. Adjust flow-measuring devices installed at terminals for each space to design water flows. a. Measure flow at terminals. b. Adjust each terminal to design flow. C. Re-measure each terminal after it is adjusted. d. Position control valves to bypass the coil and adjust the bypass valve to maintain design flow. Technical Specifications 15950 - 9Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC e. Perform temperature tests after flows have been balanced. 4. For systems with pressure-independent valves at terminals: a. Measure differential pressure and verify that it is within manufacturer's specified range. b. Perform temperature tests after flows have been verified. 5. For systems without pressure-independent valves or flow-measuring devices at terminals: a. Measure and balance coils by either coil pressure drop or temperature method. b. If balanced by coil pressure drop, perform temperature tests after flows have been verified. 6. Prior to verifying final system conditions, determine the system differential- pressure set point. 7. If the pump discharge valve was used to set total system flow with variable- frequency controller at 60 Hz, at completion open discharge valve 100 percent and allow variable-frequency controller to control system differential-pressure set point. Record pump data under both conditions. 8. Mark final settings and verify that all memory stops have been set. 9. Verify final system conditions as follows: a. Re-measure and confirm that total water flow is within design. b. Re-measure final pumps' operating data, TDH, volts, amps, and static profile. c. Mark final settings. 10. Verify that memory stops have been set. D. For systems with diversity: 1. Determine diversity factor. 2. Simulate system diversity by closing required number of control valves, as approved by the design engineer. 3. Adjust pumps to deliver total design gpm. a. Measure total water flow. 1) Position valves for full flow through coils. 2) Measure flow by main flow meter, if installed. 3) If main flow meter is not installed, determine flow by pump TDH or exchanger pressure drop. b. Measure pump TDH as follows: 1) Measure discharge pressure directly at the pump outlet flange or in discharge pipe prior to any valves. 2) Measure inlet pressure directly at the pump inlet flange or in suction pipe prior to any valves or strainers. 3) Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights. Technical Specifications 15950 - 10Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 4) Verify pump impeller size by measuring the TDH with the discharge valve closed. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size. 5) With valves open, read pump TDH. Adjust pump discharge valve until design water flow is achieved. C. Monitor motor performance during procedures and do not operate motor in an overloaded condition. 4. Adjust flow-measuring devices installed in mains and branches to design water flows. a. Measure flow in main and branch pipes. b. Adjust main and branch balance valves for design flow. C. Re-measure each main and branch after all have been adjusted. 5. Adjust flow-measuring devices installed at terminals for each space to design water flows. a. Measure flow at terminals. b. Adjust each terminal to design flow. C. Re-measure each terminal after it is adjusted. d. Position control valves to bypass the coil, and adjust the bypass valve to maintain design flow. e. Perform temperature tests after flows have been balanced. 6. For systems with pressure-independent valves at terminals: a. Measure differential pressure, and verify that it is within manufacturer's specified range. b. Perform temperature tests after flows have been verified. 7. For systems without pressure-independent valves or flow-measuring devices at terminals: a. Measure and balance coils by either coil pressure drop or temperature method. b. If balanced by coil pressure drop, perform temperature tests after flows have been verified. 8. Open control valves that were shut. Close a sufficient number of control valves that were previously open to maintain diversity, and balance terminals that were just opened. 9. Prior to verifying final system conditions, determine system differential-pressure set point. 10. If the pump discharge valve was used to set total system flow with variable- frequency controller at 60 Hz, at completion open discharge valve 100 percent and allow variable-frequency controller to control system differential-pressure set point. Record pump data under both conditions. 11. Mark final settings and verify that memory stops have been set. 12. Verify final system conditions as follows: a. Re-measure and confirm that total water flow is within design. Technical Specifications 15950 - 11Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC b. Re-measure final pumps' operating data, TDH, volts, amps, and static profile. c. Mark final settings. 13. Verify that memory stops have been set. 3.10 TOLERANCES A. Set HVAC system's airflow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances: 1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent. 3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent. B. Maintaining pressure relationships as designed shall have priority over the tolerances specified above. 3.11 FINAL REPORT A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems. 1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer. 2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration. 3. Certify validity and accuracy of field data. B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following: 1. Pump curves. 2. Fan curves. 3. Manufacturers' test data. 4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 5. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and Product Data. C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data: 1. Title page. 2. Name and address of the TAB specialist. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report. 10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. Number each page in the report. 11. Summary of contents including the following: a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. Technical Specifications 15950 - 12Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC C. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents. 12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings. 14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values. 15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following: a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. C. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils. e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems. g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller. h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance. D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following: 1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows. 2. Water and steam flow rates. 3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. 4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations. 5. Terminal units. 6. Balancing stations. 7. Position of balancing devices. E. RTU / Air-Handling-Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following: 1. Unit Data: a. Unit identification. b. Location. C. Make and type. d. Model number and unit size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Unit arrangement and class. g. Discharge arrangement. h. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. i. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches. j. Number, make, and size of belts. k. Number, type, and size of filters. 2. Motor Data: a. Motor make, and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. C. Volts, phase, and hertz. Technical Specifications 15950 - 13Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches. 3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. C. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg. f. Preheat-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. g. Cooling-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. h. Heating-coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. i. Outdoor airflow in cfm. j. Return airflow in cfm. k. Outdoor-air damper position. I. Return-air damper position. m. Vortex damper position. F. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports: 1. Coil Data: a. System identification. b. Location. C. Coil type. d. Number of rows. e. Fin spacing in fins per inch o.c. f. Make and model number. g. Face area in sq. ft.. h. Tube size in NPS. i. Tube and fin materials. j. Circuiting arrangement. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Airflow rate in cfm. b. Average face velocity in fpm. C. Air pressure drop in inches wg. d. Outdoor-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. h. Water flow rate in gpm. i. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. j. Entering-water temperature in deg F. k. Leaving-water temperature in deg F. I. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types. M. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig. n. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg F. o. Inlet steam pressure in psig. Technical Specifications 15950 - 14Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC G. Gas-Fired Heat Apparatus Test Reports: In addition to manufacturer's factory startup equipment reports, include the following: 1. Unit Data: a. System identification. b. Location. C. Make and type. d. Model number and unit size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Fuel type in input data. g. Output capacity in Btu/h. h. Ignition type. i. Burner-control types. j. Motor horsepower and rpm. k. Motor volts, phase, and hertz. I. Motor full-load amperage and service factor. M. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. n. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Entering-air temperature in deg F. C. Leaving-air temperature in deg F. d. Air temperature differential in deg F. e. Entering-air static pressure in inches wg. f. Leaving-air static pressure in inches wg. g. Air static-pressure differential in inches wg. h. Low-fire fuel input in Btu/h. i. High-fire fuel input in Btu/h. j. Manifold pressure in psig. k. High-temperature-limit setting in deg F. I. Operating set point in Btu/h. M. Motor voltage at each connection. n. Motor amperage for each phase. o. Heating value of fuel in Btu/h. H. Electric-Coil Test Reports: For electric furnaces, duct coils, and electric coils installed in central-station air-handling units, include the following: 1. Unit Data: a. System identification. b. Location. C. Coil identification. d. Capacity in Btu/h. e. Number of stages. f. Connected volts, phase, and hertz. g. Rated amperage. h. Airflow rate in cfm. i. Face area in sq. ft.. Technical Specifications 15950 - 15Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC j. Minimum face velocity in fpm. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Heat output in Btu/h. b. Airflow rate in cfm. C. Air velocity in fpm. d. Entering-air temperature in deg F. e. Leaving-air temperature in deg F. f. Voltage at each connection. g. Amperage for each phase. I. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following: 1. Fan Data: a. System identification. b. Location. C. Make and type. d. Model number and size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Arrangement and class. g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. h. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches. 2. Motor Data: a. Motor make, and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. C. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in inches. g. Number, make, and size of belts. 3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. C. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. e. Suction static pressure in inches wg. J. Round, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the duct cross-section and record the following: 1. Report Data: a. System and air-handling-unit number. b. Location and zone. C. Traverse air temperature in deg F. Technical Specifications 15950 - 16Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC d. Duct static pressure in inches wg. e. Duct size in inches. f. Duct area in sq. ft.. g. Indicated airflow rate in cfm. h. Indicated velocity in fpm. i. Actual airflow rate in cfm. j. Actual average velocity in fpm. k. Barometric pressure in psig. K. Air-Terminal-Device Reports: 1. Unit Data: a. System and air-handling unit identification. b. Location and zone. C. Apparatus used for test. d. Area served. e. Make. f. Number from system diagram. g. Type and model number. h. Size. i. Effective area in sq. ft.. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Airflow rate in cfm. b. Air velocity in fpm. C. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm. d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm. e. Final airflow rate in cfm. f. Final velocity in fpm. g. Space temperature in deg F. L. Pump Test Reports: Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves and include the following: 1. Unit Data: a. Unit identification. b. Location. C. Service. d. Make and size. e. Model number and serial number. f. Water flow rate in gpm. g. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. h. Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig. i. Pump rpm. j. Impeller diameter in inches. k. Motor make and frame size. I. Motor horsepower and rpm. M. Voltage at each connection. n. Amperage for each phase. o. Full-load amperage and service factor. Technical Specifications 15950 - 17Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC p. Seal type. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Static head in feet of head or psig. b. Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig. C. Actual impeller size in inches. d. Full-open flow rate in gpm. e. Full-open pressure in feet of head or psig. f. Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig. g. Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig. h. Final total pressure in feet of head or psig. i. Final water flow rate in gpm. j. Voltage at each connection. k. Amperage for each phase. M. Instrument Calibration Reports: 1. Report Data: a. Instrument type and make. b. Serial number. C. Application. d. Dates of use. e. Dates of calibration. 3.12 VERIFICATION OF TAB REPORT A. The TAB specialist's test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of Construction Manager or commissioning authority. B. Construction Manager or Commissioning authority shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final report, to be rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements recorded or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour business day. C. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as "FAILED." D. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be considered incomplete and shall be rejected. E. If TAB work fails, proceed as follows: 1. TAB specialists shall recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report and request a second final inspection. 2. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the services of another TAB specialist to complete TAB work according to the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the original TAB specialist's final payment. Technical Specifications 15950 - 18Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC F. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.13 ADDITIONAL TESTS A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions. B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions. END OF SECTION 15950 Technical Specifications 15950 - 19Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC SECTION 16010 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. Division 26 incorporates by reference the latest revisions of the following standards. They are part of Division 26 insofar as specified and modified herein. In the event of conflict between the requirements of Division 26 and those of the listed documents, the requirements of Division 26 shall prevail. B. Unless otherwise specified, references to documents shall mean the documents in effect on the effective date of the Agreement. If referenced documents have been discontinued by the issuing organization, references to those documents shall mean the replacement documents issued or otherwise identified by that organization or, if there are no replacement documents, the last version of the document before it was discontinued. C. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA): National Electrical Installation Standards. 2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). b. Z535.4, Product Safety Signs and Labels. 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 4. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 1.02 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. All equipment anchoring and mounting shall be in accordance with manufacturer's requirements for the seismic zone criteria. 1.03 SHIPMENT AND STORAGE: A. Materials and equipment shall be stored in a manner to keep them dry and clean. Equipment and materials to be located indoors shall be stored indoors and sealed with plastic film wrap. Electrical and electronic equipment found stored or staged outdoors over night or in inclement weather shall be considered grounds for equipment rejection and shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner. 1.04 UTILITY SERVICE DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITY A. Electrical Utility: 1. Incoming underground electrical service facilities provided by Idaho Power is work provided outside this Contract. Schedule and coordinate work of Idaho Power as required to provide electric service to the Work. Idaho Power will provide: Technical Specifications 16010-1 Basic Electrical Requirements a. Pad-mounted oil filled transformers. b. Medium-voltage primary power cable from service pole(s) to transformer(s). c. Medium-voltage cable terminations at sectionalizing cabinets, pad- mounted transformers, and overhead service lines. d. Revenue meter. 2. Under this Contract provide customer required primary power service provisions and electrical work including, but not limited to: a. Primary trench excavation and backfill. b. Primary duct bank from service pole(s) to transformer(s). c. Transformer pad site preparation. d. Transformer pad. e. Metering facilities. f. Work and materials not provided by electric utility. B. Telecommunications.- 1. Interior telecommunications central station equipment (telephone instruments, telephone switches, data switches, hubs, servers, software, etc.) and wide area network communications is work provided outside this Contract. Under this Contract provide raceways, fiber optic cable, outlet and junction boxes, cover plates, pull wires, for local area network elements as indicated. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Electrical service components. 2. Nameplates, signs, and labels. B. Seismic requirements: 1. Provide electrical equipment with construction and anchorage to supporting structures designed to resist site seismic loads based on the design criteria in Structural Drawings. 2. Seismic qualification. For equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design category C, D, E or F, prepare and submit the following: a. Statement of seismic qualification, and special seismic certification: 1) "Statement of seismic qualification:" Provide manufacturer's statement that the equipment satisfies the seismic design requirements of the building code indicated in Drawings, including the requirements of ASCE 7, Chapter 13. 2) "Special seismic certification:" Provide manufacturer's certification that the equipment, when subjected to shake table testing in accordance with ICC-ES AC 156, meets the "Post-Test Functional Compliance Verification" requirements of ICC-ES AC 156 for "Components with Ip = 1.5." Compliance shall include both operability and containment of hazardous materials as appropriate to the unit being tested. Technical Specifications 16010-2 Basic Electrical Requirements b. Substantiating test data: With seismic qualification and special seismic certification statements, submit results of testing in accordance with ICC-ES AC 156. 3. Anchoring design calculations and details: a. Submit project-specific drawings and supporting calculations, prepared and sealed by a professional engineer licensed in the state where the Project is being constructed, and showing details for anchoring electrical equipment to its supports and for anchoring supports provided with the equipment to the structure. 4. Exemptions: Seismic qualification documents and anchoring design calculations and details are not required for the following equipment: a. Temporary or moveable equipment. b. Equipment anchored to the structure and having a total weight of 20 pounds or less. c. Distribution equipment anchored to the structure and having a total unit weight of 3 pounds per linear foot, or less. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70. Where required by Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), material and equipment shall be labeled or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ, in order to provide a basis for approval under the NEC. B. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. shall conform to those standards and shall have an applied UL listing mark or label. C. Provide materials and equipment acceptable to AHJ for Class, Division, and Group of hazardous area indicated. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. Provide an electrical, instrumentation and control system, including all equipment, raceways, and any other components required for a complete installation that meets the environmental conditions for the Site. Unless otherwise specified, equipment and materials shall be sized and de-rated for the ambient conditions but not less than an ambient temperature of 40 degrees C at an elevation of 2,000 feet without exceeding the manufacturer's stated tolerances. 1. Provide all electrical components and equipment fully rated for continuous operation at this altitude, with no additional derating factors applied. 2. Provide additional temperature conditioning equipment to maintain all equipment in non-conditioned spaces subject to these ambient temperatures, with a band of 10 degrees Fahrenheit above the minimum operating temperature and 10 degrees Fahrenheit below maximum operating temperature, as determined by the equipment manufacturer's guidelines: 3. Provide all power conduits wiring for these devices (e.g. heaters, fans, etc.) whether indicated on the Drawings or not. B. Seismic load resistance: Technical Specifications 16010-3 Basic Electrical Requirements 1. Provide electrical equipment with construction and anchorage to supporting structures designed to resist site seismic loads as determined using seismic design criteria specified in the Structural Drawings. C. NEC area classifications, if any, are shown on the Drawings. D. The following interior areas are classified as wet: Use materials and methods required for such areas: 1. Sorting facility 2. Aeration tower E. The following interior areas are classified Class 1, Division 2, Group B and corrosive. Use materials and methods required for such areas: 1. Formalin Storage Room (Sorting and Spawning Facility). F. All other interior areas are classified as indoor and dry: G. All exterior areas, or noted otherwise on the drawings, are classified wet. Use materials and methods required for such areas. 1.08 BASIS OF DESIGN A. Basis of design includes the following: 1. Equipment and motors as shown in the electrical one-line drawing(s) and load/panel schedules. 2. Digital control systems and associated network protocols based on a technology platform. Such digital control systems are often proprietary in nature and include, but are not limited to, lighting control systems, generator control systems, fire alarm systems, Process Instrumentation and Control System PICS (i.e. SCADA) systems, and motor control systems. B. In the event that different equipment or sizes are provided in order for the vendor's equipment to meet mechanical performance requirements, the contractor shall coordinate various suppliers, vendors, and subcontractors to change the required electrical conduit, circuits, breakers, motor controllers, and accessories, etc. as necessary to meet the vendor's equipment installation requirements. The traits and characteristics of all provided materials, equipment, and devices shall meet the specifications. These changes to materials, equipment, and devices shall be at no cost to the Owner. Electrical submittal information shall be coordinated with the equipment and motors provided. C. The contract for the work will be on the basis of materials and equipment included in the Contract Documents, and those "or-equal" and substitute products subsequently approved as outlined in Division 1. The burden of proof regarding proposed product merit and the associated cost by the Engineer/Owner to evaluate the product merit is upon the Bidder. Any assumptions regarding the possibility of post-bid approvals of or-equal or substitution requests are made at Bidder's sole risk. Technical Specifications 16010-4 Basic Electrical Requirements 1.09 DEMOLITION A. Where demolition is specified or indicated on the Drawings, disconnect all associated electrical equipment and render the equipment safe. B. Remove and dispose of all conduit, wire, electrical equipment, controls, etc. associated with the items and/or areas to be demolished as indicated on the Drawings unless otherwise indicated. C. For each piece of equipment to be removed, remove all ancillary components (e.g. instruments, solenoid valves, disconnect switches, etc.). D. Where conduit removal, other than associated with equipment to be removed, is indicated on the Drawings: 1. Remove exposed conduit to the point of encasement or burial. 2. Cut conduit flush and plug or cap encased or buried conduit. E. Where conduits are to remain in place and removal is not indicated on the Drawings: 1. Cap conduit open ends. 2. Re-label empty conduits as spare. F. Remove all wire back to the source for all conduits to be removed or abandoned in place. G. Provide new nameplates for modified electrical distribution equipment, motor control centers etc. to identify equipment and circuits that are no longer used as spares. H. Provide new typewritten schedules for all modified panelboards. 1.10 EQUIPMENT COORDINATION AND SYSTEM RESPONSIBILITY A. The Contractor is responsible to review and coordinate the equipment supplied from various manufacturers and vendors. This includes but is not limited to the following: 1. Obtaining specific information on equipment ratings and sizes and verifying the electrical components supplied meet the requirements such as voltage, phase, frequency, starter types, etc. 2. Selecting and providing all components of approved substitute or"or-equal" materials and equipment, updating the design (as required), and provide all associated components such that they are compatible, operate reliably, and comprise a functional and listed system suitable for the required performance. 3. Providing equipment that will fit within the space allocated and meet OSHA and N.E.C. clearances. 4. Coordinating supplied equipment's electrical power and control requirements. 5. Providing power and control equipment, wiring, and raceways to meet the requirements of the mechanical equipment supplied. 6. Providing all necessary control wiring and components for any special requirements from an equipment manufacturer. 7. Providing single source coordination responsibility and ensure all system elements are products for which the manufacturer has accepted system responsibility. Agents, representatives, or entities not a direct division of the Technical Specifications 16010-5 Basic Electrical Requirements manufacturing corporation will not be accepted as a substitute for the system manufacturer. 8. Confirming the equipment manufacturer does not condition or void any warranty for the performance of Division 26 products due to incompatibility of any components covered in other Divisions. This requirement does not obligate the manufacturer to warranty the workmanship or quality of components not manufactured by them. B. The Contractor shall verify as a minimum: 1. Correct voltage, phase and frequency 2. Size and space requirements 3. Mounting requirements 4. Correct motor starter type and size. 5. Proper coordination with the controls and control system integrator. C. Bring any discrepancies between the electrical equipment and other equipment to the immediate attention of the Owner. D. The Contractor shall assure that no instrumentation or control interferences are created by the variable frequency drives (VFDs) or load wiring. The Contractor shall coordinate with the VFD manufacturer to provide necessary separation of conductors or shielding and/or filtering equipment as required by the VFD manufacturer. If interferences do occur, the Contractor shall be responsible to take corrective action at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.11 WIRING FOR VENDOR PACKAGES A. Equipment specifications indicate when the Vendor is responsible for providing interconnection wiring between components of a Vendor package installed on separate skids or assemblies. In this circumstance, interconnection wiring between skids or assemblies in a Vendor package shall be by Vendor. B. Where equipment specifications do not specify Vendor furnished wiring between skids or assemblies in a Vendor package, the Contractor shall provide and install interconnection wiring between skids or assemblies per the Vendor's interconnection wiring requirements. Interconnection wiring between skids or assemblies in a Vendor package is not shown on the drawings. C. Determination of circuit requirements. 1. Coordinate cable/conductor requirements with the selected Vendors to determine the correct wiring required to interconnect the package system components/skids. 2. Wiring between Vendor furnished components shipped on separate skids or assemblies shall conform to requirements specified in Division 26 and other Divisions. 3. Wiring between the facility control system and packaged system components/skids are as shown on the drawings. 4. Wiring between external power supplies and the packaged system components/skids are as shown on the drawings. Technical Specifications 16010-6 Basic Electrical Requirements D. Assign numbers and tagging for unscheduled circuit and raceway between Vendor- furnished components on separate skids or assemblies. Coordinate this information in submittals, record drawings, and O&M manuals. E. Update contract documents in the record drawing set to include the work provided for wiring the vendor packages. 1.12 CIRCUIT AND RACEWAY SCHEDULE A. Contractor shall develop circuit and raceway tagging as describe herein and as approved by the Owner. All circuits, raceways and cables shall be tagged at all terminations, switchboards, panelboards, VFDs, MCCs, handholes, terminal junction boxes, and equipment in accordance with the approved numbers on the circuit/raceway schedule. B. Prefix Modifiers: The following prefix modifiers shall be used when scheduling/tagging circuits and raceways: PREFIX TYPE OF FUNCTION H POWER ABOVE 600V P POWER 120V TO 600V C CONTROL A ANALOG SIGNALS (I.E. 4-20MA) D DATA PC COMPOSITE OF POWER AND CONTROL F OPTICAL FIBER PSP, CSP SPARE POWER, SPARE CONTROL C. Circuit Schedule: 1. Schedule shall include assigned circuit designation, from (equipment or terminal junction box tag number), to (equipment or terminal junction box tag number). 2. Circuit Designation: Prefixes shall be followed by delimiter (-), followed by the end device equipment/instrument tag number. D. Raceway Schedule: 1. Schedule shall include assigned raceway designation, from (equipment, terminal junction box, or handhole tag number), to (equipment, terminal junction box, or handhole tag number). 2. Raceway Designation: Prefixes shall be followed by a delimiter (-), followed by a sequential raceway number. Technical Specifications 16010-7 Basic Electrical Requirements 1.13 ARC FLASH MITIGATION METHODS A. The following mitigation method requirements shall apply to all power distribution and utilization equipment supplied for any products supplied on the project and applies to all equipment divisions in the Contract Documents. Refer to the NFPA-70 (NEC), and NFPA-70E (Electrical Safety in the Workplace) for equipment labeling requirements. B. Equipment Labels: Equipment labels shall be installed on the outside of the electrical equipment enclosure, cabinet, and panels to avoid opening the equipment to access the manufacture's data or the equipment ratings. C. Hinged Doors: Power distribution equipment shall have hinged rear doors where back access is shown. D. Insulated Power Bus and Insulated Cable Boots: 1. Provide insulated power bus in power distribution equipment where accessible to installers or maintenance workers. 2. Provide cable boots for power conductor connections to insulate the exposed power conductor connections. E. Power and Control Equipment Separation: 1. Provide separation between power equipment within an enclosure, cabinet, or panel by the use of barriers, separate access doors, or by other means. 2. Provide separation barriers between main breaker feeders coming into equipment and other termination points or bussing on the load side of the main breaker. F. Automatic Shutters: Provide automatic shutters, where possible, to close the access to the power bus when a power device is not engaged. G. Arc flash maintenance system for circuit breakers in other Division 26 specifications. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Where two or more units of the same class of material or equipment are required, provide products of a single manufacturer. Component parts of materials or equipment need not be products of the same manufacturer. B. Material and equipment installed in heated and ventilated areas shall be capable of continuous operation at their specified ratings within an ambient temperature range of 40 degrees F to 104 degrees F. C. Materials and equipment installed outdoors shall be capable of continuous operation at their specified rating within the ambient temperature range specified. Technical Specifications 16010-8 Basic Electrical Requirements 2.02 EQUIPMENT FINISH A. Manufacturer's standard finish color, except where specific color is indicated. If manufacturer has no standard color, finish equipment in accordance with light gray color finish as approved by Engineer. 2.03 NAMEPLATES A. Nameplates shall be provided on all electrical devices, including but not limited to motor control equipment, switchgear, panelboards, control stations, junction boxes, panels, harmonic filters, instruments, disconnect switches, indicating lights, meters, fire alarm panels/devices, and all electrical equipment enclosures. B. Nameplates shall also be provided on all electrical panel interior equipment, including but not limited to relays, circuit breakers, power supplies, terminals, contactors, and other devices. C. Equipment nameplates shall have both the equipment name and number. D. Unless noted otherwise, nameplates shall be made of 1/16" thick machine engraved laminated phenolic having black letters (not less than 1/8" high for pushbuttons/selector switches, and 3/16" high for other electrical equipment) on white background or as shown on the drawings or other sections of the specifications. E. Nameplates on the interior of panels and fire alarm notification/detection devices shall be White Polyester with printed thermal transfer lettering and permanent pressure sensitive acrylic; TYTON 822 or equal. All nameplates shall include the equipment name and number (and function, if applicable). F. Provide warning nameplates on all panels and equipment which contain multiple power sources. Lettering shall be white on red background. G. Nameplates shall be secured to equipment with stainless steel screws/fasteners. H. Nameplates for disconnect switches shall contain name and number, source tag number, as well as voltage, phases and colors of conductors. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Electrical Drawings show general locations of equipment, devices, and raceway, unless specifically dimensioned. Contractor shall be responsible for actual location of equipment and devices and for proper routing and support of raceways, subject to approval of Engineer. B. Check approximate locations of light fixtures, switches, electrical outlets, equipment, and other electrical system components shown on Drawings for conflicts with Technical Specifications 16010-9 Basic Electrical Requirements openings, structural members, and components of other systems and equipment having fixed locations. In the event of conflicts, notify Engineer in writing. C. Install work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation, unless otherwise specified. D. Keep openings in boxes and equipment closed during construction. E. Lay out work carefully in advance. Do not cut or notch any structural member or building surface without specific approval of Engineer. Carefully perform cutting, channeling, chasing, or drilling of floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, paving, or other surfaces required for the installation, support, or anchorage of conduit, raceways, or other electrical materials and equipment. Following such work, restore surfaces to original condition. F. Unless otherwise detailed or dimensioned, electrical layout drawings are diagrammatic. The Contractor shall coordinate the field location of electrical material or equipment with the work of other disciplines and subcontractors. Minor changes in location of electrical material or equipment made prior to installation shall be made at no cost to the Owner. 3.02 ANCHORING AND MOUNTING A. Equipment anchoring and mounting shall be in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. 3.03 COMBINING CIRCUITS INTO COMMON RACEWAY A. Drawings show each homerun circuit to be provided. Do not combine power or control circuits into common raceways without authorization of Engineer. B. Homerun circuits shown on Drawings indicate functional wiring requirements for power and control circuits. Circuits may be combined into common raceways in accordance with the following requirements: 1. Analog control circuits from devices in same general area to same destination. a. No power or AC discrete control circuits shall be combined in same conduit with analog circuits. b. No Class 2 or Class 3 circuits including, but not limited to, HVAC control circuits, fire alarm circuits, paging system circuits shall be combined with power or Class 1 circuits. c. Analog circuits shall be continuous from source to destination. Do not add TJB, splice, or combine into a multi-pair cable without authorization of Engineer. d. Raceways: Do not exceed 40 percent fill. e. Changes shall be documented on record drawings. 2. Discrete control circuits from devices in the same general area to the same destination. Technical Specifications 16010-10 Basic Electrical Requirements a. No power or analog control circuits shall be combined in same conduit with discrete circuits. b. No Class 2 or Class 3 circuits including, but not limited to, HVAC control circuits, fire alarm circuits, and paging system circuits shall be combined with power or Class 1 circuits. c. Raceways: Do not exceed 40 percent fill. d. Changes shall be documented on record drawings. 3. Power circuits from loads in same general area to same source location (such as: panelboard, switchboard). a. Lighting Circuits: Combine no more than three circuits to a single raceway. Contractor shall be responsible for increasing conduit and conductor size if derating is required by NEC. b. Receptacle Circuits, 120-Volt Only: Combine no more than three circuits to a single raceway. Provide a separate neutral conductor for each circuit. Contractor shall be responsible for increasing conduit and conductor size if derating is required by NEC. c. All Other Power Circuits: Do not combine power circuits without authorization of Engineer. 3.04 NAMEPLATES, SIGNS, AND LABELS A. Arc Flash Protection Warning Signs: 1. Field mark switchboards panelboards to warn qualified persons of potential arc-flash hazards. Locate marking so to be clearly visible to persons before working on energized equipment. 2. Use arc flash hazard boundary, energy level, PPE level and description, shock hazard, bolted fault current, and equipment name as basis for warning signs. B. Equipment Nameplates: 1. Provide a nameplate to label electrical equipment including switchgear, switchboards, panelboards, motor starters, transformers, terminal junction boxes, disconnect switches, switches and control stations. 2. Switchgear, transformer, and terminal junction box nameplates shall include equipment designation. 3. Disconnect switch, starter, and control station nameplates shall include name and number of equipment powered or controlled by that device. 4. Switchboard and panelboard nameplates shall include equipment designation, service voltage, and phases. C. Equipment Labels: 1. Equipment labels shall be installed on the outside of the electrical equipment enclosure, cabinet, and panels to avoid opening the equipment to access the manufacture's data or the equipment ratings. 3.05 MOTOR CONNECTIONS A. Verify that the motors are purchased with the correct size motor termination boxes for the circuit content specified in the conduit and cable schedules or submit custom fabrication drawing indicating proposed motor termination box material, size, Technical Specifications 16010-11 Basic Electrical Requirements gasket, termination kit, grounding terminal, boot type insulated motor lead connection (T&B type MSC, or equal), and motor terminal box connection/support system. Verify the motor termination box location prior to raceway rough-in. 3.06 CONDUCTOR INSTALLATION A. An enclosure containing disconnecting means, overcurrent devices, or electrical equipment shall not be used as a wireway or raceway for conductors not terminating within the enclosure. Provide wireways, raceways, termination boxes, or junction boxes external to the enclosure for the other conductors. 3.07 LOAD BALANCE A. Drawings and Specifications indicate circuiting to electrical loads and distribution equipment. B. Balance electrical load between phases as nearly as possible on switchboards, panelboards, and other equipment where balancing is required. C. When loads must be reconnected to different circuits to balance phase loads, maintain accurate record of changes made, and provide circuit directory that lists final circuit arrangement. 3.08 CLEANING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING A. Cleaning: Throughout the Work, clean interior and exterior of devices and equipment by removing debris and vacuuming. B. Touchup Paint: 1. Touchup scratches, scrapes and chips on exterior and interior surfaces of devices and equipment with finish matching type, color, and consistency and type of surface of original finish. C. If extensive damage is done to equipment paint surfaces, refinish entire equipment in a manner that provides a finish equal to or better than factory finish, that meets requirements of Specification, and is acceptable to Engineer. 3.09 PROTECTION FOLLOWING INSTALLATION A. Protect materials and equipment from corrosion, physical damage, and effects of moisture on insulation and contact surfaces. B. When equipment intended for indoor installation is installed at Contractor's convenience in areas where subject to dampness, moisture, dirt or other adverse atmosphere until completion of construction, ensure adequate protection from these atmospheres is provided and acceptable to Engineer. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 16010-12 Basic Electrical Requirements SECTION 16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A167, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium- Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. b. Al011/A1011 M, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, and Strip, Hot- Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low Alloy and High-Strength Low Alloy Formability. c. E814, Method of Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops. 2. Canadian Standards Association (CSA). 3. International Society of Automation (ISA): RP12.06.01, Wiring Practices for Hazardous (Classified) Locations Instrumentation—Part 1: Intrinsic Safety. 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum). b. AB 1, Molded Case Circuit Breakers, Molded Case Switches, and Circuit- Breaker Enclosures. c. ICS 2, Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays Rated 600 Volts. d. ICS 5, Industrial Control and Systems: Control Circuit and Pilot Devices. e. KS 1, Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Switches (600 Volts Maximum). 5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 6. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): a. 98, Standard for Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches. b. 248, Standard for Low Voltage Fuses. c. 486E, Standard for Equipment Wiring Terminals for use with Aluminum and/or Copper Conductors. d. 489, Standard for Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and Circuit Breaker Enclosures. e. 508, Standard for Industrial Control Equipment. f. 943, Standard for Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters. g. 1059, Standard for Terminal Blocks. h. 1479, Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Provide manufacturers' data for the following: a. Control devices. b. Control relays. c. Circuit breakers. d. Fused switches. e. Nonfused switches. Technical Specifications 16050-1 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods f. Timers. g. Fuses. h. Terminal blocks. i. Magnetic control relays. j. Time delay relays. k. Magnetic contactors. I. Support and framing channel. m. Firestopping. n. Enclosures. 1.03 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish, tag, and box for shipment and storage the following spare parts and special tools: 1. Fuses, 0 to 600 Volts: Six of each type and each current rating installed. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 NONFUSED SWITCH, INDIVIDUAL, LOW VOLTAGE A. NEMA KS 1. B. Quick-make, quick-break, motor rated, load-break, heavy-duty (HD) type with external markings clearly indicating ON/OFF positions. C. Lugs: Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at NEC 75 degrees C ampacity. D. Auxiliary Contact: 1. As required to disconnect variable frequency drive control power or other auxiliary controls. 2. Operation: Make before power contacts make and break before power contacts break. 3. Contact Rating: 7,200VA make, 720VA break, at 600V, NEMA ICS 5 Designation A600. E. Enclosures: See Article Enclosures. F. Interlock: Enclosure and switch to prevent opening cover with switch in ON position. Provide bypass feature for use by qualified personnel. 2.02 FUSE, 250-VOLT AND 600-VOLT A. Power Distribution, General: 1. Current-limiting, with 200,000 ampere rms interrupting rating. 2. Provide to fit mountings specified with switches. 3. UL 248. B. Power Distribution, Ampere Ratings 1 Amp to 600 Amps: 1. Class: RK-1. 2. Type: Dual element, with time delay. Technical Specifications 16050-2 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 3. Manufacturers and Products: a. Bussmann; Types LPS-RK (600 volts) and LPN-RK (250 volts). b. Littelfuse; Types LLS-RK (600 volts) and LLN-RK (250 volts). C. Cable Limiters: 1. 600V or less; crimp to copper cable, bolt to bus or terminal pad. 2. Manufacturer and Product: Bussmann; K Series. D. Ferrule: 1. 600V or less, rated for applied voltage, small dimension. 2. Ampere Ratings: 1/10 amp to 30 amps. 3. Dual-element time-delay, time-delay, or nontime-delay as required. 4. Provide with blocks or holders as indicated and suitable for location and use. 5. Manufacturers: a. Bussmann. b. Littlefuse, Inc. 2.03 CONTROL DEVICES A. HOA Padlocking Cover: Provide padlocking cover on all HOA switches. Cover shall be clear plastic. AB 800T or approved equal. B. Potentiometer Units: Provide ohm value for the application. Provide with back plate marked with 0-100% in 10% increments. C. Contact Rating: 7,200VA make, 720VA break, at 600V, NEMA ICS 5 Designation A600. Provide bifurcated contacts for 24Vdc switching. D. Selector Switch Operating Lever: Standard. E. Emergency stop/close buttons shall be 2-position, push-pull/twist release type with red jumbo mushroom head. F. Indicating Light: press-to-test LED, full voltage. G. Pushbutton Color: 1. ON or START: Black. 2. OFF or STOP: Red. H. Pushbutton and selector switch lockable in OFF position where indicated. I. Legend Plate: 1. Material: Aluminum. 2. Engraving: Enamel filled in high contrasting color. 3. Text Arrangement: 11-character/spaces on one line, 14-character/spaces on each of two lines, as required, indicating specific function. 4. Letter Height: 7/64-inch. J. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Allen Bradley 800H or 800T, or equivalent. Technical Specifications 16050-3 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 2.04 INDICATING LAMP COLORS A. All indicating lamps shall have an integrated lamp-test function or a common lamp test switch for all lamps on a single line-up of equipment. B. Unless otherwise specified, indicating lights shall be equipped with colored lenses in accordance with the following schedule: Color Function Example Green Run, open valve Equipment operating, motor running Red Stopped, Closed valve Alarm, end of cycle, motor stopped White or clear Normal condition, Control power on, status OK Read Amber (yellow) Abnormal condition Failure of equipment or status abnormal, fault condition 2.05 TERMINAL BLOCK, 600 VOLTS A. UL 486E and UL 1059. B. Size components to allow insertion of necessary wire sizes. C. Capable of termination of control circuits entering or leaving equipment, panels, or boxes. D. Screw clamp compression, dead front barrier type, with current bar providing direct contact with wire between compression screw and yoke. E. Yoke, current bar, and clamping screw of high strength and high conductivity metal. F. Yoke shall guide all strands of wire into terminal. G. Current bar shall ensure vibration-proof connection. H. Terminals: 1. Capable of wire connections without special preparation other than stripping. 2. Capable of jumper installation with no loss of terminal or rail space. 3. Individual, rail mounted. I. Marking system, allowing use of preprinted or field-marked tags. J. Manufacturers: 1. Weidmuller, Inc. 2. Ideal. 3. Electrovert USA Corp. Technical Specifications 16050-4 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 2.06 MAGNETIC CONTROL RELAY A. Industrial control with field convertible contacts rated 10 amps continuous, 7,200VA make, 720VA break. B. NEMA ICS 2, Designation: A600 (600 volts). C. Time Delay Relay Attachment: 1. Pneumatic type, timer adjustable from 0.2 second to 60 seconds (minimum). 2. Field convertible from ON delay to OFF delay and vice versa. D. Latching Attachment: Mechanical latch, having unlatching coil and coil clearing contacts. E. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer; Type M-600. 2. General Electric Co.; Type CR120B. 2.07 TIME DELAY RELAY A. Industrial relay with contacts rated 5 amps continuous, 3,600VA make, 360VA break. B. NEMA ICS 2 Designation: B150 (150 volts). C. Solid-state electronic, field convertible ON/OFF delay. D. One normally open and one normally closed contact (minimum). E. Repeat accuracy plus or minus 2 percent. F. Timer adjustment from 1 second to 60 seconds, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. G. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Square D Co.; Type F. 2. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer. 3. General Electric Co. 2.08 SUPPORT AND FRAMING CHANNELS A. Carbon Steel Framing Channel: 1. Material: Rolled, mild strip steel, 12-gauge minimum, ASTM A1011/A1011M, Grade 33. 2. Finish: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. B. Paint Coated Framing Channel: Carbon steel framing channel with electro- deposited rust inhibiting acrylic or epoxy paint. C. PVC Coated Framing Channel: Carbon steel framing channel with 40-mil polyvinyl chloride coating. Technical Specifications 16050-5 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods D. Stainless Steel Framing Channel: Rolled, ASTM A167, Type 316 stainless steel, 12-gauge minimum. E. Manufacturers: 1. B-Line Systems, Inc. 2. Unistrut Corp. 3. Aickinstrut. 2.09 FIRESTOPS A. General: 1. Provide UL 1479 classified hourly fire-rating equal to, or greater than, the assembly penetrated. 2. Prevent the passage of cold smoke, toxic fumes, and water before and after exposure to flame. 3. Sealants and accessories shall have fire-resistance ratings as established by testing identical assemblies in accordance with ASTM E814, by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., or other testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Firestop System: 1. Formulated for use in through-penetration firestopping around cables, conduit, pipes, and duct penetrations through fire-rated walls and floors. 2. Fill, Void, or Cavity Material: 3M Brand Fire Barrier Caulk CP25, Putty 303, Wrap/Strip FS195, Composite Sheet CS195 and Penetration Sealing Systems 7902 and 7904 Series. 3. Two-Part, Foamed-In-Place, Silicone Sealant: Dow Corning Corp. Fire Stop Foam, General Electric Co. Pensil 851. 2.10 ENCLOSURES A. Finish: Sheet metal structural and enclosure parts shall be completely painted using an electrodeposition process so interior and exterior surfaces as well as bolted structural joints have a complete finish coat on and between them. B. Color: Manufacturer's standard color (gray) baked-on enamel, unless otherwise shown. C. Barriers: Provide metal barriers within enclosures to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. Technical Specifications 16050-6 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods D. Enclosure Selections: Except as shown otherwise, provide electrical enclosures according to the following table: ENCLOSURES Location Finish Environment NEMA 250 Type Indoor Finished Dry 1 Indoor Unfinished Industrial Use 12 Outdoor Any Denoted "WP" 3R Indoor and Outdoor Any Wet and/or 4X: 304 Stainless Corrosive Steel Indoor and Outdoor Any Wet, Dust or Oil 13 Indoor and Outdoor Any Hazardous Gas 7 Indoor and Outdoor Any Hazardous Dust 9 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.02 CONTROL DEVICES A. Unless otherwise shown, install heavy-duty, oil-tight type in nonhazardous, indoor, dry locations, including control panels and individual stations. B. Unless otherwise shown, install heavy-duty, watertight and corrosion-resistant type in nonhazardous, outdoor, or normally wet areas. 3.03 SUPPORT AND FRAMING CHANNEL A. Install where required for mounting and supporting electrical equipment, raceway, and cable tray systems. B. Channel Type: 1. Interior, Dry (Noncorrosive) Locations: a. Steel Raceway: Carbon steel or paint coated. 2. Interior, Corrosive (Wet or Dry) Locations: a. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit and Other Systems Not Covered: Type 316 stainless steel or PVC-coated steel. 3. Outdoor Locations: a. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit and Other Systems Not Covered: Type 316 stainless steel or PVC coated steel. C. Paint cut ends prior to installation with the following: Technical Specifications 16050-7 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 1. Carbon Steel Channel: Zinc-rich primer. 2. Painted Channel: Rust-inhibiting epoxy or acrylic paint. 3. Nonmetallic Channel: Epoxy resin sealer. 4. PVC-Coated Channel: PVC patch. 3.04 FIRESTOPS A. Install in strict conformance with manufacturer's instructions. Comply with installation requirements established by testing and inspecting agency. B. Sealant: Install sealant, including forming, packing, and other accessory materials, to fill openings around electrical services penetrating floors and walls, to provide firestops with fire-resistance ratings indicated for floor or wall assembly in which penetration occurs. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 16050-8 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS AND BOXES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. Al23/123M, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. b. A167, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium- Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. c. A240/A240M, Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications. d. C857, Standard Practice for Minimum Structural Design Loading for Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures. e. D149, Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage and Dielectric Strength of Solid Electrical Insulating Materials at Commercial Power Frequencies. 2. Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA): 569B, Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces. 3. National Electrical Contractor's Association, Inc. (NECA): Installation standards. 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). b. C80.1, Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC). c. C80.6, Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit (EIMC). d. RN 1, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit. e. TC 2, Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit. f. TC 6, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installation. g. TC 14, Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit (RTRC) and Fittings. 5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 6. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): a. 1, Standard for Safety for Flexible Metal Conduit. b. 6, Standard for Safety for Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit— Steel. c. 360, Standard for Safety for Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit. d. 514B, Standard for Safety for Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings. e. 651, Standard for Safety for Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings. f. 651A, Standard for Safety for Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and HDPE Conduit. g. 870, Standard for Safety for Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and Associated Fittings. Technical Specifications 16110-1 Raceways and Boxes h. 1242, Standard for Safety for Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit— Steel. i. 1660, Standard for Safety for Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit. j. 1684, Standard for Safety for Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit (RTRC) and Fittings. k. 2024, Standard for Safety for Optical Fiber and Communication Cable Raceway. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Manufacturer's Literature: 1. Rigid galvanized steel conduit. 2. Intermediate metal conduit 3. Electric metallic tubing 4. PVC Schedule 40 conduit. 5. PVC-coated rigid galvanized steel conduit, submittal to include copy of manufacturer's warranty. 6. Flexible metal, liquid-tight conduit. 7. Flexible metal, nonliquid-tight conduit 8. Conduit fittings. 9. Wireways. 10. Device boxes for use in hazardous areas. 11. Junction and pull boxes used at or below grade. 12. Large junction and pull boxes. 13. Terminal junction boxes. 14. Precast Manholes and Handholes: a. Dimensional drawings and descriptive literature. b. Traffic loading calculations. c. Accessory information. 15. Equipment and machinery proposed for bending metal conduit. 16. Method for bending PVC conduit less than 30 degrees. 17. Seismic anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's certification of training for PVC-coated rigid galvanized steel conduit installer. 2. Seismic anchorage and bracing calculations: a. For equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design category C, D, E, or F submit the following in accordance with Section 26 05 00 — General Requirements for Electrical Work: 1) Manufacturer's statement of seismic qualification with substantiating test data. 2) Manufacturer's special seismic certification with substantiating test data. b. Installation instructions: 1) Detail the complete installation of the equipment including rigging, moving, and setting into place. 2) For equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design category A or B: a) Provide manufacturer's installation instructions and anchoring details for connecting equipment to supports and structures. Technical Specifications 16110-2 Raceways and Boxes 3) For equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design category C, D, E, or F: a) Provide project-specific installation instructions and anchoring details based on support conditions and requirements to resist seismic loads as specified in Section 26 05 00 — General Requirements for Electrical Work. b) Submit anchoring drawings with supporting calculations. c) Drawings and calculations shall be stamped by a professional engineer registered in the state where the Project is being constructed. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): 1. Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). Where required by the AHJ, material and equipment shall be labeled or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ in order to provide a basis for approval under NEC. 2. Materials and equipment manufactured within scope of standards published by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. shall conform to those standards and shall have an applied UL listing mark. B. PVC-Coated, Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit Installer: Certified by conduit manufacturer as having received training on installation procedures. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUIT AND TUBING A. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit (RGS): 1. Meet requirements of NEMA C80.1 and UL 6. 2. Material: Hot-dip galvanized with chromated protective layer. B. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): 1. Meet requirements of NEMA C80.6 and UL 1242. 2. Material: Hot-dip galvanized with chromated and lacquered protective layer. C. Electric Metallic Tubing (EMT): 1. Meet requirements of NEMA C80.3 and UL 797. 2. Material: Hot-dip galvanized with chromated and lacquered protective layer. D. PVC Schedule 40 Conduit: 1. Meet requirements of NEMA TC 2 and UL 651. 2. UL listed for concrete encasement, underground direct burial, concealed or direct sunlight exposure, and 90 degrees C insulated conductors. E. PVC-Coated Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit: 1. Meet requirements of NEMA RN 1 and ETL. 2. Material: a. Meet requirements of NEMA C80.1 and UL 6. Technical Specifications 16110-3 Raceways and Boxes b. Exterior Finish: PVC coating, 40-mil nominal thickness; bond to metal shall have tensile strength greater than PVC. c. Interior finish: Urethane coating, 2-mil nominal thickness. 3. Threads: Hot-dipped galvanized and factory coated with urethane. 4. Bendable without damage to interior or exterior coating. F. Flexible Metal, Liquid-Tight Conduit: 1. UL 360 listed for 105 degrees C insulated conductors. 2. Material: Galvanized steel with extruded PVC jacket. G. Flexible Metal, Nonliquid-Tight Conduit: 1. Meet requirements of UL1. 2. Material: Galvanized steel. H. Flexible, Nonmetallic, Liquid-Tight Conduit: 1. Material: PVC core with fused flexible PVC jacket. 2. UL 1660 listed for: a. Dry Conditions: 80 degrees C insulated conductors. b. Wet Conditions: 60 degrees C insulated conductors. 3. Manufacturers and Products: a. Carlon; Carflex or X-Flex. b. T & B; Xtraflex LTC or EFC. I. Innerduct: 1. Resistant to spread of fire, per requirements of UL 2024. 2. Smooth or corrugated HDPE. 3. Textile Manufacturer: Maxcell. 2.02 FITTINGS A. Rigid Galvanized Steel and Intermediate Metal Conduit: 1. General: a. Meet requirements of UL 514B. b. Type: Threaded, galvanized. Set screw and threadless compression fittings not permitted. 2. Bushing: a. Material: Malleable iron with integral insulated throat, rated for 150 degrees C. b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Appleton; Series BU-I. 2) O-Z/Gedney; Type HB. 3. Grounding Bushing: a. Material: Malleable iron with integral insulated throat rated for 150 degrees C, with solderless lugs. b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Appleton; Series GIB. 2) O-Z/Gedney; Type HBLG. 4. Conduit Hub: a. Material: Malleable iron with insulated throat with bonding screw. b. UL listed for use in wet locations. c. Manufacturers and Products: Technical Specifications 16110-4 Raceways and Boxes 1) Appleton, Series HUB-B. 2) O-Z/Gedney; Series CH. 3) Meyers; ST Series. 5. Conduit Bodies: a. Sized as required by NFPA 70. b. Manufacturers and Products (For Normal Conditions): 1) Appleton; Form 35 threaded unilets. 2) Crouse-Hinds; Form 7 or Form 8 threaded condulets. 3) Killark; Series O electrolets. 4) Thomas & Betts; Form 7 or Form 8. c. Manufacturers (For Hazardous Locations): 1) Appleton. 2) Crouse-Hinds. 3) Killark. 6. Couplings: As supplied by conduit manufacturer. 7. Unions: a. Concrete tight, hot-dip galvanized malleable iron. b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Appleton; Series SCC bolt-on coupling or Series EC three-piece union. 2) O-Z/Gedney; Type SSP split coupling or Type 4 Series, three-piece coupling. 8. Conduit Sealing Fitting: a. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Appleton; Type EYF, EYM, or ESU. 2) Crouse-Hinds; Type EYS or EZS. 3) Killark; Type EY or Type EYS. 9. Drain Seal: a. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Appleton; Type EYD. 2) Crouse-Hinds; Type EYD or Type EZD. 10. Drain/Breather Fitting: a. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Appleton; Type ECDB. 2) Crouse-Hinds; ECD. 11. Expansion Fitting: a. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Deflection/Expansion Movement: 2) Appleton; Type DF. 3) Crouse-Hinds; Type XD. 4) Expansion Movement Only: 5) Appleton; Type XJ. 6) Crouse-Hinds; Type XJ. 7) Thomas & Betts; XJG-TP. 12. Cable Sealing Fitting: a. To form watertight nonslip cord or cable connection to conduit. b. For Conductors with OD of 1/2 inch or Less: Neoprene bushing at connector entry. c. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Appleton; CG-S. 2) Crouse-Hinds; CGBS. Technical Specifications 16110-5 Raceways and Boxes B. Electric Metallic Tubing: 1. Meet requirements of UL 514B. 2. Type: Steel body and locknuts with steel or malleable iron compression nuts. Set screw and drive-on fittings not permitted. 3. Electro zinc-plated inside and out. 4. Raintight. 5. Coupling Manufacturers and Products: a. Appleton; Type 95T. b. Crouse-Hinds. c. Thomas & Betts. 6. Connector Manufacturers and Products: a. Appleton; Type ETP. b. Crouse-Hinds. c. Thomas & Betts. C. PVC Conduit: 1. Meet requirements of NEMA TC 3. 2. Type: PVC, slip-on. D. PVC-Coated Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit: 1. Meet requirements of UL 514B. 2. Fittings: Rigid galvanized steel type, PVC coated by conduit manufacturer. 3. Conduit Bodies: Cast metal hot-dipped galvanized or urethane finish. Cover shall be of same material as conduit body. PVC coated by conduit manufacturer. 4. Finish: 40-mil PVC exterior, 2-mil urethane interior. 5. Overlapping pressure-sealing sleeves. 6. Conduit Hangers, Attachments, and Accessories: PVC-coated. 7. Manufacturers: a. Robroy Industries. b. Ocal. 8. Expansion Fitting: a. Manufacturer and Product: Ocal; OCAL-BLUE XJG. E. Flexible Metal, Liquid-Tight Conduit: 1. Metal insulated throat connectors with integral nylon or plastic bushing rated for 105 degrees C. 2. Insulated throat and sealing O-rings. 3. Manufacturers and Products: a. Thomas & Betts; Series 5331. b. O-Z/Gedney; Series 4Q. F. Flexible Metal, Nonliquid-Tight Conduit: 1. Meet requirements of UL 514B. 2. Body: Galvanized steel. 3. Throat: Nylon insulated. 4. 1-1/4-Inch Conduit and Smaller: One screw body. 5. 1-1/2-Inch Conduit and Larger: Two screw body. 6. Manufacturer and Product: Appleton; Series 7400. G. Flexible, Nonmetallic, Liquid-Tight Conduit: Technical Specifications 16110-6 Raceways and Boxes 1. Meet requirements of UL 514B. 2. Type: High strength plastic body, complete with lock nut, O-ring, threaded ferrule, sealing ring, and compression nut. 3. Body/compression nut (gland) design to ensure high mechanical pullout strength and watertight seal. 4. Manufacturers and Products: a. Carlon; Type LT. b. O-Z/Gedney; Type 4Q-P. c. Thomas & Betts; Series 6300. H. Flexible Coupling, Hazardous Locations: 1. Approved for use in atmosphere involved. 2. Rating: Watertight and UL listed for use in Class I, Division 1 and 2 areas. 3. Outer bronze braid and an insulating liner. 4. Conductivity equal to a similar length of rigid metal conduit. 5. Manufacturers and Products: a. Crouse-Hinds; Type ECGJH or Type ECLK. b. Appleton; EXGJH or EXLK. I. Watertight Entrance Seal Device: 1. New Construction: a. Material: Oversized sleeve, malleable iron body with sealing ring, pressure ring, grommet seal, and pressure clamp. b. Manufacturer and Product: O-Z/Gedney; Type FSK or Type WSK, as required. 2. Cored-Hole Application: a. Material: Assembled dual pressure disks, neoprene sealing ring, and membrane clamp. b. Manufacturer and Product: O-Z/Gedney; Series CSM. 2.03 OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES A. Sheet Steel: One-piece drawn type, zinc-plated or cadmium-plated. B. Cast Metal: 1. Box: Malleable iron. 2. Cover: Gasketed, weatherproof, malleable iron, or cast ferrous metal, with stainless steel screws. 3. Hubs: Threaded. 4. Lugs: Cast Mounting. 5. Manufacturers and Products, Nonhazardous Locations: a. Crouse-Hinds; Type FS or Type FD. b. Appleton; Type FS or Type FD. c. Killark. 6. Manufacturers and Products, Hazardous Locations: a. Crouse-Hinds; Type GUA or Type EAJ. b. Appleton; Type GR. C. PVC-Coated Cast Metal: 1. Type: One-piece. 2. Material: Malleable iron, cast ferrous metal, or cast aluminum. Technical Specifications 16110-7 Raceways and Boxes 3. Coating: a. Exterior Surfaces: 40-mil PVC. b. Interior Surfaces: 2-mil urethane. 4. Manufacturers: a. Robroy Industries. b. Ocal. D. Nonmetallic: 1. Box: PVC. 2. Cover: PVC, weatherproof, with stainless steel screws. 3. Manufacturer and Product: Carlon; Type FS or Type FD, with Type E98 or Type E96 covers. 2.04 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES A. Outlet Box Used as Junction or Pull Box: As specified under Article Outlet and Device Boxes. B. Conduit Bodies Used as Junction Boxes: As specified under Article Fittings. C. Large Sheet Steel Box: 1. NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Box: Code-gauge, galvanized steel. 3. Cover: Hinged with clamps. 4. Machine Screws: Corrosion-resistant. D. Large Cast Metal Box: 1. NEMA 250, Type 4. 2. Box: Cast malleable iron or electrogalvanized finished, with drilled and tapped conduit entrances and exterior mounting lugs. 3. Cover: Hinged with clamps. 4. Gasket: Neoprene. 5. Hardware and Machine Screws: ASTM A167, Type 316 stainless steel. 6. Manufacturer and Product, Surface Mounted, Hinged Type: O-Z/Gedney; Series YW. 7. Manufacturers and Products, Recessed Type: a. Crouse-Hinds; Type WJBF. b. O-Z/Gedney; Series YR. E. Large Cast Metal Box, Hazardous Locations: 1. NEMA 250 Type 7 or Type 9 as required for Class, Division, and Group involved. 2. Box: Cast ferrous metal, electro-ga Ivan ize finished or copper-free aluminum with drilled and tapped conduit entrances. 3. Cover: Hinged with screws. 4. Hardware and Machine Screws: ASTM A167, Type 316 stainless steel. 5. Manufacturers and Products: a. Crouse-Hinds; Type EJB. b. O-Z/Gedney; Series AJBEW. F. Large Stainless Steel Box: Technical Specifications 16110-8 Raceways and Boxes 1. NEMA 250 Type: 4X 2. Box: 14-gauge, ASTM A240/A240M, Type: 316 stainless steel, with white enamel painted interior mounting panel. 3. Cover: Hinged with clamps. 4. Hardware and Machine Screws: ASTM A167, Type 316 stainless steel. 5. Manufacturers: a. Hoffman Engineering Co. b. Robroy Industries. c. Wiegman. G. Large Steel Box: 1. NEMA 250 Type 3R 2. Box: 14 gauge steel, with white enamel painted interior and gray primed exterior, over phosphated surfaces. Provide gray finish as approved by Engineer. 3. Cover: Hinged with clamps. 4. Hardware and Machine Screws: ASTM A167, Type 316 stainless steel. 5. Manufacturers: a. Hoffman Engineering Co. b. Robroy Industries. c. Wiegman. H. Large Nonmetallic Box: 1. NEMA 250 Type A: 4X. 2. Box: High-impact, fiberglass-reinforced polyester or engineered thermoplastic, with stability to high heat. 3. Cover: Hinged with clamps. 4. Hardware and Machine Screws: ASTM A167, Type 316 stainless steel. 5. Conduit hubs and mounting lugs. 6. Manufacturers and Products: a. Crouse-Hinds; Type NJB. b. Carlon; Series N, C, or H. c. Robroy Industries. I. Concrete Box, Nontraffic Areas: 1. Box: Reinforced, cast concrete with extension. 2. Cover: Steel diamond plate with locking bolts. 3. Cover Marking: ELECTRICAL, CONTROL, SIGNAL, TELEPHONE, or as shown. 4. Size: 10 inches by 17 inches, minimum. 5. Manufacturers and Products: a. Utility Vault Co.; Series 36-1017. b. Christy, Concrete Products, Inc.; N9. c. Quazite; "PG" Style. J. Concrete Box, Traffic Areas: 1. Box: Reinforced, cast concrete with extension and bottom slab. 2. Cover: Steel checked plate; H/20 loading. 3. Cover Marking: ELECTRICAL, CONTROL, SIGNAL, TELEPHONE, or as shown. 4. Manufacturers and Products: Technical Specifications 16110-9 Raceways and Boxes a. Oldcastle Precast; Model 3030-LA (3030-SB with No. 3030-P Cover). b. Christy, Concrete Products, Inc.; B1017. 2.05 TERMINAL JUNCTION BOX A. Cover: Hinged, unless otherwise shown. B. Interior Finish: Paint with white enamel or lacquer. C. Terminal Blocks: 1. Separate connection point for each conductor entering or leaving box. 2. Spare Terminal Points: 25 percent, minimum. 2.06 METAL WIREWAYS A. Meet requirements of UL 870. B. Type: Steel-enclosed, lay-in type. C. Cover: Removable, screw type. D. Rating: Outdoor raintight. E. Finish: Rust inhibiting phosphatizing primer and gray baked enamel. F. Hardware: Plated to prevent corrosion; screws installed toward the inside protected by spring nuts or otherwise guarded to prevent wire insulation damage. G. Knockouts: Without knockouts, unless otherwise indicated. H. Manufacturers: 1. Circle AW. 2. Hoffman. 3. Square D. 2.07 NONMETALLIC WIREWAY A. Rating: Outdoor, corrosion resistant, raintight, NEMA Type 12 and Type 3R. B. Type: Fiberglass-enclosed, with removable cover. C. Captivated, corrosion-resistant cover screws. D. Oil-resistant gaskets. E. Meet UL cold impact test to minus 35 degrees C. F. Manufacturer: Hoffman. 2.08 PRECAST HANDHOLES A. Concrete Strength: Minimum, 3,000 psi compressive, in 28 days. Technical Specifications 16110-10 Raceways and Boxes B. Loading: AASHTO, H-20 in accordance with ASTM C857. C. Drainage: 1. Slope floors toward drain points, leaving no pockets or other nondraining areas. 2. Provide drainage outlet or sump at low point of floor constructed with a heavy, cast iron, slotted or perforated hinged cover, and a minimum 4-inch outlet and outlet pipe. D. Raceway Entrances: 1. Provide on all four sides. 2. Provide knockout panels or precast individual raceway openings. 3. At entrances where raceways are to be installed by others, provide minimum 12-inch-high by 24-inch-wide knockout panels for future raceway installation. E. Embedded Pulling Iron: 1. Material: 3/4-inch-diameter stock, fastened to overall steel reinforcement before concrete is placed. 2. Location: a. Wall: Opposite each raceway entrance and knockout panel for future raceway entrance. b. Floor: Centered below manhole or handhole cover. F. Cable Racks: 1. Arms and Insulators: Adjustable, of sufficient number to accommodate cables for each raceway entering or leaving manhole, including spares. 2. Wall Attachment: a. Adjustable inserts in concrete walls. Bolts or embedded studs not permitted. b. Insert Spacing: Maximum 3 feet on center for inside perimeter of manhole. c. Arrange in order that spare raceway ends are clear for future cable installation. G. Handhole Frames and Covers: 1. Material: Steel, hot-dipped galvanized. 2. Cover Type: Solid, bolt-on, torsion spring, of diamond design. 3. Cover Loading: AASHTO H-20. 4. Cover Designation: Burn by welder, on upper side in integral letters, minimum 2 inches in height, appropriate titles: a. 600 Volts and Below: ELECTRIC LV, CONTROL, SIGNAL, TELEPHONE. H. Hardware: Steel, hot-dip galvanized. I. Furnish knockout for ground rod in each handhole. J. Manufacturers: 1. Utility Vault Co. 2. Penn-Cast Products, Inc. 3. Concrete Conduit Co. 4. Associated Concrete Products, Inc. Technical Specifications 16110-11 Raceways and Boxes 5. Pipe, Inc. 2.09 ACCESSORIES A. Duct Bank Spacers: 1. Modular Type: a. Nonmetallic, interlocking, for multiple conduit sizes. b. Suitable for all types of conduit. c. Manufacturers: 1) Underground Device, Inc. 2) Carlon. 2. Template Type: a. Nonmetallic, custom made one-piece spacers. b. Suitable for all types of conduit. c. Material: HDPE or polypropylene, 1/2-inch minimum thickness. d. Conduit openings cut 1 inch larger than conduit outside diameter. e. Additional openings for stake-down, rebar, and concrete flow through as required. f. Manufacturer and Product: SP Products; Quik Duct. B. Identification Devices: 1. Raceway Tags: a. Material: Permanent, nonferrous metal. b. Shape: Round. c. Raceway Designation: Pressure stamped, embossed, or engraved. d. Tags relying on adhesives or taped-on markers not permitted. 2. Warning Tape: a. Material: Polyethylene, 4-mil gauge with detectable strip. b. Color: Red. c. Width: Minimum 3 inches. d. Designation: Warning on tape that electric circuit is located below tape. e. Identifying Letters: Minimum 1-inch-high permanent black lettering imprinted continuously over entire length. f. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Panduit; Type HTDU. 2) Reef Industries; Terra Tape. 3. Buried Raceway Marker: a. Material: Sheet bronze, consisting of double-ended arrows, straight for straight runs and bent at locations where runs change direction. b. Designation: Engrave to depth of 3/32 inch; ELECTRIC CABLES, in letters 1/4-inch high. c. Minimum Dimension: 1/4 inch thick, 10 inches long, and 3/4 inch wide. C. Raceway Coating: Clean and paint. D. Heat Shrinkable Tubing: 1. Material: Heat-shrinkable, cross-linked polyolefin. 2. Semi-flexible with meltable adhesive inner liner. 3. Color: Black. 4. Manufacturers: a. Raychem. Technical Specifications 16110-12 Raceways and Boxes b. 3M. E. Wraparound Duct Band: 1. Material: Heat-shrinkable, cross-linked polyolefin, precoated with hot-melt adhesive. 2. Width: 50 mm minimum. 3. Manufacturer and Product: Raychem; Type TWDB. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Conduit and tubing sizes shown are based on use of copper conductors. B. Comply with NECA Installation Standards. C. Crushed or deformed raceways not permitted. D. Maintain raceway entirely free of obstructions and moisture. E. Immediately after installation, plug or cap raceway ends with watertight and dust- tight seals until time for pulling in conductors. F. Sealing Fittings: Provide drain seal in vertical raceways where condensate may collect above sealing fitting. G. Avoid moisture traps where possible. When unavoidable in exposed conduit runs, provide junction box and drain fitting at conduit low point. H. Group raceways installed in same area. I. Proximity to Heated Piping: Install raceways minimum 12 inches from parallel runs. J. Follow structural surface contours when installing exposed raceways. Avoid obstruction of passageways. K. Run exposed raceways parallel or perpendicular to walls, structural members, or intersections of vertical planes. L. Block Walls: Do not install raceways in same horizontal course or vertical cell with reinforcing steel. M. Install watertight fittings in outdoor, underground, or wet locations. N. Paint threads and cut ends, before assembly of fittings, galvanized conduit, PVC- coated galvanized conduit, or IMC installed in exposed or damp locations with zinc- rich paint or liquid galvanizing compound. O. Metal conduit shall be reamed, burrs removed, and cleaned before installation of conductors, wires, or cables. Technical Specifications 16110-13 Raceways and Boxes P. Do not install raceways in concrete equipment pads, foundations, or beams without Engineer approval. Q. Horizontal raceways installed under floor slabs shall lie completely under slab, with no part embedded within slab. R. Install concealed, embedded, and buried raceways so that they emerge at right angles to surface and have no curved portion exposed. S. Install conduits for fiber optic cables, telephone cables, and Category 6 data cables in strict conformance with the requirements of TIA 569B. 3.02 REUSE OF EXISTING CONDUITS A. Where Drawings indicate existing conduits may be reused, they may be reused only where they meet the following criteria. 1. Conduit is in useable condition with no deformation, corrosion, or damage to exterior surface. 2. Conduit is sized per the NEC. 3. Conduit is of the type specified in Contract Documents. 4. Conduit is supported as specified in Contract Documents. B. Conduit shall be reamed with wire brush, then with a mandrel approximately 1/4 inch smaller than raceway inside diameter then cleaned prior to pulling new conductors. 3.03 INSTALLATION IN CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURAL CONCRETE A. Minimum Cover: 2 inches, including fittings. B. Conduit placement shall not require changes in reinforcing steel location or configuration. C. Provide nonmetallic support during placement of concrete to ensure raceways remain in position. D. Conduit larger than 1 inch shall not be embedded in concrete slabs, walls, foundations, columns, or beams unless approved by Engineer. E. Slabs and Walls (Requires Engineer Approval): 1. Trade size of conduit not to exceed one-fourth of slab or wall thickness. 2. Install within middle two-fourths of slab or wall. 3. Separate conduit less than 2-inch trade size by a minimum five times conduit trade size, center-to-center, unless otherwise allowed by Engineer. 4. Separate conduit 2-inch and greater trade size by a minimum eight times conduit trade size, center-to-center, unless otherwise allowed by Engineer. 5. Cross conduit at an angle greater than 45 degrees, with minimum separation of 1.5 inch. 6. Separate conduit by a minimum six times the outside dimension of expansion/deflection fittings at expansion joints. Technical Specifications 16110-14 Raceways and Boxes 7. Conduit shall not be installed below the maximum water surface elevation in walls of water holding structures. F. Columns and Beams (Requires Engineer Approval): 1. Trade size of conduit not to exceed one-fourth of beam thickness. 2. Conduit cross-sectional area not to exceed 4 percent of beam or column cross section. 3.04 CONDUIT APPLICATION A. Diameter: Minimum % inch. B. Exterior, Exposed: 1. Rigid galvanized steel. C. Interior, Exposed: 1. Intermediate metal. D. Interior, Concealed (Not Embedded in Concrete): 1. Electric metallic tubing. E. Aboveground, Embedded in Concrete Walls, Ceilings, or Floors: 1. PVC Schedule 40. 2. Electric metallic tubing for lighting and receptacle circuits only. F. Direct Earth Burial: 1. PVC Schedule 40. G. Concrete-Encased Raceways: 1. PVC Schedule 40, except where rigid galvanized steel is used for bends or as indicated. H. Under Slabs-On-Grade: 1. PVC Schedule 40. I. Transition from Underground or Concrete Embedded to Exposed: Rigid galvanized steel or PVC-coated rigid steel conduit. J. Under Equipment Mounting Pads: Rigid galvanized steel conduit. K. Exterior Light Pole Foundations: Rigid galvanized steel conduit. L. Corrosive Areas: PVC-coated rigid galvanized steel. M. Hazardous Gas Areas: PVC-coated rigid galvanized steel. 3.05 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS A. For motors, wall or ceiling mounted fans and unit heaters, dry type transformers, electrically operated valves, instrumentation, and other locations approved by Engineer where flexible connection is required to minimize vibration: 1. Conduit Size 4 Inches or Less: Flexible, liquid-tight conduit. Technical Specifications 16110-15 Raceways and Boxes 2. Conduit Size Over 4 Inches: Nonflexible. 3. Wet or Corrosive Areas: Flexible, nonmetallic or flexible metal liquid-tight. 4. Dry Areas: Flexible, metallic liquid-tight. 5. Hazardous Areas: Flexible coupling suitable for Class 1, Division 2 areas. B. Suspended Lighting Fixtures: 1. Dry Areas: Flexible steel, nonliquid-tight conduit. 2. Wet Areas: Flexible steel, liquid-tight conduit. C. Outdoor Areas, Process Areas Exposed to Moisture, and Areas Required to be Oiltight and Dust-Tight: Flexible metal, liquid-tight conduit. D. Flexible Conduit Length: 18 inches minimum, 60 inches maximum; sufficient to allow movement or adjustment of equipment. 3.06 PENETRATIONS A. Make at right angles, unless otherwise shown. B. Notching or penetration of structural members, including footings and beams, not permitted. C. Fire-Rated Walls, Floors, or Ceilings: Firestop openings around penetrations to maintain fire-resistance rating as specified in Section 26 05 04, Basic Electrical Materials and Methods. D. Apply a single layer of wraparound duct band to metallic conduit protruding through concrete floor slabs to a point 2 inches above and 2 inches below concrete surface. E. Concrete Walls, Floors, or Ceilings (Aboveground): Provide nonshrink grout dry- pack, or use watertight seal device. F. Entering Structures: 1. General: Seal raceway at first box or outlet with oakum or expandable plastic compound to prevent entrance of gases or liquids from one area to another. 2. Concrete Roof or Membrane Waterproofed Wall or Floor: a. Provide a watertight seal. b. Without Concrete Encasement: Install watertight entrance seal device on each side. c. With Concrete Encasement: Install watertight entrance seal device on accessible side. d. Securely anchor malleable iron body of watertight entrance seal device into construction with one or more integral flanges. e. Secure membrane waterproofing to watertight entrance seal device in a permanent, watertight manner. 3. Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Equipment: a. Penetrate equipment in area established by manufacturer. b. Terminate conduit with flexible metal conduit at junction box or condulet attached to exterior surface of equipment prior to penetrating equipment. c. Seal penetration with sealant. Technical Specifications 16110-16 Raceways and Boxes 4. Corrosive-Sensitive Areas: a. Seal conduit passing through acetic acid room walls. b. Seal conduit entering equipment panel boards and field panels containing electronic equipment. c. Seal penetration with sealant. 5. Existing or Precast Wall (Underground): Core drill wall and install watertight entrance seal device. 6. Nonwaterproofed Wall or Floor (Underground, without Concrete Encasement): a. Provide Schedule 40 galvanized pipe sleeve, or watertight entrance seal device. b. Fill space between raceway and sleeve with expandable plastic compound or oakum and lead joint, on each side. 7. Handholes: a. Metallic Raceways: Provide insulated grounding bushings. b. Nonmetallic Raceways: Provide bell ends flush with wall. c. Install such that raceways enter as near as possible to one end of wall, unless otherwise shown. 3.07 SUPPORT A. Support from structural members only, at intervals not exceeding NFPA 70 requirements. Do not exceed 8 feet in any application. Do not support from piping, pipe supports, or other raceways. B. Multiple Adjacent Raceways: Provide ceiling trapeze. For trapeze-supported conduit, allow 20 percent extra space for future conduit. C. Application/Type of Conduit Strap: 1. Rigid Steel: Zinc coated steel, pregalvanized steel or malleable iron. 2. PVC-Coated Rigid Steel Conduit: PVC-coated metal. 3. Nonmetallic Conduit: Nonmetallic or PVC-coated metal. D. Provide and attach wall brackets, strap hangers, or ceiling trapeze as follows: 1. Wood: Wood screws. 2. Hollow Masonry Units: Toggle bolts. 3. Concrete or Brick: Expansion shields, or threaded studs driven in by powder charge, with lock washers and nuts. 4. Steelwork: Machine screws. 5. Location/Type of Hardware: a. Dry, Noncorrosive Areas: Galvanized. b. Wet, Noncorrosive Areas: Stainless steel. c. Corrosive Areas: Stainless steel. E. Nails or wooden plugs inserted in concrete or masonry for attaching raceway not permitted. Do not weld raceways or pipe straps to steel structures. Do not use wire in lieu of straps or hangers. 3.08 BENDS A. Install concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical distance. Technical Specifications 16110-17 Raceways and Boxes B. Make bends and offsets of longest practical radius. Bends in conduits and ducts being installed for fiber optic cables shall be not less than 20 times cable diameter, 15 inches minimum. C. Install with symmetrical bends or cast metal fittings. D. Avoid field-made bends and offsets, but where necessary, make with acceptable hickey or bending machine. Do not heat metal raceways to facilitate bending. E. Make bends in parallel or banked runs from same center or centerline with same radius so that bends are parallel. F. Factory elbows may be installed in parallel or banked raceways if there is change in plane of run, and raceways are same size. G. PVC Conduit: 1. Bends 30 Degrees and Larger: Provide factory-made elbows. 2. 90-Degree Bends: Provide rigid steel elbows, PVC-coated where direct buried. 3. Use manufacturer's recommended method for forming smaller bends. H. Flexible Conduit: Do not make bends that exceed allowable conductor bending radius of cable to be installed or that significantly restricts conduit flexibility. 3.09 EXPANSION/DEFLECTION FITTINGS A. Provide on raceways at structural expansion joints and in long tangential runs. B. Provide expansion/deflection joints for 25 degrees F maximum temperature variation. C. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.10 PVC CONDUIT A. Solvent Welding: 1. Apply manufacturer recommended solvent to joints. 2. Install in order that joint is watertight. B. Adapters: 1. PVC to Metallic Fittings: PVC terminal type. 2. PVC to Rigid Metal Conduit or IMC: PVC female adapter. C. Belled-End Conduit: Bevel unbelled end of joint prior to joining. 3.11 PVC-COATED RIGID STEEL CONDUIT A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Tools and equipment used in cutting, bending, threading and installation of PVC- coated rigid conduit shall be designed to limit damage to PVC coating. C. Provide PVC boot to cover exposed threading. Technical Specifications 16110-18 Raceways and Boxes 3.12 WIREWAYS A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Locate with cover on accessible vertical face of wireway, unless otherwise shown. C. Applications: 1. Metal wireway in indoor dry locations. 2. Nonmetallic wireway in indoor process/wet, outdoor, and corrosive locations. 3.13 TERMINATION AT ENCLOSURES A. Cast Metal Enclosure: Install manufacturer's premolded insulating sleeve inside metallic conduit terminating in threaded hubs. B. Nonmetallic, Cabinets, and Enclosures: 1. Terminate conduit in threaded conduit hubs, maintaining enclosure integrity. 2. Metallic Conduit: Provide ground terminal for connection to maintain continuity of ground system. C. Sheet Metal Boxes, Cabinets, and Enclosures: 1. General: a. Install insulated bushing on ends of conduit where grounding is not required. b. Provide insulated throat when conduit terminates in sheet metal boxes having threaded hubs. c. Utilize sealing locknuts or threaded hubs on sides and bottom of NEMA 3R and NEMA 12 enclosures. d. Terminate conduits at threaded hubs at the tops of NEMA 3R and NEMA 12 boxes and enclosures. e. Terminate conduits at threaded conduit hubs at NEMA 4 and NEMA 4X boxes and enclosures. 2. Rigid Galvanized Steel and Intermediate Metal Conduit: a. Provide one lock nut each on inside and outside of enclosure. b. Install grounding bushing at source enclosure. c. Provide bonding jumper from grounding bushing to equipment ground bus or ground pad. 3. Flexible Metal Conduit: Provide two screw type, insulated, malleable iron connectors. 4. Flexible, Nonmetallic Conduit: Provide nonmetallic, liquid-tight strain relief connectors. 5. PVC-Coated Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit: Provide PVC-coated, liquid-tight, metallic connector. 6. PVC Schedule 40 Conduit: Provide PVC terminal adapter with lock nut, except where threaded hubs required above. D. Motor Control Center, Switchgear, and Free-Standing Enclosures: 1. Terminate metal conduit entering bottom with grounding bushing; provide grounding jumper extending to equipment ground bus or grounding pad. 2. Terminate PVC conduit entering bottom with bell end fittings. Technical Specifications 16110-19 Raceways and Boxes 3.14 UNDERGROUND RACEWAYS A. Grade: Maintain minimum grade of 4 inches in 100 feet, either from one manhole, handhole, or pull box to the next, or from a high point between them, depending on surface contour. B. Cover: Maintain minimum 2-foot cover above conduit and concrete encasement, unless otherwise shown. C. Make routing changes as necessary to avoid obstructions or conflicts. D. Couplings: In multiple conduit runs, stagger so couplings in adjacent runs are not in same transverse line. E. Union type fittings not permitted. F. Spacers: 1. Provide preformed, nonmetallic spacers designed for such purpose, to secure and separate parallel conduit runs in a trench or concrete encasement. 2. Install at intervals not greater than that specified in NFPA 70 for support of the type conduit used, but in no case greater than 10 feet. G. Support conduit so as to prevent bending or displacement during backfilling or concrete placement. H. Transition from Underground to Exposed: PVC-coated rigid steel conduit. I. Installation with Other Piping Systems: 1. Crossings: Maintain minimum 12-inch vertical separation. 2. Parallel Runs: Maintain minimum 12-inch separation. 3. Installation over valves or couplings not permitted. J. Metallic Raceway Coating: Apply wherever rigid galvanized or intermediate metal conduit raceways are specified in direct burial installation. Along entire length, coat with raceway coating or apply tape with one-half tape width overlap to obtain two complete layers. K. Provide expansion fittings that allow minimum of 4 inches of movement in vertical conduit runs from underground where exposed conduit will be fastened to or will enter building or structure. L. Provide expansion/deflection fittings in conduit runs that exit building or structure belowgrade. Conduit from building wall to fitting shall be PVC-coated rigid steel. M. Concrete Encasement: 1. Primary power and secondary service entrance raceways shall be concrete encased. 2. As specified in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete. 3. Concrete Color: Red. N. Backfill: Technical Specifications 16110-20 Raceways and Boxes 1. Controlled low strength fill is an acceptable bedding and pipe zone material. Backfill material to within 12 inches of surface. 2. Do not backfill until inspected by Engineer. 3.15 UNDER SLAB RACEWAYS A. Make routing changes as necessary to avoid obstructions or conflicts. B. Support raceways so as to prevent bending or displacement during backfilling or concrete placement. C. Install raceways with no part embedded within slab and with no interference with slab on grade construction. D. Raceway spacing, in a single layer or multiple layers: 1. 3 inches clear between adjacent 2-inch or larger raceway. 2. 2 inches clear between adjacent 1-1/2-inch or smaller raceway. E. Multiple Layers of Raceways: Install under slab on grade in trench below backfill zone. F. Individual Raceways and Single Layer Multiple Raceways: Install at lowest elevation of backfill zone with spacing as specified herein. Where conduits cross at perpendicular orientation, installation of conduits shall not interfere with placement of under slab fill that meets compaction and void limitations of earthwork specifications. G. Under slab raceways that emerge from below slab to top of slab as exposed, shall be located to avoid conflicts with structural slab rebar. Coordinate raceway stub ups with location of structural rebar. H. Fittings: 1. Union type fittings are not permitted. 2. Provide expansion/deflection fittings in raceway runs that exit building or structure below slab. Locate fittings 18 inches, maximum, beyond exterior wall. Raceway type between building exterior wall to fitting shall be PVC- coated rigid steel. 3. Couplings: In multiple raceway runs, stagger so couplings in adjacent runs are not in same traverse line. 3.16 OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES A. General: 1. Install plumb and level. 2. Install suitable for conditions encountered at each outlet or device in wiring or raceway system, sized to meet NFPA 70 requirements. 3. Open no more knockouts in sheet steel device boxes than are required; seal unused openings. 4. Install galvanized mounting hardware in industrial areas. B. Size: Technical Specifications 16110-21 Raceways and Boxes 1. Depth: Minimum 2 inches, unless otherwise required by structural conditions. Box extensions not permitted. a. Hollow Masonry Construction: Install with sufficient depth such that conduit knockouts or hubs are in masonry void space. 2. Ceiling Outlet: Minimum 4-inch octagonal device box, unless otherwise required for installed fixture. 3. Switch and Receptacle: Minimum 2-inch by 4-inch device box. C. Locations: 1. Drawing locations are approximate. 2. To avoid interference with mechanical equipment or structural features, relocate outlets as directed by Engineer. 3. Light Fixture: Install in symmetrical pattern according to room layout, unless otherwise shown. D. Mounting Height: 1. General: a. Dimensions given to centerline of box. b. Where specified heights do not suit building construction or finish, adjust up or down to avoid interference. c. Do not straddle CMU block or other construction joints. 2. Light Switch: a. 48 inches above floor. b. When located next to door, install on lock side of door. 3. Thermostat: 54 inches above floor. 4. Telephone Outlet: a. 15 inches above floor. b. 6 inches above counter tops. c. Wall Mounted: 52 inches above floor. 5. Convenience Receptacle: a. General Interior Areas: 15 inches above floor. b. General Interior Areas (Counter Tops): Install device plate bottom or side flush with top of backsplash, or 6 inches above counter tops without backsplash. c. Industrial Areas, Workshops: 48 inches above floor. d. Outdoor Areas: 24 inches above finished grade. 6. Special-Purpose Receptacle: 48 inches above floor or as shown. 7. Switch, Motor Starting: 48 inches above floor, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. E. Flush Mounted: 1. Install with concealed conduit. 2. Install proper type extension rings or plaster covers to make edges of boxes flush with finished surface. 3. Holes in surrounding surface shall be no larger than required to receive box. F. Supports: 1. Support boxes independently of conduit by attachment to building structure or structural member. 2. Install bar hangers in frame construction or fasten boxes directly as follows: a. Wood: Wood screws. Technical Specifications 16110-22 Raceways and Boxes b. Concrete or Brick: Bolts and expansion shields. c. Hollow Masonry Units: Toggle bolts. d. Steelwork: Machine screws. 3. Threaded studs driven in by powder charge and provided with lock washers and nuts are acceptable in lieu of expansion shields. 4. Provide plaster rings where necessary. 5. Boxes embedded in concrete or masonry need not be additionally supported. G. Install separate junction boxes for flush or recessed lighting fixtures where required by fixture terminal temperature. H. Boxes Supporting Fixtures: Provide means of attachment with adequate strength to support fixture. 3.17 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES A. General: 1. Install plumb and level. 2. Installed boxes shall be accessible. 3. Do not install on finished surfaces. 4. Use outlet boxes as junction and pull boxes wherever possible and allowed by applicable codes. 5. Use conduit bodies as junction and pull boxes where no splices are required and allowed by applicable codes. 6. Install pull boxes where necessary in raceway system to facilitate conductor installation. 7. Install where shown and where necessary to terminate, tap-off, or redirect multiple conduit runs. 8. Install in conduit runs at least every 150 feet or after the equivalent of three right-angle bends. B. Flush Mounted: 1. Install with concealed conduit. 2. Holes in surrounding surface shall be no larger than required to receive box. 3. Make edges of boxes flush with final surface. C. Mounting Hardware: 1. Noncorrosive Dry Areas: Galvanized. 2. Noncorrosive Wet Areas: Stainless steel. 3. Corrosive Areas: Stainless steel. D. Supports: 1. Support boxes independently of conduit by attachment to building structure or structural member. 2. Install bar hangers in frame construction or fasten boxes directly as follows: a. Wood: Wood screws. b. Concrete or Brick: Bolts and expansion shields. c. Hollow Masonry Units: Toggle bolts. d. Steelwork: Machine screws. 3. Threaded studs driven in by powder charge and provided with lock washers and nuts are acceptable in lieu of expansion shields. Technical Specifications 16110-23 Raceways and Boxes 4. Boxes embedded in concrete or masonry need not be additionally supported. E. At or Below Grade: 1. Install boxes for below grade conduit flush with finished grade in locations outside of paved areas, roadways, or walkways. 2. If adjacent structure is available, box may be mounted on structure surface just above finished grade in accessible but unobtrusive location. 3. Obtain Engineer's written acceptance prior to installation in paved areas, roadways, or walkways. 4. Use boxes and covers suitable to support anticipated weights. F. Install Drain/breather fittings in NEMA 250 Type 4 and Type 4X enclosures. 3.18 MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES A. Excavate, shore, brace, backfill, and final grade. B. Do not install until final raceway grading has been determined. C. Install such that raceway enters at nearly right angle and as near as possible to end of wall, unless otherwise shown. D. Grounding: As specified in Section 26 05 26, Grounding E. Identification: Field stamp covers with handhole number as shown. Stamped numbers to be 1-inch minimum height. 3.19 EMPTY RACEWAYS A. Provide permanent, removable cap over each end. B. Provide PVC plug with pull tab for underground raceways with end bells. C. Provide nylon pull cord. D. Identify, as specified in Article Identification Devices, with waterproof tags attached to pull cord at each end, and at intermediate pull point. 3.20 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES A. Raceway Tags: 1. Identify per Raceway Schedule designation. 2. For exposed raceways, install tags at each terminus, near midpoint, and at minimum intervals of every 50 feet, whether in ceiling space or surface mounted. 3. Install tags at each terminus for concealed raceways. 4. Provide noncorrosive wire for attachment. B. Warning Tape: Install approximately 12 inches above underground or concrete- encased raceways. Align parallel to, and within 12 inches of, centerline of run. C. Buried Raceway Marker: Technical Specifications 16110-24 Raceways and Boxes 1. Install at grade to indicate direction of underground raceway. 2. Install at bends and at intervals not exceeding 100 feet in straight runs. 3. Embed and secure to top of concrete base, sized 14 inches long, 6 inches wide, and 8 inches deep; top set flush with finished grade. 3.21 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect products from effects of moisture, corrosion, and physical damage during construction. B. Provide and maintain manufactured watertight and dust-tight seals over conduit openings during construction. C. Touch up painted conduit threads after assembly to cover nicks or scars. D. Touch up coating damage to PVC-coated conduit with patching compound approved by manufacturer. Compound shall be kept refrigerated according to manufacturers' instructions until time of use. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 16110-25 Raceways and Boxes SECTION 16120 CONDUCTORS AND COMMUNICATIONS CABLING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): a. A167, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium- Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. b. B3, Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire. c. B8, Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft. d. B496, Standard Specification for Compact Round Concentric-Lay- Stranded Copper Conductors. 2. Insulated Cable Engineer's Association, Inc. (ICEA): a. S-58-679, Standard for Control Cable Conductor Identification. b. S-73-532, Standard for Control Thermocouple Extensions and Instrumentation Cables. c. T-29-520, Conducting Vertical Cable Tray Flame Tests with Theoretical Heat Input of 210,000 Btu/hour. 3. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA): a. WC 57, Standard for Control, Thermocouple Extension, and Instrumentation Cables. b. WC 70, Standard for Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less for the Distribution of Electrical Energy. 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). b. 262, Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and Cables for Use in Air-Handling Spaces. 5. Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA): TIA-568-C, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard. 6. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) a. ANSI X3.166, Information Systems--Fiber Data Distributed Interface (FDDI)--Token Ring Physical Layer Medium Dependent (PMD) 7. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): a. 13, Standard for Safety for Power-Limited Circuit Cables. b. 44, Standard for Safety for Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables. c. 62, Standard for Safety for Flexible Cord and Cables. d. 486A-486B, Standard for Safety for Wire Connectors. e. 486C, Standard for Safety for Splicing Wire Connectors. f. 510, Standard for Safety for Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape. g. 854, Standard for Safety for Service-Entrance Cables. h. 1277, Standard for Safety for Electrical Power and Control Tray Cables with Optional Optical-Fiber Members. i. 1569, Standard for Safety for Metal-Clad Cables. Technical Specifications 16120-1 Conductors and Communications Cabling j. 1581, Standard for Safety for Reference Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables, and Flexible Cords. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: a. Wire and cable. b. Wire and cable accessories. c. Fiber optic data cable 2. Cable Pulling Calculations: a. Ensure submitted and reviewed before cable installation. b. Provide for the following cable installations: 1) Multiconductor 600-volt cable sizes larger than 2 AWG that cannot be hand pulled. 2) Power and control conductor, and control and instrumentation cable installations in duct banks. 3) Feeder circuits; single conductors #4/0 and larger. 3. Fiber Optic Cable light budget calculations: a. Describe design parameters used in calculation including light attenuation (dB per km), cable construction details, and connector characteristics and losses. b. Use spreadsheet format that calculates total power loss, received power, receiver overload margin, and receiver power margin. 4. Testing Related Submittals: a. Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) certification, current within last 6 months. b. Pre-installation and post installation test documentation as specified herein. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Factory Test Report for conductors 600 volts and below. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): 1. Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70. Where required by the AHJ, material and equipment shall be labeled or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ in order to provide a basis for approval under NEC. 2. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. shall conform to those standards and shall have an applied UL listing mark. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUCTORS 600 VOLTS AND BELOW A. Conform to applicable requirements of NEMA WC 70. Technical Specifications 16120-2 Conductors and Communications Cabling B. Conductor Type: 1. 120-Volt and 277-Volt Lighting, 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid copper. 2. 120-Volt receptacle Circuits, 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid copper. 3. All Other Circuits: Stranded copper. C. Insulation: Type THHN/THWN-2, except for sizes No. 6 and larger with Type XHHW-2. D. Flexible Cords and Cables: 1. Type SOW-A/50 with ethylene propylene rubber insulation in accordance with UL 62. 2. Conform to physical and minimum thickness requirements of NEMA WC 70. 2.02 600-VOLT RATED CABLE A. General: 1. Type TC, meeting requirements of UL 1277, including Vertical Tray Flame Test at 70,000 Btu per hour, and NFPA 70, Article 340, or UL 13 meeting requirements of NFPA 70, Article 725. 2. Permanently and legibly marked with manufacturer's name, maximum working voltage for which cable was tested, type of cable, and UL listing mark. 3. Suitable for installation in open air, in cable trays, or conduit. 4. Minimum Temperature Rating: 90 degrees C dry locations, 75 degrees C wet locations. 5. Overall Outer Jacket: PVC, flame-retardant, sunlight- and oil-resistant. B. (Type 1) Multiconductor Control Cable: 1. Conductors: a. 14 AWG, seven-strand copper. b. Insulation: 15-mil PVC with 4-mil nylon. c. UL 1581 listed as Type THHN/THWN rated VW-1. d. Conductor group bound with spiral wrap of barrier tape. e. Color Code: In accordance with ICEA S-58-679, Method 1, Table 2. 2. Cable: Passes the ICEA T-29-520, 210,000 Btu per hour Vertical Tray Flame Test. Technical Specifications 16120-3 Conductors and Communications Cabling 3. Cable Sizes: Max. Outside Diameter Jacket Thickness No. of Conductors Inches (Mils) 3 0.41 45 5 0.48 45 7 0.52 45 12 0.72 60 19 0.83 60 25 1.00 60 37 1.15 80 4. Manufacturers: a. Okonite Co. b. Southwire. C. (Type 2) 16 AWG, Twisted, Shielded Pair, Instrumentation Cable: Single pair, designed for noise rejection for process control, computer, or data log applications meeting NEMA WC 57 requirements. 1. Outer Jacket: 45-mil nominal thickness. 2. Individual Pair Shield: 1.35-mil, double-faced aluminum/synthetic polymer overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage. 3. Dimension: 0.31-inch nominal OD. 4. Conductors: a. Bare soft annealed copper, Class B, seven-strand concentric, meeting requirements of ASTM B8. b. 20 AWG, seven-strand tinned copper drain wire. c. Insulation: 15-mil nominal PVC. d. Jacket: 4-mil nominal nylon. e. Color Code: Pair conductors, black and red. 5. Manufacturers: a. Okonite Co. b. Alpha Wire Corp. c. Belden. D. (Type 3) 16 AWG, Twisted, Shielded Triad Instrumentation Cable: Single triad, designed for noise rejection for process control, computer, or data log applications meeting NEMA WC 57 requirements. 1. Outer Jacket: 45-mil nominal. 2. Individual Pair Shield: 1.35-mil, double-faced aluminum/synthetic polymer, overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage. 3. Dimension: 0.32-inch nominal OD. 4. Conductors: a. Bare soft annealed copper, Class B, seven-strand concentric, meeting requirements of ASTM B8. b. 20 AWG, seven-strand, tinned copper drain wire. c. Insulation: 15-mil nominal PVC. d. Jacket: 4-mil nylon. e. Color Code: Triad conductors black, red, and blue. Technical Specifications 16120-4 Conductors and Communications Cabling 5. Manufacturers: a. Okonite Co. b. Alpha Wire Corp. c. Belden. E. (Type 4) 18 AWG, Multitwisted Shielded Pairs, with a Common Overall Shield, Instrumentation Cable: Designed for use as instrumentation, process control, and computer cable, meeting NEMA WC 57 requirements. 1. Conductors: a. Bare soft annealed copper, Class B, seven-strand concentric, in accordance with ASTM B8. b. Tinned copper drain wires. c. Pair drain wire size AWG 20, group drain wire size AWG 18. d. Insulation: 15-mil PVC. e. Jacket: 4-mil nylon. f. Color Code: Pair conductors, black and red with red conductor numerically printed for group identification. g. Individual Pair Shield: 1.35-mil, double-faced aluminum/synthetic polymer. 2. Cable Shield: 2.35-mil, double-faced aluminum/synthetic polymer, overlapped for 100 percent coverage. 3. Cable Sizes: Maximum Outside Nominal Jacket Diameter Thickness Number of Pairs Inches Mils 4 0.50 45 8 0.68 60 12 0.82 60 16 0.95 80 24 1.16 80 36 1.33 80 50 1.56 80 4. Manufacturers: a. Okonite Co. b. Alpha Wire Corp. c. Belden. F. (Type 5) Multiconductor Adjustable Frequency Drive Power Cable: 1. Conductors: a. Class B, stranded coated copper. b. Insulation: 600-volt cross-linked polyethylene, UL Type XHHW-2. c. Grounding Conductors: Insulated stranded copper. 2. Sheath: a. UL 1277 Type TC-ER, 90 degrees C. b. Continuous shield, Al/polyester foil, drain wires, overall copper braid. 3. Outer Jacket: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) per UL 1569. Technical Specifications 16120-5 Conductors and Communications Cabling 4. Cable Sizes: Minimum No. of Max. Minimum Ground Insulated Outside Jacket Conductor Wire Size Conductor Diameter Thickness Size AWG s Inches Mils 12 AWG 12 4 0.655 50 10 AWG 10 4 0.769 50 8 AWG 8 4 0.940 50 6 AWG 6 4 1.038 50 4 AWG 4 4 1.180 50 2 AWG 2 4 1.351 50 5. Manufacturers and Products: a. Alpha Wire; Series V. b. Belden; Series 29500. c. LAPP USA; OLFLEX VFD Slim. 2.03 300-VOLT RATED CABLE A. General: 1. Type PLTC, meeting requirements of UL 13 and NFPA 70, Article 725. 2. Permanently and legibly marked with manufacturer's name, maximum working voltage for which cable was tested, type of cable, and UL listing mark. 3. Suitable for installation in open air, in cable trays, or conduit. 4. Minimum Temperature Rating: 105 degrees C. 5. Passes Vertical Tray Flame Test. 6. Outer Jacket: PVC, flame-retardant, sunlight- and oil-resistant. B. (Type 6) Twisted Pair Fire Alarm Cable, Shielded: Power limited fire protective signaling circuit cable meeting requirements of NFPA 70, Article 760. 1. Cable: Pass NFPA 262, 70,000 Btu flame test and listed by State Fire Marshall. 2. Outer Jacket: Red in color, identified along its entire length as fire protective signaling circuit cable. 3. Conductors: a. Solid, tinned, or bare copper shielded, with stranded tinned copper drain wire. b. Insulation: 15-mil PVC. 4. Cable Sizes: Maximum Outside Nominal Jacket Diameter Thickness Wire Size Inches Inches 12 0.36 0.042 Technical Specifications 16120-6 Conductors and Communications Cabling Maximum Outside Nominal Jacket Diameter Thickness Wire Size Inches Inches 14 0.32 0.042 16 0.26 0.037 18 0.23 0.037 5. Manufacturers: a. West Penn Wire. b. Coleman Cable, Inc. 2.04 SPECIAL CABLES A. (Type 7) Foil Shielded/Unshielded Twisted Pair (F/UTP) Telephone and Data Cable, 30OV: 1. Category 6A, UL listed, and third party verified to comply with TIA/EIA 568-C.2 Category 6A requirements. 2. Suitable for high speed network applications including gigabit ethernet and video. Cable shall be interoperable with other standards compliant products and shall be backward compatible with Category 5 and Category 5e. 3. Four each individually twisted pair, 23 AWG conductors, with polyolefin insulation and blue PVC jacket. 4. Outer foil screen with 26 AWG tinned copper shield drain wire. 5. NEC/UL Riser (CMR) rated. 6. Cable shall withstand a bend radius of 1.2-inch minimum at a temperature of minus 10 degrees C maximum without jacket or insulation cracking. 7. Manufacturer and Product: Belden; 10GX62F. B. (Type 11) Single Mode Fiber-Optic Cable: 1. 12-count fiber cable. 2. Outdoor/indoor; Riser Rated (OFNR). 3. Tight buffered. 4. Fibers and buffer tubes shall be color coded with distinct and recognizable colors in accordance with EIA/TIA-598. 5. Jacket: Flame retardant, UV resistant, black. 6. Type: a. Approvals and Listings: NEC OFNR, CSA FT-4, ICEA S104-696. b. Fiber Type: Single Mode c. Nominal Cable Outer Diameter: 0.31 in. d. Core Diameter: 8.2 pm e. Fiber Category: OS2 f. Wavelengths: 1310 nm/1383 nm/1550 nm g. Maximum Attenuation: 0.4 dB/km / 0.4 dB/km /0.4 dB/km h. Operating Temperature Range: -40 to +70 Deg C i. Max Tensile Loading: 300/90 Ibf(Installation/Operation) j. Minimum Cable Bending Radius: 4.7/3.1 inches (Installation/Operation). 7. Manufacturers: a. Corning Cable Systems, Corning FREEDM One (012E8F-31131-29) or equivalent. C. (Type 12) Multi-Conductor Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) RS-485 Cable, 300V Technical Specifications 16120-7 Conductors and Communications Cabling 1. Type: 4-pair, 22 AWG PLTC/CM. 2. Conductor: Tinned copper 3. Insulation: High Density Polyethylene 4. Shield: Overall aluminum/poly with 22 AWG tinned copper drain wire, plus tinned copper braid (65%) 5. Jacket: PVC 6. Nominal Diameter: 0.448 inches. 7. Nominal Characteristic Impedance: 120 Ohms 8. Nominal Conductor-Conductor Capacitance: 11 pF/ft. 9. Velocity of Propagation: 78% (1.3 ns/ft) 10. Manufacturer and Product: Belden; 3109A. 2.05 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A. Equipment: Stranded copper with green, Type USE/RHH/RHW-XLPE or THHN/THWN, insulation. B. Direct Buried: Bare stranded copper. 2.06 ACCESSORIES FOR CONDUCTORS 600 VOLTS AND BELOW AND FIBER OPTICS A. Tape: 1. General Purpose, Flame Retardant: 7-mil, vinyl plastic, Scotch Brand 33+, rated for 90 degrees C minimum, meeting requirements of UL 510. 2. Flame Retardant, Cold and Weather Resistant: 8.5-mil, vinyl plastic, Scotch Brand 88. 3. Arc and Fireproofing: a. 30-mil, elastomer. b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) 3M; Scotch Brand 77, with Scotch Brand 69 glass cloth tapebinder. 2) Plymouth; 53 Plyarc, with 77 Plyglas glass cloth tapebinder. B. Identification Devices: 1. Sleeve: a. Permanent, PVC, yellow or white, with legible machine-printed black markings. b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Raychem; Type D-SCE or ZH-SCE. 2) Brady, Type 3PS. 2. Heat Bond Marker: a. Transparent thermoplastic heat bonding film with acrylic pressure sensitive adhesive. b. Self-laminating protective shield over text. c. Machine printed black text. d. Manufacturer and Product: 3M Co.; Type SCS-HB. 3. Marker Plate: Nylon, with legible designations permanently hot stamped on plate. 4. Tie-On Cable Marker Tags: a. Chemical-resistant white tag. b. Size: 1/2 inch by 2 inches. c. Manufacturer and Product: Raychem; Type CM-SCE. Technical Specifications 16120-8 Conductors and Communications Cabling 5. Grounding Conductor: Permanent green heat-shrink sleeve, 2-inch minimum. C. Connectors and Terminations: 1. Nylon, Self-Insulated Crimp Connectors: a. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Thomas & Betts; Sta-Kon. 2) Burndy; Insulug. 3) ILSCO. 2. Nylon, Self-Insulated, Crimp Locking-Fork, Torque-Type Terminator: a. Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70, 75 degrees C ampacity. b. Seamless. c. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Thomas & Betts; Sta-Kon. 2) Burndy; Insulink. 3) ILSCO; ILSCONS. 3. Self-Insulated, Freespring Wire Connector (Wire Nuts): a. UL 486C. b. Plated steel, square wire springs. c. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Thomas & Betts. 2) Ideal; Twister. 4. Self-Insulated, Set Screw Wire Connector: a. Two piece compression type with set screw in brass barrel. b. Insulated by insulator cap screwed over brass barrel. c. Manufacturers: 1) 3M Co. 2) Thomas & Betts. 3) Marrette. D. Cable Lugs: 1. In accordance with NEMA CC 1. 2. Rated 600 volts of same material as conductor metal. 3. Uninsulated Crimp Connectors and Terminators: a. Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70, 75 degrees C ampacity. b. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Thomas & Betts; Color-Keyed. 2) Burndy; Hydent. 3) ILSCO. 4. Uninsulated, Bolted, Two-Way Connectors and Terminators: a. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Thomas & Betts; Locktite. 2) Burndy; Quiklug. 3) ILSCO. E. Cable Ties: 1. Nylon, adjustable, self-locking, and reusable. 2. Manufacturer and Product: Thomas & Betts; TY-RAP. F. Heat Shrinkable Insulation: Technical Specifications 16120-9 Conductors and Communications Cabling 1. Thermally stabilized cross-linked polyolefin. 2. Single wall for insulation and strain relief. 3. Dual Wall, adhesive sealant lined, for sealing and corrosion resistance. 4. Manufacturers and Products: a. Thomas & Betts; SHRINK-KON. b. Raychem; RNF-100 and ES-2000. G. F/UTP cable: 1. Provide terminators, connectors, and junctions necessary for a complete Ethernet/IP system. H. Fiber optics: 1. Provide markers for labeling each end of a fiber optic cable. 2. Provide markers for individual fiber optic strands, jumpers, and patch cables. Attach to fiber using tie wrap or other approved method of securing the marker. 3. Markers must have space for typed or machine printed text. 4. Terminations: LC type. Provide connections with ceramic ferrules. 5. Innerduct: a. Smooth-walled polyethylene tube to protect fiber optic cable. b. Install innerduct in conduit. c. Install fiber optic cable in innerduct. d. Manufacturers: Carlon, or equal. 6. Split Duct: a. At patch panels and pull boxes provide smooth walled polyethylene split innerduct to bridge gap between panel and end of conduit. 2.07 PULLING COMPOUND A. Nontoxic, noncorrosive, noncombustible, nonflammable, water-based lubricant; UL listed. B. Suitable for rubber, neoprene, PVC, polyethylene, hypalon, CPE, and lead-covered wire and cable. C. Approved for intended use by cable manufacturer. D. Suitable for zinc-coated steel, aluminum, PVC, bituminized fiber, and fiberglass raceways. E. Manufacturers: 1. Ideal Co. 2. Polywater, Inc. 3. Cable Grip Co. 2.08 WARNING TAPE A. As specified in Section 26 05 33, Raceway and Boxes. Technical Specifications 16120-10 Conductors and Communications Cabling 2.09 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Conductors 600 Volts and Below: Test in accordance with UL 44 and UL 854. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Conductor installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Conductor and cable sizing shown is based on copper conductors, unless noted otherwise. C. Do not exceed cable manufacturer's recommendations for maximum pulling tensions and minimum bending radii. D. Terminate conductors and cables, unless otherwise indicated. E. Tighten screws and terminal bolts in accordance with UL 486A-486B for copper conductors [and aluminum conductors]. F. Cable Lugs: Provide with correct number of holes, bolt size, and center-to-center spacing as required by equipment terminals. G. Bundling: Where single conductors and cables in manholes, handholes, vaults, cable trays, and other indicated locations are not wrapped together by some other means, bundle conductors from each conduit throughout their exposed length with cable ties placed at intervals not exceeding 12 inches on center. H. Ream, remove burrs, and clear interior of installed conduit before pulling wires or cables. I. Concrete-Encased Raceway Installation: Prior to installation of conductors, pull through each raceway a mandrel approximately 1/4 inch smaller than raceway inside diameter. J. VFD wiring: Use multiconductor adjustable frequency drive power cable between VFD's and motors. 3.02 POWER CONDUCTOR COLOR CODING A. Conductors 600 Volts and Below: 1. 6 AWG and Larger: Apply general purpose, flame retardant tape at each end, and at accessible locations wrapped at least six full overlapping turns, covering area 1-1/2 inches to 2 inches wide. 2. 8 AWG and Smaller: Provide colored conductors. 3. Colors: System Conductor Color Technical Specifications 16120-11 Conductors and Communications Cabling System Conductor Color All Systems Equipment Grounding Green 240/120 Volts, Single- Grounded Neutral White Phase, Three-Wire One Hot Leg Black Other Hot Leg Red 208Y/120 Volts, Three- Grounded Neutral White Phase, Four-Wire Phase A Black Phase B Red Phase C Blue 240/120 Volts, Three- Grounded Neutral White Phase, Four-Wire, Delta, Phase A Black Center Tap, Ground on High (wild) Leg Orange Single-Phase Phase C Blue 480Y/277 Volts, Three- Grounded Neutral White Phase, Four-Wire Phase A Brown Phase B Orange Phase C Yellow Note:Phase A, 8, C implies direction of positive phase rotation. 4. Tracer: Outer covering of white with identifiable colored strip, other than green, in accordance with NFPA 70. 3.03 CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION A. Identify power, instrumentation, and control conductor circuits at each termination, and in accessible locations such as manholes, handholes, panels, switchboards, motor control centers, pull boxes, and terminal boxes. B. Circuit Schedules: Identify using circuit schedule designations as specified in Section 26 05 00, General Requirements for Electrical Work. C. Method: 1. Conductors 3 AWG and Smaller: Identify with sleeves or heat bond markers. 2. Cables and Conductors 2 AWG and Larger: a. Identify with marker plates or tie-on cable marker tags. b. Attach with nylon tie cord. 3. Taped-on markers or tags relying on adhesives not permitted. 3.04 CONDUCTORS 600 VOLTS AND BELOW A. Install 10 AWG or 12 AWG conductors for branch circuit power wiring in lighting and receptacle circuits. B. Do not splice incoming service conductors and branch power distribution conductors 6 AWG and larger, unless specifically indicated or approved by Engineer. C. Connections and Terminations: 1. Install wire nuts only on solid conductors. Wire nuts are not allowed on stranded conductors. 2. Install nylon self-insulated crimp connectors and terminators for instrumentation and control, circuit conductors. 3. Install self-insulated, set screw wire connectors for two-way connection of power circuit conductors 12 AWG and smaller. Technical Specifications 16120-12 Conductors and Communications Cabling 4. Install uninsulated crimp connectors and terminators for instrumentation, control, and power circuit conductors 4 AWG through 2/0 AWG. 5. Install uninsulated, bolted, two-way connectors and terminators for power circuit conductors 3/0 AWG and larger. 6. Install uninsulated terminators bolted together on motor circuit conductors 10 AWG and larger. 7. Place no more than one conductor in any single-barrel pressure connection. 8. Install crimp connectors with tools approved by connector manufacturer. 9. Install terminals and connectors acceptable for type of material used. 10. Compression Lugs: a. Attach with a tool specifically designed for purpose. Tool shall provide complete, controlled crimp and shall not release until crimp is complete. b. Do not use plier type crimpers. D. Do not use soldered mechanical joints. E. Splices and Terminations: 1. Insulate uninsulated connections. 2. Indoors: Use general purpose, flame retardant tape or single wall heat shrink. 3. Outdoors, Dry Locations: Use flame retardant, cold- and weather-resistant tape or single wall heat shrink. 4. Below Grade and Wet or Damp Locations: Use dual wall heat shrink. F. Cap spare conductors with UL listed end caps. G. Cabinets, Panels, and Motor Control Centers: 1. Remove surplus wire, bridle and secure. 2. Where conductors pass through openings or over edges in sheet metal, remove burrs, chamfer edges, and install bushings and protective strips of insulating material to protect the conductors. H. Network Cable: 1. Limit all Cat 6A cable runs to 300 feet or less. I. Control and Instrumentation Wiring: 1. Where terminals provided will accept such lugs, terminate control and instrumentation wiring, except solid thermocouple leads, with insulated, locking-fork compression lugs. 2. Terminate with methods consistent with terminals provided, and in accordance with terminal manufacturer's instructions. 3. Locate splices in readily accessible cabinets or junction boxes using terminal strips. 4. Where connections of cables installed under this section are to be made under other sections, leave pigtails of adequate length for bundled connections. 5. Cable Protection: a. Under Infinite Access Floors: May install without bundling. b. All Other Areas: Install individual wires, pairs, or triads in flex conduit under floor or grouped into bundles at least 1/2 inch in diameter. c. Maintain integrity of shielding of instrumentation cables. d. Ensure grounds do not occur because of damage to jacket over shield. Technical Specifications 16120-13 Conductors and Communications Cabling J. Extra Conductor Length: For conductors to be connected by others, install minimum 6 feet of extra conductor in freestanding panels and minimum 2 feet in other assemblies. 3.05 FIBER OPTIC CABLE: A. Innerduct: 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation. 2. Use single unjoined lengths from one handhole or pull point to the next. 3. End innerduct at manholes or pull points. 4. One fiber optic cable per innerduct, maximum. B. Fiber Optic Cable: 1. Install cables in innerduct. 2. Provide lengths required to perform installations as indicated on Drawings. 3. Install cable directly from shipping reels. Ensure cable is not: a. Dented, nicked, or kinked. b. Subjected to pull stress greater than or bend radius less than manufacturers specification. c. Otherwise subjected to treatment which may damage fiber strands during installation. 4. Splices: None. Install cables in unspliced lengths between fiber patch panels. 5. Terminate at fiber patch panel: a. Fan out fiber cable to allow direct connectorization of fiber optic cable. b. Sleeve over individual fiber with Kevlar reinforced furcation tubes. c. At point of convergence of furcation tubes, provide strain relief with high density plastic fan-out collar. d. Terminate all fibers. C. Contractor shall use zip-cord jumper cables between patch/breakout panels and communications equipment. 3.06 CONDUCTOR ARC AND FIREPROOFING A. Install arc and fireproofing tape on 600-volt single conductors and cables, except those rated Type TC, throughout entire exposed length in manholes, handholes, and vaults. B. Wrap conductors of same circuit entering from separate conduit together as single cable. C. Follow tape manufacturer's installation instructions. D. Secure tape at intervals of 5 feet with bands of tape binder. Each band to consist of a minimum of two wraps directly over each other. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 16120-14 Conductors and Communications Cabling SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. ASTM International (ASTM): A167, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. 2. Federal Specifications (FS): a. W-C-596G, General Specification for Connector, Electrical, Power. b. W-S-896F, Switches, Toggle (Toggle and Lock), Flush Mounted (General Specification). 3. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): a. C62.41.2, Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000V and less) AC Power Circuits. b. C62.45, Recommended Practice on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low-Voltage (1000V and less) AC Power Circuits. 4. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA): 1, Standard Practice of Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting. 5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). b. FB 11, Plugs, Receptacles, and Connectors of the Pin and Sleeve Type for Hazardous Locations. c. WD 1, General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices. d. WD 6, Wiring Devices — Dimensional Specifications. 6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 7. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): a. 498, Standard for Safety for Attachment Plugs and Receptacles. b. 508, Standard for Safety for Industrial Control Equipment. c. 943, Standard for Safety for Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters. d. 1010, Standard for Safety for Receptacle-Plug Combinations for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations. e. 1436, Standard for Safety for Outlet Circuit Testers and Similar Indicating Devices. f. 1449, Standard for Safety for Surge Protective Devices (SPD). 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Manufacturer's product data for wiring devices. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SWITCHES A. Switch, General Purpose: 1. NEMA WD 1 and FS W-S-896F. Technical Specifications 16140-1 Wiring Devices 2. Totally enclosed, ac type, with quiet tumbler switch and screw terminal. 3. Rivetless one-piece brass or copper alloy contact arm with silver alloy contact. 4. Capable of controlling 100 percent tungsten filament and fluorescent lamp loads. 5. Rating: 20 amps, 120/277 volts. 6. Automatic grounding clip and integral grounding terminal on mounting strap. 7. Special Features: Provide the following features in comparable devices where indicated: a. Three-way and four-way. 8. Manufacturers and Products, Industrial Grade: a. Cooper Arrow Hart; AH1220 Series. b. Bryant; 4901 Series. c. Hubbell; 1221 Series. d. Leviton; 1221 Series.] 2.02 SWITCH, MOTOR RATED: A. Type: Two-pole or three-pole, manual motor starting/disconnect switch without overload protection. 1. UL 508 listed. 2. Totally enclosed snap-action switch. Quick-make, slow-break design with silver alloy contacts. 3. Minimum General-Purpose Rating: 30 amperes, 600V ac. 4. Minimum Motor Ratings: a. 2 horsepower for 120V ac, single-phase, two-pole. b. 3 horsepower for 240V ac, single-phase, two-pole. c. 15 horsepower for 480V ac, three-phase, three-pole. 5. Screw-type terminal. 6. Manufacturers and Products: a. Cooper Arrow Hart. b. Hubbell Bryant: HBL78 Series. c. Leviton. 2.03 MANUALLY OPERATED STARTER A. Fractional Horsepower: 1. Rating: 16 amperes continuous at 277 volts maximum. 2. Single-phase, non-reversing, full voltage with overload protection. 3. Toggle operated. 4. Neon Light: Red. 5. Handle guard/lock-off plate. 6. Manufacturer and product: Eaton type MS or equivalent. B. Integral Horsepower: 1. Rating: HP rated to maximum of 10 HP at 600 volts with overload protection. 2. Single or three-phase, non-reversing, full voltage. 3. Control: Toggle. 4. Locking in OFF position. Technical Specifications 16140-2 Wiring Devices 5. Manufacturer and product: Eaton type B100 or equivalent. 2.04 RECEPTACLES A. Receptacle, General Purpose: 1. NEMA WD 1 and FS W-C-596G. 2. Duplex, two-pole, three-wire grounding type with screw type wire terminals. 3. Impact resistant nylon cover and body, with finder grooves in face, unless otherwise indicated. 4. One-piece mounting strap with integral ground contact (rivetless construction). 5. Contact Arrangement: Contact to be made on two sides of each inserted blade without detent. 6. Rating: 125 volts, NEMA WD 1, Configuration 5-20R, 20 amps, unless otherwise indicated. 7. Size: For 2-inch by 4-inch outlet box. 8. Industrial Grade Manufacturers and Products: a. Cooper Arrow Hart; 5362 Series. b. Hubbell Bryant; HBL5362 Series. c. Leviton; 5362 Series. B. Receptacle, Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter: 1. Meet requirements of general-purpose receptacle. 2. Listed Class A to UL 943, tripping at 5 mA. 3. Rectangular smooth face with push-to-test and reset buttons. 4. Listed weather-resistant per NEC 406.8. 5. Feed-through Capability: 20 amps. 6. Manufacturers and Products: a. Hubbell Bryant; GFTR20 Series. b. Cooper Arrow Hart; WRVGF20 Series. c. Leviton; 7899 Series. C. Receptacle, Corrosion-Resistant: 1. Meet requirements of general-purpose receptacle. 2. Nickel coated metal parts. 3. Manufacturers and Products: a. Hubbell Bryant; HBL53CM62 Series. b. Leviton; 53CM-62 Series. c. Cooper Arrow Hart; 5362CR Series. D. Receptacle, Special-Purpose: 1. General: a. Rating and number of poles as indicated or required for anticipated purpose. b. Provide matching plug with cord-grip features for each special- purpose receptacle. 2. Standard Duty Receptacles and Plugs: a. General: Provide for process motor applications where shown. b. Rating: Voltage and ampere ratings as shown. c. Each receptacle shall be provided with an inlet plug. Technical Specifications 16140-3 Wiring Devices d. Provide handles, adapter plates, metal angle adapters, cord grips, dead front safety shutter, closed lid configuration and accessories as required for the installation. e. Plugs and receptacles shall include auxiliary contacts for motor temperature and motor space heater use where applicable. f. Manufacturers: 1) Meltric; DR series, or equivalent. 2.05 HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) LOCATION DEVICES A. Wiring devices for hazardous (classified) locations shall comply with NEMA FB 11 and UL 1010. B. Provide enclosures as specified in 16010 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods. C. Switches: 1. Manufacturer and Products: a. Crouse-Hinds EDS Series b. Killark XS Series c. Or equivalent D. Manually Operated Starters, Fractional Horsepower: 1. Manufacturer and Products: a. Crouse Hinds EDS Series b. Killark XSD Series c. Or equivalent E. Manually Operated Starters, Integral Horsepower: 1. Manufacturer and Products: a. Killark XMSW Series b. Crouse-Hinds EMN Series c. Or equivalent F. Receptacles, General: 1. Contain integral switch which must be closed to energize circuit. 2. Design shall permit only an approved plug to be energized. a. Actuation of switch shall require plug be inserted and rotated approximately 45 degrees. b. Plug shall lock into this position preventing unintended disengagement. c. To remove, plug shall be turned opposite direction as engagement and pulled straight out. G. General Purpose Receptacle, Explosion Proof, 125 Volts, 20 Amps: 1. Dead front, interlocked, circuit breaking. 2. Receptacle Cover: Spring loaded closes when plug is removed. 3. Enclosure: Corrosion-resistant, aluminum alloy with less than 0.4 percent copper. 4. Finish: Electrostatically applied and baked powder epoxy/polyester. 5. External Hardware: Type 316 stainless steel. Technical Specifications 16140-4 Wiring Devices 6. Switch Chamber: Factory sealed to contain switch's arcing components 7. Hazardous Area Ratings: Suitable for Class I, Division 2, NEMA 7BCD, 9FG. 8. Provide matching plug with each receptacle. 9. Manufacturers and Products: a. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Ark Guard 2, Series ENR. b. EGS/Appleton Electric; U-Line. c. Killark, a division of Hubbell Inc.; UGR/UGP. H. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI), Explosion-Proof: 1. Meet requirements of general-purpose receptacle, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Hazardous Area Ratings: NEMA 7D suitable for Class I, Group C and Group D, Class 2, Groups F and G, and Class 3 locations. 3. Provide matching plug with each receptacle. 4. Manufacturers and Products: a. Killark; Acceptor series UGFI. b. Appleton; EFSXXX-2023GF1. 2.06 DEVICE PLATES A. Sectional type plate not permitted. B. Metal: 1. Material: Specification grade, one-piece, 0.040-inch nominal thickness stainless steel. 2. Finish: ASTM A167, Type 302/304, satin. 3. Mounting Screw: Oval-head, finish matched to plate. C. Cast Metal: 1. Material: Malleable ferrous metal with gaskets. 2. Screw: Oval-head stainless steel. D. Sheet Steel: 1. Finish: Zinc electroplate. 2. Screws: Oval-head stainless steel. 3. Manufacturers: a. Appleton. b. Crouse-Hinds. E. Engraved: 1. Character Height: 3/16-inch. 2. Filler: Black. F. Weatherproof: 1. Receptacle, Weatherproof Type 1: a. Gasketed, cast-aluminum, with individual cap over each receptacle opening. b. Mounting Screw and Cap Spring: Stainless steel. c. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Crouse-Hinds; Type WLRD-1. Technical Specifications 16140-5 Wiring Devices 2) Appleton; Type FSK-WRD. 2. Switch: a. Gasketed, cast-metal or cast-aluminum, incorporating external operator for internal switch. b. Mounting Screw: Stainless steel. c. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Crouse-Hinds; DS-181 or DS-185. 2) Appleton; FSK-1 VTS or FSK-1 VS. 2.07 OCCUPANCY SENSOR, WALL SWITCH A. Description: 1. Passive-infrared type, 120/277-volt, adjustable time delay up to 30 minutes, 180-degree field of view, with a minimum coverage area of 900 square feet (84 square meters). 2. Provide dual switch unit where indicated. 3. Color: Manufacturer's standard white. B. Manufacturers and Products: 1. Hubbell; WS1277. 2. Leviton; ODS 10-ID. 3. Pass & Seymour; WS3000. 4. Watt Stopper (The); WS-200. 2.08 FINISHES A. Wiring device catalog numbers specified in this section do not designate device color. Unless otherwise indicated, or required by code, provide colors as specified below. B. Wiring Device: Brown. C. Special purpose and hazardous location devices may be manufacturer's standard color (black). D. Corrosion-resistant receptacle may be manufacturer's standard color (yellow). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with NECA 1. B. Coordination with Other Trades: 1. Ensure device and its box are protected. Do not place wall finish materials over device box and do not cut holes for box with router that is guided by riding against outside of box. 2. Keep outlet box free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate raceway system, conductors, and cables. Technical Specifications 16140-6 Wiring Devices 3. Install device box in brick or block wall such that cover plate does not cross a joint, unless otherwise indicated. Where indicated or directed to cross joint, trowel joint flush with face of wall. 4. Install wiring device after wall preparation, including painting, is complete. C. Conductors: 1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on devices. 2. Strip insulation evenly around conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 3. Length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails. 4. Existing Conductors: a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace damaged conductors. b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided outlet box is large enough. D. Device Installation: 1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs they were installed before building finishing operations were complete. 2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors. 3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until last possible moment. 4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches (150 mm) in length. 5. Use torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer. 6. When conductors larger than 12 AWG are installed on 15-amp or 20-amp circuits, splice 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 7. Tighten unused terminal screws on device. 8. Device Plates: a. Do not use oversized or extra deep plate. b. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet box when standard device plate does not fit flush or does not cover rough wall opening. 3.02 SWITCH INSTALLATION A. Switch, General Purpose: 1. Mounting Height: See Section 26 05 33, Raceway, Boxes, and Fittings. 2. Install with switch operation in vertical position. 3. Install single-pole, two-way switch such that toggle is in up position when switch is on. B. Switch, Motor Rated: 1. Mounting Height: See Section 26 05 33, Raceway, Boxes, and Fittings. Technical Specifications 16140-7 Wiring Devices 2. Install with switch operation in vertical position such that toggle is in up position when ON. 3. Install within sight of motor when used as disconnect switch. C. Occupancy Sensor, Wall Switch: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 RECEPTACLE INSTALLATION A. Duplex Receptacle: 1. Install with grounding slot down, except where horizontal mounting is shown, in which case install with neutral slot up. 2. Ground receptacle to box with grounding wire only. 3. Weatherproof Receptacle: a. Install in cast metal box. b. Install such that hinge for protective cover is above receptacle opening. 4. Ground Fault Interrupter: Install feed-through model at locations where ground fault protection is specified for"downstream" conventional receptacles. 5. Special-Purpose Receptacle: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.04 DEVICE PLATE INSTALLATION A. Securely fasten to wiring device; ensure tight fit to box. B. Flush Mounted: Install with all four edges in continuous contact with finished wall surface without use of mat or similar material. Plaster fillings will not be acceptable. C. Surface Mounted: Plate shall not extend beyond sides of box, unless plate has no sharp corners or edges. D. Install with alignment tolerance to box of 1/16 inch. E. Engrave with designated title. F. Type (Unless Otherwise Shown): Metal. 1. Exterior: a. Switch: Weatherproof. b. Receptacle in Damp Location: Weatherproof Type 1. G. Interior: 1. Flush Mounted Box: Metal. 2. Surface Mounted; Cast Metal Box. 3. Surface Mounted, Sheet Steel Box: Raised sheet steel. 4. Surface Mounted, Nonmetallic Box: Manufacturer's standard. 5. Receptacle Shown as Weatherproof on Drawings: Weatherproof Type 1. Technical Specifications 16140-8 Wiring Devices 3.05 IDENTIFICATION A. Use tape labels for identification of individual wall switches and receptacles in dry indoor locations. 1. Degrease and clean device plate surface to receive tape labels. 2. Use 3/16-inch Kroy black letters on white background, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Identify panelboard and circuit number from which item is served on face of plate. B. Identify conductors with durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections, and prepare test reports. B. Test Instrument for 125-Volt 20-Amp Receptacle: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated LED indicators of measurement. C. Using test plug, verify device and its outlet box are securely mounted. D. Line Voltage Range: 105 volts to 132 volts. E. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-Amp Load: Less than 6 percent; 6 percent or higher is not acceptable. F. Ground Impedance: 2 ohms, maximum. G. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. H. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 16140-9 Wiring Devices SECTION 16231 DIESEL-ENGINE-DRIVEN GENERATOR SETS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes the following for an Optional Standby System per Article 702 of the National Electrical Code: 1. Diesel engine. 2. Diesel fuel-oil system. 3. Control and monitoring. 4. Generator overcurrent and fault protection. 5. Generator, exciter, and voltage regulator. 6. Vibration isolation devices. B. Related Requirements: Section 16411 "Transfer Switches" for transfer switches including sensors and relays to initiate automatic-starting and -stopping signals for engine generators. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. EPS: Emergency power supply. B. EPSS: Emergency power supply system. C. Operational Bandwidth: The total variation from the lowest to highest value of a parameter over the range of conditions indicated, expressed as a percentage of the nominal value of the parameter. 1.03 REFERENCES A. The generator set and all components shall be designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with the latest applicable standards as follows: 1. National Electric Code (NEC)— National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)70 2. NFPA 99, NFPA 110 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 4. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 5. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Bill of Materials: A listing of all panels, racks, instruments, components, and devices provided under this section. 2. Product Data: For each type of product. a. Diesel engine data: 1) Manufacturer Technical Specifications 16231-1 Diesel-Engine-Driven Generator Sets 2) Model 3) Revolutions per minute (RPM) 4) Rated capacity brake horsepower(bhp) 5) Governor 6) Piston displacement 7) Fuel consumption in gallons per hour at 0.8 power factor at 0.5, 0.75, and 1.0 times generator capacity. b. Generator data: 1) Manufacturer 2) Model 3) Kilowatt rating, efficiency, reactances, and short-circuit current capability. 4) Voltage 5) Temperature rise above 40 degrees C ambient at rated output with 0.8 power factor 6) Thermal damage curve 7) Motor starting capability 8) Generator efficiency at 0.8 power factor at 0.5, 0.75, and 1.0 times generator capacity. c. Package data: 1) Overall length, width, and height 2) Weight of complete skid mounted unit 3) Exhaust pipe size 4) Air flow (in cubic feet per minute) of air required for combustion and ventilation 5) Heat rejection to the atmosphere of the engine and generator in BTU/hr 6) Cooling air volume required 7) Emissions certification 8) Sound data d. Engine-generator unit and accessories: 1) Accessory sub-panel &transformer 2) Control panels 3) Voltage regulator 4) Fuel system 5) Exhaust system 6) Batteries 7) Battery charger 8) Jacket water heater e. Generator circuit breaker: 1) Manufacturer's descriptive literature and catalog number 2) Recommended trip settings for all adjustable settings 3) Short circuit interrupting rating 4) Time-current characteristic curves 3. Shop Drawings: a. Include plans and elevations for engine generator and other components specified. Indicate access requirements affected by height of subbase fuel tank. Technical Specifications 16231-2 Diesel-Engine-Driven Generator Sets b. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. c. Identify fluid drain ports and clearance requirements for proper fluid drain. d. Design calculations for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases. e. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include base weights. f. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. Complete schematic, wiring,and interconnection diagrams showing terminal markings for engine generators and functional relationship between all electrical components. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Sizing calculations: Submit project specific sizing calculation to demonstrate the engine-generator performance based on specified loads and associated startup sequence. 2. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit IBC certification that engine- generator set, batteries, battery racks, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces. a. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event." b. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. c. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements 3. Source Quality-Control Reports: Including, but not limited to, the following: a. Certified summary of prototype unit test report b. Certified Test Report for components and accessories that are equivalent, but not identical, to those tested on prototype unit. c. Certified Summary of Performance Tests: Certify compliance with specified requirement to meet performance criteria for sensitive loads. d. Report of factory test on units to be shipped for this Project, showing evidence of compliance with specified requirements. e. Report of sound generation. f. Report of exhaust emissions showing compliance with applicable regulations. g. Certified Torsional Vibration Compatibility. 4. Warranty details. C. Closeout Submittals: 1. Operation and Maintenance Manual shall contain all the information needed to operate, maintain and repair all systems, equipment, and material provided. Technical Specifications 16231-3 Diesel-Engine-Driven Generator Sets 1.05 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL: A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fuses: One for every 10 of each type and rating, minimum one fuse of each type. 2. Indicator Lamps: Two for every six of each type used, but no fewer than two of each. 3. Filters: One set each of lubricating oil, fuel, and combustion-air filters. 4. Special Tools: Each special tool listed by part number in operations and maintenance manual. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. A qualified manufacturer with a minimum of 25 years' experience building the specified products. 2. The manufacture shall maintain, within 200 miles of Project site, a factory authorized and trained service center capable of providing training and 24-hour parts, service, and emergency maintenance repairs. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of packaged engine generators and associated auxiliary components that fail in materials or workmanship for a 5-year warranty period from date of Substantial Completion. Warranty must include cost of parts, travel, and labor for the entire period. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Cummins Power Generation. B. Source Limitations: Obtain packaged engine generators and auxiliary components from single source from single manufacturer. 2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Engine generator, subbase fuel tank, batteries, battery racks, silencers, accessories, and components shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. The term "withstand" means the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces shown on the Structural Drawings. 2. Component Importance Factor: 1.0. Technical Specifications 16231-4 Diesel-Engine-Driven Generator Sets B. Engine generator system shall withstand the following environmental conditions and design load guidelines without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of performance capability: 1. Ambient Temperature: 5 to 104 deg F (Minus 15 to plus 40 deg C). 2. Relative Humidity: Zero to 95 percent. 3. Altitude: Sea level to 2000 feet. C. 1311 Compliance: Comply with 1311.19. D. NFPA Compliance: 1. NFPA 37. 2. NFPA 70. 3. NFPA 110 requirements for Level 2 legally required power supply systems. E. UL Compliance: UL 2200. F. Engine Exhaust Emissions: Comply with applicable federal, state, and local emissions requirements at the time of purchase. G. Noise Emission: Comply with applicable state and local government requirements for maximum noise level due to sound emitted by engine generator including engine, engine exhaust, engine cooling-air intake and discharge, and other components of installation. 2.03 ENGINE GENERATOR ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION A. Factory-assembled and -tested, water-cooled engine, with brushless generator and accessories. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use. C. Power Rating: Standby. D. EPSS Class: Engine generator shall be classified as a Class 24 according to NFPA 110. E. Power Factor: 0.8, lagging. F. Frequency: 60 Hz. G. Voltage: 480-VAC. H. Phase: Three-phase, four wire, wye. I. Governor: Adjustable isochronous, with speed sensing. J. Mounting Frame: Structural steel framework to maintain alignment of mounted components without depending on concrete foundation. Provide lifting attachments sized and spaced to prevent deflection of base during lifting and moving. Technical Specifications 16231-5 Diesel-Engine-Driven Generator Sets K. Rigging Diagram: Inscribed on metal plate permanently attached to mounting frame to indicate location and lifting capacity of each lifting attachment and engine generator center of gravity. L. Capacities and Characteristics: Power Output Ratings: 1. Nominal ratings as indicated at 0.8 power factor excluding power required for the continued and repeated operation of the unit and auxiliaries, with capacity as required to operate as a unit as evidenced by records of prototype testing. 2. Nameplates: For each major system component to identify manufacturer's name and address, and model and serial number of component. M. Engine Generator Performance: Oversizing generator compared with the rated power output of the engine is permissible to meet specified performance. 1. Nameplate Data for Oversized Generator: Show ratings required by the Contract Documents rather than ratings that would normally be applied to generator size installed. 2. Steady-State Voltage Operational Bandwidth: 1 percent of rated output voltage from no load to full load. 3. Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 10 percent variation for 50 percent step- load increase or decrease. Voltage shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within 0.5 second. Maintain voltage within 10 percent on each loading step (as noted below) during initial load transfer. 4. Steady-State Frequency Operational Bandwidth: Plus or minus 0.25 percent of rated frequency from no load to full load. 5. Steady-State Frequency Stability: When system is operating at any constant load within the rated load, there shall be no random speed variations outside the steady-state operational band and no hunting or surging of speed. 6. Transient Frequency Performance: Less than 2-Hz variation for 50 percent step- load increase or decrease. Frequency shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within three seconds. 7. Output Waveform: At no load, harmonic content measured line to neutral shall not exceed 2 percent total with no slot ripple. Telephone influence factor, determined according to NEMA MG 1, shall not exceed 50 percent. 8. Sustained Short-Circuit Current: For a three-phase, bolted short circuit at system output terminals, system shall supply a minimum of 300 percent of rated full-load current for not less than 10 seconds and then clear the fault automatically, without damage to winding insulation or other generator system components. 9. Excitation System: Performance shall be unaffected by voltage distortion caused by nonlinear load. Provide permanent magnet excitation for power source to voltage regulator. 10. Start Time: Comply with NFPA 110, Type 10 system requirements. 2.04 DIESEL ENGINE A. Fuel: diesel fuel oil, Grade DF-2 ULS type. B. Rated Engine Speed: 1800 rpm. C. Lubrication System: Engine or skid-mounted. Technical Specifications 16231-6 Diesel-Engine-Driven Generator Sets 1. Filter and Strainer: Rated to remove 90 percent of particles 5 micrometers and smaller while passing full flow. 2. Thermostatic Control Valve: Control flow in system to maintain optimum oil temperature. Unit shall be capable of full flow and is designed to be fail-safe. 3. Crankcase Drain: Arranged for complete gravity drainage to an easily removable container with no disassembly and without use of pumps, siphons, special tools, or appliances. D. Jacket Coolant Heater: Electric-immersion type, factory installed in coolant jacket system. Comply with UL 499. E. Integral Cooling System: Closed loop, liquid cooled, with radiator factory mounted on engine generator set mounting frame and integral engine-driven coolant pump. 1. Coolant: Solution of 50 percent ethylene-glycol-based antifreeze and 50 percent water, with anticorrosion additives as recommended by engine manufacturer. 2. Size of Radiator: Adequate to contain expansion of total system coolant from cold start to 110 percent load condition. 3. Temperature Control: Self-contained, thermostatic-control valve modulates coolant flow automatically to maintain optimum constant coolant temperature as recommended by engine manufacturer. 4. Coolant Hose: Flexible assembly with inside surface of nonporous rubber and outer covering of aging-, UV-, and abrasion-resistant fabric. a. Rating: 50-psig (345-kPa) maximum working pressure with coolant at 180 deg F (82 deg C), and non-collapsible under vacuum. b. End Fittings: Flanges or steel pipe nipples with clamps to suit piping and equipment connections. F. Muffler/Silencer: Semi-critical type, sized as recommended by engine manufacturer and selected with exhaust piping system to not exceed engine manufacturer's engine backpressure requirements. 1. Minimum sound attenuation of 18 dB at 500 Hz. 2. Sound level measured at a distance of 25 feet from exhaust discharge after installation is complete shall be 85 dBA or less. 3. Muffler style to be silencer disk (pancake) type 4. Provide engine to muffler flexible transition fitting 5. Provide engine exhaust wall thimble G. Air-Intake Filter: Heavy-duty, engine-mounted air cleaner with replaceable dry-filter element and "blocked filter" indicator. H. Starting System: 12-V or 24-V electric, with negative ground. 1. Components: Sized so they are not damaged during a full engine-cranking cycle with maximum ambient temperature. 2. Cranking Motor: Heavy-duty unit that automatically engages and releases from engine flywheel without binding. 3. Cranking Cycle: As required by NFPA 110 for system level specified. 4. Battery: Lead acid, with capacity within specified ambient temperature range to provide specified cranking cycle at least three times without recharging. 5. Battery Cable: Size as recommended by engine manufacturer. Technical Specifications 16231-7 Diesel-Engine-Driven Generator Sets 6. Battery Stand: Factory-fabricated, two-tier metal with acid-resistant finish designed to hold the quantity of battery cells required and to maintain the arrangement to minimize lengths of battery interconnections. 7. Battery-Charging Alternator: Factory mounted on engine with solid-state voltage regulation and 35-A minimum continuous rating. 8. Battery Charger: Current-limiting, automatic-equalizing, and float-charging type. Unit shall comply with UL 1236 and include the following features: a. Operation: Equalizing-charging rate of 10 A shall be initiated automatically after battery has lost charge until an adjustable equalizing voltage is achieved at battery terminals. Unit shall then be automatically switched to a lower float-charging mode and shall continue to operate in that mode until battery is discharged again. b. Automatic Temperature Compensation: Adjust float and equalize voltages for variations in ambient temperature from minus 40 to 140 deg F (minus 40 to plus 60 deg C) to prevent overcharging at high temperatures and undercharging at low temperatures. c. Automatic Voltage Regulation: Maintain constant output voltage regardless of input voltage variations up to plus or minus 10 percent. d. Ammeter and Voltmeter: Meters shall indicate charging rates. e. Safety Functions: Sense abnormally low battery voltage and close contacts providing low battery voltage indication on control and monitoring panel. Sense high battery voltage and loss of ac input or do output of battery charger. Either condition shall close contacts that provide a battery-charger malfunction indication at system control and monitoring panel. f. Enclosure and Mounting: NEMA 250, Type 1, wall-mounted cabinet. 2.05 DIESEL FUEL-OIL SYSTEM A. Comply with NFPA 37. B. Piping: Fuel-oil piping shall be Schedule 40 black steel. Cast iron, aluminum, copper, and galvanized steel shall not be used in the fuel-oil system. C. Main Fuel Pump: Mounted on engine to provide primary fuel flow under starting and load conditions. D. Fuel Filtering: Remove water and contaminants larger than 1 micron. E. Relief-Bypass Valve: Automatically regulates pressure in fuel line and returns excess fuel to source. F. Subbase-Mounted, Double-Wall, Fuel-Oil Tank: Factory installed and piped, complying with UL 142 fuel-oil tank. Features include the following: 1. Tank level indicator. 2. Fuel-Tank Capacity: Minimum 133 percent of total fuel required for planned 24- hour operation plus fuel for periodic maintenance operations between fuel refills. 3. Leak detection in interstitial space. 4. Vandal-resistant fill cap. Technical Specifications 16231-8 Diesel-Engine-Driven Generator Sets 5. Containment Provisions: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. G. Provide remote, sealed, fuel fill box and hose connection for outdoor installation. 2.06 CONTROL AND MONITORING A. Automatic Starting System Sequence of Operation: When mode-selector switch on the control and monitoring panel is in the automatic position, remote-control contacts in one or more separate automatic transfer switches initiate starting and stopping of engine generator.When mode-selector switch is switched to the on position, engine generator starts. The off position of same switch initiates engine generator shutdown. When engine generator is running, specified system or equipment failures or derangements automatically shut down engine generator and initiate alarms. B. Provide minimum run time control set for 15 minutes with override only by operation of a remote emergency-stop switch. C. Comply with UL 508A. D. Configuration: 1. Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic system controls, and engine gages shall be grouped in a common control and monitoring panel mounted on the engine generator. Mounting method shall isolate the control panel from engine generator vibration. Panel shall be powered from the engine generator battery. E. Control and Monitoring Panel: 1. Digital engine generator controller with modern display technology, controls, and microprocessor, capable of local and remote control, monitoring, and programming,with battery backup. 2. Instruments: Located on the control and monitoring panel and viewable during operation. a. Engine lubricating-oil pressure gage. b. Engine-coolant temperature gage. c. DC voltmeter (alternator battery charging). d. Running-time meter. e. AC voltmeter, for each phase connected to a phase selector switch. f. AC ammeter, for each phase connected to a phase selector switch. g. AC frequency meter. h. Generator kW, kVA, kVAR, and power factor. i. Generator-voltage adjustment. 3. Controls and Protective Devices: Controls, shutdown devices, and common alarm indication, including the following: a. Cranking control equipment. b. Run-Off-Auto switch. c. Control switch not in automatic position alarm. d. Overcrank alarm. e. Overcrank shutdown device. Technical Specifications 16231-9 Diesel-Engine-Driven Generator Sets f. Low-water temperature alarm. g. High engine temperature prealarm. h. High engine temperature. i. High engine temperature shutdown device. j. Overspeed alarm. k. Overspeed shutdown device. I. Low fuel main tank. Low-fuel-level alarm shall be initiated when the level falls below that required for operation for duration required for the indicated EPSS class. m. Coolant low-level alarm. n. Coolant low-level shutdown device. o. Coolant high-temperature prealarm. p. Coolant high-temperature alarm. q. Coolant low-temperature alarm. r. Coolant high-temperature shutdown device. s. EPS load indicator. t. Battery high-voltage alarm. u. Low cranking voltage alarm. v. Battery-charger malfunction alarm. w. Battery low-voltage alarm. x. Lamp test. y. Contacts for local and remote common alarm. z. Remote manual stop shutdown device. aa. Air shutdown damper alarm when used. bb. Air shutdown damper shutdown device when used. cc. Hours of operation. dd. Engine generator metering, including voltage, current, hertz, kilowatt, kilovolt ampere, and power factor. F. Communications: 1. A separate terminal block, factory wired to four Form C relays that can be assigned to any alarm or fault. 2. Provide Ethernet connections for data transmission of indications to remote data terminals using Modbus RTU protocol. G. Supporting Items: Include sensors, transducers, terminals, relays, and other devices and include wiring required to support specified items. Locate sensors and other supporting items on engine or generator unless otherwise indicated. 2.07 GENERATOR OVERCURRENT AND FAULT PROTECTION A. Overcurrent protective devices shall be coordinated to optimize selective tripping when ashort circuit occurs. 1. Overcurrent protective devices for the entire EPSS shall be coordinated to optimize selective tripping when a short circuit occurs. Coordination of protective devices shall consider both utility and EPSS as the voltage source. 2. Overcurrent protective devices for the EPSS shall be accessible only to authorized personnel. Technical Specifications 16231-10 Diesel-Engine-Driven Generator Sets B. Generator Overcurrent Protective Device: 1. Molded-case circuit breaker, electronic-trip type, complying with UL 489: a. Tripping Characteristics: Adjustable long-time and short-time delay and instantaneous to allow selective coordination with supply-side overcurrent protective devices. b. Shunt Trip: Connected to trip breaker when engine generator is shut down by other protective devices. c. Mounting: Adjacent to, or integrated with, control and monitoring panel. C. Generator Protector: Microprocessor-based unit shall continuously monitor current level in each phase of generator output, integrate generator heating effect over time, and predict when thermal damage of alternator will occur. When signaled by generator protector or other engine generator protective devices, a shunt-trip device in the generator disconnect switch shall open the switch to disconnect the generator from load circuits. Protector performs the following functions: 1. Initiates a generator overload alarm when generator has operated at an overload equivalent to 110 percent of full-rated load for 60 seconds. Indication for this alarm is integrated with other engine generator malfunction alarms. Contacts shall be available for load shed functions. 2. Under single- or three-phase fault conditions, regulates generator to 300 percent of rated full-load current for up to 10 seconds. 3. As overcurrent heating effect on the generator approaches the thermal damage point of the unit, protector switches the excitation system off, opens the generator disconnect device, and shuts down the engine generator. 4. Senses clearing of a fault by other overcurrent devices and controls recovery of rated voltage to avoid overshoot. D. Ground-Fault Indication: Comply with NFPA 70. Indicate ground fault with other engine generator alarm indications. 2.08 GENERATOR, EXCITER, AND VOLTAGE REGULATOR A. Comply with NEMA MG 1. B. Drive: Generator shaft shall be directly connected to engine shaft. Exciter shall be rotated integrally with generator rotor. C. Electrical Insulation: Class H. D. Stator-Winding Leads: Brought out to terminal box to permit future reconnection for other voltages if required. E. Range: Provide broad range of output voltage by adjusting the excitation level. F. Construction shall prevent mechanical, electrical, and thermal damage due to vibration, overspeed up to 125 percent of rating, and heat during operation at 110 percent of rated capacity. G. Enclosure: Dripproof. Technical Specifications 16231-11 Diesel-Engine-Driven Generator Sets H. Instrument Transformers: Mounted within generator enclosure. I. Voltage Regulator: Solid-state type, separate from exciter, providing performance as specified. 1. Adjustment on Control and Monitoring Panel: Provide plus or minus 5 percent adjustment of output-voltage operating band. 2. Maintain voltage within 10 percent on one step, full load. 3. Provide anti-hunt provision to stabilize voltage. 4. Maintain frequency within 10 percent and stabilize at rated frequency within 2 seconds. J. Windings: Two-thirds pitch stator winding and fully linked amortisseur winding. 2.09 LOAD START-UP SEQUENCE A. The load startup sequence subsequent to an electric utility power outage (and used for generator sizing) includes 100% of the loads connected downstream of the automatic transfer switch in one step. 2.10 VIBRATION ISOLATION DEVICES A. Elastomeric Isolator Pads: Oil- and water-resistant elastomer or natural rubber, arranged in single or multiple layers, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized- steel baseplates of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment. 1. Material: Bridge-bearing neoprene, complying with AASHTO M 251 separated by steel shims. 2. Durometer Rating: 60 (to be confirmed by manufacturer based on final selection of vibration isolation system). 3. Number of Layers: Up to four (determined by manufacturer based on final vibration isolator assembly design. B. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic restraint. 1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to wind loads or if weight is removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick, elastomeric isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment- mounting and -leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation. 2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of compressed height of the spring at rated load. 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. Technical Specifications 16231-12 Diesel-Engine-Driven Generator Sets 2.11 FINISHES A. Manufacturer's standard finish over corrosion-resistant pretreatment and compatible primer. 2.12 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Prototype Testing: Factory test engine generator using same engine model, constructed of identical or equivalent components and equipped with identical or equivalent accessories. Comply with IEEE 115. B. Project-Specific Equipment Tests: Before shipment, factory test engine generator and other system components and accessories manufactured specifically for this Project. Perform tests at rated load and power factor. Include the following tests: 1. Test components and accessories furnished with installed unit that are not identical to those on tested prototype to demonstrate compatibility and reliability. 2. Test generator, exciter, and voltage regulator as a unit. 3. Full load run. 4. Maximum power. 5. Voltage regulation. 6. Transient and steady-state governing. 7. Single-step load pickup. 8. Safety shutdown. 9. Report factory test results within 10 days of completion of test. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, equipment bases, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting packaged engine generator performance. B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems and electrical connections. Verify actual locations of connections before packaged engine generator installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA1 and NECA404. B. Comply with packaged engine generator manufacturers' written installation and alignment instructions and with NFPA110. C. Equipment Mounting: 1. Install packaged engine generators on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases. Comply with requirements for equipment bases and foundations specified in Division 03. Technical Specifications 16231-13 Diesel-Engine-Driven Generator Sets 2. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for packaged engine generators. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete. 3. Install packaged engine generator with elastomeric isolator pads 4-inch- (100- mm-) high concrete base. Secure sets to anchor bolts installed in concrete bases. D. Install packaged engine generator to provide access, without removing connections or accessories, for periodic maintenance. E. Exhaust System: Install Schedule 40 black steel piping with welded joints and connect to engine muffler. Install thimble at wall. Piping shall be same diameter as muffler outlet. Provide with flexible connectors and insulate muffler/silencer and exhaust components. F. Install isolating thimbles where exhaust piping penetrates combustible surfaces with a minimum of 9 inches (225 mm) of clearance from combustibles. G. Drain Piping: Install condensate drain piping to muffler drain outlet full size of drain connection with a shutoff valve, stainless-steel flexible connector, and Schedule 40 black steel pipe with welded joints. H. Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but not specified to be factory mounted. 3.03 CONNECTIONS A. Connect fuel, cooling-system, and exhaust-system piping adjacent to packaged engine generator to allow space for service and maintenance. B. Connect cooling-system water piping to engine generator with flexible connectors. C. Connect engine exhaust pipe to engine with flexible connector. D. Connect fuel piping to engines with a gate valve and union and flexible connector. E. Ground equipment according to Section 16450 - Grounding. F. Connect wiring according to Section 16120 - Conductors and Communications Cabling. Provide a minimum of one 90-degree bend in flexible conduit routed to the engine generator from a stationary element. G. Balance single-phase loads to obtain a maximum of 10 percent unbalance between any two phases. H. Set field adjustable intervals and delays, relays, and engine exerciser clock. Technical Specifications 16231-14 Diesel-Engine-Driven Generator Sets 3.04 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components according to Section 16010 — Basic Electrical Requirements. B. Install a sign indicating the generator neutral is bonded to the main service neutral at the main service location. 3.05 MAINTENANCE SERVICE B. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall include 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of manufacturer's authorized service representative. Include quarterly preventive maintenance and exercising to check for proper starting, load transfer, and running under load. Include routine preventive maintenance as recommended by manufacturer and adjusting as required for proper operation. Parts shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies. 3.06 FIELD TESTS A. Generator system and associated control, monitoring, and protection shall be tested in accordance with Section 16950, Electrical Testing. B. Administer and perform tests and inspections with assistance of factory-authorized service representative. 3.07 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain packaged engine generators. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 16231-15 Diesel-Engine-Driven Generator Sets SECTION 16265 LOW-VOLTAGE VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES (VFD) PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes low-voltage variable frequency drives and associated output conditioning. 1.02 REFERENCE A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA): a. NEMA ICS 1, General Standards for Industrial Controls and Systems. b. NEMA ICS 2, Standards for Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies c. NEMA ICS 3, Industrial Systems d. NEMA ICS 3.1, Safety Standards for Construction and Guide for Selection, Installation and Operation of Variable-speed Drive Systems e. NEMA ICS 4, Terminal Blocks for Industrial Control Equipment and Systems f. NEMA ICS 6, Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems. 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) a. ANSI C37.90, Relays and Relay Systems Associated with Electric Power Apparatus b. ANSI C37.30A(1984), Definitions and Requirements for High-Voltage Air Switches, Insulators, and Bus Supports, Supplement to C37.30-1971 c. ANSI C37.32, Schedules of Preferred Ratings, Manufacturing Specifications and Application Guide for High-Voltage Air Switches, Bus Supports, and Switch Accessories. 3. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) a. IEEE 519, Harmonic Control and Reactive Compensation of Static Power Converters 4. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): a. 508A - Standard for Safety for Industrial Control Panels. b. 508C - Standard for Power Conversion Equipment. c. 845 - Standard for Motor Control Centers. 1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. General: 1. Each VFD system shall consist of all components required to meet the performance, protection, safety, testing and certification criteria of this Section. 2. The VFD system shall be a fully integrated package and includes all material necessary to interconnect VFD system elements, even if shipped separately. 3. Any modifications to a standard product necessary to meet this Section shall be made only by the VFD manufacturer. Technical Specifications 16265-1 Low Voltage Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) 4. Each VFD shall be completely factory pre-wired, assembled and then tested as a complete package by the VFD manufacturer to ensure a properly coordinated, fully integrated drive system. 5. The VFD shall be capable of operating standard NEMA Design B motors. It is the responsibility of the VFD manufacturer to ensure that the drive will not damage motor insulation due to high carrier frequency, reflected wave, dv/dt or other drive electrical characteristics: a. The VFD manufacturer shall furnish equipment necessary to mitigate potential damage to motor insulation. b. Coordinate bearing protection methods with the supplier of the driven equipment. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's descriptive literature and technical data indicating the equipment complies with the Construction Document. 2. Installation instructions, outline dimensions and weights including filters and/or isolation transformers, front view drawing identifying control and monitoring devices, nameplate engravings, shipping section dimensions, weight, and foundation requirements or wall mounting requirements for all assemblies. 3. External connection diagram showing function and identification of all terminals requiring field connections. 4. Schematics and wiring diagrams. 5. Plan drawings showing conduit entry locations for configured VFD systems. 6. Design data: a. Efficiency and power factor values. b. Certification that the drive is sized for the full nameplate motor horsepower and current (at rated RPM) of the driven load at the installed altitude. c. Certification that based upon VFD design, cable length to motor, and motor dielectric insulation level that the VFD will not damage motor insulation due to carrier frequency, reflected wave, dv/dt, or other VFD produced characteristics. d. Certification that all electronic circuits and printed circuit boards are conformably coated. 7. Installation instructions: a. Detail the complete installation of the equipment including rigging, moving, and setting into place. b. Provide project-specific installation instructions and anchoring details based on support conditions and requirements to resist seismic loads as specified in Section 16010 — Basic Electrical Requirements. c. Submit anchoring drawings with supporting calculations. 8. Calculations: a. Harmonic study: 1) A preliminary harmonic analysis shall be performed. A power system short circuit ratio of 20 shall be used. All VFDs shall be assumed to be operating at maximum speed and maximum load. The short circuit current (ISC) utilized for the harmonic analysis calculations is defined as: a) ISC = 20 * (Sum Total Full Load Amps of all VFDs). Technical Specifications 16265-2 Low Voltage Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) 2) A separate harmonic analysis shall be performed based on the standby generator system. Coordinate with the generator manufacturer and the VFD manufacturer so the actual characteristics for the generator supplied for this Project are used in the harmonic analysis. b. Current and voltage distortion calculations: 1) Point of Common Coupling (PCC) 2) Include first 36 odd current and voltage harmonics. Voltage shall be calculated on line-to-line basis. 3) Provide distortion figures for each harmonic and the total demand distortion. c. Detailed calculations or details of the actual physical testing performed on the VFD to prove the VFD is suitable for the seismic conditions at the Project Site. d. Efficiency and power factor calculations: 1) Calculate efficiencies of the VFD controller including the auto- transformer (where applicable), ventilation fans, control power and all VFD losses. 2) Calculate displacement and total power factor including filter. 3) Perform calculations at 100, 75, and 50 percent speed. 4) Include first 36 harmonics. e. Calculations of cooling and ventilation requirements. 9. Certified final factory test procedure and results for each drive. 10. Location and description of service center and spare parts stock. 11. Recommended spare parts list. 12. Factory and field test documentation. 13. Training schedule and materials. 14. Written descriptions explaining ladder diagram operation, system operation, and analog signal processing. 15. Comprehensive interconnection diagrams for VFD and motor. 16. Certification that VFD, motor, and driven load are compatible throughout the specified speed range. 17. Operation and maintenance manuals: a. Spare parts list with supplier names and part numbers. b. Start-up and commissioning instructions and data. c. Complete bill of material indexed to the drawings, identifying the catalog or part numbers, manufacturer, and quantities of components of the VFD system. d. Operating manuals: 1) Submit operating instructions and a maintenance manual presenting full details for care and maintenance of each model of VFD provided under this Contract. e. Operating instructions: 1) The written descriptions shall detail the operational functions of all controls on the front panel including keypad functions and parameters. f. Maintenance manual: 1) Furnish maintenance manuals with instructions covering all details pertaining to care and maintenance of all equipment as well as identifying all parts. 2) Manuals shall include but are not limited to the following: Technical Specifications 16265-3 Low Voltage Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) a) Adjustment and test instructions covering the steps involved in the initial test, adjustment and start-up procedures. b) Detailed control instructions that outline the purpose and operation of every control device used in normal operation. c) All schematic wiring and external diagrams in a fully legible reduced 11-inch by 17-inch format. 1.05 COORDINATION A. Obtain and review the appropriate data for the driven motor and load over the required speed range, for a complete system analysis. B. Provide a variable torque or constant torque VFD as required by the driven load. C. Verify that equipment is mutually compatible and free of resonance over the complete operating range. D. Coordinate the assignment of any critical frequencies with the motor supplier. E. Prepare the certificate required under Submittals paragraph in this Section; the certificate shall specifically state whether the VFD equipment is rated for variable torque or constant torque applications. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Any third party certification, safety or protection requirements shall be applied to the VFD system as a whole. Certification or protection of system elements or individual components by themselves is not acceptable. B. VFDs shall be UL 508C listed and labeled. C. VFDs shall be manufactured by the VFD manufacturer at its own facility, which shall have a quality assurance program that is certified in accordance with ISO 9001. D. Listed and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL), ETL, or Canadian Standards Association. E. All upgrades to specified requirements per UL 508 or ETL. F. Source Quality Control: 1. The Owner reserves the right to observe factory tests on the VFD controller at the Owner's option and expense. 2. Compatibility: VFD controller's performance shall be compatible and tolerant of disturbances produced by other VFD controllers and not interfere with each other. 3. Programming: Provide VFD controller configuration and MACRO or sub- routine programming to meet specified driven equipment requirements. 4. Maintainability: VFD controller's parts shall be interchangeable and modular for all controllers. Technical Specifications 16265-4 Low Voltage Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) 5. Factory Test: Subject complete VFD enclosure to a complete simulated operational test. Drive a calibrated load at various speeds over the specified speed range to determine VFD efficiency. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS/PRODUCTS A. Magnetek Impulse G+ Series 4 2.02 SYSTEM A. General: 1. Provide integrated, all solid state variable frequency drives (VFD) complete with power and signal conditioning. 2. System shall comply with NEMA ICS 1, 3, 4, 3.1, 4, and 6. 3. System includes: a. Sinusoidal pulse width modulated, (PWM), voltage source type drive. 1) Diode rectifier section. 2) Direct current link with capacitors. 3) Insulated gate bipolar transistor (IGBT), inverter section. 4) Microprocessor based controls. b. Output conditioning: 1) Sine wave filter—Transcoil (TCI) MotorShield series with Type 1 enclosure; or equivalent. 4. VFDs that have an active input section for either harmonic or voltage control are not acceptable. B. Operation: Accomplish speed control by adjusting the output frequency according to the desired reference speed. Adjust ac voltage and frequency simultaneously to provide the constant Volts/Hertz necessary to operate the motor at the desired speed. The VFD must use pulse width modulation technology. C. Rating: 1. Line Voltage: 480 volts, -5 percent continuous, -10 percent momentary, +10 percent, 3 phase. 2. Line Frequency: 60 Hz, ±2 Hz 3. Short Circuit Rating: 65kA RMS symmetrical 4. Ambient Temperature: 50C to 400C 5. Altitude: Up to 2,000 feet above sea level. 6. Power Factor: Above 0.95 at full speed and rated load. D. Performance: 1. Provide 100 percent of rated output current on a continuous basis. 2. Variable torque VFD: a. Minimum 110 percent current overload for 1 minute. 3. Constant torque VFD: a. Minimum 150 percent current overload for 1 minute. 4. Efficiency: Above 95 percent at 100 percent full speed, above 93 percent at 70 percent full speed. Technical Specifications 16265-5 Low Voltage Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) 5. VFD Inrush Current: Limited to less than 100 percent of motor full load 6. Duty Cycle: 6 starts per hour. E. Features: 1. Communications: Ethernet/Modbus TCP/IP. 2. Inputs and Outputs: a. Potentiometer 3-wire input for manual speed control. Motor speed indicator calibrated in percent of full speed. b. Analog inputs: Configurable as either 0-10 volts or 4-20 mA do signal. Input impedance shall be 250 ohms resistive. c. Analog outputs: Programmable 4-20 mA do signal for remote indication to a local PLC. Input impedance shall be 250 ohms resistive. d. Discrete inputs: Programmable. e. Discrete outputs: Programmable, form C relay contacts. 3. Diagnostics: a. Minimum of 4 fault conditions in memory on a first in - first out basis. b. Operating frequency, drive status and power mode shall also be stored at the time of the fault. c. Fault memory shall be maintained in the event of a power outage. d. The fault memory shall be accessible via RS-232, RS-422 or RS-485. 4. Automatic restart: a. User selectable, automatic restart feature allowing the VFD to restart following a momentary power failure or other VFD fault: 1) Programmable for up to 9 automatic restart attempts with an adjustable time delay between restart attempts. 5. Variable time delay for delaying motor drive restart after power failure; timer range shall be 0 to 120 seconds, with initial settings differing by 10 seconds for each drive; provide module which causes multiple attempts to restart. 6. Provision for automatic emergency shutdown in any mode, activated by the following: a. Motor thermal protection. b. Any additional abnormal conditions as shown on the Drawings. Provide for manual restart. 7. VFD able to withstand harmonic distortion and notching as defined in IEEE- 519 for dedicated system (10 percent voltage distortion factor and 36,500 volt microseconds commutation notch area). 8. VFD operable with motor disconnected, in order to test VFD. 9. Linearity and repeatability accuracy of 3 phase output of 1 percent of analog input control signal regardless of input power voltage fluctuations between 437 and 505 volts. 10. Independent acceleration and deceleration controls, adjustable from 2 to 30 Hz per second. 11. Label with fault current rating and arc flash warning per NEC and Section 16940, Electrical Systems Analysis. 12. Label denoting overload setting and date it was set. F. Protection: Protect VFD against the following conditions: 1. Reverse phase sequence and single phasing of input power. 2. Input power failure. 3. Input transient voltages, including peak suppression and snubbers, in accordance with ANSI C37.90. Technical Specifications 16265-6 Low Voltage Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) 4. Transmission signal interference. 5. Output overcurrent. 6. Input overcurrent. 7. Motor over temperature. 8. Cabinet over temperature. 9. Under voltage: VFD shall automatically shut down if input voltage falls below preset limit with automatic restart upon return to a stable supply. G. Mount components on circuit cards or modules, which can be adjusted or replaced in the field without the use of special tools. H. Conformal coating: 1. Provide conformal coating material applied to electronic circuitry and printed circuit boards to act as protection against moisture, dust, temperature extremes, and chemicals such as HZS and chlorine. I. Spare Parts: 1. 1 set of thyristors or power electronics for each type and rated size of VFD. 2. Any special dedicated tools for emergency service and troubleshooting. 3. All hardware and software required for configuration, maintenance, troubleshooting and inquiry of all drive parameters. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install VFD and sine wave filter level and plumb, and VFD doors shall open and close freely. B. Clean and repair scratched or damaged surfaces to "new" condition. C. Provide the services of a factory trained service technician to inspect and check out each system before energizing. D. Per manufacturer's instructions, lace power conductors to resist short circuit forces. E. Operate each drive from no load to full load and perform a spectrum analysis to verify that the waveform on the line side of the VFD is in compliance with IEEE 519 for general systems. F. Make all adjustments as necessary and recommended by the manufacturer, Engineer, or testing firm. G. Provide the services of a VFD manufacturer factory technician to make all drive parameter and protective device settings: 1. Protective device settings provided by the VFD manufacturer in accordance with the manufacturer of the driven equipment requirements. 2. Provide documentation of VFD settings included but not limited to: a. Minimum speed. b. Maximum speed. Technical Specifications 16265-7 Low Voltage Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) c. Skip speeds. d. Current limit. e. Acceleration time. f. Deceleration time. g. Carrier frequency. 3.02 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. The VFD manufacturer shall be responsible for start-up of the VFDs in the presence of the equipment suppliers, Contractor, Engineer, and Owner. Supervise start-up field testing and submit written certification that the equipment and controls have been properly installed, aligned, adjusted, and readied for operation. B. Startup field testing: 1. Provide technical direction for testing, checkout, and startup of the VFD equipment in the field. 2. Under no circumstances are any portions of the drive system to be energized without authorization from the manufacturer's representative. 3. Compliance with the following specified parameters shall be verified by the VFD manufacturer: a. Motor terminal voltage: 1) Make field measurements at the motor connection box. 2) Make measurements of the full speed range of the VFD. 3) Make measurements with a recording type oscilloscope. b. Harmonics: 1) Make field measurements at the input terminals of the VFD with and without the VFD in operation. 2) Harmonic testing shall include utility power as well as generator standby power. 3) Make measurements with a recording type harmonic analyzer displaying individual and total harmonic currents and voltages: a) Record currents and voltages for a minimum of 10 minutes. b) Analyzers using snapshots are not acceptable. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 16265-8 Low Voltage Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) SECTION 16291 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPD) PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide SPD with electrical characteristics and ratings for service entrance equipment, switchgear, switchboards, and panelboards specified in the Division 26 electrical distribution equipment specification sections or indicated on the Drawings. Provide SPD with the same voltage, phase, 3 or 4 wire system as the host electrical equipment. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI / Underwriters Laboratories 1449 3rd Edition, Surge Protective Devices. B. National Electrical Code 2012 Article 285, Surge-Protective Devices (SPDs), 1 kV or Less. C. American National Standards Institute/Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineering Inc., ANSI / IEEE C62.41. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: For each type of product. 2. Provide verification that the SPD complies with the required ANSI/UL 1449 3rd Edition listing by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) or other Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL). 3. Compliance: File number verified on UL's website or other NRTL's website, with the following information: a. Model number b. SPD Type c. System voltage, phases d. Protection modes e. Voltage Protection Rating (VPR) f. Nominal Discharge Current (In). g. Name of nationally recognized testing lab that performed the test. 4. For side mount mounting applications (SPD mounted external to electrical assembly), electrical/mechanical drawings showing unit dimensions, weights, installation instruction details, and wiring configuration. 5. Operation and Maintenance Data shall be provided with each SPD shipped. 1.04 SPECIAL WARRANTY A. Manufacturer shall warrant against defects in materials and workmanship for ten years. Technical Specifications 16291-1 Surge Protection Devices PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. The manufacturer of the assembly shall be the manufacturer of the major components within the assembly unless noted otherwise. B. The manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 or ISO 9002 certified for the equipment specified herein. C. The manufacturer shall have produced similar electrical equipment for a minimum period of five years. D. The listing of manufacturers does not imply acceptance of products that do not meet the specified ratings, features, and functions. Manufacturers listed shall meet the specifications in their entirety. E. Manufacturers: 1. Square D 2. Eaton Cutler-Hammer 3. General Electric 4. Siemens 5. Or approved equivalent 2.02 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Electrical Requirements: 1. Refer to drawings for operating voltage and unit configuration. 2. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV): Not be less than 125% of the nominal system operating voltage for 120/208V and 120/240V applications and not less than 115% for all other applications. 3. SPD suppression system includes thermally protected metal-oxide varistors (MOVs) as the core surge suppression component for the service entrance and other distribution levels. 4. The system shall not utilize silicon avalanche diodes, selenium cells, air gaps, or other components that may lead to system upset or create environmental hazards. 5. SPD shall protect all modes of the electrical system being utilized. The required protection modes are indicated by bullets in the following table: Protection modes Configuration L-N L-G L-L N-G Wye • • • • Delta N/A • • N/A Single Split Phase • . • • High Leg Delta • • • • 6. Nominal Discharge Current (In): SPDs applied to the distribution system shall have a 20kA In rating that include Types 1 and 2 or operating voltage. SPD's with "In" that is less than 20kA, will be rejected. Technical Specifications 16291-2 Surge Protection Devices 7. Voltage Protection Rating (VPR): The maximum VPR for the device shall not exceed the following: Modes 208Y/120 480Y/277 240/120 L-N; L-G; N-G 700 1200 700 L-L 1200 2000 1200 B. Surge Protective Device Design: 1. SPD's containing replaceable batteries, requiring maintenance, or requiring diagnostic test kit shall not be accepted. 2. Balanced Suppression Platform: The surge current shall be equally distributed to MOV components for equal stressing with equal impedance paths to each matched MOV. 3. Internal Connections: Plug-in component modules or printed circuit boards shall not be used as surge current conductors. Components shall be soldered, hardwired with connections utilizing low impedance conductors. 4. Monitoring Diagnostics: a. STATUS: Green / red solid-state indicator light for status of the protection on each phase. 1) For wye configured units, provide indicator lights for status of protection elements and circuitry in the L-N and L-G modes and in the N-G mode. 2) For delta configured units, provide indicator lights status of protection elements and circuitry in the L-G and L-L modes. 3) The absence of a green light and the presence of a red light shall indicate that damage has occurred on the respective phase or mode. 4) Status indicators indicate the protection on each phase or mode. If power is removed from any one phase, the indicator lights shall indicate the status of the protection on other phases and protection modes. b. Remote Alarm: Provide Form C dry contacts (one NO and one NC) for remote annunciation. Both contacts change state under fault condition. c. Audible Alarm and Silence Button: Internally powered audible alarm activates upon fault conditions. Alarm silence button silences the audible alarm. d. Surge Counter: LCD display indicates number of surges and trigger each time a surge event with a peak current magnitude of a minimum of 50 ± 20A occurs. A reset pushbutton allows the surge counter to be zeroed and contains a mechanism to prevent accidental resetting of the counter. 5. Overcurrent Protection: Thermally protected MOVs that disconnect from the system during a thermal runaway condition. 6. Design: Components and diagnostics shall be contained within one discrete assembly. 7. Safety Requirements: a. Minimize potential arc flash hazards by containing no user serviceable / replaceable parts. b. Interface with the electrical assembly via conductors shall require no user contact with the inside of the unit and required conductors be factory installed. Technical Specifications 16291-3 Surge Protection Devices c. Side mount SPD's shall be factory sealed in order to prevent access to the inside of the unit with factory installed phase, neutral, ground and remote alarm contacts shall have conductors protruding outside of the enclosure for field wiring. 2.03 SYSTEM APPLICATION A. SPD include distribution and branch panel locations, busway, and switchboard assemblies tested and demonstrate suitability for application within ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category C, B, and A environments. B. The minimum surge current capacity: Minimum surge current capacity based on ANSI / IEEE C62.41 location category Category Application Per Phase C Switchboards, Switch ear, Main Service Entrance 240 kA B Distribution Panelboards 160 kA A Branch Locations: Panelboards 120 kA C. Verify SPD's are compatible with active harmonic filters. 2.04 PANELBOARDS A. SPD application includes lighting and distribution panelboards, tested for application within ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category B environments. B. SPD shall not limit the use of through-feed lugs, sub-feed lugs, and sub-feed breaker options. C. SPD's installed following the load side of the main breaker and in main lug only panelboards installed following the incoming main lugs. D. SPD interfaced to the panelboard via a manufacturer sized circuit breaker for disconnecting purposes shall be installed using short lengths of conductors integrally to the SPD and located directly adjacent to the circuit breaker. E. SPD shall be mounted within the panelboard by the manufacturer. F. Panelboard including the SPD shall be UL67 listed. 2.05 SWITCHGEAR AND SWITCHBOARD A. Service entrance located SPD's shall be tested within ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category C environments. B. SPD shall be factory installed inside or adjacent to the switchgear, switchboard, and/or bus plug at the assembly point by the original equipment manufacturer. Location of SPD shall be such that it does not require de-energization of switchgear, switchboard, or panelboard for replacement. Technical Specifications 16291-4 Surge Protection Devices C. Locate SPD on the load side of the main disconnect device, close to the phase conductors and the ground/neutral bar. D. SPD connected through a disconnect located in immediate proximity to SPD. Connection shall be made via bus, conductors, or other connections originating in the SPD shall be as short as possible per the factory specifications. Each phase shall be fused with 100kAIC current limiting fuses. E. Monitoring and diagnostic features shall be visible on the front of equipment. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Host equipment Manufacturer's representative shall visit the site, verify installation and testing, and verify that the SPD equipment and installation meets intent of the Contract Documents and manufacturer's warranties and that the guarantees are in effect. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install according to manufacturer's recommendations. B. Lead lengths shall not exceed manufacturer's recommendation. C. Electrical equipment manufacturer shall authorize and perform bus taps connections, as necessary. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 16291-5 Surge Protection Devices SECTION 16352 ACTIVE HARMONIC FILTERS PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. SCOPE: This section specifies active harmonic filter power correction systems to reduce current harmonics and correct power factor on 480-volt power distribution systems. Active harmonic filters will include optional floor stand from manufacturer. 1.02 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. ANSI/IEEE C62.41, Surge Withstand Capacity 2. ANSI/IEEE 519, Guide for Harmonic Control and Reactive Compensation of Static Power Converters 3. CSA 22.2: No. 14 & 66, Industrial Control Equipment & Specialty Transformers, Industrial Products 4. UL 508, Standard for Industrial Control Equipment 5. IEC 60529, IP20, Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures (IP Code) 6. ICC IBC, International Building Code 1.03 FACTORY TESTS: A. The manufacturer shall test the system performance at rated current and voltage while functioning as a harmonic correction device prior to shipment. A certified report shall be submitted at the successful completion of factory performance tests. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittal: 1. A copy of this Section, addendum updates included, with each paragraph check-marked to indicate compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from Section requirements. 2. A copy of the contract document single line diagrams and plan drawings, with addendum updates that apply to the equipment in this section, marked to show specific changes necessary for the equipment proposed in the submittal. If no changes are required, the drawing or drawings shall be marked "no changes required". Failure to include copies of the relevant drawings with the submittal shall be cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further review. 3. Electrical single line, schematic diagrams, and conductor connection diagram. Technical Specifications 16352 - 1 Active Harmonic Filters 4. Layout drawings indicating arrangement, dimensions, cable entries, and weights. 5. Manufacturer's product and catalog data indicating equipment specifications and features. 6. Provide size and weights of shipping units to be handled by installer. Detailed layouts of customer power and control connections. Detailed installation drawings including all terminal locations. 7. Operation and maintenance information as specified in Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data including: a. As-built drawings. b. Final, complete reviewed submittal information. 8. Factory test report and field test reports. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. TCI Harmonic Guard, or approved equivalent with native Ethernet IP communication interface. 2.02 DESIGN FEATURES A. System description: System Voltage: 480 volts, 3-Phase, 3-Wire plus ground conductor. B. Output load capacity: Rated capacity shall be the specified current capacity at the voltage required as indicated within this specification and shown on the respective electrical drawings included within this document. C. Current transformers: 1. Two split core type current transformers rated for 50 to 400-Hertz shall be installed on phases A & B at locations shown. 1% or better (metering class) accuracy shall be provided. 2. Current transformer current ratings based on based on full load current rating of the installed circuit/bus or as shown. 3. Current transformer output shall be 5 amperes full scale. 4. Current transformers shall be dedicated for AHF operation and not shared with other system components. 5. When active filters are shown to be connected for future parallel operation, CT burden rating shall be appropriate for the number of units shown. D. Modes of operation: 1. The power correction system shall inject harmonic current to cancel load produced harmonic current so the upstream power harmonic current and voltage are reduced to below 5% TDD and 5% THD(V), respectfully. The system shall correct all types of nonlinear loads. Technical Specifications 16352 - 2 Active Harmonic Filters 2. The applied circuit may be a single nonlinear load, a distribution-bus with multiple loads, or the facility load at the point-of-common coupling (PCC) with the power source. 3. The displacement power factor correction of the reactive current shall be activated or deactivated via a door-mounted human machine interface (HMI)with touch screen control. E. Performance requirements: 1. Input Power: a. Voltage: Automatically adapted to 480V, 3 phase, 3-wire plus ground conductor. b. Voltage Tolerance: +/- 10% of nominal. C. Frequency: automatically adapted to 60 Hertz, +/- 3 Hertz. d. Surge Withstand Capability: ANSI/IEEE C62.41-1991 without damage. e. Input Fuses: Class T rated at 200,000 AIC (amperes interrupting capacity). 2. Output Performance: Performance of the power correction system shall be independent of the impedance of the power source. 3. Harmonic Correction: a. Limit the 3rd through 49th order harmonic current to <5% TDD at the main bus. Harmonic levels for individual harmonic orders shall comply with respective levels established in ANSI/IEEE std 519- 1992, Table 10.3. b. Limit the THD(V) added to the electrical system immediately upstream of the power correction system location(s) to less than or equal to 5%. C. The power correction system shall not correct for power utility supplied voltage distortion levels. 4. Reactive Current Compensation: Maintain a set point of .99 lagging displacement power factor under all load conditions. Power factor shall not go "leading" at any point. 5. Filters shown to operate in tandem (tie closed) or independently shall have all necessary wiring to achieve this requirement. F. System Features: 1. Each unit provided with a current limiting function to protect the semiconductors. 2. Non-critical level faults (AC line over/under voltage, power loss, and phase imbalance) shall provide automatic restart and return to normal operation upon automatic fault clearance. 3. Critical level faults shall stop the function of the unit and await Operator action to restart the power correction system. 4. The ratio of the two CTs shall be entered into the logic via the digital keypad/display to calibrate the operation of the power correction system. G. Indicators and Controls: Technical Specifications 16352 - 3 Active Harmonic Filters 1. Features: a. Door-mounted color touchscreen display. b. Configurable network-based run/stop control C. Manual and auto run/stop control d. Power quality information e. Configuration parameters f. Operational measurements, status, and alarms/fault. g. Display trend history for line voltage, line current, filter current, filter voltage, THD, and filter heatsink temperature. 2. Control modes: a. Harmonic correction only b. Power factor correction only C. Combination harmonic and power factor 3. Native Ethernet IP interface for remote communications. Protocol converters and gateways used to convert from other protocols will not be accepted. 4. Two form C, 2-amp, 120VAC, dry relay output contacts for remote indication of system run, fault, and maximum load status contacts. 5. Remote enable input. H. Enclosure: 1. Each unit shall be provided in a wall mounted NEMA 1 gasketed enclosure with bottom entry. 2. Disconnects: a. The switchgear or MCC feeder circuit breaker shall be utilized as the local disconnecting means. A mechanism shall be provided that locks the AHC door when the unit is energized. 3. Lifting Provisions: a. Freestanding units shall include lifting provisions by lifting lugs. b. Wall mount units weighing more than 80 pounds shall have lifting lugs. 4. Features: a. 200,000 AIC rated fuses with Class T actuation. b. Grounding lug. I. Nameplates: 1. In addition to the manufacturer's identification, an external nameplate conforming to the requirements of Section 16010 shall be provided with equipment number and name as shown 2.03 SPECIAL WARRANTY A. Manufacturer shall warrant against defects in materials and workmanship for two (2) years. Technical Specifications 16352 -4 Active Harmonic Filters PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 FIELD INSTALLATION A. Take all necessary precautions to exclude moisture and foreign material from the equipment at all times during storage and installation. Care shall be taken to prevent corrosion of silver-plated contact surfaces and damage to relays and control devices. 3.02 STARTUP AND SITE TESTING A. Installation, Start up and Testing Services: 1. Provide complete manufacturer' s installation and startup services. Coordinate all manufacturer' s recommended testing services with those provided under Section 16950, Electrical Testing. B. Training Services: 1. Provide 0.5-person days of installation inspection and prestart up training, which shall be provided in one session. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 16352 - 5 Active Harmonic Filters SECTION 16405 ELECTRIC MOTORS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section applies only when referenced by a motor-driven equipment specification for alternating current induction motors. This Section does not specify specialty motors such as hoist motors, valve operator motors, DC motors, or torque rated motors. Specialty motors are specified in the individual equipment specification(s). 1.02 REFERENCES Reference Title ABMA 9 Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings ABMA 11 Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings IEEE 43 Recommended Practice for Testing Insulation Resistance of Rotating Machinery IEEE 112 Standard Test Procedures for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators IEEE 841 Standard for Petroleum and Chemical Industry-Severe Duty Totally Enclosed Fan-Cooled (TEFC) Squirrel Cage Induction Motors - Up to and Including 500 HP NEMA ICS Industrial control and systems controllers, contactors and overload relays rated 600 volts NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment 1000 volts maximum NEMA MG 1 Motors and Generators NEMA MG 1 Safety Standard for Construction and Guide for Selection, Installation, and Use of Electric Motors and Generators NEMA MG1-30 Application Considerations for Constant Speed Motors Used on a Sinusoidal Bus with Harmonic Content and General Purpose Motors Used with Adjustable-Voltage or Adjustable- Frequency Controls or Both NEMA MG1-31 Definite-Purpose Inverter-Fed Polyphase Motors: Rated 5000 horsepower or less at 7200 volt or less, intended for use with adjustable-voltage and adjustable frequency controls, commonly referred to as inverters. Technical Specifications 16405-1 Electric Motors Reference Title UL 674 Electric Motors and Generators for Use in Hazardous Classified Locations UL 1004 Electric Motors 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittal Items: 1. Descriptive information. 2. Motor outline, dimensions and weight. 3. Where a winding over-temperature device is specified for motors 100 horsepower or larger, provide a response curve for the temperature device. 4. Motor nameplate data in accordance with NEMA MG1. 5. Additional Rating Information: a. Service factor b. Locked rotor current. c. No load current. d. Multispeed load classification (e.g. variable torque). 6. Enclosure type and mounting (e.g. horizontal, vertical), 7. Dimensions and total weight. 8. Conduit box dimensions and usable volume as defined in NEMA MG 1 and NFPA 70. 9. Bearing type. 10. Bearing lubrication. 11. Bearing life. 12. Space heater voltage and watts. 13. Description and rating of motor thermal protection. 14. Motor sound power level in accordance with NEMA MG 1. 15. Maximum break horsepower required by the equipment driven by the motor. 16. Description and rating of immersible/submersible motor moisture sensing system. 17. For inverter duty motors: a. Inverter duty motor specs including the motor winding voltage rating. b. Circuit distance in feet that the motor will be located from the drives. c. Variable or constant torque application. d. Operating speed range. e. Motor manufacturer's statement that the submitted motor is fully suitable for operation with the selected variable frequency drive. 18. Derating calculations for each motor based on site conditions. 1.04 SERVICE REQUIREMENTS A. All equipment shall be designed and built for industrial service and be capable of delivering rated horsepower under the following conditions: 1. 100 degrees F maximum ambient temperature. 2. 100 percent relative humidity. 3. Voltage variations to ±10 percent of nameplate rating. 4. Frequency variations to ±5 percent of nameplate rating. Technical Specifications 16405-2 Electric Motors 5. Combined voltage and frequency variations to ±10 percent total, as long as frequency does not exceed ±5 percent. 6. Motors shall be suitable for operating conditions and load classification without any reduction being required in the nameplate rated horsepower or exceeding the rated temperature rise. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Provide all motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1, UL 674, UL 1004, the requirements specified in this Section, and the individual equipment specification. Motors shall be the manufacturer's standard industrial product. Additional or better features which are not specifically prohibited by the specifications, but which are a part of the manufacturer's standard industrial product, shall be included in the furnished motor. A standard industrial product is a product that has been or will be sold on the market through advertisement or manufacturer's catalogs/brochures, and represents the latest production model(s). B. Motor enclosure, rpm, horsepower, and modifications (if any) are specified in the individual equipment specification. C. Two-speed motors shall be two-winding motors. Two-speed, one-winding consequential-pole motors are prohibited. D. Factory mount motors to the equipment when practicable. E. Motor Enclosures: 1. ODP: Open Drip Proof, NEMA MG1.25.1. 2. TEFC: Totally Enclosed, Fan Cooled, NEMA MG1.26.2, IEEE 841. F. Electrical Requirements (unless the individual equipment specification indicates otherwise): 1. Service factor: a. Single-phase motors: 1.0. b. Service factor for three-phase motors: 1.15. c. Inverter duty motors: 1.0. 2. Time rating: continuous in conformance with NEMA MG 1 10.35. 3. Torques: meet, or exceed, the locked rotor and breakdown torques specified for NEMA Design B. 4. Currents: locked rotor currents not to exceed NEMA Design B values. 5. Protection: current density and heating characteristics shall be such that the motors will not burn out if subjected to a maximum of 20-second stall at 6 times full-load current. 6. Rating: not allowed to operate at greater than their nameplate horsepower. Use of the service factor will not be allowed under conditions of rated voltage and frequency. 7. Insulation: non-hydroscopic insulation systems conforming to the requirements for NEMA Class B or higher. 8. Box: one size larger than standard. Technical Specifications 16405-3 Electric Motors G. Mechanical Requirements (unless the individual equipment specification indicates otherwise): 1. Frame sizes: Conforming to latest NEMA Standard MG1-11.31 for "T" frames, and all dimensions meeting NEMA Standards insofar as they apply. 2. Shafts: a. In accordance with NEMA "T" or"TS" dimensions. b. Long shafts: Suitable for belt, chain, or gear drive, within limits established by good industrial practice and documented by NEMA Standards MG1- 14.42 and MG1-14.07. c. Short shafts: Used for direct connection. d. Provisions for mounting of shaft grounding brushes on variable speed motors where required by these specifications. 3. Connection diagrams: Permanently attached to the motor, either inside the box or on the motor frame, in a location readable from the box side. 4. Stainless steel bolts, screws, and other external hardware. H. Nameplates: 1. Engraved or stamped stainless steel. 2. Fastened to the motor frame with screws or drive pins of the same material. 3. Nameplates shall indicate clearly all the items of information enumerated in NEMA MG1. 4. Coordinate the motor nameplate location so it is readily visible for inspection on the completed machine. I. Protective Coating: Before shipment, coat the shaft extension and any other external bare exposed metal parts of each motor with an easily removable rust preventive coat. J. Packaging: All loose motors shall be packed in Styrofoam or securely fastened to a hardwood skid or pallet for fork-truck handling and shall be covered for protection against dirt and moisture during transit and for short-time outdoor storage. 2.02 VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCY RATING A. System Frequency: 60-Hz. B. Voltage Rating: Unless otherwise indicated in motor driven equipment specifications: Size Voltage Phases 1/2 HP and smaller 115 1 3/4 HP through 500 HP 460 3 C. Suitable for full voltage starting. 100HP and larger also suitable for reduced voltage starting. D. Suitable for accelerating the connected load with supply voltage at motor starter supply terminals dipping to 90 percent of motor rated voltage. Technical Specifications 16405-4 Electric Motors 2.03 MOTORS LESS THAN % HORSEPOWER A. Dual voltage (115/230) rated motors are acceptable if all leads are brought out to the box. Motors shall include integral overload protection per NEC Article 430 or shall include an external manual motor starter installed as required to provide overload protection. 2.04 MOTORS % THROUGH 800 HP A. Open Drip-Proof(ODP) Motor: 1. Class F insulation with Class B temperature rise. 2. Comply with the minimum nameplate efficiency in NEMA MG 1. Determine Efficiency by the dynamometer test method, IEEE 112, Method B. 3. Candidate Manufacturers: a. General Electric Inc., Type KS, Premium Efficiency b. Emerson US Motor, Type DE or RE, Premium Efficiency c. Approved Equal B. Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled (TEFC): 1. Having a Class F insulation with Class B temperature rise. 2. Comply with the minimum nameplate efficiency in NEMA MG 1. Determine efficiency by the dynamometer test method, IEEE 112, Method B. 3. Internal surfaces coated with a corrosion-resistant epoxy paint. 4. Severe duty rated conforming to IEEE 841 guidelines. 5. Inverter duty rated for application on variable frequency drives as specified in this Section. 6. Furnish enclosure with drain hole with porous drain/weather plug. 7. Candidate Manufacturer: a. General Electric IEEE 841, X$D, Severe Duty b. Reliance Electric IEEE 841, XL, Severe Duty c. Approved Equal C. Immersible/Submersible Motors: 1. UL approved for explosion proof atmospheres in accordance with this Section. 2. Having two mechanical seals, a lower one which is outside the motor and protecting the upper one which is in an oil-filled chamber. 3. Winding Thermal Protection: a. Thermal sensor and switch assembly, one each phase, embedded in stator windings and wired in series. b. Switches normally closed, open upon excessive winding temperature, and automatically reclose when temperature has cooled to safe operating level. c. Switch contacts rated at 5 amps, 120 volts ac. d. Fractional horsepower, 115 volts ac, single-phase units: Switch shall be connected in series with winding for direct thermal protection interlock. 4. Moisture Seal Failure Moisture Detection: a. Moisture detector probes in the oil-filled seal chamber shall be provided to indicate the presence of moisture in the seal chamber. b. A normally closed NEMA Class 13150 contact from the moisture detector shall open to deactivate the motor control circuit in the event of moisture detection. Technical Specifications 16405-5 Electric Motors c. Probe or sensor monitoring module shall be provided suitable for mounting in a terminal junction box and shall be suitable for operation from 120 volt ac supply. d. Monitoring module shall include two independent 120 volt ac contacts, one opening and one closing when moisture is detected. 5. Provide required relays or solid state controls in an enclosure on or near the motor. 6. Connecting cables: a. One cable containing power, control, and grounding conductors. b. Suitable for hard service, submersible duty with watertight seal where cable enters motor. c. Length: 30 feet minimum. d. UL 1 listed and sized in accordance with NFPA 70. 7. Efficiencies as specified in the individual equipment specification. D. Vertical Motors: full voltage with a Type P base. E. Inverter Duty Motors: 1. Motors for use with variable frequency drives shall be inverter duty motors specifically designed for inverter service for the speed range and load torque characteristic required by the associated equipment. Motor manufacturer shall certify motor is compatible with the proposed variable frequency drives and associated equipment. 2. Motors for use with variable frequency drives shall not exceed NEMA MG 1, Class B temperature rise when operating over the specified speed range on the specified adjustable frequency controllers with the specified load speed/torque characteristic. 3. Inverter duty rated motors shall have 4:1 turndown for constant torque motor controllers and 10:1 turndown for variable torque motor controllers rating designed to operate from 25 percent of base speed to base speed continuously with full load current and torque without exceeding the Class F insulation with B temperature rise. 4. Torque requirement for greater turndown and slower speed applications is a custom design; refer to the individual equipment specification for additional requirements. Inverter duty rated motors shall be designed to operate over the speed or frequency range specified. 5. Motor insulation shall be designed to meet or exceed the 1600V peak at a minimum of 0.1 microsecond rise time per NEMA MG 1, Part 31. 6. Provide inverter duty motors with over-temperature protection. Motor over temperature protection for inverter duty motors up to and including 250 horsepower shall be NEMA Type 2 as specified in NEMA MG 1-12, via bimetallic thermal switches (Klixons) embedded in the motor windings. Over- temperature protection for larger motors up to 500 horsepower shall be with 100-ohm platinum RTDs embedded in the motor windings, two per phase. 7. Inverter duty motors shall have electrically insulated bearings or shall be equipped with a shaft-grounding unit mounted on the fan housing with stub shaft extended from the motor shaft. The shaft-grounding unit shall be equipped with two brushes, totally enclosed, and sealed against environmental contamination. Technical Specifications 16405-6 Electric Motors 2.05 BEARINGS AND LUBRICATION A. Horizontal motors: 1. 3/4 HP and Smaller: Permanently lubricated and sealed ball bearings, or regreasable ball bearings in labyrinth sealed end bells with removable grease relief plugs. 2. 1 through 400 HP: Regreasable ball bearings in labyrinth sealed end bells with removable grease relief plugs. 3. Minimum 100,000 hours L-10 bearing life for ball and roller bearings as defined in ABMA 9 and 11. B. Vertical Motors: 1. Thrust Bearings: a. Antifriction bearing. b. Manufacturer's standard lubrication 100 HP and smaller. c. Oil lubricated 125 HP and larger. d. Minimum 50,000 hours L-10 life. 2. Guide Bearings: a. Manufacturer's standard bearing type. b. Manufacturer's standard lubrication 200 HP and smaller. c. Minimum 100,000 hours L-10 bearing life. C. Regreasable Antifriction Bearings: 1. Readily accessible, grease injection fittings. 2. Readily accessible, removable grease relief plugs. D. Oil Lubrication Systems: 1. Oil reservoirs with sight level gauge. 2. Oil fill and drain openings with opening plugs. 3. Provisions for necessary oil circulation and cooling. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Connection Boxes 1. Provided with threaded hubs. 2. Provide neoprene gaskets at the base of the box and between the halves of the box. 3. Provide a grounding lug within the box for a cable or raceway ground connection. 4. Boxes shall be designed to rotate in order to permit installation in any of four positions 90 degrees apart. 5. Provide oversized boxes, a minimum of one size larger than standard. B. Temperature Protection: 1. Non-explosion proof motors from 25 horsepower up to and including 300 horsepower: a. Having a NEMA Type 1 temperature sensing device embedded in the motor winding which is sensitive to both motor running over temperature and with fast response to rate of temperature rise for locked rotor protection. Technical Specifications 16405-7 Electric Motors b. Sensor: wired to a NEMA 4 temperature monitor box located near or on the motor. c. Temperature Sensing System: manual reset, normally closed contact, rated 2A at 115 VAC. d. Mark motor nameplate "OVER TEMP PROT 1" in accordance with NEMA MG 1 12.53. 2. When specified in the individual equipment specification, provide for 10, 15 and 20 horsepower constant speed, non-explosion proof motors: a. NEMA Type 2 bi-metallic thermal switch (Klixon) type. b. Mark motor nameplate "OVER TEMP PROT 2" in accordance with NEMA MG 1 12.53. C. Space Heater: 1. When specified in the individual equipment specification, provide space heater to maintain the winding temperature at not less than 5-degrees C above ambient during motor shutdown. 2. Provide flexible wraparound type heater rated 120V, single phase, 60 Hz; note rating in watts and volts on the motor nameplate or on a second nameplate. Bring heater leads H1 and H2 to a separate box with a threaded conduit opening. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Refer to the Standard Details for motor grounding requirements. 3.02 COMPONENT TEST PHASE A. Verify breather/drain fittings installed as specified in the Construction Documents. B. Motor winding insulation resistance shall not be less than 10-megohm, measured with a 1000 VAC megohm meter at 1-minute at or corrected to 40 degrees C. C. For motors 50 horsepower and larger, perform motor phases current imbalance testing in accordance with Section 16950, Electrical Testing. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 16405-8 Electric Motors SECTION 16411 TRANSFER SWITCHES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes relocation of existing ASCO 7000 series automatic transfer switch. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: 1. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). b. KS 1, Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum). 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 98, Standard for Safety Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches. b. 1008, Standard for Safety Switch Equipment. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install as indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. B. Connect as indicated in one-line diagram and approved control schematics. Match type and number of cables and conductors to generator sets and transfer switch control and communications requirements as recommended by manufacturer. Increase raceway sizes at no additional cost to Owner if necessary to accommodate required wiring. C. Mounting: Provide mounting provisions at new location similar to existing installation. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform automatic transfer switch testing as specified in Section 16950, Electrical Testing. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 16411-1 Transfer Switches SECTION 16441 LOW-VOLTAGE PANELBOARDS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): a. C62.1, Surge Arresters for Alternating Current Power Circuits. b. C62.11, Standards for Metal-Oxide Surge Arrestors for AC Power Circuits. 2. National Electrical Contractor's Association (NECA): 407, Recommended Practice for Installing and Maintaining Panelboards. 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). b. 289, Application Guide for Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters. c. AB 1, Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and Circuit- Breaker Enclosures. d. KS 1, Enclosed Switches. e. LA 1, Surge Arrestors. f. PB 1, Panelboards. g. PB 1.1, General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less. 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 5. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): a. 67, Standard for Panelboards. b. 98, Standard for Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches. c. 486E, Standard for Equipment Wiring Terminals for use with Aluminum and/or Copper Conductors. d. 489, Standard for Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and Circuit Breaker Enclosures. e. 508, Standard for Industrial Control Equipment. f. 870, Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters and Associated Fittings. g. 943, Standard for Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's data sheets for each type of panelboard, protective device, accessory item, and component. 2. Manufacturer's shop drawings including dimensioned plan, section, and elevation for each panelboard type, enclosure, and general arrangement. 3. Tabulation of features for each panelboard to include the following: a. Protective devices with factory settings. b. Provisions for future protective devices. c. Space for future protective devices. d. Voltage, frequency, and phase ratings. e. Enclosure type. f. Bus and terminal bar configurations and current ratings. Technical Specifications 16441-1 Low Voltage Panelboards g. Provisions for circuit terminations with wire range. h. Short circuit current rating of assembled panelboard at system voltage. i. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of auxiliary components. B. Informational Submittals: 1. For equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design category C, D, E, or F submit the following in accordance with Section 16010— Basic Electrical Requirements: a. Manufacturer's statement of seismic qualification with substantiating test data. b. Manufacturer's special seismic certification with substantiating test data. 2. Installation instructions: a. Detail the complete installation of the equipment including rigging, moving, and setting into place. b. For equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design category A or B: 1) Provide manufacturer's installation instructions and anchoring details for connecting equipment to supports and structures. c. For equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design category C, D, E, or F: 1) Provide project-specific installation instructions and anchoring details based on support conditions and requirements to resist seismic loads as specified in Section 16010 — Basic Electrical Requirements. 2) Submit anchoring drawings with supporting calculations. 3) Drawings and calculations shall be stamped by a professional engineer registered in the state where the Project is being constructed. 3. Manufacturer's recommended installation instructions. 4. Operations and maintenance manual: a. Provide a complete manual for the operation and maintenance of the panelboard, circuit breakers, devices, and accessories. 1) Instructionn narratives and bulletins. 2) Renewal parts list. 3) Time-current curves for all devices. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled as defined in NEC Article 100. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Materials, equipment, and accessories specified in this section shall be products of: 1. Schneider Electric/Square D Co. B. Panelboards shall be of the same manufacturer as equipment furnished for Low- Voltage Switchgear for standardization. Technical Specifications 16441-2 Low Voltage Panelboards 2.02 GENERAL A. Provide low voltage panelboards for application at 600V or less in accordance with this Section. B. Provide equipment in accordance with NEMA PB 1, NFPA 70, and UL 67. C. Wire Terminations: 1. Panelboard assemblies, including protective devices, shall be suitable for use with 75 degrees C or greater wire insulation systems at NEC 75 degrees C conductor ampacity. 2. In accordance with UL 486E. D. Load Current Ratings: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, load current ratings for panelboard assemblies, including bus and circuit breakers, are noncontinuous as defined by NEC. Continuous ratings shall be 80 percent of noncontinuous rating. 2. Where indicated "continuous", "100 percent", etc., selected components and protective devices shall be rated for continuous load current at value shown. E. Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR): Integrated equipment short circuit rating for each panelboard assembly shall be no less than the following: 1. Minimum SCCR at 208Y/120 or 120/240 volts shall be 18,000 amperes rms symmetrical. 2. Minimum SCCR at 480Y/277 volts shall be 35,000 amperes rms symmetrical. F. Overcurrent Protective Devices: 1. In accordance with NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, UL 98, and UL 489. 2. Protective devices shall be adapted to panelboard installation. a. Capable of device replacement without disturbing adjacent devices and without removing main bus. b. Spaces: Cover openings with easily removable cover. 3. Devices shall be fully rated; series-connected ratings unacceptable. G. Circuit Breakers: 1. General: Thermal-magnetic unless otherwise indicated, quick-make, quick- break, molded case, of indicating type showing ON/OFF and TRIPPED positions of operating handle. 2. Locking: Furnish provisions for handle padlocking for main and subfeed devices; also provide for branch devices where indicated. 3. Noninterchangeable: In accordance with NEC. 4. Bus Connection: Bolt-on circuit breakers in 480Y/277-volt, and plug-in circuit breakers in 208Y/120 and 240/120-volt branch circuit panelboards. 5. Trip Mechanism: a. Individual permanent thermal and magnetic trip elements in each pole. b. Variable magnetic trip elements with a single continuous adjustment 3X to 10X for frames greater than 100 amps. c. Two and three pole, common trip. d. Automatically opens all poles when overcurrent occurs on one pole. e. Test button on cover. f. Calibrated for 40 degrees C ambient, unless shown otherwise. Technical Specifications 16441-3 Low Voltage Panelboards 6. Unacceptable Substitution: a. Do not substitute single-pole circuit breakers with handle ties for multi- pole breakers. b. Do not use tandem or dual circuit breakers in normal single-pole spaces. 7. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI): Where indicated, equip breaker as specified above with ground fault sensor and rated to trip on 5-mA ground fault within 0.025 second (UL 943, Class A sensitivity, for protection of personnel). a. Ground fault sensor shall be rated same as circuit breaker. b. Push-to-test button. c. Reset button. 8. Equipment Ground Fault Interrupter (EGFI): Where indicated, equip breaker specified above with ground fault sensor and rated to trip on 30-mA ground fault (UL listed for equipment ground fault protection). H. Enclosures: 1. Provide as specified in Section 16050, Basic Electrical Materials and Methods. 2. Material: Type 1, shall be code-gauge, hot-dip galvanized sheet steel with reinforced steel frame. 3. Finish: Rust inhibitor prime followed by manufacturer's standard gray baked enamel or lacquer. Front trim shall be secured to box with concealed trim clamps. 4. Surface-mount panelboard front trim shall have same dimensions as box. 5. Flush panelboards front trims shall overlap box nominal 3/4 inch on all sides. 6. Door in panelboard front trim, with concealed hinges, shall provide access to protective device operating handles. 7. Doors over 30 inches in height shall have multi-point latching. 8. Door lock shall be secure with flush catch and tumbler lock; all panelboards keyed alike, with two milled keys each lock. 9. Circuit Directory: Metal frame with transparent plastic face and enclosed card, mounted inside each panel door. 10. Hinged Front Cover (Door In Door): Entire front trim hinged to surface box with standard door within hinged trim cover. I. Bus: 1. Material: Tin-plated copper full sized throughout length. 2. Provide for mounting of future protective devices along full length of bus regardless of number of units and spaces shown. Machine, drill, and tap as required for current and future positions. J. Feeder Lugs: Main, feed-through, and neutral shall be replaceable, bolted mechanical or crimp compression type. K. Equipment Ground Terminal Bus: Copper with suitably sized provisions for termination of ground conductors, and bonded to box. 1. Provide individual mechanical termination points no less than the quantity of breaker pole positions. 2. Provide individual termination points for all other grounding conductors such as feeder, grounding electrode, etc. L. Neutral Terminal Bus: Copper with suitably sized provisions for termination of neutral conductors, and isolated from box. Technical Specifications 16441-4 Low Voltage Panelboards 1. Provide individual mechanical termination points no less than the quantity of breaker pole positions. 2. Provide individual termination points for all other neutral conductors. M. Provision for Future Devices: Equip with mounting brackets, bus connections, and necessary appurtenances for future protective device ampere ratings indicated. N. Special Features: 1. Service Equipment Approval: Listed for use as service equipment for panelboards having service disconnecting means. 2. Arc Flash: Provide arc flash reduction maintenance system on service entrance main breakers. a. System shall not compromise breaker phase protection when enabled. b. Clearing time of 0.04 seconds, adjustable 2.5X to 10X of the sensor value. c. Enabled via door mounted lockable lockout/tagout selector switch with confirmation via a blue LED indication lamp. d. All indicating lamps shall have an integrated lamp-test function or a common lamp test switch for all lamps. e. Provide associated control power transformer as required. 3. Surge Arresters: a. In accordance with NEMA LA 1, IEEE C62.1, and IEEE C62.11. b. Comply with Section 16291, Surge Protection Devices. c. Coordinate impulse sparkover voltage with system voltage. d. Provide protective device within panelboard as disconnecting means and short circuit protection per manufacturer's recommendation. e. Provide factory mounting within panelboard utilizing UL-recognized mounting device. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Install in accordance with NECA 407, NEMA PB 1.1 and manufacturers' written installation instructions. B. Install securely, plumb, in-line and square with walls. C. Install top of cabinet trim 78 inches above floor, unless otherwise shown. Install cabinet so tops of protective device operating handles are no more than 78 inches above the floor. D. Ground Fault Protection: Install panelboard ground fault circuit interrupter devices in accordance with installation guidelines of NEMA 289. E. Install filler plates in unused spaces. F. Wiring in Panel Gutters: Train conductors neatly in groups; bundle, and wrap with nylon wire ties. Technical Specifications 16441-5 Low Voltage Panelboards 3.02 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARD A. Mount flush panels uniformly flush with wall finish. B. Provide typewritten circuit directory for each panelboard. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 16441-6 Low Voltage Panelboards SECTION 16450 GROUNDING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): C2, National Electrical Safety Code (NESC). 2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical Code. (NEC). 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Shop Drawings: B. Product data for the following: Product data for all specified products. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): 1. Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). Where required by the AHJ, material and equipment shall be labeled or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ in order to provide a basis for approval under NEC. 2. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. shall conform to those standards and shall have an applied UL listing mark. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GROUNDING BUSBAR A. Material: Tin-plated copper B. Minimum Size: 1/4" thick X 2" wide and of sufficient length to accommodate the necessary terminations. C. Provide with hardware, fasteners, insulators and brackets. 2.02 GROUND ROD A. Material: Copper-clad. B. Diameter: Minimum 5/8 inch. C. Length: 10 feet. Technical Specifications 16450-1 Grounding 2.03 GROUND CONDUCTORS A. As specified in Section 16120, Conductors and Communications Cabling. 2.04 CONNECTORS A. Exothermic Weld Type: 1. Outdoor Weld: Suitable for exposure to elements or direct burial. 2. Indoor Weld: Utilize low-smoke, low-emission process. 3. Manufacturers: a. Erico Products, Inc. Cadweld and Cadweld Exolon. b. Thermoweld. B. Compression Type: 1. Compress-deforming type; wrought copper extrusion material. 2. Single indentation for conductors 6 AWG and smaller. 3. Double indentation with extended barrel for conductors 4 AWG and larger. 4. Barrels prefilled with oxide-inhibiting and anti-seizing compound and sealed. 5. Manufacturers: a. Burndy Corp.; Hyground Irreversible Compression. b. Thomas and Betts Co. c. ILSCO. C. Mechanical Type: Split-bolt, saddle, or cone screw type; copper alloy material. 1. Manufacturers: a. Burndy Corp. b. Thomas and Betts Co. 2.05 ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE POWER CABLE SHIELD GROUND: A. Cold-shrinkable seal with copper braid and full diameter constant force spring. B. Size range as required for jacket diameter. C. Manufacturer: Southwire, Spec 85451. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Grounding shall comply with NFPA 70 and IEEE C2. B. Ground electrical service neutral at service entrance equipment with grounding electrode conductor to grounding electrode system. C. Ground each separately derived system neutral with common grounding electrode conductor to grounding electrode system. D. Bond together all grounding electrodes that are present at each building or structure served to form one common grounding electrode system. Technical Specifications 16450-2 Grounding E. Bond together system neutrals, service equipment enclosures, exposed noncurrent- carrying metal parts of electrical equipment, metal raceways, ground conductor in raceways and cables, receptacle ground connections, and metal piping systems. F. Shielded Power Cables: Ground shields at each splice or termination in accordance with recommendations of splice or termination manufacturer. G. Multiconductor Adjustable Frequency Drive Power Cables: 1. Comply with VFD manufacturer grounding requirements. 2. Provide shield termination and grounding. 3. Ground shield at VFD ground bus and at motor. H. Shielded Instrumentation Cables: 1. Ground shield to ground bus at power supply for analog signal. 2. Expose shield minimum 1 inch at termination to field instrument and apply heat shrink tube. 3. Do not ground instrumentation cable shield at more than one point. 3.02 WIRE CONNECTIONS A. Ground Conductors: Install in conduit containing power conductors and control circuits above 50 volts. B. Nonmetallic Raceways and Flexible Tubing: Install equipment grounding conductor connected at both ends to noncurrent-carrying grounding bus. C. Connect ground conductors to raceway grounding bushings. D. Extend and connect ground conductors to ground bus in all equipment containing a ground bus. E. Connect enclosure of equipment containing ground bus to that bus. F. Bolt connections to equipment ground bus. G. Bond grounding conductors to metallic enclosures at each end, and to intermediate metallic enclosures. H. Junction Boxes: Furnish materials and connect to equipment grounding system with grounding clips mounted directly on box, or with 3/8-inch machine screws. I. Metallic Equipment Enclosures: Use furnished ground lug; if none furnished, tap equipment housing and install solderless terminal connected to box with machine screw. For circuits greater than 20 amps use minimum 5/16-inch diameter bolt. 3.03 MOTOR GROUNDING A. Extend equipment ground bus via grounding conductor installed in motor feeder raceway; connect to motor frame. B. Nonmetallic Raceways and Flexible Tubing: Install an equipment grounding conductor connected at both ends to noncurrent-carrying grounding bus. Technical Specifications 16450-3 Grounding C. Motors Less Than 10 hp: Use furnished ground lug in motor connection box; if none furnished, provide compression, spade-type terminal connected to conduit box mounting screw. D. Motors 10 hp and Above: Use furnished ground lug in motor connection box; if none furnished, tap motor frame or equipment housing; furnish compression, one-hole, lug type terminal connected with minimum 5/16-inch brass threaded stud with bolt and washer. E. Circuits 20 Amps or Above: Tap motor frame or equipment housing; install solderless terminal with minimum 5/16-inch diameter bolt. 3.04 GROUND RODS A. Install full length with conductor connection at upper end. B. Install with connection point below finished grade, unless otherwise shown. C. Space multiple ground rods by one rod length. D. Install to 8 feet below local frost depth. 3.05 GROUNDING WELLS A. Install for ground rods located inside buildings, asphalt and paved areas, and where shown on Drawings. B. Install riser ring and cover flush with surface. C. Place 6 inches of crushed rock in bottom of each well. 3.06 CONNECTIONS A. General: 1. Abovegrade Connections: Install exothermic weld, mechanical, or compression-type connectors. 2. Belowgrade Connections: Install exothermic weld or compression type connectors. 3. Remove paint, dirt, or other surface coverings at connection points to allow good metal-to-metal contact. 4. Notify Engineer prior to backfilling ground connections. B. Exothermic Weld Type: 1. Wire brush or file contact point to bare metal surface. 2. Use welding cartridges and molds in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Avoid using badly worn molds. 4. Mold to be completely filled with metal when making welds. 5. After completed welds have cooled, brush slag from weld area and thoroughly clean joint. Technical Specifications 16450-4 Grounding C. Compression Type: 1. Install in accordance with connector manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Install connectors of proper size for grounding conductors and ground rods specified. 3. Install using connector manufacturer's compression tool having proper sized dies and operate per manufacturer's instructions. D. Mechanical Type: 1. Apply homogeneous blend of colloidal copper and rust and corrosion inhibitor before making connection. 2. Install in accordance with connector manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Do not conceal mechanical connections. 3.07 METAL STRUCTURE GROUNDING A. Bond metal sheathing and exposed metal vertical structural elements to grounding system. B. Bond electrical equipment supported by metal platforms to the platforms. C. Provide electrical contact between metal frames and railings supporting pushbutton stations, receptacles, and instrument cabinets, and raceways carrying circuits to these devices. 3.08 HANDHOLE GROUNDING A. Install one ground rod inside each manhole and handhole larger than 24-inch by 24-inch inside dimensions. B. Ground Rod Floor Protrusion: 4 inches to 6 inches above floor. C. Make connections of grounding conductors fully visible and accessible. D. Connect all noncurrent-carrying metal parts, and any metallic raceway grounding bushings to ground rod with 6 AWG copper conductor. 3.09 TRANSFORMER GROUNDING A. Bond neutrals of transformers within buildings to system ground network, and to any additional indicated grounding electrodes. B. Bond neutrals of pad-mounted transformers to utility provided grounding electrode system. Coordinate with electric utility. 3.10 SURGE PROTECTION EQUIPMENT GROUNDING A. Connect surge arrestor ground terminals to equipment ground bus. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 16450-5 Grounding SECTION 16460 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Scope: This section specifies low-voltage dry-type transformers. 1.02 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): C57.96, Guide for Loading Dry Type Transformers. 2. National Electrical Contractor's Association (NECA): 409, Recommended Practice for Installing and Maintaining Dry-Type Transformers. 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). b. ST 20, Dry-Type Transformers for General Applications. 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). 5. U.S. Department of Energy (DOE): a. 10 CFR Part 431 - Energy Efficiency Program for Certain Commercial and Industrial Equipment. 6. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): a. 486E, Standard for Equipment Wiring Terminals for use with Aluminum and/or Copper Conductors. b. 489, Standard for Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and Circuit Breaker Enclosures. c. 1561, Standard for Dry-Type, General Purpose, and Power Transformers. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittal Items for this Section: 1. Operation and maintenance items. 2. Descriptive information. 3. Dimensions and weight. 4. Transformer nameplate data. 5. Schematic and connection diagrams. 6. Seismic anchorage and bracing drawings and cut sheets. B. Informational Submittals: 1. For equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design category C, D, E, or F submit the following in accordance with Section 16010— Basic Electrical Requirements: a. Manufacturer's statement of seismic qualification with substantiating test data. b. Manufacturer's special seismic certification with substantiating test data. Technical Specifications 16460-1 Low Voltage Transformers 2. Installation instructions: a. Detail the complete installation of the equipment including rigging, moving, and setting into place. b. For equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design category A or B: 1) Provide manufacturer's installation instructions and anchoring details for connecting equipment to supports and structures. c. For equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design category C, D, E, or F: 1) Provide project-specific installation instructions and anchoring details based on support conditions and requirements to resist seismic loads as specified in Section 16010 — Basic Electrical Requirements. 2) Submit anchoring drawings with supporting calculations. 3) Drawings and calculations shall be stamped by a professional engineer registered in the state where the Project is being constructed. 3. Test Report: Sound test certification for dry type power transformers (0 to 600 volt, primary). PART PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. UL 1561, NEMA ST 20, unless otherwise indicated. B. Dry-type, self-cooled, two-winding, with copper windings. C. Units larger than 5 kVA suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70, 75 degrees C ampacity. D. Efficiency: Transformers Rated 15-kVA and Larger 1. Comply with 10 CFR 431 (DOE 2016) efficiency levels. 2. Marked as compliant with DOE 2016 efficiency levels by an NRTL. E. Maximum Sound Level per NEMA ST 20: 1. 40 decibels for 0 kVA to 9 kVA. 2. 45 decibels for 10 kVA to 50 kVA. 3. 50 decibels for 51 kVA to 150 kVA. F. Overload capability: Short-term overload per IEEE C57.96. G. Wall Bracket: For single-phase units, 15 kVA to 37 1/2 kVA, and for three-phase units, 15 kVA to 30 kVA. H. Vibration Isolators: 1. Rated for transformer's weight. 2. Isolation Efficiency: 99 percent, at fundamental frequency of sound emitted by transformer. 3. Less Than 30 kVA: Isolate entire unit from structure with external vibration isolators. Technical Specifications 16460-2 Low Voltage Transformers 4. 30 kVA and Above: Isolate core and coil assembly from transformer enclosure with integral vibration isolator. I. Manufacturers: 1. Square D Co. 2. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer. 3. General Electric Co. 2.02 GENERAL PURPOSE TRANSFORMER A. Insulation Class and Temperature Rise: Manufacturer's standard. B. Core and Coil: 1. Encapsulated for single-phase units 1/2 kVA to 25 kVA and for three-phase units 3 kVA to 15 kVA. 2. Thermosetting varnish impregnated for single-phase units 37.5 kVA and above, and for three-phase units 30 kVA and above. C. Enclosure: 1. Single-Phase, 3 kVA to 25 kVA: NEMA 250, Type 3R, nonventilated. 2. Single-Phase, 37 1/2 kVA and Above: NEMA 250, Type 2, ventilated. 3. Three-Phase, 3 kVA to 15 kVA: NEMA 250, Type 3R, nonventilated. 4. Three-Phase, 30 kVA and Above: NEMA 250, Type 2, ventilated. 5. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. D. Voltage Taps: 1. Single-Phase, 3 kVA to 10 kVA: Two 5 percent, full capacity, normal voltage rating. 2. Single-Phase, 15 kVA and Above: Four 2 1/2 percent, full capacity; two above and two below normal voltage rating. 3. Three-Phase, 3 kVA to 15 kVA: Two 5 percent, full capacity, normal voltage rating. 4. Three-Phase, 30 kVA and Above: Four 2 1/2 percent, full capacity; two above and two below normal voltage rating. E. Impedance: 4.5 percent minimum on units 75 kVA and larger. 2.03 NAMEPLATES A. Refer to Section 16010, Basic Electrical Requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NECA and manufacturer's instructions. B. Load external vibration isolator such that no direct transformer unit metal is in direct contact with mounting surface. Technical Specifications 16460-3 Low Voltage Transformers C. Provide moisture-proof, flexible conduit for electrical connections. D. Connect voltage taps to achieve (approximately) rated output voltage under normal plant load conditions. E. Provide wall brackets for single-phase units, 15 kVA to 167 1/2 kVA, and three- phase units, 15 kVA to 112 kVA. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 16460-4 Low Voltage Transformers SECTION 16500 INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior and exterior lighting fixtures. 2. Lamps and ballasts. 3. Lighting fixture supports. 4. Accessories. 1.02 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. Canadian Standards Association (CSA). 2. Certified Ballast Manufacturer (CBM). 3. Federal Communications Commission (FCC). 4. Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA). 5. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): C62.41, Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits. 6. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum). 7. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 70, National Electrical Code (NEC) — Softbound Version. 8. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): a. 595, Marine-Type Electric Lighting Fixtures. b. 844, Electric Lighting Fixtures for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations. c. 924, Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide luminaires, controls, and accessories for all lighting systems, complete and operable, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Individual luminaire types and control types are indicated on the Drawings. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: 1. Product Data: For each type of product. a. Mounting and suspension details. b. Arrange in order of designation. c. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes. d. Include physical description and dimensions. e. Include emergency lighting units, including batteries and chargers. f. Include life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy efficiency data. g. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests. Technical Specifications 16500-1 Interior and Exterior Lighting 2. Shop Drawings: a. Interior Luminaires: 1) Catalog data sheets and pictures. 2) Luminaire finish and metal gauge. 3) Lens material, pattern, and thickness. 4) Candle power distribution curves in two or more planes. 5) Candle power chart 0 degrees to 90 degrees. 6) Lumen output chart. 7) Average brightness data in foot lamberts. 8) Coefficient of utilization for zonal cavity calculations. b. Exterior Luminaires: 1) Catalog data sheets and pictures. 2) Luminaire finish and metal gauge. 3) Lens material, pattern, and thickness. 4) IESNA lighting classification and isolux diagram. 5) Distribution data according to classification type as defined in IESNA H B-9. 6) Fastening details to wall. c. Photocells: 1) Voltage, and power consumption. 2) Capacity. 3) Contacts and time delay. 4) Operating levels. 5) Enclosure type and dimensions. 6) Temperature range. d. Occupancy Sensors: 1) Type. 2) Switching capacity. 3) Coverage. 4) Time delay AUTO/OFF adjustment. 3. Samples: Submit Samples of each substituted Iuminaire if requested by Engineer. B. Informational Submittals: 1. For equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design category C, D, E, or F submit the following in accordance with Section 16010 — Basic Electrical Requirements: a. Manufacturer's statement of seismic qualification with substantiating test data. b. Manufacturer's special seismic certification with substantiating test data. 2. Installation instructions: a. For equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design category A or B: 1) Provide manufacturer's installation instructions and anchoring details for connecting equipment to supports and structures. b. For equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design category C, D, E, or F: 1) Provide project-specific installation instructions and anchoring details based on support conditions and requirements to resist seismic and wind loads as specified in Section 16010 — Basic Electrical Requirements. Technical Specifications 16500-2 Interior and Exterior Lighting 2) Submit anchoring drawings with supporting calculations. 3) Drawings and calculations shall be stamped by a professional engineer registered in the state where the Project is being constructed. 3. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For luminaires, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. a. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. b. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 4. Sample warranty. C. Closeout Submittals: 1. Operation and maintenance data: a. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use manufacturers' codes. b. Provide a list of all lighting controls used on Project; use manufacturer's codes. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): 1. Provide the Work in accordance with NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). Where required by the AHJ, material and equipment shall be labeled or listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory or other organization acceptable to the AHJ in order to provide a basis for approval under NEC. 2. Materials and equipment manufactured within the scope of standards published by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. shall conform to those standards and shall have an applied UL listing mark. B. Preinstallation Meeting: 1. Occupancy Sensors: Arrange preinstallation meeting with manufacturer's factory authorized representative at Owner's facility, to verify placement of sensors and installation criteria. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: 1. Protect finishes of exposed surfaces by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace components of luminaires that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures, including luminaire support components. b. Faulty operation of luminaires and accessories. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. B. Warranty Period: Five year(s) from date of Substantial Completion. Technical Specifications 16500-3 Interior and Exterior Lighting PART PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Luminaires and lamps shall be labeled vibration and shock resistant. 1. The term "withstand" means "the luminaire will remain in place without separation of any parts when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the luminaire will be fully operational during and after the seismic event." 2.02 LUMINAIRES REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to Drawings for luminaire manufacturer and products. All luminaires shall be LED, unless noted otherwise. B. Component Access: Accessible and replaceable without removing luminaire from its mounting. C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. D. NRTL Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by an NRTL. E. FM Global Compliance: Luminaires for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global. F. CRI, CCT, and rated lamp life shall meet or exceed those listed in the Luminaire Schedule. G. L70 lamp life of 60,000 hours. H. Internal driver. I. Nominal Operating Voltage: As shown on Drawings. J. Feed-through type, or separate junction box. K. Wire Leads: Minimum 18 AWG. L. Component Access: Accessible and replaceable without removing luminaire from ceiling. M. Hazardous Classified Areas: 1. UL labeled: CLASS 1, DIVISION 2, GROUPS C AND D. 2. Fixture Enclosure and Fittings: Copper-free, cast aluminum in accordance with UL 844. N. Soffit Installations: UL labeled SUITABLE FOR WET LOCATIONS Technical Specifications 16500-4 Interior and Exterior Lighting O. Exterior Installations: UL Labeled: SUITABLE FOR WET LOCATIONS. When factory-installed photocells are provided, entire assembly shall have UL label. P. Emergency Lighting: 1. Power Pack: Self-contained, 120/277-volt dual voltage transformer, inverter/charger, sealed battery, and indicator switch in accordance with UL 924. 2. Lighted, push-to-test indicator. 3. Capable of providing full illumination for 1-1/2 hours in emergency mode. 4. Capable of full recharge in 24 hours, automatically upon resumption of normal line voltage. 5. Capable of protecting against excess charging and discharging. 6. Emergency Self-Diagnostic System: a. Solid state device with LED display and audible alarm. b. Automatic and manual test unit. c. Test for malfunction of lamps, battery, and charger board. d. Manufacturer: Lithonia. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Metal Parts: 1. Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. 2. Sheet metal components shall be steel unless otherwise indicated. 3. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. 4. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. 5. Housings: a. Rigidly formed, weather and light-tight enclosure that will not warp, sag, or deform in use. b. Provide filter/breather for enclosed outdoor luminaires. 6. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps. Locate labels where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place. a. Label shall include the following lamp characteristics: 1) "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type. 2) Lamp diameter, shape, size, wattage, and coating. 3) CCT and CRI for all luminaires. 2.04 METAL FINISHES A. Variations in finishes are unacceptable in the same piece. Variations in finishes of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and if they can be and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. B. Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and - tested luminaire before shipping. Match finish process and color of support materials. Technical Specifications 16500-5 Interior and Exterior Lighting 2.05 LUMINAIRE FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS A. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as luminaire. B. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod. C. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to luminaire, line voltage, and equipment with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug. 2.06 LIGHTING CONTROL A. Photocell: 1. Automatic ON/OFF switching photo control. 2. Housing: Self-contained, die-cast aluminum, unaffected by moisture, vibration, or temperature changes. 3. Setting: ON at dusk and OFF at dawn. 4. Time delay feature to prevent false switching. 5. Field adjustable to control operating levels. 6. Manufacturers: a. Tork. b. Paragon Electric Company. B. Occupancy Sensors: 1. Refer to Drawing for occupancy sensor manufacturer and products. 2. General: a. Sensors shall be capable of operating normally with the specified lamp systems. b. Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when coverage area is occupied, and turn lights off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes. c. Coverage of sensors shall remain constant after sensitivity control has been set. No automatic reduction shall occur in coverage due to cycling of air conditioner or heating fans. d. Sensors shall have readily accessible, user adjustable controls for time delay and sensitivity. e. In event of failure, bypass manual OVERRIDE ON key shall be provided on each sensor. When bypass is utilized, lighting shall remain on constantly or control shall divert to a wall switch until sensor is replaced. This control shall be recessed to prevent tampering. f. Units shall be designed to be mountable in standard electrical box. 2.07 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; nameplate of distributing agent will not be acceptable. B. Markings shall be clear and located to be readily visible to service personnel. Technical Specifications 16500-6 Interior and Exterior Lighting 2.08 FACTORY FINISH A. Electrical equipment shall have factory-applied painting systems which shall, as a minimum, meet the requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion-resistance test. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 LUMINAIRES A. General: 1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Provide proper hangers, pendants, and canopies as necessary for complete installation and meeting specified seismic requirements. 3. Provide additional ceiling bracing, hanger supports, and other structural reinforcements to building as required to safely mount. 4. Install plumb and level. 5. Install each luminaire outlet box with galvanized stud. B. Mounting: 1. General: a. Mounting, fastening, and environmental conditions shall be coordinated. 2. Wall Mounted: Measure mounting heights from center of mounting plate to finished floor or finished grade, whichever is applicable. 3. Pendant Mounted: a. Provide swivel type hangers and canopies to match luminaires, unless otherwise noted. b. Space single-stem hangers on continuous-row fluorescent luminaires nominally 48 inches apart. c. Provide twin-stem hangers on single luminaires. d. Measure mounting heights from bottom of luminaire to finished floor or finished grade, whichever is applicable. C. Swinging Type: Provide, at each support, safety cable capable of supporting four times vertical load from structure to luminaire. D. Unfinished Areas: Locate luminaires to avoid conflict with other building systems or blockage of luminaire light output. 1. Fixture Suspension: Provide 1/4-inch threaded steel hanger rods. Scissor type hangers not permitted. 2. Attachment to Steel Beams: Provide flanged beam clips and straight or angled hangers. E. Building Exterior: Flush-mounted back box and concealed conduit, unless otherwise indicated. F. Grounding: Ground noncurrent-carrying parts of equipment including luminaires, mounting arms, brackets, and metallic enclosures as specified in Section 16450, Grounding. Where copper grounding conductor is connected to a metal other than copper, provide specially treated or lined connectors suitable for this purpose. Technical Specifications 16500-7 Interior and Exterior Lighting 3.02 LIGHTING CONTROL A. Outdoor Luminaires: Photocells switch luminaires ON at dusk and OFF at dawn. B. Occupancy Sensors: Locate and aim sensors in correct location required for complete and proper volumetric coverage within range of coverage(s) of controlled areas per manufacturer's recommendations. Rooms shall have 90 to 100 percent coverage to completely cover controlled area to accommodate all occupancy habits of single or multiple occupants at any location within room(s). Locations and quantities of sensors shown on Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate only rooms which are to be provided with sensors. Provide additional sensors if required to properly and completely cover respective room. 3.03 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNIT A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Provide permanent circuit connections with conduit and wire. C. Connect to branch circuit feeding normal lighting in area ahead of all local switches. D. Provide separate circuit wiring to luminaire. 3.04 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. Occupancy Sensors: Furnish manufacturer's representative at Job Site to inspect installation, test unit, and put into service. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Upon completion of installation, verify equipment is properly installed, connected, and adjusted. Conduct an operating test to show equipment operates in accordance with the requirements of this section. B. Coordinate lighting and controls installation and testing with commissioning. 3.06 CLEANING A. Remove labels and markings, except UL listing mark. B. Wipe luminaires inside and out to remove construction dust. C. Clean luminaire plastic lenses with antistatic cleaners only. D. Touch up painted surfaces of luminaires with matching paint ordered from manufacturer. E. Replace defective lamps at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 16500-8 Interior and Exterior Lighting SECTION 16940 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ANALYSIS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 2. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): a. C57.12.00, Standard General Requirements for Liquid-Immersed Distribution, Power, and Regulating Transformers. b. 242, Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems. c. 399, Recommended Practice for Industrial and Commercial Power System Analysis. 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): Z535.4, Product Safety Signs and Labels. 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). b. 70E, Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace. 5. Occupational Safety and Health Standards (OSHA): 29 CFR, Part 1910 Subpart S, Electrical. 1.02 SCOPE A. The Contractor shall perform the following: 1. Data collection required to complete the Power System Study requirements specified herein for short circuit and coordination studies. 2. Data collection information includes, but is not limited to, equipment types and nameplate data; all services and feeders including size and type of conductors, conduit types, and lengths; overcurrent protection device information including actual catalog numbers, ratings, and available trip settings; transformer information including type, connections, power ratings, and impedance; load nameplate data. 3. Prepare a Power System Study Report that includes short circuit and coordination studies for switchboards, motor control centers, panel boards, and other applicable new power system elements. 4. Initially set protective devices to maximum settings during equipment installation, or as recommended by manufacturer. 5. Adjust protective device settings based on Power System Study Report results prior to Project Substantial Completion. 6. Install arc flash warning labels on switchgear, motor control centers, panel boards, VFD's, disconnect switches, and other applicable new power system elements prior to Project Substantial Completion. 1.03 POWER SYSTEM STUDY A. General: 1. Perform studies using SKM Power Tools for Windows or equivalent. Technical Specifications 16940-1 Electrical Systems Analysis 2. Perform complete fault calculations for each source combination, which may include present and future power company supply circuits, large motors, or generators. 3. Utilize data for study obtained from Contractor's field investigation of system configuration, wiring information, and equipment. 4. Existing System and Equipment: a. Extent of existing system to be included in study is limited to system elements that affect new system and equipment. b. Include fault contribution of existing motors and equipment in study. c. Include impedance elements that affect new system and equipment. d. Include protective devices in series with new equipment. 5. Device coordination time-current curves for low voltage distribution system; include individual protective device time-current characteristics. B. Short Circuit Study 1. General: a. Prepare in accordance with IEEE 399. b. Use cable impedances based on copper conductors, except where aluminum conductors are specified or shown. c. Use bus impedances based on copper bus bars, except where aluminum bus bars are specified or shown. d. Use cable and bus resistances calculated at 25 degrees C. e. Use cable reactances based on use of typical dimensions of specified conductors. f. Use transformer impedances 92.5 percent of"nominal" impedance based on tolerances specified in IEEE C57.12.00. 2. Provide: a. Calculation methods and assumptions. b. Typical calculation. c. Tabulations of calculated quantities. d. Results, conclusions, and recommendations. e. Selected base per unit quantities. f. One-line diagrams. g. Source impedance data, including electric utility system and motor fault contribution characteristics. h. Impedance diagrams. i. Zero-sequence impedance diagrams. 3. Calculate short circuit interrupting and momentary (when applicable) duties for an assumed three-phase bolted fault at each: a. Electric utility's supply termination point. b. Low-voltage switchgear. c. Motor control centers. d. Branch circuit panelboards. e. Future load contributions as shown on one-line diagram. 4. Verify: a. Equipment and protective devices are applied within their ratings. b. Adequacy of switchgear, motor control center, and panelboard bus bars to withstand short circuit stresses. c. Adequacy of transformer windings to withstand short circuit stresses. d. Cable sizes for ability to withstand short circuit heating, in addition to normal load currents. Technical Specifications 16940-2 Electrical Systems Analysis 5. Tabulations: a. General Data: 1) Short circuit reactances of rotating machines. 2) Cable and conduit material data. 3) Bus data. 4) Transformer data. 5) Circuit resistance and reactance values. b. Short Circuit Data for each source combination: 1) Fault impedances. 2) X to R ratios. 3) Asymmetry factors. 4) Motor contributions. 5) Short circuit kVA. 6) Symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents. c. Equipment Evaluation: 1) Equipment bus bracing, equipment short circuit rating, transformer, cable, busway. 2) Maximum fault current available. 6. Written Summary: a. Scope of studies performed. b. Explanation of bus and branch numbering system. c. Prevailing conditions. d. Selected equipment deficiencies. e. Results of short circuit study. f. Comments or suggestions. 7. Suggest changes and additions to equipment rating and/or characteristics. 8. Notify Owner in writing of existing circuit protective devices improperly rated for new fault conditions. 9. Revise data for"as-installed" condition. C. Protective Device Coordination Study 1. General: a. Prepare in accordance with IEEE 242. b. Proposed protective device coordination time-current curves for distribution system, graphically displayed on conventional log-log curve sheets. c. Provide separate curve sheets for phase and ground fault coordination for each scenario. d. Each curve sheet to have title and one-line diagram that applies to specific portion of system associated with time-current curves on that sheet. Limit number of devices shown to four to six. e. Identify device associated with each curve by manufacturer type, function, and, if applicable, recommended tap, time delay, instantaneous and other settings recommended. f. Terminate device characteristic curves at a point reflecting maximum symmetrical or asymmetrical fault current to which device is exposed. g. Apply motor protection methods that comply with NFPA 70. 2. Plot Characteristics on Curve Sheets: a. Electric utility's relays. b. Electric utility's fuses including manufacturer's minimum melt, total clearing, tolerance, and damage bands. Technical Specifications 16940-3 Electrical Systems Analysis c. Low-voltage fuses including manufacturer's minimum melt, total clearing, tolerance, and damage bands. d. Low-voltage equipment circuit breaker trip devices, including manufacturers tolerance bands. e. Pertinent transformer full-load currents at 100 percent. f. Transformer magnetizing inrush currents. g. Transformer damage curves; appropriate for system operation and location. h. ANSI transformer withstand parameters. i. Significant symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents. j. Motor overload relay settings for motors greater than 40 horsepower. k. Ground fault protective device settings. I. Other system load protective devices for largest branch circuit and feeder circuit breaker in each motor control center. 3. Primary Protective Device Settings for Delta-Wye Connected Transformer: a. Secondary Line-to-Ground Fault Protection: Primary protective device operating band within transformer's characteristics curve, including a point equal to 58 percent of IEEE C57.12.00 withstand point. b. Secondary Line-To-Line Faults: 16 percent current margin between primary protective device and associated secondary device characteristic curves. 4. Tabulate Recommended Circuit Breaker Settings: a. Adjustable pickups. b. Adjustable time-current characteristics. c. Adjustable time delays. d. Adjustable instantaneous pickups. e. 12t In/Out. f. Zone interlocking. g. Electronic settings data file. 5. Written Summary: a. Scope of studies performed. b. Summary of protective device coordination methodology. c. Prevailing conditions. d. Selected equipment deficiencies. e. Results of coordination study. f. Appendix of complete relay and circuit breaker electronic setting files. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 2.01 ARC FLASH WARNING LABELS A. Per NFPA 70E. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Adjust relay and protective device settings according to values established by coordination study. Technical Specifications 16940-4 Electrical Systems Analysis B. Make modifications to equipment as required to accomplish conformance with short circuit and protective device coordination studies. C. Notify Engineer in writing of required major equipment modifications. D. Install arc flash warning labels on equipment as required by code. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 16940-5 Electrical Systems Analysis SECTION 16950 ELECTRICAL TESTING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES A. The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this section: 1. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): a. 43, Recommended Practice for Testing Insulating Resistance of Rotating Machinery. b. 81, Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System. c. C2, National Electrical Safety Code. d. C37.20.1, Standard for Metal-Enclosed Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker Switchgear. e. C62.33, Standard Test Specifications for Varistor Surge-Protective Devices. 2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): a. AB 4, Guidelines for Inspection and Preventive Maintenance of Molded Case Circuit Breakers Used in Commercial and Industrial Applications. b. PB 2, Deadfront Distribution Switchboards. 3. InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA): ATS, Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems. 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. 70, National Electrical Code (NEC). b. 70B, Recommended Practice for Electrical Equipment Maintenance. c. 70E, Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace. d. 101, Life Safety Code. 5. National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies (NICET). 6. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): CFR 29, Part 1910, Occupational Safety and Health Standards. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: 1. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. 2. Submit 30 days prior to performing inspections or tests: a. Schedule for performing inspection and tests. b. List of references to be used for each test. c. Sample copy of equipment and materials inspection form(s). d. Sample copy of individual device test form. e. Sample copy of individual system test form. 3. Energization Plan: Prior to initial energization of electrical distribution equipment; include the following: a. Owner's representative sign-off form for complete and accurate arc flash labeling and proper protective device settings for equipment to be energized. Technical Specifications 16950-1 Electrical Testing b. Staged sequence of initial energization of electrical equipment. c. Lock-Out-Tag-Out plan for each stage of the progressive energization. d. Barricading, signage, and communication plan notifying personnel of newly energized equipment. 4. Submit test or inspection reports and certificates for each electrical item tested within 30 days after completion of test: 5. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. After test or inspection reports and certificates have been reviewed by Engineer and returned, insert a copy of each in Operation and Maintenance Manual. 6. Programmable Settings: At completion of Performance Demonstration Test, submit final hardcopy printout and electronic files on compact disc of as-left set points, programs, and device configuration files for: a. Intelligent electronic devices (IED's). b. Variable frequency drives. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Firm Qualifications: 1. Corporately and financially independent organization functioning as an unbiased testing authority. 2. Professionally independent of manufacturers, suppliers, and installers of electrical equipment and systems being tested. 3. Employer of engineers and technicians regularly engaged in testing and inspecting of electrical equipment, installations, and systems. 4. Supervising engineer accredited as Certified Electrical Test Technologist by NICET or NETA and having a minimum of 5 years' testing experience on similar projects. 5. Technicians certified by NICET or NETA. 6. Assistants and apprentices assigned to Project at ratio not to exceed two certified to one noncertified assistant or apprentice. 7. In compliance with OSHA CFR 29, Part 1910.7 criteria for accreditation of testing laboratories or a full member company of NETA. B. Test equipment shall have an operating accuracy equal to or greater than requirements established by NETA ATS. C. Test instrument calibration shall be in accordance with NETA ATS. 1.04 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Perform inspection and electrical tests after equipment listed herein has been installed. B. Equipment will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. C. Perform tests with apparatus de-energized whenever feasible. D. Inspection and electrical tests on energized equipment shall be: 1. Scheduled with Engineer prior to de-energization. 2. Minimized to avoid extended period of interruption to the site's equipment. Technical Specifications 16950-2 Electrical Testing E. Notify Engineer at least 24 hours prior to performing tests on energized electrical equipment. F. Manufacturer's Services: The services of qualified manufacturer's representatives have been specified for testing under certain specification sections. Coordinate and employ those services as required to provide complete testing in accordance with this section and the manufacturer's recommendations. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Tests and inspections shall establish: 1. Electrical equipment is operational within industry and manufacturer's tolerances and standards. 2. Installation operates properly. 3. Equipment is suitable for energization. 4. Installation conforms to requirements of Contract Documents and NFPA 70, NFPA 70E, NFPA 101, and IEEE C2. B. Perform inspection and testing in accordance with NETA ATS, industry standards, and manufacturer's recommendations. C. Set, test, and calibrate circuit breakers, fuses, and other applicable devices in accordance with values established by short circuit and coordination studies as specified in Section 16940, Electrical Systems Analysis. D. Adjust mechanisms and moving parts of equipment for free mechanical movement. E. Adjust and set electromechanical electronic relays and sensors to correspond to operating conditions, or as recommended by manufacturer. F. Verify nameplate data for conformance to Contract Documents and approved Submittals. G. Realign equipment not properly aligned and correct unlevelness. H. Properly anchor electrical equipment found to be inadequately anchored. I. Tighten accessible bolted connections, including wiring connections, with calibrated torque wrench/screw driver to manufacturer's recommendations, or as otherwise specified in NETA ATS. J. Clean contaminated surfaces with cleaning solvents as recommended by manufacturer. K. Provide proper lubrication of applicable moving parts. Technical Specifications 16950-3 Electrical Testing L. Inform Engineer of working clearances not in accordance with NFPA 70. M. Investigate and repair or replace: 1. Electrical items that fail tests. 2. Active components not operating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Damaged electrical equipment. N. Electrical Enclosures: 1. Remove foreign material and moisture from enclosure interior. 2. Vacuum and wipe clean enclosure interior. 3. Remove corrosion found on metal surfaces. 4. Repair or replace, as determined by Engineer, door and panel sections having dented surfaces. 5. Repair or replace, as determined by Engineer poor fitting doors and panel sections. 6. Repair or replace improperly operating latching, locking, or interlocking devices. 7. Replace missing or damaged hardware. 8. Finish: a. Provide matching paint and touch up scratches and mars. b. If required because of extensive damage, as determined by Engineer, refinish entire assembly. O. Replace fuses and circuit breakers that do not conform to size and type required by the Contract Documents or approved Submittals. 3.02 CHECKOUT AND STARTUP A. Voltage Field Test: 1. Check voltage at point of termination of power company supply system to Project when installation is essentially complete and is in operation. 2. Check voltage amplitude and balance between phases for loaded and unloaded conditions. 3. Unbalance Corrections: a. Make written request to power company to correct condition if balance (as defined by NEMA) exceeds 1 percent, or if voltage varies throughout the day and from loaded to unloaded condition more than plus or minus 4 percent of nominal. b. Obtain written certification from responsible power company official that voltage variations and unbalance are within their normal standards if corrections are not made. B. Equipment Line Current Tests: 1. Check line current in each phase for each piece of equipment. 2. Make line current check after power company has made final adjustments to supply voltage magnitude or balance. 3. If phase current for a piece of equipment is above rated nameplate current, prepare Equipment Line Phase Current Report that identifies cause of problem and corrective action taken. Technical Specifications 16950-4 Electrical Testing 3.03 SWITCHBOARD ASSEMBLIES A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: 1. Insulator damage and contaminated surfaces. 2. Proper barrier and shutter installation and operation. 3. Proper operation of indicating devices. 4. Improper blockage of air-cooling passages. 5. Proper operation of drawout elements. 6. Integrity and contamination of bus insulation system. 7. Check door and device interlocking system by: a. Closure attempt of device when door is in OPEN position. b. Opening attempt of door when device is in ON or CLOSED position. 8. Check key interlocking systems for: a. Key captivity when device is in ON or CLOSED position. b. Key removal when device is in ON or CLOSED position. c. Closure attempt of device when key has been removed. d. Correct number of keys in relationship to number of lock cylinders. e. Existence of Other Keys Capable of Operating Lock Cylinders: Destroy duplicate sets of keys. 9. Check nameplates for proper identification of: a. Equipment title and tag number with latest one-line diagram. b. All devices 10. Verify fuse and circuit breaker ratings, sizes, and types conform to those specified. 11. Check bus and cable connections for high resistance by calibrated torque wrench applied to bolted joints. a. Bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.12, unless otherwise specified by manufacturer. 12. Check operation and sequencing of electrical and mechanical interlock systems by: a. Closure attempt for locked open devices. b. Opening attempt for locked closed devices. c. Key exchange to operate devices in OFF-NORMAL positions. 13. Verify performance of each control device and feature. 14. Control Wiring: a. Compare wiring to local and remote control and protective devices with elementary diagrams. b. Proper conductor lacing and bundling. c. Proper conductor identification. d. Proper conductor lugs and connections. 15. Exercise active components. 16. Perform phasing check on double-ended equipment to ensure proper bus phasing from each source. 17. Verify arc exhaust system is complete and meets manufacturer's requirements for arc-resistant switchgear. B. Electrical Tests: 1. Insulation Resistance Tests: a. Applied megohmmeter do voltage in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.1. b. Each phase of each bus section. Technical Specifications 16950-5 Electrical Testing c. Phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground for 1 minute. d. With breakers open. e. With breakers closed. f. Control wiring except that connected to solid state components. g. Insulation resistance values equal to, or greater than, ohmic values established by manufacturer. 2. Control Wiring: a. Apply secondary voltage to control power and potential circuits. b. Check voltage levels at each point on terminal boards and each device terminal. 3. Operational Test: a. Initiate control devices. b. Check proper operation of control system in each section. 3.04 PANELBOARDS A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Include the following inspections and related work: 1. Inspect for defects and physical damage, labeling, and nameplate compliance with requirements of up-to-date drawings and panelboard schedules. 2. Exercise and perform operational tests of mechanical components and other operable devices in accordance with manufacturer's instruction manual. 3. Check panelboard mounting, area clearances, and alignment and fit of components. 4. Check tightness of bolted electrical connections with calibrated torque wrench. Refer to manufacturer's instructions for proper torque values. 5. Perform visual and mechanical inspection for overcurrent protective devices. B. Electrical Tests: Include the following items performed in accordance with manufacturer's instruction: 1. Ground continuity test ground bus to system ground. 3.05 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: 1. Physical and insulator damage. 2. Proper winding connections. 3. Bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.12, unless otherwise specified by manufacturer. 4. Defective wiring. 5. Proper operation of fans, indicators, and auxiliary devices. 6. Removal of shipping brackets, fixtures, or bracing. 7. Free and properly installed resilient mounts. 8. Cleanliness and improper blockage of ventilation passages. 9. Verify tap-changer is set at correct ratio for rated output voltage under normal operating conditions. 10. Verify proper secondary voltage phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground after energization and prior to loading. B. Electrical Tests: 1. Insulation Resistance Tests: Technical Specifications 16950-6 Electrical Testing a. Applied megohmmeter do voltage in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.5 for each: 1) Winding-to-winding. 2) Winding-to-ground. b. Test Duration: 10 minutes with resistances tabulated at 30 seconds, 1 minute, and 10 minutes. c. Results temperature corrected in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.14. d. Temperature corrected insulation resistance values equal to, or greater than, ohmic values established by manufacturer. e. Insulation resistance test results to compare within 1 percent of adjacent windings. 2. Perform tests and adjustments for fans, controls, and alarm functions as suggested by manufacturer. 3.06 LOW VOLTAGE CABLES, 600 VOLTS MAXIMUM A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: 1. Inspect each individual exposed power cable No. 4 and larger for: a. Physical damage. b. Proper connections in accordance with single-line diagram. c. Cable bends not in conformance with manufacturer's minimum allowable bending radius where applicable. d. Color coding conformance with specification. e. Proper circuit identification. 2. Mechanical Connections for: a. Proper lug type for conductor material. b. Proper lug installation. c. Bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.12, unless otherwise specified by manufacturer. 3. Shielded Cables for: a. Proper shield grounding. b. Proper terminations. c. Proper circuit identification. 4. Control Cables for: a. Proper termination. b. Proper circuit identification. 5. Cables Terminated Through Window Type CTs: Verify neutrals and grounds are terminated for correct operation of protective devices. B. Electrical Tests for Conductors No. 4 and Larger: 1. Insulation Resistance Tests: a. Utilize 1,000-volt do megohmmeter for 600-volt insulated conductors. b. Test each conductor with respect to ground and to adjacent conductors for 1 minute. c. Evaluate ohmic values by comparison with conductors of same length and type. d. Investigate values less than 50 megohms. 2. Continuity test by ohmmeter method to ensure proper cable connections. Technical Specifications 16950-7 Electrical Testing 3.07 SAFETY SWITCHES, 600 VOLTS MAXIMUM A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: 1. Proper blade pressure and alignment. 2. Proper operation of switch operating handle. 3. Adequate mechanical support for each fuse. 4. Proper contact-to-contact tightness between fuse clip and fuse. 5. Cable connection bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.12. 6. Proper phase barrier material and installation. 7. Verify fuse sizes and types correspond to one-line diagram or approved Submittals. 8. Perform mechanical operational test and verify mechanical interlocking system operation and sequencing. 3.08 MOLDED AND INSULATED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. General: Inspection and testing limited to circuit breakers rated 100 amperes and larger and to motor circuit protector breakers rated 100 amperes and larger. B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: 1. Proper mounting. 2. Proper conductor size. 3. Feeder designation according to nameplate and one-line diagram. 4. Cracked casings. 5. Connection bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.12. 6. Operate breaker to verify smooth operation. 7. Compare frame size and trip setting with circuit breaker schedules or one-line diagram. 8. Verify that terminals are suitable for 75 degrees C rated insulated conductors. C. Electrical Tests: 1. Insulation Resistance Tests: a. Utilize 1,000-volt do megohmmeter for 480-volt and 600-volt circuit breakers. b. Pole-to-pole and pole-to-ground with breaker contacts opened for 1 minute. c. Pole-to-pole and pole-to-ground with breaker contacts closed for 1 minute. d. Test values to comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.1. 2. Contact Resistance Tests: a. Contact resistance in microhms across each pole. b. Investigate deviation of 50 percent or more from adjacent poles and similar breakers. 3. Primary Current Injection Test to Verify: a. Long-time minimum pickup and delay. b. Short-time pickup and delay. c. Ground fault pickup and delay. d. Instantaneous pickup by run-up or pulse method. e. Trip characteristics of adjustable trip breakers shall be within manufacturer's published time-current characteristic tolerance band, including adjustment factors. Technical Specifications 16950-8 Electrical Testing f. Trip times shall be within limits established by NEMA AB 4, Table 5-3. Alternatively, use NETA ATS, Table 100.7. g. Instantaneous pickup value shall be within values established by NEMA AB 4, Table 5-4. Alternatively, use NETA ATS, Table 100.8. 3.09 LOW VOLTAGE POWER CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: 1. Proper mounting, cell fit, and element alignment. 2. Proper operation of racking interlocks. 3. Check for damaged arc chutes. 4. Proper contact condition. 5. Bolt torque level in accordance with NETA ATS, Table 100.12. 6. Perform mechanical operational and contact alignment tests in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 7. Check operation of closing and tripping functions of trip devices by activating ground fault relays, undervoltage shunt relays, and other auxiliary protective devices. 8. Verify primary and secondary contact wipe, gap setting, and other dimensions vital to breaker operation are correct. 9. Check charging motor, motor brushes, associated mechanism, and limit switches for proper operation and condition. 10. Check operation of electrically operated breakers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 11. Check for adequate lubrication on contact, moving, and sliding surfaces. B. Electrical Tests: 1. Insulation Resistance Tests: a. Utilize 1,000-volt do megohmmeter for 480-volt and 600-volt circuit breakers. b. Pole-to-pole and pole-to-ground with breaker contacts opened for 1 minute. c. Pole-to-pole and pole-to-ground with breaker contacts closed for 1 minute. d. Test values to comply with NETA ATS, Table 100.1. 2. Contact Resistance Tests: a. Contact resistance in microhms across each pole. b. Investigate deviation of 50 percent or more from adjacent poles and similar breakers. 3. Primary Current Injection Test to Verify: a. Long-time minimum pickup and delay. b. Short-time pickup and delay. c. Ground fault pickup and delay. d. Instantaneous pickup by run-up or pulse method. e. Trip characteristic when adjusted to setting sheet parameters shall be within manufacturer's published time-current tolerance band. 3.10 INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS A. Visual and mechanical inspection: 1. Compare equipment nameplate data with the Contract Documents. 2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Technical Specifications 16950-9 Electrical Testing 3. Verify correct connection of transformers with system requirements. 4. Verify that adequate clearances exist between primary and secondary circuit wiring. 5. Verify the unit is clean. 6. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following methods: a. Use of low-resistance ohmmeter. b. Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque wrench method: 1) Refer to manufacturer's instructions for proper foot-pound levels or NETA ATS tables. 7. Verify that all required grounding and shorting connections provide contact. 8. Verify correct operation of transformer withdrawal mechanism and grounding operation. 9. Verify correct primary and secondary fuse sizes for voltage transformers. 10. Verify appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts and on moving and sliding surfaces. 11. Verify instrument transformer polarities match the 3-line diagrams. B. Electrical tests - current transformers: 1. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low-resistance ohmmeter. 2. Perform insulation-resistance test of each current transformer and its secondary wiring with respect to ground at 1,000 VDC for 1 minute: a. For solid state devices that cannot tolerate the applied voltage, follow the manufacturer's recommendation. 3. Perform a polarity test of each current transformer in accordance with IEEE C57.13.1. 4. Perform a ratio verification test using the voltage or current method in accordance with IEEE C57.13.1. 5. Perform an excitation test on current transformers used for relaying applications in with accordance with IEEE C57.13.1. 6. Measure current circuit burdens at transformer terminals in accordance with IEEE C57.13.1. 7. Perform an excitation test on transformers used for relaying applications in accordance with IEEE C57.13.1. 8. When applicable perform insulation-resistance tests on the primary winding with the secondary grounded: a. Test voltages shall be in accordance with NETA ATS tables. 9. When applicable perform dielectric withstand tests on the primary winding with the secondary grounded: a. Test voltages shall be in accordance with NETA ATS tables. 10. Perform power-factor or dissipation-factor tests in accordance with test equipment manufacturer's published data. 11. Verify that current transformer secondary circuits are grounded and have only 1 grounding point in accordance with IEEE C57.13.3: a. That grounding point should be located as specified by the Engineer in the Contract Documents. C. Electrical tests - voltage transformers: Technical Specifications 16950-10 Electrical Testing 1. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low-resistance ohmmeter. 2. Perform insulation-resistance tests winding-to-winding and winding-to-ground: a. Test voltage shall be applied for 1 minute in accordance with NETA ATS requirements. b. For solid state devices that cannot tolerate the applied voltage, follow the manufacturer's recommendation. 3. Perform a polarity test on each voltage transformer to verify the polarity marks on H,-X, relationship as applicable. 4. Perform a turns ratio test on all tap positions. 5. Measure voltage circuit burdens at transformer terminals. 6. Perform a dielectric withstand test on the primary windings with the secondary windings grounded: a. The dielectric voltage shall be in accordance with NETA ATS tables. b. Apply the test voltage for 1 minute. 7. Perform power-factor or dissipation-factor tests in accordance with test equipment manufacturers published data. 8. Verify that voltage transformer secondary circuits are grounded and have only 1 grounding point in accordance with IEEE C57.13.3: a. That grounding point should be located as specified by the Engineer in the Contract Documents. D. Test values: 1. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections: a. Investigate values which deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. 2. Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published data: a. Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer's published data. 3. Insulation-resistance values of instrument transformers shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published data: a. Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer's published data. 4. Polarity results shall agree with transformer markings. 5. Ratio errors shall be in accordance with IEEE C57.13. 6. Excitation results for current transformers shall match the curve supplied by the manufacturer or be in accordance with IEEE C57.13.1. 7. Measured burdens shall be compared to instrument transformer ratings. 8. If no evidence of distress or insulation failure is observed by the end of the total time of voltage application during the dielectric withstand test, the current transformer primary winding is considered to have passed the test. 9. Power-factor or dissipation-factor values shall be compared to manufacturer's published data: a. In the absence manufacturer's published data the comparison shall be made to similar breakers. 10. Test results shall indicate that the circuits have only 1 grounding point. 3.11 GROUNDING SYSTEMS A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Technical Specifications 16950-11 Electrical Testing 1. Equipment and circuit grounds in electrical assemblies for proper connection and tightness. 2. Ground bus connections in electrical assemblies for proper termination and tightness. 3. Effective transformer core and equipment grounding. 4. Accessible connections to grounding electrodes for proper fit and tightness. 5. Accessible exothermic-weld grounding connections to verify that molds were fully filled and proper bonding was obtained. B. Electrical Tests: 1. Fall-of-Potential Test: a. In accordance with IEEE 81, Section 8.2.1.5 for measurement of main ground system's resistance. b. Main ground electrode system resistance to ground to be no greater than 1 ohm. 2. Two-Point Direct Method Test: a. In accordance with IEEE 81, Section 8.2.1.1 for measurement of ground resistance between main ground system, equipment frames, and system neutral and derived neutral points. b. Equipment ground resistance shall not exceed main ground system resistance by 0.25 ohm. 3.12 AC INDUCTION MOTORS A. General: Inspection and testing limited to motors rated 5 horsepower and larger. B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: 1. Proper electrical and grounding connections. 2. Shaft alignment. 3. Blockage of ventilating air passageways. 4. Operate motor and check for: a. Excessive mechanical and electrical noise. b. Overheating. c. Correct rotation. d. Check vibration detectors, resistance temperature detectors, or motor inherent protectors for functionability and proper operation. e. Excessive vibration, in excess of values in NETA ATS, Table 100.10. 5. Check operation of space heaters. C. Electrical Tests: 1. Insulation Resistance Tests: a. In accordance with IEEE 43 at test voltages established by NETA ATS, Table 100.1 for: 1) Motors 200 horsepower and less for 1-minute duration with resistances tabulated at 30 seconds and 60 seconds. b. Insulation resistance values equal to, or greater than, ohmic values established by manufacturers. 2. Insulation resistance test on insulated bearings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Measure running current and voltage, and evaluate relative to load conditions and nameplate full-load amperes. Technical Specifications 16950-12 Electrical Testing 3.13 MOTOR STARTERS, LOW VOLTAGE: A. Visual and mechanical inspection: 1. Compare equipment nameplate information with the Contract Documents. 2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. 3. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding. 4. Verify the unit is clean. 5. Inspect contactors: a. Verify mechanical operation. b. Verify contact gap, wipe, alignment, and pressure are in accordance with manufacturer's published data. 6. Motor-running protection: a. Verify overload element rating is correct for its application. b. If motor running protection is provided by fuses, verify correct fuse rating. 7. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following methods: a. Use of low-resistance ohmmeter. b. Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque wrench method: 1) Refer to manufacturer's instructions for proper foot-pound levels or NETA ATS tables. 8. Lubrication requirements: a. Verify appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts. b. Verify appropriate lubrication on moving and sliding surfaces. B. Electrical tests: 1. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low-resistance ohmmeter. 2. Perform insulation-resistance tests for 1 minute on each pole, phase-to-phase and phase to ground with the starter closed, and across each open pole for 1 minute: a. Test voltage shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published data. b. Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer's published data. 3. Perform insulation-resistance tests on control wiring with respect to ground. Applied potential shall be 500 VDC for 300-volt rated cable and 1,000 VDC for 600-volt rated cable. Apply the test voltage for 1 minute: a. For solid state devices that cannot tolerate the applied voltage, follow the manufacturer's recommendation. 4. Test motor protection devices in accordance with manufacturer's published data. 5. Test circuit breakers as specified in this Section. 6. Perform operational tests by initiating control devices. C. Test values: 1. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections: a. Investigate values which deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. 2. Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published data: a. Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer's published data. Technical Specifications 16950-13 Electrical Testing 3. Insulation-resistance values shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published data: a. Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer's published data. b. Investigate values of insulation-resistance less than the allowable minimum. 4. Insulation-resistance values of control wiring shall not be less than 2megohms. 5. Motor protection parameters shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published data. 6. Circuit breaker test results shall as specified in this Section. 7. Control devices shall perform in accordance with system design requirements. 3.14 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEMS A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: 1. Proper operation of indicating and monitoring devices. 2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. 3. Improper blockage of air-cooling passages. 4. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding. 5. Integrity and contamination of bus insulation system. 6. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance. 7. Motor running protection: a. Verify drive overcurrent setpoints are correct for their application. b. If drive is used to operate multiple motors, verify individual overload element ratings are correct for their application c. Apply minimum and maximum speed setpoints. Verify setpoints are within limitations of the load coupled to the motor. 8. Check nameplates for proper identification of: a. Equipment title and tag number with latest one-line diagram. b. All devices. 9. Verify fuse and circuit breaker sizes and types conform to Contract Documents. 10. Control Wiring: a. Compare wiring to local and remote control, and protective devices with elementary diagrams. b. Check for proper conductor lacing and bundling. c. Check for proper conductor identification. d. Check for proper conductor lugs and connections. e. Verify correct connections of circuit boards, wiring, disconnects, and ribbon cables. 11. Exercise active components. B. Electrical Tests: 1. Measure harmonic distortion for both voltage and current to verify if within specification limits. 2. Measure peak voltage at motor terminations to verify if less than 90 percent of motor insulation dielectric withstand level. 3. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with low- resistance ohmmeter, if applicable. 4. Test the motor overload relay elements by injecting primary current through the overload circuit and monitoring trip time of the overload element. Technical Specifications 16950-14 Electrical Testing 5. Test input circuit breaker by primary injection. 6. Perform insulation resistance tests on all control wiring with respect to ground. Applied potential shall be 500 volts DC for 300-volt rated cable and 1000 volts do for 600-volt rated cable. Test duration shall be one minute. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for units with solid-state components. 7. Test for the following parameters in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations: a. Input phase loss protection b. Input overvoltage protection c. Output phase rotation d. Overtemperature protection e. DC overvoltage protection f. Over frequency protection g. Drive overload protection h. Fault alarm outputs 8. Operational test by initiating control devices to affect proper operation. 9. Slowly vary drive speed between minimum and maximum. Observe motor and load for unusual noise or vibration. 3.15 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES, LOW VOLTAGE A. Visual and mechanical inspection: 1. Compare equipment nameplate data with the Contract Documents. 2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. 3. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances. 4. Verify the arresters are clean. 5. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following methods: a. Use of low-resistance ohmmeter. b. Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by the calibrated torque wrench method: 1) Refer to manufacturer's instructions for proper foot-pound levels or NETA ATS tables. 6. Verify that the ground lead on each device is individually attached to a ground bus or ground electrode. 7. Verify that stroke counter is correctly mounted and electrically connected, if applicable. 8. Record stroke counter reading. B. Electrical tests: 1. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low- resistance ohmmeter. 2. Perform an insulation-resistance test on each arrester, phase terminal- to- ground: a. Apply voltage in accordance with manufacturers published data. b. Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer's published data. 3. Test grounding connection as specified in this Section. C. Test values: 1. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections: Technical Specifications 16950-15 Electrical Testing a. Investigate values which deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. 2. Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published data: a. Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer's published data. 3. Insulation-resistance values shall be in accordance with manufacturer's published data: a. Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer's published data. b. Investigate insulation values less than the allowable minimum. 4. Resistance between the arrester ground terminal and the ground system shall be less than 0.5 ohm. 3.16 FIBER-OPTIC CABLES A. Visual and mechanical inspection: 1. Compare cable, connector, and splice data with the Contract Documents. 2. Inspect cable and connections for physical and mechanical damage. 3. Verify that all connectors and splices are correctly installed. B. Electrical tests: 1. Perform cable length measurement, fiber fracture inspection, and construction defect inspection using an optical time domain reflectometer (OTDR): a. OTDR test performed on fiber cables less than 100 meters shall be performed with the aid of a launch cable. b. Adjust OTDR pulse width settings to a maximum setting of 1/1,OOOth of the cable length or 10nanoseconds. 2. Perform connector and splice integrity test using an optical time domain reflectometer. 3. Perform cable attenuation loss measurement with an optical power loss test set: a. Perform attenuation tests with an Optical Loss Test Set capable and calibrated to show anomalies of 0.1 dB as a minimum. b. Test multimode fibers at 850 nanometer and 1,300 nanometer. c. Test single mode fibers at 1,310 nanometer and 1,550 nanometer. 4. Perform connector and splice attenuation loss measurement from both ends of the optical cable with an optical power loss test set: a. At the conclusion of all outdoor splices at 1 location, and before they are enclosed and sealed, all splices shall be tested with OTDR at the optimal wavelengths (850 and 1,300 for multimode, 1,310 and 1,550 for single mode), in both directions. The splices shall be tested for integrity as well as attenuation. 5. Perform fiber links integrity and attenuation tests using each link shall be an OTDR and an Optical Loss Test Set: a. OTDR traces shall be from both directions on each fiber at the 2optimal wavelengths, 850nanometer, and 1,300nanometer for multimode fibers. b. Optical loss testing shall be done with handheld test sets in 1direction at the 2 optimal wavelengths for the appropriate fiber type. Test equipment shall equal or exceed the accuracy and resolution of Agilent/HP 8147 high performance OTDR. Technical Specifications 16950-16 Electrical Testing C. Test values: 1. Cable and connections shall not have been subjected to physical or mechanical damage. 2. Connectors and splices shall be installed in accordance with industry standards. 3. The optical time domain reflectometer signal should be analyzed for excessive connection, splice, or cable backscatter by viewing the reflected power/distance graph. 4. Attenuation loss measurement shall be expressed in dB/km. Losses shall be within the manufacturer's recommendations when no local site specifications are available. 5. Individual fusion splice losses shall not exceed 0.1 dB. Measurement results shall be recorded, validated by trace, and filed with the records of the respective cable runs. 3.17 NETWORK CABLE TESTING A. Visual and mechanical inspections: 1. Compare cable type and connections with that indicated on the Drawings and specified in the Specifications. 2. Inspect cable and connectors for physical and mechanical damage. 3. Verify that all connectors are correctly installed. B. Pre-testing: 1. Test individual cables before installation: a. Before physical placement of the cable, test each cable while on the spool with a LAN certification test device. b. Before the cable is installed, verify that the cable conforms to the manufacturer's attenuation specification and that no damage has been done to the cable during shipping or handling. c. The test shall be fully documented and the results submitted to the Engineer, including a hard copy of all traces, before placement of the cable. d. The Engineer shall be notified if a cable fails to meet specification and the cable shall not be installed unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. C. Electrical tests: 1. Perform cable end-to-end testing on all installed cables after installation of connectors from both ends of the cable. 2. Test shall include cable system performance tests and confirm the absence of wiring errors. D. Test results: 1. Cables shall meet or exceed TIA standards for a Category 6a installation. E. Test equipment: 1. LAN certification equipment used for the testing shall be capable of testing Category 6 cable installation to TIA proposed Level III accuracy. Tests performed shall include: a. Near end cross talk. b. Attenuation. Technical Specifications 16950-17 Electrical Testing c. Equal level far end cross talk. d. Return loss. e. Ambient noise. f. Effective cable length. g. Propagation delay. h. Continuity/loop resistance. 2. LAN certification test equipment shall be able to store and produce plots of the test results. 3. Acceptable manufacturers: The following or equal: a. Agilent Technologies, WireScope 350. 3.18 STANDBY GENERATION SYSTEMS A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: 1. Compare generator nameplate rating and connection with one-line diagram. 2. Verify circuit breaker sizes and types conform to Contract Documents. 3. Check nameplates for proper identification of equipment title and tag number with latest one-line diagram. 4. Proper operation of jacket water heaters. 5. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. 6. Improper blockage of air-cooling passages. 7. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding. 8. Integrity of engine cooling and fuel supply systems. 9. Excessive mechanical and electrical noise. 10. Proper installation of vibration isolators. 11. Proper cooling liquid type and level. 12. Proper operation of meters and instruments. 13. Verify engine-generator operation with adjustable frequency drives and power factor correction capacitors energized and operating under normal load conditions. 14. Inspect and test all enclosure related systems for proper condition and operation, including enclosure condition and finish, door operation and securing, space heating, power distribution, ventilation system, and lighting system. 15. Complete functional and performance testing of generator digital master controls as applicable. B. Electrical and Mechanical Tests: 1. Perform insulation-resistance tests according to IEEE 43. a. Machines Larger Than 150 kW: Test duration shall be 10 minutes. Calculate polarization index. 2. Test protective relay devices. 3. Verify phase rotation, phasing, and synchronized operation as required by the application. 4. Functionally test engine shutdown for low oil pressure, overtemperature, overspeed, and other protection features as applicable. 5. Verify correct functioning of the governor and regulator. 6. Cold-start test by interrupting normal power source with test load consisting of connected building load to verify: a. Transfer switch operation b. Automatic starting operation Technical Specifications 16950-18 Electrical Testing c. Operating ability of engine-generator d. Overcurrent devices capability to withstand inrush currents. 7. Vibration base-line test on generator sets rated above 250-kW for levels in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. NFPA 110 Acceptance Tests: Perform tests required by NFPA 110 that are additional to those specified here, including, but not limited to, single-step full-load pickup test. D. Battery Tests: Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's written instructions. Record individual cell voltages. 1. Measure charging voltage and voltages between available battery terminals for full-charging and float-charging conditions. Check electrolyte level and specific gravity under both conditions. 2. Test for contact integrity of all connectors. Perform an integrity load test and a capacity load test for the battery. 3. Verify acceptance of charge for each element of the battery after discharge. 4. Verify that measurements are within manufacturer's specifications. E. Battery-Charger Tests: Verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing and float- charging conditions. F. System Integrity Tests: Methodically verify proper installation, connection, and integrity of each element of engine generator system before and during system operation. Check for air, exhaust, and fluid leaks. G. Exhaust Emissions Test: Comply with applicable government test criteria. H. Voltage and Frequency Transient Stability Tests: Use recording oscilloscope to measure voltage and frequency transients for 50 and 100 percent step-load increases and decreases, and verify that performance is as specified. I. Harmonic-Content Tests: Measure harmonic content of output voltage at 25 and 100 percent of rated linear load. Verify that harmonic content is within specified limits. J. Coordinate tests with tests for transfer switches and run them concurrently. K. Leak Test: After installation, charge exhaust, coolant, and fuel systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. L. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation for generator and associated equipment. M. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 3.19 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH A. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: 1. Compare equipment nameplate data with Drawings and Specifications. Technical Specifications 16950-19 Electrical Testing 2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. 3. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and required clearances. 4. Verify that the unit is clean. 5. Verify appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts and on moving and sliding surfaces. 6. Verify that manual transfer warnings are attached and visible. 7. Verify tightness of all control connections. 8. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following methods, or both: a. Use of low-resistance ohmmeter. b. Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque-wrench method according to manufacturer's published data. 9. Perform manual transfer and retransfer operation. 10. Verify positive mechanical interlocking between normal and alternate sources. 11. Perform visual and mechanical inspection of surge arresters. 12. Inspect control power transformers. a. Inspect for physical damage, cracked insulation, broken leads, tightness of connections, defective wiring, and overall general condition. b. Verify that primary and secondary fuse or circuit-breaker ratings match Drawings. c. Verify correct functioning of drawout disconnecting contacts, grounding contacts, and interlocks. 13. Check nameplates for proper identification of: a. Equipment title and tag number with latest one-line diagram. 14. Verify circuit breaker sizes and types conform to Contract Documents. 15. Perform visual inspection of controller and associated UPS as applicable. B. Electrical Tests: 1. Perform insulation-resistance tests on all control wiring with respect to ground. 2. Verify settings and operation of control devices. 3. Calibrate and set all relays and timers. 4. Verify phase rotation, phasing, and synchronized operation. 5. Perform automatic transfer tests. 6. Verify correct operation and timing of the following functions: a. Normal source voltage-sensing and frequency-sensing relays. b. Engine start sequence. c. Time delay on transfer. d. Alternative source voltage-sensing and frequency-sensing relays. e. Automatic transfer operation. f. Interlocks and limit switch function. g. Time delay and retransfer on normal power restoration. h. Engine cool-down and shutdown feature. 7. Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with insulation-resistance tester. Include external annunciation and control circuits. Use test voltages and procedure recommended by manufacturer. Comply with manufacturer's specified minimum resistance. a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits. b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and integrity of barriers, covers, and safety features. c. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed. d. Perform manual transfer operation. Technical Specifications 16950-20 Electrical Testing 8. After energizing circuits, perform each electrical test and demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function for each switch at least three times. a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and retransfer from emergency source with normal source available. b. Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal source. c. Verify time-delay settings. d. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control settings. e. Verify proper operation with generator set controller 1/0 and digital master control 1/0. 9. Test bypass/isolation unit functional modes and related automatic transfer- switch operations. a. Perform contact-resistance test across main contacts and correct values exceeding 500 microhms and values for one pole deviating by more than 50 percent from other poles. b. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting, transfer time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and engine cool-down and shutdown. 10. Ground-Fault Tests: Coordinate with testing of ground-fault protective devices for power delivery from both sources. a. Verify grounding connections and locations and ratings of sensors. C. Coordinate tests with tests of generator and run them concurrently. D. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests. END OF SECTION Technical Specifications 16950-21 Electrical Testing